Specifications
Camshaft Bearing: Specifications
Camshaft Bearing Cap
Page 538
2. Remove the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit from the Fuel Pump Assembly as follows:
a. First, press in on the two locking tabs on the sides of the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit
b. Then, pull the unit UP and OUT of the attachment slots
^ For Type A see Figure 1
^ For Type B see Figure 2
Page 5902
Brake Lamp: Service and Repair Removal And Installation
STOP LAMP
Removal and Installation
HIGH-MOUNTED STOP LAMP
Removal 1. Remove high-mounted stop lamp access covers(3).
2. Disconnect high-mounted stop lamp electrical connector. 3. Remove high-mounted stop lamp
nuts(2). 4. Remove high-mounted stop lamp(1).
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
STOP LAMP Refer to See: Bulb Replacement.
Page 3398
4. Push out and remove the remaining journal bearings at the opposite side by lightly tapping the
flange yoke with a hammer, taking care not to
damage the journal or flange yoke hole.
NOTE: Put marks on the disassembled parts so that they can be reinstalled in their original
positions from which they were removed.
ASSEMBLY
Journal 1. Assemble the journal bearings. Apply multipurpose grease on the bearing inner surface.
NOTE: During assembly, use caution so that the needle bearings do not fall down.
2. Select new snap rings that will provide the specified play in an axial direction of the journal, and
install them. Refer to See:
Specifications/Propeller Shaft 2S1410/Snap Ring.
CAUTION: Do not reuse snap rings
Page 5832
Tachometer: Description and Operation Component Description
METER SYSTEM
TACHOMETER : Component Description
Page 4517
6. Separate upper link ball joint from steering knuckle using Tool.
Tool number : ST29020001 (J-24319-01)
7. Remove pinch bolt from steering knuckle using power tool, then separate lower link ball joint
from steering knuckle. 8. Remove steering knuckle from vehicle.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check for deformity, cracks and damage on each part, replace if
necessary. Perform ball joint inspection. Refer to See: Ball Joint/Testing and Inspection .
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Front Suspension for tightening torques.
CAUTION: Use a new cotter pin for installation of lock nut.
- When installing disc rotor on wheel hub and bearing assembly, align the marks.
NOTE: When not using the alignment mark, refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake
System/Specifications/Front Disc Brake . When installing wheel and tire, refer to See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Rotation.
Page 963
Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Low-Pressure Pipe
LOW-PRESSURE PIPE
Removal and Installation for Low-Pressure Pipe
REMOVAL 1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and
Repair/Refrigeration System . 2. Remove the low-pressure pipe.
CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipes with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the
entry of air.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Heating and Air
Conditioning/Description and Operation/Refrigeration System/Component .
CAUTION: Replace the O-ring of the high/low-pressure pipe with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it
when installing it.
- After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
Page 3177
Shift Indicator: Description and Operation System Description
METER SYSTEM
SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR : System Description
The TCM receives A/T indicator signals from the park/neutral position (PNP) switch. The TCM then
sends A/T position indicator signals to the combination meter via CAN communication lines. The
combination meter indicates the received shift position.
Service and Repair
Back Window Glass: Service and Repair
REAR WINDOW GLASS AND MOLDING
Removal and Installation
FIXED AND SLIDING REAR WINDOW GLASS
Removal 1. Remove the rear pillar finishers. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 2. If the rear window glass is to be reused, mark the body and
the glass with mating marks.
WARNING: When cutting the glass from the vehicle, always wear safety glasses and heavy gloves
to help prevent glass splinters from entering your eyes or cutting your hands.
CAUTION: When the rear window glass is to be reused, do not use a cutting knife or power cutting tool.
- Be careful not to scratch the glass when removing.
Front Suspension
Alignment: Specifications Front Suspension
Wheel Alignment
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1)
Wheelarch Height
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Wheelarch Height (Unladen*1)
Page 5364
King Cab
Page 1431
Specifications
Compression Check: Specifications
Compression Pressure
Standard...............................................................................................................................................
............. 1,520 KPa (15.5 Kg/cm2, 220 psi) / 200 rpm
Minimum...............................................................................................................................................
............ 1,324 KPa (13.5 Kg/cm2, 192 psi) / 200 rpm
Differential limit between
cylinders........................................................................................................................... 98 KPa (1.0
Kg/cm2, 14 psi) / 200 rpm
Page 2536
40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19.
NOTE:
For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF.
^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data.
41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42.
41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed.
^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service
Manual (ESM) for this procedure.
NOTE:
If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle.
IAVL can now be performed.
42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF.
^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs.
Page 5745
Oil Pressure Gauge: Description and Operation Component Description
METER SYSTEM
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE : Component Description
Page 6157
Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Front Power Window Switch
FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the front power window switch assembly from the front door finisher RH.
Refer to See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and
Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair.
2. Remove the front power window switch (1) from the power window switch finisher (2) by
releasing the tabs using suitable tool (A).
CAUTION: Wrap a cloth around suitable tools to protect components from damage.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Inspection After Removal
Brake Hose/Line: Service and Repair Inspection After Removal
Front Brake
BRAKE TUBE AND HOSE
FRONT BRAKE : Inspection
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
CAUTION: Brake tubes and hoses are important safety parts. Always disassemble the parts and
retighten their fittings, if a brake fluid leak is detected. Replace applicable part with a new one, if
damaged part is detected. 1. Check brake lines (tubes and hoses) and connections for fluid leaks,
damage, twists, deformation, contact with other parts, and loose connections.
Replace any parts as necessary. Refer to See: Diagrams.
2. While depressing brake pedal under a force of 785 N (80 kg-f, 177 lb-f) with engine running for
approximately 5 seconds, check each part for
fluid leaks.
Rear Brake
BRAKE TUBE AND HOSE
REAR BRAKE : Inspection
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
CAUTION: Brake tubes and hoses are important safety parts. Always disassemble the parts and
retighten their fittings, if a brake fluid leak is detected. Replace applicable part with a new one, if
damaged part is detected. 1. Check brake lines (tubes and hoses) and connections for fluid leaks,
damage, twists, deformation, contact with other parts, and loose connections.
Replace any parts as necessary. Refer to See: Diagrams.
2. While depressing brake pedal under a force of 785 N (80 kg-f, 177 lb-f) with engine running for
approximately 5 seconds, check each part for
fluid leaks.
Capacity Specifications
Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Capacity ...............................................................................................................................................
.................................................... 11 1/4 Qts. (10.6L)
Page 5510
CAUTION:
Make sure the rail stops are installed before releasing the vehicle.
Page 220
18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM.
The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to
use.
19. Select Next
NOTE:
If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with
Reprogramming.
Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1421 Stored
Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1421 Stored
Classification: EC09-014B
Reference: NTB09-048B
Date: April 21, 2011
2007-2009 TITAN AND ARMADA; MIL "ON" WITH DTC P1421 STORED
This bulletin has been amended. APPLIED VEHICLES, APPLIED VINS, and Table A and B have
been revised. Please discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007-2009 Titan (A60) 2007-2009 Armada (TA60)
APPLIED VINS and DATES: 2007-2008 Titan and Armada: All
2009 Titan: Vehicles built before 1N6AA0(***)9N312517 // April 7, 2009
2009 Armada: Vehicles built before 5N1AA08(**)9N614339 // April 7, 2009
IF YOU CONFIRM:
An Applied Vehicle has the MIL "ON" and DTC P1421 (Cold Start Control) stored in the ECM.
ACTION:
Confirm this bulletin applies.
Locations
Navigation Module: Locations
Page 635
Knock Sensor: Locations
Special Service Tools
Axle Shaft Assembly: Tools and Equipment Special Service Tools
PREPARATION
Special Service Tool
Page 2561
Service and Repair
Steering Angle Sensor: Service and Repair
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove spiral cable. Refer to See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Clockspring
Assembly / Spiral Cable/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the screws and remove the steering angle
sensor.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: After installation of spiral cable, adjust steering angle sensor. Refer to See: Brakes and
Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming
and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing Control Unit/Description See: Brakes and
Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming
and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing Control Unit/Special Repair Requirement See:
Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Adjustment Of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral
Position/Description See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Adjustment Of Steering Angle
Sensor Neutral Position/Special Repair Requirement.
Locations
Exploded View
Brake Pedal Assy: Service and Repair Exploded View
BRAKE PEDAL
Exploded View
Non-Adjustable Pedals
Adjustable Pedals
Page 685
Engine - Revised Upper Oil Pan/Timing Cover Service
Timing Cover: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Revised Upper Oil Pan/Timing Cover Service
Classification: EM10-011
Reference: NTB10-099
Date: August 19, 2010
ARMADA AND TITAN; REVISED UPPER OIL PAN AND TIMING CHAIN CASE PROCEDURES
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Armada (TA6O) 2004-2010Titan (A60)
SERVICE INFORMATION
Removal and installation procedures for the upper oil pan and timing chain case have been
updated to no longer require engine removal and installation.
Nissan Service Manuals for 2004-2010 Armada and Titan vehicles will be updated with these new
procedures. Updated Service Manuals will be distributed to the field as quickly as possible.
The standard Flat Rate Times will be adjusted to reflect the new procedures.
Until the updated Service Manuals are made available, please use the procedures shown below for
any upper oil pan and timing chain case-related repairs on an Applied Vehicle.
Page 2519
15. Select OK
VIN registration is complete
Base Audio
Speaker: Service and Repair Base Audio
Front Tweeter
FRONT TWEETER
Removal and Installation
FRONT TWEETER
Removal 1. Remove the front tweeter grille. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Panel Assembly/Removal And Installation.
2. Remove the front tweeter clips (C103) (A). 3. Disconnect the front tweeter connector and remove
the front tweeter (1).
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Front Door Speaker
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
Removal and Installation
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
Removal 1. Remove the front door finisher. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and
Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair.
2. Remove the four front door speaker screws. 3. Disconnect the front door speaker connector and
remove the front door speaker.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Rear Door Speaker
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
Page 5050
CONSULT-III Checking System
CONSULT-III CHECKING SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram
Page 5381
3. Insert the screwdriver into either of the slots shown in Figure 1.
4. Turn the screwdriver until the two cover pieces separate (see Figure 2).
5. Replace the battery.
^ Make sure the + side of the battery faces the bottom cover piece.
6. Reattach the two cover pieces by pushing them together.
7. Turn on the vehicle and confirm the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator is not illuminated
in the dot matrix display.
8. If the indicator is still illuminated:
a) Turn off and exit the vehicle, making sure to close the door.
b) Re-enter the vehicle and turn it on. The indicator should be off.
Page 1692
Page 106
With Intelligent Key System
Ignition Relay: Locations With Intelligent Key System
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Terminal Layout
TERMINAL LAYOUT
Page 202
11. Enter the VIN into C-III two times (see Figure 7).
^ Touch the C-III screen in the "VIN box" before typing.
^ Make sure to use all CAPITAL LETTERS.
^ Use the VIN from the vehicle you are working on.
12. Select Start
13. Turn the ignition OFF, and wait 10 seconds.
14. After waiting 10 seconds, turn the ignition ON.
Page 3505
Control Module: Service and Repair
TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Switch 4WD shift switch to 2WD and set transfer assembly to 2WD.
CAUTION: When removing transfer control unit, transfer state must be at 2WD. 2. Turn the ignition
switch OFF and disconnect negative battery terminal. 3. Remove the lower instrument panel RH.
Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Lower Panel RH And Glove Box/Removal And
Installation.
4. Disconnect the two transfer control unit connectors. 5. Remove the transfer control unit bolts. 6.
Remove the transfer control unit.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. When installing the transfer control unit, tighten bolts to the specified torque.
Transfer control unit bolts : 5.1 N.m (0.52 kg-m, 45 in-lb)
- After the installation, check 4WD shift indicator pattern. If NG, adjust position between transfer
assembly and transfer control unit. Refer to See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety
Information/Precaution For Transfer Assembly And Transfer Control Unit Replacement.
Page 3016
Page 2426
^ Check and compare your current ECM Part Number to Table A or B (as it applies) shown above.
If the part number does not match one in Table A or B, this bulletin does not apply. Go back to
ASIST for further diagnostic and repair information.
If this bulletin applies, reprogram the ECM.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You
MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential
to successfully completing this repair.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 475
Check the following. Harness connectors M31, E152
- Fuse block (J/B) connector M4
- 10A fuse
- Harness for open or short between ASCD brake switch and fuse
- Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Turn ignition switch
OFF. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal
108 and ASCD brake switch terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK - GO TO 6. NG Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 6. CHECK ASCD
BRAKE SWITCH Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing
and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/ASCD Brake Switch/Component
Inspection. OK or NG OK - GO TO 11. NG - Replace ASCD brake switch. 7. CHECK STOP LAMP
SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. 3. Check voltage between stop lamp switch
terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT -III or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG OK - GO TO 9. NG - GO TO 8. 8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the
following. Harness connectors M31, E152
- Fuse block (J/B) connector M60
- 10A fuse
- Harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and battery
- Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 9. CHECK
STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Disconnect ECM
harness connector.
Page 3873
Vacuum Brake Booster: Service and Repair Vacuum Lines
Removal And Installation
VACUUM LINES
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect vacuum hose from hose clip. 2. Release clamps and disconnect vacuum
hose. 3. Remove check valve from brake booster.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Insert vacuum hose over the tube for 24 mm (0.94 in) or more.
- Do not use lubricating oil during assembly.
Inspection
VACUUM LINES
Inspection
VISUAL INSPECTION Check for improper assembly, damage and deterioration. Replace as
necessary.
CHECK VALVE INSPECTION
Airtightness Inspection Use a suitable vacuum pump to check. Connect to brake booster side of
check valve.
Page 4139
Page 3646
Diagram Information and Instructions
Blower Motor: Diagram Information and Instructions
Connector Symbols
HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS
Connector symbols
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the
direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector.
For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements,
"Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals
Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring
diagrams.
Sample/Wiring Diagram -Example-
Page 3313
Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD)
FRONT OIL SEAL
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove rear propeller shaft. Refer to See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and
Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Propeller Shaft 3S1410.
2. Remove brake calipers and rotors. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake
System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Rear. 3. Measure the total preload torque. Refer to
See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD).
NOTE: Record the total preload torque measurement.
4. Remove the drive pinion nut using Tool.
Tool number : KV40104000 ( - )
5. Put matching marks on the companion flange and drive pinion using paint.
CAUTION: Use paint to make the matching marks. Do not damage the companion flange or drive
pinion.
6. Remove the companion flange using suitable tool. 7. Remove the front oil seal using Tool.
Tool number : ST33290001 (J-34286)
Page 2501
Testing and Inspection
Circuit Breaker: Testing and Inspection
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
Circuit Breaker (PTC)
The PTC thermistor generates heat in response to current flow. The temperature (and resistance)
of the thermistor element varies with current flow. Excessive current flow will cause the element's
temperature to rise. When the temperature reaches a specified level, the electrical resistance will
rise sharply to reduce the circuit current. This reduced current flow will cause the element to cool
lowering the resistance accordingly. Once resistance falls to a specified level normal circuit current
flow is allowed to resume.
Specifications
Camshaft Gear/Sprocket: Specifications
Camshaft Gear/Sprocket
Exploded View
Ignition Coil: Service and Repair Exploded View
IGNITION COIL
Exploded View
Page 5177
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 952
Disconnect the quick connector as follows: -
Hold the sides of the connector, push in tabs and pull out the tube.
- If the connector and the tube are stuck together, push and pull several times until they start to
move. Then disconnect them by pulling.
CAUTION: The quick connector can be disconnected when the tabs are completely depressed. Do not twist
the quick connector more than necessary.
- Do not use any tools to disconnect the quick connector.
- Keep the resin tube away from heat. Be especially careful when welding near the tube.
- Prevent any acid liquids such as battery electrolyte, from getting on the resin tube.
- Do not bend or twist the resin tube during connection.
- Do not remove the remaining retainer on the hard tube (or the equivalent) except when the resin
tube or the retainer is replaced.
- When the resin tube or hard tube, or the equivalent, is replaced, also replace the retainer with a
new one (white colored retainer).
- To keep the quick connector clean and to avoid damage and contamination from foreign
materials, cover the quick connector with plastic bags or suitable material as shown.
8. Remove the four bolts and remove the fuel tank shield using power tool. 9. Remove the fuel tank
strap bolts while supporting the fuel tank with a suitable lift jack.
Page 1228
Main Bearing Cap
Follow the steps below to tighten each main bearing cap bolt.
a. Apply engine oil to threads and seating surfaces of bolts, and tighten all bolts temporarily.
b. Measure tightening angle using Tool.
Tool number : KV10112100 (BT-8653-A)
CAUTION: Measure tightening angle using Tool. Do not measure visually.
Page 2632
Variable Valve Timing Actuator Position Sensor: Service and Repair Intake Valve Timing Control
Position Sensor (RH)
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL
Intake Valve Timing Control Position Sensor (RH)
REMOVAL 1. Remove engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Engine Cover.
2. Disconnect intake valve timing control position sensor connector (RH).
3. Remove intake valve timing control position sensor (RH) (1) from Intake valve timing control
solenoid valve cover (RH) (3).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Replace the O-ring (2) of the intake valve timing control position sensor with a new one,
then lubricate O-ring with engine oil before installing.
Intake valve timing control position sensor bolt : 9.6 N.m (0.98 kg-m, 85 in-lb)
Locations
Page 3918
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair ABS
Wheel Sensors
WHEEL SENSORS
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel sensor bolt. When removing the front wheel sensor, first remove the disc rotor to gain access to the front wheel
sensor bolt. Refer to See: Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Front.
2. Pull out the sensor, being careful to turn it as little as possible.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth.
- Do not pull on the sensor harness.
3. Disconnect wheel sensor harness electrical connector, then remove harness from attaching
points.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Inspect wheel sensor O-ring, replace sensor assembly if damaged.
- Clean wheel sensor hole and mounting surface with brake cleaner and a lint-free shop rag. Be
careful that dirt and debris do not enter the axle.
- Apply a coat of suitable grease to the wheel sensor O-ring and mounting hole.
Sensor Rotor
SENSOR ROTOR
Removal and Installation
FRONT WHEEL SENSOR ROTOR
Removal and Installation The front wheel sensor rotor is built into the front wheel hub and bearing
assembly and is not removable. If damaged, replace the front wheel hub and bearing assembly.
Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Wheel Hub/Service and Repair.
Page 3312
to See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226.
- Do not loosen drive pinion lock nut to adjust the total preload torque. If the total preload torque
exceeds the specifications, replace the collapsible spacer and tighten it again to adjust. Refer to
See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226.
After adjustment, rotate drive pinion back and forth 2 to 3 times to check for unusual noise, rotation
malfunction, and other malfunctions.
4. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Check the differential gear oil level after installation. Refer to See: Fluid Differential/Service and Repair/Differential Gear Oil/Changing Differential Gear Oil.
Service and Repair
Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair
HYDRAULIC LINE
Removal and Installation
Refer to the following illustration for hydraulic line removal.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
System Diagram
Odometer: Description and Operation System Diagram
METER SYSTEM
ODO/TRIP METER
ODO/TRIP METER : System Diagram
Locations
Locations
Page 1738
7. Select VIN Registration
8. Select Next
9. Make sure the ignition is ON with engine OFF.
10. Select Start
Page 3950
^ Batteries installed in vehicles produced in Japan have a JIS number embossed in the plastic on
top of the battery.
^ These vehicles have a VIN that begins with the letter "J".
Batteries with CCA (Cold Cranking Amps) Number
^ Batteries installed in vehicles produced in North America have a CCA number displayed on the
label attached to the top of the battery.
^ These vehicles have a VIN that begins with a number: 1, 3, or 5.
Selecting CCA or JIS in the GR-8 Battery Tester
Vehicles with JIS Battery
^ Select JIS, then choose the option that matches the first five (5) characters of the JIS number on
the battery.
NOTE:
DO NOT select CCA when testing a JIS battery.
Vehicles with CCA Battery
^ Select CCA, then choose the option that matches the number following "Cold Cranking Amps" on
the battery.
Reference Material
The following information can be printed and attached to the GR-8, if needed.
Page 432
12. Remove and replace the switch.
13. Secure the switch harness with the 2 clips to the seat pan.
14. Roll the side facing trim down over the new seat switch. Re-attach the loose J-Clip back onto
the seat frame.
^ Make sure the upholstered edge is flat and smooth with no bumps. See Figure 9.
^ Make sure the upholstered edge is flat and level with the side of the switch. See Figure 9.
WARNING:
Make sure the J-Clip is securely attached. A loose J-Clip may affect OCS performance.
15. Install the switch plate and switch knobs.
16. Set the seat pan back onto the seat frame and secure with the 4 bolts. Torque 27.5 Nm (2.8
Kg-m, 20 ft-lb).
17. Re-attach the seat harnesses to the seat pan.
18. Re-attach the lower flap cover.
Page 2124
Page 2524
^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed.
^ C-III Security Card is installed.
^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still
cable-connected to the vehicle.
1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect
the VI to the vehicle.
CAUTION
2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer.
CAUTION
3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery:
For Conventional Vehicles
^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate.
NOTE:
The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended.
CAUTION
For Hybrid Vehicles
^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station.
^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery.
Page 1655
The exhaust system may be hot. Allow to cool down before inspection/repairs.
NOTE: Exhaust system parts do not need to be removed for this inspection/repair.
1. Raise the vehicle on a hoist.
2. Inspect the heat shields on the front exhaust tube for the following:
^ Heat shield contact with the exhaust tube.
^ Separated/missing band clamp(s).
^ Missing "stand-off" (see Figure 4).
3. If a heat shield is found contacting the exhaust tube, pry it away to allow a minimum 1 mm (.040
inch) space.
^ Road test the vehicle to verify the repair.
4. If a band clamp is separated or missing, install new band clamps as needed.
Page 3765
Brake Pad: Specifications Rear
Brake Pad
Brake model : AD14VE
Standard thickness (new).....................................................................................................................
...................................................... 12.0 mm (0.472 in) Repair limit thickness.....................................
............................................................................................................................................. 1.0 mm
(0.039 in)
Page 46
Page 3802
DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove sliding pin bolt, and then remove the pad, shim, shim cover, and pad
retainer from the torque member. 2. Remove sliding pins and sliding pin boots from torque
member.
3. Place a wooden block as shown, and blow air from union bolt hole to remove pistons and piston
boots.
CAUTION: Do not get your fingers caught in piston.
Page 210
B. Compare the Part Number you wrote down to the numbers in the Current ECM Part Number
column in Table A , or Table B above.
^ If there is a match, this bulletin applies. Continue with the reprogramming procedure.
NOTE:
If there are two lines (two reprogramming options) on your C-III screen, use the one that does not
have the message "Caution! Use ONLY with NTBXX-XXX".
^ If there is not a match, this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to ASIST for further
diagnostic information.
3. If this bulletin applies and you have performed ECM reprogramming, the screen in Figure 2
appears when reprogramming is complete.
4. Make sure to erase DTCs from all systems.
NOTE:
During reprogramming, DTCs will set in several systems and must be erased.
5. Test drive the vehicle and make sure it operates correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF.
^ If the Check Engine light comes ON, go back to ASIST for further diagnostic information. Refer to
the applicable Electronic Service Manual as
needed.
^ Diagnosis and repairs beyond ECM reprogramming are not covered by this bulletin.
Page 3092
Page 4164
CONSULT-III Checking System
CONSULT-III CHECKING SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram
Engine Controls - DTC P0451 Stored In The ECM
PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Customer Interest Engine Controls - DTC P0451
Stored In The ECM
Classification: EC09-027
Reference: NTB09-121
Date: November 3, 2009
2009 TITAN AND ARMADA; DTC P0451 STORED
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2009 Titan (A60) 2009 Armada (TA60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
DTC P0451 (EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor Performance) is stored,
ACTIONS
1. Confirm this bulletin applies.
a. Check and compare your current ECM Part Number to Table A or B shown in this bulletin.
b. If that part number does not match one in Table A, this bulletin does not apply. Go back to
ASIST for further diagnostic and repair information.
2. If this bulletin applies, reprogram the ECM.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTIONS (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is
essential to successfully completing this repair.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Connect C-III to the vehicle to begin the reprogramming procedure.
Locations
Variable Valve Timing Actuator Position Sensor: Locations
Page 4892
- Always work from the side of or under front passenger air bag module.
- After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer
to See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/SRS Operation Check.
1. Locate the yellow and orange direct-connect passenger air bag module harness connectors. 2.
Use wire cutters to cut back both previously used direct-connect passenger air bag module
harness connectors from the vehicle wiring harness
approximately 50 mm (1.9 in) from the connectors.
3. Remove approximately 150 mm (5.9 in) of the vehicle harness covering from the cut end.
4. Slide a piece of dual-wall heat shrink tubing (provided in the passenger air bag service kit) onto
each wire of the previously used vehicle wiring
harness.
5. Fold each wire back and insert into the end of the heat shrink tubing so that the end of the wire is
approximately centered in the heat shrink tubing.
6. Use a heat gun to shrink the heat shrink tubing and seal the wire. 7. Use electrical tape to secure
the modified circuits to the outside of the wiring harness.
8. Locate the front passenger air bag service replacement connector that is taped back to the main
harness. Unwrap the tape to access the yellow
service replacement connector and remove the dust cover from the connector.
System Diagram
Temperature Sensor (Gauge): Description and Operation System Diagram
METER SYSTEM
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE : System Diagram
Page 557
f. Use the new tie-wrap to secure all the wires to the black corrugated tubing (see Figure 6).
^ New tie-wrap is included with the new sender unit.
^ Make sure all wires are tied together (3 fuel level sending unit wires and 2 fuel pump wires).
^ Place the Tie-Wrap 90 mm (about 3.5 inches) from the top of the tubing.
^ Make sure the wires do not interfere with the movement of the float arm.
4. Carefully reinstall the Fuel Pump Assembly back into the vehicle in reverse of removal.
^ IMPORTANT: Use a new seal (O-Ring) when reinstalling the Fuel Pump Assembly.
^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed.
CAUTION:
DO NOT bend the Float Arm when reinstalling the Fuel Pump.
5. Confirm the Fuel Gauge operates properly.
Page 296
20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer.
CAUTION: During data transfer:
^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections.
^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF.
^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal.
NOTE:
^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or
^ The Error in Figure 9A displays.
a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged.
b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned
OFF (see step 3 and 4).
c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III
screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1).
Part 2
Page 3839
Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair VDC/TCS/ABS
ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY)
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to
See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 3. Drain the brake fluid.
Refer to See: Brake Fluid/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 4. Disconnect the
actuator harness connector from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
CAUTION: To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from
being damaged.
- Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is
splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately.
5. Disconnect the brake tubes. 6. Remove the three bolts and remove the ABS actuator and
electric unit (control unit).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: To install, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench (commercial service tools).
- Always tighten brake tubes to specification when installing.
Never reuse drained brake fluid.
Revised Oil Pan / Timing Cover Service
Oil Pan: Service and Repair Revised Oil Pan / Timing Cover Service
Service Data Update
Date: August 19, 2010
ARMADA AND TITAN; REVISED UPPER OIL PAN AND TIMING CHAIN CASE PROCEDURES
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Armada (TA6O) 2004-2010 Titan (A60)
SERVICE INFORMATION
Removal and installation procedures for the upper oil pan and timing chain case have been
updated to no longer require engine removal and installation.
Nissan Service Data for 2004-2010 Armada and Titan vehicles will be updated with these new
procedures. Updated Service Data will be distributed to the field as quickly as possible.
The standard Flat Rate Times will be adjusted to reflect the new procedures.
Until the updated Service Data is made available, please use the procedures shown below for any
upper oil pan and timing chain case-related repairs on an Applied Vehicle.
OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER
Exploded View
Exploded View
Spark Plug: Service and Repair Exploded View
SPARK PLUG
Exploded View
Page 4290
Monitor item
ACTIVE TEST Test item
Page 903
Spark Plug: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
SPARK PLUG
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Engine Cover.
2. Remove ignition coil. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service
and Repair/Removal and Installation.
3. Remove spark plug using suitable tool.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Do not use a wire brush for cleaning.
- If plug tip is covered with carbon, spark plug cleaner may be used.
- Checking and adjusting plug gap is not required between change intervals.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 5518
A. Position the organizer assembly on end as shown.
B. Spray lubricant (WD-40(R) or equivalent) between the inset and the tube.
C. Spray lubricant all the way around the insert.
D. Wait about 30 seconds for the lubricant to penetrate down the inside of the tube and around the
rubber o-ring.
E. Pull / remove the insert as shown in Figure 5.
F. Wipe off any residual or over spray lubricant.
6. Insert the new slider assemblies into the organizer.
^ Push the slider in until the plastic insert stops against the end of the metal tube.
7. Completely loosen the hand knob on all 4 slider assemblies.
^ This will allow maximum gap between the washer and slider base.
8. Slide the organizer back into the tracks.
Page 4127
- Erase DTC.
- Study the relationship between the cause detected by DTC and the symptom described by the
customer.
3. Check related service bulletins for information. Is any symptom described and any DTC
detected? Symptom is described, DTC is displayed - GO TO 3 Symptom is described, DTC is not
displayed - GO TO 4 Symptom is not described, DTC is displayed - GO TO 5 3. CONFIRM THE
SYMPTOM Confirm the symptom described by the customer. Connect CONSULT-III to the vehicle
in "DATA MONITOR" mode and check real time diagnosis results. Verify relationship between the
symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected. - GO TO 5 4. CONFIRM THE
SYMPTOM Confirm the symptom described by the customer. Connect CONSULT-III to the vehicle
in "DATA MONITOR" mode and check real time diagnosis results. Verify relationship between the
symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected. - GO TO 6 5. PERFORM DTC
CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure for the displayed DTC, and
then check that DTC is detected again. At this time, always connect CONSULT-III to the vehicle,
and check diagnostic results in real time.
NOTE: Freeze frame data is useful if the DTC is not detected.
- Perform Component Function Check if DTC Confirmation Procedure is not included. This
simplified check procedure is an effective alternative though DTC cannot be detected during this
check.
If the result of Component Function Check is NG, it is the same as the detection of DTC by DTC
Confirmation Procedure. Is DTC detected? YES - GO TO 8 NO - Refer to See: Testing and
Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Service Information For Electrical
Incident/Intermittent Incident. 6. PERFORM BASIC INSPECTION Perform basic inspection of
system. Inspection End - GO TO 7 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM BY SYMPTOM
TABLE Detect malfunctioning system based on the confirmed symptom in step 4, and determine
the trouble diagnosis order based on possible causes and symptom. - GO TO 8 8. DETECT
MALFUNCTIONING PART BY DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE Inspect according to Diagnostic
Procedure of the system.
NOTE: The Diagnostic Procedure described based on open circuit inspection. A short circuit
inspection is also required for the circuit check in the Diagnostic Procedure. Is malfunctioning part
detected? YES - GO TO 9 NO - Check voltage of related BCM terminals using CONSULT-III. 9.
REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PART 1. Repair or replace the malfunctioning
part. 2. Reconnect parts or connectors disconnected during Diagnostic Procedure again after repair
and replacement. 3. Check DTC. If DTC is displayed, erase it. - GO TO 10
10. FINAL CHECK
When DTC was detected in step 2, perform DTC Confirmation Procedure or Component Function
Check again, and then check that the malfunction have been fully repaired. When symptom was
described from the customer, refer to confirmed symptom in step 3 or 4 and check that the
symptom is not detected. OK or NG NG (DTC is detected) - GO TO 8 NG (Symptom remains) - GO
TO 6 OK - Inspection End.
IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room)
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Fail Safe
Page 1240
Crankshaft: Service and Repair
HOW TO SELECT PISTON AND BEARING
How to Select Piston and Bearing
DESCRIPTION
*For the service parts, the grade for fitting cannot be selected between a piston pin and a
connecting rod. (Only 0 grade is available.) The information at the shipment from the plant is
described as a reference. The identification grade stamped on each part is the grade for the dimension measured in new
condition. This grade cannot apply to reused parts.
- For reused or repaired parts, measure the dimension accurately. Determine the grade by
comparing the measurement with the values of each selection table.
- For details of the measurement method of each part, the reuse standards, and the selection
method of the selective fitting parts, follow the applicable procedure.
HOW TO SELECT PISTON
Piston Selective Fitting When New Cylinder Block is Used: Check the cylinder bore grade on the bottom face of the cylinder block, and select the piston of the
same grade.
When Cylinder Block is Reused 1. Measure cylinder block bore diameter. 2. Determine the bore
grade by comparing the measurement with the values under the "Cylinder bore diameter" of the
piston selection table.
Page 3212
Page 3625
CAUTION: Do not tighten at this point. This allows further tightening of side bearing adjusters. 8.
Tighten each side bearing adjusters using adjuster tool.
Tool number : - (C - 4164)
9. Adjusting backlash of drive gear and drive pinion. Refer to See: Differential Assembly/Service
and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226
(ELD).
10. Check total preload torque. Refer to See: Differential Assembly/Service and
Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD). 11. Check tooth contact. Refer to See: Differential
Assembly/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD).
12. Apply a bead of sealant to the mating surface of the carrier cover as shown.
- Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications.
CAUTION: Remove any old sealant adhering to the mating surfaces. Also remove any moisture,
oil, or foreign material adhering to the application and mating surfaces.
13. Install the carrier cover to the gear carrier. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque. Refer to
See: Differential Assembly/Service and
Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226.
14. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Fill the front final drive assembly with recommended differential gear oil. Refer to See:
Differential Assembly/Fluid - Differential/Service and Repair/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD).
Specifications
Spark Plug: Specifications
Spark Plug
Torque : 24.5 N.m (2.5 Kg-m, 18 ft-lb)
Page 2460
CAUTION
2. When you get to the ECM Reprogramming screen shown in Figure 1, confirm this bulletin
applies as follows.
A. On your C-III screen, look at the Part Number column (see Figure 1):
^ If this column is blank (no part number listed), this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to
ASIST for further diagnostic information.
^ If a Part Number is listed, write it on the Repair Order.
Page 3824
Brake Hose/Line: Service and Repair Front Brake Piping And Brake Hose
BRAKE TUBE AND HOSE
Removal and Installation of Front Brake Piping and Brake Hose
REMOVAL 1. Drain brake fluid. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling
System/Coolant/Service and Repair.
2. Remove brake tube from brake hose, using a suitable tool. 3. Remove lock plate and brake hose
from bracket.
4. Remove union bolt and then remove brake hose from cylinder body.
INSTALLATION 1. Install brake hose by aligning with the protrusion on cylinder body, then install
the union bolt and new copper washers and tighten to specification.
Refer to See: Diagrams.
CAUTION: Do not reuse copper washer. 2. Insert brake hose end through bracket, then secure it to
bracket with lock plate.
Suspension - Rear Leaf Spring Clicking Noises
Shackle: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Rear Leaf Spring Clicking Noises
Classification: RA09-006
Reference: NTB10-011
Date: January 20, 2010
TITAN; LEAF SPRING NOISE
APPLIED VEHICLE: 2004-2009 Titan (A60)
APPLIED VINS: 2004-2008 All 2009 vehicles built before 1N6(*)A0(***)9N 319522
APPLIED DATES: 2004-2008 All 2009 vehicles built before August 26, 2009
IF YOU CONFIRM:
A clicking noise is coming from one or both leaf springs.
ACTION: Inspect the anti-windup clip bolts and bushings.
^ If replacement is determined as necessary, use the parts listed in PARTS INFORMATION in this
bulletin.
^ For repair procedure, refer to SERVICE PROCEDURE in this bulletin.
^ Do not replace the leaf spring assembly when anti-windup bolt and bushing replacement will
resolve the incident, if it should occur.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line claim using the claims coding shown.
PARTS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Interior - Seat Back Board Installation/Removal
Seat Back: Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Seat Back Board Installation/Removal
Classification: BT08-023A
Reference: NTB08-062A
Date: July 21, 20009
SEAT BACK BOARD REMOVAL / INSTALLATION
This bulletin has been amended. Applied Vehicles has been updated. Discard all previous versions
of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2009 Armada (TA60) 2004 - 2009 Frontier (D40) 2004 - 2009
Pathfinder (R51) 2004 - 2009 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2009 Xterra (N50)
SERVICE INFORMATION
This bulletin contains the Service Procedure for the removal and installation of the seat back board.
Refer to Module A for removal and installation of the soft seat back board.
Refer to Module B for the removal and installation of the hard seat back board.
PARTS INFORMATION
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing the repair.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Module A (for soft seat backs)
1. Move / adjust the front passenger seat bottom and seat back to the full forward position.
2. Remove the right front soft seat back board as follows:
NOTE:
The seat back board is held on with:
^ 2 top tabs
^ 2 side tabs
^ 2 bottom clips (do not reuse, replace with new clips from the Parts Information table).
Page 1464
b. Insert Tool between the oil pan (lower) and the oil pan (upper).
Tool number: KVIOIIIIOO (J-37228)
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the mating surface.
- Do not insert a screwdriver, this will damage the mating surfaces.
c. Tap (1) Tool to insert it then slide (2) Tool by tapping its side with a hammer to remove the oil
pan (lower) from the oil pan (upper).
21. Remove the oil strainer from the oil pan (upper).
22. Remove the oil pan (upper) using the following steps.
a. Remove the oil pan (upper) bolts in the reverse order as shown.
b. Remove the oil pan (upper) from the cylinder block by prying it at the points shown using suitable
tool.
CAUTION: Do not damage mating surface.
23. Remove the O-rings from the oil pump and front cover.
CAUTION: Do not reuse O-rings.
Specifications
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Mass Air Flow Sensor
Page 5655
Inspection
Fluid - Transfer Case: Service and Repair Inspection
TRANSFER FLUID
Inspection
CAUTION: If using the vehicle for towing, the transfer fluid must be replaced as specified. Refer to
See: .
FLUID LEAKAGE AND FLUID LEVEL 1. Make sure that fluid is not leaking from the transfer
assembly or around it.
2. Check fluid level from the filler plug hole as shown.
CAUTION: Do not start engine while checking fluid level. 3. Install the filler plug with a new gasket
to the transfer. Tighten to the specified torque. Refer to "Inspection".
CAUTION: Do not reuse gasket.
Page 6151
^ LH motor: Rotate counterclockwise.
^ RH motor: Rotate clockwise.
2. Install the power window motor onto the regulator.
3. Install the regulator assembly into the door.
4. Secure regulator assembly to door inner with fasteners then install glass into door and attach to
regulator.
5. Raise the glass to the top position.
CAUTION:
Do not operate the glass automatically to raise the glass to the top.
Page 3888
Page 5661
Page 3067
Page 133
Power Distribution Module: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures
Diagnosis Description
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R)
Diagnosis Description
AUTO ACTIVE TEST
Description In auto active test mode, the IPDM E/R sends a drive signal to the following systems to
check their operation. Oil pressure low/coolant pressure high warning indicator
- Oil pressure gauge
- Rear window defogger
- Front wipers
- Tail, license and parking lamps
- Front fog lamps
- Headlamps (Hi, Lo)
- A/C compressor (magnetic clutch)
- Cooling fan
Operation Procedure 1. Close the hood and front door RH, and lift the wiper arms from the
windshield (to prevent windshield damage due to wiper operation).
NOTE: When auto active test is performed with hood opened, sprinkle water on windshield before
hand. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON and, within 20 seconds, press the
front door switch LH 10 times. Then turn the ignition switch OFF. 4. Turn the ignition switch ON
within 10 seconds. After that the horn sounds once and the auto active test starts. 5. After a series
of the following operations is repeated 3 times, auto active test is completed.
NOTE: When auto active test mode has to be cancelled halfway through test, turn ignition switch
OFF.
CAUTION: If auto active test mode cannot be actuated, check door switch system. Refer to See: Body and
Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/Door Switch/King Cab/Diagnosis Procedure See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power
Locks/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Door Switch/King
Cab/Component Function Check See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Door Switch/King Cab/Diagnosis Procedure,
"KING CAB
See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/Door Switch/Crew Cab/Diagnosis Procedure (Crew Cab). Do not start the engine.
Inspection in Auto Active Test Mode When auto active test mode is actuated, the following 6 steps
are repeated 3 times.
Page 1083
Page 2244
Page 5616
Audible Warning Device: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures
Diagnosis System (Meter)
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (METER)
CONSULT-III Function (METER/M&A;)
CONSULT-III can display each diagnostic item using the diagnostic test modes shown following.
SELF-DIAG RESULTS
Display Item List Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing
and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures.
DATA MONITOR
Display Item List
Page 1058
Refrigerant Oil: Fluid Type Specifications
OIL
Page 496
Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Description and Operation Manual A/C (Type 2)
INTAKE SENSOR
System Description
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Intake Sensor
The intake sensor (1) is located on the heater and cooling unit assembly. It converts temperature of
air after if passes through the evaporator into a resistance value which is then input to the front air
control.
Premium With Navigation
DVD Player: Locations Premium With Navigation
DVD PLAYER
Component Parts Location
Body - Sunroof Inoperative/Erratic Operation
Sunroof / Moonroof Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Sunroof Inoperative/Erratic
Operation
Classification: BT07-032A
Reference: NTB07-070A
Date: September 25, 2009
SUNROOF DOES NOT OPERATE PROPERLY
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles section has been revised. No other changes
have been made. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007 - 2009 Armada (TA60) 2007 - 2009 Frontier (D40) 2007 - 2009
Maxima (A34, A35) 2007 - 2009 Pathfinder (R51) 2007 - 2009 Quest (V42) 2007 - 2009 Titan (A60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
Sunroof auto operation will not work or sunroof does not operate properly:
^ When the battery has been disconnected or discharged
^ When the sunroof motor has been disconnected from power
^ When the sunroof motor was changed
ACTION
Perform the following initialization procedure:
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Push and hold the sunroof tilt switch in the forward (DOWN) position until the sunroof is fully
closed.
3. After the sunroof has closed all the way, push and hold the tilt switch forward (DOWN) again for
more than 2 seconds to re-learn motor position.
4. Initialization is complete if the sunroof operates normally.
NOTE:
If the sunroof is still not operating properly after initialization, refer to ASIST and section RF of the
Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for further diagnosis and repair information.
Page 4352
^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering
correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on
a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane
during this time (7 seconds).
Page 3538
- Do not reuse oil seal.
- Apply petroleum jelly to oil seal.
2. Apply petroleum jelly to the circumference of the new dust cover (1). Position the new dust cover
as shown.
CAUTION: -
Do not reuse dust cover.
- Position the identification mark at the position shown.
- Rear case assembly (2)
- Protrusions (A)
3. Install the new dust cover to the rear case using Tool.
Tool number : KV40105310 ( - )
CAUTION: Do not reuse dust cover.
- Apply petroleum jelly to dust cover.
4. Install the rear propeller shaft. Refer to See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and
Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Propeller Shaft 2S1410.
5. Refill the transfer with fluid and check for fluid leakage and fluid level. Refer to See: Fluid Transfer Case/Service and Repair.
Page 1377
Engine Oil Pressure: Capacity Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Standard and Limit
OIL PRESSURE
OIL PUMP
REGULATOR VALVE
ENGINE OIL CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE)
Page 5677
Fuel Gauge: Description and Operation System Description
METER SYSTEM
FUEL GAUGE : System Description
The fuel gauge indicates the approximate fuel level in the fuel tank. The fuel gauge is regulated by
the unified meter control unit and a variable resistor signal supplied by the fuel level sensor unit.
Page 1169
2. Pull up / lift one side of the cover near the rear.
^ A small amount of force will be needed to pop loose the locating stud.
3. Pull up / lift the other side of the cover near the rear.
^ A small amount of force will be needed to pop loose the locating stud.
4. Remove the cover from the engine.
Disclaimer
Page 4755
Control Assembly: Description and Operation Manual A/C (Type 2)
Control System Diagram
MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
Control System Diagram
CONTROL SYSTEM The control system consists of input sensors, switches, the front air control
(microcomputer) and outputs. The relationship of these components is shown in the figure below:
Control System Description
MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
Control System Description
CONTROL OPERATION Front air control
Page 5839
Temperature Sensor (Gauge): Description and Operation Component Description
METER SYSTEM
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE : Component Description
Locations
Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations
Low-Pressure Flexible Hose
Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Low-Pressure Flexible Hose
LOW-PRESSURE FLEXIBLE HOSE
Removal and Installation for Low-Pressure Flexible Hose
REMOVAL 1. Remove the engine room cover using power tools. 2. Remove the engine air cleaner
and air ducts. Refer to See: Filters/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair/Removal and
Installation . 3. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and
Repair/Refrigeration System .
CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the
entry of air. 4. Remove the low-pressure flexible hose.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Heating and Air
Conditioning/Description and Operation/Refrigeration System/Component .
CAUTION: Replace the O-ring of the low-pressure flexible hose with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it
when installing it.
- After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
Page 2724
REMOVAL
WARNING: Follow the "General Precautions" before working on the fuel system. Refer to See:
Service Precautions . 1. Remove the fuel filler cap to release the pressure from inside the fuel tank.
2. Check the fuel level on level gauge. If the fuel gauge indicates more than the level as shown (full
or almost full), drain the fuel from the fuel tank
Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics
Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics
Classification: ST08-001D
Reference: NTB08-097D
Date: April 26, 2011
DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER
This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The
off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this
bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R
SERVICE INFORMATION
If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic
Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue.
Diagnostic Flow Chart
Road Test
Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair.
IMPORTANT:
^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as:
> Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory)
> Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires
> Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire
Page 2618
Page 5555
Audible Warning Device: Locations Key Warning Chime
WARNING CHIME SYSTEM
KEY WARNING CHIME : Component Parts Location
Page 2552
Page 4547
WARNING:
This repair MUST be done with the vehicle's full weight on the suspension.
EITHER:
Place the vehicle on a drive-on hoist or alignment rack to lift the vehicle.
OR
Leave all of the vehicle's weight on all four (4) tires, while parked (do not lift the vehicle).
DO NOT lift the vehicle in any amount. The suspension must support all of the vehicle's weight
during the whole repair procedure or the bushing will be under load and difficult to remove.
1. With the vehicle positioned as stated above, put the shift selector in "P" (PARK) position.
2. Set the parking brake.
3. Remove the bolt and bushing from the windup clip (clip).
4. Check the condition of the bolt's and clip's threads, and the bushing.
^ If both the bushing and bolt's threads are okay, reuse them.
^ If the bushing and / or bolt's threads are damaged, replace with all parts in the "Spring Assembly
Kit".
^ If the clip's threads are damaged, replace the leaf spring assembly.
5. Install the bolt (and bushing) with Permatex(R) Medium Strength Threadlocker BLUE or
equivalent thread locking material applied to the threads.
Torque bolt to 32 N.m (3.2 kg-m, 23 ft-lb).
Page 3116
21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete.
NOTE:
If you can't print the above screen:
a. Select the Print icon.
b. Select Save.
c. Select OK.
A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC.
NOTE:
If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in
the following file location:
At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start.
Service and Repair
Oil Filter: Service and Repair
OIL FILTER
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the engine front undercover using power tool.
2. Remove the oil filter using Tool.
Tool number : KV10115801 (J-38956)
CAUTION: The oil filter is provided with a relief valve.
Use Genuine NISSAN oil filter or equivalent. Be careful not to get burned when the engine and engine oil are hot.
- When removing, prepare a shop cloth to absorb any engine oil leakage or spillage.
- Do not allow engine oil to adhere to the drive belts.
- Completely wipe off any engine oil that adheres to the engine and the vehicle.
INSTALLATION 1. Remove foreign materials adhering to the oil filter installation surface.
2. Apply engine oil to the oil seal circumference of the new oil filter. 3. Screw the oil filter manually
until it touches the installation surface, then tighten it by 2/3 turn. Or tighten to specification.
Oil filter : 17.7 N.m (1.8 kg-m, 13 ft-lb)
4. Inspect the engine for oil leakage. Refer to "Removal and Installation". 5. Install the engine front
undercover.
Service and Repair
Parking Assist Warning Indicator: Service and Repair
BUZZER
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the combination meter cover. Refer to See: Dashboard / Instrument
Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Cluster LID
A/Removal And Installation.
2. Remove the two bolts (1), disconnect the connector (2) and remove the front buzzer.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Locations
Page 2024
Spark Plug: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
SPARK PLUG
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Engine Cover.
2. Remove ignition coil. Refer to See: Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Removal
and Installation.
3. Remove spark plug using suitable tool.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Do not use a wire brush for cleaning.
- If plug tip is covered with carbon, spark plug cleaner may be used.
- Checking and adjusting plug gap is not required between change intervals.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 3014
Page 2328
Diagnosis Sheet (CAN Type 5)
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
Diagnosis Sheet (CAN Type 5)
Page 3070
^ If this column is blank (no part number listed), this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to
ASIST for further diagnostic information.
^ If a Part Number is listed, write it on the Repair Order.
B. Compare the Part Number you wrote down to the numbers in the Current ECM P/N column in
Table A or B (as it applies) shown at the beginning of this bulletin.
^ If there is a match, this bulletin applies. Continue with the reprogramming procedure.
^ If there is not a match, this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to ASIST for further
diagnostic information.
3. If this bulletin applies and you have performed ECM reprogramming, the screen in Figure 2
appears when reprogramming is complete.
NOTE:
If the screen in Figure 2 does not display (reprogramming does not complete).
4. Make sure to erase DTCs from all Systems.
NOTE:
During the reprogramming, DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all
systems.
5. Test drive the vehicle and make sure it operates correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF.
^ If the Check Engine light comes ON, go back to ASIST for further diagnostic information. Refer to
the applicable Electronic Service Manual as
needed.
^ Diagnosis and repairs beyond the ECM reprogramming are not covered by this bulletin.
Page 2386
Page 1045
Power Steering Fluid: Service and Repair Checking Fluid Leakage
POWER STEERING FLUID
Checking Fluid Leakage
Check the hydraulic piping lines for improper attachment and for leaks, cracks, damage, loose
connections, chafing or deterioration. 1. Run engine until fluid temperature reaches 50° - 80°C
(122° - 176°F) in reservoir tank. Keep engine speed idle. 2. Turn steering wheel right-to-left several
times. 3. Hold steering wheel at each "lock" position for five seconds to check fluid leakage.
CAUTION: Do not hold steering wheel in a locked position for more than 10 seconds. (There is the
possibility that oil pump may be damaged.) 4. If fluid leakage at connections is noticed, then loosen
flare nut and then retighten. Do not over tighten connector as this can damage O-ring, washer
and connector.
5. If fluid leakage from oil pump is noticed, check oil pump. Refer to See: Steering and
Suspension/Steering/Power Steering/Power Steering
Pump/Service and Repair/Procedures.
6. Check steering gear boots for accumulation of fluid indicating a leak from the steering gear.
Page 2610
NOTES:
^ Rust penetrant is considered a shop supply.
^ Nissan Rust Penetrant can be ordered through the Nissan Direct Ship Chemical Care Product
Program, Website order via link on dealer portal.
^ WD-40 is available from various local sources.
Removal Tool
^ When removing a seized exhaust sensor with a specialty socket (which contains a slit to
accommodate the wiring harness), it may spread open and
strip the sensor.
^ Before this occurs, it is recommended to cut the wiring harness from the sensor and use a box
end wrench or 6-point deep well socket.
1. Clamp the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube in a vice.
2. Spray the sensor with the rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds.
^ It is important that the spray is directed at the base of the sensor to ensure it penetrates into the
threads.
Engine Controls - DTC P0451 Stored In The ECM
Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine Controls - DTC P0451 Stored In The ECM
Classification: EC09-027
Reference: NTB09-121
Date: November 3, 2009
2009 TITAN AND ARMADA; DTC P0451 STORED
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2009 Titan (A60) 2009 Armada (TA60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
DTC P0451 (EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor Performance) is stored,
ACTIONS
1. Confirm this bulletin applies.
a. Check and compare your current ECM Part Number to Table A or B shown in this bulletin.
b. If that part number does not match one in Table A, this bulletin does not apply. Go back to
ASIST for further diagnostic and repair information.
2. If this bulletin applies, reprogram the ECM.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTIONS (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is
essential to successfully completing this repair.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Connect C-III to the vehicle to begin the reprogramming procedure.
Capacity Specifications
Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Capacity ...............................................................................................................................................
.................................................... 11 1/4 Qts. (10.6L)
Page 5054
Garage Door Opener Transmitter: Electrical Diagrams
HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER
Wiring Diagram
Integrated Homelink Transmitter - Part 1
Page 3525
Control Module: Locations Electrical Units Location
Page 1356
Oil Pan: Service and Repair Exploded View
OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER
Exploded View
Page 4648
Air Duct: Service and Repair Defroster Nozzle
DUCTS AND GRILLES
Removal and Installation
DEFROSTER NOZZLE
Removal 1. Remove the instrument panel trim. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Panel Assembly/Removal And Installation.
2. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to See: Housing Assembly HVAC/Service
and Repair. 3. Remove the defroster nozzle.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 3286
2. Install differential lock position switch on gear carrier and tighten differential lock position switch
bolts with the specified torque. Refer to See:
Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD).
3. Install side bearing adjusters into gear carrier.
4. Apply gear oil to side bearings. Install differential case assembly with side bearing outer races
into gear carrier. 5. Apply multi-purpose grease to differential lock position connector.
CAUTION: Do not reuse sensor connector. 6. Connect differential lock solenoid harness (B) and
differential lock position switch connector (A). Then install it to gear carrier, tighten to the
specified torque. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD).
Arrow Indicate Front 7. Align paint matching mark on side bearing caps with that on gear carrier
and install side bearing caps on gear carrier without tightening to
specification.
Page 1514
Fuel Filter: Removal and Replacement
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
Removal and Installation
Short Wheel Base
Long Wheel Base
Page 2334
Diagnosis Sheet (CAN Type 11)
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
Diagnosis Sheet (CAN Type 11)
Page 3136
b. Align the transfer control device shaft cutout with the mark on the control shift rod, and install.
NOTE: Turn the transfer control device when the transfer control device connection does not
match.
c. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque. Refer to See: Transfer Case/Service and
Repair/Overhaul/Disassembly And Assembly.
3. Install the breather hose to the transfer control device. 4. Connect the transfer control device
connector. 5. After the installation, check the 4WD shift indicator pattern. If NG, adjust the position
between the transfer assembly and transfer control unit.
Refer to See: Transfer Case/Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Precaution For
Transfer Assembly And Transfer Control Unit Replacement.
Page 5619
Audible Warning Device: Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters
Combination Meter
COMBINATION METER
Reference Value
TERMINAL LAYOUT
PHYSICAL VALUES
Description and Operation
Power Distribution Relay: Description and Operation
STANDARDIZED RELAY
Description
NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided
into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays.
TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS
Page 2491
i. Once the entire VIN is entered (a second time), select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See
Figure 16.
j. Select [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen to complete the VIN registration process. See
Figure 17.
k. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Page 3005
Page 1210
Locations
Page 2578
4. Disconnect the adjustable pedal electric motor electrical connector. 5. Disconnect the adjustable
pedal electric motor memory electrical connector, if equipped. 6. Disconnect the accelerator
position sensor electrical connector. 7. Remove the two upper and one lower accelerator pedal
nuts. 8. Remove the adjustable accelerator pedal assembly.
CAUTION: Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly.
- Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket.
- Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal adjusting mechanism.
- Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling.
- Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Inspection After Installation Check that the accelerator pedal moves smoothly within the specified ranges.
- Depress and release the accelerator pedal to check that it returns smoothly to the original
released position.
- Perform an electrical inspection of the accelerator pedal position sensor. Refer to See: Testing
and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/VIN Registration See: Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning See:
Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning See:
Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning .
CAUTION: When the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor is disconnected,
perform "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to See: Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning.
NON-ADJUSTABLE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY Non-Adjustable Accelerator Pedal
Page 5575
Page 1773
^ CONSULT will display "CMPLT" in the top right corner of the screen when the IAVL procedure is
finished. See Figure 7.
f. Once the IAVL procedure is finished, proceed with step 7.
For 2005 and Later MY Vehicles ONLY: Enter VIN Into New Service Replacement ECM
7. Enter the VIN into the new service replacement ECM as follows:
a. Select [ENGINE] on the "Select System" screen. See Figure 8.
b. Select [WORK SUPPORT] on the "Select Diag Mode" screen. See Figure 9.
Page 873
Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Engine Cover.
2. Disconnect the harness connector from air cleaner case (upper). 3. Remove the air duct and
resonator assembly and air cleaner case. 4. Remove air cleaner filter and air cleaner case (lower) Add marks as necessary for easier installation.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 3056
27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example).
28. Select Select
29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example).
30. Select Confirm
Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1421 Stored
Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1421 Stored
Classification: EC09-014B
Reference: NTB09-048B
Date: April 21, 2011
2007-2009 TITAN AND ARMADA; MIL "ON" WITH DTC P1421 STORED
This bulletin has been amended. APPLIED VEHICLES, APPLIED VINS, and Table A and B have
been revised. Please discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007-2009 Titan (A60) 2007-2009 Armada (TA60)
APPLIED VINS and DATES: 2007-2008 Titan and Armada: All
2009 Titan: Vehicles built before 1N6AA0(***)9N312517 // April 7, 2009
2009 Armada: Vehicles built before 5N1AA08(**)9N614339 // April 7, 2009
IF YOU CONFIRM:
An Applied Vehicle has the MIL "ON" and DTC P1421 (Cold Start Control) stored in the ECM.
ACTION:
Confirm this bulletin applies.
Page 4740
CAUTION: Be sure to align the magnet coil pin with the hole in the compressor front head. 2. Install
the magnet coil harness clip using a screwdriver.
3. Install the pulley assembly using Tool and a wrench, then install the snap ring using snap ring
pliers.
Tool number : - (J-38873-A)
4. Install the clutch disc on the compressor shaft, together with the original shim(s). Press the
clutch disc down by hand. 5. Install the clutch pulley bolt using Tool, to prevent the clutch disc from
turning and tighten the bolt to specification.
Tool number : J-44614
CAUTION: After tightening the clutch pulley bolt, check that the clutch pulley rotates smoothly. 6.
Check the pulley clearance all the way around the clutch disc as shown.
Clutch disc-to-pulley clearance : 0.3 - 0.6 mm (0.012 - 0.024 in)
7. If the specified clearance is not obtained, replace the adjusting spacer to readjust.
Changing Differential Gear Oil
Fluid - Differential: Service and Repair Changing Differential Gear Oil
DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL
Changing Differential Gear Oil
DRAINING 1. Stop the engine. 2. Remove the drain plug from the front final drive assembly to drain
the differential gear oil. 3. Install the drain plug with sealant applied on the threads to the front final
drive assembly. Tighten to the specified torque. Refer to See: Service
and Repair/Overhaul/Front Final Drive M205.
- Use High Performance Thread Sealant or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type
Specifications.
FILLING 1. Remove the filler plug from the front final drive assembly.
2. Fill the front final drive assembly with new differential gear oil until the level reaches the specified
level near the filler plug hole.
Differential gear oil grade and capacity : Refer to See: Maintenance.
3. Install the filler plug with sealant applied on the threads to the front final drive assembly. Tighten
to the specified torque. Refer to See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/Front Final Drive M205.
- Use High Performance Thread Sealant or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type
Specifications.
Page 4890
Air Bag: Service and Repair Front Passenger Air Bag Module
FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG MODULE
Removal and Installation
The passenger air bag module originally installed in the vehicle uses direct-connect style harness
connectors. Service replacement passenger air bag modules use tab-locking style harness
connectors. If the passenger air bag module is replaced or if the direct-connect harness connectors
are damaged, the vehicle wiring harness must be modified to allow connection of the service
replacement passenger air bag module. Follow the wiring harness modification procedure.
REMOVAL
CAUTION: Do not attempt to repair or replace damaged direct-connect front passenger air bag module
connectors. If a direct-connect harness connector is damaged, the front passenger air bag must be
replaced and the wiring harness modified.
- Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least
3 minutes.
- Always work from the side of or under front passenger air bag module.
1. Remove the glove box. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard /
Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Instrument Lower Panel RH And Glove Box/Removal And Installation.
2. Remove 2 nuts (through glove box opening) retaining front passenger air bag module to
instrument panel crossmember. 3. Disconnect the air bag module electrical connectors. For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors, refer to See: Service and Repair.
4. Remove the instrument panel assembly from the vehicle. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior
Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument
Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Panel Assembly/Removal And
Installation.
5. Remove front passenger air bag module nuts and remove air bag module from the instrument
panel assembly.
CAUTION: When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front of air bag module.
- Always place front passenger air bag module with caution label side facing upward.
Do not insert any foreign objects (screwdriver, etc.) into air bag module or harness connectors.
- Do not disassemble air bag module.
- Do not use old nuts after removal; replace with new nuts.
- Do not expose the front passenger air bag module to temperatures exceeding 90°C (194°F).
Page 140
Physical Values
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Physical Values
PHYSICAL VALUES
Specifications
Fuel Pressure: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Fuel Pressure
Page 3666
Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair VDC/TCS/ABS
ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY)
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to
See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 3. Drain the brake fluid.
Refer to See: Hydraulic System/Brake Fluid/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 4.
Disconnect the actuator harness connector from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
CAUTION: To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from
being damaged.
- Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is
splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately.
5. Disconnect the brake tubes. 6. Remove the three bolts and remove the ABS actuator and
electric unit (control unit).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: To install, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench (commercial service tools).
- Always tighten brake tubes to specification when installing.
Never reuse drained brake fluid.
Page 4166
TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS
Page 2200
7. Select VIN Registration
8. Select Next
9. Make sure the ignition is ON with engine OFF.
10. Select Start
Page 6187
Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair
FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR
Removal and Installation
FRONT DOOR GLASS
Removal 1. Remove the front door speaker. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional
Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Speaker/Service and
Repair/MID Audio/Front Door Speaker.
2. Remove the hole cover over rear glass bolt. 3. Operate the power window main switch to
raise/lower the door window until the glass bolts can be seen. 4. Remove the inside seal. 5.
Remove the glass bolts.
6. While holding the front door glass, raise it at the rear end and pull the glass out of the sash
toward the outside of the door.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Glass bolts : 6.1 N.m (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb)
Fitting Inspection
Locations
Page 1195
4. Paint alignment marks on the RH bank (A) timing chain links (C) and LH bank (B) timing chain
links (D) and align with the camshaft sprocket
alignment marks (E) and (F).
5. Remove the chain tensioner (LH) using the following steps.
WARNING: Plunger, spring, and spring seat pop out when squeezing return-proof clip without
holding plunger head. It may cause serious injuries. Always hold plunger head when removing.
a. Squeeze return-proof clip ends using suitable tool and push the plunger into the tensioner body.
b. Secure plunger using stopper pin.
- Stopper pin is made from hard wire approximately 1 mm (0.04 in) in diameter. c. Remove the
bolts and the chain tensioner.
NOTE: Stop plunger in the fully extended position using return-proof clip (1) if stopper pin is removed.
- Push the plunger (2) into the chain tensioner body while squeezing the return-proof clip (1).
Secure it using stopper pin (3).
6. Remove the chain tensioner cover from the front cover using Tool.
Page 281
2. Select Direct Diagnostic Mode icon
3. Select System Diagnosis
Locations
Page 4006
SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal"
condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Page 2731
Page 2053
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations
Page 118
IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) - Part 2
Specifications
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Mass Air Flow Sensor
Page 1489
Variable Valve Timing Actuator Position Sensor: Service and Repair Intake Valve Timing Control
Position Sensor (RH)
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL
Intake Valve Timing Control Position Sensor (RH)
REMOVAL 1. Remove engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Cover. 2. Disconnect intake valve timing control position
sensor connector (RH).
3. Remove intake valve timing control position sensor (RH) (1) from Intake valve timing control
solenoid valve cover (RH) (3).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Replace the O-ring (2) of the intake valve timing control position sensor with a new one,
then lubricate O-ring with engine oil before installing.
Intake valve timing control position sensor bolt : 9.6 N.m (0.98 kg-m, 85 in-lb)
Page 1826
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Disclaimer
Page 3251
CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM.
7. Install control valve with TCM in transmission case.
CAUTION: Make sure that turbine revolution sensor is securely installed into turbine revolution sensor hole.
- Hang down revolution sensor harness toward outside so as not to disturb installation of control
valve with TCM.
- Adjust A/T assembly harness connector of control valve with TCM to terminal hole of transmission
case.
- Assemble it so that manual valve cutout is engaged with manual plate projection.
8. Install bolts (A), (B) and (C) in control valve with TCM.
Page 2737
Fuel Injector: Testing and Inspection Component Inspection
FUEL INJECTOR
Component Inspection
FUEL INJECTOR 1. Disconnect fuel injector harness connector.
2. Check resistance between terminals as shown in the figure.
Resistance: 11.1 - 14.5 ohms [at 10 - 60°C (50 - 140°F)]
Page 1077
Fuse: Testing and Inspection
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
Fuse
- If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse.
- Use fuse of specified rating. Never use fuse of more than specified rating.
- Do not partially install fuse; always insert it into fuse holder properly.
- Remove fuse for "ELECTRICAL PARTS (BAT)" if vehicle is not used for a long period of time.
Page 2486
d. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds, then
e. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" again for 10 seconds (see Figure 2).
f. Proceed with step 6.
Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL)
NOTE:
Make sure all electrical loads are turned OFF, including A/C, defroster, radio, lights, etc. while
performing the following procedures. Also, make sure the engine cooling fans are NOT operating
during the following procedures.
6. Perform the Idle Air Volume Learning procedure as follows:
a. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle.
b. Warm up engine and transmission to operating temperature.
c. In the [CONSULT WORK SUPPORT] mode, select [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. See Figure 3.
NOTE:
^ If IDLE AIR VOL LEARN is not shown as a SELECT WORK ITEM on CONSULT, the vehicle
does not need the procedure.
^ In this case only, this bulletin is complete, no further action is needed.
Page 2321
Past Error -- Short Circuit -- When the symptoms listed below exist, a short circuit of the CAN
communication line is a possible cause.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagram Information and Instructions
Connector Symbols
HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS
Connector symbols
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the
direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector.
For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements,
"Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals
Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring
diagrams.
Sample/Wiring Diagram -Example-
A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics
Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics
Classification: AT09-016A
Reference: NTB10-003A
Date: February 11, 2010
5 SPEED A/T DTC DIAGNOSES FOR P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759,
P1764, P1769, P1774
This bulletin has been amended. Additional DTCs were applied. Discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2003 - 2010 Nissan vehicles with 5-Speed A/T
APPLIED TRANSMISSION: RE5R05A ONLY
SERVICE INFORMATION
If one or more DTCs listed below are found stored in Self Diagnosis, use the REPAIR FLOW
CHART shown below to assist in diagnosis.
^ DTCs: P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
If DTC(s) not listed above is/are found stored in Self Diagnosis, this bulletin does not apply. Refer
to ASIST and the appropriate Service Manual for diagnostic procedure(s) as needed.
Testing and Inspection
Fusible Link: Testing and Inspection
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
Fusible Link
1 : Fusible link
A melted fusible link can be detected either by visual inspection or by feeling with finger tip. If its
condition is questionable, use circuit tester or test lamp.
CAUTION: If fusible link should melt, it is possible that critical circuit
(power supply or large current carrying circuit) is shorted. In such a case, carefully check and
eliminate cause of malfunction. Never wrap outside of fusible link with vinyl tape. Important:
Never let fusible link touch any other wiring harness, vinyl or rubber parts.
Page 5886
If the moisture trickles, drips, or pools, it may not be considered normal and the lamp assembly
may have a water leak path. See Figure 2 for an example.
If large drops of water collect inside the lens, refer to the flow chart below to find the next step.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Page 4232
2. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connectors and ground.
Does continuity exist? YES - Inspection End. NO - Repair or replace harness.
Page 5247
^ LH motor: Rotate counterclockwise.
^ RH motor: Rotate clockwise.
2. Install the power window motor onto the regulator.
3. Install the regulator assembly into the door.
4. Secure regulator assembly to door inner with fasteners then install glass into door and attach to
regulator.
5. Raise the glass to the top position.
CAUTION:
Do not operate the glass automatically to raise the glass to the top.
Page 5737
Odometer: Description and Operation System Description
METER SYSTEM
ODO/TRIP METER : System Description
The vehicle speed signal and the memory signals from the meter memory circuit are processed by
the combination meter and the mileage is displayed.
HOW TO CHANGE THE DISPLAY FOR ODO/TRIP METER Refer to odo/trip meter operating
instructions.
Body - Sunroof Inoperative/Erratic Operation
Sunroof / Moonroof Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Sunroof Inoperative/Erratic
Operation
Classification: BT07-032A
Reference: NTB07-070A
Date: September 25, 2009
SUNROOF DOES NOT OPERATE PROPERLY
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles section has been revised. No other changes
have been made. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007 - 2009 Armada (TA60) 2007 - 2009 Frontier (D40) 2007 - 2009
Maxima (A34, A35) 2007 - 2009 Pathfinder (R51) 2007 - 2009 Quest (V42) 2007 - 2009 Titan (A60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
Sunroof auto operation will not work or sunroof does not operate properly:
^ When the battery has been disconnected or discharged
^ When the sunroof motor has been disconnected from power
^ When the sunroof motor was changed
ACTION
Perform the following initialization procedure:
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Push and hold the sunroof tilt switch in the forward (DOWN) position until the sunroof is fully
closed.
3. After the sunroof has closed all the way, push and hold the tilt switch forward (DOWN) again for
more than 2 seconds to re-learn motor position.
4. Initialization is complete if the sunroof operates normally.
NOTE:
If the sunroof is still not operating properly after initialization, refer to ASIST and section RF of the
Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for further diagnosis and repair information.
Page 3608
Page 2315
Past Error -- Open Circuit -- Review CAN communication signal chart based on information
received from the interview with the customer and on past error information from SELF-DIAG
RESULTS and CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR. 1. SELF-DIAG RESULTS: Inspect the control units
indicating "U1000" or "U1001" on SELF-DIAG RESULTS.
Suspension - Front End Popping/Squeaking/Clunking
Noises
Stabilizer Bushing: Customer Interest Suspension - Front End Popping/Squeaking/Clunking Noises
Classification: FA10-003A
Reference: NTB10-072A
Date: October 6, 2010
FRONT SUSPENSION NOISE
This bulletin has been amended. The PARTS INFORMATION section has been revised. No other
changes have been made. Please discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) 2005-2010 Frontier (D40) 2005-2010 Pathfinder
(R51) 2004-2010 Titan (A60) 2005-2010 Xterra (N50)
APPLIED VINS/DATES: 2004-2009 Armada: All 2010 Armada built before: 5N1(*)A(*)N(**)AN
6067281 Oct 23, 2009 2004-2009 Titan: All 2010 Titan built before: 1N6(*)A(****)AN 3037881 Oct
23, 2009 2005-2010 Frontier/Pathfinder/Xterra: All
IF YOU CONFIRM
A noise (clunking, squeaking, popping) can be heard when performing at least one of the following
actions:
^ turning the steering wheel left or right
^ driving over speed bumps
^ driving on rough roads
^ accelerating or decelerating
AND
The noise is coming from the front stabilizer bar bushing.
ACTIONS
Replace the front stabilizer bar bushing on both sides (RH & LH) with the part listed in the Parts
Information section of this bulletin.
^ Refer to the FSU section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for removal and
installation instructions.
Specifications
Flex Plate: Specifications
Drive Plate
Torque: 88.2 N.m (9.0 Kg-m, 65 ft-lb)
Locations
Specifications
Idle Speed: Specifications
Idle Speed
Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Ignition Timing: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check
IDLE SPEED
With CONSULT-III Check idle speed in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-III.
With GST Check idle speed with GST.
IGNITION TIMING 1. Attach timing light to loop wire as shown.
2. Check ignition timing.
Page 2377
13. Use compressed air to remove any remaining debris.
CAUTION:
DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may
cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders.
14. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it.
15. Tilt the manifold/catalyst/front tube so that the metal debris falls out of the part.
16. Apply compressed air through the boss to blow out any remaining debris.
CAUTION:
DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may
cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders.
17. Install the new sensor as described in the applicable Electronic Service Manual (ESM).
Locations
Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations
Page 6230
Page 1462
Timing Cover: Service and Repair
Service Data Update
Date: August 19, 2010
ARMADA AND TITAN; REVISED UPPER OIL PAN AND TIMING CHAIN CASE PROCEDURES
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Armada (TA6O) 2004-2010 Titan (A60)
SERVICE INFORMATION
Removal and installation procedures for the upper oil pan and timing chain case have been
updated to no longer require engine removal and installation.
Nissan Service Data for 2004-2010 Armada and Titan vehicles will be updated with these new
procedures. Updated Service Data will be distributed to the field as quickly as possible.
The standard Flat Rate Times will be adjusted to reflect the new procedures.
Until the updated Service Data is made available, please use the procedures shown below for any
upper oil pan and timing chain case-related repairs on an Applied Vehicle.
OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER
Exploded View
Removal and Installation
Page 4727
Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Intake Sensor
INTAKE SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the instrument panel. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal
and Replacement/Instrument Panel Assembly/Removal And Installation.
2. Disconnect the intake sensor electrical connector.
NOTE: The intake sensor is located on the top of the heater and cooling unit assembly next to the
A/C evaporator cover. 3. Twist the intake sensor to remove the intake sensor from the heater and
cooling unit assembly.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 5586
BCM (Body Control Module)
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
Wiring Diagram
Lighting - Exterior Lamp Fogging Inspection
Parking Lamp: All Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Exterior Lamp Fogging Inspection
Classification: EL03-030E
Reference: NTB03-074E
Date: January 4, 2010
EXTERIOR LAMP FOGGING
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles and Service Procedure sections have been
revised. Please discard all previous versions.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2001-2010 Nissan, All Models
SERVICE INFORMATION
Occasionally customers may notice water vapor or fog in the exterior lamps. This is generally NOT
due to a defect.
The following information, illustrations, and flow chart are provided to help you in determining if an
incident for water/condensation in the lamps is normal or not.
All current exterior lamp assemblies are vented to the atmosphere (not sealed).
^ This is necessary to allow for expansion and contraction of air from temperature "variations"
(warmer or colder) without damage to the lamp.
^ Moisture in the air sometimes "travels" into and out of the lamp assembly through these vents.
^ Certain environmental conditions may cause moisture to condense.
^ The fogging/cloudiness should disappear over time when the lamp is in a dry environment.
Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the exterior lights based on environmental conditions
or sudden temperature changes (such as in a car wash). This is normal. See Figure 1.
NOTE:
This condensation can appear anywhere on the outer lens, typically at its coldest location.
Specifications
Vacuum Brake Booster: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Brake Booster
Page 630
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations
Page 3750
4. Remove piston seals from cylinder body, using a suitable tool.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage cylinder inner wall.
- Do not reuse piston seals.
CALIPER INSPECTION
Cylinder Body Check inside surface of cylinder for score, rust, wear, damage or foreign materials. If
any of the above conditions are observed, replace cylinder body. Minor damage from rust or
foreign materials may be eliminated by polishing surface with a fine emery paper. Replace cylinder
body if necessary.
CAUTION: Use new brake fluid for cleaning. Do not use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene.
Torque Member Check for wear, cracks, and damage. If damage or deformation is present, replace
the affected part.
Piston Check piston for score, rust, wear, damage or presence of foreign materials. Replace if any
of the above conditions are observed.
CAUTION: Piston sliding surface is plated, do not polish with emery paper even if rust or foreign
materials are stuck to sliding surface.
Sliding Pins, and Sliding Pin Boots Check sliding pin and sliding pin boot for wear, damage, and
cracks. If damage or deformation is present, replace the affected part.
CAUTION: Trailing/upper sliding pin must be replaced at each service.
ASSEMBLY
CAUTION: Do not use NISSAN Rubber Grease (KRE00 00010, KRE00 00010 01) when
assembling.
1. Apply Molykote M-77 grease to new piston seals and insert seals into grooves on cylinder body.
CAUTION: Do not reuse piston seals.
Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption
Recovery
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Programming
Interruption Recovery
Classification: EC10-015
Reference: NTB10-078
Date: June 21, 2010
REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE
SERVICE INFORMATION
A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption
Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin.
While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop
(become interrupted) before it is 100% complete.
One of two messages may appear:
^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe.
^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0".
In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if
the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped.
NOTE:
ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III.
The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service
Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later.
IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING
^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery.
^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads.
^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable.
^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter.
Page 1050
Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Refrigerant
Type......................................................................................................................................................
................................................... HFC 134a (R-134a)
Page 819
System Diagram
Speedometer Module: Description and Operation System Diagram
METER SYSTEM
SPEEDOMETER : System Diagram
Page 4469
With the steering linkage disconnected, the cable may snap by turning the steering wheel beyond
the limited number of turns. The spiral cable can be turned counterclockwise about 2.5 turns from
the neutral position.
Page 6044
Combination Switch: Service and Repair
LIGHTING and TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove steering column cover. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Panel Assembly/Exploded View.
2. While pressing tabs, pull lighting and turn signal switch toward driver door and disconnect from
the base.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 1838
Page 3826
Brake Hose/Line: Service and Repair Rear Brake Piping And Brake Hose
BRAKE TUBE AND HOSE
Removal and Installation of Rear Brake Piping and Brake Hose
REMOVAL 1. Drain brake fluid. Refer to See: Brake Fluid/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement.
2. Using a flare nut wrench, remove brake tube from brake hose. 3. Remove lock plate and brake
hose from bracket.
4. Remove brake hose connection (A) from cylinder body.
NOTE: Discard the copper washer, do not reuse.
INSTALLATION 1. Install brake hose connection (A) and new copper washer to cylinder body and
tighten to specification. Refer to See: Diagrams.
CAUTION: Do not reuse copper washer. 2. Insert brake hose end through bracket, then secure it to
bracket with lock plate.
Page 1230
Piston Selection Table
NOTE: The piston is available together with piston pin as an assembly.
- The piston pin (piston pin bore) grade is provided only for the parts installed at the plant. For
service parts, no grades can be selected (only 0 grade is available).
HOW TO SELECT CONNECTING ROD BEARING
When New Connecting Rod and Crankshaft are Used 1. Apply the big end inside diameter grade
stamped on the connecting rod side face to the row in the "Connecting Rod Bearing Selection
Table".
2. Apply the pin diameter grade stamped on the crankshaft front side to the column in the
"Connecting Rod Bearing Selection Table".
3. Read the symbol at the cross point of the selected row and column in the "Connecting Rod
Bearing Selection Table". 4. Apply the symbol obtained to the "Connecting Rod Bearing Grade
Table" to select.
When Crankshaft and Connecting Rod are Reused 1. Measure dimensions of the big end inside
diameter of the connecting rod and diameter of the crankshaft pin individually. 2. Apply the
measured dimension to the "Connecting Rod Bearing Selection Table". 3. The following steps are
the same as in "When New Connecting Rod and Crankshaft are Used".
Connecting Rod Bearing Selection Table
Page 2516
4. Select Engine
5. Select OK
6. Select Work Support
Locations
Page 1002
NOTE: The A/T fluid level will be significantly affected by the A/T fluid temperature as shown.
Therefore monitor the A/T fluid temperature data using the CONSULT-III.
a. Connect CONSULT-III to data link connector. b. Select "MAIN SIGNALS" in "DATA MONITOR"
mode for "A/T" with CONSULT-III. c. Read out the value of "ATF TEMP 1".
6. Re-check the A/T fluid level at A/T fluid temperatures of approximately 65°C (149°F) using the
"HOT" range on the A/T fluid level gauge as
shown. The HOT range is between 50° - 80° C (122° - 176° F).
CAUTION: When wiping the A/T fluid from the A/T fluid level gauge, always use lint-free paper, not a cloth.
- To check the A/T fluid level, insert the A/T fluid level gauge until the cap contacts the top of the
A/T fluid charging pipe, with the gauge reversed from the normal inserted position as shown.
7. Check the A/T fluid condition. If the A/T fluid is very dark or has some burned smell, there may be an internal problem with the
transmission. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Transmission Cooler/Service and Repair/A/T Fluid Cooler Cleaning. Flush
the transmission cooling system after repairing the transmission.
- If the A/T fluid contains frictional material (clutches, bands, etc.), replace the radiator and flush the
transmission cooler lines using cleaning solvent and compressed air after repairing the
transmission.
8. Install the A/T fluid level gauge in the A/T fluid charging pipe. 9. Tighten the A/T fluid level gauge
bolt to specification.
A/T fluid level gauge bolt : Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Removal and
Page 3575
Shift Indicator: Description and Operation System Description
METER SYSTEM
SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR : System Description
The TCM receives A/T indicator signals from the park/neutral position (PNP) switch. The TCM then
sends A/T position indicator signals to the combination meter via CAN communication lines. The
combination meter indicates the received shift position.
Page 1708
Capacity Specifications
Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications
Engine Oil Capacity
With filter ..............................................................................................................................................
.............................................. 6-7/8 U.S. qts (6.5 L)
Without filter .........................................................................................................................................
............................................... 6-1/2 U.S. qts (6.2 L)
Page 5718
2. Check the fuel level on level gauge. If the fuel gauge indicates more than the level as shown (full
or almost full), drain the fuel from the fuel tank
until the fuel gauge indicates the level as shown, or less.
- If the fuel pump does not operate, use the following procedure to drain the fuel to the specified
level. a. Insert a suitable hose of less than 15 mm (0.59 in) diameter into the fuel filler pipe through
the fuel filler opening to drain the fuel from fuel
filler pipe.
b. Remove the LH rear wheel and tire. Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and
Repair/Rotation .
c. Remove the fuel filler pipe shield. d. Disconnect the fuel filler hose from the fuel filler pipe and
disconnect the vent hose quick connector.
e. Insert a suitable hose into the fuel tank through the fuel filler hose to drain the fuel from the fuel
tank.
3. Release the fuel pressure from the fuel lines. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Fuel Pressure Check .
4. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 5. Remove the three nuts and remove fuel line pump
protector.
6. Disconnect the EVAP hose at the EVAP canister. 7. Disconnect the fuel level sensor, fuel filter,
and fuel pump assembly electrical connector and the fuel feed hose.
Page 2504
Page 1109
2. Mount transmitter on rim and slowly tighten transmitter nut to specification.
CAUTION: Do not over tighten transmitter nut.
Transmitter nut : 7.7 N.m (0.79 kg-m, 68 in-lb)
3. Place wheel on turntable of tire machine. Ensure that transmitter is 270 degrees from
mounting/dismounting head.
NOTE: Do not touch transmitter with mounting head. 4. Lubricate tire well, and install second side
of tire as normal. Ensure that tire does not rotate relative to rim. 5. Inflate tire and balance wheel
and tire assembly. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Balancing Wheels. 6. Install wheel and tire
assembly in appropriate wheel position on vehicle.
NOTE: If replacing the transmitter, then transmitter wake up operation must be performed. Refer to
See: Tire Monitoring System/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmitter
Wake Up Operation.
7. Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction
Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing
and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing Control
Unit/Description See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing
Control Unit/Special Repair Requirement See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes /
Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Adjustment Of
Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position/Description See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock
Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Adjustment Of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position/Special Repair Requirement.
Page 925
^ Pulley should turn with some dragging
^ If it locks or has unusual resistance, replace the alternator.
Specifications
Knock Sensor: Specifications
Knock Sensor Torque ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................... 21.1 Nm, 16 ft lb
Page 4633
Wheel Fastener: Specifications
Wheel Nut
Torque: 133 N.m (14 kg-m, 98 ft-lb)
When installing wheels, tighten them diagonally by dividing the work two to three times in order to
prevent the wheels from developing any distortion.
Capacity Specifications
Refrigerant Oil: Capacity Specifications
OIL
Lighting - Xenon Headlamp Service Info.
Headlamp Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Xenon Headlamp Service Info.
Classification: EL10-021A
Reference: NTB10-061A
Date: June 29, 2010
XENON HEAD LAMP SERVICE
This bulletin has been amended. The Parts Information has been updated. Please discard previous
versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Nissan with xenon headlamps
IF YOU CONFIRM
A xenon headlamp is not functioning because of an issue inside the headlamp assembly (an
internal issue),
ACTION
Refer to the appropriate Service Manual, follow the diagnostic and repair information for xenon
headlamps.
NOTE: ^ In most cases, replacement of a bulb or HID control unit will solve the incident.
^ Do not replace the entire xenon headlamp assembly when a bulb or HID control unit is available
to solve the incident, if one should occur.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
^ Reference the current Nissan Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for the
repair performed.
^ For HID control unit replacement, use Operation Code RJ36AA.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 2332
Diagnosis Sheet (CAN Type 9)
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
Diagnosis Sheet (CAN Type 9)
System Diagram
Shift Indicator: Description and Operation System Diagram
METER SYSTEM
SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR : System Diagram
Specifications
Steering Gear: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Steering Gear
Page 3836
- Never reuse drained brake fluid.
- Refill brake system with new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system. Refer to See: Brake
Bleeding/Service and Repair.
Page 2135
4. Select Engine
5. Select OK
6. Select Work Support
Page 1437
- Install the camshaft sprocket INT (VTC) (A) and camshaft sprockets EXH (B) by selectively using
the groove of the dowel pin according to the bank. (Common part used for both exhaust banks.)
NOTE: Use the groove marked "R" for RH bank and "L" for LH bank. Lock the hexagonal part of the camshaft in the same way as for removal, and tighten the bolts.
3. Install the crankshaft sprockets for both banks. Install LH bank crankshaft sprocket (B) and RH bank crankshaft sprocket (C) so that their flange
side (A) (the larger diameter side without teeth) faces in the direction shown.
NOTE: The same parts are used but facing directions are different. 4. Install the timing chains and
associated parts. Align the alignment mark on each sprocket and the timing chain for installation.
CAUTION: Before installing timing chain tensioner, it is possible to change the position of alignment mark on
timing chain and each sprocket. After the alignment marks are aligned, keep them aligned by
holding them by hand.
- Install the slack guides and tension guides onto the correct side by checking the identification
mark on the surface.
- Install the chain tensioner with the plunger locked in with the stopper pin.
CAUTION: Before and after the installation of the chain tensioner, make sure that the alignment mark on the
timing chain is not out of alignment.
- After installing the chain tensioner, remove the stopper pin to release the chain tensioner. Make
sure the chain tensioner is released.
- To avoid chain-link skipping of the timing chain, do not move crankshaft or camshafts until the
front cover is installed.
5. In the same way as for the RH bank, install the timing chain and associated parts on the LH
bank. 6. Install the oil pump.
7. Install the oil pump drive spacer as follows:
Locations
Page 453
REAR WHEEL SENSOR ROTOR
Removal Remove the rear axle shaft assembly. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive
Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and Repair/Rear Axle Shaft.
NOTE: It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle shaft assembly to replace the rear wheel
sensor rotor.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the old rear wheel sensor rotor.
- Do not reuse the rear axle oil seal. The rear axle oil seal must be replaced every time the rear
axle shaft assembly is removed from the rear axle shaft housing.
Page 4294
Physical Values
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Physical Values
PHYSICAL VALUES
Recall PC049 - Inspect/Replace Front Lower Control Arm
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-071A Date: 100825
Recall PC049 - Inspect/Replace Front Lower Control Arm
Reference: NTB10-071A
Date: August 25, 2010
VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN EQUIPMENT/SERVICE PARTS SUSPENSION
LOWER LINK
This bulletin has been amended. The lower link inspection has been clarified. Please discard
previous versions of this bulletin.
CAMPAIGN ID#: PC049
NHTSA# 10E-019
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) 2004-2010 Titan (A60) 2005-2010 Frontier (D40)
2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2010 Xterra (N50)
INTRODUCTION
Nissan is conducting a voluntary safety recall campaign for suspension lower link service parts that
fit MY 2004 through 2010 Armada and Titan and MY 2005 through 2010 Xterra, Pathfinder, and
Frontier vehicles. A small number of suspension lower link service parts sold between November
25, 2009 and May 14, 2010 may have welds that are out of specification.
Applied vehicle owners will be asked to take their vehicle to the dealer if a lower link on their
vehicle was replaced between November 25, 2009 and May 14, 2010 or if they do not know
whether a lower link was replaced during that time.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
If a vehicle owner believes his or her vehicle may have received affected suspension lower link
service parts, it is the dealer's responsibility to inspect and, if necessary, replace the lower links
pursuant to the instructions on this bulletin.
Applied Vehicles with the original factory installed lower links are not subject to this service parts
recall campaign, however some 2010MY Applied Vehicles may be subject to the Suspension
Lower Link vehicles recall campaign (PC047). Please review Service Comm to confirm campaign
eligibility.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number PC049 to this campaign. This number must appear on
all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
Page 148
Page 3083
Page 3972
SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal"
condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
A/T Fluid Cooler Cleaning
Transmission Cooler: Service and Repair A/T Fluid Cooler Cleaning
A/T FLUID COOLER
A/T Fluid Cooler Cleaning
Whenever an A/T is repaired, overhauled, or replaced, the A/T fluid cooler mounted in the radiator
must be inspected and cleaned. Metal debris and friction material, if present, can become trapped
in the A/T fluid cooler. This debris can contaminate the newly serviced A/T or, in severe cases, can
block or restrict the flow of A/T fluid. In either case, malfunction of the newly serviced A/T may
result. Debris, if present, may build up as A/T fluid enters the cooler inlet. It will be necessary to
back flush the cooler through the cooler outlet in order to flush out any built up debris.
A/T FLUID COOLER CLEANING PROCEDURE 1. Position a drain pan under the A/T inlet and
outlet fluid cooler tube to cooler hose connection. 2. Put a different color matching mark on each
cooler tube to cooler hose connection to aid in assembly.
CAUTION: Use paint to make the matching mark. Do not damage the tubes or hose.
3. Disconnect the fluid cooler inlet and outlet rubber hoses from the steel cooler tubes.
NOTE: Replace the cooler hoses if rubber material from the hose remains on the tube fitting. 4.
Drain any A/T fluid from the cooler hose.
5. Insert the extension adapter hose of a can of Transmission Cooler Cleaner (Nissan P/N
999MP-AM006) into the cooler outlet hose.
CAUTION: Wear safety glasses and rubber gloves when spraying the Transmission Cooler Cleaner.
- Spray cooler cleaner only with adequate ventilation.
- Avoid contact with eyes and skin.
- Do not breath vapors or spray mist.
6. Hold the hose and can as high as possible and spray Transmission Cooler Cleaner in a
continuous stream into the cooler outlet hose until fluid
flows out of the cooler inlet hose for 5 seconds.
Interior - Passenger Power Seat Switch Replacement
Technical Service Bulletin # 08-039B Date: 100119
Interior - Passenger Power Seat Switch Replacement
Classification: EL07-038B
Reference: NTB08-039B
Date: January 19, 2010
2004-2010 TITAN AND ARMADA; PASSENGER SEAT SWITCH SERVICEABILITY
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles and Service Procedure sections have been
revised. Please discard all previous copies of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Titan (A60) - Bucket Seats Only 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) Bucket Seats Only
IF YOU CONFIRM
The passenger side power seat switch needs to be replaced for any reason.
ACTION
Refer to the Service Procedure to replace the switch.
WARNING:
^ This vehicle seat is equipped with the Occupant Classification System (OCS) part of the
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS).
^ In this Service Procedure you will be removing and re-installing the outboard (switch side) J-clip
of the seat bottom cover.
^ Only the outboard J-clip should be removed. Removal of any other J-Clips may affect OCS
performance.
^ When re-installing the outboard J-Clip, make sure the J-Clip is securely attached. A loose J-Clip
may affect OCS performance.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
Page 1974
Specifications
Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Check Valve
Page 1329
EM-1
Page 429
7. Using a plastic pry tool, remove the switch knobs and switch plate.
8. Remove the four bolts securing the seat pan to the frame. See Figure 3.
Page 697
CONSULT-III Checking System
CONSULT-III CHECKING SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram
Page 3609
Control Module: Service and Repair
TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Switch 4WD shift switch to 2WD and set transfer assembly to 2WD.
CAUTION: When removing transfer control unit, transfer state must be at 2WD. 2. Turn the ignition
switch OFF and disconnect negative battery terminal. 3. Remove the lower instrument panel RH.
Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Lower Panel RH And Glove Box/Removal And
Installation.
4. Disconnect the two transfer control unit connectors. 5. Remove the transfer control unit bolts. 6.
Remove the transfer control unit.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. When installing the transfer control unit, tighten bolts to the specified torque.
Transfer control unit bolts : 5.1 N.m (0.52 kg-m, 45 in-lb)
- After the installation, check 4WD shift indicator pattern. If NG, adjust position between transfer
assembly and transfer control unit. Refer to See: Transfer Case/Service Precautions/Technician
Safety Information/Precaution For Transfer Assembly And Transfer Control Unit Replacement.
Page 1438
- Install so that the front mark on the front edge of the oil pump drive spacer faces the front of the
engine.
- Insert the oil pump drive spacer according to the directions of the crankshaft key and the two flat
surfaces of the oil pump inner rotor.
- If the positional relationship does not allow the insertion, rotate the oil pump inner rotor to allow
the oil pump drive spacer to be inserted.
8. Install the front oil seal using suitable tool.
CAUTION: Do not scratch or make burrs on the circumference of the oil seal.
9. Install the chain tensioner cover. Apply liquid gasket as shown.
Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type
Specifications.
10. Install the front cover as follows:
a. Install a new O-ring on the cylinder block.
b. Apply liquid gasket as shown.
Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type
Specifications.
c. Check again that the timing alignment marks on the timing chain and on each sprocket are
aligned. Then install the front cover.
Page 3797
IMPORTANT:
If you remove the brake pad retainers from the torque member, lift them in the direction indicated
by the arrow (see Figure 3) so retainers will not deform.
Page 3068
^ Check and compare your current ECM Part Number to Table A or B (as it applies) shown above.
If the part number does not match one in Table A or B, this bulletin does not apply. Go back to
ASIST for further diagnostic and repair information.
If this bulletin applies, reprogram the ECM.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You
MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential
to successfully completing this repair.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Electrical Units Location
Body Control Module: Locations Electrical Units Location
Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics
Alignment: Customer Interest Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics
Classification: ST08-001D
Reference: NTB08-097D
Date: April 26, 2011
DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER
This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The
off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this
bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R
SERVICE INFORMATION
If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic
Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue.
Diagnostic Flow Chart
Road Test
Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair.
IMPORTANT:
^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as:
> Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory)
> Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires
> Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire
Page 4406
Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Transmitter (Pressure Sensor)
REMOVAL
CAUTION: DO NOT use center hole cone-type clamping machines to hold the wheel assembly
during tire removal/installation or balancing or damage to the wheel paint, cladding or chrome may
result. Use only rim-type or universal lug-type clamping machines to hold the wheel assembly
during servicing. 1. Deflate tire. Unscrew transmitter nut and allow transmitter to fall into tire.
2. Gently bounce tire so that transmitter falls to bottom of tire. Place wheel and tire assembly on tire
changing machine and break both tire beads. Ensure that the transmitter remains at the bottom of
the tire while breaking the bead.
3. Turn tire so that valve hole is at bottom, and gently bounce the tire to ensure transmitter is near
valve hole. Carefully lift tire onto turntable and
position valve hole (and transmitter) 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head.
4. Lubricate tire well, and remove top side of tire. Reach inside the tire and remove the transmitter.
5. Remove the second side of the tire as normal.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: DO NOT use center hole cone-type clamping machines to hold the wheel assembly
during tire removal/installation or balancing or damage to the wheel paint, cladding or chrome may
result. Use only rim-type or universal lug-type clamping machines to hold the wheel assembly
during servicing.
1. Place first side of tire onto rim.
Page 828
The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure
2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road.
Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center
^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less.
^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less.
When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to
counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle
should be driven on a straight flat road.
Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle
pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This
condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side.
Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition
The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road.
^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering
correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on
a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane
during this time (7 seconds).
Page 3973
MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. -
The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Abbreviation List
ABBREVIATIONS
Abbreviation List
The following ABBREVIATIONS are used:
Page 5791
Page 1795
Attachment General Procedure
Page 3314
INSTALLATION 1. Apply multi-purpose grease to the lips of the new front oil seal.
Then drive the new front oil seal in evenly until it becomes flush with the gear carrier using Tool.
Tool number : ST15310000 ( - )
CAUTION: Do not reuse front oil seal.
- Do not incline the new front oil seal when installing.
- Apply multi-purpose grease to the lips and differential gear oil to the circumference of the new
front oil seal.
2. Install the companion flange to the drive pinion while aligning the matching marks. 3. Apply
anti-corrosive oil to the threads of the drive pinion and the seating surface of the new drive pinion
lock nut and new drive pinion lock nut
washer. Then adjust the drive pinion lock nut tightening torque using Tool A, and check the total
preload torque using Tool B.
- The total preload torque should be within the total preload torque specification. When not
replacing the collapsible spacer, it should also be equal to the measurement taken during removal
plus an additional 0.56 N.m (0.06 Kg-m, 5 in-lb).
- If the total preload torque is low, tighten the drive pinion lock nut in 6.8 N.m (0.69 Kg-m, 5ft-lb)
increments until the total preload torque is met.
CAUTION: Do not reuse drive pinion lock nut or drive pinion lock nut washer.
- Apply anti-corrosive oil to the threads of the drive pinion and the seating surface of the new drive
pinion lock nut.
- Adjust the drive pinion lock nut tightening torque to the lower limit first. Do not exceed the drive
pinion lock nut specified torque. Refer
Page 3809
1. Apply clean brake fluid to new piston seal and insert in to groove on cylinder body.
CAUTION: Do not reuse piston seal.
2. Apply clean brake fluid to piston and to piston boot, then install piston boot in to piston groove.
CAUTION: Do not reuse piston boot. 3. Insert into cylinder body by hand and insert piston boot
piston-side lip into piston groove.
CAUTION: Press piston evenly and vary the pressing point to prevent cylinder body inner wall from
being rubbed. 4. Apply rubber grease to sliding sleeves, then install sliding boots and sleeves to
cylinder body.
Page 3847
Brake Master Cylinder: Overhaul
With ABS
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER
With ABS
DISASSEMBLY
CAUTION: Master cylinder assembly cannot be disassembled.
- Do not drop parts. If a part is dropped, do not use it.
1. Pull reservoir tank off the master cylinder assembly. 2. Remove grommets from master cylinder
assembly and discard the grommets.
CAUTION: Discard the grommets, do not reuse. 3. Remove the fluid level sensor from the reservoir
tank.
ASSEMBLY
CAUTION: Never use mineral oil such as kerosene or gasoline during the cleaning and assembly process.
- Do not drop parts. If a part is dropped, do not use it.
1. Apply brake fluid or rubber grease to the new grommets, then insert the new grommets into the
master cylinder assembly.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the grommets. 2. Install reservoir tank onto the master cylinder assembly.
3. Install the fluid level sensor on the reservoir tank.
With ABLS/VDC/TCS
Page 2049
Page 5001
3. Insert the screwdriver into either of the slots shown in Figure 1.
4. Turn the screwdriver until the two cover pieces separate (see Figure 2).
5. Replace the battery.
^ Make sure the + side of the battery faces the bottom cover piece.
6. Reattach the two cover pieces by pushing them together.
7. Turn on the vehicle and confirm the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator is not illuminated
in the dot matrix display.
8. If the indicator is still illuminated:
a) Turn off and exit the vehicle, making sure to close the door.
b) Re-enter the vehicle and turn it on. The indicator should be off.
Page 1645
10. Remove the exhaust manifold (RH) (B) following the steps below.
- Arrow indicates Front
- A: Exhaust manifold (LH) a. Remove the engine mounting insulator. . b. Remove the exhaust
manifold cover. c. Remove the engine mounting bracket. . d. Remove the oil level gauge guide.
See: Engine/Engine Lubrication/Oil Pan/Service and Repair/Exploded View See: Engine/Engine
Lubrication/Oil Pan/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation.
e. Loosen the nuts in reverse order as shown using power tool. f.
Remove the exhaust manifold (RH) (B).
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Surface Distortion
- Check the flatness of each exhaust manifold flange surface using suitable tools.
Flatness limit : 0.3 mm (0.012 in)
- If measurement exceeds the limit, replace the exhaust manifold.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
- Install new exhaust manifold gasket with the top of the triangular up mark on it facing up and its
coated face (gray side) toward the exhaust manifold side.
Page 3974
CONSULT-III Checking System
CONSULT-III CHECKING SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram
Page 3549
b. Align the transfer control device shaft cutout with the mark on the control shift rod, and install.
NOTE: Turn the transfer control device when the transfer control device connection does not
match.
c. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque. Refer to See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/Disassembly And Assembly.
3. Install the breather hose to the transfer control device. 4. Connect the transfer control device
connector. 5. After the installation, check the 4WD shift indicator pattern. If NG, adjust the position
between the transfer assembly and transfer control unit.
Refer to See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Precaution For Transfer
Assembly And Transfer Control Unit Replacement.
Page 3714
2. Inspect the right side (inboard side) of the brake pedal pivot pin (see Figure 2). ^ See Figure 3
below for photos of OK and NG, conditions.
Page 826
SERVICE INFORMATION
If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic
Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue.
Diagnostic Flow Chart
Road Test
Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair.
IMPORTANT:
^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as:
> Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory)
> Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires
> Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire
Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics
in this bulletin.
^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification.
1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle:
^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge
^ Road Crown Gauge
NOTE:
Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use.
Page 2110
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Connect C-III to the vehicle to begin the reprogramming procedure.
^ If you are not familiar with the reprogramming procedure. Refer to "CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM
Reprogramming" general procedure.
Caution
2. When you get to the ECM Reprogramming screen shown in Figure 1, confirm this bulletin
applies as follows:
A. On your C-III screen, look at the Part Number column (see Figure 1).
Garage Jack and Safety Stand
Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair Garage Jack and Safety Stand
LIFTING POINT
Garage Jack and Safety Stand
CAUTION: Place a wooden or rubber block between safety stand and vehicle body when the
supporting body is flat.
Page 5845
Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation System Description
METER SYSTEM
A/T OIL TEMPERATURE GAUGE : System Description
The A/T oil temperature gauge indicates the A/T fluid temperature. The TCM (transmission control
module) provides an A/T fluid temperature signal to combination meter via CAN communication
lines.
Service and Repair
Blower Motor Switch: Service and Repair
VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL
Removal and Installation
Variable Blower Control - Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
REMOVAL 1. Remove the glove box assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Lower Panel RH And Glove Box/Removal And
Installation.
2. Disconnect the variable blower control electrical connector. 3. Remove the two screws and
remove the variable blower control.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 1700
CAUTION
2. When you get to the ECM Reprogramming screen shown in Figure 1, confirm this bulletin
applies as follows.
A. On your C-III screen, look at the Part Number column (see Figure 1):
^ If this column is blank (no part number listed), this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to
ASIST for further diagnostic information.
^ If a Part Number is listed, write it on the Repair Order.
Page 4357
Page 4681
HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS
Sample/wiring diagram -example- For detail, refer to following See: How To Read Wiring Diagrams/Description.
Description
HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS
Description
Page 4620
^ Make sure the tire is evenly positioned on the lower safety humps.
5. WARNING: Do not exceed the tire manufactures recommended bead seating inflation pressure.
Generally this is 40psi.
If the bead does not seat with the appropriate pressure:
a. Break down the tire/rim assembly.
b. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2.
c. Remount the tire.
6. After inflating the tires, inspect the bead area.
^ Make sure bead is seated uniformly (the same) around the entire circumference of the wheel.
NOTE:
Many tires have Aligning Rings that will help confirm the bead is uniformly seated.
If uniform; bead is seated correctly. If not uniform
1. Break down the tire/rim assembly.
2. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2.
3. Remount the tire.
Page 1960
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL
Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE)
REMOVAL 1. Remove engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Engine Cover.
2. Remove air duct and resonator assembly. Refer to See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Air
Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair/Removal and
Installation.
3. Disconnect camshaft position sensor connector.
4. Remove camshaft position sensor (2) from Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (LH)
(1).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Replace the O-ring (3) of the camshaft position sensor with a new one, then lubricate
O-ring with engine oil before installing.
Camshaft position sensor bolt : 9.6 N.m (0.98 kg-m, 85 in-lb)
Page 3935
CONSULT-III Checking System
CONSULT-III CHECKING SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram
Page 2265
Testing and Inspection
Evaporative Emission Control Canister: Testing and Inspection
EVAP CANISTER
Component Inspection
EVAP CANISTER Check EVAP canister as follows:
1. Block port B. 2. Blow air into port A and check that it flows freely out of port C. 3. Release
blocked port B. 4. Apply vacuum pressure to port B and check that vacuum pressure exists at the
ports A and C. 5. Block port A and B. 6. Apply pressure to port C and check that there is no
leakage.
Page 190
Specifications
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Mass Air Flow Sensor
Page 1759
21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete.
NOTE:
If you can't print the above screen:
a. Select the Print icon.
b. Select Save.
c. Select OK.
A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC.
NOTE:
If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in
the following file location:
At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start.
Removal and Installation
Front Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
FRONT DOOR LOCK
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the front door window regulator. Refer to See: Front Door Window
Glass/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the front door window rear glass run.
3. Remove the door side grommet, and the bolt (TORX T30) (1) from the grommet hole (2).
4. While pulling the outside handle (1), remove the door key cylinder assembly or outside handle
escutcheon (2). 5. Separate the key cylinder rod from the door key cylinder assembly (if equipped).
6. While pulling the outside handle, slide it toward rear of vehicle to remove as shown.
7. Remove the front gasket (1) and rear gasket (2).
Page 144
Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal.
2. Remove IPDM E/R upper cover. 3. Release two clips and pull IPDM E/R up from case.
4. Disconnect IPDM E/R connectors and remove the IPDM E/R.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 1344
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect battery negative terminal.
2. Remove the air dam and necessary undercovers if equipped.
3. Drain engine oil.
WARNING: To avoid the danger of being scalded, never drain the engine oil when the engine is
hot.
4. Remove the oil cooler.
5. Disconnect A/T cooler hoses from radiator.
6. Remove lower radiator hose and pipe assembly.
7. Remove RH and LH front wheel and tire using power tool.
8. Remove the power steering pump without disconnecting the power steering hoses and position
aside.
9. Remove air duct and resonator assembly.
10. Remove upper radiator hose.
11. Disconnect coolant reservoir hose from radiator.
12. Remove crankshaft driven type cooling fan.
13. Disconnect the following connectors.
- Harness ground
- Power steering switch
- A/C compressor
- Oil pressure switch
14. Remove generator and generator bracket.
15. Remove A/C compressor without disconnecting the A/C pipes and position aside.
16. Remove front frame crossmember using power tool.
17. Remove the front final drive (4WD only).
18. Remove the steering gear.
19. Remove the oil pressure switch.
20. Remove the oil pan (lower). Using the following steps.
a. Remove the oil pan (lower) bolts in the reverse order as shown using power tool.
Page 4087
Page 5578
Procedures
Battery: Procedures
How to Handle Battery
BATTERY
How to Handle Battery
CAUTION: If it becomes necessary to start the engine with a booster battery and jumper cables, use a 12-volt
booster battery.
- After connecting battery cables, ensure that they are tightly clamped to battery terminals for good
contact.
- Never add distilled water through the hole used to check specific gravity.
METHODS OF PREVENTING OVER-DISCHARGE
The following precautions must be taken to prevent over-discharging a battery. The battery surface (particularly its top) should always be kept clean and dry.
- The terminal connections should be clean and tight.
- At every routine maintenance, check the electrolyte level.
This also applies to batteries designated as "low maintenance" and "maintenance-free".
- When the vehicle is not going to be used over a long period of time, disconnect the battery cable
from the negative terminal. (If the vehicle has an extended storage switch, turn it off.)
- Check the charge condition of the battery.
Periodically check the specific gravity of the electrolyte. Keep a close check on charge condition to
prevent over-discharge.
CHECKING ELECTROLYTE LEVEL
Locations
Locations
Oil Pressure Gauge: Locations
METER SYSTEM
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE : Component Parts Location
Page 5673
Page 300
31. Select Diagnosis
32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%.
When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of
the screen will light (become enabled).
33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon.
Page 1545
- No. 3 cylinder compression TDC
- Measure valve clearance using suitable tool. Refer to See: Engine Lubrication/Specifications.
CAUTION: If the inspection was carried out with a cold engine, make sure the values with a fully
warmed up engine are still within specifications.
10. Turn the crankshaft pulley clockwise 90° from the position of No.
3 cylinder compression TDC (clockwise by 360° from the position of No. 1 cylinder compression
TDC) to measure the intake and exhaust valve clearances of No. 6 cylinder (G) and the exhaust
valve clearance of No. 2 cylinder (E). Arrow indicates Engine front
- A: RH
- B: LH
- C: Exhaust
- D: Intake
- E: No. 2 cylinder
- F: No. 4 cylinder
Page 1229
Crankshaft Main Bearing: Service and Repair
HOW TO SELECT PISTON AND BEARING
How to Select Piston and Bearing
DESCRIPTION
*For the service parts, the grade for fitting cannot be selected between a piston pin and a
connecting rod. (Only 0 grade is available.) The information at the shipment from the plant is
described as a reference. The identification grade stamped on each part is the grade for the dimension measured in new
condition. This grade cannot apply to reused parts.
- For reused or repaired parts, measure the dimension accurately. Determine the grade by
comparing the measurement with the values of each selection table.
- For details of the measurement method of each part, the reuse standards, and the selection
method of the selective fitting parts, follow the applicable procedure.
HOW TO SELECT PISTON
Piston Selective Fitting When New Cylinder Block is Used: Check the cylinder bore grade on the bottom face of the cylinder block, and select the piston of the
same grade.
When Cylinder Block is Reused 1. Measure cylinder block bore diameter. 2. Determine the bore
grade by comparing the measurement with the values under the "Cylinder bore diameter" of the
piston selection table.
Page 852
Page 3872
8. Install master cylinder to brake booster. Refer to See: Hydraulic System/Brake Master
Cylinder/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Replacement.
9. Adjust the height and play of brake pedal. Refer to See: Brake Pedal Assy/Testing and
Inspection/Standard Pedal.
10. Tighten lock nut of input rod to the specified torque. 11. Install engine air duct assembly. Refer
to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Air
Cleaner
Housing/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation.
12. Install engine room cover. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Cover. 13. Refill brake fluid and bleed air. Refer to See:
Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair.
Page 2763
a. Apply engine oil to O-ring and set it into the fuel tube.
CAUTION: Handle O-ring with bare hands. Never wear gloves.
- Lubricate O-ring with new engine oil.
- Do not clean O-ring with solvent.
- Make sure that O-ring and its mating part are free of foreign material.
- When installing O-ring, be careful not to scratch it with tool or fingernails. Also be careful not to
twist or stretch O-ring. b. Make sure that backup spacer is in the O-ring connecting surface of fuel
damper.
NOTE: Backup spacer is fuel damper assembly part.
c. Insert fuel damper until it seats on fuel tube.
CAUTION: Insert straight, making sure that the axis is lined up.
- Do not pressure-fit with excessive force.
Reference value :130 N (13.3 kg, 29.2 lb)
d. Install cap, and then tighten bolts evenly by turns.
- After tightening bolts, make sure that there is no gap between cap and fuel tube.
2. Install O-rings to fuel injector paying attention to the items below.
CAUTION: Upper and lower O-rings are different.
- Handle O-ring with bare hands. Never wear gloves.
- Lubricate O-ring with new engine oil.
- Do not clean O-ring with solvent.
- Make sure that O-ring and its mating part are free of foreign material.
- When installing O-ring, be careful not to scratch it with tool or fingernails. Also be careful not to
twist or stretch O-ring. If O-ring was stretched while it was being attached, do not insert it quickly
into fuel tube.
- Insert O-ring straight into fuel tube. Do not angle or twist it.
3. Install fuel injector to fuel tube.
a. Insert clip into clip mounting groove on fuel injector.
- Insert clip so that lug "A" of fuel injector matches notch "A" of the clip.
CAUTION: Do not reuse clip. Replace it with a new one.
- Be careful to keep clip from interfering with O-ring. If interference occurs, replace O-ring. b. Insert
fuel injector into fuel tube with clip attached.
- Insert it while matching it to the axial center.
- Insert fuel injector so that lug "B" of fuel tube matches notch "B" of the clip.
Page 849
CLAIMS INFORMATION
NOTE:
This repair can only be used in conjunction with a claim for Front Wheel Alignment (Op-Code
WD44AA) and must be submitted on a separate work order line.
Page 2559
Page 3084
B. Compare the Part Number you wrote down to the numbers in the Current ECM Part Number
column in Table A above.
^ If there is a match, this bulletin applies. Continue with the reprogramming procedure.
NOTE:
If there are two lines (two reprogramming options) on your C-III screen, use the one that does not
have the message "Caution! Use ONLY with NTBXX-XXX".
Page 257
B. Compare the Part Number you wrote down to the numbers in the Current ECM Part Number
column in Table A , or Table B above.
^ If there is a match, this bulletin applies. Continue with the reprogramming procedure.
NOTE:
If there are two lines (two reprogramming options) on your C-III screen, use the one that does not
have the message "Caution! Use ONLY with NTBXX-XXX".
^ If there is not a match, this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to ASIST for further
diagnostic information.
3. If this bulletin applies and you have performed ECM reprogramming, the screen in Figure 2
appears when reprogramming is complete.
4. Make sure to erase DTCs from all systems.
NOTE:
During reprogramming, DTCs will set in several systems and must be erased.
5. Test drive the vehicle and make sure it operates correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF.
^ If the Check Engine light comes ON, go back to ASIST for further diagnostic information. Refer to
the applicable Electronic Service Manual as
needed.
^ Diagnosis and repairs beyond ECM reprogramming are not covered by this bulletin.
Page 1451
EM-3
Description and Operation
Power Distribution Relay: Description and Operation
STANDARDIZED RELAY
Description
NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided
into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays.
TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS
Page 5624
Page 2876
Front Disc Brake
Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Front Disc Brake
Exploded View
FRONT DISC BRAKE
Exploded View of Brake Caliper
Removal And Installation
FRONT DISC BRAKE
Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Rotor
WARNING: Clean dust on caliper and brake pad with a vacuum dust collector to minimize the
hazard of air borne particles or other materials.
CAUTION: While removing cylinder body, do not depress brake pedal because piston will pop out.
- It is not necessary to remove bolts on torque member and brake hose except for disassembly or
replacement of caliper assembly. In this case, hang cylinder body with a wire so as not to stretch
brake hose.
- Do not damage piston boot.
- If any shim is subject to serious corrosion, replace it with a new one.
Always replace shim and shim cover as a set when replacing brake pads.
- Keep rotor free from brake fluid.
- Burnish the brake pads and disc rotor mutually contacting surfaces, after refinishing or replacing
rotors, after replacing pads, or if a soft
Page 2078
Electronic Throttle Actuator: Locations
Page 3346
- Check for any rough rotation or unusual axial looseness.
- Clean any foreign material from inside the joint sub-assembly.
- Check for any compression scars, cracks, or fractures.
CAUTION: If any defective conditions are found in the joint sub-assembly components, replace the
entire joint sub-assembly.
Sliding Joint Side Housing Check for any compression scars, cracks, fractures, or unusual wear on the ball rolling surface.
- Check for any damage to the drive shaft screws.
- Check for any deformation of the boot installation components.
Ball Cage Check the sliding surface for any compression scars, cracks, or fractures.
Steel Ball Check for any compression scars, cracks, fractures, or unusual wear.
Inner Race Check the ball sliding surface for any compression scars, cracks, or fractures.
- Check for any damage to the serrated part.
CAUTION: If any defective conditions are found, install a new housing, ball cage, steel ball, and
inner race as a set.
ASSEMBLY
Final Drive Side 1. Wrap the serrated part of the drive shaft with tape. Install the boot band and
boot to drive shaft.
NOTE: Discard the old boot band and boot and use a new one for assembly. 2. Remove the tape
wound around the serrated part of the drive shaft.
3. Install the ball cage, steel ball, and inner race assembly on the drive shaft, and secure them
tightly using the snap ring.
NOTE: Discard the old snap ring and use a new one for assembly.
Page 1730
Page 759
8. Remove side bearing caps. 9. Loosen the side bearing adjusters using Tool.
Tool number : - (C - 4164)
10. Keep side bearing outer races together with inner races. Do not mix them up. Also, keep side
bearing adjusters together with bearing.
11. Remove side bearing adjusters from gear carrier. 12. Remove bracket for the differential lock
position switch connector and bolts.
13. Remove differential lock position switch.
INSTALLATION 1. Apply sealant to threads of differential lock position switch. Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications.
CAUTION: Remove old sealant adhering to gear carrier and differential lock position switch. Also
remove any moisture, oil, or foreign material adhering to application and gear carrier and
differential lock position switch.
Page 5453
1. Write down the radio station presets.
2. Move / adjust the passenger seat bottom and seatback to the middle and upright positions.
3. Turn the ignition OFF. Disconnect both 12V battery cables, negative cable first, and wait at least
3 minutes before proceeding to step 4.
CAUTION:
Do not drop, tilt, or bump the side air bag module while removing/installing the seat. Always handle
it with care.
4. Remove the four bolts holding the seat to the body.
5. Place the seat, back side down, on a clean covered workbench.
6. Remove the lower flap cover.
Page 615
Page 3389
Drive/Propeller Shaft: Removal and Replacement
Propeller Shaft 2F1310
PROPELLER SHAFT
Removal and Installation
COMPONENTS
REMOVAL 1. Put matching marks on the front propeller shaft flange yoke and the front final drive
companion flange as shown.
CAUTION: For matching marks, use paint. Never damage the flange yoke and companion flange of
the front final drive. 2. Put matching marks on the front propeller shaft flange yoke and the transfer
companion flange.
CAUTION: For matching marks, use paint. Never damage the flange yoke and companion flange of
the front final drive. 3. Remove the bolts and then remove the front propeller shaft from the front
final drive and transfer.
INSPECTION Inspect the propeller shaft runout. If runout exceeds the limit, replace the propeller shaft assembly.
Refer to See: Specifications/Propeller Shaft
Page 1246
Use Undersize Bearing Usage Guide Use undersize (US) bearing when the oil clearance with standard size main bearing is not within
specification.
- When using undersize (US) bearing, measure the inside diameter of the bearing installed and
grind the journal until the oil clearance falls within specification.
Bearing undersize table
CAUTION: Do not damage fillet R when grinding crankshaft journal in order to use undersized
bearing (All journals).
Fillet R : 1.5 - 1.7 mm (0.059 - 0.067 in)
Locations
Variable Valve Timing Actuator Position Sensor: Locations
Page 113
CONSULT-III Checking System
CONSULT-III CHECKING SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram
Page 2347
- Procedure for detecting root cause.
YES (Past error) - Error was detected in the main line between the differential lock control unit and
the driver seat control unit. NO - Repair the main line between the differential lock control unit and
the harness connector B37.
Main Line Between ADP And DLC Circuit
MAIN LINE BETWEEN ADP AND DLC CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 3. Check the following terminals and
connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side). Harness connector B69
- Harness connector M40
Is the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO 2. NO - Repair the terminal and connector. 2.
CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (OPEN CIRCUIT) 1. Disconnect the following harness
connectors. Harness connectors B200 and B37
- Harness connectors B69 and M40
2. Check the continuity between the harness connectors.
Is the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO 3. NO - Repair the main line between the harness
connectors B37 and B69. 3. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (OPEN CIRCUIT) Check the
continuity between the harness connector and the data link connector.
Is the inspection result normal? YES (Present error) - Check the following items again. -
Decision of CAN system type.
- Not received CONSULT-III data [SELF-DIAG RESULTS, CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR ("ECU
list" included)].
- Not copied from on-board diagnosis.
- Procedure for detecting root cause.
YES (Past error) - Error was detected in the main line between the driver seat control unit and the
data link connector. NO - Repair the main line between the harness connector M40 and the data
link connector.
Main Line Between DLC And M&A; Circuit
MAIN LINE BETWEEN DLC AND M&A; CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (OPEN CIRCUIT) 1. Turn the
ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 3. Disconnect the
following harness connectors. ECM
Testing and Inspection
Fusible Link: Testing and Inspection
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
Fusible Link
1 : Fusible link
A melted fusible link can be detected either by visual inspection or by feeling with finger tip. If its
condition is questionable, use circuit tester or test lamp.
CAUTION: If fusible link should melt, it is possible that critical circuit
(power supply or large current carrying circuit) is shorted. In such a case, carefully check and
eliminate cause of malfunction. Never wrap outside of fusible link with vinyl tape. Important:
Never let fusible link touch any other wiring harness, vinyl or rubber parts.
Page 5620
Reference Value
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
Reference Value
VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL
Page 3768
Brake Pad: Testing and Inspection Rear
REAR DISC BRAKE
BRAKE PAD : Inspection
PAD WEAR Check pad thickness from the inspection hole on cylinder body.
Check using a scale if necessary.
Page 3595
Shift Interlock Control Module: Locations Electrical Units Location
Page 1174
Diagnosis Procedure
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Testing and Inspection Diagnosis Procedure
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Component Description
When the brake pedal is depressed, ASCD brake switch is turned OFF and stop lamp switch is
turned ON. ECM detects the state of the brake pedal by this input of two kinds (ON/OFF signal).
Refer to See: Description and Operation/System Description for the ASCD function.
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Diagnosis Procedure
1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-I With CONSULT-III 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select
"BRAKE SW 1" in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-III. 3. Check "BRAKE SW 1" indication
under the following conditions.
Without CONSULT-III 1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 108 and ground under the following conditions.
OK or NG OK - GO TO 2. NG - GO TO 3. 2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-II With CONSULT-III
Check "BRAKE SW 2" indication in "DATA MONITOR" mode.
Page 272
Page 4716
Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair
IN-CABIN MICROFILTER
Removal and Installation
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Remove the two lower glove box hinge pins to remove the glove
box from the instrument panel and let it hang from the cord.
2. Remove the screw and remove the in-cabin microfilter cover. 3. Remove the in-cabin microfilters
from the heater and cooling unit assembly housing.
4. Insert the first new in-cabin microfilter into the heater and cooling unit assembly housing and
slide it over to the right. Insert the second new
in-cabin microfilter into the heater and cooling unit assembly housing.
NOTE: The in-cabin microfilters are marked with air flow arrows. The end of the microfilter with the
arrow should face the rear of the vehicle. The arrows should point downward.
5. Install the in-cabin microfilter cover.
Service and Repair
Solar Sensor: Service and Repair
OPTICAL SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the defroster grille from the instrument panel. Refer to See: Body and
Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument
Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Panel Assembly/Exploded View.
2. Disconnect the optical sensor connector (2). 3. Twist the optical sensor (1) counter clockwise to
remove it from the defroster grille.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
With Intelligent Key System
Starter Relay: Locations With Intelligent Key System
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Terminal Layout
TERMINAL LAYOUT
Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration Procedure
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration
Procedure
Classification: EC09-028
Reference: NTB09-136
Date: December 1, 2009
2005 AND LATER; ECM VIN REGISTRATION
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2005 and later
SERVICE INFORMATION
The Applied Vehicles must have the correct Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) registered in the
Engine Control Module (ECM). The VIN registration process must be performed under the following
conditions.
^ When installing a new ECM
^ If, during vehicle service, the VIN registration inside the ECM is found to be missing or incorrect.
When needed, use the Service Procedure in this bulletin to perform ECM VIN registration.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for
any repairs being performed.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Connect C-III to the vehicle and perform the initial selections:
NOTE:
If C-III is already connected, go to Step 2.
a. Start C-III and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear.
b. Select the detected VI from the list.
c. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
d. Select Model and Year.
e. Confirm the correct model and year were selected.
f. Select Repair.
Page 4614
Tires: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Tire
Page 5861
Volt Meter Gauge: Description and Operation Component Description
METER SYSTEM
VOLTAGE GAUGE : Component Description
Page 4647
Grilles
Page 3455
Shift Interlock Control Module: Locations Electrical Units Location
Page 1337
EM-10
Diagnosis Procedure
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Testing and Inspection Diagnosis Procedure
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Component Description
When the brake pedal is depressed, ASCD brake switch is turned OFF and stop lamp switch is
turned ON. ECM detects the state of the brake pedal by this input of two kinds (ON/OFF signal).
Refer to See: Description and Operation/System Description for the ASCD function.
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Diagnosis Procedure
1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-I With CONSULT-III 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select
"BRAKE SW 1" in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-III. 3. Check "BRAKE SW 1" indication
under the following conditions.
Without CONSULT-III 1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 108 and ground under the following conditions.
OK or NG OK - GO TO 2. NG - GO TO 3. 2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-II With CONSULT-III
Check "BRAKE SW 2" indication in "DATA MONITOR" mode.
Page 1160
Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair Pantograph Jack
LIFTING POINT
Pantograph Jack
WARNING:
Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. Always use safety stands to
support the frame when you have to get under the vehicle.
Place wheel chocks at both front and back of the wheels on the ground.
Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures
Technical Service Bulletin # 00-052C Date: 040416
Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures
Classification: EC00-007C
Reference: NTB00-052C
Date: April 16, 2004
ECM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES
ATTENTION:
THIS BULLETIN HAS BEEN REVISED.
^ The Service Procedures for replacing an ECM on an Applied vehicle were revised.
^ Please use this bulletin NTB00-052c for complete information.
^ Discard all previously distributed copies of NTB00-052.
APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All 2000 and later 1999 Frontier (D22) 1999 Quest (V41) 1999 Pathfinder
(R50) from VIN JN8AR07**XW350101
IF YOU CONFIRM:
The Electronic Control Module (ECM) needs to be replaced on a 2000 MY and later vehicle, or an
Applied 1999 MY vehicle (see above).
ACTIONS:
^ Re-register all customer keys if the vehicle has ECM based NATS (see step 1).
^ Check ASIST for any new updates for the new ECM you're installing (see steps 2 - 4).
^ Perform the "ACCELERATOR PEDAL & THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING"
procedure (see step 5).
^ After installing the new ECM, perform the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARNING" procedure (when
applicable) using CONSULT-II. See step 6.
^ For 2005 and later vehicles, enter the vehicle VIN into the new ECM (see step 7).
CAUTION:
Failure to perform all the work steps in the specified order can cause poor engine running, MIL
'ON', or vehicle emission test rejection.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
Engine Controls - DTC P0451 Stored In The ECM
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - DTC P0451 Stored In The
ECM
Classification: EC09-027
Reference: NTB09-121
Date: November 3, 2009
2009 TITAN AND ARMADA; DTC P0451 STORED
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2009 Titan (A60) 2009 Armada (TA60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
DTC P0451 (EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor Performance) is stored,
ACTIONS
1. Confirm this bulletin applies.
a. Check and compare your current ECM Part Number to Table A or B shown in this bulletin.
b. If that part number does not match one in Table A, this bulletin does not apply. Go back to
ASIST for further diagnostic and repair information.
2. If this bulletin applies, reprogram the ECM.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTIONS (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is
essential to successfully completing this repair.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Connect C-III to the vehicle to begin the reprogramming procedure.
Page 3111
8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.)
9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.)
10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2).
12. Select Select.
Specifications
Spark Plug: Specifications
Spark Plug
Torque : 24.5 N.m (2.5 Kg-m, 18 ft-lb)
Page 2286
Information Bus: Description and Operation Diag On CAN
Description
DIAG ON CAN
Description
"Diag on CAN" is a diagnosis using CAN communication instead of previous DDL1 and DDL2
communication lines, between control units and diagnosis unit.
System Diagram
DIAG ON CAN
System Diagram
Page 1142
Wheel Bearing: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Axle Bearing
Page 2475
In the Administrator window select My Computer.
In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C).
In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder.
In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder.
In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder.
When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time.
Select and print the file/screen image that you want.
NOTE:
During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems.
Erase DTCs from all systems
22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen).
23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear.
24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.)
25. Select Connect.
26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
Page 2490
f. Enter the entire VIN using the keyboard. See Figure 13.
^ Use [CHNG] to switch between the letters and numbers keyboard screens.
g. Once the entire VIN is entered, select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 14.
h. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen and enter the entire VIN again. See Figure 15.
^ You MUST enter the VIN a second time for confirmation purposes.
Page 1972
Consult-III Checking System
Standardized Relay
STANDARDIZED RELAY
Description
NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided
into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays.
Page 587
Combination Switch: Service and Repair
LIGHTING and TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove steering column cover. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Panel Assembly/Exploded View.
2. While pressing tabs, pull lighting and turn signal switch toward driver door and disconnect from
the base.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 5622
Terminal Layout
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
Terminal Layout
Page 610
Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning .
Exploded View
Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Exploded View
AIR CLEANER FILTER
Exploded View
Page 1813
16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5).
^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB,
diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing.
17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.)
A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics
Valve Body: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics
Classification: AT09-016A
Reference: NTB10-003A
Date: February 11, 2010
5 SPEED A/T DTC DIAGNOSES FOR P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759,
P1764, P1769, P1774
This bulletin has been amended. Additional DTCs were applied. Discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2003 - 2010 Nissan vehicles with 5-Speed A/T
APPLIED TRANSMISSION: RE5R05A ONLY
SERVICE INFORMATION
If one or more DTCs listed below are found stored in Self Diagnosis, use the REPAIR FLOW
CHART shown below to assist in diagnosis.
^ DTCs: P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
If DTC(s) not listed above is/are found stored in Self Diagnosis, this bulletin does not apply. Refer
to ASIST and the appropriate Service Manual for diagnostic procedure(s) as needed.
Page 5866
Ambient Light Sensor: Service and Repair
AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM
Removal and Installation
OPTICAL SENSOR
Removal 1. Remove defroster grille. Refer to See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Air Duct/Service
and Repair/Component.
2. Disconnect the optical sensor connector. 3. Turn the optical sensor counterclockwise to remove
it from defroster grille.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 2344
Is the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO 3. NO - Repair the main line between the A/T
assembly and the harness connector F14. 3. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (OPEN CIRCUIT)
1. Disconnect the harness connectors E50 and B75. 2. Check the continuity between the harness
connectors.
Is the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO 4. NO - Repair the main line between the harness
connectors E5 and E50. 4. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (OPEN CIRCUIT) 1. Disconnect the
connector of differential lock control unit. 2. Check the continuity between the harness connector
and the differential lock control unit harness connector.
Is the inspection result normal? YES (Present error) - Check the following items again. Decision of CAN system type.
- Not received CONSULT-III data [SELF-DIAG RESULTS, CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR ("ECU
list" included)].
- Not copied from on-board diagnosis.
- Procedure for detecting root cause.
YES (Past error) - Error was detected in the main line between the TCM and the differential lock
control unit. NO - Repair the main line between the harness connector B75 and the differential lock
control unit.
Main Line Between TCM And ADP Circuit
MAIN LINE BETWEEN TCM AND ADP CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 3. Check the following terminals and
connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side). Harness connector F14
- Harness connector E5
- Harness connector E50
- Harness connector B75
Is the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO 2. NO - Repair the terminal and connector. 2.
CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (OPEN CIRCUIT) 1. Disconnect the following harness
connectors. A/T assembly
- Harness connectors F14 and E5
2. Check the continuity between the A/T assembly harness connector and the harness connector.
Page 2062
Capacity Specifications
Refrigerant Oil: Capacity Specifications
OIL
Page 2326
Diagnosis Sheet (CAN Type 3)
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
Diagnosis Sheet (CAN Type 3)
Page 1762
31. Select Diagnosis
32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%.
When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of
the screen will light (become enabled).
33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon.
Exploded View
Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair Exploded View
AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT
Exploded View
Page 4013
Power Socket - Part 2
Page 266
Page 2838
CAUTION: Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly.
- Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket.
- Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling.
- Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water.
Removal 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2.
Disconnect the accelerator position sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the two upper and one
lower accelerator pedal nuts. 4. Remove the adjustable accelerator pedal assembly.
CAUTION: Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly.
- Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket.
- Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling.
- Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Inspection After Installation Check that the accelerator pedal moves smoothly within the specified range.
Non-adjustable accelerator pedal - total pedal applied stroke : 48 mm (1.89 in)
- Depress and release the accelerator pedal to check that it returns smoothly to the original
released position.
- Perform an electrical inspection of the accelerator pedal position sensor. Refer to See: Computers
and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/VIN Registration See:
Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator
Pedal Released Position Learning See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning See: Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning .
CAUTION: When the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor is disconnected,
perform "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to See: Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released
Position Learning .
Locations
Page 1516
2. Check the fuel level on level gauge. If the fuel gauge indicates more than the level as shown (full
or almost full), drain the fuel from the fuel tank
until the fuel gauge indicates the level as shown, or less.
- If the fuel pump does not operate, use the following procedure to drain the fuel to the specified
level. a. Insert a suitable hose of less than 15 mm (0.59 in) diameter into the fuel filler pipe through
the fuel filler opening to drain the fuel from fuel
filler pipe.
b. Remove the LH rear wheel and tire. Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and
Repair/Rotation .
c. Remove the fuel filler pipe shield. d. Disconnect the fuel filler hose from the fuel filler pipe and
disconnect the vent hose quick connector.
e. Insert a suitable hose into the fuel tank through the fuel filler hose to drain the fuel from the fuel
tank.
3. Release the fuel pressure from the fuel lines. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Fuel Pressure Check .
4. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 5. Remove the three nuts and remove fuel line pump
protector.
6. Disconnect the EVAP hose at the EVAP canister. 7. Disconnect the fuel level sensor, fuel filter,
and fuel pump assembly electrical connector and the fuel feed hose.
Page 4064
IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) - Part 4
Page 517
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
Removal and Installation for Refrigerant Pressure Sensor
REMOVAL 1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and
Repair/Refrigeration System .
2. Disconnect the refrigerant pressure sensor electrical connector and remove the refrigerant
pressure sensor from the condenser.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the condenser fins.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Heating and Air
Conditioning/Description and Operation/Refrigeration System/Component .
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the condenser fins.
- Replace the O-ring of the refrigerant pressure sensor with a new one, then apply compressor oil
to it when installing it.
- After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
Page 245
Page 790
Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics
in this bulletin.
^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification.
1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle:
^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge
^ Road Crown Gauge
NOTE:
Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use.
2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test.
3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern.
^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60
mph.
^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel
position during the road test.
NOTE:
^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have
been resolved.
^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then
diagnosis cannot be performed.
4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center"
below.
5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel
Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete.
6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step.
Other Service Information
Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel
spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road
(see example in Figure 1).
If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the
normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain
water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place.
Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the
crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction.
Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully
counteract the effect of a highly crowned road.
Locations
Specifications
Water Pump: Specifications
Water Pump
Page 1954
Page 649
Page 2617
Oxygen Sensor: Locations
Page 3673
Checking Fluid Level
Power Steering Fluid: Service and Repair Checking Fluid Level
POWER STEERING FLUID
Checking Fluid Level
Check fluid level, referring to the scale on reservoir tank. Use HOT range for fluid temperatures of
50° - 80°C (122° - 176°F). Use COLD range for fluid temperatures of 0° - 30°C (32° - 86°F).
CAUTION: Do not overfill.
- Do not reuse any used power steering fluid.
- Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent. Refer to See: Maintenance.
Page 3736
Brake Pedal Assy: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
BRAKE PEDAL
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
CAUTION: If equipped, before removal and installation, the accelerator and brake pedals must be in the
forward most position (closest to the floor). This is to align the base position of the accelerator and
brake pedals.
- If equipped, do not disassemble the brake pedal adjusting mechanism.
- Avoid damage from dropping the brake pedal assembly during handling.
- Keep the brake pedal assembly away from water.
1. Remove the lower instrument panel LH. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Lower Panel LH.
2. Remove the stop lamp switch and ASCD cancel switch from the pedal assembly.
3. If equipped, disconnect the adjustable brake pedal cable from the adjustable pedal electric
motor. Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable brake pedal cable to disconnect it from the adjustable pedal
electric motor as shown.
4. Remove snap pin and clevis pin from the clevis of brake booster. 5. Remove nuts and the brake
pedal assembly. Temporarily install nuts by hand to support brake booster.
WARNING: Do not deform the brake tube.
CAUTION: If equipped, before removal and installation the accelerator and brake pedals must be in the
forward most position (closest to the floor). This is to align the base position of the accelerator and
brake pedals.
- If equipped, do not disassemble the brake pedal adjusting mechanism.
- Avoid damage from dropping the brake pedal assembly during handling.
- Keep the brake pedal assembly away from water.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check the brake pedal assembly for the following items.
- Crack or deformation of clevis pin stopper
- Clevis pin deformation
- Crack of any welded portion of the brake pedal assembly
- Brake pedal bend or deformation
Electrical - Starting/Charging/Battery Testing
Battery: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Starting/Charging/Battery Testing
Classification: EL99-016V
Reference: NTB99-048V
Date: March 11, 2010
BATTERY / STARTING / CHARGING SYSTEM TESTING
This bulletin has been amended. The Service Information has been updated. Please discard all
earlier versions.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissans including Altima Hybrid HEV* 12 volt battery
*For information on using this tool with Altima Hybrid 12 volt batteries, refer to NTB07-007.
SERVICE INFORMATION
The Midtronics GR-8 - Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station is the factory-approved battery,
starter, and alternator tester.
^ For warranty documentation purposes, as of September 30, 2008 the GR-8 is the only approved
diagnostic tool for batteries, starters, and alternators.
^ Print-outs from this tester are required for claim reimbursements related to batteries, starters,
and/or alternators.
^ For additional information regarding claims reimbursements, refer to the current Nissan
Assurance Products Resource Manual.
^ For the complete GR-8 User Guide, refer to ASIST - TOOLS & EQUIPMENT.
^ Additional tools and replacement parts can be ordered from TECH-MATE.
^ This essential tool was shipped to your dealership and invoiced to your Nissan Non-Vehicle
account in three equal installments of $641.00 (plus
applicable taxes) in accordance with your dealer agreement with Nissan North America, Inc. This
price includes both the GR8-1200-NI and the EXP-800-NI shipped in April 2008.
Nissan vehicles equipped with standard lead/acid batteries use one of two different types with
unique battery rating specifications: JIS & CCA.
Page 6166
1. Raise the glass to the top. 2. While pressing and holding the reset switch, lower the glass to the
bottom. 3. Release the reset switch. Verify that the reset switch returns to the original position, if
not pull the switch using suitable tool. 4. Raise the glass to the top position
CAUTION: Do not operate the glass automatically to raise the glass to the top position.
REPAIRING WATER LEAKS FOR REAR WINDOW GLASS Leaks can be repaired without
removing or reinstalling glass. If water is leaking between butyl adhesive material and body or
glass, determine the extent of leakage. This can be done by applying water to the rear window area
while pushing glass outward. To stop leak, apply primer (if necessary) and then butyl adhesive to
the leak point.
Page 2268
CAN System - Part 3
Page 330
Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information
Tires: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information
Classification: WT11-003
Reference: NTB11-029
Date: March 21, 2011
TIRE MOUNTING INFORMATION
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan
SERVICE INFORMATION
^ When mounting tires to wheels, it is important that the tire bead is seated correctly.
^ A tire bead that is not seated correctly may cause a vehicle vibration.
^ High performance tires and tires with shorter sidewalls (low aspect tires) may require more care
to make sure the tire bead is seated correctly.
^ Follow the Tire Mounting Tips in this bulletin.
Tire Mounting Tips:
NOTE:
These tips are not intended to be a complete instruction for mounting tires to wheels. Make sure to
read and follow the instruction for your specific tire service equipment
1. Clean the tire bead with an approved rubber cleaning fluid.
^ Rubber cleaning fluid is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process.
2. Clean the wheel (flange and bead seat area) see Figure 2 Make sure to clean off all rust and
corrosion.
Page 124
RELAY CONTROL SYSTEM
System Description
IPDM E/R controls relays based on input signals from various sensors and from request signals
received via CAN communication.
CAUTION: IPDM E/R integrated relays cannot be removed.
Page 379
REPAIR FLOW CHART
Engine Controls - DTC P0451 Stored In The ECM
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - DTC P0451 Stored In The
ECM
Classification: EC09-027
Reference: NTB09-121
Date: November 3, 2009
2009 TITAN AND ARMADA; DTC P0451 STORED
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2009 Titan (A60) 2009 Armada (TA60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
DTC P0451 (EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor Performance) is stored,
ACTIONS
1. Confirm this bulletin applies.
a. Check and compare your current ECM Part Number to Table A or B shown in this bulletin.
b. If that part number does not match one in Table A, this bulletin does not apply. Go back to
ASIST for further diagnostic and repair information.
2. If this bulletin applies, reprogram the ECM.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTIONS (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is
essential to successfully completing this repair.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Connect C-III to the vehicle to begin the reprogramming procedure.
Body - Truck Bed Storage Organizer Rusting
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-074 Date: 090807
Body - Truck Bed Storage Organizer Rusting
Classification: BT09-004
Reference: NTB09-074
Date: August 7, 2009
2004 - 2009 TITAN; RUST ON SLIDERS FOR COLLAPSIBLE STORAGE ORGANIZER
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2009 Titan (A60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
There is rust on the threads of the sliders for the truck bed collapsible storage organizer.
ACTION
Replace the sliders with the new ones listed in the parts information.
NOTE
Do Not replace the entire storage organizer for this incident, if it should occur.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
Page 2616
Oxygen Sensor: Specifications Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Heater
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Heated Oxygen sensor 2 Heater
Page 2143
CAUTION
2. When you get to the ECM Reprogramming screen shown in Figure 1, confirm this bulletin
applies as follows.
A. On your C-III screen, look at the Part Number column (see Figure 1):
^ If this column is blank (no part number listed), this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to
ASIST for further diagnostic information.
^ If a Part Number is listed, write it on the Repair Order.
Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision Damage
Wheel Bearing: Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision
Damage
Classification: FA10-006
Reference: NTB10-126
Date: October 21, 2010
WHEEL BEARING COLLISION DAMAGE
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan
SERVICE INFORMATION
Impacts to wheel bearings (such as a collision or other suspension damage) may create slight
indents in the bearing surfaces. These indents may not be visible but can cause bearing noise.
NOTE:
Hub/bearing replacement due to impact (collision or other suspension damage) is not a
warrantable repair
If a vehicle has visible wheel or suspension damage due to impact (collision or other suspension
damage), it is recommended that the wheel bearing assembly be inspected as follows:
1. Remove the hub/bearing assembly from the vehicle.
2. Hold the hub/bearing assembly with both hands.
3. Rotate the hub/bearing assembly in both directions (clockwise and counterclockwise).
4. If any gritty or rough feeling is detected in the bearing replace it with a new one.
Page 308
Service Procedure
Check NATS On The Vehicle
1. Check to see if the vehicle you're working on has "ECM based" NATS V2.0 or V5.0.
a. If the vehicle has ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0, it will NOT start after you install a service
replacement ECM. So you'll have to re-register all ignition keys, including spare keys with
CONSULT-II and the purple NATS card. After you do this, proceed with step 2.
^ If you do not know how to re-register the keys, refer to the ESM for the NATS key re-registration
procedure.
b. If the vehicle has "BCM based" NATS (instead of ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0), you do NOT
have to re-register the ignition or spare keys. Proceed with step 2.
Check For ECM Data Updates in ASIST
2. In ASIST, select [CONSULT Utilities] >>> [ECM/TCM Data]. Then choose Model and Model
Year (see Figure 1).
3. Look for ECM Data Updates (listed by ECM P/Ns and vehicle configuration) in the top, center
display panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
a. If there is not updates listed for your vehicle configuration, you do NOT have to reprogram the
service replacement ECM. Proceed with step 5.
b. If there is updates listed for your vehicle configuration, see if they apply to the service
replacement ECM you're going to install. Do this by performing step 4.
4. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then confirm that your
ECM is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, -XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details"
panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
a. If your ECM is listed in the "Details" panel, you must reprogram the ECM with the latest data
update. After you do this, proceed with step 5.
CAUTION:
The 1999-2000 Frontier and 1999-2000 Pathfinder have a gray CONSULT connector AND a white
GST connector. Do NOT attempt to perform the ECM Reprogramming procedure with CONSULT-II
connected to the gray CONSULT connector. See the appropriate ESM for further details if
necessary.
b. If your ECM is NOT listed in the "Details" panel, you do NOT have to reprogram the ECM.
Proceed with step 5.
Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
5. Perform the Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning as follows:
a. Make sure the accelerator pedal is fully released.
b. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds.
c. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" for 10 seconds.
Page 3683
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair ABS
Wheel Sensors
WHEEL SENSORS
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel sensor bolt. When removing the front wheel sensor, first remove the disc rotor to gain access to the front wheel
sensor bolt. Refer to See: Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Front.
2. Pull out the sensor, being careful to turn it as little as possible.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth.
- Do not pull on the sensor harness.
3. Disconnect wheel sensor harness electrical connector, then remove harness from attaching
points.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Inspect wheel sensor O-ring, replace sensor assembly if damaged.
- Clean wheel sensor hole and mounting surface with brake cleaner and a lint-free shop rag. Be
careful that dirt and debris do not enter the axle.
- Apply a coat of suitable grease to the wheel sensor O-ring and mounting hole.
Sensor Rotor
SENSOR ROTOR
Removal and Installation
FRONT WHEEL SENSOR ROTOR
Removal and Installation The front wheel sensor rotor is built into the front wheel hub and bearing
assembly and is not removable. If damaged, replace the front wheel hub and bearing assembly.
Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Wheel Hub/Service and Repair.
Page 2215
In the Administrator window select My Computer.
In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C).
In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder.
In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder.
In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder.
When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time.
Select and print the file/screen image that you want.
NOTE:
During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems.
Erase DTCs from all systems
22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen).
23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear.
24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.)
25. Select Connect.
26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
Interior - Door Trim Panel(s) Discolored/Faded
Front Door Panel: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Door Trim Panel(s) Discolored/Faded
Classification: BT10-024
Reference: NTB10-095
Date: August 13, 2010
2004-2010 TITAN; DOOR TRIM PANEL DISCOLORED/FADED
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2010 Titan (A60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
The pull handle trim panel on a front or rear door is discolored/faded. See Figures 1 and 2.
ACTION
Clean the discolored/faded trim panel as instructed in the Service Procedure.
NOTE:
This condition is not "dirt" on the trim panel surface. This condition exists within the panel itself.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You
MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
System Diagram
Oil Pressure Gauge: Description and Operation System Diagram
METER SYSTEM
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE : System Diagram
Page 3437
Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation System Description
METER SYSTEM
A/T OIL TEMPERATURE GAUGE : System Description
The A/T oil temperature gauge indicates the A/T fluid temperature. The TCM (transmission control
module) provides an A/T fluid temperature signal to combination meter via CAN communication
lines.
Page 2305
COLLECT DATA
Collect CONSULT-III Data Print out or save the following CONSULT-III data. SELF-DIAG RESULTS
- CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR ("ECU list" included)
NOTE: Some items may not be needed depending on CAN system type of vehicle.
With Intelligent Key System
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations With Intelligent Key System
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Terminal Layout
TERMINAL LAYOUT
Headlamp
Page 3337
Axle Shaft Assembly: Testing and Inspection
AXLE SHAFT
On-Vehicle Inspection
REAR AXLE Check the axle parts for excessive play, wear, and damage. Replace as necessary.
- Shake each rear wheel to check for excessive play. Repair as necessary.
- Retighten all nuts and bolts to specification. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Rear Axle Shaft.
WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION Check the axial end play, replace as necessary. Check that the axle shaft bearing operates smoothly. Replace as necessary.
Page 4758
Page 5094
Radio/Stereo: Service and Repair Premium With Navigation
AUDIO UNIT
Removal and Installation
AUDIO UNIT
Removal 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the cluster lid C. Refer to See:
Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Cluster LID D/Removal And Installation.
3. Remove the audio unit screws (A), using power tool. 4. Pull out the audio unit (1) and disconnect
the audio unit connectors.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
AV SWITCH
Removal 1. Disconnect battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the cluster lid C. Refer to See: Body
and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Cluster LID D/Removal And Installation.
3. Remove the AV switch screws. 4. Carefully remove the AV switch.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Locations
Cargo Lamp Switch: Locations
Page 329
Page 2201
11. Enter the VIN into C-III two times (see Figure 7).
^ Touch the C-III screen in the "VIN box" before typing.
^ Make sure to use all CAPITAL LETTERS.
^ Use the VIN from the vehicle you are working on.
12. Select Start
13. Turn the ignition OFF, and wait 10 seconds.
14. After waiting 10 seconds, turn the ignition ON.
Page 4652
Grilles
Page 2857
Page 4501
Lot Number Locations.
Page 4779
4. Remove the evaporator.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Replace the O-rings on the low-pressure flexible hose and the high-pressure pipe with
new ones, then apply compressor oil to them when installing them.
Page 4061
Power Distribution Module: Electrical Diagrams
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Wiring Diagram
IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) - Part 1
Page 4468
Steering Wheel: Removal and Replacement
STEERING WHEEL
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Set the front wheels in the straight-ahead position. 2. Remove the driver air bag
module. Refer to See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Air Bag/Service and Repair/Driver Air
Bag Module. 3. Disconnect steering wheel switches. 4. Remove the steering wheel center nut.
5. Remove the steering wheel using Tools.
CAUTION: Place a piece of tape across the spiral cable so it will not be rotated out of position. 6.
Inspect the steering wheel near the puller holes for damage. If damaged, replace the steering
wheel. Remove steering wheel rear cover and steering wheel switches, if required.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
- Align spiral cable correctly when installing steering wheel. Make sure that the spiral cable is in the
neutral position. The neutral position is detected by turning left 2.5 revolutions from the right end
position and ending with the knob at the top.
- If equipped with VDC, refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing
Control Unit/Description See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing
Control Unit/Special Repair Requirement See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes /
Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Adjustment Of
Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position/Description See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock
Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Adjustment Of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position/Special Repair Requirement for
steering angle sensor adjustment.
- After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to make sure no malfunction is detected.
Refer to See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and
Diagnostic Overview/SRS Operation Check.
- Tighten steering wheel center nut to specification. Refer to See: Steering Column/Service and
Repair.
CAUTION: The spiral cable may snap due to steering operation if the cable is not installed in the correct
position.
Locations
Page 4240
Physical Values
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Physical Values
PHYSICAL VALUES
Page 6091
If the moisture trickles, drips, or pools, it may not be considered normal and the lamp assembly
may have a water leak path. See Figure 2 for an example.
If large drops of water collect inside the lens, refer to the flow chart below to find the next step.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Page 3689
Page 3041
B. Compare the Part Number you wrote down to the numbers in the Current ECM Part Number
column in Table A above.
^ If there is a match, this bulletin applies. Continue with the reprogramming procedure.
NOTE:
If there are two lines (two reprogramming options) on your C-III screen, use the one that does not
have the message "Caution! Use ONLY with NTBXX-XXX".
Power Consumption Control System
Power Distribution Module: Locations Power Consumption Control System
POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM
Component Parts Location
Page 2726
- If the connector and the tube are stuck together, push and pull several times until they start to
move. Then disconnect them by pulling.
CAUTION: The quick connector can be disconnected when the tabs are completely depressed. Do not twist
the quick connector more than necessary.
- Do not use any tools to disconnect the quick connector.
- Keep the resin tube away from heat. Be especially careful when welding near the tube.
- Prevent any acid liquids such as battery electrolyte, from getting on the resin tube.
- Do not bend or twist the resin tube during connection.
- Do not remove the remaining retainer on the hard tube (or the equivalent) except when the resin
tube or the retainer is replaced.
- When the resin tube or hard tube, or the equivalent, is replaced, also replace the retainer with a
new one (white colored retainer).
- To keep the quick connector clean and to avoid damage and contamination from foreign
materials, cover the quick connector with plastic bags or suitable material as shown.
8. Remove the four bolts and remove the fuel tank shield using power tool. 9. Remove the fuel tank
strap bolts while supporting the fuel tank with a suitable lift jack.
Page 6197
Most windshield damage that occurs due to impact is easily identified as shown above.
Cracks can spread and become larger from the original strike point or crush mark due to:
^ Thermal stresses caused by temperature fluctuation
^ External physical stresses, such as hand touch, wind force, or vehicle vibration during driving (pot
holes)
A lead, or crack from one of the star cracked impact points can run to the edge of the glass and
appear to be a low stress crack starting from the glass outside edge.
Single crack beginning or ending at the edge of the glass
Single cracks must be inspected along the entire crack for impact marks.
^ If any impact mark is found anywhere along the crack, it indicates the damage occurred from an
object striking the windshield. This is not covered
under warranty.
Page 5522
Truck Bed Storage Compartment: Service and Repair
STORAGE BOX
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove rear mudguard (if equipped). Refer to See: Spoilers, Flaps, and Air
Dams/Mud Flap/Service and Repair. 2. Remove bolts, release clips and remove storage box
assembly. 3. Remove shelf bin and mat from storage box. 4. Remove storage box door from hinge.
Remove door stay assembly.
5. Remove inner door cover. 6. Remove nuts and remove latch assembly from door. Remove key cylinder.
7. Remove outer seal and key cylinder lid assembly from door.
Page 1052
Refrigerant: Service and Repair
REFRIGERATION SYSTEM
HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure
SETTING OF SERVICE TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Discharging Refrigerant
WARNING: Avoid breathing A/C refrigerant and oil vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose
and throat. Remove HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant from the A/C system using certified service
equipment meeting requirements of SAE J2210 HFC-134a (R-134a) recycling equipment or SAE
J2201 HFC-134a (R-134a) recovery equipment. If an accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate
the work area before resuming service. Additional health and safety information may be obtained
from the refrigerant and oil manufacturers.
Evacuating System and Charging Refrigerant
Locations
Shift Indicator: Locations
METER SYSTEM
SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR : Component Parts Location
Page 3201
4. Check the A/T fluid level and for fluid leakage. Refer to See: Fluid - A/T/Service and
Repair/Checking A/T Fluid.
Page 3102
Page 5317
Body / Frame Mount Bushing: Service and Repair Body Mounting, Crew Cab
BODY CONSTRUCTION
Body Mounting, Crew Cab
When removing, be sure to replace bolts and nuts (sealant applied bolts or self-lock nuts are used
for all mounting).
Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption
Recovery
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Programming
Interruption Recovery
Classification: EC10-015
Reference: NTB10-078
Date: June 21, 2010
REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE
SERVICE INFORMATION
A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption
Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin.
While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop
(become interrupted) before it is 100% complete.
One of two messages may appear:
^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe.
^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0".
In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if
the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped.
NOTE:
ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III.
The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service
Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later.
IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING
^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery.
^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads.
^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable.
^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter.
Page 295
18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM.
The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to
use.
19. Select Next
NOTE:
If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with
Reprogramming.
Page 4849
Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Manual A/C (Type 1)
INTAKE SENSOR
System Description
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Intake Sensor
The intake sensor is located on the heater and cooling unit assembly. It converts temperature of air
after if passes through the evaporator into a resistance value which is then input to the front air
control.
Locations
Standard Pedal
Brake Pedal Assy: Testing and Inspection Standard Pedal
BRAKE PEDAL
Inspection and Adjustment - Standard Pedal
INSPECTION 1. Inspect the brake pedal free height (H) from the floor using Tool at a 90° angle to
the floor as shown.
Tool number : - (J-46532)
2. Adjust the brake pedal height to specifications.
ADJUSTMENT 1. Loosen the stop lamp switch and ASCD cancel switch by turning 45°
counterclockwise. 2. Loosen lock nut (A) on the input rod, then turn input rod to adjust the brake
pedal to specified height. When finished adjusting, tighten lock nut
(A) to specification.
Specifications
Fuel Pressure: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Fuel Pressure
Page 4286
2. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connectors and ground.
Does continuity exist? YES - Inspection End. NO - Repair or replace harness.
Page 1197
9. Remove the RH (A) front cover bolts and the LH (B) front cover bolts.
10. Remove RH (A) camshaft bracket bolts and LH (C) camshaft bracket bolts in the reverse of
order shown to remove camshaft brackets.
- Remove No. 1 camshaft bracket.
NOTE: The bottom and front surface of bracket will be stuck because of liquid gasket. Arrow Indicates: Engine front
- B: Exhaust side
- D: Intake side
11. Remove the camshaft. 12. Remove the valve lifters if necessary.
- Correctly identify location where each part is removed from. Keep parts organized to avoid mixing
them up.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Camshaft Runout 1. Put V block on precise flat work bench, and support No. 1 and No. 5 journals
of the camshaft.
2. Set dial indicator vertically to No. 3 journal.
Page 3806
REMOVAL 1. Remove rear wheel and tires using power tool. 2. Fasten disc rotor using wheel nut.
3. Drain brake fluid as necessary. Refer to See: Brake Fluid/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement.
4. Disconnect brake hose connection (A) from cylinder body.
NOTE: Discard the copper washer, do not reuse.
5. Remove sliding pin bolts (1) as shown, and remove cylinder body (2). 6. Apply matching marks
to disc rotor and wheel hub assembly if the disc rotor is to be reused, then remove disc rotor.
CAUTION: Put matching marks on wheel hub assembly and disc rotor if the disc rotor is to be
reused.
INSTALLATION 1. If reusing the disc rotor, use the matching marks to align disc rotor on the wheel
hub assembly, then install disc rotor using a wheel nut to hold it in
place.
CAUTION: Use matching marks on wheel hub assembly and disc rotor if the disc rotor is to be
reused.
2. Install cylinder body (2) and tighten sliding pin bolts (1) to specification.
CAUTION: Before installing cylinder body to the vehicle, wipe off mounting surface of cylinder
body.
Page 5087
Amplifier: Service and Repair Premium With Navigation
AUDIO AMP.
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the BCM. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Body Control Systems/Body
Control Module/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the accelerator pedal. Refer to See: Powertrain
Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Accelerator Pedal/Service and Repair.
3. Disconnect the audio amp. speaker amp. connectors. 4. Remove the audio amp. speaker amp.
and bracket assembly screws and slide the audio amp. speaker amp. bracket assembly down.
5. Remove the audio amp. speaker amp.screws (A). then remove the audio amp. speaker amp. (1).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 3893
- After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), perform the following.
- Refill brake system with new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system. Refer to See: Brake
Bleeding/Service and Repair.
- Adjust the steering angle sensor. Refer to See: Antilock Brakes / Traction Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing
Control Unit/Description See: Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing Control Unit/Special
Repair Requirement See: Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Adjustment Of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral
Position/Description See: Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Adjustment Of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral
Position/Special Repair Requirement.
- Calibrate the decel G sensor. Refer to See: Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing
and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Inspection And Adjustment/Special Repair
Requirement.
Page 477
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Testing and Inspection Component Inspection
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Component Inspection
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness
connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ASCD brake switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following
conditions.
If NG, adjust ASCD brake switch installation, refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Brake
Pedal Assy/Testing and Inspection/Standard Pedal, and perform step 3 again.
STOP LAMP SWITCH 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness
connector.
3. Check harness continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following
conditions.
If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Brake Pedal
Assy/Testing and Inspection/Standard Pedal, and perform step 3 again.
Page 2748
Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection
FUEL PRESSURE
Fuel Pressure Check
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE
With CONSULT-III 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Perform "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" in
"WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-III. 3. Start engine. 4. After engine stalls, crank it two or
three times to release all fuel pressure. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF.
Without CONSULT-III 1. Remove fuel pump fuse located in IPDM E/R.
2. Start engine. 3. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 4. Turn
ignition switch OFF. 5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system.
FUEL PRESSURE CHECK
CAUTION: Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger.
Be careful not to scratch or get the fuel hose connection area dirty when servicing, so that the quick
connector o-ring maintains sealability.
- Use Fuel Pressure Gauge Kit J-44321 and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 to check fuel
pressure.
- Do not perform fuel pressure check with electrical system operating (i.e. lights, rear defog, A/C,
etc.).
Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false readings due to varying engine loads and changes in
manifold vacuum.
NOTE: Prepare pans or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out.
The fuel pressure cannot be completely released because A60 models do not have fuel return
system. 1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". 2. Remove
engine cover. 3. Remove fuel hose using Quick Connector Release J-45488. Refer to See: Engine,
Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and
Repair/Removal and Installation.
- Do not twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose.
- Do not remove fuel hose from quick connector.
- Keep fuel hose connections clean.
Page 1928
Page 3285
8. Remove side bearing caps. 9. Loosen the side bearing adjusters using Tool.
Tool number : - (C - 4164)
10. Keep side bearing outer races together with inner races. Do not mix them up. Also, keep side
bearing adjusters together with bearing.
11. Remove side bearing adjusters from gear carrier. 12. Remove bracket for the differential lock
position switch connector and bolts.
13. Remove differential lock position switch.
INSTALLATION 1. Apply sealant to threads of differential lock position switch. Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications.
CAUTION: Remove old sealant adhering to gear carrier and differential lock position switch. Also
remove any moisture, oil, or foreign material adhering to application and gear carrier and
differential lock position switch.
Page 4821
Refrigerant Oil: Fluid Type Specifications
OIL
Service and Repair
Power Mirror Motor: Service and Repair
DOOR MIRROR
Mirror Actuator
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
Disassembly 1. Remove the mirror glass. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Door Mirror Glass
2. Remove the center screw (A) and release the actuator hooks from housing (B). 3. Disconnect
the connector (A) and remove the actuator (1).
Assembly Assembly is the reverse order of disassembly.
Suspension - Rear Leaf Spring Clicking Noises
Leaf Spring Bushing: Customer Interest Suspension - Rear Leaf Spring Clicking Noises
Classification: RA09-006
Reference: NTB10-011
Date: January 20, 2010
TITAN; LEAF SPRING NOISE
APPLIED VEHICLE: 2004-2009 Titan (A60)
APPLIED VINS: 2004-2008 All 2009 vehicles built before 1N6(*)A0(***)9N 319522
APPLIED DATES: 2004-2008 All 2009 vehicles built before August 26, 2009
IF YOU CONFIRM:
A clicking noise is coming from one or both leaf springs.
ACTION: Inspect the anti-windup clip bolts and bushings.
^ If replacement is determined as necessary, use the parts listed in PARTS INFORMATION in this
bulletin.
^ For repair procedure, refer to SERVICE PROCEDURE in this bulletin.
^ Do not replace the leaf spring assembly when anti-windup bolt and bushing replacement will
resolve the incident, if it should occur.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line claim using the claims coding shown.
PARTS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Page 2182
Page 6068
Should a customer note water in a lamp assembly, please use the above flow chart to determine if
the condition is normal or requires lamp replacement.
Drivetrain - Driveshaft U-Joint Noise/Vibration
Universal Joint: Customer Interest Drivetrain - Driveshaft U-Joint Noise/Vibration
Classification: PD10-001
Reference: NTB10-052
Date: April 8, 2010
NOISE AND/OR VIBRATION FROM PROPELLER SHAFT U-JOINT (JOURNAL/JOURNAL
BEARINGS)
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) 2004-2010 Titan (A60) 2005-2010 Frontier (D40)
2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2010 Xterra (N50)
IF YOU CONFIRM
The propeller shaft u-joint (journal/journal bearings) is the source of noise and/or vibration on an
Applied Vehicle.
Diagnose by evaluating the u-joint with the propeller shaft removed. If the u-joint axial play or flex
effort exceed the specifications in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM), or if a "ratchety" feel is
exhibited during rotation, the u-joint (journal/journal bearings) should be replaced.
ACTION
Replace the u-joint (journal/journal bearings).
^ Refer to the applicable ESM for removal and installation instructions.
NOTE:
Do not replace the entire propeller shaft assembly if u-joint (journal/journal bearings) replacement
can resolve the incident, should it occur.
PARTS INFORMATION
U-joint (journal/journal bearings) kits are now available for all Applied Vehicles. Refer to the
electronic parts catalog (FAST or equivalent) to locate the appropriate parts needed for this repair.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the indicated FRT and
appropriate coding for repairs preformed.
Page 510
Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Intake Sensor
INTAKE SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the instrument panel. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal
and Replacement/Instrument Panel Assembly/Removal And Installation.
2. Disconnect the intake sensor electrical connector.
NOTE: The intake sensor is located on the top of the heater and cooling unit assembly next to the
A/C evaporator cover. 3. Twist the intake sensor to remove the intake sensor from the heater and
cooling unit assembly.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Locations
Page 1468
Page 5860
Volt Meter Gauge: Description and Operation System Description
METER SYSTEM
VOLTAGE GAUGE : System Description
The voltage gauge indicates the battery/charging system voltage. The voltage gauge is regulated
by the unified meter control unit.
Page 4008
CONSULT-III Checking System
CONSULT-III CHECKING SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram
Page 4267
CONSULT-III Checking System
CONSULT-III CHECKING SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram
Locations
Page 6186
^ LH motor: Rotate counterclockwise.
^ RH motor: Rotate clockwise.
2. Install the power window motor onto the regulator.
3. Install the regulator assembly into the door.
4. Secure regulator assembly to door inner with fasteners then install glass into door and attach to
regulator.
5. Raise the glass to the top position.
CAUTION:
Do not operate the glass automatically to raise the glass to the top.
Page 1602
Radiator: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
RADIATOR
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from
high-pressure engine coolant escaping from the radiator.
REMOVAL
CAUTION: Perform when the engine is cold. 1. Remove engine room cover. Refer to See:
Engine/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Cover. 2. Drain engine coolant from
the radiator. Refer to See: Coolant/Service and Repair. 3. Remove air cleaner and air duct
assembly. Refer to See: Engine/Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Air Cleaner
Housing/Service and
Repair/Removal and Installation.
4. Disconnect A/T fluid cooler hoses. Install blind plug to avoid leakage of A/T fluid.
5. Disconnect radiator upper and lower hoses from radiator.
CAUTION: Do not allow coolant to contact drive belts.
6. Remove the lower radiator shroud. Release the tabs, pull lower radiator shroud rearwards and down to remove.
7. Remove the radiator shroud upper bolts and remove the radiator shroud upper (A). 8. Remove
the A/C condenser bolts and brackets.
Page 5205
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the following parts from the trim panel:
^ pull handle cover
^ power window switch assembly (if equipped)
Refer to the INT section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for removal
instructions.
2. Following the instructions on the label, apply Nissan Vinyl and Leather Cleaner to the trim panel
surface.
3. Use a soft bristle brush to gently clean the surface.
4. Mist the area lightly with water to rinse.
5. Use a clean cloth to wipe the area clean.
Page 1107
Recommended tire inflating tools.
Aftermarket Tire Sealers
Aftermarket tire sealants and/or aerosol repair kits should not be used (refer to the vehicle's
Owner's Manual).
^ Some aftermarket tire sealers and/or aerosol repair kits contain chemicals and propellants that
can cause damage to TPMS sensors.
NOTE:
Damage caused by use of aftermarket tire sealants contrary to recommendations in the vehicle
Owner's Manual is not covered under the Nissan New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Page 235
d. Press [START] on the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" screen. See Figure 4.
e. Press [START] on the "WORK SUPPORT" screen to begin the Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL)
procedure. See Figure 5.
^ The IAVL procedure will take several minutes to complete.
^ CONSULT will display "Please Wait" in the center of the screen while the IAVL procedure is in
process. See Figure 6.
Page 3704
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption
Recovery
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Programming
Interruption Recovery
Classification: EC10-015
Reference: NTB10-078
Date: June 21, 2010
REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE
SERVICE INFORMATION
A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption
Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin.
While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop
(become interrupted) before it is 100% complete.
One of two messages may appear:
^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe.
^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0".
In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if
the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped.
NOTE:
ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III.
The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service
Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later.
IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING
^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery.
^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads.
^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable.
^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter.
Page 673
4. Disconnect the adjustable pedal electric motor electrical connector. 5. Disconnect the adjustable
pedal electric motor memory electrical connector, if equipped. 6. Disconnect the accelerator
position sensor electrical connector. 7. Remove the two upper and one lower accelerator pedal
nuts. 8. Remove the adjustable accelerator pedal assembly.
CAUTION: Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly.
- Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket.
- Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal adjusting mechanism.
- Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling.
- Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Inspection After Installation Check that the accelerator pedal moves smoothly within the specified ranges.
- Depress and release the accelerator pedal to check that it returns smoothly to the original
released position.
- Perform an electrical inspection of the accelerator pedal position sensor. Refer to See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/VIN Registration See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released
Position Learning See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning See: Powertrain
Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning
.
CAUTION: When the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor is disconnected,
perform "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning.
NON-ADJUSTABLE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY Non-Adjustable Accelerator Pedal
Page 2183
Page 5659
3. Install the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit as follows (see Figure 5):
CAUTION:
Do not bend the float arm when handling the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit / Fuel Pump Assembly.
a. Slide the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit into the attachment slots until the two Locking Tabs snap
in place.
^ Confirm the Locking Tabs are snapped in place by trying to move the Sender Unit up and down
(it should not move).
b. Insert the Fuel Temperature Sensor into the Plastic Retaining Clip.
^ Make sure the "circular flange" of the Sensor is positioned between the Clip and the Rib.
c. Insert the two Fuel Temperature Sensor Wires into the Securing Tab.
d. Connect the White Wire Connector into the top of the Fuel Pump (see Figure 6).
e. Pull and push all connectors to make sure they are fully locked in place.
Locations
Page 4504
Page 1461
Install the bolts in the numerical order shown.
Engine Compartment
Automatic Air Conditioner
Compressor Clutch: Description and Operation Automatic Air Conditioner
MAGNET CLUTCH
System Description
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The front air control controls compressor operation based on ambient
and intake temperature and a signal from ECM.
Low Temperature Protection Control The front air control will turn the compressor ON or OFF as
determined by a signal detected by the intake sensor and the ambient sensor. When intake air
temperature is higher than the preset value, the compressor turns ON. The compressor turns OFF
when intake air temperature is lower than the preset value. That preset value is dependent on the
ambient temperature, refer to the following table.
Page 1681
Body Control Module: Service and Repair
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
Removal and Installation
BCM
Removal
NOTE: If possible, before removing BCM, retrieve current BCM configuration to use for reference
when configuring brand-new BCM after installation. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Body Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Configuration/Special Repair
Requirement. 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the lower knee protector.
Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Panel Assembly/Removal And Installation.
3. Remove the screw and release the BCM. 4. Disconnect the connectors and then remove the
BCM.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE: When replacing BCM, it must be configured. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Body Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Configuration/Special Repair
Requirement.
- When replacing BCM, perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition
key IDs. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing
and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing Control Unit See:
Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/ECM Re-Communicating Function See: Accessories and
Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/ECM Re-Communicating Function.
- When replacing BCM, perform ID registration procedure of low tire pressure warning system.
Refer to See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Tire Monitoring System/Testing
and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/ID Registration Procedure.
Page 3402
2. Install the center support bearing on the propeller shaft tube using a suitable pipe pressing on
the inner race. 3. Install a new clamp over the boot on the slip yoke. 4. Align the matching marks
and install the slip yoke on the propeller shaft tube. 5. Clean the surfaces and position the boot
over the propeller shaft tube and tighten the clamp.
6. Install the center support bearing bracket, then install the rear propeller shaft assembly in the
vehicle. Refer to See: Removal and
Replacement/Propeller Shaft 3S1410.
Specifications
Knock Sensor: Specifications
Knock Sensor Torque ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................... 21.1 Nm, 16 ft lb
Locations
Page 2809
REMOVAL
WARNING: Follow the "General Precautions" before working on the fuel system. Refer to See:
Service Precautions . 1. Remove the fuel filler cap to release the pressure from inside the fuel tank.
2. Check the fuel level on level gauge. If the fuel gauge indicates more than the level as shown (full
or almost full), drain the fuel from the fuel tank
Page 5707
3. Install the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit as follows (see Figure 5):
CAUTION:
Do not bend the float arm when handling the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit / Fuel Pump Assembly.
a. Slide the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit into the attachment slots until the two Locking Tabs snap
in place.
^ Confirm the Locking Tabs are snapped in place by trying to move the Sender Unit up and down
(it should not move).
b. Insert the Fuel Temperature Sensor into the Plastic Retaining Clip.
^ Make sure the "circular flange" of the Sensor is positioned between the Clip and the Rib.
c. Insert the two Fuel Temperature Sensor Wires into the Securing Tab.
d. Connect the White Wire Connector into the top of the Fuel Pump (see Figure 6).
e. Pull and push all connectors to make sure they are fully locked in place.
Description and Operation
Multiple Junction Connector: Description and Operation
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the figure below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
figure below.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 4741
8. Connect the compressor electrical connector. 9. Install the drive belt. Refer to See: Engine,
Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and
Repair.
10. Install the engine under cover and the splash shield.
BREAK-IN OPERATION When replacing compressor clutch assembly, always conduct the
break-in operation. This is done by engaging and disengaging the clutch about 30 times. Break-in
operation raises the level of transmitted torque.
Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures
Technical Service Bulletin # 00-052C Date: 040416
Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures
Classification: EC00-007C
Reference: NTB00-052C
Date: April 16, 2004
ECM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES
ATTENTION:
THIS BULLETIN HAS BEEN REVISED.
^ The Service Procedures for replacing an ECM on an Applied vehicle were revised.
^ Please use this bulletin NTB00-052c for complete information.
^ Discard all previously distributed copies of NTB00-052.
APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All 2000 and later 1999 Frontier (D22) 1999 Quest (V41) 1999 Pathfinder
(R50) from VIN JN8AR07**XW350101
IF YOU CONFIRM:
The Electronic Control Module (ECM) needs to be replaced on a 2000 MY and later vehicle, or an
Applied 1999 MY vehicle (see above).
ACTIONS:
^ Re-register all customer keys if the vehicle has ECM based NATS (see step 1).
^ Check ASIST for any new updates for the new ECM you're installing (see steps 2 - 4).
^ Perform the "ACCELERATOR PEDAL & THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING"
procedure (see step 5).
^ After installing the new ECM, perform the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARNING" procedure (when
applicable) using CONSULT-II. See step 6.
^ For 2005 and later vehicles, enter the vehicle VIN into the new ECM (see step 7).
CAUTION:
Failure to perform all the work steps in the specified order can cause poor engine running, MIL
'ON', or vehicle emission test rejection.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
Page 4891
- Replace the air bag module if it has been dropped or sustained an impact.
Do not allow oil, grease or water to come in contact with the air bag module.
- For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors, refer to See: Service and Repair.
INSTALLATION
Original Passenger Air Bag Module Installation is in the reverse order of removal. For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors, refer to See: Service and Repair.
CAUTION: Always work from the side of or under front passenger air bag module.
- After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer
to See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/SRS Operation Check.
Service Replacement Passenger Air Bag Module 1. Install the front passenger air bag module to
the instrument panel pad assembly.
2. Install the instrument panel assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Panel Assembly/Removal And Installation.
3. Connect the front passenger air bag module harness connector to yellow 4-pin service
replacement air bag connector and fasten connector to
mounting bracket.
CAUTION: Always work from the side of or under front passenger air bag module.
- After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer
to See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/SRS Operation Check.
WIRING HARNESS MODIFICATION The passenger air bag module originally installed in the
vehicle uses direct-connect style harness connectors. Service replacement passenger air bag
modules use tab-locking style harness connectors. If the passenger air bag module is replaced or if
the direct-connect harness connectors are damaged, the vehicle wiring harness must be modified
to allow connection of the service replacement passenger air bag module.
NOTE: The wiring harness modification is to be performed only if the vehicle is equipped with the
original passenger air bag which uses direct-connect harness connectors. If the passenger air bag
is to be replaced in a vehicle that has already had the service replacement passenger air bag
installed, the wiring harness modification is not required.
CAUTION: Do not attempt to repair or replace damaged direct-connect front passenger air bag module
connectors. If a direct-connect harness connector is damaged, the front passenger air bag must be
replaced and the wiring harness modified.
- Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least
3 minutes.
Page 1357
Oil Pan: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
WARNING: To avoid the danger of being scalded, never drain the engine oil when the engine is
hot. 1. Remove the engine. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine
Assembly/Removal and Installation. 2. Remove the oil pan (lower) using the following steps.
a. Remove the oil pan (lower) bolts using power tool. b. Insert Tool between the lower oil pan and
the upper oil pan.
Tool number : KV10111100 (J-37228)
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the mating surface.
- Do not insert a screwdriver, this will damage the mating surfaces. c. Slide (1) the Tool by tapping
(2) its side with a hammer to remove the lower oil pan from the upper oil pan.
3. Remove the oil strainer from the oil pan (upper). 4. Remove the oil pan (upper) using the
following steps.
a. Remove the oil pan (upper) bolts as shown. b. Remove the oil pan (upper) from the cylinder
block by prying it at the points shown, using suitable tool.
Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption
Recovery
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Programming
Interruption Recovery
Classification: EC10-015
Reference: NTB10-078
Date: June 21, 2010
REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE
SERVICE INFORMATION
A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption
Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin.
While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop
(become interrupted) before it is 100% complete.
One of two messages may appear:
^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe.
^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0".
In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if
the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped.
NOTE:
ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III.
The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service
Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later.
IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING
^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery.
^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads.
^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable.
^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter.
Service and Repair
Transfer Case Actuator: Service and Repair
TRANSFER CONTROL DEVICE
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Switch the 4WD shift switch to 2WD and set the transfer assembly to 2WD. 2.
Disconnect the transfer control device connector. 3. Remove the breather hose from the transfer
control device.
4. Remove the bolts and detach the transfer control device.
INSTALLATION 1. Install the new O-ring to the transfer control device.
CAUTION: Do not reuse O-ring.
- Apply petroleum jelly to O-ring.
2. Install the transfer control device.
a. Turn the control shift rod fully counterclockwise using a flat-bladed screwdriver, and then put a
mark on the control shift rod.
Page 223
In the Administrator window select My Computer.
In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C).
In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder.
In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder.
In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder.
When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time.
Select and print the file/screen image that you want.
NOTE:
During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems.
Erase DTCs from all systems
22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen).
23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear.
24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.)
25. Select Connect.
26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
Procedures
Fuel Filter: Procedures
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly
Fuel Level Sender Unit
Disassembly 1. Disconnect the harness connectors. 2. Remove the fuel sensor from the pump
assembly. 3. Remove the sending unit module and floater arm assembly.
Assembly Assembly is the reverse order of disassembly.
Page 302
40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19.
NOTE:
For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF.
^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data.
41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42.
41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed.
^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service
Manual (ESM) for this procedure.
NOTE:
If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle.
IAVL can now be performed.
42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF.
^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs.
Page 1559
^ Blue LLC one quart concentrate:
P/N 999MP - L255QTP
> The one quart concentrate containers are intended for extreme cold weather application.
> Use the concentrate without mixing (do not add water).
> Add directly to the cooling system in specific amounts as directed on the container label.
Additional Information for using Blue LLC
Blue LLC and Green-colored Nissan LLC (P/N 999MP-AF000P) are compatible with each other:
^ Blue can be mixed/added with Green
^ Green can be mixed/added with Blue
CAUTION:
^ Adding Green LLC to Blue LLC will reduce/shorten the life expectancy of the Blue LLC to that of
the Green LLC (4 years / 60,000 miles).
^ LLC must always be used with demineralized or distilled water, otherwise the life expectancy of
the LLC (Blue or Green) will be degraded and
cooling system damage may occur.
Locations
Page 139
Terminal Layout
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Terminal Layout
TERMINAL LAYOUT
Page 830
SPECIAL TOOLS
Page 2262
CONSULT-III Checking System
CONSULT-III CHECKING SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram
Page 209
Page 5668
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the Fuel Pump Assembly from the vehicle.
^ Refer to section FL in the applicable Service Manual for removal information.
^ Make sure to follow all Service Manual warnings and cautions.
Page 2279
Page 1136
Print this page and keep it by your tire mounting equipment
Service and Repair
Antenna, Phone: Service and Repair
TEL ANTENNA
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Slide the front passenger seat fully
forward. 3. Remove the Bluetooth control unit kick shield screws and remove the Bluetooth control
unit kick shield.
4. Remove the Bluetooth antenna screws (A), disconnect the Bluetooth antenna connector (B) and
remove the Bluetooth antenna (1). Bluetooth control unit screws (C)
- Bluetooth control unit (2)
- Arrow Indicates Front of vehicle
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 5975
Page 3315
to See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD).
- Do not loosen drive pinion lock nut to adjust the total preload torque. If the total preload torque
exceeds the specifications, replace the collapsible spacer and tighten it again to adjust. Refer to
See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD).
After adjustment, rotate drive pinion back and forth 2 to 3 times to check for unusual noise, rotation
malfunction, and other malfunctions.
4. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Check the differential gear oil level after installation. Refer to See: Fluid Differential/Service and Repair/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD).
Page 5590
Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Ignition Timing: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check
IDLE SPEED
With CONSULT-III Check idle speed in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-III.
With GST Check idle speed with GST.
IGNITION TIMING 1. Attach timing light to loop wire as shown.
2. Check ignition timing.
Page 5592
Audible Warning Device: Service Precautions
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
The Supplemental Restraint System such as "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER",
used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front
passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage
front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag
deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and
whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system
safely is included in the Restraint Systems Information.
WARNING: To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed
by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
- Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to
personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and
Air Bag Module, see the SRS Airbag.
- Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed. SRS
wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.
Page 2902
Page 1827
Service Procedure
Check NATS On The Vehicle
1. Check to see if the vehicle you're working on has "ECM based" NATS V2.0 or V5.0.
a. If the vehicle has ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0, it will NOT start after you install a service
replacement ECM. So you'll have to re-register all ignition keys, including spare keys with
CONSULT-II and the purple NATS card. After you do this, proceed with step 2.
^ If you do not know how to re-register the keys, refer to the ESM for the NATS key re-registration
procedure.
b. If the vehicle has "BCM based" NATS (instead of ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0), you do NOT
have to re-register the ignition or spare keys. Proceed with step 2.
Check For ECM Data Updates in ASIST
2. In ASIST, select [CONSULT Utilities] >>> [ECM/TCM Data]. Then choose Model and Model
Year (see Figure 1).
3. Look for ECM Data Updates (listed by ECM P/Ns and vehicle configuration) in the top, center
display panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
a. If there is not updates listed for your vehicle configuration, you do NOT have to reprogram the
service replacement ECM. Proceed with step 5.
b. If there is updates listed for your vehicle configuration, see if they apply to the service
replacement ECM you're going to install. Do this by performing step 4.
4. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then confirm that your
ECM is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, -XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details"
panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
a. If your ECM is listed in the "Details" panel, you must reprogram the ECM with the latest data
update. After you do this, proceed with step 5.
CAUTION:
The 1999-2000 Frontier and 1999-2000 Pathfinder have a gray CONSULT connector AND a white
GST connector. Do NOT attempt to perform the ECM Reprogramming procedure with CONSULT-II
connected to the gray CONSULT connector. See the appropriate ESM for further details if
necessary.
b. If your ECM is NOT listed in the "Details" panel, you do NOT have to reprogram the ECM.
Proceed with step 5.
Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
5. Perform the Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning as follows:
a. Make sure the accelerator pedal is fully released.
b. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds.
c. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" for 10 seconds.
Page 1307
Engine Oil Pressure: Capacity Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Standard and Limit
OIL PRESSURE
OIL PUMP
REGULATOR VALVE
ENGINE OIL CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE)
Page 2437
Page 3247
4. Remove snap ring from A/T assembly harness connector. 5. Push A/T assembly harness
connector.
CAUTION: Do not damage connector. 6. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket. Refer to See: Fluid
Pan/Service and Repair.
7. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector (A).
CAUTION: Do not damage connector. 8. Straighten the four terminal clips to free the terminal cord
assembly for A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness. Arrow Indicate Terminal clip
9. Straighten terminal clip to free the revolution sensor harness.
10. Disconnect revolution sensor connector.
CAUTION: Do not damage connector.
Page 3667
- After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), perform the following.
- Refill brake system with new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system. Refer to See: Brake
Bleeding/Service and Repair.
- Adjust the steering angle sensor. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing Control Unit/Description See: Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing Control Unit/Special
Repair Requirement See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Adjustment Of
Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position/Description See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Adjustment Of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position/Special Repair Requirement.
- Calibrate the decel G sensor. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Inspection And Adjustment/Special Repair Requirement.
Page 2043
4. Disconnect the adjustable pedal electric motor electrical connector. 5. Disconnect the adjustable
pedal electric motor memory electrical connector, if equipped. 6. Disconnect the accelerator
position sensor electrical connector. 7. Remove the two upper and one lower accelerator pedal
nuts. 8. Remove the adjustable accelerator pedal assembly.
CAUTION: Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly.
- Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket.
- Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal adjusting mechanism.
- Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling.
- Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Inspection After Installation Check that the accelerator pedal moves smoothly within the specified ranges.
- Depress and release the accelerator pedal to check that it returns smoothly to the original
released position.
- Perform an electrical inspection of the accelerator pedal position sensor. Refer to See: Testing
and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/VIN Registration See: Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning See:
Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning See:
Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning .
CAUTION: When the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor is disconnected,
perform "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to See: Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning.
NON-ADJUSTABLE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY Non-Adjustable Accelerator Pedal
Page 162
Body Control Module: Service and Repair
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
Removal and Installation
BCM
Removal
NOTE: If possible, before removing BCM, retrieve current BCM configuration to use for reference
when configuring brand-new BCM after installation. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Body Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Configuration/Special Repair
Requirement. 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the lower knee protector.
Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Panel Assembly/Removal And Installation.
3. Remove the screw and release the BCM. 4. Disconnect the connectors and then remove the
BCM.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE: When replacing BCM, it must be configured. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Body Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Configuration/Special Repair
Requirement.
- When replacing BCM, perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition
key IDs. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing
and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing Control Unit See:
Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/ECM Re-Communicating Function See: Accessories and
Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/ECM Re-Communicating Function.
- When replacing BCM, perform ID registration procedure of low tire pressure warning system.
Refer to See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Tire Monitoring System/Testing
and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/ID Registration Procedure.
Page 758
Switch: Service and Repair
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK POSITION SWITCH
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
Differential Lock Position Switch
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage spline, companion flange and front oil seal when removing propeller
shaft.
- Before removing rear final drive assembly or rear axle assembly, disconnect ABS sensor harness
connector from the assembly and move it away from rear final drive assembly/rear axle assembly
area. Failure to do so may result in sensor wires being damaged and sensor becoming inoperative.
1. Drain rear final drive gear oil. Refer to See: Maintenance/Fluids/Fluid - Differential/Service and
Repair/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD). 2. Remove rear propeller shaft. Refer to See: Transmission
and Drivetrain/Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service
and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Propeller Shaft 3S1410.
3. Remove both RH and LH axle shafts. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive Axles,
Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Service
and Repair/Rear Axle Shaft.
4. Remove the carrier cover. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential
Assembly/Differential Cover/Service and Repair/Rear Final
Drive M226 (ELD).
5. Remove differential lock solenoid connector (B) bolt and disconnect differential lock position
connector (A). Arrow Indicates Front
6. For installation, apply a paint matching mark on one side of side bearing cap.
CAUTION: Side bearing caps are line-board for initial assembly. The matching marks are used to install them
in their original positions.
- For matching mark, use paint. Do not damage side bearing cap.
7. Remove adjuster lock plates.
Page 6109
Page 1116
Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Transmitter (Pressure Sensor)
REMOVAL
CAUTION: DO NOT use center hole cone-type clamping machines to hold the wheel assembly
during tire removal/installation or balancing or damage to the wheel paint, cladding or chrome may
result. Use only rim-type or universal lug-type clamping machines to hold the wheel assembly
during servicing. 1. Deflate tire. Unscrew transmitter nut and allow transmitter to fall into tire.
2. Gently bounce tire so that transmitter falls to bottom of tire. Place wheel and tire assembly on tire
changing machine and break both tire beads. Ensure that the transmitter remains at the bottom of
the tire while breaking the bead.
3. Turn tire so that valve hole is at bottom, and gently bounce the tire to ensure transmitter is near
valve hole. Carefully lift tire onto turntable and
position valve hole (and transmitter) 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head.
4. Lubricate tire well, and remove top side of tire. Reach inside the tire and remove the transmitter.
5. Remove the second side of the tire as normal.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: DO NOT use center hole cone-type clamping machines to hold the wheel assembly
during tire removal/installation or balancing or damage to the wheel paint, cladding or chrome may
result. Use only rim-type or universal lug-type clamping machines to hold the wheel assembly
during servicing.
1. Place first side of tire onto rim.
Body - Power Window 'Auto Up' Feature Inoperative
Front Door Window Motor: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Power Window 'Auto Up' Feature
Inoperative
Classification: EL09-033A
Reference: NTB09-095A
Date: May 5, 2010
POWER WINDOW "AUTO UP" INITIALIZATION
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles have been revised. No other changes have
been made. Please discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007-2009 350Z Coupe & Roadster (Z33) 2007-2009 Armada (TA60)
2007-2008 Maxima (A34) 2007 Murano (Z50) 2007-2009 Pathfinder (R51) 2007-2009 Quest (V42)
2007-2009 Titan (A60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
A power window "Auto Up" will not work.
ACTION
Reset the limit switch.
1. Raise the door glass to the top position.
2. While pressing and holding the reset switch, lower the door glass to the bottom position.
3. Release the reset switch.
4. Verify that the reset switch returns to the original position, and then raises the door glass to the
top position.
NOTES:
> If the window is still not operating correctly, refer to ASIST and the Service Manual for further
diagnosis and repair information.
> The above initialization procedure must be performed if any of the following occur:
> Battery cable is disconnected.
> Power window switch connector is disconnected.
> Power window regulator is replaced.
> Power window motor is replaced.
> Window glass is removed.
Page 2866
Ignition Coil: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
IGNITION COIL
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Engine Cover.
2. Disconnect the harness connector from the ignition coil. 3. Remove the ignition coil.
CAUTION: Do not shock ignition coil.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 4068
RELAY CONTROL SYSTEM
System Description
IPDM E/R controls relays based on input signals from various sensors and from request signals
received via CAN communication.
CAUTION: IPDM E/R integrated relays cannot be removed.
Page 4456
7. Remove steering outer socket from steering knuckle using Tool. Be careful not to damage ball
joint boot.
CAUTION: Temporarily tighten nut to prevent damage to threads and to prevent Tool from coming
off.
Tool number : HT72520000 (J-25730-A)
8. On 2WD model, remove stabilizer bar bolts and reposition stabilizer bar. Refer to See:
Suspension/Stabilizer Bar/Service and Repair.
9. Remove oil piping (high pressure side and low pressure side) from steering gear assembly, then
drain fluid from piping.
10. Remove lower joint bolt on lower shaft.
11. Remove bolts and nuts of steering gear assembly using power tool, and then remove steering
gear assembly from vehicle.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
- After removing/installing or replacing steering components, check wheel alignment. Refer to See:
Alignment/Service and Repair.
- After adjusting wheel alignment, adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor. Refer to See:
Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Adjustment Of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral
Position/Special Repair Requirement.
Locations
Page 1659
WARNING:
Be careful of sharp edges after cutting off the excess band clamp.
7. After band clamp(s) installation, road test the vehicle to verify the repair.
Page 2508
Body - Windshield Cracking Information
Windshield: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Windshield Cracking Information
Classification: BT09-052
Reference: NTB09-091
Date: August 25, 2009
WINDSHIELD CRACKING
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Models
SERVICE INFORMATION
The Purpose of this bulletin is to give Nissan dealers guidelines to help determine if windshield
breakage is covered under warranty or is the customer's responsibility. Nissan North America
(NNA) is not responsible for damage to glass that is a result of objects striking or scratching the
glass. However, NNA is responsible for manufacturing issues such as distorted glass and cracks
that are due to improper installation or damage to the glass during vehicle assembly. NNA typically
does not find any type of cracks in the windshield due to stress in vehicles with over 5000 miles.
Glass damage can be categorized in 3 general areas:
1. Cracks due to objects striking the glass.
2. Cracks due to scratch in glass surface.
3. Distortion or cracks due to manufacturing issues.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Part Return Process Reminder
Refer to WB/07-010: Nissan is announcing a new requirement in the process for parts return to
assist engineers in analyzing part issues. Dealers are now required to mark glass and other
components returned that have "visible issues" using a grease pencil or similar instrument to
highlight the area damaged.
1) How to determine if glass damage is due to objects striking the glass.
Cracks from objects striking the glass
Page 856
2. If outside of the specified value, adjust camber and caster using the cam bolts (1) in the front
lower link (2).
CAUTION: After adjusting the camber and caster check the toe-in.
NOTE: Camber changes about 3' (0.05°) with each graduation of one cam bolt (1). Refer to table
below for examples of lower link cam bolt (1) effect on camber and caster.
3. Tighten the cam bolt nuts to specification. Refer to See: Steering and
Suspension/Suspension/Service and Repair/Front Suspension.
TOE-IN
WARNING: Always perform the following procedure on a flat surface.
- Make sure that no person is in front of the vehicle before pushing it.
1. Bounce the front of vehicle up and down to stabilize the vehicle height (posture). 2. Push the
vehicle straight ahead about 5 m (16 ft).
3. Put a mark on base line of the tread (rear side) of both front tires at the same height as hub
center as shown. These marks are measuring points. 4. Measure the distance "A" on the rear side
of the front tires as shown.
Page 2218
34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the
"Duplication Test" icon.
35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase.
36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18).
37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased.
^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs.
^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed.
Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below.
38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF.
39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch
(M/T) pedal;
Page 1038
6. Start the engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 7. Check the engine oil
pressure with engine running under no-load.
Engine oil pressure [Engine oil temperature at 80°C (175°F)]
CAUTION: If the difference is extreme, check the oil passages and oil pump for leaks and
blockages. 8. After the inspections, install oil pressure switch as follows:
a. Remove old liquid gasket adhering to oil pressure switch and engine. b. Apply liquid gasket and
tighten oil pressure switch to the specification.
Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type
Specifications.
Oil pressure switch torque : 14.7 N.m (1.5 kg-m, 11 ft-lb)
c. After warming up engine, make sure there is no leakage of engine oil with engine running.
Specifications
Knock Sensor: Specifications
Knock Sensor Torque ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................... 21.1 Nm, 16 ft lb
Rear Axle Shaft
Axle Shaft Assembly: Service and Repair Rear Axle Shaft
AXLE SHAFT
Removal and Installation
CAUTION: Before removing the axle shaft, remove the ABS sensor to reposition the ABS sensor
out of the way. Failure to do so may result in damage to the ABS sensor and cause the ABS
sensor to become inoperative.
REMOVAL 1. Remove the ABS sensor. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes
/ Traction Control Systems/Wheel Speed Sensor/Service and
Repair/VDC/TCS/ABS/Wheel Sensors.
Locations
Page 137
Locations
Page 5627
Page 555
c. Remove the Fuel Temperature Sensor from the Plastic Retaining Clip.
d. Remove the wires from the Securing Tab.
e. Unplug the White Wire Connector at the top of the fuel pump.
^ DO NOT disturb the Black Wire Connector located next to the white Wire connector.
f. Carefully cut the tie-wrap securing the harnesses to the corrugated tubing.
CAUTION:
DO NOT damage the wires or the wire insulation when cutting the Tie-Wrap.
Page 1338
EM-11
Page 3976
TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS
Page 5678
Fuel Gauge: Description and Operation Component Description
METER SYSTEM
FUEL GAUGE : Component Description
Page 2510
Attachment General Procedure
Page 2405
Page 5032
Page 312
C. Scroll down and select [VIN REGISTRATION] on the "Select Work Item" screen. See Figure 10.
d. Press [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 11.
e. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 12.
Page 3298
2. Check the differential gear oil level from the filler plug hole as shown.
CAUTION: Do not start engine while checking differential gear oil level. 3. Install the filler plug with
sealant applied on the threads to the rear final drive assembly. Tighten to the specified torque.
Refer to See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD).
- Use High Performance Thread Sealant or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type
Specifications.
Specifications
Connecting Rod Bearing: Specifications
CONNECTING ROD BEARING
Undersize
Connecting Rod Bearing Oil Clearance
Page 5911
Removal The vanity mirror lamp is replaced as part of the sunvisor assembly. Refer to See: Body
and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Bulb Replacement 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Using a suitable tool (A), release
the tabs and remove the vanity mirror lamp lens (1).
CAUTION: Wrap a cloth around suitable tool (A) to protect the housing and lens. 3. Release one
side of the bulb (2) from the tab, then pull straight out to remove.
Vanity mirror lamp bulb : 12V - 1.8W
STEP LAMP
Removal
Page 747
Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Transmitter (Pressure Sensor)
REMOVAL
CAUTION: DO NOT use center hole cone-type clamping machines to hold the wheel assembly
during tire removal/installation or balancing or damage to the wheel paint, cladding or chrome may
result. Use only rim-type or universal lug-type clamping machines to hold the wheel assembly
during servicing. 1. Deflate tire. Unscrew transmitter nut and allow transmitter to fall into tire.
2. Gently bounce tire so that transmitter falls to bottom of tire. Place wheel and tire assembly on tire
changing machine and break both tire beads. Ensure that the transmitter remains at the bottom of
the tire while breaking the bead.
3. Turn tire so that valve hole is at bottom, and gently bounce the tire to ensure transmitter is near
valve hole. Carefully lift tire onto turntable and
position valve hole (and transmitter) 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head.
4. Lubricate tire well, and remove top side of tire. Reach inside the tire and remove the transmitter.
5. Remove the second side of the tire as normal.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: DO NOT use center hole cone-type clamping machines to hold the wheel assembly
during tire removal/installation or balancing or damage to the wheel paint, cladding or chrome may
result. Use only rim-type or universal lug-type clamping machines to hold the wheel assembly
during servicing.
1. Place first side of tire onto rim.
Specifications
Piston Ring: Specifications
Piston Ring
Page 4412
6. Separate upper link ball joint from steering knuckle using Tool.
Tool number : ST29020001 (J-24319-01)
7. Remove pinch bolt from steering knuckle using power tool, then separate lower link ball joint
from steering knuckle. 8. Remove steering knuckle from vehicle.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check for deformity, cracks and damage on each part, replace if
necessary. Perform ball joint inspection. Refer to See: Suspension/Ball Joint/Testing and Inspection .
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Suspension/Service and Repair/Front Suspension for tightening torques.
CAUTION: Use a new cotter pin for installation of lock nut.
- When installing disc rotor on wheel hub and bearing assembly, align the marks.
NOTE: When not using the alignment mark, refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake
System/Specifications/Front Disc Brake . When installing wheel and tire, refer to See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Rotation.
Page 1701
Page 4137
Terminal Layout
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Terminal Layout
TERMINAL LAYOUT
Page 3391
REMOVAL 1. Move the A/T select lever to the N position and release the parking brake.
2. Put matching marks on the rear propeller shaft flange yoke and the rear final drive companion
flange as shown.
CAUTION: For matching marks, use paint. Never damage the rear propeller shaft flange yoke or
the companion flange. 3. Remove the bolts, then remove the propeller shaft from the rear final
drive and transfer case.
INSPECTION Inspect the propeller shaft runout. If runout exceeds the limit, replace the propeller shaft assembly.
Refer to See: Specifications/Propeller Shaft 2S1410/General Specification.
Locations
Page 3004
Page 1547
- Thickness of a new valve lifter can be identified by stamp marks on the reverse side (inside the
cylinder).
Stamp mark N788 indicates 7.88 mm (0.3102 in) in thickness. Available thickness of valve lifter: 25 sizes with range 7.88 to 8.36 mm (0.3102 to 0.3291 in) in
steps of 0.02 mm (0.0008 in)
(when manufactured at factory). Refer to See: Engine Lubrication/Specifications. 5. Install the
selected valve lifter. 6. Install the camshaft. 7. Manually turn the crankshaft pulley a few turns. 8.
Make sure the valve clearances for a cold engine are within specifications. Refer to See: Engine
Lubrication/Specifications. 9. After completing the repair, check the valve clearances again with the
specifications for a warmed engine. Make sure the values are within specifications. Refer to See:
Engine Lubrication/Specifications.
Locations
Page 2695
4. Disconnect the adjustable pedal electric motor electrical connector. 5. Disconnect the adjustable
pedal electric motor memory electrical connector, if equipped. 6. Disconnect the accelerator
position sensor electrical connector. 7. Remove the two upper and one lower accelerator pedal
nuts. 8. Remove the adjustable accelerator pedal assembly.
CAUTION: Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly.
- Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket.
- Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal adjusting mechanism.
- Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling.
- Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Inspection After Installation Check that the accelerator pedal moves smoothly within the specified ranges.
- Depress and release the accelerator pedal to check that it returns smoothly to the original
released position.
- Perform an electrical inspection of the accelerator pedal position sensor. Refer to See: Computers
and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/VIN Registration See:
Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator
Pedal Released Position Learning See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning See: Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning .
CAUTION: When the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor is disconnected,
perform "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to See: Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released
Position Learning.
NON-ADJUSTABLE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY Non-Adjustable Accelerator Pedal
Page 3721
Brake Pedal Assy: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Brake Pedal
STANDARD PEDAL
ADJUSTABLE PEDAL
Page 2938
Shift Indicator: Description and Operation System Description
METER SYSTEM
SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR : System Description
The TCM receives A/T indicator signals from the park/neutral position (PNP) switch. The TCM then
sends A/T position indicator signals to the combination meter via CAN communication lines. The
combination meter indicates the received shift position.
Page 1213
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Service and Repair Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve
(RH)
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL
Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve (RH)
REMOVAL 1. Remove drive belt. Refer to See: Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and
Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
connector (RH).
3. Remove Intake valve timing control solenoid valve (RH) (3) from Intake valve timing control
solenoid valve cover (RH) (1).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Replace the O-ring (2) of the Intake valve timing control solenoid valve with a new one,
then lubricate O-ring with engine oil before installing.
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve bolt : 9.6 N.m (0.98 kg-m, 85 in-lb)
Exploded View
Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Exploded View
AIR CLEANER FILTER
Exploded View
Service and Repair
Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair
REAR DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR
Rear Door Glass Regulator Assembly
REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to See: Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service
and Repair.
2. Operate the power window switch to raise/lower the door window until the glass bolts can be
seen. 3. Remove the inside seal. 4. Remove the glass bolts, raise the glass and hold in place with
suitable tool.
5. Remove the bolts and the regulator and guide channel from the panel. 6. Disconnect the
connector for the regulator assembly.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check the regulator assembly for the following items. If a
malfunction is detected, replace or grease it. Gear wear
- Regulator deformation
- Spring damage
- Grease condition for each sliding part
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 5595
Locations
Page 1348
c. Tighten the oil pan (lower) bolts to the specified torque in numerical order as shown.
4. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
- Check fluid levels and add as needed if necessary.
- Start the engine and check for fluid leaks of any type.
- Stop engine and wait for 10 minutes.
- Check all fluid levels again.
- Check if steering wheel turns smoothly when it is turned several times fully to the left and right
lock positions.
TIMING CHAIN COVER
Page 712
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Air Bag (Satellite) Sensor
SIDE AIR BAG (SATELLITE) SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
CAUTION: Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at
least 3 minutes.
1. Remove seat belt retractor assembly. Refer to See: Restraint Systems/Seat Belt Systems/Seat
Belt/Service and Repair/Front Seat Belt. 2. Remove side air bag (satellite) sensor nuts. 3.
Disconnect the side air bag (satellite) sensor harness connector.
CAUTION: Do not use old nuts after removal; replace with new nuts.
- Check side air bag (satellite) sensor to ensure it is free of deformities, dents, cracks or rust. If it
shows any visible signs of damage, replace it with new one.
- Do not disassemble side air bag (satellite) sensor.
- Replace side air bag (satellite) sensor if it has been dropped or sustained an impact.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer
to See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic
Overview/SRS Operation Check.
Locations
Page 2037
- Thickness of a new valve lifter can be identified by stamp marks on the reverse side (inside the
cylinder).
Stamp mark N788 indicates 7.88 mm (0.3102 in) in thickness. Available thickness of valve lifter: 25 sizes with range 7.88 to 8.36 mm (0.3102 to 0.3291 in) in
steps of 0.02 mm (0.0008 in)
(when manufactured at factory). Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Engine
Lubrication/Specifications. 5. Install the selected valve lifter. 6. Install the camshaft. 7. Manually
turn the crankshaft pulley a few turns. 8. Make sure the valve clearances for a cold engine are
within specifications. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Engine
Lubrication/Specifications.
9. After completing the repair, check the valve clearances again with the specifications for a
warmed engine. Make sure the values are within specifications. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Engine Lubrication/Specifications.
Page 1023
2. Check the differential gear oil level from the filler plug hole as shown.
CAUTION: Do not start engine while checking differential gear oil level. 3. Install the filler plug with
sealant applied on the threads to the rear final drive assembly. Tighten to the specified torque.
Refer to See:
Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential Assembly/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive
M226 (ELD).
- Use High Performance Thread Sealant or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type
Specifications.
Page 352
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations Without Intelligent Key System
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Terminal Layout
TERMINAL LAYOUT
Page 1469
Exploded View
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove the upper oil pan. Refer to the updated Oil Pan and Oil Strainer procedure above.
2. Remove variable timing control solenoids.
3. Remove intake valve timing control sensors.
4. Remove the crankshaft driven fan pulley and pulley bracket.
5. Remove the drive belt auto tensioner and idler pulley.
6. Remove the intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (RH) (A) and intake valve timing
control solenoid valve cover (LH) (B) as follows:
a. Loosen and remove the bolts in the reverse of order as shown.
b. Cut the liquid gasket and remove the covers using Tool.
Tool number: KVIOIIIIOO (J-37228)
CAUTION: Do not damage mating surfaces.
7. Obtain compression TDC of No.1 cylinder as follows:
a. Turn the crankshaft pulley clockwise to align the TDC identification notch (without paint mark)
with the timing indicator on the front cover.
Page 1277
2. Install the rocker cover and tighten the bolts in two steps in the order shown. -
A: Rocker cover LH
- B: Rocker cover RH
- Arrow indicates Engine front
CAUTION: Do not hold the rocker cover (RH) (B) by the oil filler neck.
- Make sure the new rocker cover gasket is installed in the groove of the rocker cover.
3. Install the PCV hoses.
NOTE: Remove foreign materials from inside the hose using compressed air.
- The inserted length is within 25 - 30 mm (0.98 - 1.18 in) [Target: 25 mm (0.98 in)].
4. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 3837
Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair ABLS/ABS
ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY)
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to
See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 3. Drain the brake fluid.
Refer to See: Brake Fluid/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 4. Disconnect the
actuator harness connector from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
CAUTION: To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench to prevent the flare nuts
and brake tubes from being damaged.
- Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is
splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately.
5. Disconnect the brake tubes. 6. Remove the three bolts and remove the ABS actuator and
electric unit (control unit).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: To install, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench (commercial service tools).
- Always tighten brake tubes to specification when installing.
- Never reuse drained brake fluid.
Testing and Inspection
Fusible Link: Testing and Inspection
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
Fusible Link
1 : Fusible link
A melted fusible link can be detected either by visual inspection or by feeling with finger tip. If its
condition is questionable, use circuit tester or test lamp.
CAUTION: If fusible link should melt, it is possible that critical circuit
(power supply or large current carrying circuit) is shorted. In such a case, carefully check and
eliminate cause of malfunction. Never wrap outside of fusible link with vinyl tape. Important:
Never let fusible link touch any other wiring harness, vinyl or rubber parts.
Page 1334
EM-6
Fuse Block - Junction Box (J/B)
Fuse Block: Diagrams Fuse Block - Junction Box (J/B)
FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)
Terminal Arrangement
Locations
Page 2408
^ Check and compare your current ECM Part Number to Table A or B (as it applies) shown above.
If the part number does not match one in Table A or B, this bulletin does not apply. Go back to
ASIST for further diagnostic and repair information.
If this bulletin applies, reprogram the ECM.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You
MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential
to successfully completing this repair.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 5263
Rear Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Component Structure
REAR DOOR LOCK
Component Structure
Service and Repair
Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair
KNUCKLE
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel hub and bearing assembly. Refer to See: Suspension/Wheel
Hub/Service and Repair . Disconnect wheel sensor harness connector. Do not remove wheel sensor from wheel hub and
bearing assembly for this procedure.
2. Remove steering outer socket from steering knuckle using Tool.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage ball joint boot.
- Temporarily tighten nut to prevent damage to threads and to prevent Tool from coming off.
Tool number : HT72520000 (J-25730-A)
3. Remove the coil spring and shock absorber assembly using power tool. Refer to See:
Suspension/Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Coil Spring And Strut .
4. Support lower link using a suitable jack. 5. Remove cotter pin and nut from upper link ball joint
and discard the cotter pin.
Page 1784
Page 4876
Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision: Service and Repair Seat Belt Inspection
SEAT BELTS
Seat Belt Inspection
AFTER A COLLISION
WARNING: Inspect all seat belt assemblies including retractors and attaching hardware after any
collision. NISSAN recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced
unless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly.
Failure to do so could result in serious personal injury in an accident. Seat belt assemblies not in
use during a collision should also be replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. Seat
belt pre-tensioners should be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during a frontal collision
in which the air bags are deployed. Replace any seat belt assembly (including anchor bolts) if: The seat belt was in use at the time of a collision (except for minor collisions and the belts,
retractors and buckles show no damage and continue to operate properly).
- The seat belt was damaged in an accident. (i.e. torn webbing, bent retractor or guide).
- The seat belt attaching point was damaged in an accident. Inspect the seat belt attaching area for
damage or distortion and repair as necessary before installing a new seat belt assembly.
- Anchor bolts are deformed or worn out.
- The seat belt pre-tensioner should be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during the
collision in which the air bags are deployed.
PRELIMINARY CHECKS 1. Check the seat belt warning lamp/chime for proper operation as
follows:
a. Switch ignition ON. The seat belt warning lamp should illuminate. Also, the seat belt warning
chime should sound for about seven seconds. b. Fasten drivers seat belt. The seat belt warning
lamp should go out and the chime (if sounding) should stop.
2. If the air bag warning lamp is blinking, conduct self-diagnosis using CONSULT-III, and air bag
warning lamp. Refer to See: Air Bag
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/SRS Operation Check.
3. Check that the seat belt retractor, seat belt anchor and buckle bolts are securely attached. 4.
Check the shoulder seat belt guide and shoulder belt height adjuster for front seats. Ensure guide
swivels freely and that belt lays flat and does not
bind in guide. Ensure height adjuster operates properly and holds securely.
5. Check retractor operation:
a. Fully extend the seat belt webbing and check for twists, tears or other damage. b. Allow the seat
belt to retract. Ensure that belt returns smoothly and completely into the retractor. If the seat belt
does not return smoothly, wipe
the inside of the loops with a clean paper cloth, because dirt built up in the loops of the upper
anchors can cause the seat belts to retract slowly.
c. Fasten the seat belt. Check the seat belt returns smoothly and completely to the retractor. If the
belt does not return smoothly, the cause may be
an accumulation of dust or dirt. Use the "SEAT BELT TAPE SET" and perform the following steps.
Inspect the front seat belt through-anchor: 1. Pull the seat belt out to a length of 500 mm (19.69 in)
or more. 2. Use a clip or other device to hold the seat belt at the center pillar belt opening. 3. Pass
a thin wire through the through-anchor belt opening. Hold both ends of the wire and pull taut while
moving it up and down several times
along the belt opening surface to remove dirt.
4. Any dirt that cannot be removed with the wire can be removed by cleaning the opening with a
clean cloth. 5. Apply tape at the point where the belt contacts the through-anchor belt opening.
NOTE: Apply the tape so that there is no looseness or wrinkling. 6. Remove the clip holding the
seat belt and check that the belt returns smoothly. 7. Repeat steps above as necessary to check
the other seat belts.
SEAT BELT RETRACTOR ON-VEHICLE CHECK
Emergency Locking Retractors (ELR) and Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)
NOTE: All seat belt retractors are of the Emergency Locking Retractors (ELR) type. In an
emergency (sudden stop) the retractor will lock and prevent the belt from extending any further. All
3-point type seat belt retractors except the driver's seat belt also have an Automatic Locking
Retractors (ALR) mode. The ALR mode (also called child restraint mode) is used when installing
child seats. The ALR mode is activated when the seat belt is fully extended. When the belt is then
retracted partially, the ALR mode automatically locks the seat belt in a specific position so the belt
cannot be extended any further. To cancel the ALR mode, allow the seat belt to fully wind back into
the retractor. Check the seat belt retractors using the following test(s) to determine if a retractor
assembly is operating properly.
Page 3951
Page 1971
CONSULT-III Checking System
CONSULT-III CHECKING SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram
Page 4601
Recommended tire inflating tools.
Aftermarket Tire Sealers
Aftermarket tire sealants and/or aerosol repair kits should not be used (refer to the vehicle's
Owner's Manual).
^ Some aftermarket tire sealers and/or aerosol repair kits contain chemicals and propellants that
can cause damage to TPMS sensors.
NOTE:
Damage caused by use of aftermarket tire sealants contrary to recommendations in the vehicle
Owner's Manual is not covered under the Nissan New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Page 3991
Starter Motor: Service and Repair
STARTER MOTOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the intake manifold. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation.
2. Remove the starter harness terminal nut connectors. 3. Remove the two starter bolts, using
power tools. 4. Remove the starter.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Tighten terminal nut carefully.
Terminal nut : 10.8 N.m (1.1 kg-m, 8 ft-lb)
Page 5579
Page 4492
PARTS INFORMATION
Diagram Information and Instructions
Ignition Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
Connector Symbols
HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS
Connector symbols
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the
direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector.
For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements,
"Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals
Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring
diagrams.
Sample/Wiring Diagram -Example-
Page 3320
Switch: Service and Repair
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK POSITION SWITCH
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
Differential Lock Position Switch
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage spline, companion flange and front oil seal when removing propeller
shaft.
- Before removing rear final drive assembly or rear axle assembly, disconnect ABS sensor harness
connector from the assembly and move it away from rear final drive assembly/rear axle assembly
area. Failure to do so may result in sensor wires being damaged and sensor becoming inoperative.
1. Drain rear final drive gear oil. Refer to See: Fluid - Differential/Service and Repair/Rear Final
Drive M226 (ELD). 2. Remove rear propeller shaft. Refer to See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings
and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Propeller Shaft 3S1410.
3. Remove both RH and LH axle shafts. Refer to See: Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft
Assembly/Service and Repair/Rear Axle Shaft. 4. Remove the carrier cover. Refer to See:
Differential Cover/Service and Repair/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD).
5. Remove differential lock solenoid connector (B) bolt and disconnect differential lock position
connector (A). Arrow Indicates Front
6. For installation, apply a paint matching mark on one side of side bearing cap.
CAUTION: Side bearing caps are line-board for initial assembly. The matching marks are used to install them
in their original positions.
- For matching mark, use paint. Do not damage side bearing cap.
7. Remove adjuster lock plates.
Page 1313
Engine Oil: Testing and Inspection
ENGINE OIL
Inspection
OIL LEVEL Before starting the engine make sure the vehicle is parked on a flat and level surface, then check
the oil level. If the engine is already running, turn it off and allow 10 minutes before checking.
- Check that the oil level is within the low (L) and high (H) range as indicated on the dipstick.
- If the engine oil level is out of range, add oil as necessary. Refer to See: Maintenance.
OIL APPEARANCE Check the engine oil for a white milky appearance or excessive contamination.
- If the engine oil is milky, it is highly probable that it is contaminated with engine coolant. Repair
the broken parts.
OIL LEAKAGE Check for oil leakage around the following areas: Oil pan
- Oil pan drain plug
- Oil pressure switch
- Oil filter
- Oil cooler
- Intake valve timing control cover
- Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
- Front cover
- Mating surface between cylinder block and cylinder head
- Mating surface between cylinder head and rocker cover
- Crankshaft oil seal (front and rear)
OIL PRESSURE CHECK
WARNING: Be careful not to burn yourself, as engine oil may be hot.
- Put the selector lever in the Park "P" position.
1. Check the engine oil level. Refer to "Inspection". 2. Remove engine front undercover using
power tool. 3. Disconnect the oil pressure switch harness connector.
4. Remove the oil pressure switch (A). 5. Install Tools.
Page 2686
Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection
FUEL PRESSURE
Fuel Pressure Check
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE
With CONSULT-III 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Perform "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" in
"WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-III. 3. Start engine. 4. After engine stalls, crank it two or
three times to release all fuel pressure. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF.
Without CONSULT-III 1. Remove fuel pump fuse located in IPDM E/R.
2. Start engine. 3. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 4. Turn
ignition switch OFF. 5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system.
FUEL PRESSURE CHECK
CAUTION: Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger.
Be careful not to scratch or get the fuel hose connection area dirty when servicing, so that the quick
connector o-ring maintains sealability.
- Use Fuel Pressure Gauge Kit J-44321 and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 to check fuel
pressure.
- Do not perform fuel pressure check with electrical system operating (i.e. lights, rear defog, A/C,
etc.).
Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false readings due to varying engine loads and changes in
manifold vacuum.
NOTE: Prepare pans or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out.
The fuel pressure cannot be completely released because A60 models do not have fuel return
system. 1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". 2. Remove
engine cover. 3. Remove fuel hose using Quick Connector Release J-45488. Refer to See: Engine,
Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and
Repair/Removal and Installation.
- Do not twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose.
- Do not remove fuel hose from quick connector.
- Keep fuel hose connections clean.
Page 2125
Parking Brake
Parking Brake Control: Specifications Parking Brake
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Parking Brake
Specifications
Compression Check: Specifications
Compression Pressure
Standard...............................................................................................................................................
............. 1,520 KPa (15.5 Kg/cm2, 220 psi) / 200 rpm
Minimum...............................................................................................................................................
............ 1,324 KPa (13.5 Kg/cm2, 192 psi) / 200 rpm
Differential limit between
cylinders........................................................................................................................... 98 KPa (1.0
Kg/cm2, 14 psi) / 200 rpm
Page 2409
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Connect C-III to the vehicle to begin the reprogramming procedure.
^ If you are not familiar with the reprogramming procedure. Refer to "CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM
Reprogramming" general procedure.
Caution
2. When you get to the ECM Reprogramming screen shown in Figure 1, confirm this bulletin
applies as follows:
A. On your C-III screen, look at the Part Number column (see Figure 1).
Description and Operation
Multiple Junction Connector: Description and Operation
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE) The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the figure below. Refer to description of the slide-locking type connector.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector. [Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE) A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
figure below.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 1314
6. Start the engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 7. Check the engine oil
pressure with engine running under no-load.
Engine oil pressure [Engine oil temperature at 80°C (175°F)]
CAUTION: If the difference is extreme, check the oil passages and oil pump for leaks and
blockages. 8. After the inspections, install oil pressure switch as follows:
a. Remove old liquid gasket adhering to oil pressure switch and engine. b. Apply liquid gasket and
tighten oil pressure switch to the specification.
Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type
Specifications.
Oil pressure switch torque : 14.7 N.m (1.5 kg-m, 11 ft-lb)
c. After warming up engine, make sure there is no leakage of engine oil with engine running.
Page 1842
Page 5705
2. Remove the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit from the Fuel Pump Assembly as follows:
a. First, press in on the two locking tabs on the sides of the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit
b. Then, pull the unit UP and OUT of the attachment slots
^ For Type A see Figure 1
^ For Type B see Figure 2
Page 4353
SPECIAL TOOLS
Technical Service Bulletin # 08-097D Date: 110426
Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics
Classification: ST08-001D
Reference: NTB08-097D
Date: April 26, 2011
DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER
This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The
off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this
bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R
Locations
Page 2439
Page 4678
1. Disconnect heater switch resistor connector. See Figure 2.
2. Loosen two screws located on the heater switch resistor. See Figure 2.
3. Replace the heater switch resistor with part number 27151-ZW00A. See Figure 1.
4. Reassemble the vehicle components in reverse order of removal.
5. Check to make sure the issue has been resolved.
Page 4953
4. Unclip harness attachment clips from seat pan.
5. Unclip connector attachment clip from seat bracket to remove buckle assy from seat.
6. install seat belt buckle and bolt.
Page 3773
Removal And Installation
REAR DISC BRAKE
Removal and Installation of Brake Pad
WARNING: Clean dust on caliper and brake pad with a vacuum dust collector to minimize the
hazard of air borne particles or other materials.
CAUTION: While removing cylinder body, do not depress brake pedal because piston will pop out.
- It is not necessary to remove bolts on torque member and brake hose except for disassembly or
replacement of caliper assembly. In this case, hang cylinder body with a wire so as not to stretch
brake hose.
- Do not damage piston boot.
- If any shim is subject to serious corrosion, replace it with a new one.
- Always replace shim and shim cover as a set when replacing brake pads.
- Keep rotor free from brake fluid.
- Burnish the brake pads and disc rotor mutually contacting surfaces, after refinishing or replacing
rotors, after replacing pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage.
REMOVAL 1. Remove rear wheel and tires using power tool. 2. Remove sliding pin bolt from the
top mount. 3. Swing cylinder body open and remove pads, shims, cover and retainers.
INSTALLATION 1. Push piston in using a suitable tool.
CAUTION: By pushing in piston, brake fluid returns to master cylinder reservoir tank. Watch the
brake fluid level in the reservoir tank.
NOTE: Using a suitable tool, makes it easier to push in the piston. 2. Apply Molykote M-77 grease
to knuckle slide where brake pad contacts and to the outer multi-layered shim, pad retainers and
inner shim.
CAUTION: Do not get grease on the brake pads or brake rotor friction surfaces. 3. Install pads,
shims, cover and retainers to cylinder body. 4. Install cylinder body top sliding pin bolt and tighten
to specification.
Headlamp
Page 4460
1. Install the inner sockets.
2. Install the large-diameter side of the boots to the gear housing assembly. 3. Install the
small-diameter side of the boots to the groove of the inner sockets. 4. Install the boot clamps to the
boots, as shown.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the large-diameter boot clamps.
5. Crimp the large-diameter boot clamps, using Tool.
Tool number : KV40107300 ( - )
6. Install the cylinder tubes to the gear housing assembly. 7. Install the lock nuts and outer sockets
to the inner sockets.
Transfer Case TX15B
Page 4110
MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. -
The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Abbreviation List
ABBREVIATIONS
Abbreviation List
The following ABBREVIATIONS are used:
Page 2696
CAUTION: Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly.
- Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket.
- Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling.
- Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water.
Removal 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2.
Disconnect the accelerator position sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the two upper and one
lower accelerator pedal nuts. 4. Remove the adjustable accelerator pedal assembly.
CAUTION: Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly.
- Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket.
- Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling.
- Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Inspection After Installation Check that the accelerator pedal moves smoothly within the specified range.
Non-adjustable accelerator pedal - total pedal applied stroke : 48 mm (1.89 in)
- Depress and release the accelerator pedal to check that it returns smoothly to the original
released position.
- Perform an electrical inspection of the accelerator pedal position sensor. Refer to See: Computers
and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/VIN Registration See:
Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator
Pedal Released Position Learning See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning See: Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning .
CAUTION: When the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor is disconnected,
perform "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to See: Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released
Position Learning .
Page 4792
Heater Control Valve: Description and Operation Manual A/C (Type 1)
WATER VALVE CIRCUIT
Description
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Water Valve
The water valve (1) cuts the flow of engine coolant to the heater core to allow for maximum cooling
during A/C operation. It is controlled by the front air control.
Page 5254
- Check that the glass is securely fit into the glass run groove.
- Lower the glass slightly [approximately 10 to 20 mm (0.39 to 0.79 in)] and check that the
clearance to the sash is parallel. If the clearance between the glass and sash is not parallel, loosen
the regulator bolts, guide rail bolts, and glass and guide rail bolts to correct the glass position.
FRONT DOOR GLASS REGULATOR ASSEMBLY
Removal 1. Remove the front door speaker. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional
Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Speaker/Service and
Repair/MID Audio/Front Door Speaker.
2. Remove the hole cover over rear glass bolt. 3. Operate the power window main switch to
raise/lower the door window until the glass bolts can be seen. 4. Remove the inside seal. 5.
Remove the glass bolts. 6. Raise the front door glass and hold it in place with suitable tool. 7.
Disconnect the harness connector from the regulator assembly. 8. Remove the bolts and the
regulator assembly.
Disassembly And Assembly Remove the regulator motor from the regulator assembly.
Inspection After Removal Check the regulator assembly for the following items. If a malfunction is
detected, replace or grease it.
- Wire wear
- Regulator deformation
- Grease condition for each sliding part
The arrows in the figure show the application points of the body grease.
Installation 1. Install the regulator assembly.
Front door glass regulator assembly nuts and bolt : 7.5 N.m (0.77 kg-m, 66 in-lb)
2. Connect the harness connector to the regulator assembly. 3. Align the glass and install the glass
bolts.
Glass bolts : 6.1 N.m (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb)
4. Reset the limit switch. 5. Install front door speaker. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional
Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Speaker/Service and Repair/MID
Audio/Front Door Speaker.
SETTING OF LIMIT SWITCH AFTER INSTALLATION
Setting of Limit Switch If any of the following work has been done, set the limit switch (integrated in
the motor). Removal and installation of the regulator.
- Removal and installation of the motor from the regulator.
- Removal and installation of the glass.
- Removal and installation of the glass run.
Resetting After installing each component, perform the following procedure to reset the limit switch.
Locations
Temperature Sensor (Gauge): Locations
METER SYSTEM
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE : Component Parts Location
Page 2230
f. Enter the entire VIN using the keyboard. See Figure 13.
^ Use [CHNG] to switch between the letters and numbers keyboard screens.
g. Once the entire VIN is entered, select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 14.
h. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen and enter the entire VIN again. See Figure 15.
^ You MUST enter the VIN a second time for confirmation purposes.
With Intelligent Key System
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations With Intelligent Key System
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Terminal Layout
TERMINAL LAYOUT
Page 2357
3. CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check the power supply and the ground
circuit of the combination meter. Refer to See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning
Indicators/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Power Supply And
Ground Circuit/Combination Meter. Is the inspection result normal? YES (Present error) - Replace
the combination meter. Refer to See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Instrument
Cluster / Carrier/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. YES (Past error) - Error was
detected in the combination meter branch line. NO - Repair the power supply and the ground
circuit.
TCM Branch Line Circuit
TCM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure
1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the battery cable from the
negative terminal. 3. Check the terminals and connectors of the A/T assembly for damage, bend
and loose connection (unit side and connector side). Is the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO
2. NO - Repair the terminal and connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1.
Disconnect the connector of A/T assembly. 2. Check the resistance between the A/T assembly
harness connector terminals. Models with floor shift
- Models with column shift
Is the measurement value within the specification? YES - GO TO 3. NO - Repair the TCM branch
line. 3. CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check the power supply and the
ground circuit of the TCM. Refer to See: Transmission Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Main Power Supply And Ground Circuit. Is
the inspection result normal? YES (Present error) - Replace the control valve with TCM. Refer to
See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Valve Body/Service and
Repair. YES (Past error) - Error was detected in the TCM branch line. NO - Repair the power
supply and the ground circuit.
CAN Communication Circuit
CAN COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure
1. CONNECTOR INSPECTION 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the battery cable
from the negative terminal. 3. Disconnect all the unit connectors on CAN communication system. 4.
Check terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose connection. Is the inspection result
normal? YES - GO TO 2. NO - Repair the terminal and connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS
CONTINUITY (SHORT CIRCUIT)
Page 836
IMPORTANT:
If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or
charged back).
ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the
Service Dept.
4. Make sure the "turn plates" and "slide" plates are in good working order:
^ The surface of the front turn plates must be level with (the same height as) the rack surface.
If height is not the same; have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments.
^ Make sure the front turn plates:
> Do not wobble (no up/down movement).
> Operate (slide and turn) smoothly in all directions.
If there is any issue with the turn plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing
any alignments.
Page 4815
Refrigerant: Service and Repair
REFRIGERATION SYSTEM
HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure
SETTING OF SERVICE TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Discharging Refrigerant
WARNING: Avoid breathing A/C refrigerant and oil vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose
and throat. Remove HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant from the A/C system using certified service
equipment meeting requirements of SAE J2210 HFC-134a (R-134a) recycling equipment or SAE
J2201 HFC-134a (R-134a) recovery equipment. If an accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate
the work area before resuming service. Additional health and safety information may be obtained
from the refrigerant and oil manufacturers.
Evacuating System and Charging Refrigerant
Page 1358
CAUTION: Do not damage mating surface. 5. Remove the O-rings from the oil pump and front
cover.
NOTE: Do not reuse O-rings.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Clean the oil strainer.
INSTALLATION 1. Install the oil pan (upper) using the following steps.
a. Apply liquid gasket thoroughly as shown.
Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type
Specifications.
CAUTION: Apply liquid gasket to outside of bolt hole for the hole shown by *.
b. Install new O-rings to the oil pump and front cover side.
Page 1466
d. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque in numerical order as shown.
M6 x 30 mm (1.18 in): No.15,16 M8 x 25 mm (0.98in): No.1,3,5,7, 11,13 M8 x 45 mm (1.77 in):
No.2,4,6,8, 10, 14 M8 x 123 mm (4.84in): No.9, 12
2. Install the oil strainer to the oil pan (upper).
3. Install the oil pan (lower).
a. Using a scraper to remove old liquid gasket from mating surfaces.
- Also remove old liquid gasket from mating surface of oil pan (upper).
- Remove old liquid gasket from bolt holes and thread.
CAUTION: Do not scratch or damage the mating surfaces when cleaning off old liquid gasket.
b. Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket using Tool as shown.
Tool number: WS39930000 ( - )
Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to Service Manual GI Section.
CAUTION: Installation should be done within 5 minutes after applying liquid gasket.
c. Tighten the oil pan (lower) bolts to the specified torque in numerical order as shown.
Page 3607
Control Module: Locations Electrical Units Location
Page 4873
Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision: Service and Repair For Side And Rollover
Collision
COLLISION DIAGNOSIS
For Side and Rollover Collision
Check the SRS components using the following table. After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer
to See: Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/SRS
Operation Check.
WHEN SRS IS ACTIVATED IN THE SIDE OR ROLLOVER COLLISION 1. Replace the following
components: Front seat back assembly (on the side on which side air bag is activated)
- Diagnosis sensor unit
- (LH or RH) side air bag (satellite) sensor (on the side on which side air bag is activated)
2. Check the SRS components and the related parts using the following table. Replace any SRS components and the related parts showing visible signs of damage (dents,
cracks, deformation).
3. Conduct self-diagnosis using CONSULT-III and "AIR BAG" warning lamp. Refer to See: Air Bag
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/SRS Operation Check for details. Ensure entire SRS operates
properly.
WHEN SRS IS NOT ACTIVATED IN THE SIDE OR ROLLOVER COLLISION 1. Check the SRS
components and the related parts using the following table. If the front seat back assembly is damaged, the front seat back assembly must be replaced.
2. Conduct self-diagnosis using CONSULT-III and "AIR BAG" warning lamp. Refer to See: Air Bag
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/SRS Operation Check for details. Ensure entire SRS operates
properly.
SRS INSPECTION (FOR SIDE AND ROLLOVER COLLISION)
Locations
Page 1679
Page 2091
^ Check and compare your current ECM Part Number to Table A or B (as it applies) shown above.
If the part number does not match one in Table A or B, this bulletin does not apply. Go back to
ASIST for further diagnostic and repair information.
If this bulletin applies, reprogram the ECM.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You
MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential
to successfully completing this repair.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 4377
CLAIMS INFORMATION
NOTE:
This repair can only be used in conjunction with a claim for Front Wheel Alignment (Op-Code
WD44AA) and must be submitted on a separate work order line.
Page 5852
Recommended tire inflating tools.
Aftermarket Tire Sealers
Aftermarket tire sealants and/or aerosol repair kits should not be used (refer to the vehicle's
Owner's Manual).
^ Some aftermarket tire sealers and/or aerosol repair kits contain chemicals and propellants that
can cause damage to TPMS sensors.
NOTE:
Damage caused by use of aftermarket tire sealants contrary to recommendations in the vehicle
Owner's Manual is not covered under the Nissan New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Page 5572
Page 1434
Do not damage mating surfaces. 7. Remove the front oil seal using suitable tool.
CAUTION: Do not damage front cover.
8. Remove the oil pump drive spacer. Hold and remove the flat space of the oil pump drive spacer by pulling it forward.
9. Remove the oil pump. Refer to See: Engine Lubrication/Oil Pump/Service and Repair/Removal
and Installation.
10. Remove the chain tensioner on the LH bank using the following steps.
NOTE: To remove the timing chain and associated parts, start with those on the LH bank. The
procedure for removing parts on the RH bank is omitted because it is the same as that for the LH
bank.
a. Squeeze the return-proof clip ends using suitable tool and push the plunger into the tensioner
body. b. Secure the plunger using stopper pin.
- Stopper pin is made from hard wire approximately 1 mm (0.04 in) in diameter. c. Remove the
bolts and chain tensioner.
WARNING: Plunger, spring, and spring seat pop out when (squeezing) return-proof clip without
holding plunger head. It may cause serious injuries. Always hold plunger head when removing.
NOTE: Stop the plunger in the fully extended position by using the return-proof clip (1) if the stopper pin is
removed.
- Push the plunger (2) into the tensioner body while squeezing the return-proof clip (1). Secure it
using stopper pin (3).
11. Remove the timing chain tension guide and timing chain slack guide. 12. Remove the timing
chain and crankshaft sprocket.
Page 4056
MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. -
The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Abbreviation List
ABBREVIATIONS
Abbreviation List
The following ABBREVIATIONS are used:
Page 4965
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Air Bag (Satellite) Sensor
SIDE AIR BAG (SATELLITE) SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
CAUTION: Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at
least 3 minutes.
1. Remove seat belt retractor assembly. Refer to See: Seat Belt Systems/Seat Belt/Service and
Repair/Front Seat Belt. 2. Remove side air bag (satellite) sensor nuts. 3. Disconnect the side air
bag (satellite) sensor harness connector.
CAUTION: Do not use old nuts after removal; replace with new nuts.
- Check side air bag (satellite) sensor to ensure it is free of deformities, dents, cracks or rust. If it
shows any visible signs of damage, replace it with new one.
- Do not disassemble side air bag (satellite) sensor.
- Replace side air bag (satellite) sensor if it has been dropped or sustained an impact.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer
to See: Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/SRS
Operation Check.
Page 2461
Page 2526
8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.)
9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.)
10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2).
12. Select Select.
Fuse Block - Junction Box (J/B)
Fuse Block: Diagrams Fuse Block - Junction Box (J/B)
FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)
Terminal Arrangement
Page 2243
Locations
Page 5042
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Automatic Drive Positioner Control Unit
Memory Positioning Module: Service and Repair Automatic Drive Positioner Control Unit
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER CONTROL UNIT
Removal and Installation
CAUTION: When removing and installing, use shop cloths to protect parts from damage.
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the instrument driver lower
panel. Refer to See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Instrument Lower Panel LH.
3. Remove the screw from the automatic drive positioner control unit (1). 4. Remove automatic
drive positioner control unit (1) from bracket and disconnect electrical connectors.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Clamp the harness in position.
NOTE: After installing the automatic drive positioner control unit, perform additional service when
disconnecting battery negative terminal. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning.
Page 4593
Recommended tire inflating tools.
Aftermarket Tire Sealers
Aftermarket tire sealants and/or aerosol repair kits should not be used (refer to the vehicle's
Owner's Manual).
^ Some aftermarket tire sealers and/or aerosol repair kits contain chemicals and propellants that
can cause damage to TPMS sensors.
NOTE:
Damage caused by use of aftermarket tire sealants contrary to recommendations in the vehicle
Owner's Manual is not covered under the Nissan New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Locations
Page 1059
Refrigerant Oil: Service and Repair
OIL
Maintenance of Oil Quantity in Compressor
CHECKING AND ADJUSTING
CAUTION: If excessive oil leakage is noted, do not perform the oil return operation. Start the
engine and set the following conditions:
Test Condition Engine speed: Idling to 1,200 rpm
- A/C switch: On
- Blower fan speed: MAX position
- Temp. control: Optional [Set so that intake air temperature is 25° to 30° C (77° to 86°F)]
- Perform oil return operation for about ten minutes
Adjust the oil quantity according to the following table.
Oil Adjusting Procedure for Components Replacement Except Compressor After replacing any of
the following major components, add the correct amount of oil to the system.
Oil Adjustment Procedure for Compressor Replacement
Locations
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Locations
Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-009 Date: 100119
Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure
Classification: EM09-015
Reference: NTB10-009
Date: January 19, 2010
REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR SEIZED EXHAUST SENSOR
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan vehicles
SERVICE INFORMATION
If an exhaust sensor is seized in the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube, perform the procedure
described in this bulletin to remove the sensor and prevent unnecessary replacement of the
exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube.
In most cases this procedure is successful. This is because the threads of the exhaust sensors are
made of a softer material than the part they thread into on the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube.
NOTE:
The replacement of exhaust manifolds/catalysts/front tubes for stripped exhaust sensor threads
may not be considered a warrantable expense.
This procedure can be performed by two methods:
Method #1 - If the Sensor Can Be Easily Accessed
^ The procedure can be performed on the vehicle.
^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube will not have to be removed.
Method #2 - If the Sensor Cannot Be Easily Accessed
^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube must be removed from the vehicle.
^ The procedure will be performed with the part clamped in a vice.
Method #2 is described in this bulletin. Method #1 is the same as Method #2 except that it is
performed on the vehicle.
Service Procedure
Rust Penetrant
Recommended rust penetrants to be used in this procedure:
Page 255
CAUTION
2. When you get to the ECM Reprogramming screen shown in Figure 1, confirm this bulletin
applies as follows.
A. On your C-III screen, look at the Part Number column (see Figure 1):
^ If this column is blank (no part number listed), this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to
ASIST for further diagnostic information.
^ If a Part Number is listed, write it on the Repair Order.
Page 4816
Page 2451
2. Select Direct Diagnostic Mode icon
3. Select System Diagnosis
Page 696
MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. -
The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Abbreviation List
ABBREVIATIONS
Abbreviation List
The following ABBREVIATIONS are used:
Page 5476
1. Write down the radio station presets.
2. Move / adjust the passenger seat bottom and seatback to the middle and upright positions.
3. Turn the ignition OFF. Disconnect both 12V battery cables, negative cable first, and wait at least
3 minutes before proceeding to step 4.
CAUTION:
Do not drop, tilt, or bump the side air bag module while removing/installing the seat. Always handle
it with care.
4. Remove the four bolts holding the seat to the body.
5. Place the seat, back side down, on a clean covered workbench.
6. Remove the lower flap cover.
Page 567
2. Check the fuel level on level gauge. If the fuel gauge indicates more than the level as shown (full
or almost full), drain the fuel from the fuel tank
until the fuel gauge indicates the level as shown, or less.
- If the fuel pump does not operate, use the following procedure to drain the fuel to the specified
level. a. Insert a suitable hose of less than 15 mm (0.59 in) diameter into the fuel filler pipe through
the fuel filler opening to drain the fuel from fuel
filler pipe.
b. Remove the LH rear wheel and tire. Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and
Repair/Rotation .
c. Remove the fuel filler pipe shield. d. Disconnect the fuel filler hose from the fuel filler pipe and
disconnect the vent hose quick connector.
e. Insert a suitable hose into the fuel tank through the fuel filler hose to drain the fuel from the fuel
tank.
3. Release the fuel pressure from the fuel lines. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Fuel Pressure Check .
4. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 5. Remove the three nuts and remove fuel line pump
protector.
6. Disconnect the EVAP hose at the EVAP canister. 7. Disconnect the fuel level sensor, fuel filter,
and fuel pump assembly electrical connector and the fuel feed hose.
Automatic Air Conditioner
Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Description and Operation Automatic Air Conditioner
IN-Vehicle Sensor
IN-VEHICLE SENSOR
Component Description
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
In-vehicle Sensor
The in-vehicle sensor (1) is located on the lower instrument panel LH. It converts variations in
temperature of passenger compartment air (drawn in through the integrated fan) into a resistance
value. It is then input into the front air control.
Intake Sensor
INTAKE SENSOR
System Description
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Intake Sensor
The intake sensor is located on the heater and cooling unit assembly. It converts temperature of air
after if passes through the evaporator into a resistance value which is then input to the front air
control.
Page 5559
SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal"
condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Front Final Drive M205
Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Front Final Drive M205
FRONT OIL SEAL
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the drive shafts from the front final drive assembly. Refer to See: Drive
Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and
Repair/Front Axle Shaft.
2. Remove the front propeller shaft from the front final drive assembly. Refer to See:
Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller
Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Propeller Shaft 2F1310.
3. Measure the total preload torque. Refer to See: Specifications/Mechanical Specifications/Front
Final Drive M205/Inspection And Adjustment.
NOTE: Record the total preload torque measurement.
4. Remove the drive pinion lock nut using Tool.
Tool number : KV38108300 (J-44195)
5. Put matching marks on the companion flange and drive pinion using paint.
CAUTION: Use paint to make the matching marks. Do not damage the companion flange or drive
pinion.
6. Remove companion flange using suitable tool. 7. Place a small hole in the front oil seal case
using suitable tool.
8. Remove the front oil seal using Tool as shown.
Specifications
Fuel Pressure: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Fuel Pressure
Page 1535
CAUTION: Do not drop or shock spark plug.
Page 3229
Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation Component Description
METER SYSTEM
A/T OIL TEMPERATURE GAUGE : Component Description
Locations
Volt Meter Gauge: Locations
METER SYSTEM
VOLTAGE GAUGE : Component Parts Location
Page 1592
Heater Control Valve: Description and Operation Manual A/C (Type 2)
WATER VALVE CIRCUIT
Description
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Water Valve
The water valve (1) cuts the flow of engine coolant to the heater core to allow for maximum cooling
during A/C operation. It is controlled by the front air control.
Page 5132
Remote Control Module: Locations Hands-Free Phone System
Page 647
Oxygen Sensor: Specifications Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Heater
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Heated Oxygen sensor 2 Heater
Capacity Specifications
Fluid - Differential: Capacity Specifications
Differential Fluid Capacity
Front 4WD Only ...................................................................................................................................
..................................................... 1.6L (3-3/8 US,pt)
Rear .....................................................................................................................................................
.................................................... 2.01L (4-1/4 US,pt)
Boot Bands
Axle Shaft Assembly: Specifications Boot Bands
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Boot Bands
Page 5519
9. Reinstall both rail stops.
^ Use a 13/32" (10 mm) wrench.
10. Make sure the organizer is in the "deployed" position and the lids are snapped closed.
11. Slide the organizer all the way forward until it stops against the front of the bed.
12. Turn all of the hand knobs until each slider is tight.
Locations
Specifications
Idle Speed: Specifications
Idle Speed
Page 3253
13. Connect revolution sensor connector. 14. Securely fasten revolution sensor harness with
terminal clip.
15. Install oil pan to transmission case. Refer to See: Fluid Pan/Service and Repair. 16. Pull up A/T
assembly harness connector.
CAUTION: Do not damage connector.
17. Install snap ring to A/T assembly harness connector.
18. Connect A/T assembly harness connector. 19. Connect the negative battery terminal. 20. Refill
the A/T with fluid and check the fluid level and for fluid leakage. Refer to See: Fluid - A/T/Service
and Repair/Checking A/T Fluid.
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2
Removal 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal. 2. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket. Refer to
See: Fluid Pan/Service and Repair.
Page 4739
adapter.
Tool number : KV99233130 (J-29884)
CAUTION: To prevent deformation of the pulley groove, the puller claws should be hooked under
the pulley groove and not into the pulley groove.
6. Remove the magnet coil harness clip using a screwdriver, remove the three magnet coil fixing
screws and remove the magnet coil.
INSPECTION
Clutch Disc If the contact surface shows signs of damage due to excessive heat, replace clutch
disc and pulley.
Pulley Check the appearance of the pulley assembly. If contact surface of pulley shows signs of
excessive grooving, replace clutch disc and pulley. The contact surfaces of the pulley assembly
should be cleaned with a suitable solvent before reinstallation.
Coil Check magnet coil for loose connections or any cracked insulation.
INSTALLATION 1. Install the magnet coil.
Page 2454
11. Enter the VIN into C-III two times (see Figure 7).
^ Touch the C-III screen in the "VIN box" before typing.
^ Make sure to use all CAPITAL LETTERS.
^ Use the VIN from the vehicle you are working on.
12. Select Start
13. Turn the ignition OFF, and wait 10 seconds.
14. After waiting 10 seconds, turn the ignition ON.
Page 5656
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the Fuel Pump Assembly from the vehicle.
^ Refer to section FL in the applicable Service Manual for removal information.
^ Make sure to follow all Service Manual warnings and cautions.
Page 5516
Disclaimer
Service Procedure
1. Make sure the collapsible storage organizer is in the "deployed" position and the lids are
snapped closed.
Deployed Position: Side supports and floor are snapped in place.
2. Position the organizer at the rear of the bed next to the tailgate.
^ If needed, loosen the knobs and slide the assembly rearward.
NOTE:
When sliding the organizer, apply light force to the center, or evenly to both sides.
CAUTION:
The organizer should only be moved in the bed of the truck when it is in the deployed position with
the lids snapped closed.
3. Lower the tailgate and remove both rail stops.
^ Use a 13/32" (10 mm) wrench.
Page 1453
EM-5
Page 2231
i. Once the entire VIN is entered (a second time), select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See
Figure 16.
j. Select [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen to complete the VIN registration process. See
Figure 17.
k. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Specifications
Power Steering Fluid: Specifications
Power Steering Fluid Type
Recommended fluid is Genuine Nissan PSF or equivalent.
A/T Shift Lock System
Page 2150
^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed.
^ C-III Security Card is installed.
^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still
cable-connected to the vehicle.
1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect
the VI to the vehicle.
CAUTION
2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer.
CAUTION
3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery:
For Conventional Vehicles
^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate.
NOTE:
The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended.
CAUTION
For Hybrid Vehicles
^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station.
^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery.
Page 390
Control Unit: Service and Repair
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 2. Remove jack and tools. 3.
Remove upper bracket of center seat belt retractor and belt assembly. Refer to See: Restraint
Systems/Seat Belt Systems/Seat Belt/Service and
Repair/Rear Seat Belt.
4. Remove the necessary push pins and reposition rear panel out of the way. Refer to See: Body
and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim
Panel/Service and Repair.
5. Reposition the carpet to access differential lock control unit to disconnect connector. 6. Remove
the two nuts and remove differential lock control unit.
INSTALLATION Note the following, and installation is in the reverse order of removal. When installing differential lock control unit, tighten nuts to the specified torque.
Differential lock control unit nuts : 5.1 N.m (0.52 kg-m, 45 in-lb)
ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information
Traction Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information
Classification: BR10-011
Reference: NTB10-145
Date: December 15, 2010
ABS / VDC CAN DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION
APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2005-2011 Nissan vehicles with ABS and/or VDC
SERVICE INFORMATION
When diagnosing a vehicle with an ABS or VDC / SLIP warning light on with DTCs stored in the
ABS / VDC actuator control unit, perform DTC diagnosis first.
^ Do not replace the ABS / VDC actuator control unit without being supported by the DTC
diagnosis.
^ Do not erase DTCs before performing DTC diagnosis.
^ Always fully diagnose before performing any repairs.
When DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) is the only DTC stored in the ABS / VDC actuator
control unit, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART below. This will assist in proper diagnosis results and
repairs in addition to using diagnostic information in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM).
^ If DTC U1000 is found stored in other systems, refer to NIB10-066 and the applicable ESM.
^ If other DTCs are found stored in ABS / VDC along with U1000, follow the diagnosis steps for
those DTCs in the applicable ESM.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for
repairs performed.
Page 2911
Spark Plug: Application and ID
Spark Plug
Page 3848
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER
With ABLS/VDC/TCS
DISASSEMBLY
CAUTION: Master cylinder assembly cannot be disassembled.
- Do not drop parts. If a part is dropped, do not use it.
1. Pull the reservoir tank off the master cylinder assembly. 2. Remove the grommets from master
cylinder assembly and discard the grommets.
CAUTION: Discard the grommets, do not reuse. 3. Remove the fluid level sensor from the reservoir
tank. 4. Remove the front and rear pressure sensors and discard.
CAUTION: Discard the front and rear pressure sensors, do not reuse.
ASSEMBLY
CAUTION: Never use mineral oil such as kerosene, gasoline during the cleaning and assembly process.
- Do not drop parts. If a part is dropped, do not use it.
1. Apply brake fluid or rubber grease to the new grommets, then insert the new grommets into the
master cylinder assembly.
CAUTION:
Page 4214
Consult-III Checking System
Standardized Relay
STANDARDIZED RELAY
Description
NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided
into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays.
Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption
Recovery
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Programming
Interruption Recovery
Classification: EC10-015
Reference: NTB10-078
Date: June 21, 2010
REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE
SERVICE INFORMATION
A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption
Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin.
While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop
(become interrupted) before it is 100% complete.
One of two messages may appear:
^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe.
^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0".
In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if
the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped.
NOTE:
ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III.
The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service
Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later.
IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING
^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery.
^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads.
^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable.
^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter.
Antitheft System - NATS Security VBC Logic
Body Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Antitheft System - NATS Security VBC Logic
Classification: EL10-028
Reference: NTB10-106
Date: September 10, 2010
NATS SECURITY - VBC LOGIC
APPLIED VEHICLE: 2009 - 2011 All Nissan with NATS / Immobilizer System
SERVICE INFORMATION
All model year 2009 - 2011 Nissan vehicles equipped with NATS/Immobilizer system have the new
VBC (Validate Before Crank) starter relay logic.
VBC (Validate Before Crank) Logic:
^ The BCM will make sure that a valid (registered) key is being used before engaging the starter
relay. If the key is not authenticated the starter will not
operate.
^ If the engine cranks, the issue is not related to NATS. Do not replace NATS components (BCM,
I-Key, FOB Reader or RF Receiver). Refer to ASIST
for further diagnostic information as needed.
Page 1910
Knock Sensor: Locations
Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1421 Stored
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1421
Stored
Classification: EC09-014B
Reference: NTB09-048B
Date: April 21, 2011
2007-2009 TITAN AND ARMADA; MIL "ON" WITH DTC P1421 STORED
This bulletin has been amended. APPLIED VEHICLES, APPLIED VINS, and Table A and B have
been revised. Please discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007-2009 Titan (A60) 2007-2009 Armada (TA60)
APPLIED VINS and DATES: 2007-2008 Titan and Armada: All
2009 Titan: Vehicles built before 1N6AA0(***)9N312517 // April 7, 2009
2009 Armada: Vehicles built before 5N1AA08(**)9N614339 // April 7, 2009
IF YOU CONFIRM:
An Applied Vehicle has the MIL "ON" and DTC P1421 (Cold Start Control) stored in the ECM.
ACTION:
Confirm this bulletin applies.
Page 2799
3. Install the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit as follows (see Figure 5):
CAUTION:
Do not bend the float arm when handling the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit / Fuel Pump Assembly.
a. Slide the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit into the attachment slots until the two Locking Tabs snap
in place.
^ Confirm the Locking Tabs are snapped in place by trying to move the Sender Unit up and down
(it should not move).
b. Insert the Fuel Temperature Sensor into the Plastic Retaining Clip.
^ Make sure the "circular flange" of the Sensor is positioned between the Clip and the Rib.
c. Insert the two Fuel Temperature Sensor Wires into the Securing Tab.
d. Connect the White Wire Connector into the top of the Fuel Pump (see Figure 6).
e. Pull and push all connectors to make sure they are fully locked in place.
Page 5573
Page 2323
How To Use CAN Communication Signal Chart
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
How to Use CAN Communication Signal Chart
The CAN communication signal chart lists the signals needed for trouble diagnosis. It is useful for
detecting the root cause by finding a signal related to the symptom, and by checking transmission
and reception unit.
Data Sheet
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
Data Sheet
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS COPY SHEET
NOTE: CAN diagnostic support monitor of the display control unit is indicated on the vehicle
display. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional
Page 4233
Power Distribution Module: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures
Diagnosis Description
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R)
Diagnosis Description
AUTO ACTIVE TEST
Description In auto active test mode, the IPDM E/R sends a drive signal to the following systems to
check their operation. Oil pressure low/coolant pressure high warning indicator
- Oil pressure gauge
- Rear window defogger
- Front wipers
- Tail, license and parking lamps
- Front fog lamps
- Headlamps (Hi, Lo)
- A/C compressor (magnetic clutch)
- Cooling fan
Operation Procedure 1. Close the hood and front door RH, and lift the wiper arms from the
windshield (to prevent windshield damage due to wiper operation).
NOTE: When auto active test is performed with hood opened, sprinkle water on windshield before
hand. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON and, within 20 seconds, press the
front door switch LH 10 times. Then turn the ignition switch OFF. 4. Turn the ignition switch ON
within 10 seconds. After that the horn sounds once and the auto active test starts. 5. After a series
of the following operations is repeated 3 times, auto active test is completed.
NOTE: When auto active test mode has to be cancelled halfway through test, turn ignition switch
OFF.
CAUTION: If auto active test mode cannot be actuated, check door switch system. Refer to See: Body and
Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/Door Switch/King Cab/Diagnosis Procedure See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power
Locks/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Door Switch/King
Cab/Component Function Check See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Door Switch/King Cab/Diagnosis Procedure,
"KING CAB
See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/Door Switch/Crew Cab/Diagnosis Procedure (Crew Cab). Do not start the engine.
Inspection in Auto Active Test Mode When auto active test mode is actuated, the following 6 steps
are repeated 3 times.
Page 6005
Should a customer note water in a lamp assembly, please use the above flow chart to determine if
the condition is normal or requires lamp replacement.
Page 5992
Should a customer note water in a lamp assembly, please use the above flow chart to determine if
the condition is normal or requires lamp replacement.
Lighting - Xenon Headlamp Service Info.
Headlamp Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Xenon Headlamp Service Info.
Classification: EL10-021A
Reference: NTB10-061A
Date: June 29, 2010
XENON HEAD LAMP SERVICE
This bulletin has been amended. The Parts Information has been updated. Please discard previous
versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Nissan with xenon headlamps
IF YOU CONFIRM
A xenon headlamp is not functioning because of an issue inside the headlamp assembly (an
internal issue),
ACTION
Refer to the appropriate Service Manual, follow the diagnostic and repair information for xenon
headlamps.
NOTE: ^ In most cases, replacement of a bulb or HID control unit will solve the incident.
^ Do not replace the entire xenon headlamp assembly when a bulb or HID control unit is available
to solve the incident, if one should occur.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
^ Reference the current Nissan Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for the
repair performed.
^ For HID control unit replacement, use Operation Code RJ36AA.
PARTS INFORMATION
Locations
Speedometer Module: Locations
METER SYSTEM
SPEEDOMETER : Component Parts Location
Page 450
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair VDC/TCS/ABS
Wheel Sensors
WHEEL SENSORS
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel sensor bolt. When removing the front wheel sensor, first remove the disc rotor to gain access to the front wheel
sensor bolt. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake
Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Front.
2. Pull out the sensor, being careful to turn it as little as possible.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth.
- Do not pull on the sensor harness.
3. Disconnect wheel sensor harness electrical connector, then remove harness from attaching
points.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Inspect wheel sensor O-ring, replace sensor assembly if damaged.
- Clean wheel sensor hole and mounting surface with brake cleaner and a lint-free shop rag. Be
careful that dirt and debris do not enter the axle.
- Apply a coat of suitable grease to the wheel sensor O-ring and mounting hole.
Sensor Rotor
SENSOR ROTOR
Removal and Installation
FRONT WHEEL SENSOR ROTOR
Removal and Installation The front wheel sensor rotor is built into the front wheel hub and bearing
assembly and is not removable. If damaged, replace the front wheel hub and bearing assembly.
Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Wheel Hub/Service and Repair.
REAR WHEEL SENSOR ROTOR
Page 5055
Integrated Homelink Transmitter - Part 2
Page 2700
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair
ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM
Removal and Installation
ADJUSTABLE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY Adjustable Accelerator Pedal
CAUTION: Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal adjusting mechanism.
- Before removal and installation, the accelerator and brake pedals must be in the front most
position.
This is to align the base position of the accelerator and brake pedals. Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly.
- Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket.
- Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling.
- Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water.
Removal 1. Move the accelerator and brake pedals to the frontmost position. 2. Turn the ignition
switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal. 3. Disconnect the adjustable brake pedal
cable from the adjustable brake pedal. Unlock, then pull the adjustable brake pedal cable to disconnect it from the adjustable brake pedal.
Page 2330
Diagnosis Sheet (CAN Type 7)
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
Diagnosis Sheet (CAN Type 7)
Page 4183
Page 105
Power Distribution Module: Locations Relay Control System
RELAY CONTROL SYSTEM
Component Parts Location
Page 3234
7. Insert the tip of an air gun into the end of the cooler outlet hose. 8. Wrap a shop rag around the
tip of the air gun and the cooler outlet hose. 9. Blow compressed air regulated to 5 - 9 kg/cm2 (70 -
130 psi) through the cooler outlet hose for 10 seconds to force out any remaining fluid.
10. Repeat steps 5 through 9 three additional times. 11. Position an oil pan under the banjo bolts
that connect the fluid cooler tubes to the A/T. 12. Remove the banjo bolts. 13. Flush each steel line
from the cooler side back toward the A/T by spraying Transmission Cooler Cleaner in a continuous
stream for 5 seconds. 14. Blow compressed air regulated to 5 - 9 kg/cm2 (70 - 130 psi) through
each steel line from the cooler side back toward the A/T for 10 seconds to
force out any remaining fluid.
15. Ensure all debris is removed from the steel cooler lines. 16. Ensure all debris is removed from
the banjo bolts and fittings. 17. Perform A/T fluid cooler diagnosis.
A/T FLUID COOLER DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE
NOTE: Insufficient cleaning of the cooler inlet hose exterior may lead to inaccurate debris
identification. 1. Position a drain pan under the A/T inlet and outlet fluid cooler tube to cooler hose
connection. 2. Clean the exterior and tip of the cooler inlet hose. 3. Put a different color matching
mark on each cooler tube to cooler hose connection to aid in assembly.
CAUTION: Use paint to make the matching mark. Do not damage the tubes or hose.
4. Disconnect the fluid cooler inlet and outlet rubber hoses from the steel cooler tubes.
NOTE: Replace the cooler hoses if rubber material from the hose remains on the tube fitting.
5. Insert the extension adapter hose of a can of Transmission Cooler Cleaner (Nissan P/N
999MP-AM006) into the cooler outlet hose.
Page 2090
Page 5372
CAUTION: -
Wrap the tip of flat-bladed screwdriver with a cloth when removing metal clips from finishers.
Removal 1. Remove rear seats. Refer to See: Seats/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Rear Seat/Removal and Installation. 2. Remove rear kicking plates. 3. Remove seat
belt anchor bolts. Refer to See: Restraint Systems/Seat Belt Systems/Child Restraint/Child Seat
Tether Attachment/Service and
Repair/LATCH (Lower Anchors And Tether For Children) System.
4. Remove seatback latch strikers. Refer to See: Seats/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Rear Seat/Removal and Installation.
Page 3919
REAR WHEEL SENSOR ROTOR
Removal Remove the rear axle shaft assembly. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive
Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and Repair/Rear Axle Shaft.
NOTE: It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle shaft assembly to replace the rear wheel
sensor rotor.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the old rear wheel sensor rotor.
- Do not reuse the rear axle oil seal. The rear axle oil seal must be replaced every time the rear
axle shaft assembly is removed from the rear axle shaft housing.
Page 3039
CAUTION
2. When you get to the ECM Reprogramming screen shown in Figure 1, confirm this bulletin
applies as follows:
A. On your C-III screen, look at the Part Number column (see Figure 1 example):
^ If this column is blank (no part number listed), this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to
ASIST for further diagnostic information.
^ If a Part Number is listed, write it on the Repair Order.
Page 2129
Attachment General Procedure
Page 838
2. Position vehicle on the front turn plates as follows:
^ Stop vehicle just behind the turn plates.
^ Center the turn plates to the tires.
^ Move the vehicle onto the turn plates by turning/pushing the rear wheel.
DO NOT push/pull on the vehicle body.
Page 112
MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. -
The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Abbreviation List
ABBREVIATIONS
Abbreviation List
The following ABBREVIATIONS are used:
Page 2588
Page 314
i. Once the entire VIN is entered (a second time), select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See
Figure 16.
j. Select [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen to complete the VIN registration process. See
Figure 17.
k. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information
Wheels: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information
Classification: WT11-003
Reference: NTB11-029
Date: March 21, 2011
TIRE MOUNTING INFORMATION
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan
SERVICE INFORMATION
^ When mounting tires to wheels, it is important that the tire bead is seated correctly.
^ A tire bead that is not seated correctly may cause a vehicle vibration.
^ High performance tires and tires with shorter sidewalls (low aspect tires) may require more care
to make sure the tire bead is seated correctly.
^ Follow the Tire Mounting Tips in this bulletin.
Tire Mounting Tips:
NOTE:
These tips are not intended to be a complete instruction for mounting tires to wheels. Make sure to
read and follow the instruction for your specific tire service equipment
1. Clean the tire bead with an approved rubber cleaning fluid.
^ Rubber cleaning fluid is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process.
2. Clean the wheel (flange and bead seat area) see Figure 2 Make sure to clean off all rust and
corrosion.
Page 1985
4. Install Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 and Fuel Pressure Gauge (from kit J-44321) as shown
in figure. Do not distort or bend fuel rail tube when installing fuel pressure gauge adapter.
- When reconnecting fuel hose, check the original fuel hose for damage and abnormality.
5. Turn ignition switch ON (reactivate fuel pump), and check for fuel leakage. 6. Start engine and
check for fuel leakage. 7. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge. During fuel pressure check, check for fuel leakage from fuel connection every 3 minutes.
At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2, 51 psi)
8. If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step. 9. Check the following. Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging
- Fuel filter for clogging
- Fuel pump
- Fuel pressure regulator for clogging
If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator. If NG, repair or replace.
10. Before disconnecting Fuel Pressure Gauge and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6, release fuel
pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE
RELEASE".
Page 5031
DVD Player: Description and Operation Premium With Navigation
System Diagram
DVD PLAYER
System Diagram
System Description
DVD PLAYER
System Description
The DVD entertainment system consists of the following components Audio unit
- DVD player
- Video monitor
- AV switch
- Steering wheel audio control switches
- Rear audio remote control unit
- Audio amp.
- Front tweeters
- Front door speakers
- Center speaker
- Rear door tweeters (crew cab)
- Rear door speakers
- Subwoofer
When the DVD entertainment system is on, video signals are sent from the DVD player to the video
monitor. Audio signals are sent to the Audio unit. Audio signals can be directed through the
wireless infrared headphones or through the audio amp. to the vehicle speakers. Refer to complete
DVD entertainment system operating instructions.
Component Description
DVD PLAYER
Component Description
Page 2063
Body Control Module: Service and Repair
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
Removal and Installation
BCM
Removal
NOTE: If possible, before removing BCM, retrieve current BCM configuration to use for reference
when configuring brand-new BCM after installation. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Body Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Configuration/Special Repair
Requirement. 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the lower knee protector.
Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Panel Assembly/Removal And Installation.
3. Remove the screw and release the BCM. 4. Disconnect the connectors and then remove the
BCM.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE: When replacing BCM, it must be configured. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Body Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Configuration/Special Repair
Requirement.
- When replacing BCM, perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition
key IDs. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing
and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing Control Unit See:
Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/ECM Re-Communicating Function See: Accessories and
Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/ECM Re-Communicating Function.
- When replacing BCM, perform ID registration procedure of low tire pressure warning system.
Refer to See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Tire Monitoring System/Testing
and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/ID Registration Procedure.
Page 5112
CENTER SPEAKER
Removal and Installation
CENTER SPEAKER
Removal 1. Remove the center console. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Center Console.
2. Remove the cluster lid D. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard /
Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Cluster LID C/Removal And Installation.
3. Remove the center speaker screws and remove the center speaker.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Front Door Speaker
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
Removal and Installation
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
Removal 1. Remove the front door finisher. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and
Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair.
2. Remove the four front door speaker screws. 3. Disconnect the front door speaker connector and
remove the front door speaker.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Rear Door Speaker
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
Removal and Installation
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
Removal
Page 4941
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF SEAT BELT RETRACTOR
CAUTION: Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least 3
minutes.
- For installing/removing seat belt pre-tensioner connector, insert a thin screwdriver wrapped in
tape into the notch, lift the lock and remove the connector.
- Install the connector with the lock raised, and push the lock into the connector.
Page 2915
CAUTION: Do not drop or shock spark plug.
Page 5186
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 805
^ Apply the brakes as shown.
^ Start the engine to allow brake boost.
^ Turn the engine OFF,
^ Remove all lock pins-front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates".
^ Make sure the bridge plate will not interfere with movement of the turn plate.
Put the bridge plate in the down position.
^ Perform caster sweep by turning the steering wheel from outside the vehicle.
Page 4057
CONSULT-III Checking System
CONSULT-III CHECKING SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram
Capacity Specifications
Fluid - Differential: Capacity Specifications
Differential Fluid Capacity
Front 4WD Only ...................................................................................................................................
..................................................... 1.6L (3-3/8 US,pt)
Rear .....................................................................................................................................................
.................................................... 2.01L (4-1/4 US,pt)
Page 2289
Trouble Diagnosis
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor
Use "CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR" for detecting the root cause.
MONITOR ITEM LIST (CONSULT-III)
ECM
Page 5160
Page 1202
Arrow indicates Front
- Install No. 1 camshaft bracket using the following procedure:
- C:11 mm (0.43 in)
- D: 2.0 - 3.0 mm (0.079 - 0.118 in) dia.
- Apply liquid gasket to No. 1 camshaft bracket (A) and (B) as shown.
Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type
Specifications.
CAUTION: After installation, be sure to wipe off any excessive liquid gasket outside of application (C) and (D)
both on RH and LH sides.
- Remove completely any excess of liquid gasket inside bracket.
- Apply liquid gasket (C) to the back side of the LH (A) bank front cover and RH (B) bank front
cover as shown.
Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type
Specifications. C:2.6 - 3.6 mm (0.102 - 0.142 in) dia.
Specifications
Timing Chain Tensioner: Specifications
Timing Chain Tensioner
Page 51
Page 922
DRIVE BELT / PULLEY NOISE DIAGNOSIS FLOW CHART
Page 4348
CLAIMS INFORMATION
NOTE:
This repair can only be used in conjunction with a claim for Front Wheel Alignment (Op-Code
WD44AA) and must be submitted on a separate work order line.
Page 2534
31. Select Diagnosis
32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%.
When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of
the screen will light (become enabled).
33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon.
Page 5912
1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Insert a suitable tool between door finisher and step
lamp lens/socket to release the pawls.
CAUTION: Wrap a cloth around the suitable tool to protect door finisher and lens. 3. Disconnect the
step lamp connector, then remove step lamp.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Bulb Replacement 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Remove the step lamp
lens/socket. 3. Pull the bulb straight out to remove.
Step lamp bulb : 12V - 3.8W
PERSONAL LAMP - TYPE A (if equipped)
Removal 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Remove overhead console. Refer to See:
Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair. 3. Remove personal lamp
screws (3). 4. Disconnect personal lamp electrical connectors (1), then remove personal lamp (2)
from overhead console.
Page 3104
Attachment General Procedure
Page 269
Page 2507
Exploded View
Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair Exploded View
AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT
Exploded View
Locations
Page 4220
IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) - Part 4
Description and Operation
Cabin Air Filter: Description and Operation
IN-CABIN MICROFILTER
Description
FUNCTION The air inside the passenger compartment is filtered by the in-cabin micro-filters when
the heater or A/C controls are set on either the recirculation or fresh mode. The two in-cabin
microfilters are located in the heater and cooling unit assembly.
REPLACEMENT TIMING Replacement of the two in-cabin microfilters is recommended on a
regular interval depending on the driving conditions. Refer to See: . It may also be necessary to
replace the two in-cabin microfilters as part of a component replacement if the in-cabin microfilters
are damaged.
Page 5373
5. Remove rear lower finishers LH/RH. 6. Remove rear upper finishers LH/RH. 7. Remove center
anchor bracket cover, if equipped. 8. Remove rear panel upper finisher and rear panel. 9. Remover
drafter duct cover and drafter duct.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Removal and Replacement
Console: Removal and Replacement
A/T Finisher
A/T FINISHER
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the shift knob (1).
2. Remove the storage compartment mask (3) and console upper finisher (4). 3. Pull up on A/T
finisher (2) to release clips, then tilt aside. 4. Disconnect A/T finisher electrical connectors and
remove from front center console assembly.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Center Console
CENTER CONSOLE
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal.
Page 1804
15. Select OK
VIN registration is complete
Page 6012
Should a customer note water in a lamp assembly, please use the above flow chart to determine if
the condition is normal or requires lamp replacement.
Page 3119
31. Select Diagnosis
32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%.
When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of
the screen will light (become enabled).
33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon.
Page 1788
Page 3095
Locations
Page 3953
Battery: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Battery
Page 142
Page 4901
- With the steering linkage disconnected, the cable may snap by turning the steering wheel beyond
the limited number of turns. The spiral cable can be turned counterclockwise about 2.5 turns from
the neutral position.
Page 2428
^ If this column is blank (no part number listed), this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to
ASIST for further diagnostic information.
^ If a Part Number is listed, write it on the Repair Order.
B. Compare the Part Number you wrote down to the numbers in the Current ECM P/N column in
Table A or B (as it applies) shown at the beginning of this bulletin.
^ If there is a match, this bulletin applies. Continue with the reprogramming procedure.
^ If there is not a match, this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to ASIST for further
diagnostic information.
3. If this bulletin applies and you have performed ECM reprogramming, the screen in Figure 2
appears when reprogramming is complete.
NOTE:
If the screen in Figure 2 does not display (reprogramming does not complete).
4. Make sure to erase DTCs from all Systems.
NOTE:
During the reprogramming, DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all
systems.
5. Test drive the vehicle and make sure it operates correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF.
^ If the Check Engine light comes ON, go back to ASIST for further diagnostic information. Refer to
the applicable Electronic Service Manual as
needed.
^ Diagnosis and repairs beyond the ECM reprogramming are not covered by this bulletin.
Warning Chime System
Audible Warning Device: Description and Operation Warning Chime System
System Diagram
WARNING CHIME SYSTEM
WARNING CHIME SYSTEM : System Diagram
System Description
WARNING CHIME SYSTEM
WARNING CHIME SYSTEM : System Description
COMBINATION METER The buzzer for warning chime system is installed in the combination meter.
- The buzzer sounds when the combination meter receives a buzzer output signal from each unit.
BCM BCM receives signals from various units and transmits a buzzer output signal to the
combination meter with CAN communication line if it judges that the warning buzzer should be
activated.
Component Description
WARNING CHIME SYSTEM
WARNING CHIME SYSTEM : Component Description
Page 536
Page 1028
Fluid - Transfer Case: Fluid Type Specifications
Transfer Fluid Type
Genuine NISSAN Matic D ATF (Continental US and Alaska) or Canada NISSAN Automatic
Transmission Fluid Dexron III, Mercon or equivalent
Page 3503
Control Module: Locations Electrical Units Location
Page 5671
3. Install the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit as follows (see Figure 5):
CAUTION:
Do not bend the float arm when handling the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit / Fuel Pump Assembly.
a. Slide the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit into the attachment slots until the two Locking Tabs snap
in place.
^ Confirm the Locking Tabs are snapped in place by trying to move the Sender Unit up and down
(it should not move).
b. Insert the Fuel Temperature Sensor into the Plastic Retaining Clip.
^ Make sure the "circular flange" of the Sensor is positioned between the Clip and the Rib.
c. Insert the two Fuel Temperature Sensor Wires into the Securing Tab.
d. Connect the White Wire Connector into the top of the Fuel Pump (see Figure 6).
e. Pull and push all connectors to make sure they are fully locked in place.
Page 5037
Page 4505
Page 2247
Page 3397
Propeller Shaft 2S1410
PROPELLER SHAFT
Disassembly and Assembly
DISASSEMBLY
Journal 1. Put matching marks on the rear propeller shaft and flange yoke as shown.
CAUTION: For matching marks use paint. Never damage the rear propeller shaft or flange yoke. 2.
Remove the snap rings.
3. Push out and remove the journal bearings by lightly tapping the flange yoke with a hammer,
taking care not to damage the journal or flange yoke
hole.
NOTE: Put marks on the disassembled parts so that they can be reinstalled in their original
positions from which they were removed.
Procedures
Drive/Propeller Shaft: Procedures
Propeller Shaft 2F1310
PROPELLER SHAFT
On-Vehicle Service
APPEARANCE AND NOISE INSPECTION Check the propeller shaft tube surface for dents or cracks. If damaged, replace the propeller shaft
assembly.
- Check the bearings for noise and damage. Repair or replace the bearings as necessary.
PROPELLER SHAFT VIBRATION If a vibration is present at high speed, inspect the propeller shaft
runout first.
1. Measure the runout of the propeller shaft tube at several points by rotating the final drive
companion flange with your hands. Refer to See:
Specifications/Propeller Shaft 2F1310/General Specification.
2. If the runout exceeds specifications, disconnect the propeller shaft at the final drive companion
flange; then rotate the companion flange 90°, 180°
and 270° and reconnect the propeller shaft.
3. Check the runout again. If the runout still exceeds specifications, replace the propeller shaft
assembly. Refer to See: Specifications/Propeller Shaft
2F1310/General Specification.
4. After installation, check for vibration by driving the vehicle.
Propeller Shaft 2S1410
PROPELLER SHAFT
On-Vehicle Service
APPEARANCE AND NOISE INSPECTION Check the propeller shaft tube surface for dents or cracks. If damaged, replace the propeller shaft
assembly.
- Check the bearings for noise and damage. Repair or replace the bearings as necessary.
PROPELLER SHAFT VIBRATION If a vibration is present at high speed, inspect the propeller shaft
runout first.
Page 5796
f. Use the new tie-wrap to secure all the wires to the black corrugated tubing (see Figure 6).
^ New tie-wrap is included with the new sender unit.
^ Make sure all wires are tied together (3 fuel level sending unit wires and 2 fuel pump wires).
^ Place the Tie-Wrap 90 mm (about 3.5 inches) from the top of the tubing.
^ Make sure the wires do not interfere with the movement of the float arm.
4. Carefully reinstall the Fuel Pump Assembly back into the vehicle in reverse of removal.
^ IMPORTANT: Use a new seal (O-Ring) when reinstalling the Fuel Pump Assembly.
^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed.
CAUTION:
DO NOT bend the Float Arm when reinstalling the Fuel Pump.
5. Confirm the Fuel Gauge operates properly.
Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics
Alignment: Customer Interest Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics
Classification: ST08-001D
Reference: NTB08-097D
Date: April 26, 2011
DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER
This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The
off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this
bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R
SERVICE INFORMATION
If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic
Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue.
Diagnostic Flow Chart
Road Test
Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair.
IMPORTANT:
^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as:
> Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory)
> Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires
> Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire
Locations
Page 760
2. Install differential lock position switch on gear carrier and tighten differential lock position switch
bolts with the specified torque. Refer to See:
Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential Assembly/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive
M226 (ELD).
3. Install side bearing adjusters into gear carrier.
4. Apply gear oil to side bearings. Install differential case assembly with side bearing outer races
into gear carrier. 5. Apply multi-purpose grease to differential lock position connector.
CAUTION: Do not reuse sensor connector. 6. Connect differential lock solenoid harness (B) and
differential lock position switch connector (A). Then install it to gear carrier, tighten to the
specified torque. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential Assembly/Service and
Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD).
Arrow Indicate Front 7. Align paint matching mark on side bearing caps with that on gear carrier
and install side bearing caps on gear carrier without tightening to
specification.
Page 1082
Fuse Block: Diagrams Fuse, Fusible Link And Relay Box
FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX
Terminal Arrangement
FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK BOX
FUSE AND RELAY BOX
Locations
Page 1828
d. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds, then
e. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" again for 10 seconds (see Figure 2).
f. Proceed with step 6.
Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL)
NOTE:
Make sure all electrical loads are turned OFF, including A/C, defroster, radio, lights, etc. while
performing the following procedures. Also, make sure the engine cooling fans are NOT operating
during the following procedures.
6. Perform the Idle Air Volume Learning procedure as follows:
a. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle.
b. Warm up engine and transmission to operating temperature.
c. In the [CONSULT WORK SUPPORT] mode, select [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. See Figure 3.
NOTE:
^ If IDLE AIR VOL LEARN is not shown as a SELECT WORK ITEM on CONSULT, the vehicle
does not need the procedure.
^ In this case only, this bulletin is complete, no further action is needed.
Page 2479
40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19.
NOTE:
For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF.
^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data.
41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42.
41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed.
^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service
Manual (ESM) for this procedure.
NOTE:
If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle.
IAVL can now be performed.
42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF.
^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs.
Page 3786
Brake Rotor/Disc: Service and Repair Rear
REAR DISC BRAKE
Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor
WARNING: Clean dust on caliper and brake pad with a vacuum dust collector to minimize the
hazard of air borne particles or other materials.
CAUTION: While removing cylinder body, do not depress brake pedal because piston will pop out.
- It is not necessary to remove bolts on torque member and brake hose except for disassembly or
replacement of caliper assembly. In this case, hang cylinder body with a wire so as not to stretch
brake hose.
- Do not damage piston boot.
- If any shim is subject to serious corrosion, replace it with a new one.
Always replace shim and shim cover as a set when replacing brake pads.
- Keep rotor free from brake fluid.
- Burnish the brake pads and disc rotor mutually contacting surfaces, after refinishing or replacing
rotors, after replacing pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage.
REMOVAL 1. Remove rear wheel and tires using power tool. 2. Fasten disc rotor using wheel nut.
3. Drain brake fluid as necessary. Refer to See: Hydraulic System/Brake Fluid/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement.
4. Disconnect brake hose connection (A) from cylinder body.
NOTE: Discard the copper washer, do not reuse.
5. Remove sliding pin bolts (1) as shown, and remove cylinder body (2). 6. Apply matching marks
to disc rotor and wheel hub assembly if the disc rotor is to be reused, then remove disc rotor.
CAUTION: Put matching marks on wheel hub assembly and disc rotor if the disc rotor is to be
reused.
INSTALLATION 1. If reusing the disc rotor, use the matching marks to align disc rotor on the wheel
hub assembly, then install disc rotor using a wheel nut to hold it in
place.
CAUTION:
Page 2181
Locations
Page 468
Temperature Sensor (Gauge): Description and Operation Component Description
METER SYSTEM
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE : Component Description
Page 1812
13. Select Confirm
14. Select Diagnosis
15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete.
Service and Repair
Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair
KNUCKLE
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel hub and bearing assembly. Refer to See: Wheel Hub/Service and
Repair . Disconnect wheel sensor harness connector. Do not remove wheel sensor from wheel hub and
bearing assembly for this procedure.
2. Remove steering outer socket from steering knuckle using Tool.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage ball joint boot.
- Temporarily tighten nut to prevent damage to threads and to prevent Tool from coming off.
Tool number : HT72520000 (J-25730-A)
3. Remove the coil spring and shock absorber assembly using power tool. Refer to See:
Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Coil Spring And Strut .
4. Support lower link using a suitable jack. 5. Remove cotter pin and nut from upper link ball joint
and discard the cotter pin.
Page 4371
^ Apply the brakes as shown.
^ Start the engine to allow brake boost.
^ Turn the engine OFF,
^ Remove all lock pins-front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates".
^ Make sure the bridge plate will not interfere with movement of the turn plate.
Put the bridge plate in the down position.
^ Perform caster sweep by turning the steering wheel from outside the vehicle.
Transfer Case TX15B
Page 2416
With Intelligent Key System
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations With Intelligent Key System
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Terminal Layout
TERMINAL LAYOUT
Page 3674
ERROR: undefined
OFFENDING COMMAND: f‘~
STACK:
Engine Controls - DTC P0451 Stored In The ECM
PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - DTC
P0451 Stored In The ECM
Classification: EC09-027
Reference: NTB09-121
Date: November 3, 2009
2009 TITAN AND ARMADA; DTC P0451 STORED
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2009 Titan (A60) 2009 Armada (TA60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
DTC P0451 (EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor Performance) is stored,
ACTIONS
1. Confirm this bulletin applies.
a. Check and compare your current ECM Part Number to Table A or B shown in this bulletin.
b. If that part number does not match one in Table A, this bulletin does not apply. Go back to
ASIST for further diagnostic and repair information.
2. If this bulletin applies, reprogram the ECM.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTIONS (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is
essential to successfully completing this repair.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Connect C-III to the vehicle to begin the reprogramming procedure.
Page 218
13. Select Confirm
14. Select Diagnosis
15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete.
Page 5613
Is the inspection result normal? YES - Replace key switch. NO - Repair harness or connector.
FLOOR SHIFT 1.CHECK FUSE Check if the key switch and key lock solenoid 10A fuse [No. 19,
located in the fuse block (J/B)] is blown. Is the fuse blown? YES - Be sure to repair the cause of
malfunction before installing new fuse. NO - GO TO 2 2.CHECK BCM INPUT SIGNAL
Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground.
Is the inspection result normal? YES - Inspection End. NO - GO TO 3 3.CHECK KEY SWITCH
CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect BCM and key switch and key lock solenoid connectors. 2. Check continuity between
BCM harness connector M18 and key switch and key lock solenoid harness connector M27.
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector M18 and ground.
Locations
Cargo Lamp Switch: Locations
Page 2605
Locations
Temperature Sensor (Gauge): Locations
METER SYSTEM
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE : Component Parts Location
Page 3665
- Refill brake system with new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system. Refer to See: Brake
Bleeding/Service and Repair.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Ignition Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
Connector Symbols
HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS
Connector symbols
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the
direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector.
For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements,
"Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals
Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring
diagrams.
Sample/Wiring Diagram -Example-
Garage Jack and Safety Stand
Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair Garage Jack and Safety Stand
LIFTING POINT
Garage Jack and Safety Stand
CAUTION: Place a wooden or rubber block between safety stand and vehicle body when the
supporting body is flat.
Page 2970
Control Module: Locations Electrical Units Location
Page 5107
Removal and Installation
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
Removal 1. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and
Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair Crew Cab or See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door
Panel/Service and Repair - King Cab.
2. Remove the three rear door speaker screws and remove the rear door speaker.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
REAR DOOR TWEETER
Removal 1. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and
Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair Crew Cab.
2. Remove the rear door tweeter screws and remove the rear door tweeter. 3. Disconnect the rear
door tweeter connector.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Locations
Locations
Page 705
Page 4010
TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS
Page 3395
Drive/Propeller Shaft: Overhaul
Propeller Shaft 2F1310
PROPELLER SHAFT
Disassembly and Assembly
DISASSEMBLY
Journal 1. Put matching marks on the front propeller shaft and flange yoke as shown.
CAUTION: For matching marks, use paint. Never damage the front propeller shaft or flange yoke.
2. Remove the snap rings.
3. Push out and remove the journal bearings by lightly tapping the flange yoke with a hammer,
taking care not to damage the journal or flange yoke
hole.
NOTE: Put marks on the disassembled parts so that they can be reinstalled in their original
positions from which they were removed.
4. Push out and remove the remaining journal bearings at the opposite side by lightly tapping the
flange yoke with a hammer, taking care not to
damage the journal or flange yoke hole.
NOTE: Put marks on the disassembled parts so that they can be reinstalled in their original
positions from which they were removed.
Locations
Service and Repair
Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair
REAR DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR
Rear Door Glass Regulator Assembly
REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and
Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair.
2. Operate the power window switch to raise/lower the door window until the glass bolts can be
seen. 3. Remove the inside seal. 4. Remove the glass bolts, raise the glass and hold in place with
suitable tool.
5. Remove the bolts and the regulator and guide channel from the panel. 6. Disconnect the
connector for the regulator assembly.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check the regulator assembly for the following items. If a
malfunction is detected, replace or grease it. Gear wear
- Regulator deformation
- Spring damage
- Grease condition for each sliding part
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 2946
Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation Component Description
METER SYSTEM
A/T OIL TEMPERATURE GAUGE : Component Description
A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics
Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics
Classification: AT09-016A
Reference: NTB10-003A
Date: February 11, 2010
5 SPEED A/T DTC DIAGNOSES FOR P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759,
P1764, P1769, P1774
This bulletin has been amended. Additional DTCs were applied. Discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2003 - 2010 Nissan vehicles with 5-Speed A/T
APPLIED TRANSMISSION: RE5R05A ONLY
SERVICE INFORMATION
If one or more DTCs listed below are found stored in Self Diagnosis, use the REPAIR FLOW
CHART shown below to assist in diagnosis.
^ DTCs: P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
If DTC(s) not listed above is/are found stored in Self Diagnosis, this bulletin does not apply. Refer
to ASIST and the appropriate Service Manual for diagnostic procedure(s) as needed.
Page 2781
2. Remove the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit from the Fuel Pump Assembly as follows:
a. First, press in on the two locking tabs on the sides of the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit
b. Then, pull the unit UP and OUT of the attachment slots
^ For Type A see Figure 1
^ For Type B see Figure 2
Page 4651
Air Duct: Service and Repair
Component
DUCTS AND GRILLES
Component
Ducts - Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
Page 3526
Page 2565
Exploded View
Valve Cover: Service and Repair Exploded View
ROCKER COVER
Exploded View
Service and Repair
Lower Side Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair
SIDE GUARD MOLDING
Removal and Installation
Removal
CAUTION: Never apply tack-paper adhesive remover to body panel surface finished with
lacquer-based paints. Original side guard molding is affixed to the body panel with double-faced adhesive tape.
1. Heat the molding to between 30° and 40°C (86° to 104°F) with a heat gun. 2. Raise the end of
the molding and cut away the tape to remove the molding. Remove all traces of tape.
Installation On the vehicles coated with Hard Clear Coat, use double-faced 3M adhesive tape Product No.
4210 or equivalent, after priming with 3M primer Product No. N200, C-100 or equivalent.
- The repair parts are also affixed with double-faced adhesive tape.
- To re-use existing molding, clean all traces of double sided tape from the molding and apply new
double faced tape to the molding.
1. Clean the panel surface with isopropyl alcohol or equivalent to degrease the surface. 2. Heat the
panel and molding tape surface to 30° to 40°C (86° to 104°F).
Locations
Locations
Page 4287
Power Distribution Module: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures
Diagnosis Description
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R)
Diagnosis Description
AUTO ACTIVE TEST
Description In auto active test mode, the IPDM E/R sends a drive signal to the following systems to
check their operation. Oil pressure low/coolant pressure high warning indicator
- Oil pressure gauge
- Rear window defogger
- Front wipers
- Tail, license and parking lamps
- Front fog lamps
- Headlamps (Hi, Lo)
- A/C compressor (magnetic clutch)
- Cooling fan
Operation Procedure 1. Close the hood and front door RH, and lift the wiper arms from the
windshield (to prevent windshield damage due to wiper operation).
NOTE: When auto active test is performed with hood opened, sprinkle water on windshield before
hand. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON and, within 20 seconds, press the
front door switch LH 10 times. Then turn the ignition switch OFF. 4. Turn the ignition switch ON
within 10 seconds. After that the horn sounds once and the auto active test starts. 5. After a series
of the following operations is repeated 3 times, auto active test is completed.
NOTE: When auto active test mode has to be cancelled halfway through test, turn ignition switch
OFF.
CAUTION: If auto active test mode cannot be actuated, check door switch system. Refer to See: Body and
Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/Door Switch/King Cab/Diagnosis Procedure See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power
Locks/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Door Switch/King
Cab/Component Function Check See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Door Switch/King Cab/Diagnosis Procedure,
"KING CAB
See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/Door Switch/Crew Cab/Diagnosis Procedure (Crew Cab). Do not start the engine.
Inspection in Auto Active Test Mode When auto active test mode is actuated, the following 6 steps
are repeated 3 times.
Page 2797
2. Remove the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit from the Fuel Pump Assembly as follows:
a. First, press in on the two locking tabs on the sides of the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit
b. Then, pull the unit UP and OUT of the attachment slots
^ For Type A see Figure 1
^ For Type B see Figure 2
Water Outlet and Water Piping
Coolant Outlet: Service and Repair Water Outlet and Water Piping
THERMOSTAT AND WATER PIPING
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
Removal of Thermostat 1. Drain engine coolant from the radiator. Refer to See: Coolant/Service
and Repair.
CAUTION: Perform when engine is cold. 2. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. Refer to
See: Engine/Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and
Repair/Removal and Installation.
3. Remove the engine room cover using power tools. 4. Disconnect the water suction hose from
the water inlet. 5. Remove the water inlet and thermostat.
Removal of Thermostat Housing, Water Outlet and Heater Pipe 1. Remove the intake manifold.
Refer to See: Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. 2. Remove the
thermostat housing, water outlet and heater pipe.
Removal of Water Cut Valve 1. Drain the engine coolant from the radiator. Refer to See:
Coolant/Service and Repair.
CAUTION: Perform when the engine is cold. 2. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. Refer
to See: Engine/Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and
Repair/Removal and Installation.
3. Remove the engine room cover using power tool. 4. Disconnect the heater hose (heater core
side). 5. Remove the heater hose bracket. 6. Disconnect the water cut valve connector. 7. Remove
the water cut valve.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Place a thread so that it is caught in the valve of the thermostat.
Immerse fully in a container filled with water. Heat while stirring. The valve opening temperature is the temperature at which the valve opens and falls from the
thread.
- Continue heating. Check the full-open lift amount.
- After checking the full-open lift amount, lower the water temperature and check the valve closing
temperature.
INSTALLATION
Page 1918
9. Use compressed air to remove any metal debris from inside the boss threads.
CAUTION:
DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may
cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders.
10. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it.
11. Spray the boss threads with rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds.
12. Run a thread chaser through the boss to clean the threads.
^ Use Kent Moore part number J-43897-18 or J43897-12.
Page 4225
Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation Signal Buffer System
System Diagram
SIGNAL BUFFER SYSTEM
System Diagram
System Description
SIGNAL BUFFER SYSTEM
System Description
IPDM E/R reads the status of the oil pressure switch and transmits the oil pressure switch signal to
BCM via CAN communication. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Information Bus/Description and Operation/CAN Communication System/System
Description.
Page 2837
4. Disconnect the adjustable pedal electric motor electrical connector. 5. Disconnect the adjustable
pedal electric motor memory electrical connector, if equipped. 6. Disconnect the accelerator
position sensor electrical connector. 7. Remove the two upper and one lower accelerator pedal
nuts. 8. Remove the adjustable accelerator pedal assembly.
CAUTION: Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly.
- Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket.
- Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal adjusting mechanism.
- Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling.
- Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Inspection After Installation Check that the accelerator pedal moves smoothly within the specified ranges.
- Depress and release the accelerator pedal to check that it returns smoothly to the original
released position.
- Perform an electrical inspection of the accelerator pedal position sensor. Refer to See: Computers
and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/VIN Registration See:
Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator
Pedal Released Position Learning See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning See: Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning .
CAUTION: When the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor is disconnected,
perform "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to See: Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released
Position Learning.
NON-ADJUSTABLE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY Non-Adjustable Accelerator Pedal
Page 2048
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations
Page 4609
^ Make sure the tire is evenly positioned on the lower safety humps.
5. WARNING: Do not exceed the tire manufactures recommended bead seating inflation pressure.
Generally this is 40psi.
If the bead does not seat with the appropriate pressure:
a. Break down the tire/rim assembly.
b. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2.
c. Remount the tire.
6. After inflating the tires, inspect the bead area.
^ Make sure bead is seated uniformly (the same) around the entire circumference of the wheel.
NOTE:
Many tires have Aligning Rings that will help confirm the bead is uniformly seated.
If uniform; bead is seated correctly. If not uniform
1. Break down the tire/rim assembly.
2. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2.
3. Remount the tire.
Page 3384
Drive/Propeller Shaft: Testing and Inspection Propeller Shaft 2S1410
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
NVH Troubleshooting Chart
Use the chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace
these parts.
Page 1923
Oxygen Sensor: Locations
Page 2282
Page 823
Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the
crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction.
Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully
counteract the effect of a highly crowned road.
Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that
slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the
left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane.
This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although
the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be.
Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition
The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure
2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road.
Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center
^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less.
^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less.
When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to
counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle
should be driven on a straight flat road.
Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle
pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This
condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side.
Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition
The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road.
Page 924
2. With the engine running at idle and the AC turned ON, observe the pulley axial/lateral (back and
forth) movement (see Example 2):
^ Maximum movement specification is 1 mm.
^ Visual comparison of movement with a known good vehicle is recommended.
Idler Pulley / Manual Tensioner Inspection (if equipped)
No more than 1 mm of pulley rock should be visible.
Alternator One-way Clutch Pulley Inspection
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the rotor.
NOTE:
The following steps can be done while the alternator is installed on the vehicle if the drive belt is
removed and the alternator electrical connectors are disconnected.
1. Secure the rotor using a medium size screwdriver and a rolled shop towel.
2. Turn the pulley clockwise when viewed from the front.
^ Pulley should be locked.
^ If it rotates in both directions, replace the alternator.
3. Turn the pulley counterclockwise when viewed from the front.
Page 1017
Fluid - Differential: Fluid Type Specifications
Differential Fluid Types
Front(4WD) ............................................................................................................... Genuine
NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super GL-5 or API GL-5
Rear .....................................................................................................................................................
............... API GL-5 Synthetic Gear Oil or equivalent
Recommended Viscosity
Front ....................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................... 80W-90
Rear .....................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................... 75W-140
Page 4663
Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Service and Repair
AMBIENT SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the ambient sensor electrical connector.
NOTE: The ambient sensor (1) is located behind the front bumper, in front of the condenser (front
grille removed for clarity). 2. Release the ambient sensor clip and then remove the ambient sensor
(1).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 1354
- B: Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (LH)
5. Install the crankshaft pulley.
- Install the key of the crankshaft.
- Insert the pulley by lightly tapping it.
CAUTION: Do not tap pulley on the side surface where the belt is installed (outer circumference).
6. Tighten the crankshaft pulley bolt.
- Lock the crankshaft using suitable tool then tighten the bolt.
- Perform the following steps for angular tightening:
a. Apply engine oil onto the threaded parts of the bolt and seating area.
b. Select the one most visible notch of the four on the bolt flange. Corresponding to the selected
notch put a alignment mark (such as paint) on the
crankshaft pulley.
Crankshaft pulley bolt torque
Step 1: 93.1 N-m (9.5 kg-m, 69 ft-lb)
Step 2: additional 90° (angle tightening)
7. Rotate the crankshaft pulley in normal direction (clockwise when viewed from engine front) to
check for parts interference.
8. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse of order of removal.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
- Before starting the engine check oil/fluid levels including engine coolant and engine oil. If the
levels are lower than required quantity fill to the specified level.
- Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration.
- Warm up engine thoroughly to make sure there is no leakage of any oils/fluids including engine oil
and engine coolant.
Relay Control System
Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation Relay Control System
System Diagram
RELAY CONTROL SYSTEM
System Diagram
System Description
Component
Parking Brake Control: Service and Repair Component
PARKING BRAKE CONTROL
Component
Page 3196
Shift Interlock Control Module: Locations Electrical Units Location
Page 4753
When A/C switch or DEF switch is pressed, front air control inputs compressor ON signal to BCM.
BCM sends compressor ON signal to ECM and front air control, via CAN communication line. ECM
judges whether compressor can be turned ON, based on each sensor status (refrigerant pressure
sensor signal, throttle angle sensor, etc.). If it judges compressor can be turned ON, it sends
compressor ON signal to IPDM E/R, via CAN communication line. Upon receipt of compressor ON
signal from ECM, IPDM E/R turns air conditioner relay ON to operate compressor.
Discharge Air Flow
MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
Discharge Air Flow
Switches And Their Control Function
MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
Switches And Their Control Function
Page 4907
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Air Bag (Satellite) Sensor
SIDE AIR BAG (SATELLITE) SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
CAUTION: Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at
least 3 minutes.
1. Remove seat belt retractor assembly. Refer to See: Seat Belt Systems/Seat Belt/Service and
Repair/Front Seat Belt. 2. Remove side air bag (satellite) sensor nuts. 3. Disconnect the side air
bag (satellite) sensor harness connector.
CAUTION: Do not use old nuts after removal; replace with new nuts.
- Check side air bag (satellite) sensor to ensure it is free of deformities, dents, cracks or rust. If it
shows any visible signs of damage, replace it with new one.
- Do not disassemble side air bag (satellite) sensor.
- Replace side air bag (satellite) sensor if it has been dropped or sustained an impact.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer
to See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/SRS Operation Check.
Page 3021
Page 275
Page 5618
Diagnosis System (BCM)
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
BUZZER : CONSULT-III Function (BCM - BUZZER)
DATA MONITOR
ACTIVE TEST
Page 1053
Locations
Page 4457
- With steering wheel in straight ahead position, make sure slit of lower joint "A" fits with the
projection on rear cover cap "B", while checking that mark on steering gear assembly aligns with
mark on rear cover cap
- After installation, bleed the air from the steering hydraulic system. Refer to See: Brakes and
Traction Control/Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Check if steering wheel turns smoothly when it is turned
several times fully to the left and right lock positions.
Page 4392
Page 4105
Locations
Variable Valve Timing Actuator Position Sensor: Locations
Crash Zone Sensor
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Crash Zone Sensor
CRASH ZONE SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
CAUTION: Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at
least 3 minutes.
1. Remove front grille. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Grille/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the
crash zone sensor harness connector. 3. Remove crash zone sensor nuts.
CAUTION: Replace crash zone sensor if it has been dropped or sustained an impact.
- Do not disassemble crash zone sensor.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. After the work is complete, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to
See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/SRS Operation Check.
Page 5603
Specifications
Ignition Timing: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing
Page 4574
Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Overhaul
COIL SPRING AND SHOCK ABSORBER
Disassembly and Assembly
DISASSEMBLY 1. Set the shock absorber in a vise, then loosen (without removing) the piston rod
lock nut as shown.
CAUTION: Do not remove piston rod lock nut at this time. 2. Compress the spring using tool until
the shock absorber mounting insulator can be turned by hand.
WARNING: Make sure that the pawls of the two tools are firmly hooked on the spring. The spring
compressors must be tightened alternately and evenly so as not to tilt the spring.
3. Remove the piston rod lock nut. Discard the piston rod lock nut, use a new nut for assembly.
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY
Shock Absorber Assembly Check for smooth operation through a full stroke, both compression and extension.
- Check for oil leakage on welded or gland packing portions.
- Check piston rod for cracks, deformation or other damage and replace if necessary.
Mounting Insulator and Rubber Parts Check cemented rubber-to-metal portion for separation or
cracks. Check rubber parts for deterioration and replace if necessary.
Coil Spring Check for cracks, deformation or other damage and replace if necessary.
- Check the free spring height.
ASSEMBLY 1. When installing coil spring on shock absorber, the lower end (2) and upper end (3)
must be positioned as shown.
Description and Operation
Positive Crankcase Ventilation: Description and Operation
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION
Description
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This system returns blow-by gas to the intake manifold. The positive crankcase ventilation (PCV)
valve is provided to conduct crankcase blow-by gas to the intake manifold. During partial throttle
operation of the engine, the intake manifold sucks the blow-by gas through the PCV valve.
Normally, the capacity of the valve is sufficient to handle any blow-by and a small amount of
ventilating air. The ventilating air is drawn from the air inlet tubes into the crankcase. In this process
the air passes through the hose connecting air inlet tubes to rocker cover. Under full-throttle
condition, the manifold vacuum is insufficient to draw the blow-by flow through the valve. The flow
goes through the hose connection in the reverse direction.
On vehicles with an excessively high blow-by, the valve does not meet the requirement. This is
because some of the flow will go through the hose connection to the air inlet tubes under all
conditions.
Bulb Replacement
Fog/Driving Lamp: Service and Repair Bulb Replacement
FRONT FOG LAMP
Bulb Replacement
Removal 1.
Disconnect electrical connector.
2. Turn the bulb counterclockwise to remove it.
CAUTION: Do not touch the glass of bulb directly by hand. Keep grease and other oily substances away from
it. Do not touch bulb by hand while it is lit or right after being turned off. Burning may result.
- Do not leave bulb out of fog lamp reflector for a long time because dust, moisture smoke, etc.
may affect the performance of fog lamp. When replacing bulb, be sure to replace it with new one.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 1776
i. Once the entire VIN is entered (a second time), select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See
Figure 16.
j. Select [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen to complete the VIN registration process. See
Figure 17.
k. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Page 121
Power Distribution Module: Service Precautions
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
The Supplemental Restraint System such as "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER",
used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front
passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage
front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag
deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and
whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system
safely is included in the Restraint Systems Information.
WARNING: To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed
by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
- Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to
personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and
Air Bag Module, see the SRS Air Bag.
- Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed. SRS
wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.
Page 2017
Ignition Timing: Component Tests and General Diagnostics
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check
IDLE SPEED
With CONSULT-III Check idle speed in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-III.
With GST Check idle speed with GST.
IGNITION TIMING 1. Attach timing light to loop wire as shown.
2. Check ignition timing.
Body - Sunroof Inoperative/Erratic Operation
Sunroof / Moonroof Module: Customer Interest Body - Sunroof Inoperative/Erratic Operation
Classification: BT07-032A
Reference: NTB07-070A
Date: September 25, 2009
SUNROOF DOES NOT OPERATE PROPERLY
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles section has been revised. No other changes
have been made. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007 - 2009 Armada (TA60) 2007 - 2009 Frontier (D40) 2007 - 2009
Maxima (A34, A35) 2007 - 2009 Pathfinder (R51) 2007 - 2009 Quest (V42) 2007 - 2009 Titan (A60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
Sunroof auto operation will not work or sunroof does not operate properly:
^ When the battery has been disconnected or discharged
^ When the sunroof motor has been disconnected from power
^ When the sunroof motor was changed
ACTION
Perform the following initialization procedure:
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Push and hold the sunroof tilt switch in the forward (DOWN) position until the sunroof is fully
closed.
3. After the sunroof has closed all the way, push and hold the tilt switch forward (DOWN) again for
more than 2 seconds to re-learn motor position.
4. Initialization is complete if the sunroof operates normally.
NOTE:
If the sunroof is still not operating properly after initialization, refer to ASIST and section RF of the
Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for further diagnosis and repair information.
Page 5806
2. Check the fuel level on level gauge. If the fuel gauge indicates more than the level as shown (full
or almost full), drain the fuel from the fuel tank
until the fuel gauge indicates the level as shown, or less.
- If the fuel pump does not operate, use the following procedure to drain the fuel to the specified
level. a. Insert a suitable hose of less than 15 mm (0.59 in) diameter into the fuel filler pipe through
the fuel filler opening to drain the fuel from fuel
filler pipe.
b. Remove the LH rear wheel and tire. Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and
Repair/Rotation .
c. Remove the fuel filler pipe shield. d. Disconnect the fuel filler hose from the fuel filler pipe and
disconnect the vent hose quick connector.
e. Insert a suitable hose into the fuel tank through the fuel filler hose to drain the fuel from the fuel
tank.
3. Release the fuel pressure from the fuel lines. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Fuel Pressure Check .
4. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 5. Remove the three nuts and remove fuel line pump
protector.
6. Disconnect the EVAP hose at the EVAP canister. 7. Disconnect the fuel level sensor, fuel filter,
and fuel pump assembly electrical connector and the fuel feed hose.
Page 609
CAUTION: Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly.
- Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket.
- Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling.
- Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water.
Removal 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2.
Disconnect the accelerator position sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the two upper and one
lower accelerator pedal nuts. 4. Remove the adjustable accelerator pedal assembly.
CAUTION: Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly.
- Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket.
- Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling.
- Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Inspection After Installation Check that the accelerator pedal moves smoothly within the specified range.
Non-adjustable accelerator pedal - total pedal applied stroke : 48 mm (1.89 in)
- Depress and release the accelerator pedal to check that it returns smoothly to the original
released position.
- Perform an electrical inspection of the accelerator pedal position sensor. Refer to See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/VIN Registration See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released
Position Learning See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning See: Powertrain
Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning
.
CAUTION: When the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor is disconnected,
perform "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Exploded View
Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair Exploded View
AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT
Exploded View
Page 3779
Brake Rotor/Disc: Specifications Rear Disc Brake
Rear Disc Brake
Page 474
Without CONSULT-III Check voltage between ECM terminal 101 and ground under the following
conditions.
OK or NG OK - INSPECTION END NG - GO TO 7. 3. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH POWER
SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector. 3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check voltage between ASCD brake switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG OK - GO TO 5. NG - GO TO 4. 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Page 5215
- Disconnect the harness connector.
9. Remove the door finisher and disconnect the lock cable and handle cable from the inside door
handle assembly. Refer to "Removal and
Installation".
10. Remove the door lock knob. 11. Remove the inside door handle assembly screws and remove
the inside door handle assembly.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
REAR DOOR - CREW CAB
Removal 1. Remove the power window switch assembly. Disconnect the harness connector.
2. Remove the pull handle cover. Remove the screws behind pull handle cover.
3. Remove the cap from pull handle escutcheon and remove screw. 4. Remove the pull handle
escutcheon. Remove the screws behind pull handle escutcheon.
5. Remove the armrest. Remove the screws behind armrest.
6. Remove the step lamp (if equipped). Disconnect the harness connector.
7. Remove the door finisher and disconnect lock cable and handle cable from the door handle
assembly. Refer to "Removal and Installation". Disconnect the rear door tweeter speaker connector.
Page 2327
Diagnosis Sheet (CAN Type 4)
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
Diagnosis Sheet (CAN Type 4)
A/T - Special A/T Fluid Requirements
Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Special A/T Fluid Requirements
Classification: AT07-006B
Reference: NTB08-049B
Date: March 13, 2009
NISSAN; SPECIAL AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID REQUIREMENT
This bulletin has been amended to update Parts Information and Applied Vehicles. Please discard
all earlier versions.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2002 to Current Vehicles with Automatic Transmissions (Except GT-R)
SERVICE INFORMATION
If Warranty repairs are being done on a transmission listed in the chart shown in Parts Information,
the listed fluid must be used. A claim to Nissan for warranty, service contract, or goodwill repairs to
the transmissions listed below may be denied if Genuine Nissan ATF/CVT/eCVT Fluid is not used
as specified by the part number in this bulletin.
If Customer Pay service or repair of the transmissions listed below is done, the fluid type listed in
the chart shown in the Parts Information must be used. Nissan recommends the Genuine Nissan
ATF/CVT/eCVT fluid part number listed in Parts Information be used.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 3027
Attachment General Procedure
Page 5506
4. Slide the organizer out of the tracks and place the assembly on the tailgate.
5. Remove all four slider assemblies from the organizer as follows:
CAUTION:
Be careful when removing the insert / slider assemblies to avoid damaging the metal tube or the
plastic panel.
a. Carefully use a medium flat blade screwdriver between the end of the metal tube and the plastic
insert.
b. Use the screwdriver to very carefully begin moving the plastic insert out of the metal tube as
shown in Figure 4.
c. When the insert begins to move, hold the assembly as shown in Figure 5 and pull it out of the
tube.
NOTE:
If the insert is difficult to remove:
Page 3772
3. Hang cylinder body with a wire, and remove pads, pad retainers, shims, and shim cover from
torque member.
CAUTION: When removing the pad retainer from the torque member, lift it in the direction indicated
by the arrow as shown so that it does not deform.
INSTALLATION 1. Push piston in using suitable tool.
CAUTION: In the case of replacing a pad with new one, check the brake fluid level in the reservoir
tank because brake fluid returns to reservoir tank when pressing piston in.
NOTE: Use a suitable tool to easily press piston. 2. Apply Molykote M-77 grease or equivalent to
between shim cover and shim. Install outer shim, outer shim cover to inner pad, and inner
multi-layered shim to outer pad.
3. Apply Molykote M-77 grease or equivalent to between pad retainer and pad. Install pad retainers
and pads to torque member.
4. Apply Molykote M-77 grease or equivalent to the piston face. Install pad return lever securely to
pad wear sensor as shown.
CAUTION: Securely assemble pad retainers so that they are not being lifted up from torque member.
- Both inner and outer pads have a pad return system on the pad retainer. Install pad return lever
securely to pad wear sensor.
5. Install pads, shims, cover and retainers to cylinder body. 6. Install lower sliding pin bolt, and
tighten it to the specified torque. 7. Check front disc brake for drag and correct as necessary. 8.
Install front wheel and tires.
Exploded View
REAR DISC BRAKE
Exploded View of Brake Pads
Page 4182
Fuse: Locations Fuse, Fusible Link And Relay Box
FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX
Terminal Arrangement
FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK BOX
FUSE AND RELAY BOX
Engine - Revised Upper Oil Pan/Timing Cover Service
Oil Pan: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Revised Upper Oil Pan/Timing Cover Service
Classification: EM10-011
Reference: NTB10-099
Date: August 19, 2010
ARMADA AND TITAN; REVISED UPPER OIL PAN AND TIMING CHAIN CASE PROCEDURES
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Armada (TA6O) 2004-2010Titan (A60)
SERVICE INFORMATION
Removal and installation procedures for the upper oil pan and timing chain case have been
updated to no longer require engine removal and installation.
Nissan Service Manuals for 2004-2010 Armada and Titan vehicles will be updated with these new
procedures. Updated Service Manuals will be distributed to the field as quickly as possible.
The standard Flat Rate Times will be adjusted to reflect the new procedures.
Until the updated Service Manuals are made available, please use the procedures shown below for
any upper oil pan and timing chain case-related repairs on an Applied Vehicle.
Page 2525
CAUTION
4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF.
^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure.
^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF.
^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear
defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel
heater, etc.
CAUTION
5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running.
If the cooling fans are running:
a. Turn the ignition OFF.
b. Wait for the engine to cool.
c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF).
d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running.
6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer.
7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress"
message to clear.
Page 641
NOTES:
^ Rust penetrant is considered a shop supply.
^ Nissan Rust Penetrant can be ordered through the Nissan Direct Ship Chemical Care Product
Program, Website order via link on dealer portal.
^ WD-40 is available from various local sources.
Removal Tool
^ When removing a seized exhaust sensor with a specialty socket (which contains a slit to
accommodate the wiring harness), it may spread open and
strip the sensor.
^ Before this occurs, it is recommended to cut the wiring harness from the sensor and use a box
end wrench or 6-point deep well socket.
1. Clamp the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube in a vice.
2. Spray the sensor with the rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds.
^ It is important that the spray is directed at the base of the sensor to ensure it penetrates into the
threads.
Page 4737
Compressor Clutch: Description and Operation Manual A/C (Type 2)
MAGNET CLUTCH
System Description
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The front air control controls compressor operation based on ambient
and intake temperature and a signal from ECM.
Low Temperature Protection Control The front air control will turn the compressor ON or OFF as
determined by a signal detected by the intake sensor. When intake air temperature is higher than
the preset value, the compressor turns ON. The compressor turns OFF when intake air
temperature is lower than the preset value.
Page 4210
HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS
Sample/wiring diagram -example- For detail, refer to following See: How To Read Wiring Diagrams/Description.
Description
HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS
Description
Page 5350
1. Remove tray and mat from console bin. 2. Remove latch from console lid. 3. Remove console
lid. 4. Remove console lid hinge. 5. Remove console bin. 6. Disconnect electrical harness from
DVD player (if equipped). 7. Remove rear upper finisher. 8. Remove rear cup holder assembly. 9.
Remove rear finisher assembly.
10. Disconnect rear finisher assembly electrical connectors. 11. Remove console power socket. 12.
Remove upper side finishers LH/RH. 13. Remove screws on each side, disconnect clips and
remove console covers LH/RH. 14. Remove mask and storage compartment. 15. Remove console
front bracket. 16. Remove heat duct and console rear duct. 17. Remove console rear bracket.
ASSEMBLY Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.
Page 1837
Page 1722
Procedures
Fuel Filter: Procedures
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly
Fuel Level Sender Unit
Disassembly 1. Disconnect the harness connectors. 2. Remove the fuel sensor from the pump
assembly. 3. Remove the sending unit module and floater arm assembly.
Assembly Assembly is the reverse order of disassembly.
Specifications
Firing Order: Specifications
Ignition System
Firing order: 1 - 8 - 7 - 3 - 6 - 5 - 4 -2
Page 4124
Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation Power Consumption Control System
System Diagram
POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM
System Diagram
System Description
POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM
System Description
OUTLINE IPDM E/R incorporates a power consumption control function that reduces the power consumption
according to the vehicle status.
- IPDM E/R changes its status (control mode) with the sleep wake up signal received from BCM via
CAN communication.
Normal mode (wake-up) CAN communication is normally performed with other control units.
- Individual unit control by IPDM E/R is normally performed.
Low power consumption mode (sleep) Low power consumption control is active.
- CAN transmission is stopped.
SLEEP MODE ACTIVATION -
IPDM E/R judges that the sleep-ready conditions are fulfilled when the ignition switch is OFF and
none of the conditions below are present. Then it transmits a sleep-ready signal (ready) to BCM via
CAN communication.
- Front wiper fail-safe operation
- Outputting signals to actuators
- Switches or relays operating
- Auto active test is starting
- Emergency OFF
- Output requests are being received from control units via CAN communication.
- IPDM E/R stops CAN communication and enters the low power consumption mode when it
receives a sleep wake up signal (sleep) from BCM and the sleep-ready conditions are fulfilled.
WAKE-UP OPERATION IPDM E/R changes from the low power consumption mode to the normal mode when it receives a
sleep wake-up signal (wake up) from BCM or any of the following conditions is fulfilled. In addition,
it transmits a sleep-ready signal (not-ready) to BCM via CAN communication to report the CAN
communication start.
- Ignition switch ON
- An output request is received from a control unit via CAN communication.
Page 488
Variable Valve Timing Actuator Position Sensor: Service and Repair Intake Valve Timing Control
Position Sensor (RH)
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL
Intake Valve Timing Control Position Sensor (RH)
REMOVAL 1. Remove engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Engine Cover.
2. Disconnect intake valve timing control position sensor connector (RH).
3. Remove intake valve timing control position sensor (RH) (1) from Intake valve timing control
solenoid valve cover (RH) (3).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Replace the O-ring (2) of the intake valve timing control position sensor with a new one,
then lubricate O-ring with engine oil before installing.
Intake valve timing control position sensor bolt : 9.6 N.m (0.98 kg-m, 85 in-lb)
Page 721
HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS
Sample/wiring diagram -example- For detail, refer to following See: How To Read Wiring Diagrams/Description.
Description
HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS
Description
Page 3894
Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair ABS
ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY)
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to
See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 3. Drain the brake fluid.
Refer to See: Hydraulic System/Brake Fluid/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 4.
Disconnect the actuator harness connector from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
CAUTION: -
To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench to prevent the flare nuts
and brake tubes from being damaged.
- Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is
splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately.
5. Disconnect the brake tubes. 6. Remove the three bolts and remove the ABS actuator and
electric unit (control unit).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: To install, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench (commercial service tools).
- Always tighten brake tubes to specification when installing.
Page 2192
Page 1352
12. Remove chain tensioner cover using Tool (if necessary).
Tool number: KVIOIIIIOO (J-37228)
INSTALLATION
1. Install the front oil seal using suitable tool.
CAUTION: Do not scratch or make burrs on the circumference of the oil seal.
2. Install the chain tensioner cover (if removed).
- Apply liquid gasket as shown.
Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent.
3. Install the front cover as follows:
a. Install a new O-ring on the cylinder block.
b. Apply liquid gasket as shown.
Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent.
Page 55
Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair VDC/TCS/ABS
ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY)
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to
See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 3. Drain the brake fluid.
Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic System/Brake Fluid/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement. 4. Disconnect the actuator harness connector from the ABS
actuator and electric unit (control unit).
CAUTION: -
To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from
being damaged.
- Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is
splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately.
5. Disconnect the brake tubes. 6. Remove the three bolts and remove the ABS actuator and
electric unit (control unit).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: To install, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench (commercial service tools).
- Always tighten brake tubes to specification when installing.
Never reuse drained brake fluid.
Page 686
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL
Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE)
REMOVAL 1. Remove engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Engine Cover.
2. Remove air duct and resonator assembly. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Air
Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation.
3. Disconnect camshaft position sensor connector.
4. Remove camshaft position sensor (2) from Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (LH)
(1).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Replace the O-ring (3) of the camshaft position sensor with a new one, then lubricate
O-ring with engine oil before installing.
Camshaft position sensor bolt : 9.6 N.m (0.98 kg-m, 85 in-lb)
Page 3311
INSTALLATION 1. Apply multi-purpose grease to the lips of the new front oil seal.
Then drive the new front oil seal in evenly until it becomes flush with the gear carrier using Tool.
Tool number : ST15310000 ( - )
CAUTION: Do not reuse front oil seal.
- Do not incline the new front oil seal when installing.
- Apply multi-purpose grease to the lips and differential gear oil to the circumference of the new
front oil seal.
2. Install the companion flange to the drive pinion while aligning the matching marks. 3. Apply
anti-corrosive oil to the threads of the drive pinion and the seating surface of the new drive pinion
lock nut and new drive pinion lock nut
washer. Then adjust the drive pinion lock nut tightening torque using Tool A, and check the total
preload torque using Tool B.
- The total preload torque should be within the total preload torque specification. When not
replacing the collapsible spacer, it should also be equal to the measurement taken during removal
plus an additional 0.56 N.m (0.06 Kg-m, 5 in-lb).
- If the total preload torque is low, tighten the drive pinion lock nut in 6.8 N.m (0.69 Kg-m, 5ft-lb)
increments until the total preload torque is met.
CAUTION: Do not reuse drive pinion lock nut or drive pinion lock nut washer.
- Apply anti-corrosive oil to the threads of the drive pinion and the seating surface of the new drive
pinion lock nut.
- Adjust the drive pinion lock nut tightening torque to the lower limit first. Do not exceed the drive
pinion lock nut specified torque. Refer
Front Power Socket RH (For Cigarette Lighter), Console
Power Socket, Front Power Socket (Center Arm Rest)
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair Front Power Socket RH (For Cigarette Lighter),
Console Power Socket, Front Power Socket (Center Arm Rest)
POWER SOCKET
Front Power Socket RH (For Cigarette Lighter), Console Power Socket, Front Power Socket
(Center Arm Rest)
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal 1. Remove inner socket (1) from the ring (2) while pressing the hook (B) on the ring out
from square hole (A).
2. Disconnect power socket connector. 3. Remove ring from power socket finisher while pressing
pawls.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Align notches of inner socket and ring, and socket finisher when installing.
Page 94
Page 1820
34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the
"Duplication Test" icon.
35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase.
36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18).
37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased.
^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs.
^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed.
Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below.
38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF.
39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch
(M/T) pedal;
Page 723
MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. -
The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Abbreviation List
ABBREVIATIONS
Abbreviation List
The following ABBREVIATIONS are used:
Page 5508
9. Reinstall both rail stops.
^ Use a 13/32" (10 mm) wrench.
10. Make sure the organizer is in the "deployed" position and the lids are snapped closed.
11. Slide the organizer all the way forward until it stops against the front of the bed.
12. Turn all of the hand knobs until each slider is tight.
Page 5337
2. Remove plastic bolt cover located on the side of the armrest.
3. Remove bolt and armrest assembly.
4. a. Push the insert out of the armrest as shown in Figure 3 using a suitable tool.
b. Remove the insert as shown in Figure 4.
Page 1286
2. With the engine running at idle and the AC turned ON, observe the pulley axial/lateral (back and
forth) movement (see Example 2):
^ Maximum movement specification is 1 mm.
^ Visual comparison of movement with a known good vehicle is recommended.
Idler Pulley / Manual Tensioner Inspection (if equipped)
No more than 1 mm of pulley rock should be visible.
Alternator One-way Clutch Pulley Inspection
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the rotor.
NOTE:
The following steps can be done while the alternator is installed on the vehicle if the drive belt is
removed and the alternator electrical connectors are disconnected.
1. Secure the rotor using a medium size screwdriver and a rolled shop towel.
2. Turn the pulley clockwise when viewed from the front.
^ Pulley should be locked.
^ If it rotates in both directions, replace the alternator.
3. Turn the pulley counterclockwise when viewed from the front.
Specifications
Compression Check: Specifications
Compression Pressure
Standard...............................................................................................................................................
............. 1,520 KPa (15.5 Kg/cm2, 220 psi) / 200 rpm
Minimum...............................................................................................................................................
............ 1,324 KPa (13.5 Kg/cm2, 192 psi) / 200 rpm
Differential limit between
cylinders........................................................................................................................... 98 KPa (1.0
Kg/cm2, 14 psi) / 200 rpm
Page 4370
Once you have set the target position, DO NOT reset it at anytime during the alignment process.
6. Begin the alignment procedure.
^ Follow all of the instructions for your particular equipment.
^ Refer to the Service Manual for alignment specifications.
If your equipment requires "rolling compensation". follow these additional tips:
^ DO NOT push or pull on the vehicle body.
IMPORTANT:
After performing "rolling compensation", DO NOT reset the target position.
When performing "caster sweep". follow these tips:
Page 3924
Page 2144
Page 1271
- Thickness of a new valve lifter can be identified by stamp marks on the reverse side (inside the
cylinder).
Stamp mark N788 indicates 7.88 mm (0.3102 in) in thickness. Available thickness of valve lifter: 25 sizes with range 7.88 to 8.36 mm (0.3102 to 0.3291 in) in
steps of 0.02 mm (0.0008 in)
(when manufactured at factory). Refer to See: Engine Lubrication/Specifications. 5. Install the
selected valve lifter. 6. Install the camshaft. 7. Manually turn the crankshaft pulley a few turns. 8.
Make sure the valve clearances for a cold engine are within specifications. Refer to See: Engine
Lubrication/Specifications. 9. After completing the repair, check the valve clearances again with the
specifications for a warmed engine. Make sure the values are within specifications. Refer to See:
Engine Lubrication/Specifications.
A/C - Blower Motor Intermittently Sticks On High
Blower Motor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Blower Motor Intermittently Sticks On High
Classification: HA08-006A
Reference: NTB09-011A
Date: March 10, 2010
BLOWER FAN INTERMITTENTLY STUCK ON HIGH SPEED
This bulletin has been amended. The Claims Information has been updated. Please discard all
earlier versions.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2008 - 2009 Titan (A60) 2008 - 2009 Armada (TA60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
HVAC blower fan stays on high speed when the blower fan switch is on LOW for up to 60 seconds
and then returns to normal operation.
While operating with this condition the blower speed cannot be changed, but it can be turned off.
This condition may be intermittent.
AND
The heater switch resistor is 3 FIN type in the front heater unit.
ACTION
Replace the 3 FIN heater switch resistor in front heater unit with a 5 FIN heater switch resistor, the
part number is listed in the Parts Information table.
NOTE:
Do not change the rear heater switch resistor from 3 FIN to 5 FIN.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing the repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Page 4239
Terminal Layout
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Terminal Layout
TERMINAL LAYOUT
Page 4356
The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure
2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road.
Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center
^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less.
^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less.
When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to
counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle
should be driven on a straight flat road.
Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle
pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This
condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side.
Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition
The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road.
^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering
correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on
a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane
during this time (7 seconds).
ABS
Page 111
SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal"
condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Page 2250
Engine Control Module: Programming and Relearning
Procedure After Replacing ECM
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
Procedure After Replacing ECM
When replacing ECM, the following procedure must be performed. 1. Perform initialization of NVIS
(NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to See: Accessories and
Optional
Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/ECM
Re-Communicating Function.
2. Perform See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/VIN Registration. 3. Perform
See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position
Learning. 4. Perform See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve
Closed Position Learning. 5. Perform See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning. 6. Perform See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Idle Air Volume Learning.
VIN Registration
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
VIN Registration
DESCRIPTION VIN Registration is an operation to registering VIN in ECM. It must be performed
each time ECM is replaced.
NOTE: Accurate VIN which is registered in ECM may be required for Inspection and Maintenance
(I/M).
OPERATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-III 1. Check the VIN of the vehicle and note it. Refer to See: Application and
ID/Identification Number. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and engine stopped. 3. Select "VIN
REGISTRATION" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode. 4. Follow the instruction of CONSULT-III display.
Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R) Battery
Replacement
Keyless Entry Transmitter Battery: Technical Service Bulletins Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R)
Battery Replacement
Classification: EL09-042
Reference: NTB09-118
Date: October 28, 2009
INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT AND BATTERY DISCHARGE INDICATOR
RESET
APPLIED VEHICLES: Vehicles equipped with the Intelligent Key type shown below.
IF YOU CONFIRM
^ The Intelligent Key is the type that has a notch on each side.
And
^ The battery in the Intelligent Key needs to be replaced for any reason.
ACTION
1. Open the Intelligent Key as described in the Service Procedure, and replace the battery.
2. Confirm the battery discharge indicator has reset/is not illuminated in the dot matrix display.
NOTES:
^ DO NOT insert a tool into the notches of the Intelligent Key to pry it open, as this may damage
the printed circuit board (PCB).
^ The battery is a maintenance item and is not warrantable.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelligent Key.
2. Place a piece of tape on the end of a small flathead screwdriver.
Page 5330
2. Remove plastic bolt cover located on the side of the armrest.
3. Remove bolt and armrest assembly.
4. a. Push the insert out of the armrest as shown in Figure 3 using a suitable tool.
b. Remove the insert as shown in Figure 4.
Page 4650
Air Duct: Service and Repair Grilles
DUCTS AND GRILLES
Removal and Installation
GRILLES
Removal 1. Remove the interior trim panels as necessary. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior
Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Panel Assembly/Removal And Installation.
2. Remove the grille from the interior trim panel.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 3663
- Never reuse drained brake fluid.
- Refill brake system with new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system. Refer to See: Brake
Bleeding/Service and Repair.
Page 1624
Thermostat Housing: Service and Repair Removal And Installation
THERMOSTAT AND WATER PIPING
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
Removal of Thermostat 1. Drain engine coolant from the radiator. Refer to See: Coolant/Service
and Repair.
CAUTION: Perform when engine is cold. 2. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. Refer to
See: Engine/Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and
Repair/Removal and Installation.
3. Remove the engine room cover using power tools. 4. Disconnect the water suction hose from
the water inlet. 5. Remove the water inlet and thermostat.
Removal of Thermostat Housing, Water Outlet and Heater Pipe 1. Remove the intake manifold.
Refer to See: Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. 2. Remove the
thermostat housing, water outlet and heater pipe.
Removal of Water Cut Valve 1. Drain the engine coolant from the radiator. Refer to See:
Coolant/Service and Repair.
CAUTION: Perform when the engine is cold. 2. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. Refer
to See: Engine/Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and
Repair/Removal and Installation.
3. Remove the engine room cover using power tool. 4. Disconnect the heater hose (heater core
side). 5. Remove the heater hose bracket. 6. Disconnect the water cut valve connector. 7. Remove
the water cut valve.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Place a thread so that it is caught in the valve of the thermostat.
Immerse fully in a container filled with water. Heat while stirring. The valve opening temperature is the temperature at which the valve opens and falls from the
thread.
- Continue heating. Check the full-open lift amount.
- After checking the full-open lift amount, lower the water temperature and check the valve closing
temperature.
INSTALLATION
Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-029 Date: 090421
Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming
Classification: EC09-007
Reference: NTB09-029
Date: April 21, 2009
CONSULT-III ECM REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE
APPLIED VEHICLES: All CONSULT-III (C-III) compatible Nissan vehicles
SERVICE INFORMATION
A complete step-by-step General Procedure for C-III ECM Reprogramming is now available in the
on-line version of this bulletin.
This General Procedure is also available via hyperlink from specific C-III symptom-based Technical
Service Bulletins in ASIST.
CAUTION
Part 1
Updated March 25, 2009
CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM REPROGRAMMING
A symptom based TSB is required before using this procedure.
IMPORTANT: Before starting, make sure:
^ ASIST on the C-III computer has been freshly synchronized (updated).
^ All C-III software updates (if any) have been installed.
NOTE:
The C-III computer automatically gets applicable ECM reprogramming data during ASIST
synchronization.
Page 3672
Page 4216
System Diagram
Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation System Diagram
METER SYSTEM
A/T OIL TEMPERATURE GAUGE
A/T OIL TEMPERATURE GAUGE : System Diagram
Page 4027
Specifications
Crankshaft: Specifications
Crankshaft
Page 3771
Brake Pad: Removal and Replacement
Exploded View
FRONT DISC BRAKE
Exploded View of Brake Pads
Removal And Installation
FRONT DISC BRAKE
Removal and Installation of Brake Pads
WARNING: Clean dust on caliper and brake pad with a vacuum dust collector to minimize the
hazard of air borne particles or other materials.
CAUTION: While removing cylinder body, do not depress brake pedal because piston will pop out.
- It is not necessary to remove bolts on torque member and brake hose except for disassembly or
replacement of caliper assembly. In this case, hang cylinder body with a wire so as not to stretch
brake hose.
- Do not damage piston boot.
- If any shim is subject to serious corrosion, replace it with a new one.
- Always replace shim and shim cover as a set when replacing brake pads.
Keep rotor free from brake fluid.
- Burnish the brake pads and disc rotor mutually contacting surfaces, after refinishing or replacing
rotors, after replacing pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage.
REMOVAL 1. Remove front wheel and tires using power tool. 2. Remove lower sliding pin bolt.
Changing A/T Fluid
Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Changing A/T Fluid
A/T FLUID
Changing the A/T Fluid (ATF)
CAUTION: If using the vehicle for towing, the A/T fluid must be replaced as specified. Refer to See:
. 1. Drive the vehicle to warm up the A/T fluid to approximately 80° C (176° F). 2. Stop the engine.
3. Remove the A/T fluid level gauge.
4. Drain the A/T fluid from the drain plug hole, then install the drain plug with a new gasket. Refill
the transmission with new A/T fluid. Always refill
with the same volume as the drained A/T fluid.
Use the A/T fluid level gauge to check the A/T fluid level as shown. Add A/T fluid as necessary.
Drain plug : Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service
and Repair/Overhaul/Component.
- To flush out the old A/T fluid from the transmission oil coolers, pour new A/T fluid into the A/T fluid
charging pipe with the engine idling and at the same time drain the old A/T fluid from the auxiliary
transmission oil cooler hose return line.
- When the color of the A/T fluid coming out of the auxiliary transmission oil cooler hose return line
is about the same as the color of the new A/T fluid, flushing out the old A/T fluid is complete. The
amount of new A/T fluid used for flushing should be 30% to 50% increase of the specified capacity.
A/T fluid grade and capacity : Refer to See: .
CAUTION: If Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF is not available, Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF may also be used.
- Using ATF fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF or Matic J ATF will cause deterioration
in driveability and A/T durability, and may damage the A/T, which is not covered by the warranty.
- When filling the transmission with A/T fluid, do not spill the A/T fluid on any heat generating parts
such as the exhaust parts.
- Do not reuse the drain plug gasket.
5. Install the A/T fluid level gauge and tighten the A/T fluid level gauge bolt to specification.
A/T fluid level gauge bolt : Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Transmission Assembly or
See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Removal
and Replacement/Transmission Assembly.
6. Drive the vehicle to warm up the A/T fluid to approximately 80° C (176° F).
7. Check the fluid level and condition. If the A/T fluid is still dirty, repeat steps 2 through 6. 8. Install
the A/T fluid level gauge in the A/T fluid charging pipe and install the A/T fluid level gauge bolt.
Locations
Relay Box: Locations
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Locations
Cargo Lamp Switch: Locations
Page 4752
TEMPERATURE CONTROL DIAL Increases or decreases the set temperature.
- When REC switch is ON, REC switch indicator turns ON, and air inlet is set to REC.
- When REC switch is turned OFF, or when compressor is turned from ON to OFF, REC switch is
automatically turned OFF. REC mode can be re-entered by pressing REC switch again.
- REC switch is not operated when DEF switch is turned ON, at the D/F position, or in floor
position.
Positions the air outlet doors to the defrost position. Also positions the intake doors to the outside
air position, and turns A/C compressor ON.
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH (IF EQUIPPED) When switch is ON, rear window and door
mirrors are defogged.
OFF SWITCH The compressor and blower are OFF, the intake doors are set to the outside air
position, and the air outlet doors are set to the foot (75% foot and 25% defrost) position.
BLOWER CONTROL DIAL/OFF SWITCH The blower speed is manually controlled with this dial.
- The compressor and blower are OFF, the intake doors are set to the outside air position, and the
air outlet doors are set to the foot position.
A/C SWITCH The compressor is ON or OFF. (Pressing the A/C switch when the AUTO switch is
ON will turn off the A/C switch and compressor.)
MODE SWITCHES Controls the air discharge outlets.
MAGNET CLUTCH CONTROL
Page 5138
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Service and Repair
SONAR SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear sonar sensor (1) from the rear bumper (2).
2. Disconnect the rear sonar sensor connector. 3. Remove the rear sonar sensor housing from the
rear bumper (2).
INSTALLATION 1. Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 4138
Physical Values
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Physical Values
PHYSICAL VALUES
Page 2708
Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Engine Cover.
2. Disconnect the harness connector from air cleaner case (upper). 3. Remove the air duct and
resonator assembly and air cleaner case. 4. Remove air cleaner filter and air cleaner case (lower) Add marks as necessary for easier installation.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 4279
Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation Signal Buffer System
System Diagram
SIGNAL BUFFER SYSTEM
System Diagram
System Description
SIGNAL BUFFER SYSTEM
System Description
IPDM E/R reads the status of the oil pressure switch and transmits the oil pressure switch signal to
BCM via CAN communication. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Information Bus/Description and Operation/CAN Communication System/System
Description.
Page 566
REMOVAL
WARNING: Follow the "General Precautions" before working on the fuel system. Refer to See:
Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Service Precautions . 1. Remove the fuel
filler cap to release the pressure from inside the fuel tank.
Page 1108
Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Transmitter (Pressure Sensor)
REMOVAL
CAUTION: DO NOT use center hole cone-type clamping machines to hold the wheel assembly
during tire removal/installation or balancing or damage to the wheel paint, cladding or chrome may
result. Use only rim-type or universal lug-type clamping machines to hold the wheel assembly
during servicing. 1. Deflate tire. Unscrew transmitter nut and allow transmitter to fall into tire.
2. Gently bounce tire so that transmitter falls to bottom of tire. Place wheel and tire assembly on tire
changing machine and break both tire beads. Ensure that the transmitter remains at the bottom of
the tire while breaking the bead.
3. Turn tire so that valve hole is at bottom, and gently bounce the tire to ensure transmitter is near
valve hole. Carefully lift tire onto turntable and
position valve hole (and transmitter) 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head.
4. Lubricate tire well, and remove top side of tire. Reach inside the tire and remove the transmitter.
5. Remove the second side of the tire as normal.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: DO NOT use center hole cone-type clamping machines to hold the wheel assembly
during tire removal/installation or balancing or damage to the wheel paint, cladding or chrome may
result. Use only rim-type or universal lug-type clamping machines to hold the wheel assembly
during servicing.
1. Place first side of tire onto rim.
Page 1754
8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.)
9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.)
10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2).
12. Select Select.
Specifications
Power Steering Fluid: Specifications
Power Steering Fluid Type
Recommended fluid is Genuine Nissan PSF or equivalent.
Page 1128
Tires: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Tire
Page 2440
Page 4235
CONSULT-III Function (IPDM E/R)
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R)
CONSULT - III Function (IPDM E/R)
APPLICATION ITEM CONSULT-III performs the following functions via CAN communication with
IPDM E/R.
SELF DIAGNOSTIC Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures.
DATA MONITOR
Page 3047
^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed.
^ C-III Security Card is installed.
^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still
cable-connected to the vehicle.
1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect
the VI to the vehicle.
CAUTION
2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer.
CAUTION
3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery:
For Conventional Vehicles
^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate.
NOTE:
The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended.
CAUTION
For Hybrid Vehicles
^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station.
^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery.
Page 2172
C. Scroll down and select [VIN REGISTRATION] on the "Select Work Item" screen. See Figure 10.
d. Press [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 11.
e. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 12.
Page 3309
- If the total preload torque is low, tighten the drive pinion lock nut in 6.8 N.m (0.69 Kg-m, 5ft-lb)
increments until the total preload torque is met.
CAUTION: Do not reuse drive pinion lock nut.
- Apply anti-corrosive oil to the threads of the drive pinion and the seating surface of the new drive
pinion lock nut.
- Adjust the drive pinion lock nut tightening torque to the lower limit first. Do not exceed the drive
pinion lock nut specified torque. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/Front Final Drive
M205.
Do not loosen drive pinion lock nut to adjust the total preload torque. If the drive pinion lock nut
torque or the total preload torque exceeds the specifications, replace the collapsible spacer and
tighten it again to adjust. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/Front Final Drive M205.
- After adjustment, rotate drive pinion back and forth 2 to 3 times to check for unusual noise,
rotation malfunction, and other malfunctions.
4. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Check the differential gear oil level after installation. Refer to See: Fluid Differential/Service and Repair/Changing Differential Gear Oil.
Tow Truck Towing
Towing Information: Service and Repair Tow Truck Towing
TOW TRUCK TOWING
Tow Truck Towing
WARNING: Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. Always use safety stands to
support the frame when you have to get under the vehicle.
- Place wheel chocks at both front and back of the wheels on the ground.
CAUTION: All applicable State or Provincial (in Canada) laws and local laws regarding the towing operation
must be obeyed.
- It is necessary to use proper towing equipment to avoid possible damage during towing operation.
Towing is in accordance with Towing Procedure Manual at dealer. Always attach safety chains before towing.
- When towing, make sure that the transmission, steering system and power train are in good
order. If any unit is damaged, dollies must be used.
- Never tow an automatic transmission model from the rear
(i.e., backward) with four wheels on the ground as this may cause serious and expensive damage
to the transmission.
4WD MODEL
NISSAN does not recommend towing automatic transmission equipped vehicles with the drive
wheels on the ground.
CAUTION: Never tow 4WD models with any of the tires on the ground as this may cause serious and
expensive damage to the transfer case and transmission.
Page 1745
CAUTION
2. When you get to the ECM Reprogramming screen shown in Figure 1, confirm this bulletin
applies as follows.
A. On your C-III screen, look at the Part Number column (see Figure 1):
^ If this column is blank (no part number listed), this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to
ASIST for further diagnostic information.
^ If a Part Number is listed, write it on the Repair Order.
With Intelligent Key System
Fuel Pump Relay: Locations With Intelligent Key System
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Terminal Layout
TERMINAL LAYOUT
Locations
Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations
Page 4018
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair Front Power Socket LH, Rear Power Socket (Cargo
Bed)
POWER SOCKET
Front Power Socket LH, Rear Power Socket (Cargo Bed)
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal.
2. Remove inner socket (1) from the ring (2) while pressing the hook (B) on the ring out from
square hole (A).
NOTE: Rear Power Socket (Cargo Bed) requires riveted finisher removal from bed prior to socket
removal. 3. Disconnect power socket connector. 4. Remove ring from power socket finisher while
pressing pawls.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Align notches of inner socket and ring, and socket finisher when installing.
Page 4608
3. Apply an approved tire lubricant to the tire and wheel in the areas shown in Figures 1 and 2.
^ Tire lubricant is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process
Tire:
^ Apply lube to the inner bead only of both beads
^ Do not apply lube to the flange area (outer bead area)
NOTE:
Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs the tire may
become un-balanced.
Wheel:
^ Apply lube to the Safety Humps and Bead Seating area.
^ Do not apply lube to the flange area
4. Before inflating the tire:
^ If there are "match-mount" marks on the tire and rim, align the marks.
Page 1495
4. Install Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 and Fuel Pressure Gauge (from kit J-44321) as shown
in figure. Do not distort or bend fuel rail tube when installing fuel pressure gauge adapter.
- When reconnecting fuel hose, check the original fuel hose for damage and abnormality.
5. Turn ignition switch ON (reactivate fuel pump), and check for fuel leakage. 6. Start engine and
check for fuel leakage. 7. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge. During fuel pressure check, check for fuel leakage from fuel connection every 3 minutes.
At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2, 51 psi)
8. If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step. 9. Check the following. Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging
- Fuel filter for clogging
- Fuel pump
- Fuel pressure regulator for clogging
If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator. If NG, repair or replace.
10. Before disconnecting Fuel Pressure Gauge and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6, release fuel
pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE
RELEASE".
Service and Repair
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair
Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery terminals and wait at least 3
minutes.
Do not use air tools or electric tools for servicing.
Always work from the side of air bag module. Do not work from the front of it.
Always place air bag module with pad side facing upward.
Do not cause impact to the air bag module by dropping etc. Replace the air bag module if it has
been dropped or sustained an impact.
After the work is completed, make sure no system malfunction is detected by air bag warning lamp.
In case a malfunction is detected by the air bag warning lamp, reset by the self-diagnosis function
and delete the memory by CONSULT-III.
If a malfunction is still detected after the above operation, perform self-diagnosis to repair
malfunctions. Refer to
Page 4366
2. Position vehicle on the front turn plates as follows:
^ Stop vehicle just behind the turn plates.
^ Center the turn plates to the tires.
^ Move the vehicle onto the turn plates by turning/pushing the rear wheel.
DO NOT push/pull on the vehicle body.
Page 581
Page 1658
^ If it applies: Position the band clamp(s) between the "dimples or on top where the "stand-offs" are
located (see Figure 1 and 2 above).
> The "stand-offs" cannot be seen: They are welded on the underside of the heat shield.
> If the "stand-off" is missing, this bulletin does not apply.
5. Secure the band clamp with the hex bolt located on the side (or on top, if needed). See Figure 1
above for example.
WARNING:
Do Not install the hex bolt on the bottom of the exhaust tube.
^ Band clamp hex bolt torque: 4.0 - 5.5 Nm (0.4 - 0.56 Kg-m, 2.9 - 4.0 ft-lb)
6. After securing the band clamp, cut off the clamp's excess at the end.
^ Wrap the end of the band clamp over the hex bolt, and then cut off the excess band clamp within
5 mm (0.2 inches) past the hex bolt (see Figure 2 for
example).
Page 2985
Switch: Service and Repair
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK POSITION SWITCH
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
Differential Lock Position Switch
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage spline, companion flange and front oil seal when removing propeller
shaft.
- Before removing rear final drive assembly or rear axle assembly, disconnect ABS sensor harness
connector from the assembly and move it away from rear final drive assembly/rear axle assembly
area. Failure to do so may result in sensor wires being damaged and sensor becoming inoperative.
1. Drain rear final drive gear oil. Refer to See: Maintenance/Fluids/Fluid - Differential/Service and
Repair/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD). 2. Remove rear propeller shaft. Refer to See: Transmission
and Drivetrain/Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service
and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Propeller Shaft 3S1410.
3. Remove both RH and LH axle shafts. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive Axles,
Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Service
and Repair/Rear Axle Shaft.
4. Remove the carrier cover. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential
Assembly/Differential Cover/Service and Repair/Rear Final
Drive M226 (ELD).
5. Remove differential lock solenoid connector (B) bolt and disconnect differential lock position
connector (A). Arrow Indicates Front
6. For installation, apply a paint matching mark on one side of side bearing cap.
CAUTION: Side bearing caps are line-board for initial assembly. The matching marks are used to install them
in their original positions.
- For matching mark, use paint. Do not damage side bearing cap.
7. Remove adjuster lock plates.
Page 4081
Exploded View
Spark Plug: Service and Repair Exploded View
SPARK PLUG
Exploded View
Page 3752
Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Rear Disc Brake
Exploded View
REAR DISC BRAKE
Exploded View of Brake Caliper
Removal And Installation
REAR DISC BRAKE
Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor
WARNING: Clean dust on caliper and brake pad with a vacuum dust collector to minimize the
hazard of air borne particles or other materials.
CAUTION: -
While removing cylinder body, do not depress brake pedal because piston will pop out.
It is not necessary to remove bolts on torque member and brake hose except for disassembly or
replacement of caliper assembly. In this case, hang cylinder body with a wire so as not to stretch
brake hose.
- Do not damage piston boot.
- If any shim is subject to serious corrosion, replace it with a new one.
- Always replace shim and shim cover as a set when replacing brake pads.
- Keep rotor free from brake fluid.
- Burnish the brake pads and disc rotor mutually contacting surfaces, after refinishing or replacing
rotors, after replacing pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage.
Page 4987
Antenna, Radio: Service and Repair Premium With Navigation
SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA
Removal and Installation
SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA
Removal 1. Lower the headliner. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair.
2. Disconnect the satellite radio antenna connector. 3. Remove the satellite radio antenna nut. 4.
Remove the satellite radio antenna.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 3120
34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the
"Duplication Test" icon.
35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase.
36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18).
37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased.
^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs.
^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed.
Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below.
38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF.
39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch
(M/T) pedal;
Page 2343
Is the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO 5. NO - Repair the main line between the harness
connectors B75 and B69. 5. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (OPEN CIRCUIT) Check the
continuity between the harness connector and the data link connector.
Is the inspection result normal? YES (Present error) - Check the following items again. Decision of CAN system type.
- Not received CONSULT-III data [SELF-DIAG RESULTS, CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR ("ECU
list" included)].
- Not copied from on-board diagnosis.
- Procedure for detecting root cause.
YES (Past error) - Error was detected in the main line between the A/T assembly and the data link
connector. NO - Repair the main line between the harness connector M40 and the data link
connector.
Main Line Between TCM And DIFF Circuit
MAIN LINE BETWEEN TCM AND DIFF CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 3. Check the following terminals and
connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side). Harness connector F14
- Harness connector E5
- Harness connector E50
- Harness connector B75
Is the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO 2. NO - Repair the terminal and connector. 2.
CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (OPEN CIRCUIT) 1. Disconnect the following harness
connectors. A/T assembly
- Harness connectors F14 and E5
2. Check the continuity between the A/T assembly harness connector and the harness connector. Models with floor shift
- Models with column shift
Page 294
16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5).
^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB,
diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing.
17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.)
Page 2677
Positive Crankcase Ventilation: Testing and Inspection
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION
Component Inspection
PCV (POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION) VALVE With engine running at idle, remove PCV
valve from rocker cover. A properly working valve makes a hissing noise as air passes through it. A
strong vacuum should be felt immediately when a finger is placed over valve inlet.
PCV VALVE VENTILATION HOSE
1. Check hoses and hose connections for leaks. 2. Disconnect all hoses and clean with
compressed air. If any hose cannot be freed of obstructions, replace.
Page 263
Page 1288
Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection
DRIVE BELTS
Checking Drive Belts
WARNING: Be sure to perform when the engine is stopped. 1. Remove air duct and resonator
assembly when inspecting drive belt. 2. Make sure that indicator (single line notch) of each auto
tensioner is within the allowable working range (between three line notches).
NOTE: Check the drive belt auto tensioner indication when the engine is cold.
- The indicator notch is located on the moving side of the drive belt auto tensioner.
3. Visually check entire belt for wear, damage or cracks. 4. If the indicator is out of allowable
working range or belt is damaged, replace the belt. Refer to See: Service and Repair.
DRIVE BELT TENSION There is no manual drive belt tension adjustment. The drive belt tension is
automatically adjusted by the drive belt auto tensioner.
Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions
Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions
Classification: WT10-005
Reference: NTB10-114
Date: September 27, 2010
INFLATING TIRES EQUIPPED WITH TPMS
APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan with Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
SERVICE INFORMATION
Improper use of tire inflator tools can break the stem of a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensor.
NOTE:
The type of stem breakage shown in Figure 1 is not considered a warrantable repair.
Please refer to the following examples of recommended and not recommended tire pressure filling
tools.
Not Recommended tire inflator tools.
Page 4261
ABLS/ABS
Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair ABLS/ABS
ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY)
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to
See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 3. Drain the brake fluid.
Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic System/Brake Fluid/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement. 4. Disconnect the actuator harness connector from the ABS
actuator and electric unit (control unit).
CAUTION: -
To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench to prevent the flare nuts
and brake tubes from being damaged.
- Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is
splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately.
5. Disconnect the brake tubes. 6. Remove the three bolts and remove the ABS actuator and
electric unit (control unit).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: To install, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench (commercial service tools).
- Always tighten brake tubes to specification when installing.
- Never reuse drained brake fluid.
Steering/Suspension - Front End Alignment Cam Bolts
Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Front End Alignment Cam Bolts
Classification: FA05-002D
Reference: NTB05-097D
Date: January 19, 2011
2005-2011 TITAN AND ARMADA; CAM BOLTS FOR FRONT WHEEL ALIGNMENT
The Applied Vehicles have been updated/amended. Please discard previous versions of this
bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2011 Titan (A60) 2005 - 2011 Armada (TA60)
APPLIED VINS 2005 Titan built after 1N6AA0(***)5N 566358 2005 Armada built after
5N1AA08(**)5N 733885 2006 - 2011 vehicles: All VINS
APPLIED DATE Vehicles built after June 2, 2005
IF YOU CONFIRM
An Applied Vehicle needs to have the front wheel alignment adjusted,
NOTE:
Applied Vehicles listed above come from the factory with non-adjustable bolts (Not Cam Bolts) for
the lower link (lower control arm) mounting.
ACTIONS
1. Remove the original lower link mounting bolts, washers, and nuts - 2 per side.
^ Refer to section FSU in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for lower link mounting bolt
locations.
2. Install new bolts (cam bolts), cam washers and new nuts.
^ New parts are listed in the Parts Information section of this bulletin.
NOTE:
Cam bolts are used to adjust caster and camber.
3. Perform front wheel alignment per the ESM.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 4131
Power Distribution Module: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures
Diagnosis Description
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R)
Diagnosis Description
AUTO ACTIVE TEST
Description In auto active test mode, the IPDM E/R sends a drive signal to the following systems to
check their operation. Oil pressure low/coolant pressure high warning indicator
- Oil pressure gauge
- Rear window defogger
- Front wipers
- Tail, license and parking lamps
- Front fog lamps
- Headlamps (Hi, Lo)
- A/C compressor (magnetic clutch)
- Cooling fan
Operation Procedure 1. Close the hood and front door RH, and lift the wiper arms from the
windshield (to prevent windshield damage due to wiper operation).
NOTE: When auto active test is performed with hood opened, sprinkle water on windshield before
hand. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON and, within 20 seconds, press the
front door switch LH 10 times. Then turn the ignition switch OFF. 4. Turn the ignition switch ON
within 10 seconds. After that the horn sounds once and the auto active test starts. 5. After a series
of the following operations is repeated 3 times, auto active test is completed.
NOTE: When auto active test mode has to be cancelled halfway through test, turn ignition switch
OFF.
CAUTION: If auto active test mode cannot be actuated, check door switch system. Refer to See: Body and
Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/Door Switch/King Cab/Diagnosis Procedure See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power
Locks/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Door Switch/King
Cab/Component Function Check See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Door Switch/King Cab/Diagnosis Procedure,
"KING CAB
See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/Door Switch/Crew Cab/Diagnosis Procedure (Crew Cab). Do not start the engine.
Inspection in Auto Active Test Mode When auto active test mode is actuated, the following 6 steps
are repeated 3 times.
Page 541
f. Use the new tie-wrap to secure all the wires to the black corrugated tubing (see Figure 6).
^ New tie-wrap is included with the new sender unit.
^ Make sure all wires are tied together (3 fuel level sending unit wires and 2 fuel pump wires).
^ Place the Tie-Wrap 90 mm (about 3.5 inches) from the top of the tubing.
^ Make sure the wires do not interfere with the movement of the float arm.
4. Carefully reinstall the Fuel Pump Assembly back into the vehicle in reverse of removal.
^ IMPORTANT: Use a new seal (O-Ring) when reinstalling the Fuel Pump Assembly.
^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed.
CAUTION:
DO NOT bend the Float Arm when reinstalling the Fuel Pump.
5. Confirm the Fuel Gauge operates properly.
Page 4297
Page 4275
Power Distribution Module: Service Precautions
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
The Supplemental Restraint System such as "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER",
used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front
passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage
front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag
deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and
whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system
safely is included in the Restraint Systems Information.
WARNING: To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed
by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
- Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to
personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and
Air Bag Module, see the SRS Air Bag.
- Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed. SRS
wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.
Page 4702
1. Disconnect heater switch resistor connector. See Figure 2.
2. Loosen two screws located on the heater switch resistor. See Figure 2.
3. Replace the heater switch resistor with part number 27151-ZW00A. See Figure 1.
4. Reassemble the vehicle components in reverse order of removal.
5. Check to make sure the issue has been resolved.
Page 2896
HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS
Sample/wiring diagram -example- For detail, refer to following See: How To Read Wiring Diagrams/Description.
Description
HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS
Description
Service and Repair
Dome Lamp Switch: Service and Repair
ILLUMINATION
Removal and Installation
ILLUMINATION CONTROL SWITCH
Removal The illumination control switch (1) is replaced as a part of the combination meter
assembly. Refer to See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Instrument Cluster /
Carrier/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
PERSONAL LAMP - TYPE B (if equipped)
Removal 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Using a suitable tool (A), release the pawls
and remove the personal lamp lens (1). 3. Remove personal lamp screws (2). 4. Disconnect the
connector, then remove personal lamp.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Bulb Replacement 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Page 2301
Trouble Diagnosis Procedure
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
Trouble Diagnosis Procedure
INTERVIEW WITH CUSTOMER Interview with the customer is important to detect the root cause
of CAN communication system errors and to understand vehicle condition and symptoms for
proper trouble diagnosis.
Points in interview What: Parts name, system name
- When: Date, Frequency
- Where: Road condition, Place
- In what condition: Driving condition/environment
- Result: Symptom
NOTE: Check normal units as well as error symptoms.
Page 1076
Page 3938
Page 4270
Locations
Page 3254
3. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector (A).
CAUTION: Do not damage connector. 4. Straighten terminal clip (Arrow) to free A/T fluid
temperature sensor 2 harness.
5. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM. 6. Remove
bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2.
Installation
CAUTION: After completing installation, check A/T fluid leakage and fluid level. Refer to See: Fluid
- A/T/Service and Repair/Checking A/T Fluid. 1. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket.
2. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (with bracket) in control valve with TCM. Tighten A/T fluid
temperature sensor 2 bolt to the
specified torque. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/Component.
CAUTION:
Page 2533
27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example).
28. Select Select
29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example).
30. Select Confirm
Page 2079
Page 5230
^ LH motor: Rotate counterclockwise.
^ RH motor: Rotate clockwise.
2. Install the power window motor onto the regulator.
3. Install the regulator assembly into the door.
4. Secure regulator assembly to door inner with fasteners then install glass into door and attach to
regulator.
5. Raise the glass to the top position.
CAUTION:
Do not operate the glass automatically to raise the glass to the top.
LATCH (Lower Anchors And Tether For Children) System
Child Seat Tether Attachment: Service and Repair LATCH (Lower Anchors And Tether For
Children) System
LATCH (LOWER ANCHORS AND TETHER FOR CHILDREN) SYSTEM
Removal and Installation
NOTE: The LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether for Children) system is not serviceable.
Page 981
^ Blue LLC one quart concentrate:
P/N 999MP - L255QTP
> The one quart concentrate containers are intended for extreme cold weather application.
> Use the concentrate without mixing (do not add water).
> Add directly to the cooling system in specific amounts as directed on the container label.
Additional Information for using Blue LLC
Blue LLC and Green-colored Nissan LLC (P/N 999MP-AF000P) are compatible with each other:
^ Blue can be mixed/added with Green
^ Green can be mixed/added with Blue
CAUTION:
^ Adding Green LLC to Blue LLC will reduce/shorten the life expectancy of the Blue LLC to that of
the Green LLC (4 years / 60,000 miles).
^ LLC must always be used with demineralized or distilled water, otherwise the life expectancy of
the LLC (Blue or Green) will be degraded and
cooling system damage may occur.
Exploded View
Fuel Rail: Service and Repair Exploded View
FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE
Exploded View
Service and Repair
Drive Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair
DRIVE BELTS
Drive Belt Auto Tensioner and Idler Pulley
REMOVAL 1. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. Refer to See: Tune-up and Engine
Performance Checks/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and
Repair/Removal and Installation.
2. Remove the drive belt. Refer to See: Drive Belt/Service and Repair. 3. Remove the drive belt
auto tensioner and idler pulley using power tool.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-037A Date: 100519
Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement
Reference: NTB10-037A
Date: May 19, 2010
VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2005 - 2009 ARMADA AND TITAN FUEL GAUGE
INACCURACY
This bulletin has been amended. Additions were made to the Parts Information. Please discard
previous versions of this bulletin.
CAMPAIGN ID #: R1010
NHTSA #: 10V-074
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2009 Armada (TA60) 2005 - 2009 Titan (A60)
Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility.
INTRODUCTION
Nissan is conducting a voluntary recall campaign on certain MY2005-2009 Armada and Titan
vehicles to address a potential fuel gauge inaccuracy. Specifically, the issue can cause the fuel
gauge to show that the vehicle still has some fuel, typically about one quarter tank, when the fuel
tank is actually empty. To remedy this potential condition, Nissan is conducting this Voluntary
Safety Recall Campaign to replace the fuel level sending unit with a new one at no charge for parts
or labor.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number R1010 to this campaign. This number must appear on
all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle
falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service
department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient
(tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in
dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to
do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While
federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used
vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed.
Page 3287
CAUTION: Do not tighten at this point. This allows further tightening of side bearing adjusters. 8.
Tighten each side bearing adjusters using adjuster tool.
Tool number : - (C - 4164)
9. Adjusting backlash of drive gear and drive pinion. Refer to See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD).
10. Check total preload torque. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226
(ELD). 11. Check tooth contact. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226
(ELD).
12. Apply a bead of sealant to the mating surface of the carrier cover as shown.
- Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications.
CAUTION: Remove any old sealant adhering to the mating surfaces. Also remove any moisture,
oil, or foreign material adhering to the application and mating surfaces.
13. Install the carrier cover to the gear carrier. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque. Refer to
See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive
M226.
14. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Fill the front final drive assembly with recommended differential gear oil. Refer to See:
Fluid - Differential/Service and Repair/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD).
Page 3680
Removal Remove the rear axle shaft assembly. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive
Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and Repair/Rear Axle Shaft.
NOTE: It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle shaft assembly to replace the rear wheel
sensor rotor.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the old rear wheel sensor rotor.
- Do not reuse the rear axle oil seal. The rear axle oil seal must be replaced every time the rear
axle shaft assembly is removed from the rear axle shaft housing.
Page 3925
Yaw Rate Sensor: Service and Repair
G SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. If equipped, remove center console. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding
/ Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Center Console.
2. If equipped, remove the front center seat. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Seat/Removal
and Installation.
3. Remove yaw rate/side/decel G sensor nuts.
CAUTION: Do not use power tools to remove the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor.
- Do not drop or strike the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor.
4. Disconnect harness connector and remove the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Do not drop or strike the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor.
- After installation, calibrate the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. Refer to See: Antilock Brakes /
Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Inspection And
Adjustment/Description See: Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Inspection And Adjustment/Special Repair Requirement.
Page 586
Page 2193
Attachment General Procedure
Locations
Page 1851
Rear Window Defogger System
Page 2294
Never replace the unit even when "NG" is indicated on the "INITIAL DIAG" at this stage. Follow the
trouble diagnosis procedures.
IPDM E/R
MONITOR ITEM LIST (ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS)
Display Control Unit
NOTE: CAN diagnostic support monitor of the display control unit is indicated on the vehicle
display. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact
Disc/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Premium With
Navigation/Diagnosis System (Audio Unit)/Audio Unit.
CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Page 267
Procedures
Power Steering Pump: Procedures
POWER STEERING OIL PUMP
On-Vehicle Inspection and Service
CHECKING RELIEF OIL PRESSURE
CAUTION: Before starting work, confirm belt tension is proper.
1. Connect Tool between oil pump discharge connector and high pressure hose and then bleed air
from the hydraulic circuit.
2. Start engine. Allow engine to run until tank temperature reaches 50 - 80°C (122 - 176°F).
CAUTION: -
Warm up engine with shut-off valve fully opened. If engine is started with shut-off valve closed, fluid
pressure in power steering pump increases to maximum. This will raise fluid temperature
excessively.
- Be careful not to contact hose with belt when engine is started.
3. With engine at idle, close shut-off valve and read the relief oil pressure.
Relief oil pressure : 9.0 - 9.8 MPa (91.77 - 99.93 kg/cm2, 1305.34 - 1421.37 psi)
CAUTION: Do not close shut-off valve of pressure gauge for more than 10 seconds. 4. After
measurement, open shut-off valve slowly. If relief oil pressure is outside the specification, disassemble and repair oil pump. Refer to See:
Steering Gear/Service and Repair/Overhaul.
5. After inspection, disconnect oil pressure gauge and oil pressure gauge adapter from hydraulic
circuit, connect oil pump discharge connector and
high pressure hose. Add fluid and bleed air from hydraulic circuit thoroughly. Refer to See: Power
Steering Bleeding/Service and Repair.
Page 5359
2. Release the clips, then remove instrument lower cover RH.
White Arrow Indicates Vehicle front
3. Remove lower instrument panel RH and glove box screws. Refer to See: Dashboard /
Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Instrument Lower Panel RH And Glove Box/Exploded View.
4. Disconnect the electrical connector, then remove the lower instrument panel RH and glove box.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
A/T - Special A/T Fluid Requirements
Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Special A/T Fluid Requirements
Classification: AT07-006B
Reference: NTB08-049B
Date: March 13, 2009
NISSAN; SPECIAL AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID REQUIREMENT
This bulletin has been amended to update Parts Information and Applied Vehicles. Please discard
all earlier versions.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2002 to Current Vehicles with Automatic Transmissions (Except GT-R)
SERVICE INFORMATION
If Warranty repairs are being done on a transmission listed in the chart shown in Parts Information,
the listed fluid must be used. A claim to Nissan for warranty, service contract, or goodwill repairs to
the transmissions listed below may be denied if Genuine Nissan ATF/CVT/eCVT Fluid is not used
as specified by the part number in this bulletin.
If Customer Pay service or repair of the transmissions listed below is done, the fluid type listed in
the chart shown in the Parts Information must be used. Nissan recommends the Genuine Nissan
ATF/CVT/eCVT fluid part number listed in Parts Information be used.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 3747
pedal occurs at very low mileage.
REMOVAL 1. Remove front wheel and tires using power tool. 2. Fasten disc rotor using wheel nut.
3. Drain brake fluid. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Coolant/Service
and Repair. 4. Remove union bolt, and then disconnect brake hose from caliper assembly.
NOTE: Discard the copper washers, do not reuse.
5. Remove torque member bolts, and remove brake caliper assembly.
CAUTION: Do not drop brake pad.
6. Apply matching marks to disc rotor and wheel hub assembly as shown if the disc rotor is to be
reused, then remove disc rotor.
CAUTION: Put matching marks on wheel hub assembly and disc rotor if the disc rotor is to be
reused.
INSTALLATION 1. If reusing the disc rotor, use the matching marks to align disc rotor on the wheel
hub assembly as shown, then install disc rotor using a wheel nut to
hold it in place.
CAUTION: Use matching marks on wheel hub assembly and disc rotor if the disc rotor is to be
reused. 2. Install brake caliper assembly, and tighten torque member bolts to the specified torque.
Locations
Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Locations
METER SYSTEM
A/T OIL TEMPERATURE GAUGE : Component Parts Location
Locations
Page 2687
4. Install Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 and Fuel Pressure Gauge (from kit J-44321) as shown
in figure. Do not distort or bend fuel rail tube when installing fuel pressure gauge adapter.
- When reconnecting fuel hose, check the original fuel hose for damage and abnormality.
5. Turn ignition switch ON (reactivate fuel pump), and check for fuel leakage. 6. Start engine and
check for fuel leakage. 7. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge. During fuel pressure check, check for fuel leakage from fuel connection every 3 minutes.
At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2, 51 psi)
8. If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step. 9. Check the following. Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging
- Fuel filter for clogging
- Fuel pump
- Fuel pressure regulator for clogging
If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator. If NG, repair or replace.
10. Before disconnecting Fuel Pressure Gauge and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6, release fuel
pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE
RELEASE".
Page 1243
2. Apply the journal diameter grade on the crankshaft front to the column in "Main Bearings
Selection Table". 3. Read the symbol at the cross point of the selected row and column in the
"Main Bearings Selection Table".
CAUTION: Initial clearance for No. 1, 5 journal and No. 2, 3, 4 journal is different. Use two different selection
lists for each part.
- No. 1, 5 journal and No. 2, 3, 4 journal have the same signs but different measures. Do not
confuse them.
4. Apply the symbol to the "Main Bearings Grade Table" to select.
NOTE: Grade list applies to all journals.
- Service parts are available as a set of both upper and lower.
When Cylinder Block and Crankshaft are Reused 1. Measure the inside diameter of the cylinder
block main bearings housing and the outside diameter of the crankshaft journal. 2. Apply
measurement in above step 1 to "Main Bearings Selection Table". 3. The following steps are same
as in "When New Cylinder Block and Crankshaft are Used".
Main Bearings Selection Table (No. 1 and No. 5 journal)
Page 1365
Oil Pressure Gauge: Description and Operation System Description
METER SYSTEM
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE : System Description
The engine oil pressure gauge indicates whether the engine oil pressure is low or normal. The oil
pressure gauge is controlled by the IPDM E/R. The IPDM E/R reads the ON/OFF signals from the
oil pressure switch and transmits the oil pressure switch signal to the combination meter via BCM
with the CAN communication line. The oil pressure gauge displays a low or normal indication
according to the oil pressure switch signal received via CAN communication.
Page 2005
REMOVAL
WARNING: Follow the "General Precautions" before working on the fuel system. Refer to See:
Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Service Precautions . 1. Remove the fuel filler cap to release the
pressure from inside the fuel tank.
2. Check the fuel level on level gauge. If the fuel gauge indicates more than the level as shown (full
or almost full), drain the fuel from the fuel tank
Page 4661
Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Description and Operation Manual A/C (Type 1)
INTAKE SENSOR
System Description
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Intake Sensor
The intake sensor is located on the heater and cooling unit assembly. It converts temperature of air
after if passes through the evaporator into a resistance value which is then input to the front air
control.
System Diagram
Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation System Diagram
METER SYSTEM
A/T OIL TEMPERATURE GAUGE
A/T OIL TEMPERATURE GAUGE : System Diagram
Page 4586
Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair Pantograph Jack
LIFTING POINT
Pantograph Jack
WARNING:
Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. Always use safety stands to
support the frame when you have to get under the vehicle.
Place wheel chocks at both front and back of the wheels on the ground.
A/C - Blower Motor Intermittently Sticks On High
Blower Motor Resistor: Customer Interest A/C - Blower Motor Intermittently Sticks On High
Classification: HA08-006A
Reference: NTB09-011A
Date: March 10, 2010
BLOWER FAN INTERMITTENTLY STUCK ON HIGH SPEED
This bulletin has been amended. The Claims Information has been updated. Please discard all
earlier versions.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2008 - 2009 Titan (A60) 2008 - 2009 Armada (TA60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
HVAC blower fan stays on high speed when the blower fan switch is on LOW for up to 60 seconds
and then returns to normal operation.
While operating with this condition the blower speed cannot be changed, but it can be turned off.
This condition may be intermittent.
AND
The heater switch resistor is 3 FIN type in the front heater unit.
ACTION
Replace the 3 FIN heater switch resistor in front heater unit with a 5 FIN heater switch resistor, the
part number is listed in the Parts Information table.
NOTE:
Do not change the rear heater switch resistor from 3 FIN to 5 FIN.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing the repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Exhaust System - Heat Shield Rattling Noises
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-094 Date: 100812
Exhaust System - Heat Shield Rattling Noises
Classification: EM-10-009
Reference: NTB10-094
Date: August 12, 2010
EXHAUST HEAT SHIELD NOISE
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2010 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2010 Armada (TA60) 2005 - 2010 Pathfinder
(R51) 2005- 2010 Xterra (N 50) 2005 - 2010 Frontier (D40)
IF YOU CONFIRM:
A noise is coming from the front exhaust tube heat shield(s) due to rattle.
ACTION: Secure the heat shield(s) with new band clamps (see PARTS INFORMATION).
^ Refer to the SERVICE PROCEDURE.
NOTE:
Do not replace the front exhaust tube for this incident, if it should occur.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You
MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential
to successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
WARNING:
Page 2470
13. Select Confirm
14. Select Diagnosis
15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete.
Page 4132
Concept of auto active test
- IPDM E/R starts the auto active test with the door switch signals transmitted by BCM via CAN
communication. Therefore, the CAN communication line between IPDM E/R and BCM is
considered normal if the auto active test starts successfully.
- The auto active test facilitates troubleshooting if any systems controlled by IPDM E/R cannot be
operated.
Diagnosis chart in auto active test mode
Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration Procedure
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration
Procedure
Classification: EC09-028
Reference: NTB09-136
Date: December 1, 2009
2005 AND LATER; ECM VIN REGISTRATION
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2005 and later
SERVICE INFORMATION
The Applied Vehicles must have the correct Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) registered in the
Engine Control Module (ECM). The VIN registration process must be performed under the following
conditions.
^ When installing a new ECM
^ If, during vehicle service, the VIN registration inside the ECM is found to be missing or incorrect.
When needed, use the Service Procedure in this bulletin to perform ECM VIN registration.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for
any repairs being performed.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Connect C-III to the vehicle and perform the initial selections:
NOTE:
If C-III is already connected, go to Step 2.
a. Start C-III and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear.
b. Select the detected VI from the list.
c. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
d. Select Model and Year.
e. Confirm the correct model and year were selected.
f. Select Repair.
Page 4295
Locations
Relay Box: Locations
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Locations
Shift Indicator: Locations
METER SYSTEM
SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR : Component Parts Location
Page 2382
Page 2312
i. Reception item of "IPDM-E": "UNKWN" is not indicated. This indicates normal communication
between IPDM-E and its receiving units. Do not draw any line.
3. Based on information received from "CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR", place a check mark on the
known good CAN communication line between
ECM and IPDM-E. a. Through the previous procedure, the circuit between ADP splice and TCM
has the most amount of lines (shade 3-a in the figure below). b. Place a check mark on the known
good lines to establish the error circuit.
Reception item of "IPDM-E": On "ECM", "OK" is indicated. IPDM-E communicates normally with
ECM. Put a check mark on the normal circuit between ECM and IPDM-E (check mark 3-b in the
figure below).
Component
Air Duct: Service and Repair Component
DUCTS AND GRILLES
Component
Ducts - Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
Page 821
Alignment: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 08-097D Date: 110426
Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics
Classification: ST08-001D
Reference: NTB08-097D
Date: April 26, 2011
DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER
This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The
off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this
bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R
SERVICE INFORMATION
If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic
Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue.
Diagnostic Flow Chart
Road Test
Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair.
IMPORTANT:
^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as:
> Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory)
Page 3006
System Diagram
Tachometer: Description and Operation System Diagram
METER SYSTEM
TACHOMETER : System Diagram
Page 193
Page 5273
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the following parts from the trim panel:
^ pull handle cover
^ power window switch assembly (if equipped)
Refer to the INT section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for removal
instructions.
2. Following the instructions on the label, apply Nissan Vinyl and Leather Cleaner to the trim panel
surface.
3. Use a soft bristle brush to gently clean the surface.
4. Mist the area lightly with water to rinse.
5. Use a clean cloth to wipe the area clean.
Page 2226
d. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds, then
e. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" again for 10 seconds (see Figure 2).
f. Proceed with step 6.
Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL)
NOTE:
Make sure all electrical loads are turned OFF, including A/C, defroster, radio, lights, etc. while
performing the following procedures. Also, make sure the engine cooling fans are NOT operating
during the following procedures.
6. Perform the Idle Air Volume Learning procedure as follows:
a. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle.
b. Warm up engine and transmission to operating temperature.
c. In the [CONSULT WORK SUPPORT] mode, select [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. See Figure 3.
NOTE:
^ If IDLE AIR VOL LEARN is not shown as a SELECT WORK ITEM on CONSULT, the vehicle
does not need the procedure.
^ In this case only, this bulletin is complete, no further action is needed.
Page 5030
Page 2374
NOTES:
^ Rust penetrant is considered a shop supply.
^ Nissan Rust Penetrant can be ordered through the Nissan Direct Ship Chemical Care Product
Program, Website order via link on dealer portal.
^ WD-40 is available from various local sources.
Removal Tool
^ When removing a seized exhaust sensor with a specialty socket (which contains a slit to
accommodate the wiring harness), it may spread open and
strip the sensor.
^ Before this occurs, it is recommended to cut the wiring harness from the sensor and use a box
end wrench or 6-point deep well socket.
1. Clamp the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube in a vice.
2. Spray the sensor with the rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds.
^ It is important that the spray is directed at the base of the sensor to ensure it penetrates into the
threads.
Page 3228
Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation System Description
METER SYSTEM
A/T OIL TEMPERATURE GAUGE : System Description
The A/T oil temperature gauge indicates the A/T fluid temperature. The TCM (transmission control
module) provides an A/T fluid temperature signal to combination meter via CAN communication
lines.
Page 3815
Brake Fluid: Removal and Replacement
BRAKE FLUID
Drain and Refill
CAUTION: Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications.
- Do not reuse drained brake fluid.
- Do not let brake fluid splash on the painted surfaces of the body. This might damage the paint, so
if splashing it, immediately wipe off the area and wash away with water.
- Before servicing, disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector or battery
negative terminal.
1. Connect a vinyl tube to each bleed valve.
2. Depress brake pedal, loosen each bleed valve, and gradually remove brake fluid. 3. Make sure
there is no foreign material in reservoir tank, and refill with new brake fluid.
4. Rest foot on brake pedal. Loosen bleed valve. Slowly depress pedal until it stops. Tighten bleed
valve. Release brake pedal. Repeat this process a few times, then pause to add new brake fluid to
master cylinder. Continue until new brake fluid flows out of the bleed valve. Bleed the air out of the
brake hydraulic system. Refer to See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair.
Lighting - Xenon Headlamp Service Info.
Headlamp Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Xenon Headlamp Service Info.
Classification: EL10-021A
Reference: NTB10-061A
Date: June 29, 2010
XENON HEAD LAMP SERVICE
This bulletin has been amended. The Parts Information has been updated. Please discard previous
versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Nissan with xenon headlamps
IF YOU CONFIRM
A xenon headlamp is not functioning because of an issue inside the headlamp assembly (an
internal issue),
ACTION
Refer to the appropriate Service Manual, follow the diagnostic and repair information for xenon
headlamps.
NOTE: ^ In most cases, replacement of a bulb or HID control unit will solve the incident.
^ Do not replace the entire xenon headlamp assembly when a bulb or HID control unit is available
to solve the incident, if one should occur.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
^ Reference the current Nissan Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for the
repair performed.
^ For HID control unit replacement, use Operation Code RJ36AA.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 5581
Page 3527
Control Module: Service and Repair
TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Switch 4WD shift switch to 2WD and set transfer assembly to 2WD.
CAUTION: When removing transfer control unit, transfer state must be at 2WD. 2. Turn the ignition
switch OFF and disconnect negative battery terminal. 3. Remove the lower instrument panel RH.
Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Lower Panel RH And Glove Box/Removal And
Installation.
4. Disconnect the two transfer control unit connectors. 5. Remove the transfer control unit bolts. 6.
Remove the transfer control unit.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. When installing the transfer control unit, tighten bolts to the specified torque.
Transfer control unit bolts : 5.1 N.m (0.52 kg-m, 45 in-lb)
- After the installation, check 4WD shift indicator pattern. If NG, adjust position between transfer
assembly and transfer control unit. Refer to See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety
Information/Precaution For Transfer Assembly And Transfer Control Unit Replacement.
Page 1037
Engine Oil: Testing and Inspection
ENGINE OIL
Inspection
OIL LEVEL Before starting the engine make sure the vehicle is parked on a flat and level surface, then check
the oil level. If the engine is already running, turn it off and allow 10 minutes before checking.
- Check that the oil level is within the low (L) and high (H) range as indicated on the dipstick.
- If the engine oil level is out of range, add oil as necessary. Refer to See: .
OIL APPEARANCE Check the engine oil for a white milky appearance or excessive contamination.
- If the engine oil is milky, it is highly probable that it is contaminated with engine coolant. Repair
the broken parts.
OIL LEAKAGE Check for oil leakage around the following areas: Oil pan
- Oil pan drain plug
- Oil pressure switch
- Oil filter
- Oil cooler
- Intake valve timing control cover
- Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
- Front cover
- Mating surface between cylinder block and cylinder head
- Mating surface between cylinder head and rocker cover
- Crankshaft oil seal (front and rear)
OIL PRESSURE CHECK
WARNING: Be careful not to burn yourself, as engine oil may be hot.
- Put the selector lever in the Park "P" position.
1. Check the engine oil level. Refer to "Inspection". 2. Remove engine front undercover using
power tool. 3. Disconnect the oil pressure switch harness connector.
4. Remove the oil pressure switch (A). 5. Install Tools.
Page 4804
Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair High-Pressure Pipe
HIGH-PRESSURE PIPE
Removal and Installation for High-pressure Pipe
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal and battery positive terminal. 2. Reposition
the IPDM E/R aside. 3. Remove the front right wheel and tire assembly. Refer to See:
Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Rotation. 4. Position aside the front floor
insulator. 5. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Refrigeration System . 6.
Remove the low pressure pipe. 7. Remove the high-pressure pipe.
CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the
entry of air.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Description and
Operation/Refrigeration System/Component .
CAUTION: Replace the O-ring of the high-pressure pipe with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when
installing it.
- After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
Recall PC039 - Brake Pedal Inspection/Replacement
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-030B Date: 100816
Recall PC039 - Brake Pedal Inspection/Replacement
Reference: NTB10-030B
Date: August 16, 2010
VOLUNTARY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2008-2010 ARMADA & TITAN AND 2008-2009 QUEST
BRAKE PEDAL PIVOT PIN INSPECTION
The Claims Information in this bulletin has been amended. Please discard previous versions.
CAMPAIGN ID#: PC039
NHTSA# 10V-072
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2008-2010 Armada (TA60) 2008-2010 Titan (A60) 2008-2009 Quest (V42)
Check Service Comm to confirm campaign eligibility
INTRODUCTION
Nissan is conducting a Voluntary Recall Campaign on certain specific 2008 - 2010 Armada & Titan
and 2008 - 2009 Quest vehicles to inspect, and if necessary, replace the brake pedal. On a small
number of the potentially affected vehicles the brake pedal assembly may have been manufactured
out of specification.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number PC039 to this quality assurance inspection. This
number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this
activity.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle
falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service
department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient
(tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in
dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to
do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
INSPECTION INSTRUCTIONS
1. Look under the dash to view the brake pedal pivot pin.
Page 4467
6. If steering wheel turning force is out of specification, inspect steering column. Refer to See:
Steering Column/Service and Repair. 7. If steering column meets specification, repair steering
gear.
CHECKING FRONT WHEEL TURNING ANGLE When checking front wheel turning angle, refer to
See: Alignment/Service and Repair.
Page 2810
until the fuel gauge indicates the level as shown, or less.
- If the fuel pump does not operate, use the following procedure to drain the fuel to the specified
level. a. Insert a suitable hose of less than 15 mm (0.59 in) diameter into the fuel filler pipe through
the fuel filler opening to drain the fuel from fuel
filler pipe.
b. Remove the LH rear wheel and tire. Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and
Repair/Rotation .
c. Remove the fuel filler pipe shield. d. Disconnect the fuel filler hose from the fuel filler pipe and
disconnect the vent hose quick connector.
e. Insert a suitable hose into the fuel tank through the fuel filler hose to drain the fuel from the fuel
tank.
3. Release the fuel pressure from the fuel lines. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/Fuel Pressure Check
.
4. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 5. Remove the three nuts and remove fuel line pump
protector.
6. Disconnect the EVAP hose at the EVAP canister. 7. Disconnect the fuel level sensor, fuel filter,
and fuel pump assembly electrical connector and the fuel feed hose.
Disconnect the quick connector as follows: Hold the sides of the connector, push in tabs and pull out the tube.
Page 4875
Page 449
Removal Remove the rear axle shaft assembly. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive
Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and Repair/Rear Axle Shaft.
NOTE: It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle shaft assembly to replace the rear wheel
sensor rotor.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the old rear wheel sensor rotor.
- Do not reuse the rear axle oil seal. The rear axle oil seal must be replaced every time the rear
axle shaft assembly is removed from the rear axle shaft housing.
Procedures
Fuel Filter: Procedures
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly
Fuel Level Sender Unit
Disassembly 1. Disconnect the harness connectors. 2. Remove the fuel sensor from the pump
assembly. 3. Remove the sending unit module and floater arm assembly.
Assembly Assembly is the reverse order of disassembly.
Page 13
Removal and Replacement
Steering Gear: Removal and Replacement
POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
Removal and Installation
CAUTION: Spiral cable may snap due to steering operation if steering column is separated from
steering gear assembly. Therefore secure steering wheel to avoid turning.
REMOVAL 1. Turn wheels to the straight-ahead position. 2. Remove wheel and tire from vehicle
using power tool. 3. Remove undercover using power tool. 4. On 4WD model, remove front final
drive, then support drive shafts with wire. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential
Assembly/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Final Drive M205.
5. Make sure slit of lower joint "A" fits with the projection on rear cover cap "B", while checking that
mark on steering gear assembly aligns with
mark on rear cover cap.
6. Remove cotter pin at steering outer socket and discard, then loosen nut.
Relay Control System
Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation Relay Control System
System Diagram
RELAY CONTROL SYSTEM
System Diagram
System Description
Page 1924
Service and Repair
Dome Lamp Switch: Service and Repair
ILLUMINATION
Removal and Installation
ILLUMINATION CONTROL SWITCH
Removal The illumination control switch (1) is replaced as a part of the combination meter
assembly. Refer to See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Instrument Cluster /
Carrier/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
PERSONAL LAMP - TYPE B (if equipped)
Removal 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Using a suitable tool (A), release the pawls
and remove the personal lamp lens (1). 3. Remove personal lamp screws (2). 4. Disconnect the
connector, then remove personal lamp.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Bulb Replacement 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Page 1515
REMOVAL
WARNING: Follow the "General Precautions" before working on the fuel system. Refer to See:
Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Service Precautions . 1. Remove the fuel
filler cap to release the pressure from inside the fuel tank.
Page 233
Service Procedure
Check NATS On The Vehicle
1. Check to see if the vehicle you're working on has "ECM based" NATS V2.0 or V5.0.
a. If the vehicle has ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0, it will NOT start after you install a service
replacement ECM. So you'll have to re-register all ignition keys, including spare keys with
CONSULT-II and the purple NATS card. After you do this, proceed with step 2.
^ If you do not know how to re-register the keys, refer to the ESM for the NATS key re-registration
procedure.
b. If the vehicle has "BCM based" NATS (instead of ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0), you do NOT
have to re-register the ignition or spare keys. Proceed with step 2.
Check For ECM Data Updates in ASIST
2. In ASIST, select [CONSULT Utilities] >>> [ECM/TCM Data]. Then choose Model and Model
Year (see Figure 1).
3. Look for ECM Data Updates (listed by ECM P/Ns and vehicle configuration) in the top, center
display panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
a. If there is not updates listed for your vehicle configuration, you do NOT have to reprogram the
service replacement ECM. Proceed with step 5.
b. If there is updates listed for your vehicle configuration, see if they apply to the service
replacement ECM you're going to install. Do this by performing step 4.
4. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then confirm that your
ECM is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, -XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details"
panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
a. If your ECM is listed in the "Details" panel, you must reprogram the ECM with the latest data
update. After you do this, proceed with step 5.
CAUTION:
The 1999-2000 Frontier and 1999-2000 Pathfinder have a gray CONSULT connector AND a white
GST connector. Do NOT attempt to perform the ECM Reprogramming procedure with CONSULT-II
connected to the gray CONSULT connector. See the appropriate ESM for further details if
necessary.
b. If your ECM is NOT listed in the "Details" panel, you do NOT have to reprogram the ECM.
Proceed with step 5.
Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
5. Perform the Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning as follows:
a. Make sure the accelerator pedal is fully released.
b. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds.
c. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" for 10 seconds.
Page 1039
Engine Oil: Service and Repair
ENGINE OIL
Changing Engine Oil
WARNING: Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine oil is hot.
- Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer. Try to avoid direct
skin contact with used engine oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand
cleaner as soon as possible.
1. Remove engine front undercover using power tool. 2. Warm up engine, and check for oil leakage
from engine components. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection. 3. Stop engine and wait for 10
minutes. 4. Loosen oil filler cap, then remove drain plug. 5. Drain engine oil. 6. Install drain plug
with new washer.
CAUTION: Be sure to clean drain plug and install with new washer.
Oil pan drain plug : 34.3 N.m (3.5 kg-m, 25 ft-lb)
7. Refill with new engine oil. Refer to See: .
Engine oil capacity (Approximate):
CAUTION: The refill capacity depends on the engine oil temperature and drain time. Use these specifications
for reference only.
Always use the oil level gauge to determine when the proper amount of engine oil is in the engine.
8. Warm up engine and check area around drain plug and oil filter for oil leakage. 9. Stop engine
and wait for 10 minutes.
10. Check engine oil level. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection.
Page 4813
Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Refrigerant
Type......................................................................................................................................................
................................................... HFC 134a (R-134a)
Page 497
Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Service and Repair
AMBIENT SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the ambient sensor electrical connector.
NOTE: The ambient sensor (1) is located behind the front bumper, in front of the condenser (front
grille removed for clarity). 2. Release the ambient sensor clip and then remove the ambient sensor
(1).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 1656
Service and Repair
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair
Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery terminals and wait at least 3
minutes.
Do not use air tools or electric tools for servicing.
Always work from the side of air bag module. Do not work from the front of it.
Always place air bag module with pad side facing upward.
Do not cause impact to the air bag module by dropping etc. Replace the air bag module if it has
been dropped or sustained an impact.
After the work is completed, make sure no system malfunction is detected by air bag warning lamp.
In case a malfunction is detected by the air bag warning lamp, reset by the self-diagnosis function
and delete the memory by CONSULT-III.
If a malfunction is still detected after the above operation, perform self-diagnosis to repair
malfunctions. Refer to
Page 3832
Page 191
Page 4007
MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. -
The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Abbreviation List
ABBREVIATIONS
Abbreviation List
The following ABBREVIATIONS are used:
Page 4372
^ DO NOT push/pull on the tire to perform the caster sweep.
7. Make sure the steering wheel is centered when performing toe-in measurements and
adjustments.
NOTE:
If you are using a Hunter alignment machine equipped with the WinToe(R)-Adjustment System:
^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The WinToe(R) system is not affected by steering
system movement during the adjustment process.
^ Bumping the tire or re-centering the steering wheel when adjusting "near frozen" tie rods is not
necessary. This makes the adjustment process faster
and easier.
^ WinToe(R) eliminates the effect of lash in the steering system.
If you are using a John Bean alignment machine equipped with EZ Toe:
^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The EZ Toe system is not affected by steering
system movement during the adjustment process.
^ This software routine is an improved method of setting front toe, making it easier to obtain a
centered steering wheel.
^ With EZ Toe, it is possible to adjust toe with the steering wheel turned at any angle left or right.
This is helpful when setting toe on engine wall
mounted rack and pinion units.
IMPORTANT:
If during the alignment process the vehicle was lifted off of the rack; after lowering, make sure to
jounce (bounce) the vehicle before confirming adjustments are correct.
After you have checked and adjusted vehicle alignment
8. Print the BEFORE and AFTER measurements and attach them to the Repair Order.
9. Road test the vehicle to make sure the steering wheel is "centered" when driving on a straight
flat road.
Page 3567
b. Align the transfer control device shaft cutout with the mark on the control shift rod, and install.
NOTE: Turn the transfer control device when the transfer control device connection does not
match.
c. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque. Refer to See: Transfer Case/Service and
Repair/Overhaul/Disassembly And Assembly.
3. Install the breather hose to the transfer control device. 4. Connect the transfer control device
connector. 5. After the installation, check the 4WD shift indicator pattern. If NG, adjust the position
between the transfer assembly and transfer control unit.
Refer to See: Transfer Case/Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Precaution For
Transfer Assembly And Transfer Control Unit Replacement.
Antitheft System - NATS Security VBC Logic
Body Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Antitheft System - NATS Security VBC Logic
Classification: EL10-028
Reference: NTB10-106
Date: September 10, 2010
NATS SECURITY - VBC LOGIC
APPLIED VEHICLE: 2009 - 2011 All Nissan with NATS / Immobilizer System
SERVICE INFORMATION
All model year 2009 - 2011 Nissan vehicles equipped with NATS/Immobilizer system have the new
VBC (Validate Before Crank) starter relay logic.
VBC (Validate Before Crank) Logic:
^ The BCM will make sure that a valid (registered) key is being used before engaging the starter
relay. If the key is not authenticated the starter will not
operate.
^ If the engine cranks, the issue is not related to NATS. Do not replace NATS components (BCM,
I-Key, FOB Reader or RF Receiver). Refer to ASIST
for further diagnostic information as needed.
Page 1181
Compression Check: Testing and Inspection
COMPRESSION PRESSURE
Checking Compression Pressure
1. Warm up the engine thoroughly. Then stop the engine. 2. Release the fuel pressure. Refer to
See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and
General Diagnostics/Fuel Pressure Check.
CAUTION: If CONSULT-III is not used to release fuel pressure leave the fuel pump fuse
disconnected until step 7. 3. Remove the spark plug from each cylinder. Refer to See: Tune-up and
Engine Performance Checks/Spark Plug/Service and Repair/Removal and
Installation.
4. Connect the engine tachometer (not required in use of CONSULT-III).
5. Install the compression tester with Tool into the spark plug hole.
Tool number : EG15050500 (J-45402)
6. With the accelerator pedal fully depressed, turn the ignition switch to "START" for cranking.
When the gauge pointer stabilizes, read the
compression pressure and engine rpm. Perform these steps to check each cylinder.
CAUTION: Always use a fully charged battery to obtain specified engine speed. If the engine speed is out of the specified range, check the battery liquid for proper gravity. Check
the engine speed again with normal battery gravity.
- If the compression pressure is below the minimum value, check the valve clearances and parts
associated with the combustion chamber (valve, valve seat, piston, piston ring, cylinder bore,
cylinder head, cylinder head gasket). After checking, measure the compression pressure again.
- If some cylinders have low compression pressure, pour a small amount of engine oil into the
spark plug hole of the cylinder to re-check it for compression.
- If the added engine oil improves the compression, the piston rings may be worn out or damaged.
Check the piston rings and replace if necessary.
- If the compression pressure remains at a low level despite the addition of engine oil, the valves
may be malfunctioning. Check the valves for damage. Replace the valve or valve seat accordingly.
- If two adjacent cylinders have respectively low compression pressure and their compression
remains low even after the addition of engine oil, the gaskets may be leaking, or a valve in adjacent
cylinders may be damaged. Inspect and repair as required.
7. Install the components in the reverse order of removal. 8. Start the engine and confirm that it
runs smoothly. 9. Perform trouble diagnosis. If DTC appears, erase it. Refer to See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Description and
Operation/CAN Communication.
Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures
Technical Service Bulletin # 00-052C Date: 040416
Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures
Classification: EC00-007C
Reference: NTB00-052C
Date: April 16, 2004
ECM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES
ATTENTION:
THIS BULLETIN HAS BEEN REVISED.
^ The Service Procedures for replacing an ECM on an Applied vehicle were revised.
^ Please use this bulletin NTB00-052c for complete information.
^ Discard all previously distributed copies of NTB00-052.
APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All 2000 and later 1999 Frontier (D22) 1999 Quest (V41) 1999 Pathfinder
(R50) from VIN JN8AR07**XW350101
IF YOU CONFIRM:
The Electronic Control Module (ECM) needs to be replaced on a 2000 MY and later vehicle, or an
Applied 1999 MY vehicle (see above).
ACTIONS:
^ Re-register all customer keys if the vehicle has ECM based NATS (see step 1).
^ Check ASIST for any new updates for the new ECM you're installing (see steps 2 - 4).
^ Perform the "ACCELERATOR PEDAL & THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING"
procedure (see step 5).
^ After installing the new ECM, perform the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARNING" procedure (when
applicable) using CONSULT-II. See step 6.
^ For 2005 and later vehicles, enter the vehicle VIN into the new ECM (see step 7).
CAUTION:
Failure to perform all the work steps in the specified order can cause poor engine running, MIL
'ON', or vehicle emission test rejection.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
Page 2317
3. CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR (without PAST): Check the CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR (without
PAST) of units indicating "U1000" or
"U1001" on SELF-DIAG RESULTS. Draw a line on the diagnosis sheet to indicate the possible
error circuit.
NOTE: While an error occurred in the past according to SELF-DIAG RESULTS, it is unclear which signal is
not received. Assume that errors were detected from all reception items.
- Draw a single line among the unit and all reception items. (Work flow differs from CAN DIAG
SUPPORT MNTR (with PAST).) a. Reception item of "EPS": Assume that the unit could not receive
the signals from ECM, ABS, and M&A.; Draw a line among EPS, ECM,
ABS, and M&A; (line 3-a in the figure below).
b. Reception item of "ABS": Assume that the unit could not receive the signal from ECM. Draw a
line between ABS and ECM (line 3-b in the
figure below).
Page 2214
21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete.
NOTE:
If you can't print the above screen:
a. Select the Print icon.
b. Select Save.
c. Select OK.
A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC.
NOTE:
If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in
the following file location:
At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start.
Page 1256
2. Apply the journal diameter grade on the crankshaft front to the column in "Main Bearings
Selection Table". 3. Read the symbol at the cross point of the selected row and column in the
"Main Bearings Selection Table".
CAUTION: Initial clearance for No. 1, 5 journal and No. 2, 3, 4 journal is different. Use two different selection
lists for each part.
- No. 1, 5 journal and No. 2, 3, 4 journal have the same signs but different measures. Do not
confuse them.
4. Apply the symbol to the "Main Bearings Grade Table" to select.
NOTE: Grade list applies to all journals.
- Service parts are available as a set of both upper and lower.
When Cylinder Block and Crankshaft are Reused 1. Measure the inside diameter of the cylinder
block main bearings housing and the outside diameter of the crankshaft journal. 2. Apply
measurement in above step 1 to "Main Bearings Selection Table". 3. The following steps are same
as in "When New Cylinder Block and Crankshaft are Used".
Main Bearings Selection Table (No. 1 and No. 5 journal)
Page 986
NOTE: Apply engine coolant to the cap seal. -
Replace the reservoir cap if there is any damage in the negative-pressure valve, or if the
open-valve pressure is outside of the limit.
CHECKING RADIATOR CAP Inspect the radiator cap.
NOTE: Thoroughly wipe out the radiator filler neck to remove any waxy residue or foreign material.
Replace the cap if the metal plunger cannot be seen around the edge of the black rubber gasket.
- Replace the cap if deposits of waxy residue or other foreign material are on the black rubber
gasket or the metal retainer.
- Pull negative-pressure valve to open it and make sure that it closes completely when released.
- Make sure that there is no dirt or damage on the valve seat of radiator cap negative-pressure
valve.
- Make sure that there are no unusualness in the opening and closing conditions of
negative-pressure valve.
Page 299
27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example).
28. Select Select
29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example).
30. Select Confirm
Page 298
In the Administrator window select My Computer.
In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C).
In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder.
In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder.
In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder.
When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time.
Select and print the file/screen image that you want.
NOTE:
During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems.
Erase DTCs from all systems
22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen).
23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear.
24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.)
25. Select Connect.
26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
Page 4602
Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Transmitter (Pressure Sensor)
REMOVAL
CAUTION: DO NOT use center hole cone-type clamping machines to hold the wheel assembly
during tire removal/installation or balancing or damage to the wheel paint, cladding or chrome may
result. Use only rim-type or universal lug-type clamping machines to hold the wheel assembly
during servicing. 1. Deflate tire. Unscrew transmitter nut and allow transmitter to fall into tire.
2. Gently bounce tire so that transmitter falls to bottom of tire. Place wheel and tire assembly on tire
changing machine and break both tire beads. Ensure that the transmitter remains at the bottom of
the tire while breaking the bead.
3. Turn tire so that valve hole is at bottom, and gently bounce the tire to ensure transmitter is near
valve hole. Carefully lift tire onto turntable and
position valve hole (and transmitter) 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head.
4. Lubricate tire well, and remove top side of tire. Reach inside the tire and remove the transmitter.
5. Remove the second side of the tire as normal.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: DO NOT use center hole cone-type clamping machines to hold the wheel assembly
during tire removal/installation or balancing or damage to the wheel paint, cladding or chrome may
result. Use only rim-type or universal lug-type clamping machines to hold the wheel assembly
during servicing.
1. Place first side of tire onto rim.
Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-037A Date: 100519
Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement
Reference: NTB10-037A
Date: May 19, 2010
VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2005 - 2009 ARMADA AND TITAN FUEL GAUGE
INACCURACY
This bulletin has been amended. Additions were made to the Parts Information. Please discard
previous versions of this bulletin.
CAMPAIGN ID #: R1010
NHTSA #: 10V-074
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2009 Armada (TA60) 2005 - 2009 Titan (A60)
Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility.
INTRODUCTION
Nissan is conducting a voluntary recall campaign on certain MY2005-2009 Armada and Titan
vehicles to address a potential fuel gauge inaccuracy. Specifically, the issue can cause the fuel
gauge to show that the vehicle still has some fuel, typically about one quarter tank, when the fuel
tank is actually empty. To remedy this potential condition, Nissan is conducting this Voluntary
Safety Recall Campaign to replace the fuel level sending unit with a new one at no charge for parts
or labor.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number R1010 to this campaign. This number must appear on
all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle
falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service
department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient
(tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in
dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to
do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While
federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used
vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed.
ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information
Electronic Brake Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic
Information
Classification: BR10-011
Reference: NTB10-145
Date: December 15, 2010
ABS / VDC CAN DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION
APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2005-2011 Nissan vehicles with ABS and/or VDC
SERVICE INFORMATION
When diagnosing a vehicle with an ABS or VDC / SLIP warning light on with DTCs stored in the
ABS / VDC actuator control unit, perform DTC diagnosis first.
^ Do not replace the ABS / VDC actuator control unit without being supported by the DTC
diagnosis.
^ Do not erase DTCs before performing DTC diagnosis.
^ Always fully diagnose before performing any repairs.
When DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) is the only DTC stored in the ABS / VDC actuator
control unit, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART below. This will assist in proper diagnosis results and
repairs in addition to using diagnostic information in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM).
^ If DTC U1000 is found stored in other systems, refer to NIB10-066 and the applicable ESM.
^ If other DTCs are found stored in ABS / VDC along with U1000, follow the diagnosis steps for
those DTCs in the applicable ESM.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for
repairs performed.
Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Information Bus: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Caution
HOW TO USE THIS SECTION
Caution
- This section describes information peculiar to a vehicle, sheets for trouble diagnosis, and
inspection procedures.
- For trouble diagnosis procedure, refer to See: CAN Fundamental/Trouble Diagnosis Procedure.
Abbreviation List
HOW TO USE THIS SECTION
Abbreviation List
Abbreviations in CAN communication signal chart, and the diagnosis sheet are as per the following
list.
Interview Sheet
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
Interview Sheet
Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1421 Stored
Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1421 Stored
Classification: EC09-014B
Reference: NTB09-048B
Date: April 21, 2011
2007-2009 TITAN AND ARMADA; MIL "ON" WITH DTC P1421 STORED
This bulletin has been amended. APPLIED VEHICLES, APPLIED VINS, and Table A and B have
been revised. Please discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007-2009 Titan (A60) 2007-2009 Armada (TA60)
APPLIED VINS and DATES: 2007-2008 Titan and Armada: All
2009 Titan: Vehicles built before 1N6AA0(***)9N312517 // April 7, 2009
2009 Armada: Vehicles built before 5N1AA08(**)9N614339 // April 7, 2009
IF YOU CONFIRM:
An Applied Vehicle has the MIL "ON" and DTC P1421 (Cold Start Control) stored in the ECM.
ACTION:
Confirm this bulletin applies.
Page 107
Page 200
4. Select Engine
5. Select OK
6. Select Work Support
Page 1345
b. Insert Tool between the oil pan (lower) and the oil pan (upper).
Tool number: KVIOIIIIOO (J-37228)
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the mating surface.
- Do not insert a screwdriver, this will damage the mating surfaces.
c. Tap (1) Tool to insert it then slide (2) Tool by tapping its side with a hammer to remove the oil
pan (lower) from the oil pan (upper).
21. Remove the oil strainer from the oil pan (upper).
22. Remove the oil pan (upper) using the following steps.
a. Remove the oil pan (upper) bolts in the reverse order as shown.
b. Remove the oil pan (upper) from the cylinder block by prying it at the points shown using suitable
tool.
CAUTION: Do not damage mating surface.
Page 4459
- Measure the swing torque, using Tool. When ball stud and inner socket start moving the
measured value must be within the specification. If the reading is outside the specification, replace
the socket.
Tool number : - (J-44372)
ROTATING TORQUE Measure the rotating torque, using Tool. If the value is outside the specification, replace the outer
sockets.
AXIAL END PLAY Apply a load of 490 N (50 kg-f, 110 lb-f) to the ball stud axially. Use a dial gauge to measure the
amount of the movement that the stud makes. If the value is outside the specification, replace the
sockets.
ASSEMBLY
Page 5887
Should a customer note water in a lamp assembly, please use the above flow chart to determine if
the condition is normal or requires lamp replacement.
Page 2562
Page 1771
d. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds, then
e. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" again for 10 seconds (see Figure 2).
f. Proceed with step 6.
Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL)
NOTE:
Make sure all electrical loads are turned OFF, including A/C, defroster, radio, lights, etc. while
performing the following procedures. Also, make sure the engine cooling fans are NOT operating
during the following procedures.
6. Perform the Idle Air Volume Learning procedure as follows:
a. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle.
b. Warm up engine and transmission to operating temperature.
c. In the [CONSULT WORK SUPPORT] mode, select [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. See Figure 3.
NOTE:
^ If IDLE AIR VOL LEARN is not shown as a SELECT WORK ITEM on CONSULT, the vehicle
does not need the procedure.
^ In this case only, this bulletin is complete, no further action is needed.
Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-029 Date: 090421
Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming
Classification: EC09-007
Reference: NTB09-029
Date: April 21, 2009
CONSULT-III ECM REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE
APPLIED VEHICLES: All CONSULT-III (C-III) compatible Nissan vehicles
SERVICE INFORMATION
A complete step-by-step General Procedure for C-III ECM Reprogramming is now available in the
on-line version of this bulletin.
This General Procedure is also available via hyperlink from specific C-III symptom-based Technical
Service Bulletins in ASIST.
CAUTION
Part 1
Updated March 25, 2009
CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM REPROGRAMMING
A symptom based TSB is required before using this procedure.
IMPORTANT: Before starting, make sure:
^ ASIST on the C-III computer has been freshly synchronized (updated).
^ All C-III software updates (if any) have been installed.
NOTE:
The C-III computer automatically gets applicable ECM reprogramming data during ASIST
synchronization.
Electrical - IPDM Serviceability
Power Distribution Module: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - IPDM Serviceability
Classification: EL09-014
Reference: NTB09-036
Date: April 27, 2009
IPDM SERVICE
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007 - 2009 Nissan Models with IPDM
SERVICE INFORMATION
The Intelligent Power Distribution Module (IPDM) is ONLY serviceable as an assembly.
The ONLY serviceable parts of an IPDM are the fuses.
^ Some IPDM designs have sections that Relays Relays appear to be serviceable relays.
^ These "relays" are NEVER to be removed.
^ These "relays" may have markings indicating they are similar. They are not "swappable".
CAUTION:
NEVER REMOVE relays from an IPDM.
Tampering with the relays of an IPDM may cause additional incidents with the vehicle.
Such incidents may include:
^ Headlights inoperative.
^ Radiator fan inoperative
^ Fog lamps inoperative
^ Wiper inoperative
Page 1814
18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM.
The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to
use.
19. Select Next
NOTE:
If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with
Reprogramming.
Page 2467
^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed.
^ C-III Security Card is installed.
^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still
cable-connected to the vehicle.
1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect
the VI to the vehicle.
CAUTION
2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer.
CAUTION
3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery:
For Conventional Vehicles
^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate.
NOTE:
The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended.
CAUTION
For Hybrid Vehicles
^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station.
^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery.
Page 3098
Locations
Page 2169
d. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds, then
e. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" again for 10 seconds (see Figure 2).
f. Proceed with step 6.
Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL)
NOTE:
Make sure all electrical loads are turned OFF, including A/C, defroster, radio, lights, etc. while
performing the following procedures. Also, make sure the engine cooling fans are NOT operating
during the following procedures.
6. Perform the Idle Air Volume Learning procedure as follows:
a. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle.
b. Warm up engine and transmission to operating temperature.
c. In the [CONSULT WORK SUPPORT] mode, select [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. See Figure 3.
NOTE:
^ If IDLE AIR VOL LEARN is not shown as a SELECT WORK ITEM on CONSULT, the vehicle
does not need the procedure.
^ In this case only, this bulletin is complete, no further action is needed.
Page 4034
Page 904
CAUTION: Do not drop or shock spark plug.
Capacity Specifications
Coolant: Capacity Specifications
Engine Coolant Capacity
Capacity with reservoir ........................................................................................................................
............................................. 3-1/4 U.S. Gal. (12.2 L)
Page 4058
Consult-III Checking System
Standardized Relay
STANDARDIZED RELAY
Description
NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided
into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays.
Engine - Engine Mounting Bolt Size Change
Engine Mount: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Engine Mounting Bolt Size Change
Classification: EM09-008
Reference: NTB10-034
Date: March 1, 2010
2004-2009 ARMADA & TITAN; ENGINE MOUNTING BOLT SIZE CHANGE
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2009 Armada (TA60) and Titan (A60)
SERVICE INFORMATION
If for any reason one of the Old P/N engines listed in the Parts Information table above needs to be
ordered, note that Service Files have or will be created for these engines.
Page 5161
Body Control Module: Service and Repair
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
Removal and Installation
BCM
Removal
NOTE: If possible, before removing BCM, retrieve current BCM configuration to use for reference
when configuring brand-new BCM after installation. Refer to See: Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Configuration/Special Repair Requirement. 1. Disconnect
the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the lower knee protector. Refer to See: Interior Moulding /
Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Instrument Panel Assembly/Removal And Installation.
3. Remove the screw and release the BCM. 4. Disconnect the connectors and then remove the
BCM.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE: When replacing BCM, it must be configured. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Programming
and Relearning/Configuration/Special Repair Requirement.
- When replacing BCM, perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition
key IDs. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing
and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing Control Unit See:
Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/ECM Re-Communicating Function See: Accessories and
Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/ECM Re-Communicating Function.
- When replacing BCM, perform ID registration procedure of low tire pressure warning system.
Refer to See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Tire Monitoring System/Testing
and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/ID Registration Procedure.
Page 5306
3. Remove the backing sheet from the tape surface. -
Align the locating pin into the hole in the outer door.
- Continue aligning the pins into their corresponding holes in the outer door during installation.
4. Press ends by hand and use a roller to apply 5 kg-f (11 lbs-f) to press molding to door surface. Apply even pressure along molding to insure proper wet out.
CAUTION: To secure contact, do not wash vehicle for 24 hours after installation.
Front Disc Brake
Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Front Disc Brake
Exploded View
FRONT DISC BRAKE
Exploded View of Brake Caliper
Removal And Installation
FRONT DISC BRAKE
Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Rotor
WARNING: Clean dust on caliper and brake pad with a vacuum dust collector to minimize the
hazard of air borne particles or other materials.
CAUTION: While removing cylinder body, do not depress brake pedal because piston will pop out.
- It is not necessary to remove bolts on torque member and brake hose except for disassembly or
replacement of caliper assembly. In this case, hang cylinder body with a wire so as not to stretch
brake hose.
- Do not damage piston boot.
- If any shim is subject to serious corrosion, replace it with a new one.
Always replace shim and shim cover as a set when replacing brake pads.
- Keep rotor free from brake fluid.
- Burnish the brake pads and disc rotor mutually contacting surfaces, after refinishing or replacing
rotors, after replacing pads, or if a soft
Page 1846
With Intelligent Key System
Fuel Pump Relay: Locations With Intelligent Key System
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Terminal Layout
TERMINAL LAYOUT
Page 2958
Shift Interlock Control Module: Locations Electrical Units Location
ABS
Page 3048
CAUTION
4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF.
^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure.
^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF.
^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear
defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel
heater, etc.
CAUTION
5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running.
If the cooling fans are running:
a. Turn the ignition OFF.
b. Wait for the engine to cool.
c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF).
d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running.
6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer.
7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress"
message to clear.
Page 858
- Any turning angles are not adjustable. If any of steering angles are out of the specification, check
if the following parts are worn or damaged.
- Steering gear
- Steering column
- Front suspension components
If found that they are worn or damaged, replace them with new ones.
Page 1463
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect battery negative terminal.
2. Remove the air dam and necessary undercovers if equipped.
3. Drain engine oil.
WARNING: To avoid the danger of being scalded, never drain the engine oil when the engine is
hot.
4. Remove the oil cooler.
5. Disconnect A/T cooler hoses from radiator.
6. Remove lower radiator hose and pipe assembly.
7. Remove RH and LH front wheel and tire using power tool.
8. Remove the power steering pump without disconnecting the power steering hoses and position
aside.
9. Remove air duct and resonator assembly.
10. Remove upper radiator hose.
11. Disconnect coolant reservoir hose from radiator.
12. Remove crankshaft driven type cooling fan.
13. Disconnect the following connectors.
- Harness ground
- Power steering switch
- A/C compressor
- Oil pressure switch
14. Remove generator and generator bracket.
15. Remove A/C compressor without disconnecting the A/C pipes and position aside.
16. Remove front frame crossmember using power tool.
17. Remove the front final drive (4WD only).
18. Remove the steering gear.
19. Remove the oil pressure switch.
20. Remove the oil pan (lower). Using the following steps.
a. Remove the oil pan (lower) bolts in the reverse order as shown using power tool.
Page 5100
Body Mounting, King Cab
Body / Frame Mount Bushing: Service and Repair Body Mounting, King Cab
BODY CONSTRUCTION
Body Mounting, King Cab
When removing, be sure to replace bolts and nuts (sealant applied bolts or self-lock nuts are used
for all mounting).
Specifications
Compression Check: Specifications
Compression Pressure
Standard...............................................................................................................................................
............. 1,520 KPa (15.5 Kg/cm2, 220 psi) / 200 rpm
Minimum...............................................................................................................................................
............ 1,324 KPa (13.5 Kg/cm2, 192 psi) / 200 rpm
Differential limit between
cylinders........................................................................................................................... 98 KPa (1.0
Kg/cm2, 14 psi) / 200 rpm
Page 2930
b. Align the transfer control device shaft cutout with the mark on the control shift rod, and install.
NOTE: Turn the transfer control device when the transfer control device connection does not
match.
c. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Transfer
Case/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Disassembly
And Assembly.
3. Install the breather hose to the transfer control device. 4. Connect the transfer control device
connector. 5. After the installation, check the 4WD shift indicator pattern. If NG, adjust the position
between the transfer assembly and transfer control unit.
Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Transfer Case/Service Precautions/Technician Safety
Information/Precaution For Transfer Assembly And Transfer Control Unit Replacement.
Page 5633
NOTE: In places where the terrestrial magnetism is extremely disturbed, the initial correction may
start automatically.
Page 4085
Page 5585
Page 5854
2. Mount transmitter on rim and slowly tighten transmitter nut to specification.
CAUTION: Do not over tighten transmitter nut.
Transmitter nut : 7.7 N.m (0.79 kg-m, 68 in-lb)
3. Place wheel on turntable of tire machine. Ensure that transmitter is 270 degrees from
mounting/dismounting head.
NOTE: Do not touch transmitter with mounting head. 4. Lubricate tire well, and install second side
of tire as normal. Ensure that tire does not rotate relative to rim. 5. Inflate tire and balance wheel
and tire assembly. Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Balancing
Wheels. 6. Install wheel and tire assembly in appropriate wheel position on vehicle.
NOTE: If replacing the transmitter, then transmitter wake up operation must be performed. Refer to
See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmitter Wake Up Operation.
7. Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction
Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing
and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing Control
Unit/Description See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing
Control Unit/Special Repair Requirement See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes /
Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Adjustment Of
Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position/Description See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock
Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Adjustment Of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position/Special Repair Requirement.
VDC/TCS/ABS
Page 2180
Page 2564
Page 2209
8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.)
9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.)
10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2).
12. Select Select.
Body - Power Window 'Auto Up' Feature Inoperative
Front Door Window Motor: Customer Interest Body - Power Window 'Auto Up' Feature Inoperative
Classification: EL09-033A
Reference: NTB09-095A
Date: May 5, 2010
POWER WINDOW "AUTO UP" INITIALIZATION
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles have been revised. No other changes have
been made. Please discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007-2009 350Z Coupe & Roadster (Z33) 2007-2009 Armada (TA60)
2007-2008 Maxima (A34) 2007 Murano (Z50) 2007-2009 Pathfinder (R51) 2007-2009 Quest (V42)
2007-2009 Titan (A60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
A power window "Auto Up" will not work.
ACTION
Reset the limit switch.
1. Raise the door glass to the top position.
2. While pressing and holding the reset switch, lower the door glass to the bottom position.
3. Release the reset switch.
4. Verify that the reset switch returns to the original position, and then raises the door glass to the
top position.
NOTES:
> If the window is still not operating correctly, refer to ASIST and the Service Manual for further
diagnosis and repair information.
> The above initialization procedure must be performed if any of the following occur:
> Battery cable is disconnected.
> Power window switch connector is disconnected.
> Power window regulator is replaced.
> Power window motor is replaced.
> Window glass is removed.
Page 6164
7. Disconnect the rear window motor wiring harness connector.
8. Remove the bolts and the regulator and motor assembly.
Installation 1. Position the regulator and motor assembly and install the bolts.
Regulator and motor assembly : 7.5 N.m (0.76 Kg-m, 66 in-lb)
2. Connect the rear window motor wiring harness connector. 3. Install the rear window. While installing the rear window, make sure that the bottom clips are engaged on the back panel,
then rotate the glass into position.
- If reusing the existing window assembly, clean the opening and assembly, then apply new butyl to
the window assembly.
- If installing a new window, clean the opening and remove the plastic liner from the butyl on the
new window assembly.
Interior - Door Trim Panel(s) Discolored/Faded
Rear Door Panel: By Symptom Interior - Door Trim Panel(s) Discolored/Faded
Classification: BT10-024
Reference: NTB10-095
Date: August 13, 2010
2004-2010 TITAN; DOOR TRIM PANEL DISCOLORED/FADED
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2010 Titan (A60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
The pull handle trim panel on a front or rear door is discolored/faded. See Figures 1 and 2.
ACTION
Clean the discolored/faded trim panel as instructed in the Service Procedure.
NOTE:
This condition is not "dirt" on the trim panel surface. This condition exists within the panel itself.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You
MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 4341
Once you have set the target position, DO NOT reset it at anytime during the alignment process.
6. Begin the alignment procedure.
^ Follow all of the instructions for your particular equipment.
^ Refer to the Service Manual for alignment specifications.
If your equipment requires "rolling compensation". follow these additional tips:
^ DO NOT push or pull on the vehicle body.
IMPORTANT:
After performing "rolling compensation", DO NOT reset the target position.
When performing "caster sweep". follow these tips:
Page 598
Hazard Warning Switch: Service and Repair
HAZARD SWITCH
Removal and Installation
Removal 1. Remove cluster lid C. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Cluster LID D/Removal And Installation.
2. While pressing the tab, push out the hazard switch.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 4198
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) -
SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag
modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS components.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS components. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 3065
Page 3057
31. Select Diagnosis
32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%.
When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of
the screen will light (become enabled).
33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon.
Automatic Air Conditioner
Control Assembly: Description and Operation Automatic Air Conditioner
Control System Diagram
AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
Control System Diagram
CONTROL SYSTEM The control system consists of input sensors, switches, the front air control
(microcomputer) and outputs. The relationship of these components is shown in the figure below:
Control System Description
AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
Control System Description
CONTROL OPERATION Front air control
Page 188
Locations
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Locations
Tow Truck Towing
Towing Information: Service and Repair Tow Truck Towing
TOW TRUCK TOWING
Tow Truck Towing
WARNING: Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. Always use safety stands to
support the frame when you have to get under the vehicle.
- Place wheel chocks at both front and back of the wheels on the ground.
CAUTION: All applicable State or Provincial (in Canada) laws and local laws regarding the towing operation
must be obeyed.
- It is necessary to use proper towing equipment to avoid possible damage during towing operation.
Towing is in accordance with Towing Procedure Manual at dealer. Always attach safety chains before towing.
- When towing, make sure that the transmission, steering system and power train are in good
order. If any unit is damaged, dollies must be used.
- Never tow an automatic transmission model from the rear
(i.e., backward) with four wheels on the ground as this may cause serious and expensive damage
to the transmission.
4WD MODEL
NISSAN does not recommend towing automatic transmission equipped vehicles with the drive
wheels on the ground.
CAUTION: Never tow 4WD models with any of the tires on the ground as this may cause serious and
expensive damage to the transfer case and transmission.
Page 249
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Connect C-III to the vehicle to begin the reprogramming procedure.
^ If you are not familiar with the reprogramming procedure. Refer to "CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM
Reprogramming" general procedure.
Caution
2. When you get to the ECM Reprogramming screen shown in Figure 1, confirm this bulletin
applies as follows:
A. On your C-III screen, look at the Part Number column (see Figure 1).
Exploded View
Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Exploded View
AIR CLEANER FILTER
Exploded View
Page 1680
A/T - Special A/T Fluid Requirements
Fluid - CVT: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Special A/T Fluid Requirements
Classification: AT07-006B
Reference: NTB08-049B
Date: March 13, 2009
NISSAN; SPECIAL AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID REQUIREMENT
This bulletin has been amended to update Parts Information and Applied Vehicles. Please discard
all earlier versions.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2002 to Current Vehicles with Automatic Transmissions (Except GT-R)
SERVICE INFORMATION
If Warranty repairs are being done on a transmission listed in the chart shown in Parts Information,
the listed fluid must be used. A claim to Nissan for warranty, service contract, or goodwill repairs to
the transmissions listed below may be denied if Genuine Nissan ATF/CVT/eCVT Fluid is not used
as specified by the part number in this bulletin.
If Customer Pay service or repair of the transmissions listed below is done, the fluid type listed in
the chart shown in the Parts Information must be used. Nissan recommends the Genuine Nissan
ATF/CVT/eCVT fluid part number listed in Parts Information be used.
PARTS INFORMATION
Antitheft System - NATS Security VBC Logic
Body Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Antitheft System - NATS Security VBC Logic
Classification: EL10-028
Reference: NTB10-106
Date: September 10, 2010
NATS SECURITY - VBC LOGIC
APPLIED VEHICLE: 2009 - 2011 All Nissan with NATS / Immobilizer System
SERVICE INFORMATION
All model year 2009 - 2011 Nissan vehicles equipped with NATS/Immobilizer system have the new
VBC (Validate Before Crank) starter relay logic.
VBC (Validate Before Crank) Logic:
^ The BCM will make sure that a valid (registered) key is being used before engaging the starter
relay. If the key is not authenticated the starter will not
operate.
^ If the engine cranks, the issue is not related to NATS. Do not replace NATS components (BCM,
I-Key, FOB Reader or RF Receiver). Refer to ASIST
for further diagnostic information as needed.
ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information
Electronic Brake Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic
Information
Classification: BR10-011
Reference: NTB10-145
Date: December 15, 2010
ABS / VDC CAN DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION
APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2005-2011 Nissan vehicles with ABS and/or VDC
SERVICE INFORMATION
When diagnosing a vehicle with an ABS or VDC / SLIP warning light on with DTCs stored in the
ABS / VDC actuator control unit, perform DTC diagnosis first.
^ Do not replace the ABS / VDC actuator control unit without being supported by the DTC
diagnosis.
^ Do not erase DTCs before performing DTC diagnosis.
^ Always fully diagnose before performing any repairs.
When DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) is the only DTC stored in the ABS / VDC actuator
control unit, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART below. This will assist in proper diagnosis results and
repairs in addition to using diagnostic information in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM).
^ If DTC U1000 is found stored in other systems, refer to NIB10-066 and the applicable ESM.
^ If other DTCs are found stored in ABS / VDC along with U1000, follow the diagnosis steps for
those DTCs in the applicable ESM.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for
repairs performed.
Page 3332
Axle Shaft Assembly: Specifications Drive Shaft
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Drive Shaft
Page 2356
Tests and General Diagnostics/Power Supply And Ground Circuit. Is the inspection result normal?
YES (Present error) - Replace the BCM. Refer to See: Body Control Module/Service and Repair.
YES (Past error) - Error was detected in the BCM branch line. NO - Repair the power supply and
the ground circuit.
IPDM-E Branch Line Circuit
IPDM-E BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 3. Check the terminals and connectors of
the IPDM E/R for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and connector side). Is the
inspection result normal? YES - GO TO 2. NO - Repair the terminal and connector. 2. CHECK
HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. Disconnect the connector of IPDM E/R. 2. Check the
resistance between the IPDM E/R harness connector terminals.
Is the measurement value within the specification? YES - GO TO 3. NO - Repair the IPDM E/R
branch line. 3. CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check the power supply and
the ground circuit of the IPDM E/R. Refer to See: Power and Ground Distribution/Power
Distribution Module/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics. Is the
inspection result normal? YES (Present error) - Replace the IPDM E/R. Refer to See: Power and
Ground Distribution/Power Distribution Module/Service and Repair. YES (Past error) - Error was
detected in the IPDM E/R branch line. NO - Repair the power supply and the ground circuit.
M&A; Branch Line Circuit
M&A; BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 3. Check the terminals and connectors of
the combination meter for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and connector side). Is
the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO 2. NO - Repair the terminal and connector. 2. CHECK
HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. Disconnect the connector of combination meter. 2. Check the
resistance between the combination meter harness connector terminals.
Is the measurement value within the specification? YES - GO TO 3. NO - Repair the combination
meter branch line.
Locations
Page 4111
CONSULT-III Checking System
CONSULT-III CHECKING SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram
Body - Power Window 'Auto Up' Feature Inoperative
Front Door Window Motor: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Power Window 'Auto Up' Feature
Inoperative
Classification: EL09-033A
Reference: NTB09-095A
Date: May 5, 2010
POWER WINDOW "AUTO UP" INITIALIZATION
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles have been revised. No other changes have
been made. Please discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007-2009 350Z Coupe & Roadster (Z33) 2007-2009 Armada (TA60)
2007-2008 Maxima (A34) 2007 Murano (Z50) 2007-2009 Pathfinder (R51) 2007-2009 Quest (V42)
2007-2009 Titan (A60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
A power window "Auto Up" will not work.
ACTION
Reset the limit switch.
1. Raise the door glass to the top position.
2. While pressing and holding the reset switch, lower the door glass to the bottom position.
3. Release the reset switch.
4. Verify that the reset switch returns to the original position, and then raises the door glass to the
top position.
NOTES:
> If the window is still not operating correctly, refer to ASIST and the Service Manual for further
diagnosis and repair information.
> The above initialization procedure must be performed if any of the following occur:
> Battery cable is disconnected.
> Power window switch connector is disconnected.
> Power window regulator is replaced.
> Power window motor is replaced.
> Window glass is removed.
Page 1646
- Tighten the exhaust manifold nuts LH and RH in the numerical order shown. Then recheck the
torque of the nuts.
- A: Exhaust manifold LH - B: Exhaust manifold RH - White Arrow indicates Front Before installing new air fuel ratio A/F sensors, clean the exhaust system threads using suitable
tool and apply anti-seize lubricant.
CAUTION: Do not over tighten the air fuel ratio A/F sensors. Doing so may cause damage to the sensor,
resulting in the MIL coming on.
Page 5738
Odometer: Description and Operation Component Description
METER SYSTEM
ODO/TRIP METER : Component Description
Page 5587
Page 3052
18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM.
The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to
use.
19. Select Next
NOTE:
If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with
Reprogramming.
Page 2318
4. Search for the possible cause using CAN communication signal chart using information from the
interview with the customer.
NOTE: For the details of CAN communication signal, refer to See: Application and ID/CAN
Communication Signal Chart.
a. ABS warning lamp turned ON and speedometer did not move: This means that "ABS warning
lamp signal" and "Vehicle speed signal" could
not communicate between M&A; and ABS (4-a in the figure below).
b. The tachometer moved normally: This means that "Engine speed signal" could communicate
normally between ECM and M&A; (4-b in the
figure below).
Page 1811
8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.)
9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.)
10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2).
12. Select Select.
Page 3393
REMOVAL 1. Move the A/T select lever to the N position and release the parking brake.
2. Put matching marks on the rear propeller shaft flange yoke and the companion flange of the rear
final drive as shown.
CAUTION: For matching marks, use paint. Never damage the rear propeller shaft flange yoke or
the companion flange.
3. Remove the center support bearing bracket nuts, and remove the propeller shaft from the rear
final drive.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Inspect the propeller shaft runout. If runout exceeds the limit, replace the propeller shaft assembly.
Refer to See: Specifications/Propeller Shaft
A/C - Blower Motor Intermittently Sticks On High
Blower Motor: Customer Interest A/C - Blower Motor Intermittently Sticks On High
Classification: HA08-006A
Reference: NTB09-011A
Date: March 10, 2010
BLOWER FAN INTERMITTENTLY STUCK ON HIGH SPEED
This bulletin has been amended. The Claims Information has been updated. Please discard all
earlier versions.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2008 - 2009 Titan (A60) 2008 - 2009 Armada (TA60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
HVAC blower fan stays on high speed when the blower fan switch is on LOW for up to 60 seconds
and then returns to normal operation.
While operating with this condition the blower speed cannot be changed, but it can be turned off.
This condition may be intermittent.
AND
The heater switch resistor is 3 FIN type in the front heater unit.
ACTION
Replace the 3 FIN heater switch resistor in front heater unit with a 5 FIN heater switch resistor, the
part number is listed in the Parts Information table.
NOTE:
Do not change the rear heater switch resistor from 3 FIN to 5 FIN.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing the repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Page 5159
Page 976
Brake Fluid: Removal and Replacement
BRAKE FLUID
Drain and Refill
CAUTION: Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications.
- Do not reuse drained brake fluid.
- Do not let brake fluid splash on the painted surfaces of the body. This might damage the paint, so
if splashing it, immediately wipe off the area and wash away with water.
- Before servicing, disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector or battery
negative terminal.
1. Connect a vinyl tube to each bleed valve.
2. Depress brake pedal, loosen each bleed valve, and gradually remove brake fluid. 3. Make sure
there is no foreign material in reservoir tank, and refill with new brake fluid.
4. Rest foot on brake pedal. Loosen bleed valve. Slowly depress pedal until it stops. Tighten bleed
valve. Release brake pedal. Repeat this process a few times, then pause to add new brake fluid to
master cylinder. Continue until new brake fluid flows out of the bleed valve. Bleed the air out of the
brake hydraulic system. Refer to See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair.
Page 3642
Page 1566
engine removal or repair.
- The radiator must be completely empty of coolant and water.
- Apply sealant to the threads of the cylinder block drain plug. Use Genuine High Performance
Thread Sealant or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications.
2. Set the vehicle heater controls to the full HOT and heater ON position. Turn the vehicle ignition
ON with the engine OFF as necessary to activate
the heater mode.
3. Remove the vented reservoir cap and replace it with a non-vented reservoir cap before filling the
cooling system. 4. Install the Tool by installing the radiator cap adapter onto the radiator neck
opening. Then attach the gauge body assembly with the refill tube and
the venturi assembly to the radiator cap adapter.
Tool number : KV991J0070 (J-45695)
5. Insert the refill hose into the coolant mixture container that is placed at floor level. Make sure the
ball valve is in the closed position. Use Genuine NISSAN Long Life Anti-freeze coolant or equivalent, mixed 50/50 with distilled water
or demineralized water. Refer to See: Maintenance.
Cooling system capacity (with reservoir) : Refer to See: Maintenance.
6. Install an air hose to the venturi assembly, the air pressure must be within specification.
Compressed air supply pressure : 5.7 - 8.5 kPa (5.6 - 8.4 kg/cm2, 80 - 120 psi)
CAUTION: The compressed air supply must be equipped with an air dryer. 7. The vacuum gauge
will begin to rise and there will be an audible hissing noise. During this process open the ball valve
on the refill hose slightly.
Coolant will be visible rising in the refill hose. Once the refill hose is full of coolant, close the ball
valve. This will purge any air trapped in the refill hose.
Page 1831
C. Scroll down and select [VIN REGISTRATION] on the "Select Work Item" screen. See Figure 10.
d. Press [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 11.
e. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 12.
Page 1471
12. Remove chain tensioner cover using Tool (if necessary).
Tool number: KVIOIIIIOO (J-37228)
INSTALLATION
1. Install the front oil seal using suitable tool.
CAUTION: Do not scratch or make burrs on the circumference of the oil seal.
2. Install the chain tensioner cover (if removed).
- Apply liquid gasket as shown.
Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent.
3. Install the front cover as follows:
a. Install a new O-ring on the cylinder block.
b. Apply liquid gasket as shown.
Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent.
Page 2476
27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example).
28. Select Select
29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example).
30. Select Confirm
Diagram Information and Instructions
Garage Door Opener Transmitter: Diagram Information and Instructions
Connector Symbols
HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS
Connector symbols
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the
direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector.
For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements,
"Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals
Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring
diagrams.
Sample/Wiring Diagram -Example-
Locations
Navigation Module: Locations
Locations
Page 4083
Terminal Layout
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Terminal Layout
TERMINAL LAYOUT
Page 1117
2. Mount transmitter on rim and slowly tighten transmitter nut to specification.
CAUTION: Do not over tighten transmitter nut.
Transmitter nut : 7.7 N.m (0.79 kg-m, 68 in-lb)
3. Place wheel on turntable of tire machine. Ensure that transmitter is 270 degrees from
mounting/dismounting head.
NOTE: Do not touch transmitter with mounting head. 4. Lubricate tire well, and install second side
of tire as normal. Ensure that tire does not rotate relative to rim. 5. Inflate tire and balance wheel
and tire assembly. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Balancing Wheels. 6. Install wheel and tire
assembly in appropriate wheel position on vehicle.
NOTE: If replacing the transmitter, then transmitter wake up operation must be performed. Refer to
See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmitter Wake Up Operation.
7. Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction
Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing
and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing Control
Unit/Description See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing
Control Unit/Special Repair Requirement See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes /
Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Adjustment Of
Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position/Description See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock
Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Adjustment Of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position/Special Repair Requirement.
Page 1782
Page 997
Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications
Automatic Transmission Fluid Type
Type .....................................................................................................................................................
.............................. Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF*
* If Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF is not available, NISSAN Matic J ATF may also be used. Using
automatic transmission fluid other than NISSAN
Matic S ATF or Matic J ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission
durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not covered by the NISSAN new
vehicle limited warranty.
Page 878
Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Removal And Installation
AIR CLEANER FILTER
Removal and Installation (Viscous paper type)
REMOVAL
NOTE: The viscous paper type filter does not need cleaning between replacement intervals.
- Replace the air filter as necessary for periodic maintenance. Refer to See: .
1. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. 2. Remove the air cleaner case (upper). 3.
Remove the air cleaner filter from the air cleaner case (lower).
INSTALLATION 1. Install the new air cleaner filter in the air cleaner case (lower). 2. Install the air
cleaner case (upper). 3. Install the air duct and resonator assembly (inlet).
Page 619
Exploded View
Thermostat: Service and Repair Exploded View
THERMOSTAT AND WATER PIPING
Exploded View
Page 6188
- Check that the glass is securely fit into the glass run groove.
- Lower the glass slightly [approximately 10 to 20 mm (0.39 to 0.79 in)] and check that the
clearance to the sash is parallel. If the clearance between the glass and sash is not parallel, loosen
the regulator bolts, guide rail bolts, and glass and guide rail bolts to correct the glass position.
FRONT DOOR GLASS REGULATOR ASSEMBLY
Removal 1. Remove the front door speaker. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional
Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Speaker/Service and
Repair/MID Audio/Front Door Speaker.
2. Remove the hole cover over rear glass bolt. 3. Operate the power window main switch to
raise/lower the door window until the glass bolts can be seen. 4. Remove the inside seal. 5.
Remove the glass bolts. 6. Raise the front door glass and hold it in place with suitable tool. 7.
Disconnect the harness connector from the regulator assembly. 8. Remove the bolts and the
regulator assembly.
Disassembly And Assembly Remove the regulator motor from the regulator assembly.
Inspection After Removal Check the regulator assembly for the following items. If a malfunction is
detected, replace or grease it.
- Wire wear
- Regulator deformation
- Grease condition for each sliding part
The arrows in the figure show the application points of the body grease.
Installation 1. Install the regulator assembly.
Front door glass regulator assembly nuts and bolt : 7.5 N.m (0.77 kg-m, 66 in-lb)
2. Connect the harness connector to the regulator assembly. 3. Align the glass and install the glass
bolts.
Glass bolts : 6.1 N.m (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb)
4. Reset the limit switch. 5. Install front door speaker. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional
Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Speaker/Service and Repair/MID
Audio/Front Door Speaker.
SETTING OF LIMIT SWITCH AFTER INSTALLATION
Setting of Limit Switch If any of the following work has been done, set the limit switch (integrated in
the motor). Removal and installation of the regulator.
- Removal and installation of the motor from the regulator.
- Removal and installation of the glass.
- Removal and installation of the glass run.
Resetting After installing each component, perform the following procedure to reset the limit switch.
Page 1161
Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair 2-Pole Lift
LIFTING POINT
2-Pole Lift
WARNING:
When lifting the vehicle, open the lift arms as wide as possible and ensure that the front and rear of
the vehicle are well balanced.
When setting the lift arm, do not allow the arm to contact the brake tubes, brake cable, or fuel lines.
Page 459
Yaw Rate Sensor: Service and Repair
G SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. If equipped, remove center console. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding
/ Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Center Console.
2. If equipped, remove the front center seat. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Seat/Removal
and Installation.
3. Remove yaw rate/side/decel G sensor nuts.
CAUTION: Do not use power tools to remove the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor.
- Do not drop or strike the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor.
4. Disconnect harness connector and remove the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Do not drop or strike the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor.
- After installation, calibrate the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction
Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Inspection And Adjustment/Description See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock
Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Inspection
And Adjustment/Special Repair Requirement.
Page 3960
Battery: Removal and Replacement
BATTERY
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal (1) and positive battery terminal (2).
Arrow Indicates : Front
CAUTION: Remove negative battery terminal first.
2. Remove the battery cover. 3. Remove the battery clamp bolt (3) and battery clamp. 4. Remove
the battery.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: When installing, install the positive battery terminal first.
Reset electronic systems as necessary. Refer to See: Procedures/Special Repair Requirement.
Page 2547
f. Enter the entire VIN using the keyboard. See Figure 13.
^ Use [CHNG] to switch between the letters and numbers keyboard screens.
g. Once the entire VIN is entered, select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 14.
h. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen and enter the entire VIN again. See Figure 15.
^ You MUST enter the VIN a second time for confirmation purposes.
Page 2765
Use mirrors for checking on hidden points.
Page 234
d. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds, then
e. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" again for 10 seconds (see Figure 2).
f. Proceed with step 6.
Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL)
NOTE:
Make sure all electrical loads are turned OFF, including A/C, defroster, radio, lights, etc. while
performing the following procedures. Also, make sure the engine cooling fans are NOT operating
during the following procedures.
6. Perform the Idle Air Volume Learning procedure as follows:
a. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle.
b. Warm up engine and transmission to operating temperature.
c. In the [CONSULT WORK SUPPORT] mode, select [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. See Figure 3.
NOTE:
^ If IDLE AIR VOL LEARN is not shown as a SELECT WORK ITEM on CONSULT, the vehicle
does not need the procedure.
^ In this case only, this bulletin is complete, no further action is needed.
Page 837
^ Make sure the rear slide plates:
> Do not wobble (no up/down movement).
> Operate (slide) smoothly in all directions.
If there is any issue with the slide plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing
any alignments.
5. Make sure the lock pins for the front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates" are in place.
NOTE:
Lock pins should remain in place until caster sweep.
The Alignment Process
The Alignment Process
IMPORTANT:
Use only the alignment specifications listed in the appropriate Service Manual when adjusting the
alignment.
1. Make sure the vehicle is straight on the alignment rack.
^ Vehicle must be straight (in line) with the alignment rack before entering the rack as shown in
Figure 4.
^ Do not straighten the vehicle while on the rack (see Figure 5).
^ If the vehicle needs to be straightened, exit the alignment rack, straighten the vehicle and then
re-enter the rack.
^ Once the vehicle is straight on the rack, do not turn/center the steering wheel-keep the front
wheels straight.
Page 2444
Page 160
Page 5365
REMOVAL
CAUTION: Disconnect both terminals from battery in advance. 1. Remove the body side trim. Refer
to See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the rear trim. Refer to See: Trim Panel/Service
and Repair. 3. Remove the sun visor assemblies. 4. Remove the sun visor holders. 5. Remove the
front roof console (if equipped). Disconnect the harnesses.
6. Remove the rear roof console (if equipped). Disconnect the harnesses.
7. Remove the center roof console (if equipped). Disconnect the harnesses.
8. Remove the assist grips. 9. Remove the striker covers (if equipped).
10. Remove the room lamp.
Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information
Wheels: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information
Classification: WT11-003
Reference: NTB11-029
Date: March 21, 2011
TIRE MOUNTING INFORMATION
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan
SERVICE INFORMATION
^ When mounting tires to wheels, it is important that the tire bead is seated correctly.
^ A tire bead that is not seated correctly may cause a vehicle vibration.
^ High performance tires and tires with shorter sidewalls (low aspect tires) may require more care
to make sure the tire bead is seated correctly.
^ Follow the Tire Mounting Tips in this bulletin.
Tire Mounting Tips:
NOTE:
These tips are not intended to be a complete instruction for mounting tires to wheels. Make sure to
read and follow the instruction for your specific tire service equipment
1. Clean the tire bead with an approved rubber cleaning fluid.
^ Rubber cleaning fluid is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process.
2. Clean the wheel (flange and bead seat area) see Figure 2 Make sure to clean off all rust and
corrosion.
System Diagram
Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation System Diagram
METER SYSTEM
A/T OIL TEMPERATURE GAUGE
A/T OIL TEMPERATURE GAUGE : System Diagram
Page 3965
Alternator: Service and Repair
GENERATOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Remove the fan shroud. Refer to See:
Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Radiator/Service and Repair/Removal and
Installation. 3. Remove the drive belt. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Drive
Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and
Repair.
4. Remove lower bracket, using power tools. 5. Remove the generator upper bolt, using power
tools. 6. Remove the generator harness terminal nut connectors. 7. Remove the generator.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Install the generator and check the tension of the drive belt. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Testing and Inspection.
CAUTION: Tighten terminal nut carefully.
Terminal nut : 10.8 N.m (1.1 kg-m, 8 ft-lb)
Page 47
Repair Flow Chart
Page 5478
9. Detach 2 harness clips as shown from seat cushion pan.
WARNING:
Before removal, make careful note of the exact routing and clip placement of the harnesses for
reassembly.
Page 5939
Should a customer note water in a lamp assembly, please use the above flow chart to determine if
the condition is normal or requires lamp replacement.
Page 2308
DETECT THE ROOT CAUSE Identify the root cause using the created diagnosis sheet.
Identifying the root cause Draw a line on the diagnosis sheet to indicate the possible cause. Narrow the search.
NOTE: -
Color-code when drawing lines.
- Do not draw a line onto a existing line.
- Drawing a line is not necessary if the circuit is shorted. Refer to "Present Error -- Short Circuit --",
"Past Error -- Short Circuit --". Refer to the following for details of the trouble diagnosis procedure.
- "Present Error -- Open Circuit --"
- "Present Error -- Short Circuit --"
- "Past Error -- Open Circuit --"
- "Past Error -- Short Circuit --"
NOTE: When the root cause appears to be a branch line or short circuit, be sure to check the
control unit as well as the communication line.
Present Error -- Open Circuit -- Identify the error circuit using information from the "CAN DIAG
SUPPORT MNTR" ("ECU list" included). 1. ECU list: Check the items indicated in "ECU list". Draw
a line on the diagnosis sheet to indicate the error circuit.
NOTE: CAN communication line has no error if units other than Diag on CAN units are not
indicated. An error may be on the power supply of the control unit, DDL1 line or DDL2 line.
a. "TCM" which is Diag on CAN unit, is not indicated on "ECU list". This indicates that DLC is not
receiving a signal from TCM. Draw a line to
Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-029 Date: 090421
Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming
Classification: EC09-007
Reference: NTB09-029
Date: April 21, 2009
CONSULT-III ECM REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE
APPLIED VEHICLES: All CONSULT-III (C-III) compatible Nissan vehicles
SERVICE INFORMATION
A complete step-by-step General Procedure for C-III ECM Reprogramming is now available in the
on-line version of this bulletin.
This General Procedure is also available via hyperlink from specific C-III symptom-based Technical
Service Bulletins in ASIST.
CAUTION
Part 1
Updated March 25, 2009
CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM REPROGRAMMING
A symptom based TSB is required before using this procedure.
IMPORTANT: Before starting, make sure:
^ ASIST on the C-III computer has been freshly synchronized (updated).
^ All C-III software updates (if any) have been installed.
NOTE:
The C-III computer automatically gets applicable ECM reprogramming data during ASIST
synchronization.
Page 2248
Page 2184
Page 2118
Lighting - Exterior Lamp Fogging Inspection
Turn Signal Lamp: Customer Interest Lighting - Exterior Lamp Fogging Inspection
Classification: EL03-030E
Reference: NTB03-074E
Date: January 4, 2010
EXTERIOR LAMP FOGGING
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles and Service Procedure sections have been
revised. Please discard all previous versions.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2001-2010 Nissan, All Models
SERVICE INFORMATION
Occasionally customers may notice water vapor or fog in the exterior lamps. This is generally NOT
due to a defect.
The following information, illustrations, and flow chart are provided to help you in determining if an
incident for water/condensation in the lamps is normal or not.
All current exterior lamp assemblies are vented to the atmosphere (not sealed).
^ This is necessary to allow for expansion and contraction of air from temperature "variations"
(warmer or colder) without damage to the lamp.
^ Moisture in the air sometimes "travels" into and out of the lamp assembly through these vents.
^ Certain environmental conditions may cause moisture to condense.
^ The fogging/cloudiness should disappear over time when the lamp is in a dry environment.
Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the exterior lights based on environmental conditions
or sudden temperature changes (such as in a car wash). This is normal. See Figure 1.
NOTE:
This condensation can appear anywhere on the outer lens, typically at its coldest location.
Page 989
8. Continue to draw the vacuum until the gauge reaches 28 inches of vacuum. The gauge may not
reach 28 inches in high altitude locations, refer to
the vacuum specifications based on the altitude above sea level.
9. When the vacuum gauge has reached the specified amount, disconnect the air hose and wait 20
seconds to see if the system loses any vacuum. If
the vacuum level drops, perform any necessary repairs to the system and repeat steps 6 - 8 to
bring the vacuum to the specified amount. Recheck for any leaks.
10. Place the coolant container (with the refill hose inserted) at the same level as the top of the
radiator. Then open the ball valve on the refill hose so
the coolant will be drawn up to fill the cooling system. The cooling system is full when the vacuum
gauge reads zero.
CAUTION: Do not allow the coolant container to get too low when filling, to avoid air from being
drawn into the cooling system.
11. Remove the Tool from the radiator neck opening and install the radiator cap. 12. Remove the
non-vented reservoir cap. 13. Fill the cooling system reservoir tank to the specified level. Run the
engine to warm up the cooling system and top up the system as necessary
before installing the vented reservoir cap.
FLUSHING COOLING SYSTEM 1. Drain the water from the engine cooling system. Refer to
"Changing Engine Coolant". 2. Fill the radiator and the reservoir tank (to the "MAX" line), with
water. Reinstall the radiator cap and leave the vented reservoir cap off. 3. Run the engine until it
reaches normal operating temperature. 4. Press the engine accelerator two or three times under
no-load. 5. Stop the engine and wait until it cools down. 6. Drain the water from the engine cooling
system. Refer to "Changing Engine Coolant". 7. Repeat steps 2 through 6 until clear water begins
to drain from the radiator.
Intake Valve Timing Control Position Sensor (LH)
Variable Valve Timing Actuator Position Sensor: Service and Repair Intake Valve Timing Control
Position Sensor (LH)
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL
Intake Valve Timing Control Position Sensor (LH)
REMOVAL 1. Remove engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Engine Cover.
2. Remove air duct and resonator assembly. Refer to See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Air
Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair/Removal and
Installation.
3. Disconnect intake valve timing control position sensor connector (LH).
4. Remove intake valve timing control position sensor (LH) (1) from Intake valve timing control
solenoid valve cover (LH) (3).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Replace the O-ring (2) of the intake valve timing control position sensor with a new one,
then lubricate O-ring with engine oil before installing.
Intake valve timing control position sensor bolt : 9.6 N.m (0.98 kg-m, 85 in-lb)
Procedures
Brake Fluid: Procedures
BRAKE FLUID
On Board Inspection
LEVEL CHECK Make sure the fluid level in reservoir tank is between MAX and MIN lines as shown.
- Visually check around reservoir tank for fluid leaks.
- If fluid level is excessively low, check brake system for leaks.
- If brake warning lamp remains illuminated after parking brake pedal is released, check brake
system for fluid leaks.
Service and Repair
Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair
HYDRAULIC LINE
Removal and Installation
Refer to the following illustration for hydraulic line removal.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 2329
Diagnosis Sheet (CAN Type 6)
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
Diagnosis Sheet (CAN Type 6)
Page 4787
Expansion Valve: Service and Repair
EXPANSION VALVE
Removal and Installation for Expansion Valve
REMOVAL 1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Refrigeration System . 2.
Remove the evaporator. Refer to See: Evaporator Core/Service and Repair .
3. Remove the cooler grommet. 4. Remove the expansion valve.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Replace the O-rings on the A/C refrigerant pipes with new ones, then apply compressor oil to them
when installing them.
- After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
Page 5597
Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-037A Date: 100519
Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement
Reference: NTB10-037A
Date: May 19, 2010
VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2005 - 2009 ARMADA AND TITAN FUEL GAUGE
INACCURACY
This bulletin has been amended. Additions were made to the Parts Information. Please discard
previous versions of this bulletin.
CAMPAIGN ID #: R1010
NHTSA #: 10V-074
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2009 Armada (TA60) 2005 - 2009 Titan (A60)
Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility.
INTRODUCTION
Nissan is conducting a voluntary recall campaign on certain MY2005-2009 Armada and Titan
vehicles to address a potential fuel gauge inaccuracy. Specifically, the issue can cause the fuel
gauge to show that the vehicle still has some fuel, typically about one quarter tank, when the fuel
tank is actually empty. To remedy this potential condition, Nissan is conducting this Voluntary
Safety Recall Campaign to replace the fuel level sending unit with a new one at no charge for parts
or labor.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number R1010 to this campaign. This number must appear on
all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle
falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service
department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient
(tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in
dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to
do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While
federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used
vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed.
Page 1631
Water Pump: Service and Repair Removal And Installation
WATER PUMP
Removal and Installation
CAUTION: When removing water pump, be careful not to get engine coolant on drive belt.
- Water pump cannot be disassembled and should be replaced as a unit.
REMOVAL 1. Drain engine coolant so that no engine coolant comes out from water pump fitting
hole. Refer to See: Coolant/Service and Repair.
CAUTION: Perform when the engine is cold. 2. Remove the engine front undercover using power
tool. 3. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. Refer to See: Engine/Tune-up and Engine
Performance Checks/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and
Repair/Removal and Installation.
4. Remove the drive belt. Refer to See: Engine/Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and
Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair. 5. Remove the water pump pulley. 6. Remove the
water pump. Engine coolant will leak from the cylinder block, so have a receptacle ready below.
CAUTION: Handle water pump vane so that it does not contact any other parts.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Visually check that there is no significant dirt or rust on the water pump body and vane.
- Make sure there is no looseness in the vane shaft, and that it turns smoothly when rotated by
hand.
- Replace the water pump assembly, if necessary.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. -
After installation bleed the air from the cooling system. Refer to See: Coolant/Service and Repair.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Check for leaks of engine coolant. Refer to See: Coolant/Testing and Inspection.
- Start and warm up engine. Visually check for leaks of the engine coolant.
Page 4243
Service and Repair
Power Steering Bleeding: Service and Repair
POWER STEERING FLUID
Air Bleeding Hydraulic System
Incomplete air bleeding causes the following. When this happens, bleed air again. Air bubbles in reservoir tank.
- Clicking noise in oil pump.
- Excessive buzzing in oil pump.
NOTE: When vehicle is stationary or while steering wheel is being turned slowly, some noise may
be heard from oil pump or gear. This noise is normal and does not affect any system. 1. Stop
engine, and then turn steering wheel fully to right and left several times.
CAUTION: Do not allow steering fluid reservoir tank to go below the MIN level line. Check tank
frequently and add fluid as needed. 2. Run engine at idle speed. Turn steering wheel fully right and
then fully left, hold for about three seconds. Then check for fluid leakage. 3. Repeat step 2 several
times at about three second intervals.
CAUTION: Do not hold steering wheel in the locked position for more than 10 seconds. (There is
the possibility that oil pump may be damaged.) 4. Check for air bubbles or cloudy fluid. 5. If air
bubbles or cloudiness still exists, stop engine, perform steps 2 and 3 again until air bubbles or
cloudiness does not exist. 6. Stop engine, check fluid level.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Power Distribution Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
Connector Symbols
HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS
Connector symbols
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the
direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector.
For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements,
"Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals
Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring
diagrams.
Sample/Wiring Diagram -Example-
Page 3093
Page 1349
Specifications
Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Specifications
Crankshaft Pulley
Page 608
4. Disconnect the adjustable pedal electric motor electrical connector. 5. Disconnect the adjustable
pedal electric motor memory electrical connector, if equipped. 6. Disconnect the accelerator
position sensor electrical connector. 7. Remove the two upper and one lower accelerator pedal
nuts. 8. Remove the adjustable accelerator pedal assembly.
CAUTION: Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly.
- Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket.
- Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal adjusting mechanism.
- Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling.
- Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Inspection After Installation Check that the accelerator pedal moves smoothly within the specified ranges.
- Depress and release the accelerator pedal to check that it returns smoothly to the original
released position.
- Perform an electrical inspection of the accelerator pedal position sensor. Refer to See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/VIN Registration See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released
Position Learning See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning See: Powertrain
Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning
.
CAUTION: When the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor is disconnected,
perform "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning.
NON-ADJUSTABLE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY Non-Adjustable Accelerator Pedal
Locations
Page 1710
Front Power Socket RH (For Cigarette Lighter), Console
Power Socket, Front Power Socket (Center Arm Rest)
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair Front Power Socket RH (For Cigarette Lighter),
Console Power Socket, Front Power Socket (Center Arm Rest)
POWER SOCKET
Front Power Socket RH (For Cigarette Lighter), Console Power Socket, Front Power Socket
(Center Arm Rest)
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal 1. Remove inner socket (1) from the ring (2) while pressing the hook (B) on the ring out
from square hole (A).
2. Disconnect power socket connector. 3. Remove ring from power socket finisher while pressing
pawls.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Align notches of inner socket and ring, and socket finisher when installing.
Page 2800
f. Use the new tie-wrap to secure all the wires to the black corrugated tubing (see Figure 6).
^ New tie-wrap is included with the new sender unit.
^ Make sure all wires are tied together (3 fuel level sending unit wires and 2 fuel pump wires).
^ Place the Tie-Wrap 90 mm (about 3.5 inches) from the top of the tubing.
^ Make sure the wires do not interfere with the movement of the float arm.
4. Carefully reinstall the Fuel Pump Assembly back into the vehicle in reverse of removal.
^ IMPORTANT: Use a new seal (O-Ring) when reinstalling the Fuel Pump Assembly.
^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed.
CAUTION:
DO NOT bend the Float Arm when reinstalling the Fuel Pump.
5. Confirm the Fuel Gauge operates properly.
Automatic Drive Positioner Control Unit
Memory Positioning Module: Service and Repair Automatic Drive Positioner Control Unit
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER CONTROL UNIT
Removal and Installation
CAUTION: When removing and installing, use shop cloths to protect parts from damage.
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the instrument driver lower
panel. Refer to See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Instrument Lower Panel LH.
3. Remove the screw from the automatic drive positioner control unit (1). 4. Remove automatic
drive positioner control unit (1) from bracket and disconnect electrical connectors.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Clamp the harness in position.
NOTE: After installing the automatic drive positioner control unit, perform additional service when
disconnecting battery negative terminal. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning.
Page 5454
7. Using a plastic pry tool, remove the switch knobs and switch plate.
8. Remove the four bolts securing the seat pan to the frame. See Figure 3.
Page 3483
8. Remove side bearing caps. 9. Loosen the side bearing adjusters using Tool.
Tool number : - (C - 4164)
10. Keep side bearing outer races together with inner races. Do not mix them up. Also, keep side
bearing adjusters together with bearing.
11. Remove side bearing adjusters from gear carrier. 12. Remove bracket for the differential lock
position switch connector and bolts.
13. Remove differential lock position switch.
INSTALLATION 1. Apply sealant to threads of differential lock position switch. Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications.
CAUTION: Remove old sealant adhering to gear carrier and differential lock position switch. Also
remove any moisture, oil, or foreign material adhering to application and gear carrier and
differential lock position switch.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Power Distribution Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
Connector Symbols
HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS
Connector symbols
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the
direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector.
For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements,
"Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals
Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring
diagrams.
Sample/Wiring Diagram -Example-
Page 4683
MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. -
The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Abbreviation List
ABBREVIATIONS
Abbreviation List
The following ABBREVIATIONS are used:
Page 2986
8. Remove side bearing caps. 9. Loosen the side bearing adjusters using Tool.
Tool number : - (C - 4164)
10. Keep side bearing outer races together with inner races. Do not mix them up. Also, keep side
bearing adjusters together with bearing.
11. Remove side bearing adjusters from gear carrier. 12. Remove bracket for the differential lock
position switch connector and bolts.
13. Remove differential lock position switch.
INSTALLATION 1. Apply sealant to threads of differential lock position switch. Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications.
CAUTION: Remove old sealant adhering to gear carrier and differential lock position switch. Also
remove any moisture, oil, or foreign material adhering to application and gear carrier and
differential lock position switch.
Page 4069
Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation Signal Buffer System
System Diagram
SIGNAL BUFFER SYSTEM
System Diagram
System Description
SIGNAL BUFFER SYSTEM
System Description
IPDM E/R reads the status of the oil pressure switch and transmits the oil pressure switch signal to
BCM via CAN communication. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Information Bus/Description and Operation/CAN Communication System/System
Description.
Page 1618
Thermostat: Service and Repair Removal And Installation
THERMOSTAT AND WATER PIPING
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
Removal of Thermostat 1. Drain engine coolant from the radiator. Refer to See: Coolant/Service
and Repair.
CAUTION: Perform when engine is cold. 2. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. Refer to
See: Engine/Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and
Repair/Removal and Installation.
3. Remove the engine room cover using power tools. 4. Disconnect the water suction hose from
the water inlet. 5. Remove the water inlet and thermostat.
Removal of Thermostat Housing, Water Outlet and Heater Pipe 1. Remove the intake manifold.
Refer to See: Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. 2. Remove the
thermostat housing, water outlet and heater pipe.
Removal of Water Cut Valve 1. Drain the engine coolant from the radiator. Refer to See:
Coolant/Service and Repair.
CAUTION: Perform when the engine is cold. 2. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. Refer
to See: Engine/Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and
Repair/Removal and Installation.
3. Remove the engine room cover using power tool. 4. Disconnect the heater hose (heater core
side). 5. Remove the heater hose bracket. 6. Disconnect the water cut valve connector. 7. Remove
the water cut valve.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Place a thread so that it is caught in the valve of the thermostat.
Immerse fully in a container filled with water. Heat while stirring. The valve opening temperature is the temperature at which the valve opens and falls from the
thread.
- Continue heating. Check the full-open lift amount.
- After checking the full-open lift amount, lower the water temperature and check the valve closing
temperature.
INSTALLATION
Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures
Technical Service Bulletin # 00-052C Date: 040416
Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures
Classification: EC00-007C
Reference: NTB00-052C
Date: April 16, 2004
ECM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES
ATTENTION:
THIS BULLETIN HAS BEEN REVISED.
^ The Service Procedures for replacing an ECM on an Applied vehicle were revised.
^ Please use this bulletin NTB00-052c for complete information.
^ Discard all previously distributed copies of NTB00-052.
APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All 2000 and later 1999 Frontier (D22) 1999 Quest (V41) 1999 Pathfinder
(R50) from VIN JN8AR07**XW350101
IF YOU CONFIRM:
The Electronic Control Module (ECM) needs to be replaced on a 2000 MY and later vehicle, or an
Applied 1999 MY vehicle (see above).
ACTIONS:
^ Re-register all customer keys if the vehicle has ECM based NATS (see step 1).
^ Check ASIST for any new updates for the new ECM you're installing (see steps 2 - 4).
^ Perform the "ACCELERATOR PEDAL & THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING"
procedure (see step 5).
^ After installing the new ECM, perform the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARNING" procedure (when
applicable) using CONSULT-II. See step 6.
^ For 2005 and later vehicles, enter the vehicle VIN into the new ECM (see step 7).
CAUTION:
Failure to perform all the work steps in the specified order can cause poor engine running, MIL
'ON', or vehicle emission test rejection.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
Page 4189
Fuse Block: Diagrams Fuse, Fusible Link And Relay Box
FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX
Terminal Arrangement
FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK BOX
FUSE AND RELAY BOX
DVD Player
Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions
Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions
Classification: WT10-005
Reference: NTB10-114
Date: September 27, 2010
INFLATING TIRES EQUIPPED WITH TPMS
APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan with Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
SERVICE INFORMATION
Improper use of tire inflator tools can break the stem of a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensor.
NOTE:
The type of stem breakage shown in Figure 1 is not considered a warrantable repair.
Please refer to the following examples of recommended and not recommended tire pressure filling
tools.
Not Recommended tire inflator tools.
Page 4161
HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS
Sample/wiring diagram -example- For detail, refer to following See: How To Read Wiring Diagrams/Description.
Description
HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS
Description
Page 1239
Locations
Page 3236
A/T FLUID COOLER FINAL INSPECTION After performing all procedures, ensure that all
remaining oil is cleaned from all components.
Page 5110
Removal 1. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and
Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair -
Crew Cab or See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door
Panel/Service and Repair - King Cab.
2. Remove the three rear door speaker screws and remove the rear door speaker.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
REAR DOOR TWEETER
Removal 1. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and
Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair Crew Cab.
2. Remove the rear door tweeter screws and remove the rear door tweeter. 3. Disconnect the rear
door tweeter connector.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 1460
Timing Cover: Specifications
Timing Cover
Page 176
^ If this column is blank (no part number listed), this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to
ASIST for further diagnostic information.
^ If a Part Number is listed, write it on the Repair Order.
B. Compare the Part Number you wrote down to the numbers in the Current ECM P/N column in
Table A or B (as it applies) shown at the beginning of this bulletin.
^ If there is a match, this bulletin applies. Continue with the reprogramming procedure.
^ If there is not a match, this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to ASIST for further
diagnostic information.
3. If this bulletin applies and you have performed ECM reprogramming, the screen in Figure 2
appears when reprogramming is complete.
NOTE:
If the screen in Figure 2 does not display (reprogramming does not complete).
4. Make sure to erase DTCs from all Systems.
NOTE:
During the reprogramming, DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all
systems.
5. Test drive the vehicle and make sure it operates correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF.
^ If the Check Engine light comes ON, go back to ASIST for further diagnostic information. Refer to
the applicable Electronic Service Manual as
needed.
^ Diagnosis and repairs beyond the ECM reprogramming are not covered by this bulletin.
Page 2126
Page 2899
CONSULT-III Checking System
CONSULT-III CHECKING SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram
Page 675
Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning .
Page 3406
Drive/Propeller Shaft: Tools and Equipment Propeller Shaft 3S1410
PREPARATION
Commercial Service Tool
Page 644
13. Use compressed air to remove any remaining debris.
CAUTION:
DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may
cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders.
14. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it.
15. Tilt the manifold/catalyst/front tube so that the metal debris falls out of the part.
16. Apply compressed air through the boss to blow out any remaining debris.
CAUTION:
DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may
cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders.
17. Install the new sensor as described in the applicable Electronic Service Manual (ESM).
Locations
Page 3377
Page 2314
Present Error -- Short Circuit -- When the symptoms listed below exist, a short circuit of the CAN
communication line is a possible cause.
Error symptom Most the units connected to the CAN communication system go into fail-safe mode or are
deactivated.
Inspection procedure -
Refer to "MALFUNCTION AREA CHART".
Page 1366
Oil Pressure Gauge: Description and Operation Component Description
METER SYSTEM
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE : Component Description
Page 1818
27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example).
28. Select Select
29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example).
30. Select Confirm
Locations
Service and Repair
Blower Motor Switch: Service and Repair
VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL
Removal and Installation
Variable Blower Control - Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
REMOVAL 1. Remove the glove box assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Lower Panel RH And Glove Box/Removal And
Installation.
2. Disconnect the variable blower control electrical connector. 3. Remove the two screws and
remove the variable blower control.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Body - Sunroof Inoperative/Erratic Operation
Sunroof / Moonroof Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Sunroof Inoperative/Erratic
Operation
Classification: BT07-032A
Reference: NTB07-070A
Date: September 25, 2009
SUNROOF DOES NOT OPERATE PROPERLY
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles section has been revised. No other changes
have been made. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007 - 2009 Armada (TA60) 2007 - 2009 Frontier (D40) 2007 - 2009
Maxima (A34, A35) 2007 - 2009 Pathfinder (R51) 2007 - 2009 Quest (V42) 2007 - 2009 Titan (A60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
Sunroof auto operation will not work or sunroof does not operate properly:
^ When the battery has been disconnected or discharged
^ When the sunroof motor has been disconnected from power
^ When the sunroof motor was changed
ACTION
Perform the following initialization procedure:
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Push and hold the sunroof tilt switch in the forward (DOWN) position until the sunroof is fully
closed.
3. After the sunroof has closed all the way, push and hold the tilt switch forward (DOWN) again for
more than 2 seconds to re-learn motor position.
4. Initialization is complete if the sunroof operates normally.
NOTE:
If the sunroof is still not operating properly after initialization, refer to ASIST and section RF of the
Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for further diagnosis and repair information.
Page 131
Power Distribution Module: Component Tests and General Diagnostics
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure
1. CHECK FUSES AND FUSIBLE LINK Check that the following IPDM E/R fuses or fusible link are
not blown.
Is the fuse blown? YES - Replace the blown fuse or fusible link after repairing the affected circuit.
NO - GO TO 2 2. CHECK BATTERY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R. 3. Check voltage between IPDM E/R harness
connectors and ground.
Is the measurement value normal? YES - GO TO 3 NO - Repair or replace harness. 3. CHECK
GROUND CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
Page 4265
SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal"
condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Page 4226
Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation Power Consumption Control System
System Diagram
POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM
System Diagram
System Description
POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM
System Description
OUTLINE IPDM E/R incorporates a power consumption control function that reduces the power consumption
according to the vehicle status.
- IPDM E/R changes its status (control mode) with the sleep wake up signal received from BCM via
CAN communication.
Normal mode (wake-up) CAN communication is normally performed with other control units.
- Individual unit control by IPDM E/R is normally performed.
Low power consumption mode (sleep) Low power consumption control is active.
- CAN transmission is stopped.
SLEEP MODE ACTIVATION -
IPDM E/R judges that the sleep-ready conditions are fulfilled when the ignition switch is OFF and
none of the conditions below are present. Then it transmits a sleep-ready signal (ready) to BCM via
CAN communication.
- Front wiper fail-safe operation
- Outputting signals to actuators
- Switches or relays operating
- Auto active test is starting
- Emergency OFF
- Output requests are being received from control units via CAN communication.
- IPDM E/R stops CAN communication and enters the low power consumption mode when it
receives a sleep wake up signal (sleep) from BCM and the sleep-ready conditions are fulfilled.
WAKE-UP OPERATION IPDM E/R changes from the low power consumption mode to the normal mode when it receives a
sleep wake-up signal (wake up) from BCM or any of the following conditions is fulfilled. In addition,
it transmits a sleep-ready signal (not-ready) to BCM via CAN communication to report the CAN
communication start.
- Ignition switch ON
- An output request is received from a control unit via CAN communication.
Procedures
Fuel Gauge Sender: Procedures
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly
Fuel Level Sender Unit
Disassembly 1. Disconnect the harness connectors. 2. Remove the fuel sensor from the pump
assembly. 3. Remove the sending unit module and floater arm assembly.
Assembly Assembly is the reverse order of disassembly.
Page 2025
CAUTION: Do not drop or shock spark plug.
Exploded View
Camshaft: Service and Repair Exploded View
CAMSHAFT
Exploded View
Locations
Page 3100
Page 4506
LINK REPLACEMENT
1. For front lower link(s) identified as needing replacement:
Use the appropriate illustration in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual, section FSU, for
link replacement information.
^ Make sure to replace the ball joint securing nut with a new one. New nut is listed in the Parts
Information.
^ Make sure to replace both lower link nuts with new ones. New nuts are listed in the Parts
Information.
NOTE:
The original (factory installed) bolts for the front lower links are self centering and should not need
replacement. The vehicle should need toe adjustment only.
^ Follow torque specifications in the illustrations.
Page 6098
If the moisture trickles, drips, or pools, it may not be considered normal and the lamp assembly
may have a water leak path. See Figure 2 for an example.
If large drops of water collect inside the lens, refer to the flow chart below to find the next step.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Page 5571
System Diagram
Fuel Gauge: Description and Operation System Diagram
METER SYSTEM
FUEL GAUGE : System Diagram
Page 854
Ride Height
Exploded View
Water Pump: Service and Repair Exploded View
WATER PUMP
Exploded View
Page 1000
9. Tighten the A/T fluid level gauge bolt to specification.
A/T fluid level gauge bolt : Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Transmission Assembly or
See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Removal
and Replacement/Transmission Assembly.
Page 3379
Page 4575
- Shock absorber mounting insulator (1)
- Arrow Indicates: Flat tail
2. Install upper spring insulator (3) with studs located in line with lower shock mount and in lower
seat step (2). The lower seat step (2) in the shock
absorber assembly (1) faces outside of vehicle.
- Arrow Indicates: Front
3. Tighten the piston rod lock nut to specification. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Front
Suspension . Use a new piston rod lock nut for assembly.
Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision Damage
Wheel Bearing: Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision
Damage
Classification: FA10-006
Reference: NTB10-126
Date: October 21, 2010
WHEEL BEARING COLLISION DAMAGE
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan
SERVICE INFORMATION
Impacts to wheel bearings (such as a collision or other suspension damage) may create slight
indents in the bearing surfaces. These indents may not be visible but can cause bearing noise.
NOTE:
Hub/bearing replacement due to impact (collision or other suspension damage) is not a
warrantable repair
If a vehicle has visible wheel or suspension damage due to impact (collision or other suspension
damage), it is recommended that the wheel bearing assembly be inspected as follows:
1. Remove the hub/bearing assembly from the vehicle.
2. Hold the hub/bearing assembly with both hands.
3. Rotate the hub/bearing assembly in both directions (clockwise and counterclockwise).
4. If any gritty or rough feeling is detected in the bearing replace it with a new one.
Page 2348
- Combination meter
4. Check the continuity between the data link connector and the combination meter harness
connector.
Is the inspection result normal? YES (Present error) - Check the following items again. Decision of CAN system type.
- Not received CONSULT-III data [SELF-DIAG RESULTS, CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR ("ECU
list" included)].
- Not copied from on-board diagnosis.
- Procedure for detecting root cause.
YES (Past error) - Error was detected in the main line between the data link connector and the
combination meter. NO - Repair the main line between the data link connector and the combination
meter.
Main Line Between M&A; And ABS Circuit
MAIN LINE BETWEEN M&A; AND ABS CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 3. Check the following terminals and
connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side). Harness connector M31
- Harness connector E152
Is the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO 2. NO - Repair the terminal and connector. 2.
CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (OPEN CIRCUIT) 1. Disconnect the following harness
connectors. Combination meter
- Harness connectors M31 and E152
2. Check the continuity between the combination meter harness connector and the harness
connector.
Is the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO 3. NO - Repair the main line between the
combination meter and the harness connector M31. 3. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (OPEN
CIRCUIT) 1. Disconnect the connector of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit). 2. Check the
continuity between the harness connector and the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)
harness connector. Models without VDC
- Models with VDC
Page 311
^ CONSULT will display "CMPLT" in the top right corner of the screen when the IAVL procedure is
finished. See Figure 7.
f. Once the IAVL procedure is finished, proceed with step 7.
For 2005 and Later MY Vehicles ONLY: Enter VIN Into New Service Replacement ECM
7. Enter the VIN into the new service replacement ECM as follows:
a. Select [ENGINE] on the "Select System" screen. See Figure 8.
b. Select [WORK SUPPORT] on the "Select Diag Mode" screen. See Figure 9.
Locations
Page 1196
Tool number : KV10111100 (J-37228)
CAUTION: Do not damage mating surfaces. 7. Remove the chain tensioner (RH) using the
following steps.
WARNING: Plunger, spring, and spring seat pop out when squeezing return-proof clip without
holding plunger head. It may cause serious injuries. Always hold plunger head when removing.
a. Squeeze return-proof clip ends using suitable tool and push the plunger into the chain tensioner
body. b. Secure plunger using stopper pin.
- Stopper pin is made from hard wire approximately 1 mm (0.04 in) in diameter.
c. Remove the bolts and the chain tensioner (RH) (A).
NOTE: If it is difficult to push plunger on chain tensioner (RH) (A), remove the plunger under
extended condition.
8. Loosen camshaft sprocket bolts as shown and remove camshaft sprockets.
CAUTION: To avoid interference between valves and pistons, do not turn crankshaft or camshaft
with timing chain disconnected.
Page 4693
Blower Motor: Service and Repair
BLOWER MOTOR
Removal and Installation
Blower Motor - Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
REMOVAL 1. Remove the glove box assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Lower Panel RH And Glove Box/Removal And
Installation.
2. Disconnect the blower motor electrical connector. 3. Remove the three screws and remove the
blower motor.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 1948
4. Disconnect the adjustable pedal electric motor electrical connector. 5. Disconnect the adjustable
pedal electric motor memory electrical connector, if equipped. 6. Disconnect the accelerator
position sensor electrical connector. 7. Remove the two upper and one lower accelerator pedal
nuts. 8. Remove the adjustable accelerator pedal assembly.
CAUTION: Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly.
- Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket.
- Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal adjusting mechanism.
- Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling.
- Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Inspection After Installation Check that the accelerator pedal moves smoothly within the specified ranges.
- Depress and release the accelerator pedal to check that it returns smoothly to the original
released position.
- Perform an electrical inspection of the accelerator pedal position sensor. Refer to See: Computers
and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/VIN Registration See:
Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator
Pedal Released Position Learning See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning See: Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning .
CAUTION: When the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor is disconnected,
perform "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to See: Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released
Position Learning.
NON-ADJUSTABLE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY Non-Adjustable Accelerator Pedal
Page 396
Control Module: Locations Electrical Units Location
Locations
Locations
Page 5255
1. Raise the glass to the top position. 2. While pressing and holding the reset switch, lower the
glass to the bottom position. 3. Release the reset switch. Verify that the reset switch returns to the
original position, if not, pull the switch using suitable tool. 4. Raise the glass to the top position.
CAUTION: Do not operate the glass automatically to raise the glass to the top position.
Page 4118
IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) - Part 4
Page 5536
Check the following. Harness connectors M31, E152
- Fuse block (J/B) connector M4
- 10A fuse
- Harness for open or short between ASCD brake switch and fuse
- Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Turn ignition switch
OFF. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal
108 and ASCD brake switch terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK - GO TO 6. NG Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 6. CHECK ASCD
BRAKE SWITCH Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing
and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/ASCD Brake Switch/Component
Inspection. OK or NG OK - GO TO 11. NG - Replace ASCD brake switch. 7. CHECK STOP LAMP
SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. 3. Check voltage between stop lamp switch
terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT -III or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG OK - GO TO 9. NG - GO TO 8. 8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the
following. Harness connectors M31, E152
- Fuse block (J/B) connector M60
- 10A fuse
- Harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and battery
- Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 9. CHECK
STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Disconnect ECM
harness connector.
Locations
Page 4241
Locations
Locations
Tachometer: Locations
METER SYSTEM
TACHOMETER : Component Parts Location
Page 130
CAN COMMUNICATION CONTROL When CAN communication with ECM and BCM is impossible,
IPDM E/R performs fail-safe control. After CAN communication recovers normally, it also returns to
normal control.
If No CAN Communication Is Available With BCM
IGNITION RELAY MALFUNCTION DETECTION FUNCTION -
IPDM E/R monitors the voltage at the contact circuit and excitation coil circuit of the ignition relay
inside it.
- IPDM E/R judges the ignition relay error if the voltage differs between the contact circuit and the
excitation coil circuit.
- If the ignition relay cannot turn OFF due to contact seizure, it activates the tail lamp relay for 10
minutes to alert the user to the ignition relay malfunction when the ignition switch is turned OFF.
NOTE: The tail lamp turns OFF when the ignition switch is turned ON.
FRONT WIPER CONTROL IPDM E/R detects front wiper stop position by a front wiper auto stop
signal. When a front wiper auto stop signal is in the conditions listed below, IPDM E/R stops power
supply to wiper after repeating a front wiper 10 second activation and 20 second stop five times.
NOTE: This operation status can be confirmed on the IPDM E/R "DATA MONITOR" that displays
"Block" for the item "WIP PROT" while the wiper is stopped.
STARTER MOTOR PROTECTION FUNCTION IPDM E/R turns OFF the starter control relay to
protect the starter motor when the starter control relay remains active for 90 seconds.
Page 5577
Page 1470
8. Remove access cover
9. Loosen the crankshaft pulley bolts using Tool to secure the crankshaft.
Tool number: ( - ) J47245
a. Remove the crankshaft pulley from the crankshaft using suitable tool.
- Set the bolts in the two bolt holes [M6 x 1.0 mm (0.04 in)] on the front surface.
NOTE: The dimension between the centers of the two bolt holes is 61 mm (2.40 in).
10. Remove the front cover.
a. Loosen and remove the bolts in the reverse of order as shown.
b. Cut the liquid gasket and remove the covers using Tool.
Tool number: KVIOIIIIOO (J-37228)
CAUTION: Do not damage mating surfaces.
11. Remove the front oil seal using suitable tool.
CAUTION: Do not damage front cover.
Page 2462
B. Compare the Part Number you wrote down to the numbers in the Current ECM Part Number
column in Table A , or Table B above.
^ If there is a match, this bulletin applies. Continue with the reprogramming procedure.
NOTE:
If there are two lines (two reprogramming options) on your C-III screen, use the one that does not
have the message "Caution! Use ONLY with NTBXX-XXX".
^ If there is not a match, this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to ASIST for further
diagnostic information.
3. If this bulletin applies and you have performed ECM reprogramming, the screen in Figure 2
appears when reprogramming is complete.
4. Make sure to erase DTCs from all systems.
NOTE:
During reprogramming, DTCs will set in several systems and must be erased.
5. Test drive the vehicle and make sure it operates correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF.
^ If the Check Engine light comes ON, go back to ASIST for further diagnostic information. Refer to
the applicable Electronic Service Manual as
needed.
^ Diagnosis and repairs beyond ECM reprogramming are not covered by this bulletin.
Page 3336
Axle Shaft Assembly: Vehicle Damage Warnings
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution
Observe the following precautions when disassembling and servicing the wheel hub and drive
shafts. Perform work in a location which is as dust-free as possible.
- Before disassembling and servicing, clean the outside of parts.
- Prevention of the entry of foreign objects must be taken into account during disassembly of the
component parts.
- Disassembled parts must be carefully reassembled in the correct order. If work is interrupted, a
clean cover must be placed over parts.
- Paper shop cloths must be used. Fabric shop cloths must not be used because of the danger of
lint adhering to parts.
- Disassembled parts (except for rubber parts) should be cleaned with a suitable solvent which
shall be removed by blowing with air or wiping with paper shop cloths.
Specifications
Knock Sensor: Specifications
Knock Sensor Torque ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................... 21.1 Nm, 16 ft lb
Page 5614
Is the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO 4 NO - Repair harness or connector. 4.CHECK KEY
SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Check voltage between key switch and key lock solenoid harness connector and ground.
Is the inspection result normal? YES - Replace key switch and key lock solenoid. NO - Repair
harness or connector.
Component Inspection
KEY SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Component Inspection
COLUMN SHIFT 1.CHECK KEY SWITCH
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect key switch connector. 3. Check continuity between key
switch terminals 3 and 4.
Page 5964
Headlamp Bulb: Service and Repair
HEADLAMP
Bulb Replacement
CAUTION: Turn headlamp switch OFF before disconnecting headlamp harness connector.
- Do not touch bulb by hand right after being turned off. Burning may result.
- Do not touch the glass of bulb directly by hand. Keep grease and other oily substances away from
it.
- Do not leave bulb out of front combination lamp assembly for a long time because dust, moisture,
smoke, etc. may affect the performance of the lamp. When replacing headlamp bulb, be sure to
replace it with a new one.
HEADLAMP (OUTER SIDE), FOR LOW BEAM
Removal 1. Position fender protector aside. 2. Turn headlamp switch OFF. 3. Disconnect headlamp
electrical connector. 4. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove bulb .
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
HEADLAMP (INNER SIDE), FOR HIGH BEAM
Removal 1. Turn headlamp switch OFF. 2. Disconnect headlamp electrical connector. 3. Turn the
bulb socket counterclockwise and remove bulb.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
TURN SIGNAL/PARKING LAMP (FRONT)
NOTE: Reach through wheel opening for access.
Removal 1. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to unlock. 2. Pull the bulb to remove from the
socket.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
SIDE MARKER LAMP (FRONT)
Removal
NOTE: Reach through wheel opening for access. 1. Turn the side marker lamp (front) bulb socket
counterclockwise and remove side marker lamp (front) bulb socket. 2. Pull to remove side marker
lamp (front) from the side marker lamp (front) bulb socket.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 4380
Electrical - IPDM Serviceability
Power Distribution Module: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - IPDM Serviceability
Classification: EL09-014
Reference: NTB09-036
Date: April 27, 2009
IPDM SERVICE
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007 - 2009 Nissan Models with IPDM
SERVICE INFORMATION
The Intelligent Power Distribution Module (IPDM) is ONLY serviceable as an assembly.
The ONLY serviceable parts of an IPDM are the fuses.
^ Some IPDM designs have sections that Relays Relays appear to be serviceable relays.
^ These "relays" are NEVER to be removed.
^ These "relays" may have markings indicating they are similar. They are not "swappable".
CAUTION:
NEVER REMOVE relays from an IPDM.
Tampering with the relays of an IPDM may cause additional incidents with the vehicle.
Such incidents may include:
^ Headlights inoperative.
^ Radiator fan inoperative
^ Fog lamps inoperative
^ Wiper inoperative
Page 3934
MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. -
The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Abbreviation List
ABBREVIATIONS
Abbreviation List
The following ABBREVIATIONS are used:
Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-037A Date: 100519
Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement
Reference: NTB10-037A
Date: May 19, 2010
VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2005 - 2009 ARMADA AND TITAN FUEL GAUGE
INACCURACY
This bulletin has been amended. Additions were made to the Parts Information. Please discard
previous versions of this bulletin.
CAMPAIGN ID #: R1010
NHTSA #: 10V-074
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2009 Armada (TA60) 2005 - 2009 Titan (A60)
Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility.
INTRODUCTION
Nissan is conducting a voluntary recall campaign on certain MY2005-2009 Armada and Titan
vehicles to address a potential fuel gauge inaccuracy. Specifically, the issue can cause the fuel
gauge to show that the vehicle still has some fuel, typically about one quarter tank, when the fuel
tank is actually empty. To remedy this potential condition, Nissan is conducting this Voluntary
Safety Recall Campaign to replace the fuel level sending unit with a new one at no charge for parts
or labor.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number R1010 to this campaign. This number must appear on
all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle
falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service
department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient
(tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in
dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to
do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While
federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used
vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed.
Page 4874
Page 2497
Page 943
Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair
IN-CABIN MICROFILTER
Removal and Installation
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 1. Remove the two lower glove box hinge pins to remove the glove
box from the instrument panel and let it hang from the cord.
2. Remove the screw and remove the in-cabin microfilter cover. 3. Remove the in-cabin microfilters
from the heater and cooling unit assembly housing.
4. Insert the first new in-cabin microfilter into the heater and cooling unit assembly housing and
slide it over to the right. Insert the second new
in-cabin microfilter into the heater and cooling unit assembly housing.
NOTE: The in-cabin microfilters are marked with air flow arrows. The end of the microfilter with the
arrow should face the rear of the vehicle. The arrows should point downward.
5. Install the in-cabin microfilter cover.
Page 3805
Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Rear Disc Brake
Exploded View
REAR DISC BRAKE
Exploded View of Brake Caliper
Removal And Installation
REAR DISC BRAKE
Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor
WARNING: Clean dust on caliper and brake pad with a vacuum dust collector to minimize the
hazard of air borne particles or other materials.
CAUTION: -
While removing cylinder body, do not depress brake pedal because piston will pop out.
It is not necessary to remove bolts on torque member and brake hose except for disassembly or
replacement of caliper assembly. In this case, hang cylinder body with a wire so as not to stretch
brake hose.
- Do not damage piston boot.
- If any shim is subject to serious corrosion, replace it with a new one.
- Always replace shim and shim cover as a set when replacing brake pads.
- Keep rotor free from brake fluid.
- Burnish the brake pads and disc rotor mutually contacting surfaces, after refinishing or replacing
rotors, after replacing pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage.
Page 1756
16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5).
^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB,
diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing.
17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.)
Page 3211
Shift Interlock Control Module: Locations Electrical Units Location
Page 2219
40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19.
NOTE:
For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF.
^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data.
41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42.
41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed.
^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service
Manual (ESM) for this procedure.
NOTE:
If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle.
IAVL can now be performed.
42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF.
^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs.
Locations
Page 818
Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that
slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the
left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane.
This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although
the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be.
Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition
The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure
2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road.
Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center
^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less.
^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less.
When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to
counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle
should be driven on a straight flat road.
Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle
pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This
condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side.
Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition
The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road.
^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering
correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on
a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane
during this time (7 seconds).
Page 1543
Valve Clearance: Service and Repair
CAMSHAFT VALVE CLEARANCE
Valve Clearance
INSPECTION
NOTE: Perform the following inspection after removal, installation or replacement of camshaft or
valve-related parts, or if there are unusual engine conditions due to changes in valve clearance
over time (starting, idling, and/or noise). 1. Warm up the engine. Then stop the engine. 2. Remove
the engine room cover. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine
Cover. 3. Remove the air cleaner and air duct assembly. Refer to See: Air Cleaner
Housing/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. 4. Remove the RH bank and LH bank rocker
covers using power tool. Refer to See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Valve Cover/Service and
Repair/Removal And Installation.
5. Turn the crankshaft pulley in the normal direction (clockwise when viewed from engine front) to
align TDC identification notch (without paint
mark) with timing indicator.
6. At this time, make sure both the intake and exhaust cam noses of No. 1 cylinder (top front on LH
bank) face outside. If they do not face outside, turn crankshaft pulley once more.
7. Measure valve clearances at the locations marked "X" as shown in the table below (locations
indicated with black arrow).
NOTE: Firing order 1-8-7-3-6-5-4-2
Page 4803
Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair High-Pressure Flexible Hose
HIGH-PRESSURE FLEXIBLE HOSE
Removal and Installation for High-pressure Flexible Hose
REMOVAL 1. Remove the engine under cover. 2. Remove the engine air cleaner and air ducts.
Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Air
Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation .
3. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Refrigeration System . 4. Remove
the high-pressure flexible hose.
CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the
entry of air.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Description and
Operation/Refrigeration System/Component .
CAUTION: Replace the O-ring of the high-pressure flexible hose with a new one, then apply compressor oil to
it when installing it.
- After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
Page 1947
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair
ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM
Removal and Installation
ADJUSTABLE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY Adjustable Accelerator Pedal
CAUTION: Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal adjusting mechanism.
- Before removal and installation, the accelerator and brake pedals must be in the front most
position.
This is to align the base position of the accelerator and brake pedals. Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly.
- Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket.
- Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling.
- Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water.
Removal 1. Move the accelerator and brake pedals to the frontmost position. 2. Turn the ignition
switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal. 3. Disconnect the adjustable brake pedal
cable from the adjustable brake pedal. Unlock, then pull the adjustable brake pedal cable to disconnect it from the adjustable brake pedal.
Page 2280
NOTE: CAN data of the air bag diagnosis sensor unit is not used by usual service work, thus it is
omitted.
Page 912
Valve Clearance: Service and Repair
CAMSHAFT VALVE CLEARANCE
Valve Clearance
INSPECTION
NOTE: Perform the following inspection after removal, installation or replacement of camshaft or
valve-related parts, or if there are unusual engine conditions due to changes in valve clearance
over time (starting, idling, and/or noise). 1. Warm up the engine. Then stop the engine. 2. Remove
the engine room cover. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Cover. 3. Remove the air cleaner and air duct assembly.
Refer to See: Air Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. 4. Remove the RH
bank and LH bank rocker covers using power tool. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Cylinder Head
Assembly/Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation.
5. Turn the crankshaft pulley in the normal direction (clockwise when viewed from engine front) to
align TDC identification notch (without paint
mark) with timing indicator.
6. At this time, make sure both the intake and exhaust cam noses of No. 1 cylinder (top front on LH
bank) face outside. If they do not face outside, turn crankshaft pulley once more.
7. Measure valve clearances at the locations marked "X" as shown in the table below (locations
indicated with black arrow).
NOTE: Firing order 1-8-7-3-6-5-4-2
Page 4285
Power Distribution Module: Component Tests and General Diagnostics
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure
1. CHECK FUSES AND FUSIBLE LINK Check that the following IPDM E/R fuses or fusible link are
not blown.
Is the fuse blown? YES - Replace the blown fuse or fusible link after repairing the affected circuit.
NO - GO TO 2 2. CHECK BATTERY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R. 3. Check voltage between IPDM E/R harness
connectors and ground.
Is the measurement value normal? YES - GO TO 3 NO - Repair or replace harness. 3. CHECK
GROUND CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
Page 4288
Concept of auto active test
- IPDM E/R starts the auto active test with the door switch signals transmitted by BCM via CAN
communication. Therefore, the CAN communication line between IPDM E/R and BCM is
considered normal if the auto active test starts successfully.
- The auto active test facilitates troubleshooting if any systems controlled by IPDM E/R cannot be
operated.
Diagnosis chart in auto active test mode
Page 5464
^ 2 top tabs
^ 2 side tabs
^ 2 bottom clips (do not reuse, replace with new clips listed in the Parts Information table).
a. Lift up and pull bottom of seat back board away from seat back. See Figure 5.
b. Lift the middle part of the seat back board up and pull away from the seat back.
c. Slide the top part of the seat back board down, then pull away from the seat back.
7. Install seat back board:
a. Starting at the top place tabs underneath seat back frame and apply pressure until it is securely
in place.
b. Install 2 new clips on the bottom part of the seat back board, then align bottom clips with holes in
seat back frame until it clicks into place. See Parts Information table.
c. Apply pressure to both sides of the seat back board until the tabs click into place.
Disclaimer
Page 189
Page 5804
Fuel Gauge Sender: Removal and Replacement
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
Removal and Installation
Short Wheel Base
Long Wheel Base
Locations
Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions
Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions
Classification: WT10-005
Reference: NTB10-114
Date: September 27, 2010
INFLATING TIRES EQUIPPED WITH TPMS
APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan with Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
SERVICE INFORMATION
Improper use of tire inflator tools can break the stem of a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensor.
NOTE:
The type of stem breakage shown in Figure 1 is not considered a warrantable repair.
Please refer to the following examples of recommended and not recommended tire pressure filling
tools.
Not Recommended tire inflator tools.
Page 1122
3. Apply an approved tire lubricant to the tire and wheel in the areas shown in Figures 1 and 2.
^ Tire lubricant is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process
Tire:
^ Apply lube to the inner bead only of both beads
^ Do not apply lube to the flange area (outer bead area)
NOTE:
Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs the tire may
become un-balanced.
Wheel:
^ Apply lube to the Safety Humps and Bead Seating area.
^ Do not apply lube to the flange area
4. Before inflating the tire:
^ If there are "match-mount" marks on the tire and rim, align the marks.
Service and Repair
Tailgate: Service and Repair
TAIL GATE
Removal and Installation
GAS STAY
Removal
WARNING: The gas stay is under high pressure. Remove the gas stay only with the tailgate fully
closed. Injury may result if the gas stay is removed when the tailgate is open. 1. Remove the RH
rear combination lamp assembly. Refer to See: Lighting and Horns/Marker Lamp/Service and
Repair/Removal And Installation. 2. Remove the gas stay.
Page 5596
Audible Warning Device: Description and Operation Light Reminder Warning Chime
System Diagram
WARNING CHIME SYSTEM
LIGHT REMINDER WARNING CHIME : System Diagram
System Description
WARNING CHIME SYSTEM
LIGHT REMINDER WARNING CHIME : System Description
DESCRIPTION With ignition switch in OFF or ACC position, driver door open, and lighting switch in
1ST or 2ND position, the light warning chime will sound. BCM detects ignition switch in OFF or ACC position, front door switch LH ON, and lighting switch in
1ST or 2ND position. And then transmits buzzer output signal (light reminder warning chime) to
combination meter with CAN communication line.
- When combination meter receives buzzer output signal (light reminder warning chime), it sounds
the buzzer.
WARNING OPERATION CONDITIONS
If all of the following conditions are fulfilled Lighting switch is at 1st or 2nd position
- Ignition switch is at OFF or ACC
- Front door switch LH is ON
WARNING CANCEL CONDITIONS
Warning is canceled if any of the following conditions is fulfilled. Lighting switch OFF
- Ignition switch ON
- Front door switch LH is OFF
Component Description
WARNING CHIME SYSTEM
LIGHT REMINDER WARNING CHIME : Component Description
Page 3651
Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair VDC/TCS/ABS
ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY)
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to
See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 3. Drain the brake fluid.
Refer to See: Hydraulic System/Brake Fluid/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 4.
Disconnect the actuator harness connector from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
CAUTION: To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from
being damaged.
- Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is
splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately.
5. Disconnect the brake tubes. 6. Remove the three bolts and remove the ABS actuator and
electric unit (control unit).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: To install, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench (commercial service tools).
- Always tighten brake tubes to specification when installing.
Never reuse drained brake fluid.
Page 1839
Page 2198
2. Select Direct Diagnostic Mode icon
3. Select System Diagnosis
Specifications
Firing Order: Specifications
Ignition System
Firing order: 1 - 8 - 7 - 3 - 6 - 5 - 4 -2
Page 620
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL
Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE)
REMOVAL 1. Remove engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Engine Cover.
2. Remove air duct and resonator assembly. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Air
Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation.
3. Disconnect camshaft position sensor connector.
4. Remove camshaft position sensor (2) from Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (LH)
(1).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Replace the O-ring (3) of the camshaft position sensor with a new one, then lubricate
O-ring with engine oil before installing.
Camshaft position sensor bolt : 9.6 N.m (0.98 kg-m, 85 in-lb)
Page 4041
HARNESS CONNECTOR (LEVER LOCKING TYPE) Lever locking type harness connectors are used on certain control units and control modules such
as ECM, ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), etc.
- Lever locking type harness connectors are also used on super multiple junction (SMJ)
connectors.
- Always confirm the lever is fully locked in place by moving the lever as far as it will go to ensure
full connection.
CAUTION: Always confirm the lever is fully released (loosened) before attempting to disconnect or connect
these connectors to avoid damage to the connector housing or terminals.
Page 1718
Page 4206
Steering/Suspension - Front End Alignment Cam Bolts
Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Front End Alignment Cam Bolts
Classification: FA05-002D
Reference: NTB05-097D
Date: January 19, 2011
2005-2011 TITAN AND ARMADA; CAM BOLTS FOR FRONT WHEEL ALIGNMENT
The Applied Vehicles have been updated/amended. Please discard previous versions of this
bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2011 Titan (A60) 2005 - 2011 Armada (TA60)
APPLIED VINS 2005 Titan built after 1N6AA0(***)5N 566358 2005 Armada built after
5N1AA08(**)5N 733885 2006 - 2011 vehicles: All VINS
APPLIED DATE Vehicles built after June 2, 2005
IF YOU CONFIRM
An Applied Vehicle needs to have the front wheel alignment adjusted,
NOTE:
Applied Vehicles listed above come from the factory with non-adjustable bolts (Not Cam Bolts) for
the lower link (lower control arm) mounting.
ACTIONS
1. Remove the original lower link mounting bolts, washers, and nuts - 2 per side.
^ Refer to section FSU in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for lower link mounting bolt
locations.
2. Install new bolts (cam bolts), cam washers and new nuts.
^ New parts are listed in the Parts Information section of this bulletin.
NOTE:
Cam bolts are used to adjust caster and camber.
3. Perform front wheel alignment per the ESM.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 4211
SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal"
condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters
Engine Control Module: Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout
ECM
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout
ECM Terminal And Reference Value
ECM
ECM Terminal and Reference Value
PREPARATION ECM is located in the engine room passenger side behind battery.
ECM INSPECTION TABLE Specification data are reference values and are measured between
each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-III.
CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may
result in damage to the ECMs transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the
ground.
Service and Repair
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair
BRAKE FLUID
Bleeding Brake System
CAUTION: While bleeding, pay attention to master cylinder reservoir tank fluid level. 1. Turn
ignition switch OFF and disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector or
battery negative cable. 2. Connect a vinyl tube to the rear right bleed valve. 3. Fully depress brake
pedal 4 to 5 times. 4. With brake pedal depressed, loosen bleed valve to let the air out, and then
tighten it immediately. 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until no more air comes out. 6. Tighten bleed valve
to the specified torque. Refer to See: Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Front
Disc Brake/Exploded View
(front disc brake), See: Disc Brake System/Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Rear Disc
Brake/Exploded View (rear disc brake).
7. Repeat steps 2 through 6 at each wheel, with master cylinder reservoir tank filled at least half
way, bleeding air in order from the front left, rear
left, and front right bleed valves.
Locations
Relay Box: Locations
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 4293
Terminal Layout
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Terminal Layout
TERMINAL LAYOUT
Page 4063
IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) - Part 3
Service and Repair
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair
Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery terminals and wait at least 3
minutes.
Do not use air tools or electric tools for servicing.
Always work from the side of air bag module. Do not work from the front of it.
Always place air bag module with pad side facing upward.
Do not cause impact to the air bag module by dropping etc. Replace the air bag module if it has
been dropped or sustained an impact.
After the work is completed, make sure no system malfunction is detected by air bag warning lamp.
In case a malfunction is detected by the air bag warning lamp, reset by the self-diagnosis function
and delete the memory by CONSULT-III.
If a malfunction is still detected after the above operation, perform self-diagnosis to repair
malfunctions. Refer to
Page 3748
CAUTION: Do not allow oil or any moisture on all contact surfaces between steering knuckle and
caliper assembly, bolts, and washer. 3. Install brake hose to brake caliper assembly using new
copper washers. Align the brake hose to the projection as shown and tighten union bolts to
the specified torque.
4. Refill with new brake fluid and bleed air. Refer to See: Hydraulic System/Brake Fluid/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement. 5. Check front disc brake for drag and correct as necessary. 6.
Install front wheel and tires.
Disassembly and Assembly
FRONT DISC BRAKE
Disassembly and Assembly
Page 347
Fuel Pump Relay: Locations Without Intelligent Key System
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Terminal Layout
TERMINAL LAYOUT
Page 3833
Procedures
Fuel Filter: Procedures
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly
Fuel Level Sender Unit
Disassembly 1. Disconnect the harness connectors. 2. Remove the fuel sensor from the pump
assembly. 3. Remove the sending unit module and floater arm assembly.
Assembly Assembly is the reverse order of disassembly.
Page 4508
PARTS INFORMATION
Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters
Engine Control Module: Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout
ECM
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout
ECM Terminal And Reference Value
ECM
ECM Terminal and Reference Value
PREPARATION ECM is located in the engine room passenger side behind battery.
ECM INSPECTION TABLE Specification data are reference values and are measured between
each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-III.
CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may
result in damage to the ECMs transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the
ground.
Page 326
Page 569
10. Lower the fuel tank using a suitable lift jack and remove it from the vehicle to access the fuel
level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly. 11. Remove the lock ring using Tool as shown.
Tool number : - (J-46536)
12. Remove the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly. Remove and discard the fuel
level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly
O-ring.
CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm during removal.
- Avoid impacts such as dropping when handling the components.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. For installation, use a new fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly O-ring.
- Connect the quick connector as follows:
- Check the connection for any damage or foreign materials.
- Align the connector with the pipe, then insert the connector straight into the pipe until a click is
heard.
- After connecting the quick connector, make sure that the connection is secure by checking as
follows:
- Pull the tube and the connector to make sure they are securely connected.
- Visually inspect the connector to make sure the two retainer tabs are securely connected.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1. Turn the ignition switch ON but do not start engine, then
check the fuel pipes and hose connections for leaks while applying fuel pressure to the
system.
2. Start the engine and rev it above idle speed, then check that there are no fuel leaks at any of the
fuel pipe and hose connections.
Page 2600
Page 1586
Temperature Sensor (Gauge): Description and Operation Component Description
METER SYSTEM
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE : Component Description
Premium With Navigation
DVD Player: Testing and Inspection Premium With Navigation
DVD PLAYER
Reference Value
PHYSICAL VALUES
Page 3785
hold it in place.
CAUTION: Use matching marks on wheel hub assembly and disc rotor if the disc rotor is to be
reused. 2. Install brake caliper assembly, and tighten torque member bolts to the specified torque.
CAUTION: Do not allow oil or any moisture on all contact surfaces between steering knuckle and
caliper assembly, bolts, and washer. 3. Install brake hose to brake caliper assembly using new
copper washers. Align the brake hose to the projection as shown and tighten union bolts to
the specified torque.
4. Refill with new brake fluid and bleed air. Refer to See: Hydraulic System/Brake Fluid/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement. 5. Check front disc brake for drag and correct as necessary. 6.
Install front wheel and tires.
Page 1906
Page 3296
2. Check the differential gear oil level from the filler plug hole as shown.
CAUTION: Do not start engine while checking differential gear oil level. 3. Install the filler plug with
sealant applied on the threads to the front final drive assembly. Tighten to the specified torque.
Refer to See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/Front Final Drive M205.
- Use High Performance Thread Sealant or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type
Specifications.
Rear Final Drive M226
DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL
Checking Differential Gear Oil
DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL LEAKAGE AND LEVEL 1. Make sure that differential gear oil is not
leaking from the rear final drive assembly or around it.
2. Check the differential gear oil level from the filler plug hole as shown.
CAUTION: Do not start engine while checking differential gear oil level. 3. Install the filler plug with
sealant applied on the threads to the rear final drive assembly. Tighten to the specified torque.
Refer to See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226.
- Use High Performance Thread Sealant or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type
Specifications.
Page 3303
Control Unit: Service and Repair
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 2. Remove jack and tools. 3.
Remove upper bracket of center seat belt retractor and belt assembly. Refer to See: Restraint
Systems/Seat Belt Systems/Seat Belt/Service and
Repair/Rear Seat Belt.
4. Remove the necessary push pins and reposition rear panel out of the way. Refer to See: Body
and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim
Panel/Service and Repair.
5. Reposition the carpet to access differential lock control unit to disconnect connector. 6. Remove
the two nuts and remove differential lock control unit.
INSTALLATION Note the following, and installation is in the reverse order of removal. When installing differential lock control unit, tighten nuts to the specified torque.
Differential lock control unit nuts : 5.1 N.m (0.52 kg-m, 45 in-lb)
Page 5053
Page 725
Consult-III Checking System
Standardized Relay
STANDARDIZED RELAY
Description
NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided
into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays.
Page 4595
2. Mount transmitter on rim and slowly tighten transmitter nut to specification.
CAUTION: Do not over tighten transmitter nut.
Transmitter nut : 7.7 N.m (0.79 kg-m, 68 in-lb)
3. Place wheel on turntable of tire machine. Ensure that transmitter is 270 degrees from
mounting/dismounting head.
NOTE: Do not touch transmitter with mounting head. 4. Lubricate tire well, and install second side
of tire as normal. Ensure that tire does not rotate relative to rim. 5. Inflate tire and balance wheel
and tire assembly. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Balancing Wheels. 6. Install wheel and tire
assembly in appropriate wheel position on vehicle.
NOTE: If replacing the transmitter, then transmitter wake up operation must be performed. Refer to
See: Tire Monitoring System/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmitter
Wake Up Operation.
7. Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction
Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing
and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing Control
Unit/Description See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing
Control Unit/Special Repair Requirement See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes /
Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Adjustment Of
Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position/Description See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock
Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Adjustment Of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position/Special Repair Requirement.
Specifications
Crankshaft Gear/Sprocket: Specifications
Crankshaft Gear/Sprocket
Page 2092
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Connect C-III to the vehicle to begin the reprogramming procedure.
^ If you are not familiar with the reprogramming procedure. Refer to "CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM
Reprogramming" general procedure.
Caution
2. When you get to the ECM Reprogramming screen shown in Figure 1, confirm this bulletin
applies as follows:
A. On your C-III screen, look at the Part Number column (see Figure 1).
Diagram Information and Instructions
Ignition Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
Connector Symbols
HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS
Connector symbols
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the
direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector.
For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements,
"Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals
Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring
diagrams.
Sample/Wiring Diagram -Example-
Specifications
Camshaft Gear/Sprocket: Specifications
Camshaft Gear/Sprocket
Page 2757
Fuel Pump Relay: Locations Without Intelligent Key System
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Terminal Layout
TERMINAL LAYOUT
Page 2506
Page 4654
1. Remove the floor carpet. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Carpet/Service
and Repair. 2. Remove the two clips and remove the floor duct.
Grilles
DUCTS AND GRILLES
Removal and Installation
GRILLES
Removal 1. Remove the interior trim panels as necessary. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior
Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Panel Assembly/Removal And Installation.
2. Remove the grille from the interior trim panel.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
RH and LH Side Demister Duct
DUCTS AND GRILLES
Removal and Installation
RH AND LH SIDE DEMISTER DUCT
Removal 1. Remove the instrument panel trim. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Panel Assembly/Removal And Installation.
2. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to See: Housing Assembly HVAC/Service
and Repair. 3. Remove the RH or LH side demister duct.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
RH and LH Ventilator Duct
DUCTS AND GRILLES
Removal and Installation
RH AND LH VENTILATOR DUCT
Removal 1. Remove the instrument panel trim. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Panel Assembly/Removal And Installation.
2. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to See: Housing Assembly HVAC/Service
and Repair. 3. Remove the RH or LH ventilator duct.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Center Ventilator Duct
DUCTS AND GRILLES
Removal and Installation
CENTER VENTILATOR DUCT
Removal 1. Remove the instrument panel trim. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Panel Assembly/Removal And Installation.
2. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to See: Housing Assembly HVAC/Service
and Repair.
Page 5480
12. Remove and replace the switch.
13. Secure the switch harness with the 2 clips to the seat pan.
14. Roll the side facing trim down over the new seat switch. Re-attach the loose J-Clip back onto
the seat frame.
^ Make sure the upholstered edge is flat and smooth with no bumps. See Figure 9.
^ Make sure the upholstered edge is flat and level with the side of the switch. See Figure 9.
WARNING:
Make sure the J-Clip is securely attached. A loose J-Clip may affect OCS performance.
15. Install the switch plate and switch knobs.
16. Set the seat pan back onto the seat frame and secure with the 4 bolts. Torque 27.5 Nm (2.8
Kg-m, 20 ft-lb).
17. Re-attach the seat harnesses to the seat pan.
18. Re-attach the lower flap cover.
Page 3450
REPAIR FLOW CHART
Service and Repair
Axle Bearing: Service and Repair
Rear Axle
AXLE BEARING
Removal and Installation
The axle oil seal and bearing ring retainer must be replaced every time the axle shaft is removed
and installed. Refer to See: Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and Repair/Rear Axle Shaft.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle
shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing.
Page 4115
Power Distribution Module: Electrical Diagrams
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Wiring Diagram
IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) - Part 1
Page 476
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and stop lamp switch terminal 2. Refer to
Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK - GO TO 10. NG Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
10. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH
Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/ASCD Brake Switch/Component Inspection.
OK or NG OK - GO TO 11. NG - Replace stop lamp switch.
11. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Service Information
For Electrical Incident/Intermittent Incident and See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and
Diagnostic Overview/Service Information For Electrical Incident/Intermittent Incident. INSPECTION END
Page 5302
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 3996
Starter Relay: Locations Without Intelligent Key System
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Terminal Layout
TERMINAL LAYOUT
Service and Repair
Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Service and Repair
OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM CONTROL UNIT
Removal and Installation
The occupant classification system control unit, occupant classification (pressure) sensor, and
bladder are an integral part of the front passenger seat cushion and are replaced as an assembly.
Refer to See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front
Seat/Removal and Installation to remove the seat, and See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and
Repair/Overhaul/Disassembly and Assembly to replace the seat cushion.
Locations
Page 174
^ Check and compare your current ECM Part Number to Table A or B (as it applies) shown above.
If the part number does not match one in Table A or B, this bulletin does not apply. Go back to
ASIST for further diagnostic and repair information.
If this bulletin applies, reprogram the ECM.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You
MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential
to successfully completing this repair.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
IN-Vehicle Sensor
Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair IN-Vehicle Sensor
IN-VEHICLE SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the lower instrument panel LH. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior
Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Lower Panel LH.
2. Remove the two screws (A) and remove the in-vehicle sensor (1).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 663
Variable Valve Timing Actuator Position Sensor: Service and Repair Intake Valve Timing Control
Position Sensor (RH)
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL
Intake Valve Timing Control Position Sensor (RH)
REMOVAL 1. Remove engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Engine Cover.
2. Disconnect intake valve timing control position sensor connector (RH).
3. Remove intake valve timing control position sensor (RH) (1) from Intake valve timing control
solenoid valve cover (RH) (3).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Replace the O-ring (2) of the intake valve timing control position sensor with a new one,
then lubricate O-ring with engine oil before installing.
Intake valve timing control position sensor bolt : 9.6 N.m (0.98 kg-m, 85 in-lb)
Page 3169
4. Remove O-ring from oil pump cover.
ASSEMBLY
1. Install new O-ring to oil pump cover.
CAUTION: Do not reuse O-ring.
- Apply ATF to O-ring.
2. Install new O-ring to oil pump housing.
CAUTION: Do not reuse O-ring.
- Apply ATF to O-ring.
3. Install new oil pump housing oil seal to the oil pump housing until it is flush with the face of oil
pump housing using Tool.
CAUTION: Do not reuse oil seal.
Page 643
9. Use compressed air to remove any metal debris from inside the boss threads.
CAUTION:
DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may
cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders.
10. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it.
11. Spray the boss threads with rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds.
12. Run a thread chaser through the boss to clean the threads.
^ Use Kent Moore part number J-43897-18 or J43897-12.
Page 1746
Locations
Page 4012
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Electrical Diagrams
POWER SOCKET
Wiring Diagram
Power Socket - Part 1
Page 4349
Alignment: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 08-097D Date: 110426
Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics
Classification: ST08-001D
Reference: NTB08-097D
Date: April 26, 2011
DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER
This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The
off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this
bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R
SERVICE INFORMATION
If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic
Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue.
Diagnostic Flow Chart
Road Test
Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair.
IMPORTANT:
^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as:
> Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory)
Page 1232
2. Apply the journal diameter grade on the crankshaft front to the column in "Main Bearings
Selection Table". 3. Read the symbol at the cross point of the selected row and column in the
"Main Bearings Selection Table".
CAUTION: Initial clearance for No. 1, 5 journal and No. 2, 3, 4 journal is different. Use two different selection
lists for each part.
- No. 1, 5 journal and No. 2, 3, 4 journal have the same signs but different measures. Do not
confuse them.
4. Apply the symbol to the "Main Bearings Grade Table" to select.
NOTE: Grade list applies to all journals.
- Service parts are available as a set of both upper and lower.
When Cylinder Block and Crankshaft are Reused 1. Measure the inside diameter of the cylinder
block main bearings housing and the outside diameter of the crankshaft journal. 2. Apply
measurement in above step 1 to "Main Bearings Selection Table". 3. The following steps are same
as in "When New Cylinder Block and Crankshaft are Used".
Main Bearings Selection Table (No. 1 and No. 5 journal)
Page 199
2. Select Direct Diagnostic Mode icon
3. Select System Diagnosis
Page 4070
Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation Power Consumption Control System
System Diagram
POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM
System Diagram
System Description
POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM
System Description
OUTLINE IPDM E/R incorporates a power consumption control function that reduces the power consumption
according to the vehicle status.
- IPDM E/R changes its status (control mode) with the sleep wake up signal received from BCM via
CAN communication.
Normal mode (wake-up) CAN communication is normally performed with other control units.
- Individual unit control by IPDM E/R is normally performed.
Low power consumption mode (sleep) Low power consumption control is active.
- CAN transmission is stopped.
SLEEP MODE ACTIVATION -
IPDM E/R judges that the sleep-ready conditions are fulfilled when the ignition switch is OFF and
none of the conditions below are present. Then it transmits a sleep-ready signal (ready) to BCM via
CAN communication.
- Front wiper fail-safe operation
- Outputting signals to actuators
- Switches or relays operating
- Auto active test is starting
- Emergency OFF
- Output requests are being received from control units via CAN communication.
- IPDM E/R stops CAN communication and enters the low power consumption mode when it
receives a sleep wake up signal (sleep) from BCM and the sleep-ready conditions are fulfilled.
WAKE-UP OPERATION IPDM E/R changes from the low power consumption mode to the normal mode when it receives a
sleep wake-up signal (wake up) from BCM or any of the following conditions is fulfilled. In addition,
it transmits a sleep-ready signal (not-ready) to BCM via CAN communication to report the CAN
communication start.
- Ignition switch ON
- An output request is received from a control unit via CAN communication.
Page 3017
Locations
Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Locations
METER SYSTEM
A/T OIL TEMPERATURE GAUGE : Component Parts Location
Page 2353
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. Disconnect the connector of ABS actuator and
electric unit (control unit). 2. Check the resistance between the ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) harness connector terminals. Models without VDC
- Models with VDC
Is the measurement value within the specification? YES - GO TO 3. NO - Repair the ABS actuator
and electric unit (control unit) branch line. 3. CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Check the power supply and the ground circuit of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
Refer to the following. Models with ABS: See: Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated
Procedures/C Code Charts/C1109/ABS
- Models with ABLS: See: Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated
Procedures/C Code Charts/C1109/ABLS/ABS
- Models with VDC: See: Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated
Procedures/C Code Charts/C1109/VDC/TCS/ABS
Is the inspection result normal? YES (Present error) - Replace the ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit). Refer to the following. Models with ABS: See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control
Systems/Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes/Service and Repair/ABS
- Models with ABLS: See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control
Systems/Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes/Service and Repair/ABLS/ABS
- Models with VDC: See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control
Systems/Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes/Service and Repair/VDC/TCS/ABS
YES (Past error) - Error was detected in the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) branch
line. NO - Repair the power supply and the ground circuit.
Branch Line
MALFUNCTION AREA CHART
Branch Line
Main Line
Page 3975
Consult-III Checking System
Standardized Relay
STANDARDIZED RELAY
Description
NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided
into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays.
Page 1728
Recall 10V074000: Fuel Sender Replacement
Fuel Gauge Sender: Recalls Recall 10V074000: Fuel Sender Replacement
VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2005-2009 Nissan/Armada 2005-2009
Nissan/Titan 2005-2009 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc.
MFR'S REPORT DATE: February 26, 2010
NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V074000 N/A
NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Fuel System, Other: Storage: Fuel Gauge System
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 340000
SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2005-2009 Titan, Armada, and Infiniti QX56
vehicles. The instrument panel fuel gauge may inaccurately display that the vehicle still has some
fuel, typically about one quarter tank, when the fuel tank is empty.
CONSEQUENCE: This could cause the vehicle to run out of gas and stall on the highway, which
could cause a crash.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the fuel sender unit inside the fuel tank with a new improved sender
card. This service will be performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin on or
before March 22, 2010. Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261.
NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle
Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov.
Page 1432
Timing Chain: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
TIMING CHAIN
Removal and Installation
NOTE: -
To remove timing chain and associated parts, start with those on the LH bank. The procedure for
removing parts on the RH bank is omitted because it is the same as that for removal on the LH
bank.
- To install timing chain and associated parts, start with those on the RH bank. The procedure for
installing parts on the LH bank is omitted because it is the same as that for installation on the RH
bank.
REMOVAL 1. Remove the engine assembly from the vehicle. Refer to See: Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Assembly/Removal and
Installation.
2. Remove the following components and related parts: Drive belt auto tensioner and idler pulley. Refer to See: Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and
Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair.
- Thermostat housing and water hose. Refer to See: Cooling System/Coolant Outlet/Service and
Repair/Water Outlet and Water Piping.
- Power steering oil pump bracket. Refer to See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Power
Steering/Power Steering Pump/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement.
- Oil pan (lower), (upper) and oil strainer. Refer to See: Engine Lubrication/Oil Pan/Service and
Repair/Removal and Installation.
- Ignition coil. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service and
Repair/Removal and Installation.
- Rocker cover. Refer to See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Removal
And Installation.
3. Remove the Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (RH) (A) and Intake valve timing
control solenoid valve cover (LH) (B) as follows:
a. Loosen and remove the bolts as shown. b. Cut the liquid gasket and remove the covers using
Tool.
Tool number : KV10111100 (J-37228)
CAUTION: Do not damage mating surfaces.
4. Obtain compression TDC of No. 1 cylinder as follows:
a. Turn the crankshaft pulley clockwise to align the TDC identification notch (without paint mark)
with the timing indicator on the front cover.
Specifications
Valve Clearance: Specifications
Valve Clearance
Page 6034
Ambient Light Sensor: Service and Repair
AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM
Removal and Installation
OPTICAL SENSOR
Removal 1. Remove defroster grille. Refer to See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Air Duct/Service
and Repair/Component.
2. Disconnect the optical sensor connector. 3. Turn the optical sensor counterclockwise to remove
it from defroster grille.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Service and Repair
Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Service and Repair
SPIRAL CABLE
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
CAUTION: Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least
3 minutes.
- When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front of air bag module.
1. Set the front wheels in the straight-ahead position. 2. Remove the steering wheel. Refer to See:
Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering Wheel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement.
3. Remove the column cover upper and lower.
4. Remove wiper washer switch connector, then pinch the tabs at wiper and washer switch base
and slide switch away from steering column to
remove.
5. While pressing tabs, pull lighting and turn signal switch toward driver door and disconnect from
base.
Front Seat Belt
Seat Belt: Service and Repair Front Seat Belt
SEAT BELTS
Removal and Installation of Front Seat Belt
CREW CAB
KING CAB
Page 2145
B. Compare the Part Number you wrote down to the numbers in the Current ECM Part Number
column in Table A , or Table B above.
^ If there is a match, this bulletin applies. Continue with the reprogramming procedure.
NOTE:
If there are two lines (two reprogramming options) on your C-III screen, use the one that does not
have the message "Caution! Use ONLY with NTBXX-XXX".
^ If there is not a match, this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to ASIST for further
diagnostic information.
3. If this bulletin applies and you have performed ECM reprogramming, the screen in Figure 2
appears when reprogramming is complete.
4. Make sure to erase DTCs from all systems.
NOTE:
During reprogramming, DTCs will set in several systems and must be erased.
5. Test drive the vehicle and make sure it operates correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF.
^ If the Check Engine light comes ON, go back to ASIST for further diagnostic information. Refer to
the applicable Electronic Service Manual as
needed.
^ Diagnosis and repairs beyond ECM reprogramming are not covered by this bulletin.
Inspection
Fluid - Transfer Case: Service and Repair Inspection
TRANSFER FLUID
Inspection
CAUTION: If using the vehicle for towing, the transfer fluid must be replaced as specified. Refer to
See: Maintenance.
FLUID LEAKAGE AND FLUID LEVEL 1. Make sure that fluid is not leaking from the transfer
assembly or around it.
2. Check fluid level from the filler plug hole as shown.
CAUTION: Do not start engine while checking fluid level. 3. Install the filler plug with a new gasket
to the transfer. Tighten to the specified torque. Refer to "Inspection".
CAUTION: Do not reuse gasket.
Page 467
Temperature Sensor (Gauge): Description and Operation System Description
METER SYSTEM
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE : System Description
The engine coolant temperature gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature. The ECM
provides an engine coolant temperature signal to the combination meter via CAN communication
lines.
Page 175
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Connect C-III to the vehicle to begin the reprogramming procedure.
^ If you are not familiar with the reprogramming procedure. Refer to "CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM
Reprogramming" general procedure.
Caution
2. When you get to the ECM Reprogramming screen shown in Figure 1, confirm this bulletin
applies as follows:
A. On your C-III screen, look at the Part Number column (see Figure 1).
Page 3989
Starter Motor: Description and Operation System Description
STARTING SYSTEM
System Description
The starter motor plunger closes and provides a closed circuit between the battery and the starter
motor. The starter motor is grounded to the cylinder block. With power and ground supplied, the
starter motor operates.
Page 161
Defroster Door Motor
Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Defroster Door Motor
DEFROSTER DOOR MOTOR
Removal and Installation
Defroster Door Motor - Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
REMOVAL 1. Remove the BCM. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Body Control Systems/Body
Control Module/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the audio amplifier, if equipped. Refer to See:
Accessories and Optional Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Amplifier/Service
and Repair/Premium With Navigation .
3. Disconnect the defroster door motor electrical connector. 4. Remove the three screws and
remove the defroster door motor.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 2713
Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Removal And Installation
AIR CLEANER FILTER
Removal and Installation (Viscous paper type)
REMOVAL
NOTE: The viscous paper type filter does not need cleaning between replacement intervals.
- Replace the air filter as necessary for periodic maintenance. Refer to See: Maintenance.
1. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. 2. Remove the air cleaner case (upper). 3.
Remove the air cleaner filter from the air cleaner case (lower).
INSTALLATION 1. Install the new air cleaner filter in the air cleaner case (lower). 2. Install the air
cleaner case (upper). 3. Install the air duct and resonator assembly (inlet).
Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision Damage
Wheel Bearing: Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision
Damage
Classification: FA10-006
Reference: NTB10-126
Date: October 21, 2010
WHEEL BEARING COLLISION DAMAGE
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan
SERVICE INFORMATION
Impacts to wheel bearings (such as a collision or other suspension damage) may create slight
indents in the bearing surfaces. These indents may not be visible but can cause bearing noise.
NOTE:
Hub/bearing replacement due to impact (collision or other suspension damage) is not a
warrantable repair
If a vehicle has visible wheel or suspension damage due to impact (collision or other suspension
damage), it is recommended that the wheel bearing assembly be inspected as follows:
1. Remove the hub/bearing assembly from the vehicle.
2. Hold the hub/bearing assembly with both hands.
3. Rotate the hub/bearing assembly in both directions (clockwise and counterclockwise).
4. If any gritty or rough feeling is detected in the bearing replace it with a new one.
Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration Procedure
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration
Procedure
Classification: EC09-028
Reference: NTB09-136
Date: December 1, 2009
2005 AND LATER; ECM VIN REGISTRATION
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2005 and later
SERVICE INFORMATION
The Applied Vehicles must have the correct Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) registered in the
Engine Control Module (ECM). The VIN registration process must be performed under the following
conditions.
^ When installing a new ECM
^ If, during vehicle service, the VIN registration inside the ECM is found to be missing or incorrect.
When needed, use the Service Procedure in this bulletin to perform ECM VIN registration.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for
any repairs being performed.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Connect C-III to the vehicle and perform the initial selections:
NOTE:
If C-III is already connected, go to Step 2.
a. Start C-III and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear.
b. Select the detected VI from the list.
c. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
d. Select Model and Year.
e. Confirm the correct model and year were selected.
f. Select Repair.
Page 1456
EM-8
Page 4531
^ Before installing the new bushings, use Nissan Brake Cleaner (or equivalent) to clean the
stabilizer bar where the bushings make contact. See Figure 1
above.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Locations
Page 320
Garage Jack and Safety Stand
Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair Garage Jack and Safety Stand
LIFTING POINT
Garage Jack and Safety Stand
CAUTION: Place a wooden or rubber block between safety stand and vehicle body when the
supporting body is flat.
Page 4995
3. Insert the screwdriver into either of the slots shown in Figure 1.
4. Turn the screwdriver until the two cover pieces separate (see Figure 2).
5. Replace the battery.
^ Make sure the + side of the battery faces the bottom cover piece.
6. Reattach the two cover pieces by pushing them together.
7. Turn on the vehicle and confirm the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator is not illuminated
in the dot matrix display.
8. If the indicator is still illuminated:
a) Turn off and exit the vehicle, making sure to close the door.
b) Re-enter the vehicle and turn it on. The indicator should be off.
System Diagram
Shift Indicator: Description and Operation System Diagram
METER SYSTEM
SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR : System Diagram
Page 1393
Oil Pressure Gauge: Description and Operation Component Description
METER SYSTEM
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE : Component Description
Page 3749
DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove sliding pin bolt, and then remove the pad, shim, shim cover, and pad
retainer from the torque member. 2. Remove sliding pins and sliding pin boots from torque
member.
3. Place a wooden block as shown, and blow air from union bolt hole to remove pistons and piston
boots.
CAUTION: Do not get your fingers caught in piston.
Page 2743
Use mirrors for checking on hidden points.
Page 6163
- Do not set or stand the glass on its edge. Small chips may develop into cracks.
3. Remove glass using piano wire or power cutting tool and an inflatable pump bag.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Use a genuine NISSAN Urethane Adhesive Kit (if available) or equivalent and follow the
instructions furnished with it.
- While the urethane adhesive is curing, open a door window. This will prevent the glass from being
forced out by passenger compartment air pressure when a door is closed.
- The molding must be installed securely so that it is in position and leaves no gap.
- Check gap along bottom to confirm that glass does not contact sheet metal.
- Inform the customer that the vehicle should remain stationary until the urethane adhesive has
completely cured (preferably 24 hours). Curing time varies with temperature and humidity.
WARNING: Keep heat and open flames away as primers and adhesive are flammable.
- The materials contained in the kit are harmful if swallowed, and may irritate skin and eyes. Avoid
contact with the skin and eyes.
- Use in an open, well ventilated location. Avoid breathing the vapors. They can be harmful if
inhaled.
If affected by vapor inhalation, immediately move to an area with fresh air. Driving the vehicle before the urethane adhesive has completely cured may affect the performance
of the rear window in case of an accident.
CAUTION: Do not use an adhesive which is past its usable term. Shelf life of this product is limited to six
months after the date of manufacture. Carefully adhere to the expiration or manufacture date
printed on the box.
- Keep primers and adhesive in a cool, dry place. Ideally, they should be stored in a refrigerator.
- Do not leave primers or adhesive cartridge unattended with their caps open or off.
- The vehicle should not be driven for at least 24 hours or until the urethane adhesive has
completely cured. Curing time varies depending on temperature and humidity. The curing time will
increase under lower temperatures and lower humidities.
REAR WINDOW GLASS AND REGULATOR
Removal 1. Remove the headliner. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the sealing screen.
3. Lower the window and remove the rear window glass bolts. 4. Raise the window and hold it in
place with tape. 5. Disconnect the rear window defogger harness connector. 6. Remove the rear
window glass assembly.
Recall 10V074000: Fuel Sender Replacement
Fuel Gauge Sender: Recalls Recall 10V074000: Fuel Sender Replacement
VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2005-2009 Nissan/Armada 2005-2009
Nissan/Titan 2005-2009 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc.
MFR'S REPORT DATE: February 26, 2010
NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V074000 N/A
NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Fuel System, Other: Storage: Fuel Gauge System
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 340000
SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2005-2009 Titan, Armada, and Infiniti QX56
vehicles. The instrument panel fuel gauge may inaccurately display that the vehicle still has some
fuel, typically about one quarter tank, when the fuel tank is empty.
CONSEQUENCE: This could cause the vehicle to run out of gas and stall on the highway, which
could cause a crash.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the fuel sender unit inside the fuel tank with a new improved sender
card. This service will be performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin on or
before March 22, 2010. Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261.
NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle
Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov.
Page 4355
2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test.
3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern.
^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60
mph.
^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel
position during the road test.
NOTE:
^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have
been resolved.
^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then
diagnosis cannot be performed.
4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center"
below.
5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel
Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete.
6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step.
Other Service Information
Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel
spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road
(see example in Figure 1).
If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the
normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain
water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place.
Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the
crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction.
Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully
counteract the effect of a highly crowned road.
Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that
slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the
left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane.
This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although
the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be.
Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition
Page 2604
Knock Sensor: Locations
Page 3297
Fluid - Differential: Service and Repair Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD)
Changing Differential Gear Oil
DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL
Changing Differential Gear Oil
DRAINING 1. Stop engine.
2. Remove the drain plug from the rear final drive assembly to drain the differential gear oil. 3.
Install the drain plug with sealant applied on the threads to the rear final drive assembly. Tighten to
the specified torque. Refer to See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD).
- Use High Performance Thread Sealant or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type
Specifications
FILLING 1. Remove the filler plug from the rear final drive assembly.
2. Fill the rear final drive assembly with new differential gear oil until the level reaches the specified
level near the filler plug hole.
Differential gear oil grade and capacity : Refer to See: Maintenance.
3. Install the filler plug with sealant applied on the threads to the rear final drive assembly. Tighten
to the specified torque. Refer to See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD).
- Use High Performance Thread Sealant or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type
Specifications.
Checking Differential Gear Oil
DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL
Checking Differential Gear Oil
DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL LEAKAGE AND LEVEL 1. Make sure that differential gear oil is not
leaking from the rear final drive assembly or around it.
Page 3884
Repair Flow Chart
Crash Zone Sensor
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Crash Zone Sensor
CRASH ZONE SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
CAUTION: Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at
least 3 minutes.
1. Remove front grille. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Grille/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the
crash zone sensor harness connector. 3. Remove crash zone sensor nuts.
CAUTION: Replace crash zone sensor if it has been dropped or sustained an impact.
- Do not disassemble crash zone sensor.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. After the work is complete, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to
See: Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/SRS
Operation Check.
Page 1794
Page 540
3. Install the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit as follows (see Figure 5):
CAUTION:
Do not bend the float arm when handling the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit / Fuel Pump Assembly.
a. Slide the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit into the attachment slots until the two Locking Tabs snap
in place.
^ Confirm the Locking Tabs are snapped in place by trying to move the Sender Unit up and down
(it should not move).
b. Insert the Fuel Temperature Sensor into the Plastic Retaining Clip.
^ Make sure the "circular flange" of the Sensor is positioned between the Clip and the Rib.
c. Insert the two Fuel Temperature Sensor Wires into the Securing Tab.
d. Connect the White Wire Connector into the top of the Fuel Pump (see Figure 6).
e. Pull and push all connectors to make sure they are fully locked in place.
Page 1125
Print this page and keep it by your tire mounting equipment
Page 5366
11. Remove the headlining.
- Disconnect the harnesses.
12. Remove the rear audio control assembly from rear roof console (if equipped).
- Disconnect the harness.
13. Remove the lamp assemblies from roof console.
- Disconnect the harnesses.
14. Remove the rear roof console bracket (if equipped). 15. Remove the center roof console front
bracket (if equipped). 16. Remove the assist grip brackets from roof (if equipped).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 3348
and serration hole. Refer to See: Maintenance . After inserting the grease, use a shop cloth to wipe
off the grease that has oozed out.
2. Wrap the serrated part of the drive shaft with tape. Install the boot band and boot onto the shaft.
Do not damage the boot.
NOTE: Discard the old boot band and boot and use a new one for assembly.
3. Remove the protective tape wound around the serrated part of the drive shaft. 4. Attach the
circlip to the drive shaft making sure circlip fits securely into groove on drive shaft. Then install
drive shaft nut to end of joint
sub-assembly, and press-fit the circlip using a suitable tool as shown.
NOTE: Discard the old circlip and use a new one for assembly. 5. Insert the specified quantity of
Genuine NISSAN Grease or equivalent, into the joint sub-assembly and the large end of the boot.
Refer to See:
Maintenance .
Grease capacity : 145 - 165 g (5.11 - 5.82 oz)
6. Install the boot securely into the grooves (indicated by the * marks) as shown.
Page 4165
Consult-III Checking System
Standardized Relay
STANDARDIZED RELAY
Description
NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided
into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays.
Page 3094
Page 5283
- Disconnect the harness connector.
9. Remove the door finisher and disconnect the lock cable and handle cable from the inside door
handle assembly. Refer to "Removal and
Installation".
10. Remove the door lock knob. 11. Remove the inside door handle assembly screws and remove
the inside door handle assembly.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
REAR DOOR - CREW CAB
Removal 1. Remove the power window switch assembly. Disconnect the harness connector.
2. Remove the pull handle cover. Remove the screws behind pull handle cover.
3. Remove the cap from pull handle escutcheon and remove screw. 4. Remove the pull handle
escutcheon. Remove the screws behind pull handle escutcheon.
5. Remove the armrest. Remove the screws behind armrest.
6. Remove the step lamp (if equipped). Disconnect the harness connector.
7. Remove the door finisher and disconnect lock cable and handle cable from the door handle
assembly. Refer to "Removal and Installation". Disconnect the rear door tweeter speaker connector.
Page 3737
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. -
Check the brake pedal for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking when applying
or releasing the brake pedal.
- Check the brake pedal adjustable feature for smooth operation. There should be no binding or
sticking when adjusting the brake pedal forward or backward.
- After installing the brake pedal assembly, be sure to adjust it. Refer to See: Testing and
Inspection/Standard Pedal, See: Testing and Inspection/Adjustable Pedal.
Page 5387
3. Insert the screwdriver into either of the slots shown in Figure 1.
4. Turn the screwdriver until the two cover pieces separate (see Figure 2).
5. Replace the battery.
^ Make sure the + side of the battery faces the bottom cover piece.
6. Reattach the two cover pieces by pushing them together.
7. Turn on the vehicle and confirm the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator is not illuminated
in the dot matrix display.
8. If the indicator is still illuminated:
a) Turn off and exit the vehicle, making sure to close the door.
b) Re-enter the vehicle and turn it on. The indicator should be off.
Page 4944
Seat Belt: Service and Repair Rear Seat Belt
SEAT BELTS
Removal and Installation of Rear Seat Belt
REMOVAL 1. Remove rear kicking plates. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 2. Remove rear seat assembly. Refer to See: Body and
Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear Seat/Removal and
Installation.
3. Remove seat belt D-ring anchor bolt cover and bolt. 4. Remove seat belt lower anchor cover and
bolt. 5. Remove lower side finisher. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim
Panel/Service and Repair.
Page 1572
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Installation of Thermostat Install the thermostat with the whole circumference of each flange part fit securely inside the rubber
ring as shown.
- Install the thermostat with the jiggle valve facing upwards.
Installation of Water Outlet Pipe and Heater Pipe First apply a neutral detergent to the O-rings,
then quickly insert the insertion parts of the water outlet pipe and heater pipe into the installation
holes.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Check for leaks of the engine coolant. Refer to See: Coolant/Testing and Inspection.
- Start and warm up the engine. Visually check for leaks of the engine coolant.
Page 2275
Information Bus: Vehicle Damage Warnings
Precaution For Trouble Diagnosis
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Trouble Diagnosis
CAUTION: Never apply 7.0 V or more to the measurement terminal.
- Use a tester with open terminal voltage of 7.0 V or less.
- Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal when
checking the harness.
Precaution For Harness Repair
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Harness Repair
- Solder the repaired area and wrap tape around the soldered area.
NOTE: A fray of twisted lines must be within 110 mm (4.33 in).
- Bypass connection is never allowed at the repaired area.
NOTE: Bypass connection may cause CAN communication error. The spliced wire becomes
separated and the characteristics of twisted line are lost. Replace the applicable harness as an assembly if error is detected on the shield lines of CAN
communication line.
Precaution For Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "Air Bag" And "Seat Belt Pre-Tensioner"
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
The Supplemental Restraint System such as "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER",
used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front
passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage
front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag
deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and
whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system
safely is included in the Restraint Systems Information.
WARNING:
Page 5051
Consult-III Checking System
Standardized Relay
STANDARDIZED RELAY
Description
NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided
into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays.
Page 2488
^ CONSULT will display "CMPLT" in the top right corner of the screen when the IAVL procedure is
finished. See Figure 7.
f. Once the IAVL procedure is finished, proceed with step 7.
For 2005 and Later MY Vehicles ONLY: Enter VIN Into New Service Replacement ECM
7. Enter the VIN into the new service replacement ECM as follows:
a. Select [ENGINE] on the "Select System" screen. See Figure 8.
b. Select [WORK SUPPORT] on the "Select Diag Mode" screen. See Figure 9.
Page 5706
c. Remove the Fuel Temperature Sensor from the Plastic Retaining Clip.
d. Remove the wires from the Securing Tab.
e. Unplug the White Wire Connector at the top of the fuel pump.
^ DO NOT disturb the Black Wire Connector located next to the white Wire connector.
f. Carefully cut the tie-wrap securing the harnesses to the corrugated tubing.
CAUTION:
DO NOT damage the wires or the wire insulation when cutting the Tie-Wrap.
Page 2034
- No. 1 cylinder compression TDC
- Measure valve clearance using suitable tool. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Engine Lubrication/Specifications.
CAUTION: If the inspection was carried out with a cold engine, make sure the values with a fully
warmed up engine are still within specifications. 8. Turn the crankshaft pulley clockwise 270° from
the position of No. 1 cylinder compression TDC to obtain No. 3 cylinder compression TDC. 9.
Measure valve clearances at the locations marked "X" as shown in the table below (locations
indicated with white arrow).
NOTE: Firing order 1-8-7-3-6-5-4-2
Page 5617
Page 1276
Valve Cover: Service and Repair Removal And Installation
ROCKER COVER
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Cover. 2. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly.
Refer to See: Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and
Repair/Removal and Installation (for LH only).
3. Move the harness on the upper rocker cover and its peripheral aside. 4. Remove the electric
throttle control actuator, loosening the bolts diagonally (for LH only). 5. Remove the ignition coils.
Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Removal
and Installation. 6. Remove the PCV hose from the PCV control valves.
7. Loosen the rocker cover bolts in reverse order as shown using power tool.
CAUTION: Do not hold the rocker cover (RH) (B) by the oil filler neck. Arrow indicates Engine front
- A: Rocker cover LH
- B: Rocker cover RH
8. Remove the rocker cover.
INSTALLATION 1. Apply liquid gasket to the joint part of the cylinder head and camshaft bracket
following the steps below.
NOTE: Illustration shows an example of (LH) side (zoomed in shows No.1 camshaft bracket).
a. Use illustration "a" to apply liquid gasket to the joint part of No.1 camshaft bracket and cylinder
head. b. Use illustration "b" to apply liquid gasket 90° to illustration "a".
Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type
Specifications.
Lighting - Exterior Lamp Fogging Inspection
Turn Signal Lamp: All Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Exterior Lamp Fogging Inspection
Classification: EL03-030E
Reference: NTB03-074E
Date: January 4, 2010
EXTERIOR LAMP FOGGING
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles and Service Procedure sections have been
revised. Please discard all previous versions.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2001-2010 Nissan, All Models
SERVICE INFORMATION
Occasionally customers may notice water vapor or fog in the exterior lamps. This is generally NOT
due to a defect.
The following information, illustrations, and flow chart are provided to help you in determining if an
incident for water/condensation in the lamps is normal or not.
All current exterior lamp assemblies are vented to the atmosphere (not sealed).
^ This is necessary to allow for expansion and contraction of air from temperature "variations"
(warmer or colder) without damage to the lamp.
^ Moisture in the air sometimes "travels" into and out of the lamp assembly through these vents.
^ Certain environmental conditions may cause moisture to condense.
^ The fogging/cloudiness should disappear over time when the lamp is in a dry environment.
Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the exterior lights based on environmental conditions
or sudden temperature changes (such as in a car wash). This is normal. See Figure 1.
NOTE:
This condensation can appear anywhere on the outer lens, typically at its coldest location.
Page 822
> Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires
> Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire
Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics
in this bulletin.
^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification.
1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle:
^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge
^ Road Crown Gauge
NOTE:
Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use.
2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test.
3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern.
^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60
mph.
^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel
position during the road test.
NOTE:
^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have
been resolved.
^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then
diagnosis cannot be performed.
4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center"
below.
5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel
Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete.
6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step.
Other Service Information
Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel
spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road
(see example in Figure 1).
If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the
normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain
water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place.
Page 4603
2. Mount transmitter on rim and slowly tighten transmitter nut to specification.
CAUTION: Do not over tighten transmitter nut.
Transmitter nut : 7.7 N.m (0.79 kg-m, 68 in-lb)
3. Place wheel on turntable of tire machine. Ensure that transmitter is 270 degrees from
mounting/dismounting head.
NOTE: Do not touch transmitter with mounting head. 4. Lubricate tire well, and install second side
of tire as normal. Ensure that tire does not rotate relative to rim. 5. Inflate tire and balance wheel
and tire assembly. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Balancing Wheels. 6. Install wheel and tire
assembly in appropriate wheel position on vehicle.
NOTE: If replacing the transmitter, then transmitter wake up operation must be performed. Refer to
See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmitter Wake Up Operation.
7. Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction
Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing
and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing Control
Unit/Description See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing
Control Unit/Special Repair Requirement See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes /
Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Adjustment Of
Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position/Description See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock
Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Adjustment Of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position/Special Repair Requirement.
Page 4610
7. After the tire/wheel is balanced, apply an index mark to the tire at the location of the valve stem
(see Figure 6).
^ This index mark will allow you to tell if the tire has slipped on the rim (see Figure 7).
Tire to Rim Slippage:
^ Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs, the tire
may become un-balanced.
^ Overtime the tire lubricate will dry, eliminating the lubricant as a cause of tire slippage.
^ Some tire lubricants may require up to 24 hours to completely dry.
^ If slippage occurs, the tire/wheel will need to be re-balanced.
WORK - AID AVOID CUSTOMER RETURNS FOR VIBRATION
Page 5946
Should a customer note water in a lamp assembly, please use the above flow chart to determine if
the condition is normal or requires lamp replacement.
Page 1591
Heater Control Valve: Description and Operation Manual A/C (Type 1)
WATER VALVE CIRCUIT
Description
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Water Valve
The water valve (1) cuts the flow of engine coolant to the heater core to allow for maximum cooling
during A/C operation. It is controlled by the front air control.
Page 2138
15. Select OK
VIN registration is complete
Page 1801
4. Select Engine
5. Select OK
6. Select Work Support
Page 2006
until the fuel gauge indicates the level as shown, or less.
- If the fuel pump does not operate, use the following procedure to drain the fuel to the specified
level. a. Insert a suitable hose of less than 15 mm (0.59 in) diameter into the fuel filler pipe through
the fuel filler opening to drain the fuel from fuel
filler pipe.
b. Remove the LH rear wheel and tire. Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and
Repair/Rotation .
c. Remove the fuel filler pipe shield. d. Disconnect the fuel filler hose from the fuel filler pipe and
disconnect the vent hose quick connector.
e. Insert a suitable hose into the fuel tank through the fuel filler hose to drain the fuel from the fuel
tank.
3. Release the fuel pressure from the fuel lines. Refer to See: Fuel Delivery and Air
Induction/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/Fuel Pressure Check .
4. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 5. Remove the three nuts and remove fuel line pump
protector.
6. Disconnect the EVAP hose at the EVAP canister. 7. Disconnect the fuel level sensor, fuel filter,
and fuel pump assembly electrical connector and the fuel feed hose.
Disconnect the quick connector as follows: Hold the sides of the connector, push in tabs and pull out the tube.
Page 4221
Power Distribution Module: Service Precautions
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
The Supplemental Restraint System such as "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER",
used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front
passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage
front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag
deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and
whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system
safely is included in the Restraint Systems Information.
WARNING: To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed
by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
- Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to
personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and
Air Bag Module, see the SRS Air Bag.
- Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed. SRS
wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.
Side Curtain Air Bag Module
Side Air Bag: Service and Repair Side Curtain Air Bag Module
SIDE CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
CAUTION: Do not attempt to repair or replace damaged direct-connect SRS component connectors. If a direct
connect harness connector is damaged, the harness must be replaced.
- Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at
least 3 minutes.
- When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front of air bag module.
- Do not insert any foreign objects (screwdriver, etc.) into air bag module or harness connectors.
- Do not disassemble air bag module.
- Do not expose the air bag module to temperatures exceeding 90°C (194°F).
- Replace side curtain air bag module if it has been dropped or sustained an impact.
- Do not allow oil, grease or water to come in contact with the air bag module.
1. Remove headlining. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service
and Repair. 2. Disconnect side curtain air bag module connector. For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors, refer to See: Service and Repair.
3. Remove the bolts in order starting at the front or rear, and remove the side curtain air bag
module.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors, refer to See: Service and Repair.
- After replacement of side curtain air bag module, perform self-diagnosis to check that no
malfunction is detected. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic
Overview/SRS Operation Check.
Page 2107
Locations
Page 5853
Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Transmitter (Pressure Sensor)
REMOVAL
CAUTION: DO NOT use center hole cone-type clamping machines to hold the wheel assembly
during tire removal/installation or balancing or damage to the wheel paint, cladding or chrome may
result. Use only rim-type or universal lug-type clamping machines to hold the wheel assembly
during servicing. 1. Deflate tire. Unscrew transmitter nut and allow transmitter to fall into tire.
2. Gently bounce tire so that transmitter falls to bottom of tire. Place wheel and tire assembly on tire
changing machine and break both tire beads. Ensure that the transmitter remains at the bottom of
the tire while breaking the bead.
3. Turn tire so that valve hole is at bottom, and gently bounce the tire to ensure transmitter is near
valve hole. Carefully lift tire onto turntable and
position valve hole (and transmitter) 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head.
4. Lubricate tire well, and remove top side of tire. Reach inside the tire and remove the transmitter.
5. Remove the second side of the tire as normal.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: DO NOT use center hole cone-type clamping machines to hold the wheel assembly
during tire removal/installation or balancing or damage to the wheel paint, cladding or chrome may
result. Use only rim-type or universal lug-type clamping machines to hold the wheel assembly
during servicing.
1. Place first side of tire onto rim.
Service and Repair
Parking Assist Control Module: Service and Repair
SONAR CONTROL UNIT
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear panel. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim
Panel/Service and Repair. 2. For king cab models only, pull up the carpet to gain access to the
sonar control unit. Sonar control unit (king cab) (1)
- Sonar control unit (crew cab) (2)
3. Disconnect the sonar control unit connector. 4. Remove the two bolts and remove the sonar
control unit.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Service and Repair
Mud Flap: Service and Repair
MUDGUARD
Removal and Installation
NOTE: Crew Cab shown King Cab similar.
Lighting - Exterior Lamp Fogging Inspection
Tail Lamp: All Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Exterior Lamp Fogging Inspection
Classification: EL03-030E
Reference: NTB03-074E
Date: January 4, 2010
EXTERIOR LAMP FOGGING
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles and Service Procedure sections have been
revised. Please discard all previous versions.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2001-2010 Nissan, All Models
SERVICE INFORMATION
Occasionally customers may notice water vapor or fog in the exterior lamps. This is generally NOT
due to a defect.
The following information, illustrations, and flow chart are provided to help you in determining if an
incident for water/condensation in the lamps is normal or not.
All current exterior lamp assemblies are vented to the atmosphere (not sealed).
^ This is necessary to allow for expansion and contraction of air from temperature "variations"
(warmer or colder) without damage to the lamp.
^ Moisture in the air sometimes "travels" into and out of the lamp assembly through these vents.
^ Certain environmental conditions may cause moisture to condense.
^ The fogging/cloudiness should disappear over time when the lamp is in a dry environment.
Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the exterior lights based on environmental conditions
or sudden temperature changes (such as in a car wash). This is normal. See Figure 1.
NOTE:
This condensation can appear anywhere on the outer lens, typically at its coldest location.
Page 775
Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Front Power Window Switch
FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the front power window switch assembly from the front door finisher RH.
Refer to See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and
Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair.
2. Remove the front power window switch (1) from the power window switch finisher (2) by
releasing the tabs using suitable tool (A).
CAUTION: Wrap a cloth around suitable tools to protect components from damage.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Service and Repair
Evaporator Core: Service and Repair
EVAPORATOR
Removal and Installation for Evaporator
Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
REMOVAL 1. Remove the heater core. Refer to See: Heater Core/Service and Repair . 2. Remove
the defroster mode door arm. 3. Separate the heater core and cooling unit case.
Page 4611
Print this page and keep it by your tire mounting equipment
Page 1578
Radiator Cooling Fan: Service and Repair Removal And Installation
ENGINE COOLING FAN
Removal and Installation (Crankshaft Driven Type)
REMOVAL 1. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. Refer to See: Engine/Tune-up and
Engine Performance Checks/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and
Repair/Removal and Installation.
2. Remove the engine front undercover using power tool. 3. Remove the lower radiator shroud.
Refer to See: Radiator/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. 4. Remove the drive belt.
Refer to See: Engine/Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and
Repair. 5. Remove the cooling fan.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Fan Coupling Inspect fan coupling for oil leakage and bimetal conditions.
Fan Bracket Visually check that there is no significant looseness in the fan bracket shaft, and that it turns
smoothly by hand.
- If there are any unusual concerns, replace the cooling fan pulley.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Install cooling fan with its front mark "F" facing front of engine. Refer to "Removal and Installation
(Crankshaft Driven Type)".
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Check for leaks of the engine coolant. Refer to See: Coolant/Testing and Inspection.
- Start and warm up the engine. Visually make sure that there are no leaks of the engine coolant.
Page 4076
2. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connectors and ground.
Does continuity exist? YES - Inspection End. NO - Repair or replace harness.
Page 2532
In the Administrator window select My Computer.
In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C).
In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder.
In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder.
In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder.
When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time.
Select and print the file/screen image that you want.
NOTE:
During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems.
Erase DTCs from all systems
22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen).
23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear.
24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.)
25. Select Connect.
26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
Page 2228
^ CONSULT will display "CMPLT" in the top right corner of the screen when the IAVL procedure is
finished. See Figure 7.
f. Once the IAVL procedure is finished, proceed with step 7.
For 2005 and Later MY Vehicles ONLY: Enter VIN Into New Service Replacement ECM
7. Enter the VIN into the new service replacement ECM as follows:
a. Select [ENGINE] on the "Select System" screen. See Figure 8.
b. Select [WORK SUPPORT] on the "Select Diag Mode" screen. See Figure 9.
Page 2111
^ If this column is blank (no part number listed), this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to
ASIST for further diagnostic information.
^ If a Part Number is listed, write it on the Repair Order.
B. Compare the Part Number you wrote down to the numbers in the Current ECM P/N column in
Table A or B (as it applies) shown at the beginning of this bulletin.
^ If there is a match, this bulletin applies. Continue with the reprogramming procedure.
^ If there is not a match, this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to ASIST for further
diagnostic information.
3. If this bulletin applies and you have performed ECM reprogramming, the screen in Figure 2
appears when reprogramming is complete.
NOTE:
If the screen in Figure 2 does not display (reprogramming does not complete).
4. Make sure to erase DTCs from all Systems.
NOTE:
During the reprogramming, DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all
systems.
5. Test drive the vehicle and make sure it operates correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF.
^ If the Check Engine light comes ON, go back to ASIST for further diagnostic information. Refer to
the applicable Electronic Service Manual as
needed.
^ Diagnosis and repairs beyond the ECM reprogramming are not covered by this bulletin.
Lighting - Exterior Lamp Fogging Inspection
Fog/Driving Lamp: All Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Exterior Lamp Fogging Inspection
Classification: EL03-030E
Reference: NTB03-074E
Date: January 4, 2010
EXTERIOR LAMP FOGGING
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles and Service Procedure sections have been
revised. Please discard all previous versions.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2001-2010 Nissan, All Models
SERVICE INFORMATION
Occasionally customers may notice water vapor or fog in the exterior lamps. This is generally NOT
due to a defect.
The following information, illustrations, and flow chart are provided to help you in determining if an
incident for water/condensation in the lamps is normal or not.
All current exterior lamp assemblies are vented to the atmosphere (not sealed).
^ This is necessary to allow for expansion and contraction of air from temperature "variations"
(warmer or colder) without damage to the lamp.
^ Moisture in the air sometimes "travels" into and out of the lamp assembly through these vents.
^ Certain environmental conditions may cause moisture to condense.
^ The fogging/cloudiness should disappear over time when the lamp is in a dry environment.
Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the exterior lights based on environmental conditions
or sudden temperature changes (such as in a car wash). This is normal. See Figure 1.
NOTE:
This condensation can appear anywhere on the outer lens, typically at its coldest location.
Page 4296
Page 2455
15. Select OK
VIN registration is complete
A/C - Blower Motor Intermittently Sticks On High
Blower Motor Resistor: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Blower Motor Intermittently Sticks On
High
Classification: HA08-006A
Reference: NTB09-011A
Date: March 10, 2010
BLOWER FAN INTERMITTENTLY STUCK ON HIGH SPEED
This bulletin has been amended. The Claims Information has been updated. Please discard all
earlier versions.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2008 - 2009 Titan (A60) 2008 - 2009 Armada (TA60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
HVAC blower fan stays on high speed when the blower fan switch is on LOW for up to 60 seconds
and then returns to normal operation.
While operating with this condition the blower speed cannot be changed, but it can be turned off.
This condition may be intermittent.
AND
The heater switch resistor is 3 FIN type in the front heater unit.
ACTION
Replace the 3 FIN heater switch resistor in front heater unit with a 5 FIN heater switch resistor, the
part number is listed in the Parts Information table.
NOTE:
Do not change the rear heater switch resistor from 3 FIN to 5 FIN.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing the repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Page 3221
Shifter A/T: Removal and Replacement
SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM
Control Device Removal and Installation
Floor shift models
Column shift models
Locations
Speedometer Module: Locations
METER SYSTEM
SPEEDOMETER : Component Parts Location
ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information
Traction Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information
Classification: BR10-011
Reference: NTB10-145
Date: December 15, 2010
ABS / VDC CAN DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION
APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2005-2011 Nissan vehicles with ABS and/or VDC
SERVICE INFORMATION
When diagnosing a vehicle with an ABS or VDC / SLIP warning light on with DTCs stored in the
ABS / VDC actuator control unit, perform DTC diagnosis first.
^ Do not replace the ABS / VDC actuator control unit without being supported by the DTC
diagnosis.
^ Do not erase DTCs before performing DTC diagnosis.
^ Always fully diagnose before performing any repairs.
When DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) is the only DTC stored in the ABS / VDC actuator
control unit, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART below. This will assist in proper diagnosis results and
repairs in addition to using diagnostic information in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM).
^ If DTC U1000 is found stored in other systems, refer to NIB10-066 and the applicable ESM.
^ If other DTCs are found stored in ABS / VDC along with U1000, follow the diagnosis steps for
those DTCs in the applicable ESM.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for
repairs performed.
Component Description
Starter Motor: Description and Operation Component Description
STARTING SYSTEM
Component Description
Page 2349
Is the inspection result normal? YES (Present error) - Check the following items again. Decision of CAN system type.
- Not received CONSULT-III data [SELF-DIAG RESULTS, CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR ("ECU
list" included)].
- Not copied from on-board diagnosis.
- Procedure for detecting root cause.
YES (Past error) - Error was detected in the main line between the combination meter and the ABS
actuator and electric unit (control unit). NO - Repair the main line between the harness connector
E152 and the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
DIFF Branch Line Circuit
DIFF BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure
1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the battery cable from the
negative terminal. 3. Check the terminals and connectors of the differential lock control unit for
damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and connector side). Is the inspection result normal?
YES - GO TO 2. NO - Repair the terminal and connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN
CIRCUIT 1. Disconnect the connector of differential lock control unit. 2. Check the resistance
between the differential lock control unit harness connector terminals.
Is the measurement value within the specification? YES - GO TO 3. NO - Repair the differential
lock control unit branch line. 3. CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check the
power supply and the ground circuit of the differential lock control unit. Refer to See: Testing and
Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/P Code Charts/P1833. Is
the inspection result normal? YES (Present error) - Replace the differential lock control unit. Refer
to See: Transmission Control Systems/Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain/Relays
and Modules - Differential/Control Unit/Service and Repair. YES (Past error) - Error was detected
in the differential lock control unit branch line. NO - Repair the power supply and the ground circuit.
ADP Branch Line Circuit
ADP BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure
1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the battery cable from the
negative terminal. 3. Check the following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose
connection (unit side and connector side). Driver seat control unit
- Harness connector B200
- Harness connector B37
Is the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO 2. NO - Repair the terminal and connector.
Brakes - Front Brake Pad Service Supplement
Brake Caliper: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Front Brake Pad Service Supplement
Classification: BR10-005
Reference: NTB10-081
Date: June 25, 2010
2004 - 2010 TITAN AND ARMADA; FRONT BRAKE PAD SERVICE
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2010 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2010 Armada (TA60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
Front brake service is needed that will require the removal of the front brake caliper cylinder body
or brake pads,
ACTION:
Follow the Service Procedure in this bulletin as a supplement to the brake service.
NOTE:
The supplemental items in the Service Procedure of this bulletin supersede any previous detailed
brake pad removal procedures.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You
MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Partially drain the brake fluid.
^ Refer to section BR (DRAIN and REFILL) in the Service Manual.
2. Remove the front wheels.
^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed for front wheel removal.
Page 746
Recommended tire inflating tools.
Aftermarket Tire Sealers
Aftermarket tire sealants and/or aerosol repair kits should not be used (refer to the vehicle's
Owner's Manual).
^ Some aftermarket tire sealers and/or aerosol repair kits contain chemicals and propellants that
can cause damage to TPMS sensors.
NOTE:
Damage caused by use of aftermarket tire sealants contrary to recommendations in the vehicle
Owner's Manual is not covered under the Nissan New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Page 5995
Marker Lamp: Service and Repair Removal And Installation
REAR COMBINATION LAMP
Removal and Installation
Removal 1. Remove rear combination lamp bolts.
2. Pull rear combination lamp to remove from the vehicle. 3. Disconnect rear combination lamp
connector.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
System Diagram
Shift Indicator: Description and Operation System Diagram
METER SYSTEM
SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR : System Diagram
Page 1871
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations Without Intelligent Key System
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Terminal Layout
TERMINAL LAYOUT
Page 3401
ASSEMBLY
Journal 1. Assemble the journal bearings. Apply multipurpose grease on the bearing inner surface.
NOTE: During assembly, use caution so that the needle bearings do not fall down. 2. Select snap
rings that will provide the specified play in an axial direction of the journal, and install them. Refer to
See: Specifications/Propeller
Shaft 3S1410/Snap Ring.
NOTE: Select snap rings with a difference in thickness at both sides within 0.02 mm (0.0008 in). 3.
Adjust the thrust clearance between the bearing and snap ring to zero by tapping the yoke.
4. Make sure that the journal moves smoothly and is below the joint flex effort specification. Refer
to See: Specifications/Propeller Shaft
3S1410/General Specification.
Center Support Bearing 1. Apply a thin coat of multi-purpose grease to both the propeller shaft tube
and the inside surface of the center support bearing.
Page 2304
CREATE INTERVIEW SHEET Fill out the symptom described by the customer, vehicle condition,
and CAN system type on the interview sheet.
Interview Sheet (Example)
Page 4051
With Intelligent Key System
Ignition Relay: Locations With Intelligent Key System
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Terminal Layout
TERMINAL LAYOUT
Page 803
5. Make sure the targets are mounted correctly.
^ Mount the top claws first.
^ Claws must be flush against the wheel as shown in Figure 13.
^ Target must be flush against the center support as shown in Figure 14.
^ Make sure the targets are positioned with the arrow UP or level.
IMPORTANT:
Page 1833
i. Once the entire VIN is entered (a second time), select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See
Figure 16.
j. Select [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen to complete the VIN registration process. See
Figure 17.
k. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Page 4082
Power Distribution Module: Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters
Reference Value
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Reference Value
VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL
Page 6074
If the moisture trickles, drips, or pools, it may not be considered normal and the lamp assembly
may have a water leak path. See Figure 2 for an example.
If large drops of water collect inside the lens, refer to the flow chart below to find the next step.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Page 1383
Intake Manifold: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
INTAKE MANIFOLD
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Partially drain the engine coolant. Refer to See: Cooling System/Coolant/Service and
Repair.
WARNING: To avoid the danger of being scalded, never drain the engine coolant when the engine
is hot. 2. Remove the engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Cover. 3. Release the fuel pressure. Refer to See:
Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests
and
General Diagnostics/Fuel Pressure Check.
4. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. Refer to See: Tune-up and Engine Performance
Checks/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and
Repair/Removal and Installation.
5. Disconnect the fuel tube quick connector on the engine side. Perform the following steps to disconnect the quick connector using Tool.
Tool number : 16441 6N210 (J-45488)
a. Remove quick connector cap (engine side only).
b. With the sleeve side of Tool facing quick connector, install Tool onto fuel tube. c. Insert Tool into
quick connector until sleeve contacts and goes no further. Hold the Tool in that position.
CAUTION: Inserting the Tool hard will not disconnect quick connector.
Specifications
Valve Clearance: Specifications
Valve Clearance
Page 1137
Wheels: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Road Wheel
Page 3237
Transmission Cooler: Service and Repair Inspection
A/T FLUID COOLER
Inspection
After performing all procedures, ensure that all remaining oil is cleaned from all components.
Page 2186
Specifications
Idle Speed: Specifications
Idle Speed
Page 3467
Control Module: Locations Electrical Units Location
Page 4509
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 2292
Combination Meter
Transfer Control Unit
NOTE: Replace the unit when "NG" is indicated on the "INITIAL DIAG".
Drivetrain - Driveshaft U-Joint Noise/Vibration
Universal Joint: All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Driveshaft U-Joint Noise/Vibration
Classification: PD10-001
Reference: NTB10-052
Date: April 8, 2010
NOISE AND/OR VIBRATION FROM PROPELLER SHAFT U-JOINT (JOURNAL/JOURNAL
BEARINGS)
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) 2004-2010 Titan (A60) 2005-2010 Frontier (D40)
2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2010 Xterra (N50)
IF YOU CONFIRM
The propeller shaft u-joint (journal/journal bearings) is the source of noise and/or vibration on an
Applied Vehicle.
Diagnose by evaluating the u-joint with the propeller shaft removed. If the u-joint axial play or flex
effort exceed the specifications in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM), or if a "ratchety" feel is
exhibited during rotation, the u-joint (journal/journal bearings) should be replaced.
ACTION
Replace the u-joint (journal/journal bearings).
^ Refer to the applicable ESM for removal and installation instructions.
NOTE:
Do not replace the entire propeller shaft assembly if u-joint (journal/journal bearings) replacement
can resolve the incident, should it occur.
PARTS INFORMATION
U-joint (journal/journal bearings) kits are now available for all Applied Vehicles. Refer to the
electronic parts catalog (FAST or equivalent) to locate the appropriate parts needed for this repair.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the indicated FRT and
appropriate coding for repairs preformed.
Interior - Passenger Power Seat Switch Replacement
Technical Service Bulletin # 08-039B Date: 100119
Interior - Passenger Power Seat Switch Replacement
Classification: EL07-038B
Reference: NTB08-039B
Date: January 19, 2010
2004-2010 TITAN AND ARMADA; PASSENGER SEAT SWITCH SERVICEABILITY
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles and Service Procedure sections have been
revised. Please discard all previous copies of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Titan (A60) - Bucket Seats Only 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) Bucket Seats Only
IF YOU CONFIRM
The passenger side power seat switch needs to be replaced for any reason.
ACTION
Refer to the Service Procedure to replace the switch.
WARNING:
^ This vehicle seat is equipped with the Occupant Classification System (OCS) part of the
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS).
^ In this Service Procedure you will be removing and re-installing the outboard (switch side) J-clip
of the seat bottom cover.
^ Only the outboard J-clip should be removed. Removal of any other J-Clips may affect OCS
performance.
^ When re-installing the outboard J-Clip, make sure the J-Clip is securely attached. A loose J-Clip
may affect OCS performance.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
Page 4872
Page 3096
Page 1127
Recommended tire inflating tools.
Aftermarket Tire Sealers
Aftermarket tire sealants and/or aerosol repair kits should not be used (refer to the vehicle's
Owner's Manual).
^ Some aftermarket tire sealers and/or aerosol repair kits contain chemicals and propellants that
can cause damage to TPMS sensors.
NOTE:
Damage caused by use of aftermarket tire sealants contrary to recommendations in the vehicle
Owner's Manual is not covered under the Nissan New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Locations
Page 4458
Steering Gear: Overhaul
POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
Disassembly and Assembly
CAUTION: Secure steering gear assembly with a vise, using copper plates or something similar to prevent it
from being damaged. Do not grip cylinder with a vise.
- Before performing disassembly, clean steering gear assembly with kerosene. Be careful not to
bring any kerosene into contact with the discharge and return port connectors.
DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove cylinder tubes from gear housing assembly. 2. Loosen lock nuts of
outer sockets, and remove outer sockets. 3. Remove boot clamps of the small diameter side and
the large diameter side, then remove boot.
CAUTION: When removing boots, be careful not to damage inner socket and gear housing
assembly. If they are damaged, change them to avoid oil leaks. 4. Remove inner sockets.
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY
Boot Check boot for tears, cracks and deformation. Replace if necessary.
Gear Housing Assembly Check gear housing assembly for dents, cracks or damage. Replace as
an assembly if necessary.
Outer Socket and Inner Socket
SWING TORQUE
Page 6158
Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Rear Power Window Switch
Rear Door Switch
REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH
Removal and Installation - Rear Door Switch
REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear power window switch assembly from the rear door finisher. Refer to
See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front
Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair.
2. Remove the rear power window switch (2) from the power window switch finisher (1) by
releasing the tabs using suitable tool (A).
CAUTION: Wrap a cloth around suitable tools to protect components from damage.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Power Drop Glass Switch
REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH
Removal and Installation - Power Drop Glass Switch
REMOVAL 1. Release the pawls and remove the overhead console switch panel (1) from the
overhead console (2).
2. Disconnect the power drop glass switch (3). 3. Remove the power drop glass switch (3) from the
overhead console switch panel (1) by releasing the tabs using suitable tool.
CAUTION: Wrap a cloth around suitable tools to protect components from damage.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 2452
4. Select Engine
5. Select OK
6. Select Work Support
Page 2435
Restraints - Front Seat Belt Buckle Service Information
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-025 Date: 090325
Restraints - Front Seat Belt Buckle Service Information
Classification: BT09-007
Reference: NTB09-025
Date: March 25, 2009
FRONT SEAT BELT BUCKLE SERVICE
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2009 Titan (A60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
The front seat belt buckle needs to be replaced for any reason.
ACTION
Route the replacement buckle harness as shown in the SERVICE PROCEDURE below.
NOTE:
The routing of the replacement buckle wiring harness is different than the original.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
Service Procedure
FRONT LH BUCKLE REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Write down all radio station presets.
2. Disconnect both battery cables (negative cable first).
^ Wait at least 3 minutes after battery cables are disconnected before disconnecting any SRS
components.
3. Remove LH front seat and place on a clean surface. Refer to the appropriate section in the ESM
for removal procedure.
Page 1206
Camshaft: Service and Repair Inspection
CAMSHAFT
Inspection after Installation
INSPECTION OF CAMSHAFT SPROCKET (INT) OIL GROOVE
WARNING: Check when engine is cold so as to prevent burns from any splashing engine oil.
CAUTION: Perform this inspection only when DTC P0011 is detected in self-diagnostic results of
CONSULT-III and it is directed according to inspection procedure of Engine Control System. Refer
to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/P Code Charts/P0011. 1.
Check engine oil level. Refer to See: Engine Lubrication/Engine Oil/Testing and Inspection. 2.
Perform the following procedure so as to prevent the engine from being unintentionally started
while checking.
a. Release fuel pressure. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air
Induction/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/Fuel Pressure Check.
b. Disconnect ignition coil and injector harness connectors if practical.
3. Remove IVT control solenoid valve. 4. Crank engine, and then make sure that engine oil comes
out from IVT control cover oil hole. End cranking after checking.
WARNING: Be careful not to touch rotating parts (drive belts, idler pulley, and crankshaft pulley,
etc.).
CAUTION: Engine oil may squirt from IVT control solenoid valve installation hole during cranking. Use a shop
cloth to prevent engine oil from splashing on worker, engine components and vehicle.
- Do not allow engine oil to get on rubber components such as drive belts or engine mount
insulators. Immediately wipe off any splashed engine oil.
5. Clean oil groove between oil strainer and IVT control solenoid valve if engine oil does not come
out from IVT control valve cover oil hole. Refer
to See: Engine Lubrication/Diagrams/Schematic.
6. Remove components between IVT control solenoid valve and camshaft sprocket (INT), and then
check each oil groove for clogging. Clean oil groove if necessary.
7. After inspection, installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 2272
CAN System - Part 7
Page 3110
CAUTION
4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF.
^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure.
^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF.
^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear
defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel
heater, etc.
CAUTION
5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running.
If the cooling fans are running:
a. Turn the ignition OFF.
b. Wait for the engine to cool.
c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF).
d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running.
6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer.
7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress"
message to clear.
Page 2906
Knock Sensor: Locations
Page 2264
TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS
Page 274
Service and Repair
Control Module HVAC: Service and Repair
CONTROL UNIT
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the control knobs from the front air control unit. 2. Remove the cluster lid D.
Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Cluster LID D/Removal And Installation.
3. Remove the four screws (A) securing the front air control unit (1) to cluster lid D (2). 4. Remove
the front air control unit (1).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 5235
> Window glass run rubber is replaced.
> Window is partly opened and/or closed many times without being fully closed.
Page 5221
1. Raise the glass to the top position. 2. While pressing and holding the reset switch, lower the
glass to the bottom position. 3. Release the reset switch. Verify that the reset switch returns to the
original position, if not, pull the switch using suitable tool. 4. Raise the glass to the top position.
CAUTION: Do not operate the glass automatically to raise the glass to the top position.
Wheels/Tires - Accessory Wheel Lock
Installation/Removal
Wheel Fastener: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Accessory Wheel Lock
Installation/Removal
Classification: WT09-002
Reference: NTB09-056
Date: July 14, 2009
ACCESSORY WHEEL LOCKS INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan
SERVICE INFORMATION
Always use hand tools when installing or removing accessory wheel lock nuts.
WARNING:
Do not use power tools to install or remove accessory wheel lock nuts.
Use of an impact wrench or other power tool may cause permanent damage to the wheel lock nut
and/or key.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Accessory wheel locks, wheel lock keys, or vehicle wheels that are damaged due to improper
installation or removal will not be considered a manufacturer defect and will not be covered under
warranty.
Accessory Wheel Lock Installation / Removal Guidelines
^ For ease of removal, the wheel lock nut should always be the first lug nut removed.
^ If needed, clean threads on lug studs with a wire brush.
^ The wheel lock nut should always be the last lug nut tightened.
^ Always use the special key supplied in the wheel lock set to install and remove the wheel locks.
^ Always tighten the wheel lock nuts using a hand torque wrench to the torque specification in the
Service Manual.
Disclaimer
Page 3601
Control Unit: Service and Repair
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 2. Remove jack and tools. 3.
Remove upper bracket of center seat belt retractor and belt assembly. Refer to See: Restraint
Systems/Seat Belt Systems/Seat Belt/Service and
Repair/Rear Seat Belt.
4. Remove the necessary push pins and reposition rear panel out of the way. Refer to See: Body
and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim
Panel/Service and Repair.
5. Reposition the carpet to access differential lock control unit to disconnect connector. 6. Remove
the two nuts and remove differential lock control unit.
INSTALLATION Note the following, and installation is in the reverse order of removal. When installing differential lock control unit, tighten nuts to the specified torque.
Differential lock control unit nuts : 5.1 N.m (0.52 kg-m, 45 in-lb)
Service and Repair
Sound Proofing / Insulation: Service and Repair
BODY CONSTRUCTION
Foam Repair
During factory body assembly, foam insulators are installed in certain body panels and locations
around the vehicle. Use the following procedure(s) to replace any factory-installed foam insulators.
URETHANE FOAM APPLICATIONS Use commercially available spray foam for sealant (foam
material) repair of material used on vehicle. Read instructions on product for fill procedures.
FILL PROCEDURES 1. Fill procedures after installation of service part. Remove foam material remaining on vehicle side.
- Clean area in which foam was removed.
- Install service part.
- Insert nozzle into hole near fill area and fill foam material or fill in enough to close gap with the
service part.
2. Fill procedures before installation of service part. Remove foam material remaining on vehicle side.
- Clean area in which foam was removed.
- Fill foam material on wheelhouse outer side.
NOTE: Fill in enough to close gap with service part while avoiding flange area. Install service part.
NOTE: Refer to label for information on working times.
Page 5598
Audible Warning Device: Description and Operation Seat Belt Warning Chime
System Diagram
WARNING CHIME SYSTEM
SEAT BELT WARNING CHIME : System Diagram
System Description
WARNING CHIME SYSTEM
SEAT BELT WARNING CHIME : System Description
DESCRIPTION With ignition switch turned ON and driver seat belt unfastened, seat belt warning
chime will sound for approximately 6 seconds. BCM receives seat belt buckle switch signal from combination meter with CAN communication line.
- BCM detects ignition switch turned ON and seat belt buckle switch LH ON. And then transmits
buzzer output signal (seat belt warning chime) to combination meter with CAN communication line.
- When combination meter receives buzzer output signal (seat belt warning chime), it sounds the
buzzer.
WARNING OPERATION CONDITIONS
If all of the following conditions are fulfilled Ignition switch OFF to ON
- Seat belt buckle switch LH is ON (driver seat belt not fastened)
WARNING CANCEL CONDITIONS
Cancels the warning if any of the following conditions is fulfilled. Ignition switch OFF
- Seat belt buckle switch LH is OFF (driver seat belt fastened)
Component Description
WARNING CHIME SYSTEM
SEAT BELT WARNING CHIME : Component Description
Locations
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Locations
Page 2434
Engine Controls - DTC P0451 Stored In The ECM
Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine Controls - DTC P0451 Stored In The ECM
Classification: EC09-027
Reference: NTB09-121
Date: November 3, 2009
2009 TITAN AND ARMADA; DTC P0451 STORED
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2009 Titan (A60) 2009 Armada (TA60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
DTC P0451 (EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor Performance) is stored,
ACTIONS
1. Confirm this bulletin applies.
a. Check and compare your current ECM Part Number to Table A or B shown in this bulletin.
b. If that part number does not match one in Table A, this bulletin does not apply. Go back to
ASIST for further diagnostic and repair information.
2. If this bulletin applies, reprogram the ECM.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTIONS (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is
essential to successfully completing this repair.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Connect C-III to the vehicle to begin the reprogramming procedure.
Page 1852
Engine Control Module: Programming and Relearning
Procedure After Replacing ECM
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
Procedure After Replacing ECM
When replacing ECM, the following procedure must be performed. 1. Perform initialization of NVIS
(NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to See: Accessories and
Optional
Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/ECM
Re-Communicating Function.
2. Perform See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/VIN Registration. 3. Perform See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning. 4. Perform
See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning. 5. Perform See: Fuel Delivery and Air
Induction/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning. 6. Perform See: Computers and
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Idle Air Volume Learning.
VIN Registration
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
VIN Registration
DESCRIPTION VIN Registration is an operation to registering VIN in ECM. It must be performed
each time ECM is replaced.
NOTE: Accurate VIN which is registered in ECM may be required for Inspection and Maintenance
(I/M).
OPERATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-III 1. Check the VIN of the vehicle and note it. Refer to See: Application and
ID/Identification Number. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and engine stopped. 3. Select "VIN
REGISTRATION" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode. 4. Follow the instruction of CONSULT-III display.
Page 3887
Page 1436
NOTE: -
The above figure shows the relationship between the mating mark on each timing chain and that of
the corresponding sprocket, with the components installed.
- To install the timing chain and associated parts, start with those on the RH bank. The procedure
for installing parts on the LH bank is omitted because it is the same as that for installation on the
RH bank.
1. Make sure the crankshaft key and camshaft dowel pin RH bank and camshaft dowel pin LH bank
are facing in the direction shown. 2. Install the camshaft sprockets.
Page 1384
Hold Tool where it contacts and goes no further.
d. Draw and pull out quick connector straight from fuel tube.
CAUTION: -
Pull quick connector holding "A" position in illustration.
Do not pull with lateral force applied. O-ring inside quick connector may be damaged.
- Prepare container and cloth beforehand as fuel will leak out.
- Avoid fire and sparks.
- Be sure to cover openings of disconnected pipes with plug or plastic bag to avoid fuel leakage
and entry of foreign materials.
6. Remove or disconnect harnesses, brackets, vacuum hose, vacuum gallery and PCV hose and
tube from intake manifold. 7. Remove electric throttle control actuator by loosening bolts diagonally.
CAUTION: Handle carefully to avoid any damage to the electric throttle control actuator.
- Do not disassemble.
8. Remove the fuel injectors and fuel tube assembly. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel Rail/Service and
Repair/Removal and Installation.
9. Loosen the bolts in reverse order shown using power tool.
10. Remove the intake manifold.
CAUTION: Cover engine openings to avoid entry of foreign materials. Clean all gasket mating surfaces, do not reuse gaskets.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
- Tighten the intake manifold bolts in numerical order as shown.
- Install the EVAP canister purge control solenoid valve connector with it facing front of engine.
- Tighten the electronic throttle control actuator bolts of the electric throttle control actuator equally
and diagonally in several steps.
- After installation perform inspection after installation.
- Install the water hose so that its overlap width for connection is between 27 mm (1.06 in) and 32
mm (1.26 in) (target: 27 mm 1.06 in).
Connecting Quick Connector of Fuel Tube Install quick connector as follows (the steps are the
same for quick connectors on both engine side and vehicle side except for the quick connector
cap). 1. Make sure no foreign substances are deposited in and around tube and quick connector,
and they are not damaged. 2. Thinly apply new engine oil around the fuel tube from tip end to the
spool end.
Page 4197
HARNESS CONNECTOR (LEVER LOCKING TYPE) Lever locking type harness connectors are used on certain control units and control modules such
as ECM, ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), etc.
- Lever locking type harness connectors are also used on super multiple junction (SMJ)
connectors.
- Always confirm the lever is fully locked in place by moving the lever as far as it will go to ensure
full connection.
CAUTION: Always confirm the lever is fully released (loosened) before attempting to disconnect or connect
these connectors to avoid damage to the connector housing or terminals.
Page 842
Once you have set the target position, DO NOT reset it at anytime during the alignment process.
6. Begin the alignment procedure.
^ Follow all of the instructions for your particular equipment.
^ Refer to the Service Manual for alignment specifications.
If your equipment requires "rolling compensation". follow these additional tips:
^ DO NOT push or pull on the vehicle body.
IMPORTANT:
After performing "rolling compensation", DO NOT reset the target position.
When performing "caster sweep". follow these tips:
Specifications
Water Pump: Specifications
Water Pump
Page 3807
3. Install brake hose connection (A) and new copper washer to cylinder body and tighten to
specification.
CAUTION: Do not reuse copper washers.
- Securely attach brake hose to protrusion on cylinder body.
4. Refill with new brake fluid and bleed air. Refer to See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair. 5.
Check rear disc brake for drag and correct as necessary. 6. Install rear wheel and tires.
Disassembly and Assembly
REAR DISC BRAKE
Disassembly and Assembly
DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove pads from cylinder body. 2. Remove sliding sleeve and boot from
cylinder body.
Page 913
- No. 1 cylinder compression TDC
- Measure valve clearance using suitable tool. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Engine Lubrication/Specifications.
CAUTION: If the inspection was carried out with a cold engine, make sure the values with a fully
warmed up engine are still within specifications. 8. Turn the crankshaft pulley clockwise 270° from
the position of No. 1 cylinder compression TDC to obtain No. 3 cylinder compression TDC. 9.
Measure valve clearances at the locations marked "X" as shown in the table below (locations
indicated with white arrow).
NOTE: Firing order 1-8-7-3-6-5-4-2
Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-009 Date: 100119
Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure
Classification: EM09-015
Reference: NTB10-009
Date: January 19, 2010
REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR SEIZED EXHAUST SENSOR
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan vehicles
SERVICE INFORMATION
If an exhaust sensor is seized in the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube, perform the procedure
described in this bulletin to remove the sensor and prevent unnecessary replacement of the
exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube.
In most cases this procedure is successful. This is because the threads of the exhaust sensors are
made of a softer material than the part they thread into on the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube.
NOTE:
The replacement of exhaust manifolds/catalysts/front tubes for stripped exhaust sensor threads
may not be considered a warrantable expense.
This procedure can be performed by two methods:
Method #1 - If the Sensor Can Be Easily Accessed
^ The procedure can be performed on the vehicle.
^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube will not have to be removed.
Method #2 - If the Sensor Cannot Be Easily Accessed
^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube must be removed from the vehicle.
^ The procedure will be performed with the part clamped in a vice.
Method #2 is described in this bulletin. Method #1 is the same as Method #2 except that it is
performed on the vehicle.
Service Procedure
Rust Penetrant
Recommended rust penetrants to be used in this procedure:
Page 1669
WARNING:
Be careful of sharp edges after cutting off the excess band clamp.
7. After band clamp(s) installation, road test the vehicle to verify the repair.
Page 451
Removal Remove the rear axle shaft assembly. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive
Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and Repair/Rear Axle Shaft.
NOTE: It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle shaft assembly to replace the rear wheel
sensor rotor.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the old rear wheel sensor rotor.
- Do not reuse the rear axle oil seal. The rear axle oil seal must be replaced every time the rear
axle shaft assembly is removed from the rear axle shaft housing.
Page 2749
4. Install Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 and Fuel Pressure Gauge (from kit J-44321) as shown
in figure. Do not distort or bend fuel rail tube when installing fuel pressure gauge adapter.
- When reconnecting fuel hose, check the original fuel hose for damage and abnormality.
5. Turn ignition switch ON (reactivate fuel pump), and check for fuel leakage. 6. Start engine and
check for fuel leakage. 7. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge. During fuel pressure check, check for fuel leakage from fuel connection every 3 minutes.
At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2, 51 psi)
8. If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step. 9. Check the following. Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging
- Fuel filter for clogging
- Fuel pump
- Fuel pressure regulator for clogging
If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator. If NG, repair or replace.
10. Before disconnecting Fuel Pressure Gauge and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6, release fuel
pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE
RELEASE".
Page 3117
In the Administrator window select My Computer.
In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C).
In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder.
In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder.
In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder.
When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time.
Select and print the file/screen image that you want.
NOTE:
During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems.
Erase DTCs from all systems
22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen).
23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear.
24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.)
25. Select Connect.
26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
Page 2106
Page 2259
HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS
Sample/wiring diagram -example- For detail, refer to following See: How To Read Wiring Diagrams/Description.
Description
HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS
Description
Page 5195
8. Remove the TORX bolts (T30), and separate the door lock assembly from the door.
9. While pulling the outside handle bracket, slide it toward the front of the vehicle to remove it and
the door lock assembly as shown.
10. Disconnect the door lock actuator electrical connector.
11. Separate the outside handle cable connection (1) from the outside handle bracket.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: To install the key cylinder rod, be sure to rotate the key cylinder rod holder until a click
is felt.
Page 2769
8110 - 10-Pc. Line Disconnect Set
Page 1486
Page 4350
> Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires
> Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire
Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics
in this bulletin.
^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification.
1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle:
^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge
^ Road Crown Gauge
NOTE:
Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use.
2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test.
3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern.
^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60
mph.
^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel
position during the road test.
NOTE:
^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have
been resolved.
^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then
diagnosis cannot be performed.
4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center"
below.
5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel
Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete.
6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step.
Other Service Information
Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel
spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road
(see example in Figure 1).
If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the
normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain
water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place.
Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption
Recovery
PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM
Programming Interruption Recovery
Classification: EC10-015
Reference: NTB10-078
Date: June 21, 2010
REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE
SERVICE INFORMATION
A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption
Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin.
While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop
(become interrupted) before it is 100% complete.
One of two messages may appear:
^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe.
^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0".
In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if
the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped.
NOTE:
ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III.
The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service
Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later.
IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING
^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery.
^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads.
^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable.
^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter.
Service and Repair
Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair
COWL TOP
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the right and left wiper arms. Refer to See: Wiper and Washer
Systems/Wiper Arm/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the cowl top seal. Release the plastics clips on the cowl top seal which go through the cowl tops LH and RH and cowl
top extension.
3. Remove the cowl top covers LH and RH. Release the plastic clips under cowl top covers attaching to grommets on hoodledge.
- Disconnect the washer tubes from washer nozzles.
4. Remove the cowl top extension brackets LH and RH. Disconnect the wiper motor harness from cowl top extension bracket LH.
- Cowl top extension bracket LH must be removed prior to removal of the wiper motor and
connecting rod assembly.
5. Remove the wiper motor and connecting rod linkage. Refer to See: Wiper and Washer
Systems/Wiper Motor Linkage/Service and Repair. 6. Disconnect the windshield washer tube.
Refer to See: Diagrams/Mechanical Diagrams/Windshield Washer Hose. 7. Remove the A/C
low-pressure pipe bracket from cowl top extension. Refer to See: Heating and Air
Conditioning/Hose/Line HVAC/Service and
Repair/Low-Pressure Pipe.
8. Remove the drain tube from each side of cowl top extension. 9. Remove the cowl top extension.
INSTALLATION
Page 4266
MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. -
The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Abbreviation List
ABBREVIATIONS
Abbreviation List
The following ABBREVIATIONS are used:
Automatic Air Conditioner
Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Automatic Air Conditioner
IN-Vehicle Sensor
IN-VEHICLE SENSOR
Component Description
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
In-vehicle Sensor
The in-vehicle sensor (1) is located on the lower instrument panel LH. It converts variations in
temperature of passenger compartment air (drawn in through the integrated fan) into a resistance
value. It is then input into the front air control.
Intake Sensor
INTAKE SENSOR
System Description
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Intake Sensor
The intake sensor is located on the heater and cooling unit assembly. It converts temperature of air
after if passes through the evaporator into a resistance value which is then input to the front air
control.
Page 4340
5. Make sure the targets are mounted correctly.
^ Mount the top claws first.
^ Claws must be flush against the wheel as shown in Figure 13.
^ Target must be flush against the center support as shown in Figure 14.
^ Make sure the targets are positioned with the arrow UP or level.
IMPORTANT:
Exploded View
Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Exploded View
EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST
Exploded View
Page 4838
Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Description and Operation Manual A/C (Type 1)
INTAKE SENSOR
System Description
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Intake Sensor
The intake sensor is located on the heater and cooling unit assembly. It converts temperature of air
after if passes through the evaporator into a resistance value which is then input to the front air
control.
Page 187
Suspension - Rear Leaf Spring Clicking Noises
Shackle: Customer Interest Suspension - Rear Leaf Spring Clicking Noises
Classification: RA09-006
Reference: NTB10-011
Date: January 20, 2010
TITAN; LEAF SPRING NOISE
APPLIED VEHICLE: 2004-2009 Titan (A60)
APPLIED VINS: 2004-2008 All 2009 vehicles built before 1N6(*)A0(***)9N 319522
APPLIED DATES: 2004-2008 All 2009 vehicles built before August 26, 2009
IF YOU CONFIRM:
A clicking noise is coming from one or both leaf springs.
ACTION: Inspect the anti-windup clip bolts and bushings.
^ If replacement is determined as necessary, use the parts listed in PARTS INFORMATION in this
bulletin.
^ For repair procedure, refer to SERVICE PROCEDURE in this bulletin.
^ Do not replace the leaf spring assembly when anti-windup bolt and bushing replacement will
resolve the incident, if it should occur.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line claim using the claims coding shown.
PARTS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Page 3988
Starter Motor: Description and Operation System Diagram
STARTING SYSTEM
System Diagram
Front Disc Brake
Brake Rotor/Disc: Specifications Front Disc Brake
Front Disc Brake
Page 3730
Lock nut (A) : 18.7 N.m (1.9 kg-m, 14 ft-lb)
CAUTION: Make sure that the screw portion of the end of input rod is located inside the clevis. 3.
With the brake pedal pulled up and held by hand, press the stop lamp switch and the ASCD cancel
switch in until threaded ends contact the brake
pedal bracket.
4. With the threaded ends of the stop lamp switch and ASCD switch contacting the pedal bracket,
turn the switches 45° clockwise to lock in place.
Check that the stop lamp switch and ASCD cancel switch threaded end to brake pedal bracket gap
(C) is within specifications.
CAUTION: Make sure that the gap (C) between the brake pedal bracket and stop lamp switch and
ASCD cancel switch threaded ends are within specification. 5. Check the brake pedal for smooth
operation.
CAUTION:
Make sure that the stop lamp goes off when the brake pedal is released. 6. Start the engine and
check the height of the brake pedal when depressing it.
Page 4060
Page 4264
HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS
Sample/wiring diagram -example- For detail, refer to following See: How To Read Wiring Diagrams/Description.
Description
HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS
Description
Procedures
Fuel Filter: Procedures
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly
Fuel Level Sender Unit
Disassembly 1. Disconnect the harness connectors. 2. Remove the fuel sensor from the pump
assembly. 3. Remove the sending unit module and floater arm assembly.
Assembly Assembly is the reverse order of disassembly.
Page 5176
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
PLASTIC BUMPER
Removal 1. Remove the front grille. Refer to See: Grille/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the skid
plate or front under cover. 3. Remove the fog lamp, if equipped. Refer to See: Lighting and
Horns/Fog/Driving Lamp/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 4. Remove the screws and
fasteners and remove the plastic fascia assembly. Remove the fog lamp opening finisher, if equipped, from the plastic fascia assembly.
5. Remove the clips and energy absorber from the retainer bracket. 6. Remove the retainer
bracket. 7. Remove the front bumper brackets LH and RH. 8. Remove the front bumper stays LH
and RH.
Specifications
Alternator: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Generator
With Intelligent Key System
Starter Relay: Locations With Intelligent Key System
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Terminal Layout
TERMINAL LAYOUT
Page 1667
^ For band clamp(s) locations on your vehicle, refer to the pictures shown above.
Page 1339
EM-12
Page 5582
Locations
VDC/TCS/ABS
Page 3774
5. Check rear disc brake for drag and correct as necessary. 6. Install rear wheel and tires.
Page 4291
Locations
Page 3310
Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Rear Final Drive M226
FRONT OIL SEAL
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove rear propeller shaft. Refer to See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and
Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Propeller Shaft 2S1410 (2S1410) or See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and
Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Propeller Shaft 3S1410
(3S1410).
2. Remove brake calipers and rotors. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake
System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Rear. 3. Measure the total preload torque. Refer to
See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226.
NOTE: Record the total preload torque measurement.
4. Remove the drive pinion nut using Tool.
Tool number : KV40104000 ( - )
5. Put matching marks on the companion flange and drive pinion using paint.
CAUTION: Use paint to make the matching marks. Do not damage the companion flange or drive
pinion.
6. Remove the companion flange using suitable tool. 7. Remove the front oil seal using Tool.
Tool number : ST33290001 (J-34286)
Locations
Page 5220
- Check that the glass is securely fit into the glass run groove.
- Lower the glass slightly [approximately 10 to 20 mm (0.39 to 0.79 in)] and check that the
clearance to the sash is parallel. If the clearance between the glass and sash is not parallel, loosen
the regulator bolts, guide rail bolts, and glass and guide rail bolts to correct the glass position.
FRONT DOOR GLASS REGULATOR ASSEMBLY
Removal 1. Remove the front door speaker. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional
Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Speaker/Service and
Repair/MID Audio/Front Door Speaker.
2. Remove the hole cover over rear glass bolt. 3. Operate the power window main switch to
raise/lower the door window until the glass bolts can be seen. 4. Remove the inside seal. 5.
Remove the glass bolts. 6. Raise the front door glass and hold it in place with suitable tool. 7.
Disconnect the harness connector from the regulator assembly. 8. Remove the bolts and the
regulator assembly.
Disassembly And Assembly Remove the regulator motor from the regulator assembly.
Inspection After Removal Check the regulator assembly for the following items. If a malfunction is
detected, replace or grease it.
- Wire wear
- Regulator deformation
- Grease condition for each sliding part
The arrows in the figure show the application points of the body grease.
Installation 1. Install the regulator assembly.
Front door glass regulator assembly nuts and bolt : 7.5 N.m (0.77 kg-m, 66 in-lb)
2. Connect the harness connector to the regulator assembly. 3. Align the glass and install the glass
bolts.
Glass bolts : 6.1 N.m (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb)
4. Reset the limit switch. 5. Install front door speaker. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional
Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Speaker/Service and Repair/MID
Audio/Front Door Speaker.
SETTING OF LIMIT SWITCH AFTER INSTALLATION
Setting of Limit Switch If any of the following work has been done, set the limit switch (integrated in
the motor). Removal and installation of the regulator.
- Removal and installation of the motor from the regulator.
- Removal and installation of the glass.
- Removal and installation of the glass run.
Resetting After installing each component, perform the following procedure to reset the limit switch.
Page 4537
^ Before installing the new bushings, use Nissan Brake Cleaner (or equivalent) to clean the
stabilizer bar where the bushings make contact. See Figure 1
above.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 276
Attachment General Procedure
Page 558
Page 284
11. Enter the VIN into C-III two times (see Figure 7).
^ Touch the C-III screen in the "VIN box" before typing.
^ Make sure to use all CAPITAL LETTERS.
^ Use the VIN from the vehicle you are working on.
12. Select Start
13. Turn the ignition OFF, and wait 10 seconds.
14. After waiting 10 seconds, turn the ignition ON.
Service and Repair
Rear Bumper: Service and Repair
REAR BUMPER
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the tow hitch to service the rear bumper. 1. Disconnect the
harness from tow hitch, if equipped. 2. Remove the bolts on each side of tow hitch and remove the
tow hitch, if equipped. 3. Disconnect the sonar sensor harness connector, if equipped. Disconnect the sonar sensors from retainers.
4. Disconnect the license lamp harness. 5. Remove the clips from the license lamps and remove
lamps. 6. Release the clips and remove the upper step pads. 7. Remove the rear bumper.
Service and Repair
Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair
AXLE OIL SEAL
Removal and Installation
The axle oil seal and bearing ring retainer must be replaced every time the axle shaft is removed
and installed. Refer to See: Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and Repair/Rear Axle Shaft.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle
shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing.
Page 5963
NOTE:
^ The HID control unit includes a starter (xenon bulb socket). For some models, the starter is not
replaceable. In this case, replace only the HID control
unit using the old starter.
^ Torque specification for the screw that holds the starter to the HID control unit is:
^ 1.3 - 1.7 Nm (0.13 - 0.17 k-gm, 12 - 15 in-lb)
Locations
Page 5807
Disconnect the quick connector as follows: -
Hold the sides of the connector, push in tabs and pull out the tube.
- If the connector and the tube are stuck together, push and pull several times until they start to
move. Then disconnect them by pulling.
CAUTION: The quick connector can be disconnected when the tabs are completely depressed. Do not twist
the quick connector more than necessary.
- Do not use any tools to disconnect the quick connector.
- Keep the resin tube away from heat. Be especially careful when welding near the tube.
- Prevent any acid liquids such as battery electrolyte, from getting on the resin tube.
- Do not bend or twist the resin tube during connection.
- Do not remove the remaining retainer on the hard tube (or the equivalent) except when the resin
tube or the retainer is replaced.
- When the resin tube or hard tube, or the equivalent, is replaced, also replace the retainer with a
new one (white colored retainer).
- To keep the quick connector clean and to avoid damage and contamination from foreign
materials, cover the quick connector with plastic bags or suitable material as shown.
8. Remove the four bolts and remove the fuel tank shield using power tool. 9. Remove the fuel tank
strap bolts while supporting the fuel tank with a suitable lift jack.
Page 1845
Page 3731
Brake Pedal Assy: Adjustments Adjustable Pedal
BRAKE PEDAL
Inspection and Adjustment - Adjustable Pedal
INSPECTION 1. Inspect the brake pedal free height (H) from the floor using Tool at a 90° angle to
the floor as shown.
Tool number : - (J-46532)
2. Adjust the height referring to the following specifications.
CAUTION: When equipped with adjustable pedal, the pedal must be in the forward most (closest to
the floor) position for pedal height measurement.
ADJUSTMENT 1. Loosen the stop lamp switch and ASCD cancel switch by turning them 45°
counterclockwise. 2. Loosen lock nut (A) on the input rod, then turn input rod to adjust the brake
pedal to the specified height. When finished adjusting, tighten the lock
nut (A) to specification.
Page 5609
METER BUZZER CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure
1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY OF COMBINATION METER Check power supply of combination
meter. Refer to See: Power Supply And Ground Circuit/Combination Meter. Is the inspection result
normal? YES - Inspection End. NO - Repair power supply circuit of combination meter.
Component Function Check
SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Component Function Check
1.CHECK COMBINATION METER INPUT SIGNAL Select "DATA MONITOR" for "METER/M&A;"
and check the "SEAT BELT W/L" monitor value.
- Inspection End.
Diagnosis Procedure
SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Description
Transmits a seat belt buckle switch signal to the combination meter.
SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure
1.CHECK COMBINATION METER INPUT SIGNAL
1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Check voltage between combination meter harness connector M24
terminal 27 and ground.
Is the inspection result normal? YES - Replace combination meter. Refer to See: Instrument
Cluster / Carrier/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. NO - GO TO 2 2.CHECK SEAT
BELT BUCKLE SWITCH CIRCUIT
Service and Repair
Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair
COWL TOP
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the right and left wiper arms. Refer to See: Wiper and Washer
Systems/Wiper Arm/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the cowl top seal. Release the plastics clips on the cowl top seal which go through the cowl tops LH and RH and cowl
top extension.
3. Remove the cowl top covers LH and RH. Release the plastic clips under cowl top covers attaching to grommets on hoodledge.
- Disconnect the washer tubes from washer nozzles.
4. Remove the cowl top extension brackets LH and RH. Disconnect the wiper motor harness from cowl top extension bracket LH.
- Cowl top extension bracket LH must be removed prior to removal of the wiper motor and
connecting rod assembly.
5. Remove the wiper motor and connecting rod linkage. Refer to See: Wiper and Washer
Systems/Wiper Motor Linkage/Service and Repair. 6. Disconnect the windshield washer tube.
Refer to See: Diagrams/Mechanical Diagrams/Windshield Washer Hose. 7. Remove the A/C
low-pressure pipe bracket from cowl top extension. Refer to See: Heating and Air
Conditioning/Hose/Line HVAC/Service and
Repair/Low-Pressure Pipe.
8. Remove the drain tube from each side of cowl top extension. 9. Remove the cowl top extension.
INSTALLATION
Lighting - Exterior Lamp Fogging Inspection
Parking Lamp: Customer Interest Lighting - Exterior Lamp Fogging Inspection
Classification: EL03-030E
Reference: NTB03-074E
Date: January 4, 2010
EXTERIOR LAMP FOGGING
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles and Service Procedure sections have been
revised. Please discard all previous versions.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2001-2010 Nissan, All Models
SERVICE INFORMATION
Occasionally customers may notice water vapor or fog in the exterior lamps. This is generally NOT
due to a defect.
The following information, illustrations, and flow chart are provided to help you in determining if an
incident for water/condensation in the lamps is normal or not.
All current exterior lamp assemblies are vented to the atmosphere (not sealed).
^ This is necessary to allow for expansion and contraction of air from temperature "variations"
(warmer or colder) without damage to the lamp.
^ Moisture in the air sometimes "travels" into and out of the lamp assembly through these vents.
^ Certain environmental conditions may cause moisture to condense.
^ The fogging/cloudiness should disappear over time when the lamp is in a dry environment.
Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the exterior lights based on environmental conditions
or sudden temperature changes (such as in a car wash). This is normal. See Figure 1.
NOTE:
This condensation can appear anywhere on the outer lens, typically at its coldest location.
Page 76
Speedometer Module: Description and Operation System Description
METER SYSTEM
SPEEDOMETER : System Description
The ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) provides a vehicle speed signal to the combination
meter via CAN communication lines.
Page 5564
Page 3756
1. Apply clean brake fluid to new piston seal and insert in to groove on cylinder body.
CAUTION: Do not reuse piston seal.
2. Apply clean brake fluid to piston and to piston boot, then install piston boot in to piston groove.
CAUTION: Do not reuse piston boot. 3. Insert into cylinder body by hand and insert piston boot
piston-side lip into piston groove.
CAUTION: Press piston evenly and vary the pressing point to prevent cylinder body inner wall from
being rubbed. 4. Apply rubber grease to sliding sleeves, then install sliding boots and sleeves to
cylinder body.
Page 2154
16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5).
^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB,
diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing.
17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.)
Page 5879
If the moisture trickles, drips, or pools, it may not be considered normal and the lamp assembly
may have a water leak path. See Figure 2 for an example.
If large drops of water collect inside the lens, refer to the flow chart below to find the next step.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Page 2350
2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. Disconnect the connector of driver seat control unit.
2. Check the resistance between the driver seat control unit harness connector terminals.
Is the measurement value within the specification? YES - GO TO 3. NO - Repair the driver seat
control unit branch line. 3. CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check the power
supply and the ground circuit of the driver seat control unit. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional
Equipment/Memory Positioning Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/Power Supply And Ground Circuit/Driver Seat Control Unit See: Accessories and
Optional Equipment/Memory Positioning Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Memory Positioning Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Power Supply And Ground Circuit/Automatic
Drive Positioner Control Unit. Is the inspection result normal? YES (Present error) - Replace the
driver seat control unit. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Memory Positioning
Systems/Memory Positioning Module/Service and Repair/Driver Seat Control Unit. YES (Past
error) - Error was detected in the driver seat control unit branch line. NO - Repair the power supply
and the ground circuit.
DISP Branch Line Circuit
DISP BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure
1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the battery cable from the
negative terminal. 3. Check the terminals and connectors of the display control unit for damage,
bend and loose connection (unit side and connector side). Is the inspection result normal? YES GO TO 2. NO - Repair the terminal and connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1.
Disconnect the connector of display control unit. 2. Check the resistance between the display
control unit harness connector terminals.
Is the measurement value within the specification? YES - GO TO 3. NO - Repair the display control
unit branch line. 3. CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check the power supply
and the ground circuit of the display control unit. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional
Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/Premium With Navigation/Power Supply And Ground Circuit/Display Control
Unit. Is the inspection result normal? YES (Present error) - Replace the display control unit. Refer
to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Navigation System/Service and Repair/Display Unit
YES (Past error) - Error was detected in the display control unit branch line. NO - Repair the power
supply and the ground circuit.
HVAC Branch Line Circuit
HVAC BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure
Page 310
d. Press [START] on the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" screen. See Figure 4.
e. Press [START] on the "WORK SUPPORT" screen to begin the Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL)
procedure. See Figure 5.
^ The IAVL procedure will take several minutes to complete.
^ CONSULT will display "Please Wait" in the center of the screen while the IAVL procedure is in
process. See Figure 6.
Page 5795
3. Install the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit as follows (see Figure 5):
CAUTION:
Do not bend the float arm when handling the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit / Fuel Pump Assembly.
a. Slide the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit into the attachment slots until the two Locking Tabs snap
in place.
^ Confirm the Locking Tabs are snapped in place by trying to move the Sender Unit up and down
(it should not move).
b. Insert the Fuel Temperature Sensor into the Plastic Retaining Clip.
^ Make sure the "circular flange" of the Sensor is positioned between the Clip and the Rib.
c. Insert the two Fuel Temperature Sensor Wires into the Securing Tab.
d. Connect the White Wire Connector into the top of the Fuel Pump (see Figure 6).
e. Pull and push all connectors to make sure they are fully locked in place.
Page 1198
3. Turn the camshaft to one direction, and measure the camshaft runout on dial indicator (total
indicator reading).
Camshaft runout : Less than 0.02 mm (0.0008 in)
- If measurement exceeds specification, replace the camshaft.
Camshaft Cam Height Measure the camshaft cam height.
- If measurement is not within the specifications, replace the camshaft.
Camshaft Journal Clearance
Camshaft Journal Diameter Measure the diameter of the camshaft journal.
Standard diameter : 25.950 - 25.970 mm (1.0217 - 1.0224 in)
Camshaft Bracket Inner Diameter Tighten the camshaft bracket bolt to the specified torque.
- Measure the inner diameter (A) of the camshaft bracket.
Page 2780
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the Fuel Pump Assembly from the vehicle.
^ Refer to section FL in the applicable Service Manual for removal information.
^ Make sure to follow all Service Manual warnings and cautions.
Page 5674
Fuel Gauge: Locations
METER SYSTEM
FUEL GAUGE : Component Parts Location
Page 2666
Evaporative Emission Control Canister: Service and Repair
EVAP CANISTER
Removal and Installation
EVAP CANISTER Tighten EVAP canister as shown in the figure.
EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE 1. Turn EVAP canister vent control valve
counterclockwise.
2. Remove the EVAP canister vent control valve. Always replace O-ring with a new one.
Page 3032
CAUTION
2. When you get to the ECM Reprogramming screen shown in Figure 1, confirm this bulletin
applies as follows.
A. On your C-III screen, look at the Part Number column (see Figure 1):
^ If this column is blank (no part number listed), this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to
ASIST for further diagnostic information.
^ If a Part Number is listed, write it on the Repair Order.
Locations
System Diagram
Temperature Sensor (Gauge): Description and Operation System Diagram
METER SYSTEM
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE : System Diagram
Page 3323
CAUTION: Do not tighten at this point. This allows further tightening of side bearing adjusters. 8.
Tighten each side bearing adjusters using adjuster tool.
Tool number : - (C - 4164)
9. Adjusting backlash of drive gear and drive pinion. Refer to See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD).
10. Check total preload torque. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226
(ELD). 11. Check tooth contact. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226
(ELD).
12. Apply a bead of sealant to the mating surface of the carrier cover as shown.
- Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications.
CAUTION: Remove any old sealant adhering to the mating surfaces. Also remove any moisture,
oil, or foreign material adhering to the application and mating surfaces.
13. Install the carrier cover to the gear carrier. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque. Refer to
See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive
M226.
14. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Fill the front final drive assembly with recommended differential gear oil. Refer to See:
Fluid - Differential/Service and Repair/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD).
Locations
Procedures
Shifter A/T: Procedures
SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM
Checking of A/T Position
NOTE: Following procedure will cover both column and floor shift selector levers.
1. Place selector lever in "P" position, and turn ignition switch ON (engine stop). 2. Make sure
selector lever can be shifted to other than "P" position when brake pedal is depressed. Also make
sure selector lever can be shifted from
"P" position only when brake pedal is depressed.
3. Move the selector lever and check for excessive effort, sticking, noise or rattle. 4. Confirm the
selector lever stops at each position with the feel of engagement when it is moved through all the
positions. Check whether or not the
actual position the selector lever is in matches the position shown by the shift position indicator and
the transmission body.
5. The method of operating the lever to individual positions correctly should be as shown. 6.
Confirm the back-up lamps illuminate only when lever is placed in the "R" position. Confirm the
back-up lamps does not illuminate when selector
lever is pushed against "R" position in the "P" or "N" position.
7. Confirm the engine can only be started with the selector lever in the "P" and "N" positions. 8.
Make sure transmission is locked completely in "P" position.
Page 2270
CAN System - Part 5
Premium Without Navigation
DVD Player: Service and Repair Premium Without Navigation
DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM
Removal and Installation
DVD PLAYER
Removal 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the center console bin. Refer to
See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Center Console.
3. Remove the DVD player screws. 4. Remove the DVD player.
Installation Installation is in reverse order of removal.
VIDEO MONITOR
Removal 1. Remove the rear roof console assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior
Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the video monitor connector.
3. Remove the video housing screws. 4. Remove the video monitor and housing.
5. Remove the video monitor hinge screws and remove the video monitor.
Page 1984
Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection
FUEL PRESSURE
Fuel Pressure Check
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE
With CONSULT-III 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Perform "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" in
"WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-III. 3. Start engine. 4. After engine stalls, crank it two or
three times to release all fuel pressure. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF.
Without CONSULT-III 1. Remove fuel pump fuse located in IPDM E/R.
2. Start engine. 3. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 4. Turn
ignition switch OFF. 5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system.
FUEL PRESSURE CHECK
CAUTION: Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger.
Be careful not to scratch or get the fuel hose connection area dirty when servicing, so that the quick
connector o-ring maintains sealability.
- Use Fuel Pressure Gauge Kit J-44321 and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 to check fuel
pressure.
- Do not perform fuel pressure check with electrical system operating (i.e. lights, rear defog, A/C,
etc.).
Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false readings due to varying engine loads and changes in
manifold vacuum.
NOTE: Prepare pans or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out.
The fuel pressure cannot be completely released because A60 models do not have fuel return
system. 1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". 2. Remove
engine cover. 3. Remove fuel hose using Quick Connector Release J-45488. Refer to See: Engine,
Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and
Repair/Removal and Installation.
- Do not twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose.
- Do not remove fuel hose from quick connector.
- Keep fuel hose connections clean.
Page 115
TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS
Page 2339
Diagnosis Sheet (CAN Type 16)
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
Diagnosis Sheet (CAN Type 16)
Page 5926
2. Using a suitable tool, release the pawls and remove the personal lamp lens. 3. Release the
personal lamp bulb retainers (1), then pull bulb (2) straight out to remove.
Personal lamp bulb (type B) : 12V - 6W
CONSOLE ILLUMINATION LAMP (if equipped)
Removal The console illumination lamp (1) is replaced as part of the room/map lamp assembly (2).
Refer to See: Courtesy Lamp/Service and Repair.
Arrow Indicates : Vehicle front
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Bulb Replacement 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Remove overhead console.
Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair.
3. Rotate console illumination lamp bulb (1) counterclockwise, then pull straight out away from
room/map lamp assembly (2) to remove.
Page 2646
Page 4691
Blower Motor: Description and Operation Manual A/C (Type 1)
BLOWER MOTOR CONTROL SYSTEM
System Description
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Component Parts
Blower speed control system components are: Front air control
- Variable blower control
- Front blower motor relay
- Front blower motor
- Ambient sensor
- Intake sensor
System Operation
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Variable Blower Control The variable blower control is located on the cooling unit. The variable
blower control receives a gate voltage from the front air control to steplessly maintain the blower
motor voltage in the 0 to 5 volt range (approx.).
Page 1763
34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the
"Duplication Test" icon.
35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase.
36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18).
37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased.
^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs.
^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed.
Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below.
38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF.
39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch
(M/T) pedal;
Page 5036
DVD Player: Testing and Inspection Premium Without Navigation
DVD PLAYER
Reference Value
PHYSICAL VALUES
Page 3933
SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal"
condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Page 3753
REMOVAL 1. Remove rear wheel and tires using power tool. 2. Fasten disc rotor using wheel nut.
3. Drain brake fluid as necessary. Refer to See: Hydraulic System/Brake Fluid/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement.
4. Disconnect brake hose connection (A) from cylinder body.
NOTE: Discard the copper washer, do not reuse.
5. Remove sliding pin bolts (1) as shown, and remove cylinder body (2). 6. Apply matching marks
to disc rotor and wheel hub assembly if the disc rotor is to be reused, then remove disc rotor.
CAUTION: Put matching marks on wheel hub assembly and disc rotor if the disc rotor is to be
reused.
INSTALLATION 1. If reusing the disc rotor, use the matching marks to align disc rotor on the wheel
hub assembly, then install disc rotor using a wheel nut to hold it in
place.
CAUTION: Use matching marks on wheel hub assembly and disc rotor if the disc rotor is to be
reused.
2. Install cylinder body (2) and tighten sliding pin bolts (1) to specification.
CAUTION: Before installing cylinder body to the vehicle, wipe off mounting surface of cylinder
body.
Page 2285
Page 3033
Engine - Engine Cover Removal Procedure
Access Cover: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Engine Cover Removal Procedure
Classification: EM09-004
Reference: NTB09-071
Date: August 4, 2009
TITAN, ARMADA, & PATHFINDER ENGINE COVER REMOVAL
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2010 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2010 Armada (TA60) 2008 - 2010 Pathfinder
(R51) with V8 engine.
IF YOU CONFIRM
The engine cover needs to be removed for any reason;
ACTION:
Make sure to follow the steps in the Service Procedure of this bulletin.
CAUTION
^ Do Not pull up on the front of the cover.
^ There are two locating studs underneath the rear of the cover.
^ If you pull up on the front of the cover, it will break/damage the cover near the locating studs.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Damage to the engine cover caused by incorrect removal or installation will not be considered a
manufacturer defect and will not be covered under warranty.
Page 3803
4. Remove piston seals from cylinder body, using a suitable tool.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage cylinder inner wall.
- Do not reuse piston seals.
CALIPER INSPECTION
Cylinder Body Check inside surface of cylinder for score, rust, wear, damage or foreign materials. If
any of the above conditions are observed, replace cylinder body. Minor damage from rust or
foreign materials may be eliminated by polishing surface with a fine emery paper. Replace cylinder
body if necessary.
CAUTION: Use new brake fluid for cleaning. Do not use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene.
Torque Member Check for wear, cracks, and damage. If damage or deformation is present, replace
the affected part.
Piston Check piston for score, rust, wear, damage or presence of foreign materials. Replace if any
of the above conditions are observed.
CAUTION: Piston sliding surface is plated, do not polish with emery paper even if rust or foreign
materials are stuck to sliding surface.
Sliding Pins, and Sliding Pin Boots Check sliding pin and sliding pin boot for wear, damage, and
cracks. If damage or deformation is present, replace the affected part.
CAUTION: Trailing/upper sliding pin must be replaced at each service.
ASSEMBLY
CAUTION: Do not use NISSAN Rubber Grease (KRE00 00010, KRE00 00010 01) when
assembling.
1. Apply Molykote M-77 grease to new piston seals and insert seals into grooves on cylinder body.
CAUTION: Do not reuse piston seals.
Page 2224
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Disclaimer
Locations
Page 1702
B. Compare the Part Number you wrote down to the numbers in the Current ECM Part Number
column in Table A , or Table B above.
^ If there is a match, this bulletin applies. Continue with the reprogramming procedure.
NOTE:
If there are two lines (two reprogramming options) on your C-III screen, use the one that does not
have the message "Caution! Use ONLY with NTBXX-XXX".
^ If there is not a match, this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to ASIST for further
diagnostic information.
3. If this bulletin applies and you have performed ECM reprogramming, the screen in Figure 2
appears when reprogramming is complete.
4. Make sure to erase DTCs from all systems.
NOTE:
During reprogramming, DTCs will set in several systems and must be erased.
5. Test drive the vehicle and make sure it operates correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF.
^ If the Check Engine light comes ON, go back to ASIST for further diagnostic information. Refer to
the applicable Electronic Service Manual as
needed.
^ Diagnosis and repairs beyond ECM reprogramming are not covered by this bulletin.
Page 896
Ignition Timing: Component Tests and General Diagnostics
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check
IDLE SPEED
With CONSULT-III Check idle speed in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-III.
With GST Check idle speed with GST.
IGNITION TIMING 1. Attach timing light to loop wire as shown.
2. Check ignition timing.
Page 1440
CAUTION: Do not tap pulley on the side surface where the belt is installed (outer circumference).
13. Tighten the crankshaft pulley bolt.
- Lock the crankshaft using suitable tool, then tighten the bolt.
- Perform the following steps for angular tightening: a. Apply engine oil onto the threaded parts of
the bolt and seating area.
b. Select the one most visible notch of the four on the bolt flange.
Corresponding to the selected notch, put a alignment mark (such as paint) on the crankshaft pulley.
14. Rotate the crankshaft pulley in normal direction (clockwise when viewed from engine front) to
check for parts interference. 15. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse of order
of removal.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Before starting the engine, check oil/fluid levels including engine coolant and engine oil. If the
levels are lower than required quantity, fill to the specified level. Refer to See: Maintenance.
- Use procedure below to check for fuel leakage.
- Turn ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). With fuel pressure applied to the fuel piping, check
for fuel leakage at the connection points.
- Start engine. With engine speed increased, check again for fuel leakage at connection points.
- Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration.
NOTE: If hydraulic pressure inside timing chain tensioner drops after removal and installation, slack
in the guide may generate a pounding noise during and just after engine start. However, this is
normal. Noise will stop after hydraulic pressure rises. Warm up engine thoroughly to make sure there is no leakage of fuel, exhaust gas, or any oils/fluids
including engine oil and engine coolant.
- Bleed air from passages in lines and hoses, such as in cooling system.
- After cooling down the engine, again check oil/fluid levels including engine oil and engine coolant.
Refill to specified level if necessary.
- Summary of the inspection items:
Page 1051
Refrigerant: Testing and Inspection
REFRIGERATION SYSTEM
Checking of Refrigerant Leaks
PRELIMINARY CHECK Perform a visual inspection of all refrigeration parts, fittings, hoses and
components for signs of A/C oil leakage, damage, and corrosion. Any A/C oil leakage may indicate
an area of refrigerant leakage. Allow extra inspection time in these areas when using either an
electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) or fluorescent dye leak detector (J-42220). If any dye
is observed using a fluorescent dye leak detector (J-42220), confirm the leak using a electronic
refrigerant leak detector (J-41995). It is possible that the dye is from a prior leak that was repaired
and not properly cleaned. When searching for leaks, do not stop when one leak is found but
continue to check for additional leaks at all system components and connections. When searching
for refrigerant leaks using an electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995), move the probe along
the suspected leak area at 25 - 50 mm (1 - 2 in) per second and no further than 6 mm (1/4 in) from
the component.
CAUTION: Moving the electronic refrigerant leak detector probe slower and closer to the suspected
leak area will improve the chances of finding a leak.
Page 3007
^ Check and compare your current ECM Part Number to Table A or B (as it applies) shown above.
If the part number does not match one in Table A or B, this bulletin does not apply. Go back to
ASIST for further diagnostic and repair information.
If this bulletin applies, reprogram the ECM.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You
MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential
to successfully completing this repair.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info.
Technical Service Bulletin # 04-054C Date: 110406
Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info.
Classification: WT04-004C
Reference: NTB04-054C
Date: April 6, 2011
WHEEL ALIGNMENT INFORMATION
This bulletin has been amended to correct some typographical errors in SERVICE INFORMATION.
No other changes have been made. Discard all previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R
Warranty Claim Information: In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the
following item MUST be attached to the Repair Order:
^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings.
IMPORTANT:
If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or
charged back).
ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the
Service Dept.
General Information and Recommendations
SERVICE INFORMATION
^ When performing a wheel alignment it is important that you read and follow all of the instructions
supplied with your alignment equipment.
^ The information in this bulletin is not intended to be complete wheel alignment instructions.
^ Use the information in this bulletin as a supplement to the instructions for your equipment.
General Information and Recommendations
1. Four-Wheel Thrust Alignment should always be performed.
^ This type of alignment is recommended for all Nissan vehicles.
^ The four-wheel thrust process ensures that the vehicle is properly aligned, and helps ensure
proper "centering" of the steering wheel.
2. Use the right alignment machine.
^ You must use a quality alignment machine that will give accurate results when performing
alignment checks.
^ Refer to the Nissan TECH-MATE Service Equipment Catalog for recommended alignment
equipment.
^ The alignment rack itself should be capable of accepting any Nissan vehicle. The rack should be
checked to ensure that it is level.
3. Make sure the alignment machine is properly calibrated.
^ Your alignment equipment should be regularly calibrated in order to give accurate readings.
^ If any instrument that is part of the alignment machine is dropped or damaged, calibration should
be checked immediately.
^ Check with the manufacturer of your specific equipment for their recommended
service/calibration schedule.
NOTE:
In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the following item MUST be attached
to the Repair Order:
^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings.
Page 614
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations
With Intelligent Key System
Fuel Pump Relay: Locations With Intelligent Key System
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Terminal Layout
TERMINAL LAYOUT
Page 4054
HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS
Sample/wiring diagram -example- For detail, refer to following See: How To Read Wiring Diagrams/Description.
Description
HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS
Description
Steering/Suspension - Front End Alignment Cam Bolts
Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Front End Alignment Cam Bolts
Classification: FA05-002D
Reference: NTB05-097D
Date: January 19, 2011
2005-2011 TITAN AND ARMADA; CAM BOLTS FOR FRONT WHEEL ALIGNMENT
The Applied Vehicles have been updated/amended. Please discard previous versions of this
bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2011 Titan (A60) 2005 - 2011 Armada (TA60)
APPLIED VINS 2005 Titan built after 1N6AA0(***)5N 566358 2005 Armada built after
5N1AA08(**)5N 733885 2006 - 2011 vehicles: All VINS
APPLIED DATE Vehicles built after June 2, 2005
IF YOU CONFIRM
An Applied Vehicle needs to have the front wheel alignment adjusted,
NOTE:
Applied Vehicles listed above come from the factory with non-adjustable bolts (Not Cam Bolts) for
the lower link (lower control arm) mounting.
ACTIONS
1. Remove the original lower link mounting bolts, washers, and nuts - 2 per side.
^ Refer to section FSU in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for lower link mounting bolt
locations.
2. Install new bolts (cam bolts), cam washers and new nuts.
^ New parts are listed in the Parts Information section of this bulletin.
NOTE:
Cam bolts are used to adjust caster and camber.
3. Perform front wheel alignment per the ESM.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 4134
Monitor item
ACTIVE TEST Test item
Page 5947
Fog/Driving Lamp: Locations
FRONT FOG LAMP
Component Parts Location
Page 4432
CAUTION: Do not reuse the copper washers. 2. Remove the suction pipe and O-ring.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the O-ring. 3. Remove the pulley nut and pulley. 4. Remove the bracket
bolts and bracket.
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY
Body Assembly Inspection Check the power steering oil pump body assembly for damage. If any
damage is found, replace with a new power steering oil pump assembly.
ASSEMBLY Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the copper gaskets
- Do not reuse the O-ring. Apply a coat of Genuine Nissan PSF or equivalent to the O-ring.
Page 184
Page 5938
If the moisture trickles, drips, or pools, it may not be considered normal and the lamp assembly
may have a water leak path. See Figure 2 for an example.
If large drops of water collect inside the lens, refer to the flow chart below to find the next step.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Page 5780
f. Use the new tie-wrap to secure all the wires to the black corrugated tubing (see Figure 6).
^ New tie-wrap is included with the new sender unit.
^ Make sure all wires are tied together (3 fuel level sending unit wires and 2 fuel pump wires).
^ Place the Tie-Wrap 90 mm (about 3.5 inches) from the top of the tubing.
^ Make sure the wires do not interfere with the movement of the float arm.
4. Carefully reinstall the Fuel Pump Assembly back into the vehicle in reverse of removal.
^ IMPORTANT: Use a new seal (O-Ring) when reinstalling the Fuel Pump Assembly.
^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed.
CAUTION:
DO NOT bend the Float Arm when reinstalling the Fuel Pump.
5. Confirm the Fuel Gauge operates properly.
Page 4814
Refrigerant: Testing and Inspection
REFRIGERATION SYSTEM
Checking of Refrigerant Leaks
PRELIMINARY CHECK Perform a visual inspection of all refrigeration parts, fittings, hoses and
components for signs of A/C oil leakage, damage, and corrosion. Any A/C oil leakage may indicate
an area of refrigerant leakage. Allow extra inspection time in these areas when using either an
electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) or fluorescent dye leak detector (J-42220). If any dye
is observed using a fluorescent dye leak detector (J-42220), confirm the leak using a electronic
refrigerant leak detector (J-41995). It is possible that the dye is from a prior leak that was repaired
and not properly cleaned. When searching for leaks, do not stop when one leak is found but
continue to check for additional leaks at all system components and connections. When searching
for refrigerant leaks using an electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995), move the probe along
the suspected leak area at 25 - 50 mm (1 - 2 in) per second and no further than 6 mm (1/4 in) from
the component.
CAUTION: Moving the electronic refrigerant leak detector probe slower and closer to the suspected
leak area will improve the chances of finding a leak.
Page 5348
Console: Overhaul
Exploded View
CENTER CONSOLE ASSEMBLY
Exploded View
Page 4343
^ DO NOT push/pull on the tire to perform the caster sweep.
7. Make sure the steering wheel is centered when performing toe-in measurements and
adjustments.
NOTE:
If you are using a Hunter alignment machine equipped with the WinToe(R)-Adjustment System:
^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The WinToe(R) system is not affected by steering
system movement during the adjustment process.
^ Bumping the tire or re-centering the steering wheel when adjusting "near frozen" tie rods is not
necessary. This makes the adjustment process faster
and easier.
^ WinToe(R) eliminates the effect of lash in the steering system.
If you are using a John Bean alignment machine equipped with EZ Toe:
^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The EZ Toe system is not affected by steering
system movement during the adjustment process.
^ This software routine is an improved method of setting front toe, making it easier to obtain a
centered steering wheel.
^ With EZ Toe, it is possible to adjust toe with the steering wheel turned at any angle left or right.
This is helpful when setting toe on engine wall
mounted rack and pinion units.
IMPORTANT:
If during the alignment process the vehicle was lifted off of the rack; after lowering, make sure to
jounce (bounce) the vehicle before confirming adjustments are correct.
After you have checked and adjusted vehicle alignment
8. Print the BEFORE and AFTER measurements and attach them to the Repair Order.
9. Road test the vehicle to make sure the steering wheel is "centered" when driving on a straight
flat road.
Page 2340
Diagnosis Sheet (CAN Type 17)
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
Diagnosis Sheet (CAN Type 17)
Page 4104
Page 5479
10. Remove the outboard J-Clip.
WARNING:
Only the outboard J-Clip can be removed. Removal of any other J-Clips may affect OCS
performance.
11. Remove the two clips securing the switch harness to the seat pan. See Figure 7.
WARNING:
Before removal, make careful note of the exact routing and clip placement for reassembly.
Page 4260
Page 4358
SPECIAL TOOLS
Page 5074
Page 5052
TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS
Page 1459
EM-12
Page 4490
LINK REPLACEMENT
1. For front lower link(s) identified as needing replacement:
Use the appropriate illustration in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual, section FSU, for
link replacement information.
^ Make sure to replace the ball joint securing nut with a new one. New nut is listed in the Parts
Information.
^ Make sure to replace both lower link nuts with new ones. New nuts are listed in the Parts
Information.
NOTE:
The original (factory installed) bolts for the front lower links are self centering and should not need
replacement. The vehicle should need toe adjustment only.
^ Follow torque specifications in the illustrations.
Page 1644
Exhaust Manifold: Service and Repair Removal And Installation
EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
WARNING: Perform the work when the exhaust and cooling system have cooled sufficiently. 1.
Remove the engine undercover (rear) using power tool (4WD models). 2. Remove front final drive
assembly (4WD models). See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential Assembly/Service and
Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Front Final Drive M205.
3. Remove the main muffler assembly and center exhaust tube. . 4. Remove the front exhaust
tubes. . 5. Remove front tires. See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair. 6. Remove
fender protectors. See: Body and Frame/Fender/Front Fender/Front Fender Liner/Service and
Repair. 7. Remove the LH and RH air fuel ratio A/F sensors. Follow steps below to remove each air fuel ratio A/F sensor. a. Remove the harness connector of
each air fuel ratio A/F sensor, and harness from bracket and middle clamp.
b. Remove the air fuel ratio A/F sensors from both LH and RH exhaust manifolds using Tool.
Tool number : - (J-44626)
CAUTION: Do not damage the air fuel ratio A/F sensors
- Discard any air fuel ratio A/F sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5m
(19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor. Replace it with a new one.
8. Support the engine using a suitable tool.
9. Remove the exhaust manifold (LH) (A) following the steps below. Arrow indicates Front
- B: Exhaust manifold (RH) a. Remove the engine mounting insulator. . b. Remove the exhaust
manifold cover. c. Remove the engine mounting bracket. . d. Loosen the nuts in reverse order as
shown using power tool. e. Remove the exhaust manifold (LH) (A).
Page 4146
Page 4587
Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair 2-Pole Lift
LIFTING POINT
2-Pole Lift
WARNING:
When lifting the vehicle, open the lift arms as wide as possible and ensure that the front and rear of
the vehicle are well balanced.
When setting the lift arm, do not allow the arm to contact the brake tubes, brake cable, or fuel lines.
Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info.
Technical Service Bulletin # 04-054C Date: 110406
Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info.
Classification: WT04-004C
Reference: NTB04-054C
Date: April 6, 2011
WHEEL ALIGNMENT INFORMATION
This bulletin has been amended to correct some typographical errors in SERVICE INFORMATION.
No other changes have been made. Discard all previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R
Warranty Claim Information: In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the
following item MUST be attached to the Repair Order:
^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings.
IMPORTANT:
If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or
charged back).
ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the
Service Dept.
General Information and Recommendations
SERVICE INFORMATION
^ When performing a wheel alignment it is important that you read and follow all of the instructions
supplied with your alignment equipment.
^ The information in this bulletin is not intended to be complete wheel alignment instructions.
^ Use the information in this bulletin as a supplement to the instructions for your equipment.
General Information and Recommendations
1. Four-Wheel Thrust Alignment should always be performed.
^ This type of alignment is recommended for all Nissan vehicles.
^ The four-wheel thrust process ensures that the vehicle is properly aligned, and helps ensure
proper "centering" of the steering wheel.
2. Use the right alignment machine.
^ You must use a quality alignment machine that will give accurate results when performing
alignment checks.
^ Refer to the Nissan TECH-MATE Service Equipment Catalog for recommended alignment
equipment.
^ The alignment rack itself should be capable of accepting any Nissan vehicle. The rack should be
checked to ensure that it is level.
3. Make sure the alignment machine is properly calibrated.
^ Your alignment equipment should be regularly calibrated in order to give accurate readings.
^ If any instrument that is part of the alignment machine is dropped or damaged, calibration should
be checked immediately.
^ Check with the manufacturer of your specific equipment for their recommended
service/calibration schedule.
NOTE:
In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the following item MUST be attached
to the Repair Order:
^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings.
Service and Repair
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair
BRAKE FLUID
Bleeding Brake System
CAUTION: While bleeding, pay attention to master cylinder reservoir tank fluid level. 1. Turn
ignition switch OFF and disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector or
battery negative cable. 2. Connect a vinyl tube to the rear right bleed valve. 3. Fully depress brake
pedal 4 to 5 times. 4. With brake pedal depressed, loosen bleed valve to let the air out, and then
tighten it immediately. 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until no more air comes out. 6. Tighten bleed valve
to the specified torque. Refer to See: Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Front Disc Brake/Exploded
View (front disc brake),
See: Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Rear Disc Brake/Exploded View (rear disc brake).
7. Repeat steps 2 through 6 at each wheel, with master cylinder reservoir tank filled at least half
way, bleeding air in order from the front left, rear
left, and front right bleed valves.
Page 1060
1. Before connecting recovery/recycling equipment to vehicle, check recovery/recycling equipment
gauges. No refrigerant pressure should be displayed. If NG, recover refrigerant from equipment
lines. 2. Connect recovery/recycling equipment to vehicle. Confirm refrigerant purity in supply tank
using recovery/recycling equipment and refrigerant
identifier. If NG, refer to See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service Precautions/Technician Safety
Information/Contaminated Refrigerant.
3. Confirm refrigerant purity in vehicle A/C system using recovery/recycling equipment and
refrigerant identifier. If NG, refer to See: Heating and
Air Conditioning/Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Contaminated Refrigerant.
4. Discharge refrigerant into the refrigerant recovery/recycling equipment. Measure oil discharged
into the recovery/recycling equipment. 5. Drain the oil from the "old" (removed) compressor into a
graduated container and recover the amount of oil drained. 6. Drain the oil from the "new"
compressor into a separate, clean container. 7. Measure an amount of new oil installed equal to
amount drained from "old" compressor. Add this oil to "new" compressor through the suction port
opening.
8. Measure an amount of new oil equal to the amount recovered during discharging. Add this oil to
"new" compressor through the suction port
opening.
9. If the liquid tank also needs to be replaced, add an additional 5 ml (0.2 US fl oz, 0.2 Imp fl oz) of
oil at this time.
CAUTION: Do not add this 5 ml (0.2 US fl oz, 0.2 Imp fl oz) of oil if only replacing the compressor.
OIL
Maintenance of Oil Quantity in Compressor
The oil in the compressor circulates through the system with the refrigerant. Add oil to compressor
when replacing any component or after a large refrigerant leakage has occurred. It is important to
maintain the specified amount. If oil quantity is not maintained properly, the following malfunctions
may result: Lack of oil: May lead to a seized compressor
- Excessive oil: Inadequate cooling (thermal exchange interference)
Page 3295
Fluid - Differential: Service and Repair Differential Gear Oil
Changing Differential Gear Oil
DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL
Changing Differential Gear Oil
DRAINING 1. Stop engine.
2. Remove the drain plug from the rear final drive assembly to drain the differential gear oil. 3.
Install the drain plug with sealant applied on the threads to the rear final drive assembly. Tighten to
the specified torque. Refer to See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226.
- Use High Performance Thread Sealant or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type
Specifications.
FILLING 1. Remove the filler plug from the rear final drive assembly.
2. Fill the rear final drive assembly with new differential gear oil until the level reaches the specified
level near the filler plug hole.
Differential gear oil grade and capacity : Refer to See: Maintenance.
3. Install the filler plug with sealant applied on the threads to the rear final drive assembly. Tighten
to the specified torque. Refer to See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226.
- Use High Performance Thread Sealant or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type
Specifications.
Front Final Drive M205
DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL
Checking Differential Gear Oil
DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL LEAKAGE AND LEVEL 1. Make sure that differential gear oil is not
leaking from the front final drive assembly or around it.
Page 65
ERROR: undefined
OFFENDING COMMAND: f‘~
STACK:
Page 5124
Locations
Page 542
Page 3015
Page 900
Spark Plug: Application and ID
Spark Plug
Page 4242
Service and Repair
Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator: Service and Repair
Maintenance Item Programing
Page 5455
9. Detach 2 harness clips as shown from seat cushion pan.
WARNING:
Before removal, make careful note of the exact routing and clip placement of the harnesses for
reassembly.
Specifications
Steering Wheel: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Steering Wheel
Page 1231
Connecting Rod Bearing Grade Table.
Undersize Bearings Usage Guide When the specified oil clearance is not obtained with standard size connecting rod bearings, use
undersize (US) bearings.
- When using undersize bearing, measure the bearing inside diameter with the bearing installed,
and grind the crankshaft pin so that the oil clearance satisfies the standard.
Bearing undersize table
CAUTION: In grinding the crankshaft pin to use undersize bearings, keep the fillet R (All crankshaft
pins).
Fillet R : 1.5 - 1.7 mm (0.059 - 0.067 in)
HOW TO SELECT MAIN BEARING
When New Cylinder Block and Crankshaft are Used 1. Apply the main bearing housing grade on
the bottom face of the cylinder block to the row in "Main Bearings Selection Table".
Locations
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Locations
Page 2364
Locations
Page 5608
Is the measurement value normal? YES - GO TO 3 NO - Repair or replace harness. 3. CHECK
GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
Does continuity exist? YES - Inspection End. NO - Repair or replace harness.
Component Function Check
METER BUZZER CIRCUIT
Component Function Check
1.CHECK OPERATION OF METER BUZZER 1. Select "BUZZER" of "BCM" on CONSULT-III. 2.
Perform "LIGHT WARN ALM" of "ACTIVE TEST". Does meter buzzer activate? YES - Inspection
End. NO - Replace combination meter. Refer to See: Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement.
Diagnosis Procedure
METER BUZZER CIRCUIT
Description
- The buzzer for warning chime system is installed in the combination meter.
- The combination meter sounds the alarm buzzer based on the signals transmitted from various
units.
Page 2725
until the fuel gauge indicates the level as shown, or less.
- If the fuel pump does not operate, use the following procedure to drain the fuel to the specified
level. a. Insert a suitable hose of less than 15 mm (0.59 in) diameter into the fuel filler pipe through
the fuel filler opening to drain the fuel from fuel
filler pipe.
b. Remove the LH rear wheel and tire. Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and
Repair/Rotation .
c. Remove the fuel filler pipe shield. d. Disconnect the fuel filler hose from the fuel filler pipe and
disconnect the vent hose quick connector.
e. Insert a suitable hose into the fuel tank through the fuel filler hose to drain the fuel from the fuel
tank.
3. Release the fuel pressure from the fuel lines. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/Fuel Pressure Check
.
4. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 5. Remove the three nuts and remove fuel line pump
protector.
6. Disconnect the EVAP hose at the EVAP canister. 7. Disconnect the fuel level sensor, fuel filter,
and fuel pump assembly electrical connector and the fuel feed hose.
Disconnect the quick connector as follows: Hold the sides of the connector, push in tabs and pull out the tube.
Page 1094
Page 4682
SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal"
condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Page 2694
Accelerator Pedal: Service and Repair
ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM
Removal and Installation
ADJUSTABLE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY Adjustable Accelerator Pedal
CAUTION: Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal adjusting mechanism.
- Before removal and installation, the accelerator and brake pedals must be in the frontmost
position.
This is to align the base position of the accelerator and brake pedals. Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly.
- Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket.
- Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling.
- Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water.
Removal 1. Move the accelerator and brake pedals to the frontmost position. 2. Turn the ignition
switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal. 3. Disconnect the adjustable brake pedal
cable from the adjustable brake pedal. Unlock, then pull the adjustable brake pedal cable to disconnect it from the adjustable brake pedal.
Page 1346
23. Remove the O-rings from the oil pump and front cover.
CAUTION: Do not reuse O-rings.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Clean the oil strainer.
INSTALLATION
1. Install the oil pan (upper) using the following steps.
a. Using a scraper to remove old liquid gasket from mating surfaces.
- Also remove old liquid gasket from mating surface of oil pan (upper).
- Remove old liquid gasket from bolt holes and threads.
CAUTION: Do not scratch or damage the mating surfaces when cleaning off old liquid gasket.
b. Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket as shown using Tool.
Tool number: WS39930000 ( - )
Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent.
CAUTION: Apply liquid gasket to outside of bolt hole for the hole shown by *. Installation should be done within
5 minutes after applying liquid gasket.
Page 5692
f. Use the new tie-wrap to secure all the wires to the black corrugated tubing (see Figure 6).
^ New tie-wrap is included with the new sender unit.
^ Make sure all wires are tied together (3 fuel level sending unit wires and 2 fuel pump wires).
^ Place the Tie-Wrap 90 mm (about 3.5 inches) from the top of the tubing.
^ Make sure the wires do not interfere with the movement of the float arm.
4. Carefully reinstall the Fuel Pump Assembly back into the vehicle in reverse of removal.
^ IMPORTANT: Use a new seal (O-Ring) when reinstalling the Fuel Pump Assembly.
^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed.
CAUTION:
DO NOT bend the Float Arm when reinstalling the Fuel Pump.
5. Confirm the Fuel Gauge operates properly.
Page 3456
Page 5693
Page 3255
Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM.
3. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector (A).
4. Securely fasten A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness with terminal clip (Arrow). 5. Install oil
pan to transmission case. Refer to See: Fluid Pan/Service and Repair. 6. Connect the negative
battery terminal. 7. Refill the A/T with fluid and check the fluid level and for fluid leakage. Refer to
See: Fluid - A/T/Service and Repair/Checking A/T Fluid.
Specifications
Firing Order: Specifications
Ignition System
Firing order: 1 - 8 - 7 - 3 - 6 - 5 - 4 -2
Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1421 Stored
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1421
Stored
Classification: EC09-014B
Reference: NTB09-048B
Date: April 21, 2011
2007-2009 TITAN AND ARMADA; MIL "ON" WITH DTC P1421 STORED
This bulletin has been amended. APPLIED VEHICLES, APPLIED VINS, and Table A and B have
been revised. Please discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007-2009 Titan (A60) 2007-2009 Armada (TA60)
APPLIED VINS and DATES: 2007-2008 Titan and Armada: All
2009 Titan: Vehicles built before 1N6AA0(***)9N312517 // April 7, 2009
2009 Armada: Vehicles built before 5N1AA08(**)9N614339 // April 7, 2009
IF YOU CONFIRM:
An Applied Vehicle has the MIL "ON" and DTC P1421 (Cold Start Control) stored in the ECM.
ACTION:
Confirm this bulletin applies.
Page 5535
Without CONSULT-III Check voltage between ECM terminal 101 and ground under the following
conditions.
OK or NG OK - INSPECTION END NG - GO TO 7. 3. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH POWER
SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector. 3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check voltage between ASCD brake switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG OK - GO TO 5. NG - GO TO 4. 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Page 5846
Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation Component Description
METER SYSTEM
A/T OIL TEMPERATURE GAUGE : Component Description
Page 4219
IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) - Part 3
Page 2987
2. Install differential lock position switch on gear carrier and tighten differential lock position switch
bolts with the specified torque. Refer to See:
Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential Assembly/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive
M226 (ELD).
3. Install side bearing adjusters into gear carrier.
4. Apply gear oil to side bearings. Install differential case assembly with side bearing outer races
into gear carrier. 5. Apply multi-purpose grease to differential lock position connector.
CAUTION: Do not reuse sensor connector. 6. Connect differential lock solenoid harness (B) and
differential lock position switch connector (A). Then install it to gear carrier, tighten to the
specified torque. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential Assembly/Service and
Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD).
Arrow Indicate Front 7. Align paint matching mark on side bearing caps with that on gear carrier
and install side bearing caps on gear carrier without tightening to
specification.
Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-029 Date: 090421
Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming
Classification: EC09-007
Reference: NTB09-029
Date: April 21, 2009
CONSULT-III ECM REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE
APPLIED VEHICLES: All CONSULT-III (C-III) compatible Nissan vehicles
SERVICE INFORMATION
A complete step-by-step General Procedure for C-III ECM Reprogramming is now available in the
on-line version of this bulletin.
This General Procedure is also available via hyperlink from specific C-III symptom-based Technical
Service Bulletins in ASIST.
CAUTION
Part 1
Updated March 25, 2009
CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM REPROGRAMMING
A symptom based TSB is required before using this procedure.
IMPORTANT: Before starting, make sure:
^ ASIST on the C-III computer has been freshly synchronized (updated).
^ All C-III software updates (if any) have been installed.
NOTE:
The C-III computer automatically gets applicable ECM reprogramming data during ASIST
synchronization.
Exploded View
Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair Exploded View
AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT
Exploded View
Page 5984
If the moisture trickles, drips, or pools, it may not be considered normal and the lamp assembly
may have a water leak path. See Figure 2 for an example.
If large drops of water collect inside the lens, refer to the flow chart below to find the next step.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Page 183
Page 3385
Drive/Propeller Shaft: Testing and Inspection Propeller Shaft 3S1410
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
NVH Troubleshooting Chart
Use the chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace
these parts.
Specifications
Accelerator Pedal: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Accelerator Control
ACCELERATOR PEDAL STROKE AND TRAVEL
Page 5212
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the following parts from the trim panel:
^ pull handle cover
^ power window switch assembly (if equipped)
Refer to the INT section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for removal
instructions.
2. Following the instructions on the label, apply Nissan Vinyl and Leather Cleaner to the trim panel
surface.
3. Use a soft bristle brush to gently clean the surface.
4. Mist the area lightly with water to rinse.
5. Use a clean cloth to wipe the area clean.
Page 2007
- If the connector and the tube are stuck together, push and pull several times until they start to
move. Then disconnect them by pulling.
CAUTION: The quick connector can be disconnected when the tabs are completely depressed. Do not twist
the quick connector more than necessary.
- Do not use any tools to disconnect the quick connector.
- Keep the resin tube away from heat. Be especially careful when welding near the tube.
- Prevent any acid liquids such as battery electrolyte, from getting on the resin tube.
- Do not bend or twist the resin tube during connection.
- Do not remove the remaining retainer on the hard tube (or the equivalent) except when the resin
tube or the retainer is replaced.
- When the resin tube or hard tube, or the equivalent, is replaced, also replace the retainer with a
new one (white colored retainer).
- To keep the quick connector clean and to avoid damage and contamination from foreign
materials, cover the quick connector with plastic bags or suitable material as shown.
8. Remove the four bolts and remove the fuel tank shield using power tool. 9. Remove the fuel tank
strap bolts while supporting the fuel tank with a suitable lift jack.
Page 5558
HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS
Sample/wiring diagram -example- For detail, refer to following See: How To Read Wiring Diagrams/Description.
Description
HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS
Description
Page 2396
Body Control Module: Service and Repair
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
Removal and Installation
BCM
Removal
NOTE: If possible, before removing BCM, retrieve current BCM configuration to use for reference
when configuring brand-new BCM after installation. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Body Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Configuration/Special Repair
Requirement. 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the lower knee protector.
Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Panel Assembly/Removal And Installation.
3. Remove the screw and release the BCM. 4. Disconnect the connectors and then remove the
BCM.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE: When replacing BCM, it must be configured. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Body Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Configuration/Special Repair
Requirement.
- When replacing BCM, perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition
key IDs. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing
and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing Control Unit See:
Accessories and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/ECM Re-Communicating Function See: Accessories and
Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/ECM Re-Communicating Function.
- When replacing BCM, perform ID registration procedure of low tire pressure warning system.
Refer to See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Tire Monitoring System/Testing
and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/ID Registration Procedure.
Service and Repair
Solar Sensor: Service and Repair
OPTICAL SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the defroster grille from the instrument panel. Refer to See: Body and
Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument
Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Panel Assembly/Exploded View.
2. Disconnect the optical sensor connector (2). 3. Twist the optical sensor (1) counter clockwise to
remove it from the defroster grille.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Body - Front Door Window Motor Limit Switch Resetting
Front Door Window Motor: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front Door Window Motor Limit
Switch Resetting
EL08-031A
Reference: NTB09-027A
Date: July 15, 2010
FRONT WINDOW REGULATOR MOTOR LIMIT SWITCH RESET
This bulletin has been amended. The APPLIED VEHICLES section has been revised. No other
changes have been made. Please discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2006-2010 Armada (TA60) 2006-2009 Quest (V42) 2006-2010 Titan (A60)
SERVICE INFORMATION
If any of the following work has been done:
^ removal and installation of the regulator assembly
^ removal and installation of the motor from the regulator
^ installation of a new glass window
^ installation of a new glass run
....check the label on the window motor to see if the part number is one of the following:
^ 80730-ZT01A ^ 80731-ZT01A ^ 80730-ZM70B ^ 80731-ZM70B
NOTE:
The label can be checked with the motor in the vehicle by using a mirror.
If the window motor is listed above, the Limit Switch will need to be reset using the procedure in
this bulletin.
NOTE:
Some of the window motors with these part numbers may appear to have a reset switch, but it will
not reset the Limit Switch.
SETTING OF LIMIT SWITCH
1. Connect the door harness to the power window motor, and rotate the motor more than 5 turns in
the glass raising (up) direction.
Page 2473
20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer.
CAUTION: During data transfer:
^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections.
^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF.
^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal.
NOTE:
^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or
^ The Error in Figure 9A displays.
a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged.
b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned
OFF (see step 3 and 4).
c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III
screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1).
Part 2
Service and Repair
Steering Angle Sensor: Service and Repair
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove spiral cable. Refer to See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Clockspring
Assembly / Spiral Cable/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the screws and remove the steering angle
sensor.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: After installation of spiral cable, adjust steering angle sensor. Refer to See: Brakes and
Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming
and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing Control Unit/Description See: Brakes and
Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming
and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing Control Unit/Special Repair Requirement See:
Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Adjustment Of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral
Position/Description See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Adjustment Of Steering Angle
Sensor Neutral Position/Special Repair Requirement.
Page 1567
8. Continue to draw the vacuum until the gauge reaches 28 inches of vacuum. The gauge may not
reach 28 inches in high altitude locations, refer to
the vacuum specifications based on the altitude above sea level.
9. When the vacuum gauge has reached the specified amount, disconnect the air hose and wait 20
seconds to see if the system loses any vacuum. If
the vacuum level drops, perform any necessary repairs to the system and repeat steps 6 - 8 to
bring the vacuum to the specified amount. Recheck for any leaks.
10. Place the coolant container (with the refill hose inserted) at the same level as the top of the
radiator. Then open the ball valve on the refill hose so
the coolant will be drawn up to fill the cooling system. The cooling system is full when the vacuum
gauge reads zero.
CAUTION: Do not allow the coolant container to get too low when filling, to avoid air from being
drawn into the cooling system.
11. Remove the Tool from the radiator neck opening and install the radiator cap. 12. Remove the
non-vented reservoir cap. 13. Fill the cooling system reservoir tank to the specified level. Run the
engine to warm up the cooling system and top up the system as necessary
before installing the vented reservoir cap.
FLUSHING COOLING SYSTEM 1. Drain the water from the engine cooling system. Refer to
"Changing Engine Coolant". 2. Fill the radiator and the reservoir tank (to the "MAX" line), with
water. Reinstall the radiator cap and leave the vented reservoir cap off. 3. Run the engine until it
reaches normal operating temperature. 4. Press the engine accelerator two or three times under
no-load. 5. Stop the engine and wait until it cools down. 6. Drain the water from the engine cooling
system. Refer to "Changing Engine Coolant". 7. Repeat steps 2 through 6 until clear water begins
to drain from the radiator.
Page 5106
Speaker: Service and Repair MID Audio
Front Tweeter
FRONT TWEETER
Removal and Installation
FRONT TWEETER
Removal 1. Remove the front tweeter grille. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Panel Assembly/Removal And Installation.
2. Remove the front tweeter clips (C103) (A). 3. Disconnect the front tweeter connector and remove
the front tweeter (1).
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Front Door Speaker
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
Removal and Installation
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
Removal 1. Remove the front door finisher. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and
Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair.
2. Remove the four front door speaker screws. 3. Disconnect the front door speaker connector and
remove the front door speaker.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Rear Door Speaker
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
Page 3971
HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS
Sample/wiring diagram -example- For detail, refer to following See: How To Read Wiring Diagrams/Description.
Description
HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS
Description
Page 1452
EM-4
Power Consumption Control System
Power Distribution Module: Locations Power Consumption Control System
POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM
Component Parts Location
Page 4485
Lot Number Locations.
Page 4797
4. Remove the heater core pipe bracket.
5. Remove the heater core.
NOTE: If the in-cabin microfilters are contaminated from coolant leaking from the heater core,
replace the in-cabin microfilters with new ones before installing the new heater core.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
System Diagram
Temperature Sensor (Gauge): Description and Operation System Diagram
METER SYSTEM
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE : System Diagram
Locations
Page 2502
A/T Shift Lock System
Page 5689
2. Remove the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit from the Fuel Pump Assembly as follows:
a. First, press in on the two locking tabs on the sides of the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit
b. Then, pull the unit UP and OUT of the attachment slots
^ For Type A see Figure 1
^ For Type B see Figure 2
Page 224
27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example).
28. Select Select
29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example).
30. Select Confirm
Page 2042
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair
ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM
Removal and Installation
ADJUSTABLE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY Adjustable Accelerator Pedal
CAUTION: Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal adjusting mechanism.
- Before removal and installation, the accelerator and brake pedals must be in the front most
position.
This is to align the base position of the accelerator and brake pedals. Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly.
- Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket.
- Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling.
- Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water.
Removal 1. Move the accelerator and brake pedals to the frontmost position. 2. Turn the ignition
switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal. 3. Disconnect the adjustable brake pedal
cable from the adjustable brake pedal. Unlock, then pull the adjustable brake pedal cable to disconnect it from the adjustable brake pedal.
Page 6198
^ A magnifying glass (10X magnification) must be used to identify impact marks that may be less
than 1 mm in diameter.
NOTE:
A lead, or crack from an impact point can run to the edge of the glass and appear to be a low
stress crack starting from the glass outside edge.
Compound crack beginning or ending at the edge of the glass
This type of crack is always caused by impact to the glass. The point of impact is located where the
crack "branches out".
Cracks that are only in the middle of the glass
This type of crack does not begin or end at the edge of the glass.
^ These cracks are always caused by an impact to the glass and are not covered under warranty.
2) How to determine if glass damage is due to a scratch in the glass surface.
Cracks from a scratch in the glass surface
Glass is produced by fusing together various raw materials such as silica, soda ash, and limestone,
and has a hardness of 5 to 6 on the Mohs scale (for reference, a diamond has a hardness of 10 on
the same scale).
Since earth and sand can contain substances harder than that of glass, glass can be easily
scratched by:
^ Fine sand particles
^ Hard metal
^ Rubbing action of contaminated wiper rubbers, or sand partials caught between the wiper and the
glass, especially when operating the wipers in a dry
Page 138
Power Distribution Module: Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters
Reference Value
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Reference Value
VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL
Locations
Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Locations
METER SYSTEM
A/T OIL TEMPERATURE GAUGE : Component Parts Location
Page 5907
Page 801
^ Center the front wheels on the turn plates.
^ Chock the left rear wheel.
Preliminary Checks:
3. Perform pre-alignment checks.
^ Tire condition (wear, partial wear, flaws, etc.)
^ Road wheel condition (damage and deformation)
^ Tire pressure
^ Inspect for visible damage to any suspension components
^ Wheel bearing axial play
^ Ball joints of suspension arms
^ Shock absorber operation and visual check for oil leakage
^ Condition of axle and suspension (check for bushing cracks and slack)
^ Vehicle weight
> Empty - no cargo, luggage, or passengers
> Fuel level is full
Locations
Page 2155
18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM.
The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to
use.
19. Select Next
NOTE:
If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with
Reprogramming.
Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-029 Date: 090421
Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming
Classification: EC09-007
Reference: NTB09-029
Date: April 21, 2009
CONSULT-III ECM REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE
APPLIED VEHICLES: All CONSULT-III (C-III) compatible Nissan vehicles
SERVICE INFORMATION
A complete step-by-step General Procedure for C-III ECM Reprogramming is now available in the
on-line version of this bulletin.
This General Procedure is also available via hyperlink from specific C-III symptom-based Technical
Service Bulletins in ASIST.
CAUTION
Part 1
Updated March 25, 2009
CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM REPROGRAMMING
A symptom based TSB is required before using this procedure.
IMPORTANT: Before starting, make sure:
^ ASIST on the C-III computer has been freshly synchronized (updated).
^ All C-III software updates (if any) have been installed.
NOTE:
The C-III computer automatically gets applicable ECM reprogramming data during ASIST
synchronization.
Page 3846
CAUTION: Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it way cause paint damage. If
brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately.
Replacement
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
CAUTION: -
Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it way cause paint damage. If brake fluid is
splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately.
- Before removing brake master cylinder, depress the brake pedal 5-6 times with the key OFF to
deplete vacuum in the booster.
1. Drain brake fluid. Refer to See: Brake Fluid/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 2.
Disconnect harness connector for fluid level sensor. 3. If equipped, disconnect harness connectors
for front and rear pressure sensors. 4. Using a flare nut wrench, disconnect brake tube from master
cylinder assembly. 5. Remove master cylinder assembly nuts and master cylinder assembly.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refill brake fluid and bleed air. Refer to See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair.
CAUTION: Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it way cause paint damage. If brake fluid is
splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately.
- Refill with new brake fluid. Refer to See: Maintenance.
- Do not reuse drained brake fluid.
- Adjust brake pedal. Refer to See: Brake Pedal Assy/Testing and Inspection/Standard Pedal.
Page 2882
Ignition Relay: Locations Without Intelligent Key System
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Terminal Layout
TERMINAL LAYOUT
Locations
Body - Front Door Window Motor Limit Switch Resetting
Front Door Window Regulator: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front Door Window Motor Limit
Switch Resetting
EL08-031A
Reference: NTB09-027A
Date: July 15, 2010
FRONT WINDOW REGULATOR MOTOR LIMIT SWITCH RESET
This bulletin has been amended. The APPLIED VEHICLES section has been revised. No other
changes have been made. Please discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2006-2010 Armada (TA60) 2006-2009 Quest (V42) 2006-2010 Titan (A60)
SERVICE INFORMATION
If any of the following work has been done:
^ removal and installation of the regulator assembly
^ removal and installation of the motor from the regulator
^ installation of a new glass window
^ installation of a new glass run
....check the label on the window motor to see if the part number is one of the following:
^ 80730-ZT01A ^ 80731-ZT01A ^ 80730-ZM70B ^ 80731-ZM70B
NOTE:
The label can be checked with the motor in the vehicle by using a mirror.
If the window motor is listed above, the Limit Switch will need to be reset using the procedure in
this bulletin.
NOTE:
Some of the window motors with these part numbers may appear to have a reset switch, but it will
not reset the Limit Switch.
SETTING OF LIMIT SWITCH
1. Connect the door harness to the power window motor, and rotate the motor more than 5 turns in
the glass raising (up) direction.
Page 857
5. Push the vehicle slowly ahead to rotate the wheels 180° degrees (1/2 a turn).
CAUTION: If the wheels have rotated more than 180° (1/2 turn), start this procedure again from the
beginning. Never push the vehicle backward. 6. Measure the distance "B" on the front side of the
front tires at the same marks as shown. Total toe-in is calculated as "A" - "B".
Total toe-in : Refer to See: Specifications/Front Suspension/Wheel Alignment
7. Adjust the toe-in by varying the length of the steering outer socket.
a. Loosen the outer tie-rod lock nuts. b. Adjust the toe-in by screwing the outer tie-rods in or out.
Standard length "L" : Refer to See: Specifications/Mechanical Specifications/Steering/System
Specifications/Steering Outer Socket And Inner Socket
c. Tighten the outer tie-rod lock nuts to specification.
Lock nut : Refer See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering Gear/Service and
Repair/Overhaul
FRONT WHEEL TURNING ANGLE
NOTE: Check front wheel turning angle after the toe-in inspection.
1. Place front wheels on turning radius gauges in straight ahead position and rear wheels on
stands so that vehicle can be level.
Check the maximum inner and outer wheel turning angles for LH and RH road wheels.
2. Start engine and run at idle, turn steering wheel all the way right and left, measure the turning
angle.
Wheel turning angle (full turn) : Refer to See: Specifications/Front Suspension/Wheel Alignment
Page 1254
Piston Selection Table
NOTE: The piston is available together with piston pin as an assembly.
- The piston pin (piston pin bore) grade is provided only for the parts installed at the plant. For
service parts, no grades can be selected (only 0 grade is available).
HOW TO SELECT CONNECTING ROD BEARING
When New Connecting Rod and Crankshaft are Used 1. Apply the big end inside diameter grade
stamped on the connecting rod side face to the row in the "Connecting Rod Bearing Selection
Table".
2. Apply the pin diameter grade stamped on the crankshaft front side to the column in the
"Connecting Rod Bearing Selection Table".
3. Read the symbol at the cross point of the selected row and column in the "Connecting Rod
Bearing Selection Table". 4. Apply the symbol obtained to the "Connecting Rod Bearing Grade
Table" to select.
When Crankshaft and Connecting Rod are Reused 1. Measure dimensions of the big end inside
diameter of the connecting rod and diameter of the crankshaft pin individually. 2. Apply the
measured dimension to the "Connecting Rod Bearing Selection Table". 3. The following steps are
the same as in "When New Connecting Rod and Crankshaft are Used".
Connecting Rod Bearing Selection Table
Page 5625
Page 1332
EM-4
Locations
Page 2785
Page 3049
8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.)
9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.)
10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2).
12. Select Select.
Page 3744
IMPORTANT:
If you remove the brake pad retainers from the torque member, lift them in the direction indicated
by the arrow (see Figure 3) so retainers will not deform.
Service and Repair
Oil Filter: Service and Repair
OIL FILTER
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the engine front undercover using power tool.
2. Remove the oil filter using Tool.
Tool number : KV10115801 (J-38956)
CAUTION: The oil filter is provided with a relief valve.
Use Genuine NISSAN oil filter or equivalent. Be careful not to get burned when the engine and engine oil are hot.
- When removing, prepare a shop cloth to absorb any engine oil leakage or spillage.
- Do not allow engine oil to adhere to the drive belts.
- Completely wipe off any engine oil that adheres to the engine and the vehicle.
INSTALLATION 1. Remove foreign materials adhering to the oil filter installation surface.
2. Apply engine oil to the oil seal circumference of the new oil filter. 3. Screw the oil filter manually
until it touches the installation surface, then tighten it by 2/3 turn. Or tighten to specification.
Oil filter : 17.7 N.m (1.8 kg-m, 13 ft-lb)
4. Inspect the engine for oil leakage. Refer to "Removal and Installation". 5. Install the engine front
undercover.
Specifications
Spark Plug: Specifications
Spark Plug
Torque : 24.5 N.m (2.5 Kg-m, 18 ft-lb)
Page 5731
Page 2515
2. Select Direct Diagnostic Mode icon
3. Select System Diagnosis
Page 3855
Parking Brake Control: Specifications Parking Brake Control
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Parking Brake Control
Page 5589
Page 2225
Service Procedure
Check NATS On The Vehicle
1. Check to see if the vehicle you're working on has "ECM based" NATS V2.0 or V5.0.
a. If the vehicle has ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0, it will NOT start after you install a service
replacement ECM. So you'll have to re-register all ignition keys, including spare keys with
CONSULT-II and the purple NATS card. After you do this, proceed with step 2.
^ If you do not know how to re-register the keys, refer to the ESM for the NATS key re-registration
procedure.
b. If the vehicle has "BCM based" NATS (instead of ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0), you do NOT
have to re-register the ignition or spare keys. Proceed with step 2.
Check For ECM Data Updates in ASIST
2. In ASIST, select [CONSULT Utilities] >>> [ECM/TCM Data]. Then choose Model and Model
Year (see Figure 1).
3. Look for ECM Data Updates (listed by ECM P/Ns and vehicle configuration) in the top, center
display panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
a. If there is not updates listed for your vehicle configuration, you do NOT have to reprogram the
service replacement ECM. Proceed with step 5.
b. If there is updates listed for your vehicle configuration, see if they apply to the service
replacement ECM you're going to install. Do this by performing step 4.
4. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then confirm that your
ECM is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, -XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details"
panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
a. If your ECM is listed in the "Details" panel, you must reprogram the ECM with the latest data
update. After you do this, proceed with step 5.
CAUTION:
The 1999-2000 Frontier and 1999-2000 Pathfinder have a gray CONSULT connector AND a white
GST connector. Do NOT attempt to perform the ECM Reprogramming procedure with CONSULT-II
connected to the gray CONSULT connector. See the appropriate ESM for further details if
necessary.
b. If your ECM is NOT listed in the "Details" panel, you do NOT have to reprogram the ECM.
Proceed with step 5.
Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
5. Perform the Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning as follows:
a. Make sure the accelerator pedal is fully released.
b. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds.
c. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" for 10 seconds.
Page 3485
CAUTION: Do not tighten at this point. This allows further tightening of side bearing adjusters. 8.
Tighten each side bearing adjusters using adjuster tool.
Tool number : - (C - 4164)
9. Adjusting backlash of drive gear and drive pinion. Refer to See: Differential Assembly/Service
and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226
(ELD).
10. Check total preload torque. Refer to See: Differential Assembly/Service and
Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD). 11. Check tooth contact. Refer to See: Differential
Assembly/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD).
12. Apply a bead of sealant to the mating surface of the carrier cover as shown.
- Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications.
CAUTION: Remove any old sealant adhering to the mating surfaces. Also remove any moisture,
oil, or foreign material adhering to the application and mating surfaces.
13. Install the carrier cover to the gear carrier. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque. Refer to
See: Differential Assembly/Service and
Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226.
14. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Fill the front final drive assembly with recommended differential gear oil. Refer to See:
Differential Assembly/Fluid - Differential/Service and Repair/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD).
Headlamp
Specifications
Fuel Pressure: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Fuel Pressure
Page 5667
Page 132
2. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connectors and ground.
Does continuity exist? YES - Inspection End. NO - Repair or replace harness.
Page 313
f. Enter the entire VIN using the keyboard. See Figure 13.
^ Use [CHNG] to switch between the letters and numbers keyboard screens.
g. Once the entire VIN is entered, select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 14.
h. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen and enter the entire VIN again. See Figure 15.
^ You MUST enter the VIN a second time for confirmation purposes.
Page 1504
Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Cover. 2. Disconnect the harness connector from air
cleaner case (upper). 3. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly and air cleaner case. 4.
Remove air cleaner filter and air cleaner case (lower) Add marks as necessary for easier installation.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-029 Date: 090421
Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming
Classification: EC09-007
Reference: NTB09-029
Date: April 21, 2009
CONSULT-III ECM REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE
APPLIED VEHICLES: All CONSULT-III (C-III) compatible Nissan vehicles
SERVICE INFORMATION
A complete step-by-step General Procedure for C-III ECM Reprogramming is now available in the
on-line version of this bulletin.
This General Procedure is also available via hyperlink from specific C-III symptom-based Technical
Service Bulletins in ASIST.
CAUTION
Part 1
Updated March 25, 2009
CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM REPROGRAMMING
A symptom based TSB is required before using this procedure.
IMPORTANT: Before starting, make sure:
^ ASIST on the C-III computer has been freshly synchronized (updated).
^ All C-III software updates (if any) have been installed.
NOTE:
The C-III computer automatically gets applicable ECM reprogramming data during ASIST
synchronization.
Page 1850
Page 2567
Engine Control Module: Programming and Relearning
Procedure After Replacing ECM
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
Procedure After Replacing ECM
When replacing ECM, the following procedure must be performed. 1. Perform initialization of NVIS
(NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to See: Accessories and
Optional
Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/ECM
Re-Communicating Function.
2. Perform See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/VIN Registration. 3. Perform
See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position
Learning. 4. Perform See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve
Closed Position Learning. 5. Perform See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning. 6. Perform See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Idle Air Volume Learning.
VIN Registration
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
VIN Registration
DESCRIPTION VIN Registration is an operation to registering VIN in ECM. It must be performed
each time ECM is replaced.
NOTE: Accurate VIN which is registered in ECM may be required for Inspection and Maintenance
(I/M).
OPERATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-III 1. Check the VIN of the vehicle and note it. Refer to See: Application and
ID/Identification Number. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and engine stopped. 3. Select "VIN
REGISTRATION" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode. 4. Follow the instruction of CONSULT-III display.
Page 2742
- Make sure that fuel tube flange is securely fixed in flange fixing groove on clip. c. Make sure that
installation is complete by checking that fuel injector does not rotate or come off.
- Make sure that protrusions of fuel injectors are aligned with cutouts of clips after installation.
4. Install fuel tube and fuel injector assembly to intake manifold.
CAUTION: Be careful not to let tip of injector nozzle come in contact with other parts.
- Tighten fuel tube assembly bolts "a" to "b" in illustration and in two steps.
5. Install fuel hose assembly. Follow precautions for fuel injector when handling O-ring.
- Insert connectors straight, making sure that the axis is lined up with fuel tube side to prevent
O-ring from being damaged.
- Tighten bolts evenly in several steps.
- Make sure that there is no gap between flange and fuel tube after tightening bolts.
6. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION After installing fuel tubes, make sure there are no fuel leaks
at connections using the following steps. 1. Apply fuel pressure to fuel lines by turning ignition
switch ON (with engine stopped). Then check for fuel leaks at connections. 2. Start the engine and
rev it up and check for fuel leaks at connections.
WARNING: Do not touch the engine immediately after stopping, as engine becomes extremely hot.
NOTE:
Page 63
Page 1003
Replacement/Transmission Assembly or See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Transmission Assembly.
Page 776
Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Rear Power Window Switch
Rear Door Switch
REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH
Removal and Installation - Rear Door Switch
REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear power window switch assembly from the rear door finisher. Refer to
See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front
Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair.
2. Remove the rear power window switch (2) from the power window switch finisher (1) by
releasing the tabs using suitable tool (A).
CAUTION: Wrap a cloth around suitable tools to protect components from damage.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Power Drop Glass Switch
REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH
Removal and Installation - Power Drop Glass Switch
REMOVAL 1. Release the pawls and remove the overhead console switch panel (1) from the
overhead console (2).
2. Disconnect the power drop glass switch (3). 3. Remove the power drop glass switch (3) from the
overhead console switch panel (1) by releasing the tabs using suitable tool.
CAUTION: Wrap a cloth around suitable tools to protect components from damage.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 282
4. Select Engine
5. Select OK
6. Select Work Support
Page 2299
Example: CAN-H, CAN-L Harness Short Circuit
Page 3252
- Arrow Indicates Front
9. Tighten bolt (1), (2) and (3) temporarily to prevent dislocation. After that tighten them in order (1
to 2 to 3). Then tighten other bolts.
- Arrow Indicates Front
10. Tighten control valve with TCM bolts to the specified torque.
11. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector (A). 12. Securely fasten terminal cord
assembly and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness with terminal clips
- Arrow Indicates Terminal clip
ABLS/ABS
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair ABLS/ABS
Wheel Sensors
WHEEL SENSORS
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel sensor bolt. When removing the front wheel sensor, first remove the disc rotor to gain access to the front wheel
sensor bolt. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake
Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Front.
2. Pull out the sensor, being careful to turn it as little as possible.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth.
- Do not pull on the sensor harness.
3. Disconnect wheel sensor harness electrical connector, then remove harness from attaching
points.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Inspect wheel sensor O-ring, replace sensor assembly if damaged.
- Clean wheel sensor hole and mounting surface with brake cleaner and a lint-free shop rag. Be
careful that dirt and debris do not enter the axle.
- Apply a coat of suitable grease to the wheel sensor O-ring and mounting hole.
Sensor Rotor
SENSOR ROTOR
Removal and Installation
FRONT WHEEL SENSOR ROTOR
Removal and Installation The front wheel sensor rotor is built into the front wheel hub and bearing
assembly and is not removable. If damaged, replace the front wheel hub and bearing assembly.
Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Wheel Hub/Service and Repair.
REAR WHEEL SENSOR ROTOR
Page 413
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Service and Repair
SONAR SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear sonar sensor (1) from the rear bumper (2).
2. Disconnect the rear sonar sensor connector. 3. Remove the rear sonar sensor housing from the
rear bumper (2).
INSTALLATION 1. Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Locations
Page 1800
2. Select Direct Diagnostic Mode icon
3. Select System Diagnosis
Page 134
Concept of auto active test
- IPDM E/R starts the auto active test with the door switch signals transmitted by BCM via CAN
communication. Therefore, the CAN communication line between IPDM E/R and BCM is
considered normal if the auto active test starts successfully.
- The auto active test facilitates troubleshooting if any systems controlled by IPDM E/R cannot be
operated.
Diagnosis chart in auto active test mode
Page 5495
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Specifications
Thermostat: Specifications
Thermostat
Page 2311
f. Reception item of "M&A;": On "TCM", "UNKWN" is indicated. This means M&A; cannot receive
the signal from TCM. Draw a line to indicate an error between M&A; and TCM (line 2-f in the figure
below).
g. Reception item of "ADP": On "TCM", "UNKWN" is indicated. This means ADP cannot receive the
signal from TCM. Draw a line to indicate
an error between ADP and TCM (line 2-g in the figure below).
h. Reception item of "ABS": "UNKWN" is not indicated. This indicates normal communication
between ABS and its receiving units. Do not
draw any line.
Page 4840
Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Service and Repair
AMBIENT SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the ambient sensor electrical connector.
NOTE: The ambient sensor (1) is located behind the front bumper, in front of the condenser (front
grille removed for clarity). 2. Release the ambient sensor clip and then remove the ambient sensor
(1).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 1563
Coolant: Testing and Inspection
ENGINE COOLANT
Inspection
LEVEL CHECK Check if the engine coolant reservoir tank level is within MIN to MAX level when engine is cool.
- Adjust engine coolant level as necessary.
CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAKS
WARNING: Never remove the radiator or reservoir cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could
occur from high-pressure engine coolant escaping from the radiator or reservoir.
- To check for leakage, apply pressure to the cooling system at the reservoir filler neck using
suitable tool and Tool.
CAUTION: Higher pressure than specified may cause radiator damage.
NOTE: In case that engine coolant decreases, replenish cooling system with engine coolant. If any concerns are found, repair or replace damaged parts.
CHECKING RESERVOIR CAP Check reservoir cap relief pressure using suitable tool and Tool.
Driver Air Bag Module
Air Bag: Service and Repair Driver Air Bag Module
DRIVER AIR BAG MODULE
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
CAUTION: Do not attempt to repair or replace damaged direct-connect SRS component connectors. If a driver
air bag direct-connect harness connector is damaged, the spiral cable must be replaced.
- Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait at
least
3 minutes. When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front of air bag module.
1. Remove the left and right side bolts. 2. Lift the driver air bag module from the steering wheel. 3.
Disconnect the air bag harness and horn connectors, then remove the driver air bag module. For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors, refer to See: Service and Repair,
"Direct-connect SRS Component Connectors".
CAUTION: When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front of air bag module.
- Always place air bag module with pad side facing upward.
- Do not insert any foreign objects (screwdriver, etc.) into air bag module or harness connectors.
- Do not disassemble air bag module.
- Do not use old bolts after removal; replace with new bolts.
- Do not expose the air bag module to temperatures exceeding 90°C (194°F).
- Replace the air bag module if it has been dropped or sustained an impact.
Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-029 Date: 090421
Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming
Classification: EC09-007
Reference: NTB09-029
Date: April 21, 2009
CONSULT-III ECM REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE
APPLIED VEHICLES: All CONSULT-III (C-III) compatible Nissan vehicles
SERVICE INFORMATION
A complete step-by-step General Procedure for C-III ECM Reprogramming is now available in the
on-line version of this bulletin.
This General Procedure is also available via hyperlink from specific C-III symptom-based Technical
Service Bulletins in ASIST.
CAUTION
Part 1
Updated March 25, 2009
CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM REPROGRAMMING
A symptom based TSB is required before using this procedure.
IMPORTANT: Before starting, make sure:
^ ASIST on the C-III computer has been freshly synchronized (updated).
^ All C-III software updates (if any) have been installed.
NOTE:
The C-III computer automatically gets applicable ECM reprogramming data during ASIST
synchronization.
Page 5171
- Remove the reinforcement from end cap.
3. Release the clips and remove the step pad from the running board. 4. Remove the nuts and
bolts and remove the running board brackets.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 2988
CAUTION: Do not tighten at this point. This allows further tightening of side bearing adjusters. 8.
Tighten each side bearing adjusters using adjuster tool.
Tool number : - (C - 4164)
9. Adjusting backlash of drive gear and drive pinion. Refer to See: Transmission and
Drivetrain/Differential Assembly/Service and
Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD).
10. Check total preload torque. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential
Assembly/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226
(ELD).
11. Check tooth contact. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential Assembly/Service
and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226
(ELD).
12. Apply a bead of sealant to the mating surface of the carrier cover as shown.
- Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications.
CAUTION: Remove any old sealant adhering to the mating surfaces. Also remove any moisture,
oil, or foreign material adhering to the application and mating surfaces.
13. Install the carrier cover to the gear carrier. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque. Refer to
See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential
Assembly/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226.
14. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Fill the front final drive assembly with recommended differential gear oil. Refer to See:
Maintenance/Fluids/Fluid - Differential/Service and Repair/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD).
Page 2266
Information Bus: Electrical Diagrams
CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram - CAN SYSTEM CAN System - Part 1
Page 1424
Page 1785
Page 271
Page 5108
Speaker: Service and Repair Premium Without Navigation
Front Tweeter
FRONT TWEETER
Removal and Installation
FRONT TWEETER
Removal 1. Remove the front tweeter grille. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Panel Assembly/Removal And Installation.
2. Remove the front tweeter clips (C103) (A). 3. Disconnect the front tweeter connector and remove
the front tweeter (1).
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Center Speaker
CENTER SPEAKER
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
CAUTION: Use a suitable tool to prevent damage to the center speaker grille and the instrument
panel.
1. Using a suitable tool, remove the center speaker grille finisher (1). 2. Disconnect the center
speaker connector (A). 3. Remove the center speaker screws (B). 4. Remove the center speaker
(2).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Woofer
Specifications
Crankshaft Main Bearing: Specifications
MAIN BEARING
Undersize
Main Bearing Oil Clearance
Page 1721
Page 1755
13. Select Confirm
14. Select Diagnosis
15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete.
Locations
Oil Pressure Gauge: Locations
METER SYSTEM
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE : Component Parts Location
Page 6170
- Check that the glass is securely fit into the glass run groove.
- Lower the glass slightly [approximately 10 to 20 mm (0.39 to 0.79 in)] and check that the
clearance to the sash is parallel. If the clearance between the glass and sash is not parallel, loosen
the regulator bolts, guide rail bolts, and glass and guide rail bolts to correct the glass position.
FRONT DOOR GLASS REGULATOR ASSEMBLY
Removal 1. Remove the front door speaker. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional
Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Speaker/Service and
Repair/MID Audio/Front Door Speaker.
2. Remove the hole cover over rear glass bolt. 3. Operate the power window main switch to
raise/lower the door window until the glass bolts can be seen. 4. Remove the inside seal. 5.
Remove the glass bolts. 6. Raise the front door glass and hold it in place with suitable tool. 7.
Disconnect the harness connector from the regulator assembly. 8. Remove the bolts and the
regulator assembly.
Disassembly And Assembly Remove the regulator motor from the regulator assembly.
Inspection After Removal Check the regulator assembly for the following items. If a malfunction is
detected, replace or grease it.
- Wire wear
- Regulator deformation
- Grease condition for each sliding part
The arrows in the figure show the application points of the body grease.
Installation 1. Install the regulator assembly.
Front door glass regulator assembly nuts and bolt : 7.5 N.m (0.77 kg-m, 66 in-lb)
2. Connect the harness connector to the regulator assembly. 3. Align the glass and install the glass
bolts.
Glass bolts : 6.1 N.m (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb)
4. Reset the limit switch. 5. Install front door speaker. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional
Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Speaker/Service and Repair/MID
Audio/Front Door Speaker.
SETTING OF LIMIT SWITCH AFTER INSTALLATION
Setting of Limit Switch If any of the following work has been done, set the limit switch (integrated in
the motor). Removal and installation of the regulator.
- Removal and installation of the motor from the regulator.
- Removal and installation of the glass.
- Removal and installation of the glass run.
Resetting After installing each component, perform the following procedure to reset the limit switch.
Page 1509
Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Removal And Installation
AIR CLEANER FILTER
Removal and Installation (Viscous paper type)
REMOVAL
NOTE: The viscous paper type filter does not need cleaning between replacement intervals.
- Replace the air filter as necessary for periodic maintenance. Refer to See: Maintenance.
1. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. 2. Remove the air cleaner case (upper). 3.
Remove the air cleaner filter from the air cleaner case (lower).
INSTALLATION 1. Install the new air cleaner filter in the air cleaner case (lower). 2. Install the air
cleaner case (upper). 3. Install the air duct and resonator assembly (inlet).
Page 181
Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R) Battery
Replacement
Keyless Start Transmitter: Technical Service Bulletins Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R) Battery
Replacement
Classification: EL09-042
Reference: NTB09-118
Date: October 28, 2009
INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT AND BATTERY DISCHARGE INDICATOR
RESET
APPLIED VEHICLES: Vehicles equipped with the Intelligent Key type shown below.
IF YOU CONFIRM
^ The Intelligent Key is the type that has a notch on each side.
And
^ The battery in the Intelligent Key needs to be replaced for any reason.
ACTION
1. Open the Intelligent Key as described in the Service Procedure, and replace the battery.
2. Confirm the battery discharge indicator has reset/is not illuminated in the dot matrix display.
NOTES:
^ DO NOT insert a tool into the notches of the Intelligent Key to pry it open, as this may damage
the printed circuit board (PCB).
^ The battery is a maintenance item and is not warrantable.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelligent Key.
2. Place a piece of tape on the end of a small flathead screwdriver.
Page 6201
Windshield: Service and Repair
WINDSHIELD GLASS
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove inside mirror. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Mirrors/Service and
Repair/Inside Mirror. 2. Partially remove the headlining (front edge). Refer to See: Body and
Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair. 3. Remove cowl top cover. Refer to
See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 4. Apply a protective tape
around the windshield glass to protect the painted surface from damage.
- Remove glass using piano wire or power cutting tool and an inflatable pump bag.
- If the windshield glass is to be reused, mark the body and the glass with mating marks.
WARNING: When cutting the glass from the vehicle, always wear safety glasses and heavy gloves
to help prevent glass splinters from entering your eyes or cutting your hands.
CAUTION: When the windshield glass is to be reused, do not use a cutting knife or power cutting tool.
- Be careful not to scratch the glass when removing.
- Do not set or stand glass on its edge. Small chips may develop into cracks.
INSTALLATION
Page 1949
CAUTION: Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly.
- Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket.
- Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling.
- Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water.
Removal 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2.
Disconnect the accelerator position sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the two upper and one
lower accelerator pedal nuts. 4. Remove the adjustable accelerator pedal assembly.
CAUTION: Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly.
- Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket.
- Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling.
- Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Inspection After Installation Check that the accelerator pedal moves smoothly within the specified range.
Non-adjustable accelerator pedal - total pedal applied stroke : 48 mm (1.89 in)
- Depress and release the accelerator pedal to check that it returns smoothly to the original
released position.
- Perform an electrical inspection of the accelerator pedal position sensor. Refer to See: Computers
and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/VIN Registration See:
Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator
Pedal Released Position Learning See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning See: Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning .
CAUTION: When the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor is disconnected,
perform "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to See: Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released
Position Learning .
Service and Repair
Blower Motor Switch: Service and Repair
VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL
Removal and Installation
Variable Blower Control - Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
REMOVAL 1. Remove the glove box assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Lower Panel RH And Glove Box/Removal And
Installation.
2. Disconnect the variable blower control electrical connector. 3. Remove the two screws and
remove the variable blower control.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 185
Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1421 Stored
PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL
ON/DTC P1421 Stored
Classification: EC09-014B
Reference: NTB09-048B
Date: April 21, 2011
2007-2009 TITAN AND ARMADA; MIL "ON" WITH DTC P1421 STORED
This bulletin has been amended. APPLIED VEHICLES, APPLIED VINS, and Table A and B have
been revised. Please discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007-2009 Titan (A60) 2007-2009 Armada (TA60)
APPLIED VINS and DATES: 2007-2008 Titan and Armada: All
2009 Titan: Vehicles built before 1N6AA0(***)9N312517 // April 7, 2009
2009 Armada: Vehicles built before 5N1AA08(**)9N614339 // April 7, 2009
IF YOU CONFIRM:
An Applied Vehicle has the MIL "ON" and DTC P1421 (Cold Start Control) stored in the ECM.
ACTION:
Confirm this bulletin applies.
Page 2174
i. Once the entire VIN is entered (a second time), select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See
Figure 16.
j. Select [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen to complete the VIN registration process. See
Figure 17.
k. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Page 3115
20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer.
CAUTION: During data transfer:
^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections.
^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF.
^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal.
NOTE:
^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or
^ The Error in Figure 9A displays.
a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged.
b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned
OFF (see step 3 and 4).
c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III
screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1).
Part 2
Page 2478
34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the
"Duplication Test" icon.
35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase.
36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18).
37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased.
^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs.
^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed.
Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below.
38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF.
39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch
(M/T) pedal;
Page 1889
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations
Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1421 Stored
Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1421 Stored
Classification: EC09-014B
Reference: NTB09-048B
Date: April 21, 2011
2007-2009 TITAN AND ARMADA; MIL "ON" WITH DTC P1421 STORED
This bulletin has been amended. APPLIED VEHICLES, APPLIED VINS, and Table A and B have
been revised. Please discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007-2009 Titan (A60) 2007-2009 Armada (TA60)
APPLIED VINS and DATES: 2007-2008 Titan and Armada: All
2009 Titan: Vehicles built before 1N6AA0(***)9N312517 // April 7, 2009
2009 Armada: Vehicles built before 5N1AA08(**)9N614339 // April 7, 2009
IF YOU CONFIRM:
An Applied Vehicle has the MIL "ON" and DTC P1421 (Cold Start Control) stored in the ECM.
ACTION:
Confirm this bulletin applies.
Page 5949
3. Adjust front fog lamps using adjusting screw so that the top edge of the high intensity zone is
100 mm (4 in) below the height of the fog lamp
centers as shown.
- When performing adjustment, if necessary, cover the headlamps and opposite fog lamp.
Page 3055
In the Administrator window select My Computer.
In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C).
In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder.
In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder.
In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder.
When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time.
Select and print the file/screen image that you want.
NOTE:
During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems.
Erase DTCs from all systems
22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen).
23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear.
24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.)
25. Select Connect.
26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
Page 5792
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the Fuel Pump Assembly from the vehicle.
^ Refer to section FL in the applicable Service Manual for removal information.
^ Make sure to follow all Service Manual warnings and cautions.
Page 2216
27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example).
28. Select Select
29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example).
30. Select Confirm
Page 4738
Compressor Clutch: Service and Repair
COMPRESSOR
Removal and Installation for Compressor Clutch
Magnet Clutch Assembly
REMOVAL 1. Remove the compressor. Refer to See: Service and Repair .
2. Remove the center bolt while holding the clutch disc stationary using Tool as shown.
Tool number : J-44614
3. Remove the clutch disc.
4. Remove the snap ring using external snap ring pliers or suitable tool. 5. Remove the pulley using
Tool with a small adapter. Position the small adapter on the end of the drive shaft and the center of
the puller on the small
Page 2281
Information Bus: Application and ID CAN System Specification Chart
CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
CAN System Specification Chart
Determine CAN system type from the following specification chart. Then choose the correct
diagnosis sheet.
NOTE: Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/CAN
Fundamental/Trouble Diagnosis Procedure for how to use CAN system specification chart.
VEHICLE EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION
NOTE: Check CAN system type from the vehicle shape and equipment.
Service and Repair
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair
Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery terminals and wait at least 3
minutes.
Do not use air tools or electric tools for servicing.
Always work from the side of air bag module. Do not work from the front of it.
Always place air bag module with pad side facing upward.
Do not cause impact to the air bag module by dropping etc. Replace the air bag module if it has
been dropped or sustained an impact.
After the work is completed, make sure no system malfunction is detected by air bag warning lamp.
In case a malfunction is detected by the air bag warning lamp, reset by the self-diagnosis function
and delete the memory by CONSULT-III.
If a malfunction is still detected after the above operation, perform self-diagnosis to repair
malfunctions. Refer to
Locations
Page 1760
In the Administrator window select My Computer.
In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C).
In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder.
In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder.
In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder.
When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time.
Select and print the file/screen image that you want.
NOTE:
During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems.
Erase DTCs from all systems
22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen).
23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear.
24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.)
25. Select Connect.
26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
Page 3113
16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5).
^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB,
diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing.
17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.)
Page 5690
c. Remove the Fuel Temperature Sensor from the Plastic Retaining Clip.
d. Remove the wires from the Securing Tab.
e. Unplug the White Wire Connector at the top of the fuel pump.
^ DO NOT disturb the Black Wire Connector located next to the white Wire connector.
f. Carefully cut the tie-wrap securing the harnesses to the corrugated tubing.
CAUTION:
DO NOT damage the wires or the wire insulation when cutting the Tie-Wrap.
Page 3954
Battery: Testing and Inspection
BATTERY
Work Flow
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS WITH BATTERY SERVICE CENTER For battery testing, use Battery
Service Center (J-48087). For details and operating instructions, refer to Technical Service Bulletin
and/or Battery Service Center User Guide.
Page 3018
Adjustments
Shifter A/T: Adjustments
SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM
Adjustment of A/T Position
1. Loosen nut of control cable. 2. Place PNP switch and selector lever in "P" position. 3. After
pushing the control cable in the direction shown with a force of 9.8 N.m (1kg-m, 2.2 lb-ft), release it.
This is in the natural state, tighten
control cable nut to specifications.
Control cable nut : 14.5 N.m (1.5 kg-m, 11 ft-lb)
Page 844
^ DO NOT push/pull on the tire to perform the caster sweep.
7. Make sure the steering wheel is centered when performing toe-in measurements and
adjustments.
NOTE:
If you are using a Hunter alignment machine equipped with the WinToe(R)-Adjustment System:
^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The WinToe(R) system is not affected by steering
system movement during the adjustment process.
^ Bumping the tire or re-centering the steering wheel when adjusting "near frozen" tie rods is not
necessary. This makes the adjustment process faster
and easier.
^ WinToe(R) eliminates the effect of lash in the steering system.
If you are using a John Bean alignment machine equipped with EZ Toe:
^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The EZ Toe system is not affected by steering
system movement during the adjustment process.
^ This software routine is an improved method of setting front toe, making it easier to obtain a
centered steering wheel.
^ With EZ Toe, it is possible to adjust toe with the steering wheel turned at any angle left or right.
This is helpful when setting toe on engine wall
mounted rack and pinion units.
IMPORTANT:
If during the alignment process the vehicle was lifted off of the rack; after lowering, make sure to
jounce (bounce) the vehicle before confirming adjustments are correct.
After you have checked and adjusted vehicle alignment
8. Print the BEFORE and AFTER measurements and attach them to the Repair Order.
9. Road test the vehicle to make sure the steering wheel is "centered" when driving on a straight
flat road.
Page 1729
Page 397
Page 3075
CAUTION
2. When you get to the ECM Reprogramming screen shown in Figure 1, confirm this bulletin
applies as follows.
A. On your C-III screen, look at the Part Number column (see Figure 1):
^ If this column is blank (no part number listed), this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to
ASIST for further diagnostic information.
^ If a Part Number is listed, write it on the Repair Order.
Page 5779
3. Install the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit as follows (see Figure 5):
CAUTION:
Do not bend the float arm when handling the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit / Fuel Pump Assembly.
a. Slide the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit into the attachment slots until the two Locking Tabs snap
in place.
^ Confirm the Locking Tabs are snapped in place by trying to move the Sender Unit up and down
(it should not move).
b. Insert the Fuel Temperature Sensor into the Plastic Retaining Clip.
^ Make sure the "circular flange" of the Sensor is positioned between the Clip and the Rib.
c. Insert the two Fuel Temperature Sensor Wires into the Securing Tab.
d. Connect the White Wire Connector into the top of the Fuel Pump (see Figure 6).
e. Pull and push all connectors to make sure they are fully locked in place.
Specifications
Timing Chain: Specifications
Timing Chain Tensioner
Specifications
Knock Sensor: Specifications
Knock Sensor Torque ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................... 21.1 Nm, 16 ft lb
Locations
Page 2811
- If the connector and the tube are stuck together, push and pull several times until they start to
move. Then disconnect them by pulling.
CAUTION: The quick connector can be disconnected when the tabs are completely depressed. Do not twist
the quick connector more than necessary.
- Do not use any tools to disconnect the quick connector.
- Keep the resin tube away from heat. Be especially careful when welding near the tube.
- Prevent any acid liquids such as battery electrolyte, from getting on the resin tube.
- Do not bend or twist the resin tube during connection.
- Do not remove the remaining retainer on the hard tube (or the equivalent) except when the resin
tube or the retainer is replaced.
- When the resin tube or hard tube, or the equivalent, is replaced, also replace the retainer with a
new one (white colored retainer).
- To keep the quick connector clean and to avoid damage and contamination from foreign
materials, cover the quick connector with plastic bags or suitable material as shown.
8. Remove the four bolts and remove the fuel tank shield using power tool. 9. Remove the fuel tank
strap bolts while supporting the fuel tank with a suitable lift jack.
Page 4487
Page 5109
WOOFER
Removal and Installation
SUBWOOFER
Removal 1. Remove the front seat LH. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Seat/Removal and
Installation.
2. Disconnect the subwoofer connector (B). Arrow Indicates : Vehicle front
3. Remove the subwoofer bolts (A). 4. Remove the subwoofer (1).
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Front Door Speaker
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
Removal and Installation
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
Removal 1. Remove the front door finisher. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and
Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair.
2. Remove the four front door speaker screws. 3. Disconnect the front door speaker connector and
remove the front door speaker.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Rear Door Speaker
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
Removal and Installation
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
Page 3178
Shift Indicator: Description and Operation Component Description
METER SYSTEM
SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR : Component Description
Page 949
Fuel Filter: Removal and Replacement
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
Removal and Installation
Short Wheel Base
Long Wheel Base
Page 1809
^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed.
^ C-III Security Card is installed.
^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still
cable-connected to the vehicle.
1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect
the VI to the vehicle.
CAUTION
2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer.
CAUTION
3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery:
For Conventional Vehicles
^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate.
NOTE:
The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended.
CAUTION
For Hybrid Vehicles
^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station.
^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery.
Page 2887
Page 1155
Towing Information: Service and Repair Vehicle Recovery
TOW TRUCK TOWING
Vehicle Recovery (Freeing a stuck vehicle)
Tow chains or cables must be attached only to the main structural members of the vehicle.
Pulling devices should be routed so they do not touch any part of the suspension, steering, brake
or cooling systems
Always pull the cable straight out from the front or rear of the vehicle. Never pull the vehicle at a
sideways angle.
Pulling devices such as ropes or canvas straps are not recommended for use for vehicle towing or
recovery.
Page 2068
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL
Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE)
REMOVAL 1. Remove engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Engine Cover.
2. Remove air duct and resonator assembly. Refer to See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Air
Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair/Removal and
Installation.
3. Disconnect camshaft position sensor connector.
4. Remove camshaft position sensor (2) from Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (LH)
(1).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Replace the O-ring (3) of the camshaft position sensor with a new one, then lubricate
O-ring with engine oil before installing.
Camshaft position sensor bolt : 9.6 N.m (0.98 kg-m, 85 in-lb)
Page 2801
Page 843
^ Apply the brakes as shown.
^ Start the engine to allow brake boost.
^ Turn the engine OFF,
^ Remove all lock pins-front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates".
^ Make sure the bridge plate will not interfere with movement of the turn plate.
Put the bridge plate in the down position.
^ Perform caster sweep by turning the steering wheel from outside the vehicle.
Page 3949
JIS = Japan Industrial Standard, used for Japan produced batteries CCA = Cold Cranking Amps,
standard for North American produced batteries
IMPORTANT:
^ JIS batteries have different testing specifications than CCA batteries.
^ If you must use the GR-8 Battery Tester in a mode other than MODEL mode, JIS Mode MUST
ALWAYS BE USED for JIS batteries otherwise an
incorrect result will occur. NEVER test a JIS battery using the CCA test in the GR-8; the test
software in the GR-8 is different for JIS and CCA modes. ANY CCA value you may have for a
JIS-type battery is inaccurate for testing purposes.
^ ALWAYS test with the GR-8 using the MODEL mode (if available).
^ Selecting MODEL and vehicle type will automatically select the proper JIS or CCA value for the
Original Equipment battery.
^ If the applicable vehicle is not listed, update the GR-8 to make sure it has the most recent data
package. (1)
(1) To run the Midtronics Update Wizard for the GR-8 tester in CONSULT III:
^ Make sure the cables from the GR-8 to the multitasker are connected and both units are turned
on.
^ Click on the ASIST icon.
^ Click on INFO. Tool Box.
^ Select Midtronics GR-8.
^ Midtronics Update Wizard file screen displays.
^ Click on Change MUP File.
^ The Select a MUP file window displays with the path: C:\ProgramFiles\Midtronics\MUW.
^ Select 192-725C and click OK.
^ Click on next and follow the prompts on the Midtronics Update Wizard screen.
If the applicable vehicle still is not listed:
1) Determine which type of battery (CCA or JIS) is installed in the vehicle. See below for
descriptions of each battery.
2) Select CCA or JIS in the GR-8 based on the type of battery installed. See below for more
information.
Determine the Battery Type
Batteries with JIS (Japanese Industrial Standard) Number
Specifications
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Mass Air Flow Sensor
Body - Front Door Window Motor Limit Switch Resetting
Front Door Window Motor: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front Door Window Motor Limit
Switch Resetting
EL08-031A
Reference: NTB09-027A
Date: July 15, 2010
FRONT WINDOW REGULATOR MOTOR LIMIT SWITCH RESET
This bulletin has been amended. The APPLIED VEHICLES section has been revised. No other
changes have been made. Please discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2006-2010 Armada (TA60) 2006-2009 Quest (V42) 2006-2010 Titan (A60)
SERVICE INFORMATION
If any of the following work has been done:
^ removal and installation of the regulator assembly
^ removal and installation of the motor from the regulator
^ installation of a new glass window
^ installation of a new glass run
....check the label on the window motor to see if the part number is one of the following:
^ 80730-ZT01A ^ 80731-ZT01A ^ 80730-ZM70B ^ 80731-ZM70B
NOTE:
The label can be checked with the motor in the vehicle by using a mirror.
If the window motor is listed above, the Limit Switch will need to be reset using the procedure in
this bulletin.
NOTE:
Some of the window motors with these part numbers may appear to have a reset switch, but it will
not reset the Limit Switch.
SETTING OF LIMIT SWITCH
1. Connect the door harness to the power window motor, and rotate the motor more than 5 turns in
the glass raising (up) direction.
Lighting - Exterior Lamp Fogging Inspection
Brake Lamp: All Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Exterior Lamp Fogging Inspection
Classification: EL03-030E
Reference: NTB03-074E
Date: January 4, 2010
EXTERIOR LAMP FOGGING
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles and Service Procedure sections have been
revised. Please discard all previous versions.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2001-2010 Nissan, All Models
SERVICE INFORMATION
Occasionally customers may notice water vapor or fog in the exterior lamps. This is generally NOT
due to a defect.
The following information, illustrations, and flow chart are provided to help you in determining if an
incident for water/condensation in the lamps is normal or not.
All current exterior lamp assemblies are vented to the atmosphere (not sealed).
^ This is necessary to allow for expansion and contraction of air from temperature "variations"
(warmer or colder) without damage to the lamp.
^ Moisture in the air sometimes "travels" into and out of the lamp assembly through these vents.
^ Certain environmental conditions may cause moisture to condense.
^ The fogging/cloudiness should disappear over time when the lamp is in a dry environment.
Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the exterior lights based on environmental conditions
or sudden temperature changes (such as in a car wash). This is normal. See Figure 1.
NOTE:
This condensation can appear anywhere on the outer lens, typically at its coldest location.
Page 1320
Oil Cooler: Service and Repair Removal And Installation
OIL COOLER
Removal and Installation
WARNING: Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine oil and engine coolant are hot.
REMOVAL 1. Remove engine front undercover using power tool. 2. Disconnect water hoses,
pinching hoses near oil cooler to prevent engine coolant from spilling.
CAUTION: Do not spill engine coolant on the drive belt. 3. Remove oil filter. Refer to See: Oil
Filter/Service and Repair.
CAUTION: Do not spill engine oil on the drive belts. 4. Remove connector bolt, and remove oil
cooler and O-ring.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Oil Cooler Check oil cooler for cracks. Check oil cooler for clogging by blowing compressed air
through engine coolant inlet. If necessary, replace oil cooler assembly.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal, paying attention to the following:
- Confirm that no foreign objects are adhering to the sealing surfaces of the oil cooler or oil pan.
- Tighten the connecting bolt after aligning the stopper on the oil pan side with protrusion of the oil
cooler.
- Remove the valve by prying it out using a suitable tool. Install a new valve in place by tapping it.
- Install using a new O-ring.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1. Check levels and add engine oil and engine coolant.
Refer to See: Engine Oil/Testing and Inspection and See: Cooling System/Coolant/Testing
and Inspection.
2. Start the engine, and check for leaks of engine oil and engine coolant. 3. Stop the engine and
wait for 10 minutes. 4. Check engine oil level and engine coolant level again.
Locations
Page 5481
19. Install the seat into the body. Torque the bolts to 45 Nm (4.6 Kg-m, 33 ft-lb).
20. Re-connect the battery cables.
21. Confirm OCS operation. See the applicable Electronic Service Manual for details.
22. Re-program the radio presets.
23. Re-initialize the Automatic Sunroof as applicable. See the applicable Owner's Manual for
details.
Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-029 Date: 090421
Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming
Classification: EC09-007
Reference: NTB09-029
Date: April 21, 2009
CONSULT-III ECM REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE
APPLIED VEHICLES: All CONSULT-III (C-III) compatible Nissan vehicles
SERVICE INFORMATION
A complete step-by-step General Procedure for C-III ECM Reprogramming is now available in the
on-line version of this bulletin.
This General Procedure is also available via hyperlink from specific C-III symptom-based Technical
Service Bulletins in ASIST.
CAUTION
Part 1
Updated March 25, 2009
CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM REPROGRAMMING
A symptom based TSB is required before using this procedure.
IMPORTANT: Before starting, make sure:
^ ASIST on the C-III computer has been freshly synchronized (updated).
^ All C-III software updates (if any) have been installed.
NOTE:
The C-III computer automatically gets applicable ECM reprogramming data during ASIST
synchronization.
Locations
Page 4653
Defroster Nozzle
DUCTS AND GRILLES
Removal and Installation
DEFROSTER NOZZLE
Removal 1. Remove the instrument panel trim. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Panel Assembly/Removal And Installation.
2. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to See: Housing Assembly HVAC/Service
and Repair. 3. Remove the defroster nozzle.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Floor Duct
DUCTS AND GRILLES
Removal and Installation
FLOOR DUCT
Removal
Locations
Shift Indicator: Locations
METER SYSTEM
SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR : Component Parts Location
Page 363
Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair
DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
CAUTION: Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at
least 3 minutes.
1. Disconnect the harness connectors for each air bag module and seat belt pre-tensioner. 2.
Remove center console. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service
and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Center
Console.
3. Disconnect diagnosis sensor unit harness connectors. 4. Remove bolts from the diagnosis
sensor unit.
CAUTION: Do not use old bolts; replace with new bolts.
- Check diagnosis sensor unit bracket to ensure it is free of deformities, dents, cracks or rust. If it
shows any visible signs of damage, replace with new one.
- Replace diagnosis sensor unit if it has been dropped or sustained an impact.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Always follow the tightening sequence shown.
- After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer
to See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic
Overview/SRS Operation Check.
CAUTION: The diagnosis sensor unit must always be installed with the arrow mark "[=" pointing toward the
front of the vehicle for proper operation.
ECU DISCRIMINATED NO. After replacing the diagnosis sensor unit, confirm that the diagnosis
sensor unit identification is correct for the vehicle as equipped. Refer to See: Restraint Systems/Air
Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Scan Tool Testing and Procedures/On Board Diagnostic
(OBD) System/CONSULT-III Function (Air Bag).
Page 3804
2. Apply Molykote M-77 grease to piston boots. Cover the piston ends with piston boots, and then
install cylinder side lip on piston boots securely
into the grooves on cylinder body.
CAUTION: Do not reuse piston boots.
3. Apply clean brake fluid to pistons, then install pistons into cylinder body and insert piston boot
side lip into groove of pistons as shown.
CAUTION: Press the pistons evenly to prevent damage to cylinder wall. 4. Insert into cylinder body
by hand and insert piston boot piston-side lip into piston groove.
CAUTION: Press pistons evenly and vary the pressing point to prevent cylinder inner wall from
being rubbed. 5. Install new sliding pins, bushing and sliding pin boots to torque member. 6. Install
cylinder body. Tighten sliding pin bolts to the specified torque.
Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info.
Technical Service Bulletin # 04-054C Date: 110406
Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info.
Classification: WT04-004C
Reference: NTB04-054C
Date: April 6, 2011
WHEEL ALIGNMENT INFORMATION
This bulletin has been amended to correct some typographical errors in SERVICE INFORMATION.
No other changes have been made. Discard all previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R
Warranty Claim Information: In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the
following item MUST be attached to the Repair Order:
^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings.
IMPORTANT:
If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or
charged back).
ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the
Service Dept.
General Information and Recommendations
SERVICE INFORMATION
^ When performing a wheel alignment it is important that you read and follow all of the instructions
supplied with your alignment equipment.
^ The information in this bulletin is not intended to be complete wheel alignment instructions.
^ Use the information in this bulletin as a supplement to the instructions for your equipment.
General Information and Recommendations
1. Four-Wheel Thrust Alignment should always be performed.
^ This type of alignment is recommended for all Nissan vehicles.
^ The four-wheel thrust process ensures that the vehicle is properly aligned, and helps ensure
proper "centering" of the steering wheel.
2. Use the right alignment machine.
^ You must use a quality alignment machine that will give accurate results when performing
alignment checks.
^ Refer to the Nissan TECH-MATE Service Equipment Catalog for recommended alignment
equipment.
^ The alignment rack itself should be capable of accepting any Nissan vehicle. The rack should be
checked to ensure that it is level.
3. Make sure the alignment machine is properly calibrated.
^ Your alignment equipment should be regularly calibrated in order to give accurate readings.
^ If any instrument that is part of the alignment machine is dropped or damaged, calibration should
be checked immediately.
^ Check with the manufacturer of your specific equipment for their recommended
service/calibration schedule.
NOTE:
In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the following item MUST be attached
to the Repair Order:
^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings.
Antitheft System - NATS Security VBC Logic
Body Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Antitheft System - NATS Security VBC Logic
Classification: EL10-028
Reference: NTB10-106
Date: September 10, 2010
NATS SECURITY - VBC LOGIC
APPLIED VEHICLE: 2009 - 2011 All Nissan with NATS / Immobilizer System
SERVICE INFORMATION
All model year 2009 - 2011 Nissan vehicles equipped with NATS/Immobilizer system have the new
VBC (Validate Before Crank) starter relay logic.
VBC (Validate Before Crank) Logic:
^ The BCM will make sure that a valid (registered) key is being used before engaging the starter
relay. If the key is not authenticated the starter will not
operate.
^ If the engine cranks, the issue is not related to NATS. Do not replace NATS components (BCM,
I-Key, FOB Reader or RF Receiver). Refer to ASIST
for further diagnostic information as needed.
Page 5284
8. Remove the door lock knob. 9. Remove the rear door tweeter speaker.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
REAR DOOR - KING CAB
Removal 1. Remove the upper and lower seat belt anchor bolts. Refer to See: Restraint
Systems/Seat Belt Systems/Child Restraint/Child Seat Tether
Attachment/Service and Repair/LATCH (Lower Anchors And Tether For Children) System.
2. Release the clips and remove seat belt retractor cover. 3. Remove the armrest. 4. Remove the
screws behind armrest. 5. Release the clips and remove rear door finisher.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 226
34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the
"Duplication Test" icon.
35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase.
36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18).
37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased.
^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs.
^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed.
Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below.
38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF.
39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch
(M/T) pedal;
Specifications
Firing Order: Specifications
Ignition System
Firing order: 1 - 8 - 7 - 3 - 6 - 5 - 4 -2
Page 1454
EM-6
Transfer Case TX15B
Service and Repair
Trim Panel: Service and Repair
BODY SIDE TRIM
Removal and Installation
KING CAB
CAUTION: Wrap the tip of flat-bladed screwdriver with a cloth when removing metal clips from finishers.
- When removing or installing body side welts, do not allow butyl seal to come in contact with pillar
finisher.
CREW CAB
CAUTION: Wrap the tip of flat-bladed screwdriver with a cloth when removing metal clips from finishers.
- When removing or installing body side welts, do not allow butyl seal to come in contact with pillar
finisher.
A/T Shift Lock System
Service and Repair
Auxiliary Step / Running Board: Service and Repair
RUNNING BOARDS
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the bolts and remove the running board from running board brackets. 2.
Remove the screw and remove the end cap.
Page 239
i. Once the entire VIN is entered (a second time), select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See
Figure 16.
j. Select [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen to complete the VIN registration process. See
Figure 17.
k. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Page 1724
Page 1347
c. Install new O-rings to the oil pump and front cover side.
d. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque in numerical order as shown.
M6 x 30 mm (1.18 in): No.15,16 M8 x 25 mm (0.98in): No.1,3,5,7, 11,13 M8 x 45 mm (1.77 in):
No.2,4,6,8, 10, 14 M8 x 123 mm (4.84in): No.9, 12
2. Install the oil strainer to the oil pan (upper).
3. Install the oil pan (lower).
a. Using a scraper to remove old liquid gasket from mating surfaces.
- Also remove old liquid gasket from mating surface of oil pan (upper).
- Remove old liquid gasket from bolt holes and thread.
CAUTION: Do not scratch or damage the mating surfaces when cleaning off old liquid gasket.
b. Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket using Tool as shown.
Tool number: WS39930000 ( - )
Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to Service Manual GI Section.
CAUTION: Installation should be done within 5 minutes after applying liquid gasket.
Component Description
Fuel Injector: Testing and Inspection Component Description
FUEL INJECTOR
Component Description
The fuel injector is a small, precise solenoid valve. When the ECM supplies a ground to the fuel
injector circuit, the coil in the fuel injector is energized. The energized coil pulls the ball valve back
and allows fuel to flow through the fuel injector into the intake manifold. The amount of fuel injected
depends upon the injection pulse duration. Pulse duration is the length of time the fuel injector
remains open. The ECM controls the injection pulse duration based on engine fuel needs.
Page 2291
Driver Seat Control Unit
BCM
NOTE: Replace the unit when "NG" is indicated on the "INITIAL DIAG".
Front Air Control
Page 2427
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Connect C-III to the vehicle to begin the reprogramming procedure.
^ If you are not familiar with the reprogramming procedure. Refer to "CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM
Reprogramming" general procedure.
Caution
2. When you get to the ECM Reprogramming screen shown in Figure 1, confirm this bulletin
applies as follows:
A. On your C-III screen, look at the Part Number column (see Figure 1).
Page 1465
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Clean the oil strainer.
INSTALLATION
1. Install the oil pan (upper) using the following steps.
a. Using a scraper to remove old liquid gasket from mating surfaces.
- Also remove old liquid gasket from mating surface of oil pan (upper).
- Remove old liquid gasket from bolt holes and threads.
CAUTION: Do not scratch or damage the mating surfaces when cleaning off old liquid gasket.
b. Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket as shown using Tool.
Tool number: WS39930000 ( - )
Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent.
CAUTION: Apply liquid gasket to outside of bolt hole for the hole shown by *. Installation should be done within
5 minutes after applying liquid gasket.
c. Install new O-rings to the oil pump and front cover side.
Page 6199
condition.
A magnifying glass (10X magnification) must be used to identify wiper scratches as a start point of
cracks in the glass.
^ Inspect the wiper paths (may be a single scratch of a group of scratches)
^ Small scratches can cause a small rupture in the outer glass surface, which can lead to a crack
from thermal conditions, vehicle vibration during
driving, or wind pressure.
A magnifying glass (10X magnification) must be used to identify metal object scratches as a start
point of cracks in the glass.
^ Scratches can occur from metal objects such as keys and metal buttons.
^ These scratches are typically sharp and can be found anywhere on the glass surface.
^ Thoroughly examine the entire length of the crack to identify any scratch as a start point.
^ Small scratches can cause a small rupture in the outer glass surface, which can lead to a crack
from thermal conditions, vehicle vibration during
driving, or wind pressure.
A magnifying glass (10X magnification) must be used to identify scratches caused by a
contaminated towel as a start point of cracks in the glass.
^ Scratches can occur from wiping the glass with a towel that has sand particles or dirt on it.
Front
Brake Pad: Testing and Inspection Front
FRONT DISC BRAKE
BRAKE PAD : Inspection
PAD WEAR Check pad thickness from the inspection holes on cylinder body.
Check using a scale if necessary.
Removal and Replacement
Brake Master Cylinder: Removal and Replacement
Exploded View
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER
Exploded View
With ABS
With ABLS/VDC/TCS
Page 672
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair
ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM
Removal and Installation
ADJUSTABLE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY Adjustable Accelerator Pedal
CAUTION: Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal adjusting mechanism.
- Before removal and installation, the accelerator and brake pedals must be in the front most
position.
This is to align the base position of the accelerator and brake pedals. Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly.
- Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket.
- Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling.
- Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water.
Removal 1. Move the accelerator and brake pedals to the frontmost position. 2. Turn the ignition
switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal. 3. Disconnect the adjustable brake pedal
cable from the adjustable brake pedal. Unlock, then pull the adjustable brake pedal cable to disconnect it from the adjustable brake pedal.
Page 3034
B. Compare the Part Number you wrote down to the numbers in the Current ECM Part Number
column in Table A , or Table B above.
^ If there is a match, this bulletin applies. Continue with the reprogramming procedure.
NOTE:
If there are two lines (two reprogramming options) on your C-III screen, use the one that does not
have the message "Caution! Use ONLY with NTBXX-XXX".
^ If there is not a match, this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to ASIST for further
diagnostic information.
3. If this bulletin applies and you have performed ECM reprogramming, the screen in Figure 2
appears when reprogramming is complete.
4. Make sure to erase DTCs from all systems.
NOTE:
During reprogramming, DTCs will set in several systems and must be erased.
5. Test drive the vehicle and make sure it operates correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF.
^ If the Check Engine light comes ON, go back to ASIST for further diagnostic information. Refer to
the applicable Electronic Service Manual as
needed.
^ Diagnosis and repairs beyond ECM reprogramming are not covered by this bulletin.
Page 3272
Differential Cover: Service and Repair Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD)
CARRIER COVER
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Drain the differential gear oil. Refer to See: Fluid - Differential/Service and
Repair/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD).
2. Disconnect the parking brake cable (A) and brake tube (B) from the carrier cover. 3. Remove the
carrier cover bolts and separate the carrier cover from the gear carrier using Tool.
Tool number : KV10111100 (J-37228)
CAUTION: Do not damage the mating surface.
- Do not insert flat-bladed screwdriver, this will damage the mating surface.
INSTALLATION 1. Apply a bead of sealant to the mating surface of the carrier cover as shown.
- Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications.
CAUTION: Remove any old sealant adhering to the mating surfaces. Also remove any moisture,
oil, or foreign material adhering to the application and mating surfaces. 2. Install the carrier cover to
the gear carrier. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque. Refer to See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive
M226.
3. Connect the parking brake cable and brake tube to the carrier cover. 4. Fill the rear final drive
assembly with recommended differential gear oil. Refer to See: Fluid - Differential/Service and
Repair/Rear Final Drive
M226 (ELD).
Page 5759
Speedometer Module: Description and Operation Component Description
METER SYSTEM
SPEEDOMETER : Component Description
Page 704
Knock Sensor: Locations
Page 988
engine removal or repair.
- The radiator must be completely empty of coolant and water.
- Apply sealant to the threads of the cylinder block drain plug. Use Genuine High Performance
Thread Sealant or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications.
2. Set the vehicle heater controls to the full HOT and heater ON position. Turn the vehicle ignition
ON with the engine OFF as necessary to activate
the heater mode.
3. Remove the vented reservoir cap and replace it with a non-vented reservoir cap before filling the
cooling system. 4. Install the Tool by installing the radiator cap adapter onto the radiator neck
opening. Then attach the gauge body assembly with the refill tube and
the venturi assembly to the radiator cap adapter.
Tool number : KV991J0070 (J-45695)
5. Insert the refill hose into the coolant mixture container that is placed at floor level. Make sure the
ball valve is in the closed position. Use Genuine NISSAN Long Life Anti-freeze coolant or equivalent, mixed 50/50 with distilled water
or demineralized water. Refer to See: .
Cooling system capacity (with reservoir) : Refer to See: .
6. Install an air hose to the venturi assembly, the air pressure must be within specification.
Compressed air supply pressure : 5.7 - 8.5 kPa (5.6 - 8.4 kg/cm2, 80 - 120 psi)
CAUTION: The compressed air supply must be equipped with an air dryer. 7. The vacuum gauge
will begin to rise and there will be an audible hissing noise. During this process open the ball valve
on the refill hose slightly.
Coolant will be visible rising in the refill hose. Once the refill hose is full of coolant, close the ball
valve. This will purge any air trapped in the refill hose.
Page 2173
f. Enter the entire VIN using the keyboard. See Figure 13.
^ Use [CHNG] to switch between the letters and numbers keyboard screens.
g. Once the entire VIN is entered, select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 14.
h. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen and enter the entire VIN again. See Figure 15.
^ You MUST enter the VIN a second time for confirmation purposes.
Electrical Units Location
Brakes - Front Brake Pad Service Supplement
Brake Caliper: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Front Brake Pad Service Supplement
Classification: BR10-005
Reference: NTB10-081
Date: June 25, 2010
2004 - 2010 TITAN AND ARMADA; FRONT BRAKE PAD SERVICE
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2010 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2010 Armada (TA60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
Front brake service is needed that will require the removal of the front brake caliper cylinder body
or brake pads,
ACTION:
Follow the Service Procedure in this bulletin as a supplement to the brake service.
NOTE:
The supplemental items in the Service Procedure of this bulletin supersede any previous detailed
brake pad removal procedures.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You
MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Partially drain the brake fluid.
^ Refer to section BR (DRAIN and REFILL) in the Service Manual.
2. Remove the front wheels.
^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed for front wheel removal.
Page 4273
IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) - Part 3
Locations
Page 5703
Page 4367
^ Center the front wheels on the turn plates.
^ Chock the left rear wheel.
Preliminary Checks:
3. Perform pre-alignment checks.
^ Tire condition (wear, partial wear, flaws, etc.)
^ Road wheel condition (damage and deformation)
^ Tire pressure
^ Inspect for visible damage to any suspension components
^ Wheel bearing axial play
^ Ball joints of suspension arms
^ Shock absorber operation and visual check for oil leakage
^ Condition of axle and suspension (check for bushing cracks and slack)
^ Vehicle weight
> Empty - no cargo, luggage, or passengers
> Fuel level is full
Page 3321
8. Remove side bearing caps. 9. Loosen the side bearing adjusters using Tool.
Tool number : - (C - 4164)
10. Keep side bearing outer races together with inner races. Do not mix them up. Also, keep side
bearing adjusters together with bearing.
11. Remove side bearing adjusters from gear carrier. 12. Remove bracket for the differential lock
position switch connector and bolts.
13. Remove differential lock position switch.
INSTALLATION 1. Apply sealant to threads of differential lock position switch. Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications.
CAUTION: Remove old sealant adhering to gear carrier and differential lock position switch. Also
remove any moisture, oil, or foreign material adhering to application and gear carrier and
differential lock position switch.
Mechanical Specifications
Engine Oil Pressure: Mechanical Specifications
Oil Pump
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Standard and Limit
OIL PRESSURE
OIL PUMP
REGULATOR VALVE
ENGINE OIL CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE)
Regulator Valve
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Standard and Limit
OIL PRESSURE
Page 3482
Switch: Service and Repair
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK POSITION SWITCH
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
Differential Lock Position Switch
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage spline, companion flange and front oil seal when removing propeller
shaft.
- Before removing rear final drive assembly or rear axle assembly, disconnect ABS sensor harness
connector from the assembly and move it away from rear final drive assembly/rear axle assembly
area. Failure to do so may result in sensor wires being damaged and sensor becoming inoperative.
1. Drain rear final drive gear oil. Refer to See: Differential Assembly/Fluid - Differential/Service and
Repair/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD). 2. Remove rear propeller shaft. Refer to See: Drive/Propeller
Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Propeller Shaft 3S1410.
3. Remove both RH and LH axle shafts. Refer to See: Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft
Assembly/Service and Repair/Rear Axle Shaft. 4. Remove the carrier cover. Refer to See:
Differential Assembly/Differential Cover/Service and Repair/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD).
5. Remove differential lock solenoid connector (B) bolt and disconnect differential lock position
connector (A). Arrow Indicates Front
6. For installation, apply a paint matching mark on one side of side bearing cap.
CAUTION: Side bearing caps are line-board for initial assembly. The matching marks are used to install them
in their original positions.
- For matching mark, use paint. Do not damage side bearing cap.
7. Remove adjuster lock plates.
Page 2088
Transfer Case TX15B
Page 3146
REPAIR FLOW CHART
Page 56
- After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), perform the following.
- Refill brake system with new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system. Refer to See:
Brakes and Traction Control/Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair.
- Adjust the steering angle sensor. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes /
Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Additional Service
When Replacing Control Unit/Description See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes /
Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Additional Service
When Replacing Control Unit/Special Repair Requirement See: Brakes and Traction
Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Adjustment Of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position/Description See: Brakes and
Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming
and Relearning/Adjustment Of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position/Special Repair
Requirement.
- Calibrate the decel G sensor. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes /
Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Inspection And
Adjustment/Special Repair Requirement.
Page 2795
Page 1917
3. Loosen the sensor approximately 10 degrees.
4. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds.
5. Tighten the sensor 10 degrees, then loosen the sensor 10 degrees.
^ Repeat this motion several times until the sensor begins to turn more easily.
6. Continue the tightening/loosening motion while gradually unscrewing the sensor. Stop when the
sensor will not unscrew any further.
7. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds.
8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 until the sensor is removed.
Locations
Page 5599
Page 4342
^ Apply the brakes as shown.
^ Start the engine to allow brake boost.
^ Turn the engine OFF,
^ Remove all lock pins-front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates".
^ Make sure the bridge plate will not interfere with movement of the turn plate.
Put the bridge plate in the down position.
^ Perform caster sweep by turning the steering wheel from outside the vehicle.
Service and Repair
Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: Service and Repair
OIL SEAL
Removal and Installation of Rear Oil Seal
REMOVAL 1. Remove the transmission assembly. Refer to See: Transmission and
Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Removal
and Replacement/Transmission Assembly
2. Before removing the drive plate, put a match mark (A) on the crankshaft and drive plate for
alignment during installation. 3. Lock the drive plate using Tool (A).
Tool number : - (J-47245)
CAUTION: Do not damage the ring gear teeth, or the signal plate teeth behind the ring gear, when setting tool.
- Keep magnetic materials away from signal plate.
NOTE: Remove the bolts diagonally.
4. Remove the drive plate.
CAUTION: Never place drive plate with signal plate facing down.
- When handling the signal plate, take care not to damage or scratch it.
- Handle the signal plate in a manner that prevents it from becoming magnetized.
5. Remove the engine rear plate.
Page 4407
2. Mount transmitter on rim and slowly tighten transmitter nut to specification.
CAUTION: Do not over tighten transmitter nut.
Transmitter nut : 7.7 N.m (0.79 kg-m, 68 in-lb)
3. Place wheel on turntable of tire machine. Ensure that transmitter is 270 degrees from
mounting/dismounting head.
NOTE: Do not touch transmitter with mounting head. 4. Lubricate tire well, and install second side
of tire as normal. Ensure that tire does not rotate relative to rim. 5. Inflate tire and balance wheel
and tire assembly. Refer to See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Balancing Wheels. 6. Install
wheel and tire assembly in appropriate wheel position on vehicle.
NOTE: If replacing the transmitter, then transmitter wake up operation must be performed. Refer to
See: Wheels and Tires/Tire Monitoring System/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Transmitter Wake Up Operation.
7. Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction
Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing
and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing Control
Unit/Description See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing
Control Unit/Special Repair Requirement See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes /
Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Adjustment Of
Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position/Description See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock
Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Adjustment Of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position/Special Repair Requirement.
Page 3097
Page 5758
Speedometer Module: Description and Operation System Description
METER SYSTEM
SPEEDOMETER : System Description
The ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) provides a vehicle speed signal to the combination
meter via CAN communication lines.
Page 3050
13. Select Confirm
14. Select Diagnosis
15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete.
Page 5775
Page 5035
Page 1289
Drive Belt: Service and Repair
DRIVE BELTS
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. Refer to See: Tune-up and Engine
Performance Checks/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and
Repair/Removal and Installation.
2. Install Tool on drive belt auto tensioner pulley bolt, move in the direction of arrow (loosening
direction of tensioner) as shown.
Tool number : - (J-46535)
CAUTION: Avoid placing hand in a location where pinching may occur if the holding tool
accidentally comes off. 3. Remove the drive belt.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Make sure belt is securely installed around all pulleys. Rotate the crankshaft pulley several turns clockwise to equalize belt tension between pulleys.
- Make sure belt tension is within the allowable working range, using the indicator notch on the
drive belt auto tensioner. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection.
Page 5660
f. Use the new tie-wrap to secure all the wires to the black corrugated tubing (see Figure 6).
^ New tie-wrap is included with the new sender unit.
^ Make sure all wires are tied together (3 fuel level sending unit wires and 2 fuel pump wires).
^ Place the Tie-Wrap 90 mm (about 3.5 inches) from the top of the tubing.
^ Make sure the wires do not interfere with the movement of the float arm.
4. Carefully reinstall the Fuel Pump Assembly back into the vehicle in reverse of removal.
^ IMPORTANT: Use a new seal (O-Ring) when reinstalling the Fuel Pump Assembly.
^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed.
CAUTION:
DO NOT bend the Float Arm when reinstalling the Fuel Pump.
5. Confirm the Fuel Gauge operates properly.
Low-Pressure Flexible Hose
Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Low-Pressure Flexible Hose
LOW-PRESSURE FLEXIBLE HOSE
Removal and Installation for Low-Pressure Flexible Hose
REMOVAL 1. Remove the engine room cover using power tools. 2. Remove the engine air cleaner
and air ducts. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Tune-up and Engine
Performance Checks/Air
Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation .
3. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Refrigeration System .
CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the
entry of air. 4. Remove the low-pressure flexible hose.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Description and
Operation/Refrigeration System/Component .
CAUTION: Replace the O-ring of the low-pressure flexible hose with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it
when installing it.
- After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
Driver Air Bag Module
Air Bag: Description and Operation Driver Air Bag Module
SRS AIR BAG SYSTEM
Driver Air Bag Module
The driver air bag module is dual stage and located in the steering wheel assembly. It operates
with the SRS system in a frontal collision exceeding a specified level.
Page 2229
C. Scroll down and select [VIN REGISTRATION] on the "Select Work Item" screen. See Figure 10.
d. Press [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 11.
e. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 12.
Page 2441
Page 3026
Page 2313
4. Through the above procedure, the error is detected in the TCM branch line (shaded in the figure
below).
NOTE: For abbreviations, refer to See: CAN Fundamental/How To Use This Section/Abbreviation
List. 5. Perform the inspection for the detected error circuit. For the inspection procedure, refer to
"MALFUNCTION AREA CHART".
Page 5583
Automatic Air Conditioner
Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Description and Operation Automatic Air Conditioner
IN-Vehicle Sensor
IN-VEHICLE SENSOR
Component Description
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
In-vehicle Sensor
The in-vehicle sensor (1) is located on the lower instrument panel LH. It converts variations in
temperature of passenger compartment air (drawn in through the integrated fan) into a resistance
value. It is then input into the front air control.
Intake Sensor
INTAKE SENSOR
System Description
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Intake Sensor
The intake sensor is located on the heater and cooling unit assembly. It converts temperature of air
after if passes through the evaporator into a resistance value which is then input to the front air
control.
Page 2249
Page 2208
CAUTION
4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF.
^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure.
^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF.
^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear
defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel
heater, etc.
CAUTION
5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running.
If the cooling fans are running:
a. Turn the ignition OFF.
b. Wait for the engine to cool.
c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF).
d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running.
6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer.
7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress"
message to clear.
Page 256
Page 4269
TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS
Page 2351
1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the battery cable from the
negative terminal. 3. Check the terminals and connectors of the front air control for damage, bend
and loose connection (unit side and connector side). Is the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO
2. NO - Repair the terminal and connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1.
Disconnect the connector of front air control. 2. Check the resistance between the front air control
harness connector terminals. Models with auto A/C
- Models with 3 control dial system
- Models with 2 control dial system
Is the measurement value within the specification? YES - GO TO 3. NO - Repair the front air
control branch line. 3. CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check the power
supply and the ground circuit of the front air control. Refer to the following. Models with automatic air conditioner: See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Automatic Air Conditioner/Power Supply
And Ground Circuit For Controller/Diagnosis Procedure
- Models with manual air conditioner - type 1: See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Manual A/C (Type 1 - Two Control Dial
System)/Power Supply And Ground Circuit For Controller/Diagnosis Procedure
- Models with manual air conditioner - type 2: See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Manual A/C (Type 2 - Three Control Dial
System)/Power Supply And Ground Circuit For Controller/Diagnosis Procedure
Is the inspection result normal? YES (Present error) - Replace the front air control. Refer to See:
Heating and Air Conditioning/Control Module HVAC/Service and Repair. YES (Past error) - Error
was detected in the front air control branch line. NO - Repair the power supply and the ground
circuit.
STRG Branch Line Circuit
STRG BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 3. Check the terminals and connectors of
the steering angle sensor for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and connector side). Is
the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO 2. NO - Repair the terminal and connector. 2. CHECK
HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. Disconnect the connector of steering angle sensor. 2. Check
the resistance between the steering angle sensor harness connector terminals.
System Diagram
Shift Indicator: Description and Operation System Diagram
METER SYSTEM
SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR : System Diagram
Page 5793
2. Remove the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit from the Fuel Pump Assembly as follows:
a. First, press in on the two locking tabs on the sides of the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit
b. Then, pull the unit UP and OUT of the attachment slots
^ For Type A see Figure 1
^ For Type B see Figure 2
Locations
Page 4381
Alignment: Specifications Rear Suspension
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Wheelarch Height (Unladen*1)
Exploded View
Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair Exploded View
AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT
Exploded View
Locations
Canister Purge Volume Control Valve: Locations
Page 3664
Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair ABLS/ABS
ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY)
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to
See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 3. Drain the brake fluid.
Refer to See: Hydraulic System/Brake Fluid/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 4.
Disconnect the actuator harness connector from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
CAUTION: To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench to prevent the flare nuts
and brake tubes from being damaged.
- Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is
splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately.
5. Disconnect the brake tubes. 6. Remove the three bolts and remove the ABS actuator and
electric unit (control unit).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: To install, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench (commercial service tools).
- Always tighten brake tubes to specification when installing.
- Never reuse drained brake fluid.
Locations
Page 135
CONSULT-III Function (IPDM E/R)
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R)
CONSULT - III Function (IPDM E/R)
APPLICATION ITEM CONSULT-III performs the following functions via CAN communication with
IPDM E/R.
SELF DIAGNOSTIC Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures.
DATA MONITOR
Page 1433
b. At this time, make sure both intake and exhaust cam lobes of
No. 1 cylinder (top front on LH bank) point outside. If they do not point outside, turn crankshaft pulley once more.
5. Remove the crankshaft pulley.
a. Loosen the crankshaft pulley bolts using a hammer handle to secure the crankshaft.
b. Remove the crankshaft pulley from the crankshaft using tool.
- Remove the crankshaft pulley using suitable tool. Set the bolts in the two bolt holes [M6 x 1.0 mm
(0.04 in)] on the front surface.
NOTE: The dimension between the centers of the two bolt holes is 61 mm (2.40 in).
6. Remove the front cover.
a. Loosen and remove the bolts in the reverse of order shown. b. Cut the liquid gasket and remove
the covers using Tool.
Tool number : KV10111100 (J-37228)
CAUTION:
Page 2156
20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer.
CAUTION: During data transfer:
^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections.
^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF.
^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal.
NOTE:
^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or
^ The Error in Figure 9A displays.
a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged.
b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned
OFF (see step 3 and 4).
c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III
screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1).
Part 2
Page 4271
Power Distribution Module: Electrical Diagrams
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Wiring Diagram
IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) - Part 1
Page 2425
Page 2853
Ignition Timing: Component Tests and General Diagnostics
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check
IDLE SPEED
With CONSULT-III Check idle speed in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-III.
With GST Check idle speed with GST.
IGNITION TIMING 1. Attach timing light to loop wire as shown.
2. Check ignition timing.
Electrical Units Location
Body Control Module: Locations Electrical Units Location
Page 5166
NOTE:
See Figure 6 above for an example of damaged caused by incorrect removal.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTIONS (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the bolts at the front of the cover:
CAUTION:
^ Do not pull up on the front of the cover.
^ If you pull up on the front of the cover, it will break the cover.
Page 2517
7. Select VIN Registration
8. Select Next
9. Make sure the ignition is ON with engine OFF.
10. Select Start
Page 4174
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair Front Power Socket LH, Rear Power Socket (Cargo
Bed)
POWER SOCKET
Front Power Socket LH, Rear Power Socket (Cargo Bed)
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal.
2. Remove inner socket (1) from the ring (2) while pressing the hook (B) on the ring out from
square hole (A).
NOTE: Rear Power Socket (Cargo Bed) requires riveted finisher removal from bed prior to socket
removal. 3. Disconnect power socket connector. 4. Remove ring from power socket finisher while
pressing pawls.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Align notches of inner socket and ring, and socket finisher when installing.
Page 926
Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection
DRIVE BELTS
Checking Drive Belts
WARNING: Be sure to perform when the engine is stopped. 1. Remove air duct and resonator
assembly when inspecting drive belt. 2. Make sure that indicator (single line notch) of each auto
tensioner is within the allowable working range (between three line notches).
NOTE: Check the drive belt auto tensioner indication when the engine is cold.
- The indicator notch is located on the moving side of the drive belt auto tensioner.
3. Visually check entire belt for wear, damage or cracks. 4. If the indicator is out of allowable
working range or belt is damaged, replace the belt. Refer to See: Service and Repair.
DRIVE BELT TENSION There is no manual drive belt tension adjustment. The drive belt tension is
automatically adjusted by the drive belt auto tensioner.
Page 3682
Removal Remove the rear axle shaft assembly. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive
Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and Repair/Rear Axle Shaft.
NOTE: It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle shaft assembly to replace the rear wheel
sensor rotor.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the old rear wheel sensor rotor.
- Do not reuse the rear axle oil seal. The rear axle oil seal must be replaced every time the rear
axle shaft assembly is removed from the rear axle shaft housing.
Page 2871
Ignition Relay: Locations Without Intelligent Key System
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Terminal Layout
TERMINAL LAYOUT
Locations
Page 2642
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Service and Repair Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve
(RH)
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL
Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve (RH)
REMOVAL 1. Remove drive belt. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Drive Belts,
Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and
Repair.
2. Disconnect Intake valve timing control solenoid valve connector (RH).
3. Remove Intake valve timing control solenoid valve (RH) (3) from Intake valve timing control
solenoid valve cover (RH) (1).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Replace the O-ring (2) of the Intake valve timing control solenoid valve with a new one,
then lubricate O-ring with engine oil before installing.
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve bolt : 9.6 N.m (0.98 kg-m, 85 in-lb)
Page 3937
TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS
Page 3405
Drive/Propeller Shaft: Tools and Equipment Propeller Shaft 2S1410
PREPARATION
Commercial Service Tool
Lighting - Exterior Lamp Fogging Inspection
Brake Lamp: Customer Interest Lighting - Exterior Lamp Fogging Inspection
Classification: EL03-030E
Reference: NTB03-074E
Date: January 4, 2010
EXTERIOR LAMP FOGGING
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles and Service Procedure sections have been
revised. Please discard all previous versions.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2001-2010 Nissan, All Models
SERVICE INFORMATION
Occasionally customers may notice water vapor or fog in the exterior lamps. This is generally NOT
due to a defect.
The following information, illustrations, and flow chart are provided to help you in determining if an
incident for water/condensation in the lamps is normal or not.
All current exterior lamp assemblies are vented to the atmosphere (not sealed).
^ This is necessary to allow for expansion and contraction of air from temperature "variations"
(warmer or colder) without damage to the lamp.
^ Moisture in the air sometimes "travels" into and out of the lamp assembly through these vents.
^ Certain environmental conditions may cause moisture to condense.
^ The fogging/cloudiness should disappear over time when the lamp is in a dry environment.
Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the exterior lights based on environmental conditions
or sudden temperature changes (such as in a car wash). This is normal. See Figure 1.
NOTE:
This condensation can appear anywhere on the outer lens, typically at its coldest location.
Page 4494
Electrical - IPDM Serviceability
Power Distribution Module: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - IPDM Serviceability
Classification: EL09-014
Reference: NTB09-036
Date: April 27, 2009
IPDM SERVICE
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007 - 2009 Nissan Models with IPDM
SERVICE INFORMATION
The Intelligent Power Distribution Module (IPDM) is ONLY serviceable as an assembly.
The ONLY serviceable parts of an IPDM are the fuses.
^ Some IPDM designs have sections that Relays Relays appear to be serviceable relays.
^ These "relays" are NEVER to be removed.
^ These "relays" may have markings indicating they are similar. They are not "swappable".
CAUTION:
NEVER REMOVE relays from an IPDM.
Tampering with the relays of an IPDM may cause additional incidents with the vehicle.
Such incidents may include:
^ Headlights inoperative.
^ Radiator fan inoperative
^ Fog lamps inoperative
^ Wiper inoperative
Page 636
Page 4116
IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) - Part 2
Page 5621
Page 4123
Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation Signal Buffer System
System Diagram
SIGNAL BUFFER SYSTEM
System Diagram
System Description
SIGNAL BUFFER SYSTEM
System Description
IPDM E/R reads the status of the oil pressure switch and transmits the oil pressure switch signal to
BCM via CAN communication. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Information Bus/Description and Operation/CAN Communication System/System
Description.
Page 577
Ambient Light Sensor: Service and Repair
AUTO LIGHT SYSTEM
Removal and Installation
OPTICAL SENSOR
Removal 1. Remove defroster grille. Refer to See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Air Duct/Service
and Repair/Component.
2. Disconnect the optical sensor connector. 3. Turn the optical sensor counterclockwise to remove
it from defroster grille.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
System Diagram
Shift Indicator: Description and Operation System Diagram
METER SYSTEM
SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR : System Diagram
Page 2035
- No. 3 cylinder compression TDC
- Measure valve clearance using suitable tool. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Engine Lubrication/Specifications.
CAUTION: If the inspection was carried out with a cold engine, make sure the values with a fully
warmed up engine are still within specifications.
10. Turn the crankshaft pulley clockwise 90° from the position of No.
3 cylinder compression TDC (clockwise by 360° from the position of No. 1 cylinder compression
TDC) to measure the intake and exhaust valve clearances of No. 6 cylinder (G) and the exhaust
valve clearance of No. 2 cylinder (E). Arrow indicates Engine front
- A: RH
- B: LH
- C: Exhaust
- D: Intake
- E: No. 2 cylinder
- F: No. 4 cylinder
Page 1458
EM-11
Specifications
Valve Clearance: Specifications
Valve Clearance
Locations
Page 1199
Standard : 26.000 - 26.021 mm (1.0236 - 1.0244 in)
Calculation of Camshaft Journal Clearance (Journal clearance) = (camshaft bracket inner
diameter) - (camshaft journal diameter)
Standard : 0.030 - 0.071 mm (0.0012 - 0.0028 in)
- If measurement is not within specification, replace either or both camshaft and cylinder head.
NOTE: The inner diameter of the camshaft bracket is manufactured together with the cylinder
head. Replace the whole cylinder head as an assembly.
Camshaft End Play -
Install dial gauge in the thrust direction on the front end of the camshaft. Measure the end play
when the camshaft is moved forward/backward (in direction to axis).
Standard : 0.115 - 0.188 mm (0.0045 - 0.0074 in)
- If measurement is out of the specified range, replace the camshaft and measure again.
- If measurement is still out of the specified range, replace the cylinder head.
- Measure the following parts if end play is outside the specified value.
- Dimension "A" for camshaft No. 1 journal
Standard : 30.500 - 30.548 mm (1.2008-1.2027 in)
- Dimension "B" for cylinder head No. 1 journal
Standard : 30.360 - 30.385 mm (1.1953-1.1963 in)
- If measurements are not within specification, replace the camshaft and/or cylinder head.
Camshaft Sprocket Runout 1. Install the camshaft in the cylinder head.
Page 1668
^ If it applies: Position the band clamp(s) between the "dimples or on top where the "stand-offs" are
located (see Figure 1 and 2 above).
> The "stand-offs" cannot be seen: They are welded on the underside of the heat shield.
> If the "stand-off" is missing, this bulletin does not apply.
5. Secure the band clamp with the hex bolt located on the side (or on top, if needed). See Figure 1
above for example.
WARNING:
Do Not install the hex bolt on the bottom of the exhaust tube.
^ Band clamp hex bolt torque: 4.0 - 5.5 Nm (0.4 - 0.56 Kg-m, 2.9 - 4.0 ft-lb)
6. After securing the band clamp, cut off the clamp's excess at the end.
^ Wrap the end of the band clamp over the hex bolt, and then cut off the excess band clamp within
5 mm (0.2 inches) past the hex bolt (see Figure 2 for
example).
Page 217
8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.)
9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.)
10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2).
12. Select Select.
Service and Repair
Idler Pulley: Service and Repair
DRIVE BELTS
Drive Belt Auto Tensioner and Idler Pulley
REMOVAL 1. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. Refer to See: Tune-up and Engine
Performance Checks/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and
Repair/Removal and Installation.
2. Remove the drive belt. Refer to See: Drive Belt/Service and Repair. 3. Remove the drive belt
auto tensioner and idler pulley using power tool.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 3058
34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the
"Duplication Test" icon.
35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase.
36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18).
37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased.
^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs.
^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed.
Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below.
38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF.
39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch
(M/T) pedal;
Suspension - Front End Popping/Squeaking/Clunking
Noises
Stabilizer Bushing: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Front End
Popping/Squeaking/Clunking Noises
Classification: FA10-003A
Reference: NTB10-072A
Date: October 6, 2010
FRONT SUSPENSION NOISE
This bulletin has been amended. The PARTS INFORMATION section has been revised. No other
changes have been made. Please discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) 2005-2010 Frontier (D40) 2005-2010 Pathfinder
(R51) 2004-2010 Titan (A60) 2005-2010 Xterra (N50)
APPLIED VINS/DATES: 2004-2009 Armada: All 2010 Armada built before: 5N1(*)A(*)N(**)AN
6067281 Oct 23, 2009 2004-2009 Titan: All 2010 Titan built before: 1N6(*)A(****)AN 3037881 Oct
23, 2009 2005-2010 Frontier/Pathfinder/Xterra: All
IF YOU CONFIRM
A noise (clunking, squeaking, popping) can be heard when performing at least one of the following
actions:
^ turning the steering wheel left or right
^ driving over speed bumps
^ driving on rough roads
^ accelerating or decelerating
AND
The noise is coming from the front stabilizer bar bushing.
ACTIONS
Replace the front stabilizer bar bushing on both sides (RH & LH) with the part listed in the Parts
Information section of this bulletin.
^ Refer to the FSU section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for removal and
installation instructions.
Page 3622
Switch: Service and Repair
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK POSITION SWITCH
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
Differential Lock Position Switch
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage spline, companion flange and front oil seal when removing propeller
shaft.
- Before removing rear final drive assembly or rear axle assembly, disconnect ABS sensor harness
connector from the assembly and move it away from rear final drive assembly/rear axle assembly
area. Failure to do so may result in sensor wires being damaged and sensor becoming inoperative.
1. Drain rear final drive gear oil. Refer to See: Differential Assembly/Fluid - Differential/Service and
Repair/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD). 2. Remove rear propeller shaft. Refer to See: Drive/Propeller
Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Propeller Shaft 3S1410.
3. Remove both RH and LH axle shafts. Refer to See: Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft
Assembly/Service and Repair/Rear Axle Shaft. 4. Remove the carrier cover. Refer to See:
Differential Assembly/Differential Cover/Service and Repair/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD).
5. Remove differential lock solenoid connector (B) bolt and disconnect differential lock position
connector (A). Arrow Indicates Front
6. For installation, apply a paint matching mark on one side of side bearing cap.
CAUTION: Side bearing caps are line-board for initial assembly. The matching marks are used to install them
in their original positions.
- For matching mark, use paint. Do not damage side bearing cap.
7. Remove adjuster lock plates.
Page 6165
Arrow Indicates Vehicle Front
4. Connect the rear window defogger. 5. Lower the window and install the rear window glass bolts.
Rear window glass bolts : 6.0 N.m (0.61 Kg-m, 53 in-lb)
6. Install the sealing screen. 7. Install the headliner. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior
Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair.
SETTING AFTER INSTALLATION
Setting of Limit Switch If any of the following operations are performed the limit switch must be
reset. Motor operation when not installed in the vehicle.
- Removal and installation of the regulator.
- Removal and installation of the motor from the regulator.
- Removal and installation of the glass.
- Removal and installation of the glass run.
Resetting After installing each component, perform the following procedure to reset the limit switch.
Page 4238
Power Distribution Module: Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters
Reference Value
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Reference Value
VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL
Page 3349
CAUTION: If there is grease on the boot mounting surfaces (indicated by the * marks) of the drive
shaft and joint sub-assembly, the boot may come off. Remove all grease from the drive shaft
surfaces. 7. Check that the boot installation length "L" is the specified length. Insert a suitable tool
into the large end of the boot, as shown. Bleed the air from the boot to prevent boot deformation.
Boot installation length "L" : 168.4 mm (6.63 in)
CAUTION: The boot may break if the boot installation length is less than the specified length.
- Do not contact inside surface of boot with the tip of the suitable tool.
8. Secure large and small ends of the boot using new boot bands using tool as shown.
Tool number : KV40107300 ( - )
NOTE: Discard the old boot bands and use new ones for assembly.
- Secure boot band so that dimension "M" meets specification as shown.
Dimension "M" : 1.0 - 4.0 mm (0.039 - 0.157 in)
9. After installing the housing to the shaft, rotate the boot to check that it is positioned correctly. If
the boot is not positioned correctly, remove the
old boot bands then reposition the boot and secure the boot with new boot bands.
Page 4167
Page 4229
- Erase DTC.
- Study the relationship between the cause detected by DTC and the symptom described by the
customer.
3. Check related service bulletins for information. Is any symptom described and any DTC
detected? Symptom is described, DTC is displayed - GO TO 3 Symptom is described, DTC is not
displayed - GO TO 4 Symptom is not described, DTC is displayed - GO TO 5 3. CONFIRM THE
SYMPTOM Confirm the symptom described by the customer. Connect CONSULT-III to the vehicle
in "DATA MONITOR" mode and check real time diagnosis results. Verify relationship between the
symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected. - GO TO 5 4. CONFIRM THE
SYMPTOM Confirm the symptom described by the customer. Connect CONSULT-III to the vehicle
in "DATA MONITOR" mode and check real time diagnosis results. Verify relationship between the
symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected. - GO TO 6 5. PERFORM DTC
CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure for the displayed DTC, and
then check that DTC is detected again. At this time, always connect CONSULT-III to the vehicle,
and check diagnostic results in real time.
NOTE: Freeze frame data is useful if the DTC is not detected.
- Perform Component Function Check if DTC Confirmation Procedure is not included. This
simplified check procedure is an effective alternative though DTC cannot be detected during this
check.
If the result of Component Function Check is NG, it is the same as the detection of DTC by DTC
Confirmation Procedure. Is DTC detected? YES - GO TO 8 NO - Refer to See: Testing and
Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Service Information For Electrical
Incident/Intermittent Incident. 6. PERFORM BASIC INSPECTION Perform basic inspection of
system. Inspection End - GO TO 7 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM BY SYMPTOM
TABLE Detect malfunctioning system based on the confirmed symptom in step 4, and determine
the trouble diagnosis order based on possible causes and symptom. - GO TO 8 8. DETECT
MALFUNCTIONING PART BY DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE Inspect according to Diagnostic
Procedure of the system.
NOTE: The Diagnostic Procedure described based on open circuit inspection. A short circuit
inspection is also required for the circuit check in the Diagnostic Procedure. Is malfunctioning part
detected? YES - GO TO 9 NO - Check voltage of related BCM terminals using CONSULT-III. 9.
REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PART 1. Repair or replace the malfunctioning
part. 2. Reconnect parts or connectors disconnected during Diagnostic Procedure again after repair
and replacement. 3. Check DTC. If DTC is displayed, erase it. - GO TO 10
10. FINAL CHECK
When DTC was detected in step 2, perform DTC Confirmation Procedure or Component Function
Check again, and then check that the malfunction have been fully repaired. When symptom was
described from the customer, refer to confirmed symptom in step 3 or 4 and check that the
symptom is not detected. OK or NG NG (DTC is detected) - GO TO 8 NG (Symptom remains) - GO
TO 6 OK - Inspection End.
IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room)
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Fail Safe
Page 1531
Spark Plug: Application and ID
Spark Plug
Page 2423
Locations
Page 327
ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information
Traction Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information
Classification: BR10-011
Reference: NTB10-145
Date: December 15, 2010
ABS / VDC CAN DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION
APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2005-2011 Nissan vehicles with ABS and/or VDC
SERVICE INFORMATION
When diagnosing a vehicle with an ABS or VDC / SLIP warning light on with DTCs stored in the
ABS / VDC actuator control unit, perform DTC diagnosis first.
^ Do not replace the ABS / VDC actuator control unit without being supported by the DTC
diagnosis.
^ Do not erase DTCs before performing DTC diagnosis.
^ Always fully diagnose before performing any repairs.
When DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) is the only DTC stored in the ABS / VDC actuator
control unit, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART below. This will assist in proper diagnosis results and
repairs in addition to using diagnostic information in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM).
^ If DTC U1000 is found stored in other systems, refer to NIB10-066 and the applicable ESM.
^ If other DTCs are found stored in ABS / VDC along with U1000, follow the diagnosis steps for
those DTCs in the applicable ESM.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for
repairs performed.
Page 3535
Tool number : ST33290001 (J-34286)
CAUTION: Do not damage front case.
INSTALLATION 1. Install the new front oil seal until it is flush with the end face of the front case
using Tool.
Tool number : KV38100500 ( - )
CAUTION: Do not reuse oil seal.
- Apply petroleum jelly to oil seal.
2. Align the matching mark of the front drive shaft with the matching mark of the companion flange,
then install the companion flange. 3. Install the new self-lock nut and tighten to the specified torque
using Tool. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/Disassembly And Assembly
.
Tool number : KV40104000 ( - )
Page 5623
Physical Values
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
Physical Values
Page 1911
Page 5347
2. Remove control device. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Shifter A/T/Service and Repair/Removal
and Replacement.
3. Remove lower instrument panel RH and glove box. Refer to See: Dashboard / Instrument
Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Instrument Lower Panel RH And Glove Box/Removal And Installation.
4. Remove center console lower cover RH/LH. 5. Remove front center console screws. 6. Move
front seats (including seat back) to forward most position, then remove rear center console screws.
7. Lift rear of center console upward then rearward to disengage heat duct. 8. Remove center
console through rear door opening.
CAUTION: When removing, two workers are required (one for each front and rear of center
console). Cover seating and interior surfaces with a shop cloth to prevent damage.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-029 Date: 090421
Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming
Classification: EC09-007
Reference: NTB09-029
Date: April 21, 2009
CONSULT-III ECM REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE
APPLIED VEHICLES: All CONSULT-III (C-III) compatible Nissan vehicles
SERVICE INFORMATION
A complete step-by-step General Procedure for C-III ECM Reprogramming is now available in the
on-line version of this bulletin.
This General Procedure is also available via hyperlink from specific C-III symptom-based Technical
Service Bulletins in ASIST.
CAUTION
Part 1
Updated March 25, 2009
CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM REPROGRAMMING
A symptom based TSB is required before using this procedure.
IMPORTANT: Before starting, make sure:
^ ASIST on the C-III computer has been freshly synchronized (updated).
^ All C-III software updates (if any) have been installed.
NOTE:
The C-III computer automatically gets applicable ECM reprogramming data during ASIST
synchronization.
Page 4050
Page 642
3. Loosen the sensor approximately 10 degrees.
4. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds.
5. Tighten the sensor 10 degrees, then loosen the sensor 10 degrees.
^ Repeat this motion several times until the sensor begins to turn more easily.
6. Continue the tightening/loosening motion while gradually unscrewing the sensor. Stop when the
sensor will not unscrew any further.
7. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds.
8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 until the sensor is removed.
Service and Repair
Windshield Washer Switch: Service and Repair
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH
Wiper and Washer Switch
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal 1. Remove steering column covers.
2. Remove wiper washer switch connector. 3. Pinch tabs at wiper and washer switch base and
slide switch away from steering column to remove.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 6231
Wiper Motor: Service and Repair
WASHER PUMP
Washer Motor
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal 1. Remove washer fluid reservoir. Refer to See: Windshield Washer Reservoir/Service
and Repair.
2. Remove washer motor (1) in the direction of the arrow as shown, from washer fluid reservoir (2).
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 3118
27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example).
28. Select Select
29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example).
30. Select Confirm
Page 1428
Crankshaft Pulley
Timing Cover
Install the bolts in the numerical order shown.
Page 6038
Page 4278
RELAY CONTROL SYSTEM
System Description
IPDM E/R controls relays based on input signals from various sensors and from request signals
received via CAN communication.
CAUTION: IPDM E/R integrated relays cannot be removed.
Page 6189
1. Raise the glass to the top position. 2. While pressing and holding the reset switch, lower the
glass to the bottom position. 3. Release the reset switch. Verify that the reset switch returns to the
original position, if not, pull the switch using suitable tool. 4. Raise the glass to the top position.
CAUTION: Do not operate the glass automatically to raise the glass to the top position.
Specifications
Ignition Timing: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing
Page 2021
Spark Plug: Application and ID
Spark Plug
Page 285
15. Select OK
VIN registration is complete
Page 2736
4. Check voltage between fuel injector terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG OK - GO TO 5. NG - GO TO 4. 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the
following. Harness connectors E2, F32
- IPDM E/R connector E119
- 15A fuse
- Harness for open or short between fuel injector and fuse
- Repair harness or connectors. 5. CHECK FUEL INJECTOR OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR
OPEN AND SHORT 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Check
harness continuity between fuel injector terminal 2 and ECM terminals 21, 22, 23, 40, 41, 42, 44,
63.
Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK - GO TO 6. NG Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 6. CHECK FUEL
INJECTOR Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Fuel
Injector/Component Inspection. OK or NG OK - GO TO 7. NG - Replace malfunctioning fuel
injector. 7. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Service Information For Electrical Incident/How To Check
Terminal and See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Service
Information For Electrical Incident/Intermittent Incident. - INSPECTION END
Automatic Air Conditioner
Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Description and Operation Automatic Air Conditioner
IN-Vehicle Sensor
IN-VEHICLE SENSOR
Component Description
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
In-vehicle Sensor
The in-vehicle sensor (1) is located on the lower instrument panel LH. It converts variations in
temperature of passenger compartment air (drawn in through the integrated fan) into a resistance
value. It is then input into the front air control.
Intake Sensor
INTAKE SENSOR
System Description
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Intake Sensor
The intake sensor is located on the heater and cooling unit assembly. It converts temperature of air
after if passes through the evaporator into a resistance value which is then input to the front air
control.
Procedures
Brake Pad: Procedures
REAR DISC BRAKE
Brake Burnishing Procedure
Burnish contact surfaces between disc rotors and pads according to following procedure after
refinishing or replacing rotors, after replacing pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage.
CAUTION: Be careful of vehicle speed because the brake does not operate easily until pad and disc rotor are
securely seated.
- Only perform this procedure under safe road and traffic conditions. Use extreme caution.
1. Drive vehicle on straight, flat road. 2. Depress brake pedal with the power to stop vehicle within 3
to 5 seconds until the vehicle stops. 3. Drive without depressing brake for a few minutes to cool the
brake. 4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 until pad and disc rotor are securely seated.
Page 1021
2. Check the differential gear oil level from the filler plug hole as shown.
CAUTION: Do not start engine while checking differential gear oil level. 3. Install the filler plug with
sealant applied on the threads to the front final drive assembly. Tighten to the specified torque.
Refer to See:
Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential Assembly/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Front Final Drive
M205.
- Use High Performance Thread Sealant or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type
Specifications.
Rear Final Drive M226
DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL
Checking Differential Gear Oil
DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL LEAKAGE AND LEVEL 1. Make sure that differential gear oil is not
leaking from the rear final drive assembly or around it.
2. Check the differential gear oil level from the filler plug hole as shown.
CAUTION: Do not start engine while checking differential gear oil level. 3. Install the filler plug with
sealant applied on the threads to the rear final drive assembly. Tighten to the specified torque.
Refer to See:
Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential Assembly/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive
M226.
- Use High Performance Thread Sealant or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type
Specifications.
Page 4943
3. Remove the anchor bolt and buckle. 4. Disconnect the buckle switch connector from the seat
connector.
Installation - Bucket Seat
CAUTION: Passenger seat is equipped with Occupant Classification System sensor and control module. Do
not disassemble front passenger seat cushion assembly or remove trim as this will affect the
Occupant
Classification System calibration. On passenger seat during installation, the wire harness clips must be installed in the holes they
were originally in.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF CENTER BENCH SEAT BELT AND SEAT BELT BUCKLE
Removal 1. Remove center front seat. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Seat/Removal and Installation
.
2. Remove anchor bolt cover, bolt and seat belt. 3. Remove anchor bolt cover, bolt and seat belt
buckle.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 2477
31. Select Diagnosis
32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%.
When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of
the screen will light (become enabled).
33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon.
Page 4684
CONSULT-III Checking System
CONSULT-III CHECKING SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram
Page 2560
Page 1772
d. Press [START] on the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" screen. See Figure 4.
e. Press [START] on the "WORK SUPPORT" screen to begin the Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL)
procedure. See Figure 5.
^ The IAVL procedure will take several minutes to complete.
^ CONSULT will display "Please Wait" in the center of the screen while the IAVL procedure is in
process. See Figure 6.
Page 2331
Diagnosis Sheet (CAN Type 8)
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
Diagnosis Sheet (CAN Type 8)
Rear Window Defogger System
Page 126
Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation Power Consumption Control System
System Diagram
POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM
System Diagram
System Description
POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM
System Description
OUTLINE IPDM E/R incorporates a power consumption control function that reduces the power consumption
according to the vehicle status.
- IPDM E/R changes its status (control mode) with the sleep wake up signal received from BCM via
CAN communication.
Normal mode (wake-up) CAN communication is normally performed with other control units.
- Individual unit control by IPDM E/R is normally performed.
Low power consumption mode (sleep) Low power consumption control is active.
- CAN transmission is stopped.
SLEEP MODE ACTIVATION -
IPDM E/R judges that the sleep-ready conditions are fulfilled when the ignition switch is OFF and
none of the conditions below are present. Then it transmits a sleep-ready signal (ready) to BCM via
CAN communication.
- Front wiper fail-safe operation
- Outputting signals to actuators
- Switches or relays operating
- Auto active test is starting
- Emergency OFF
- Output requests are being received from control units via CAN communication.
- IPDM E/R stops CAN communication and enters the low power consumption mode when it
receives a sleep wake up signal (sleep) from BCM and the sleep-ready conditions are fulfilled.
WAKE-UP OPERATION IPDM E/R changes from the low power consumption mode to the normal mode when it receives a
sleep wake-up signal (wake up) from BCM or any of the following conditions is fulfilled. In addition,
it transmits a sleep-ready signal (not-ready) to BCM via CAN communication to report the CAN
communication start.
- Ignition switch ON
- An output request is received from a control unit via CAN communication.
Page 5517
4. Slide the organizer out of the tracks and place the assembly on the tailgate.
5. Remove all four slider assemblies from the organizer as follows:
CAUTION:
Be careful when removing the insert / slider assemblies to avoid damaging the metal tube or the
plastic panel.
a. Carefully use a medium flat blade screwdriver between the end of the metal tube and the plastic
insert.
b. Use the screwdriver to very carefully begin moving the plastic insert out of the metal tube as
shown in Figure 4.
c. When the insert begins to move, hold the assembly as shown in Figure 5 and pull it out of the
tube.
NOTE:
If the insert is difficult to remove:
Page 2842
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations
Page 884
REMOVAL
WARNING: Follow the "General Precautions" before working on the fuel system. Refer to See:
Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Service Precautions . 1. Remove the fuel
filler cap to release the pressure from inside the fuel tank.
Page 5704
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the Fuel Pump Assembly from the vehicle.
^ Refer to section FL in the applicable Service Manual for removal information.
^ Make sure to follow all Service Manual warnings and cautions.
Page 3653
Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair ABS
ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY)
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to
See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 3. Drain the brake fluid.
Refer to See: Hydraulic System/Brake Fluid/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 4.
Disconnect the actuator harness connector from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
CAUTION: -
To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench to prevent the flare nuts
and brake tubes from being damaged.
- Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is
splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately.
5. Disconnect the brake tubes. 6. Remove the three bolts and remove the ABS actuator and
electric unit (control unit).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: To install, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench (commercial service tools).
- Always tighten brake tubes to specification when installing.
Locations
Odometer: Locations
METER SYSTEM
ODO/TRIP METER : Component Parts Location
Page 5781
Page 5566
Warning Chime - Part 2
Page 171
Specifications
Fluid Pan: Specifications
Oil Pan
Oil pan (upper)
Tighten the bolts in numerical order as shown.
Oil pan (lower)
Locations
Page 2415
CAUTION
2. When you get to the ECM Reprogramming screen shown in Figure 1, confirm this bulletin
applies as follows.
A. On your C-III screen, look at the Part Number column (see Figure 1):
^ If this column is blank (no part number listed), this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to
ASIST for further diagnostic information.
^ If a Part Number is listed, write it on the Repair Order.
Page 4237
Page 2108
ABLS/ABS
Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair ABLS/ABS
ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY)
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to
See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 3. Drain the brake fluid.
Refer to See: Hydraulic System/Brake Fluid/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 4.
Disconnect the actuator harness connector from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
CAUTION: To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench to prevent the flare nuts
and brake tubes from being damaged.
- Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is
splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately.
5. Disconnect the brake tubes. 6. Remove the three bolts and remove the ABS actuator and
electric unit (control unit).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: To install, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench (commercial service tools).
- Always tighten brake tubes to specification when installing.
- Never reuse drained brake fluid.
Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Power Distribution Module: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Diagnosis And Repair Work Flow
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
Work Flow
OVERALL SEQUENCE
DETAILED FLOW 1. GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM Get the detailed information from the
customer about the symptom (the condition and the environment when the incident/malfunction
occurred). - GO TO 2 2. CHECK DTC 1. Check DTC. 2. Perform the following procedure if DTC is
displayed. Record DTC and freeze frame data.
VDC/TCS/ABS
Diagram Information and Instructions
Power Distribution Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
Connector Symbols
HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS
Connector symbols
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the
direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector.
For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements,
"Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals
Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring
diagrams.
Sample/Wiring Diagram -Example-
Page 1922
Oxygen Sensor: Specifications Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Heater
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Heated Oxygen sensor 2 Heater
Page 1562
Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications
Engine Coolant Type
Type .................................................................................................................................... Genuine
NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant or equivalent.
50% Antifreeze/Coolant 50% Distilled or Demineralized Water.
Page 3504
Page 4562
WARNING:
This repair MUST be done with the vehicle's full weight on the suspension.
EITHER:
Place the vehicle on a drive-on hoist or alignment rack to lift the vehicle.
OR
Leave all of the vehicle's weight on all four (4) tires, while parked (do not lift the vehicle).
DO NOT lift the vehicle in any amount. The suspension must support all of the vehicle's weight
during the whole repair procedure or the bushing will be under load and difficult to remove.
1. With the vehicle positioned as stated above, put the shift selector in "P" (PARK) position.
2. Set the parking brake.
3. Remove the bolt and bushing from the windup clip (clip).
4. Check the condition of the bolt's and clip's threads, and the bushing.
^ If both the bushing and bolt's threads are okay, reuse them.
^ If the bushing and / or bolt's threads are damaged, replace with all parts in the "Spring Assembly
Kit".
^ If the clip's threads are damaged, replace the leaf spring assembly.
5. Install the bolt (and bushing) with Permatex(R) Medium Strength Threadlocker BLUE or
equivalent thread locking material applied to the threads.
Torque bolt to 32 N.m (3.2 kg-m, 23 ft-lb).
Page 2127
Page 2121
Relay Control System
Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation Relay Control System
System Diagram
RELAY CONTROL SYSTEM
System Diagram
System Description
Page 5612
Is the inspection result normal? YES - Inspection End. NO - GO TO 3 3.CHECK KEY SWITCH
CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect BCM and key switch connectors. 2. Check continuity between BCM harness
connector M18 and key switch harness connector M80.
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector M18 and ground.
Is the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO 4 NO - Repair harness or connector. 4.CHECK KEY
SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
Check voltage between key switch harness connector and ground.
Page 2959
Recall 10V072000: Inspect Replace Brake Pedal
Assembly
Brake Pedal Assy: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 10V072000: Inspect Replace Brake Pedal
Assembly
VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2008-2010 Nissan/Armada 2008-2010
Nissan/Quest 2008-2009 Nissan/Titan 2008-2010 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc.
MFR'S REPORT DATE: February 26, 2010
NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V072000
NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Service Brakes, Hydraulic: Pedals and Linkages
Potential Number of Units Affected: 179383
SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2008-2010 Titan, Armada, and Infiniti QX56,
and model year 2008-2009 Nissan Quest vehicles. The brake pedal pivot pin end was not
spin-formed to specification during the manufacturing process of the brake pedal assembly. The
pivot pin could slide and cause the brake pedal to partially disengage from the brake pedal bracket.
CONSEQUENCE: The driver will experience unusual and noticeable looseness in the pedal and a
reduction in braking force increasing the risk of a crash.
REMEDY: Dealers will inspect to see if the pivot pin had been formed properly and will replace the
brake pedal assembly if necessary free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin on or
before March 22, 2010. Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261.
NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle
Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov.
Page 4756
TEMPERATURE CONTROL DIAL Increases or decreases the set temperature.
- When REC switch is ON, REC switch indicator turns ON, and air inlet is set to REC.
- When REC switch is turned OFF, or when compressor is turned from ON to OFF, REC switch is
automatically turned OFF. REC mode can be re-entered by pressing REC switch again.
- REC switch is not operated when DEF switch is turned ON, at the D/F position, or in floor
position.
Positions the air outlet doors to the defrost position. Also positions the intake doors to the outside
air position, and turns A/C compressor ON.
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH (IF EQUIPPED) When switch is ON, rear window and door
mirrors are defogged.
BLOWER CONTROL DIAL/OFF SWITCH -
The blower speed is manually controlled with this dial.
- The compressor and blower are OFF, the intake doors are set to the outside air position, and the
air outlet doors are set to the foot position.
A/C SWITCH The compressor is ON or OFF. (Pressing the A/C switch when the AUTO switch is
ON will turn off the A/C switch and compressor.)
MODE CONTROL DIAL Controls the air discharge outlets.
MAGNET CLUTCH CONTROL
Page 695
SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal"
condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Page 2189
Specifications
Ball Joint: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Ball Joint
Page 2953
REPAIR FLOW CHART
With Intelligent Key System
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations With Intelligent Key System
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Terminal Layout
TERMINAL LAYOUT
Page 264
Page 2335
Diagnosis Sheet (CAN Type 12)
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
Diagnosis Sheet (CAN Type 12)
Page 4033
Fuse Block: Diagrams Fuse, Fusible Link And Relay Box
FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX
Terminal Arrangement
FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK BOX
FUSE AND RELAY BOX
Propeller Shaft 2F1310
Drive/Propeller Shaft: Tools and Equipment Propeller Shaft 2F1310
PREPARATION
Commercial Service Tool
Page 3827
3. Install brake tube to brake hose, then tighten the flare nut using a suitable tool. Refer to See:
Diagrams. 4. Refill brake fluid and bleed air. Refer to See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair.
Page 216
CAUTION
4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF.
^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure.
^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF.
^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear
defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel
heater, etc.
CAUTION
5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running.
If the cooling fans are running:
a. Turn the ignition OFF.
b. Wait for the engine to cool.
c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF).
d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running.
6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer.
7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress"
message to clear.
Page 2188
Page 3537
Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Rear Oil Seal
REAR OIL SEAL
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Partially drain the transfer fluid. Refer to See: Fluid - Transfer Case/Service and
Repair. 2. Remove the rear propeller shaft. Refer to See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and
Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Propeller Shaft 2S1410.
3. Remove the dust cover from the rear case.
CAUTION: Do not damage the rear case.
4. Remove the rear oil seal from the rear case using Tool.
CAUTION: Do not damage the rear case.
Tool number : ST33290001 (J-34286)
INSTALLATION 1. Install the new rear oil seal until it is flush with the end face of the rear case
using Tool.
Tool number : KV38100500 ( - )
CAUTION:
Page 4283
- Erase DTC.
- Study the relationship between the cause detected by DTC and the symptom described by the
customer.
3. Check related service bulletins for information. Is any symptom described and any DTC
detected? Symptom is described, DTC is displayed - GO TO 3 Symptom is described, DTC is not
displayed - GO TO 4 Symptom is not described, DTC is displayed - GO TO 5 3. CONFIRM THE
SYMPTOM Confirm the symptom described by the customer. Connect CONSULT-III to the vehicle
in "DATA MONITOR" mode and check real time diagnosis results. Verify relationship between the
symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected. - GO TO 5 4. CONFIRM THE
SYMPTOM Confirm the symptom described by the customer. Connect CONSULT-III to the vehicle
in "DATA MONITOR" mode and check real time diagnosis results. Verify relationship between the
symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected. - GO TO 6 5. PERFORM DTC
CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure for the displayed DTC, and
then check that DTC is detected again. At this time, always connect CONSULT-III to the vehicle,
and check diagnostic results in real time.
NOTE: Freeze frame data is useful if the DTC is not detected.
- Perform Component Function Check if DTC Confirmation Procedure is not included. This
simplified check procedure is an effective alternative though DTC cannot be detected during this
check.
If the result of Component Function Check is NG, it is the same as the detection of DTC by DTC
Confirmation Procedure. Is DTC detected? YES - GO TO 8 NO - Refer to See: Testing and
Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Service Information For Electrical
Incident/Intermittent Incident. 6. PERFORM BASIC INSPECTION Perform basic inspection of
system. Inspection End - GO TO 7 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM BY SYMPTOM
TABLE Detect malfunctioning system based on the confirmed symptom in step 4, and determine
the trouble diagnosis order based on possible causes and symptom. - GO TO 8 8. DETECT
MALFUNCTIONING PART BY DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE Inspect according to Diagnostic
Procedure of the system.
NOTE: The Diagnostic Procedure described based on open circuit inspection. A short circuit
inspection is also required for the circuit check in the Diagnostic Procedure. Is malfunctioning part
detected? YES - GO TO 9 NO - Check voltage of related BCM terminals using CONSULT-III. 9.
REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PART 1. Repair or replace the malfunctioning
part. 2. Reconnect parts or connectors disconnected during Diagnostic Procedure again after repair
and replacement. 3. Check DTC. If DTC is displayed, erase it. - GO TO 10
10. FINAL CHECK
When DTC was detected in step 2, perform DTC Confirmation Procedure or Component Function
Check again, and then check that the malfunction have been fully repaired. When symptom was
described from the customer, refer to confirmed symptom in step 3 or 4 and check that the
symptom is not detected. OK or NG NG (DTC is detected) - GO TO 8 NG (Symptom remains) - GO
TO 6 OK - Inspection End.
IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room)
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Fail Safe
Service and Repair
Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Service and Repair
OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM CONTROL UNIT
Removal and Installation
The occupant classification system control unit, occupant classification (pressure) sensor, and
bladder are an integral part of the front passenger seat cushion and are replaced as an assembly.
Refer to See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front
Seat/Removal and Installation to remove the seat, and See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and
Repair/Overhaul/Disassembly and Assembly to replace the seat cushion.
Service and Repair
Fluid Pump: Service and Repair
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Oil Pump
COMPONENTS
DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove oil pump housing from oil pump cover.
2. Remove oil pump housing oil seal using suitable tool.
CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch oil pump housing.
3. Remove O-ring from oil pump housing.
Page 1392
Oil Pressure Gauge: Description and Operation System Description
METER SYSTEM
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE : System Description
The engine oil pressure gauge indicates whether the engine oil pressure is low or normal. The oil
pressure gauge is controlled by the IPDM E/R. The IPDM E/R reads the ON/OFF signals from the
oil pressure switch and transmits the oil pressure switch signal to the combination meter via BCM
with the CAN communication line. The oil pressure gauge displays a low or normal indication
according to the oil pressure switch signal received via CAN communication.
Page 674
CAUTION: Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly.
- Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket.
- Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling.
- Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water.
Removal 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2.
Disconnect the accelerator position sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the two upper and one
lower accelerator pedal nuts. 4. Remove the adjustable accelerator pedal assembly.
CAUTION: Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly.
- Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket.
- Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling.
- Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Inspection After Installation Check that the accelerator pedal moves smoothly within the specified range.
Non-adjustable accelerator pedal - total pedal applied stroke : 48 mm (1.89 in)
- Depress and release the accelerator pedal to check that it returns smoothly to the original
released position.
- Perform an electrical inspection of the accelerator pedal position sensor. Refer to See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/VIN Registration See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released
Position Learning See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning See: Powertrain
Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning
.
CAUTION: When the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor is disconnected,
perform "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Locations
Information Bus: Locations
CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
Component Parts Location
Page 3388
1. Measure the runout of the propeller shaft tube at several points by rotating the final drive
companion flange with your hands. Refer to See:
Specifications/Propeller Shaft 2S1410/General Specification.
2. If the runout exceeds specifications, disconnect the propeller shaft at the final drive companion
flange; then rotate the companion flange 90°, 180°
and 270° and reconnect the propeller shaft.
3. Check the runout again. If the runout still exceeds specifications, replace the propeller shaft
assembly. Refer to See: Specifications/Propeller Shaft
2S1410/General Specification.
4. After installation, check for vibration by driving vehicle.
Propeller Shaft 3S1410
REAR PROPELLER SHAFT
On-Vehicle Service
PROPELLER SHAFT VIBRATION
NOTE: If vibration is present at high speed, check propeller shaft runout first, then check mounting
between propeller shaft and companion flange.
1. Measure the runout of the propeller shaft tube at several points by rotating the final drive
companion flange with your hands. Refer to See:
Specifications/Propeller Shaft 3S1410/General Specification.
2. If the runout still exceeds specifications, disconnect the propeller shaft at the final drive
companion flange; then rotate the companion flange 90°,
180°, 270° and reconnect propeller shaft.
3. Check the runout again. If the runout still exceeds specifications, replace the propeller shaft
assembly. 4. After installation, check for vibration by driving vehicle.
INSPECTION Inspect the propeller shaft tube for dents or cracks. If damaged, replace the propeller
shaft assembly.
Page 5580
Page 2798
c. Remove the Fuel Temperature Sensor from the Plastic Retaining Clip.
d. Remove the wires from the Securing Tab.
e. Unplug the White Wire Connector at the top of the fuel pump.
^ DO NOT disturb the Black Wire Connector located next to the white Wire connector.
f. Carefully cut the tie-wrap securing the harnesses to the corrugated tubing.
CAUTION:
DO NOT damage the wires or the wire insulation when cutting the Tie-Wrap.
Service and Repair
Dome Lamp Switch: Service and Repair
ILLUMINATION
Removal and Installation
ILLUMINATION CONTROL SWITCH
Removal The illumination control switch (1) is replaced as a part of the combination meter
assembly. Refer to See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Instrument Cluster /
Carrier/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
PERSONAL LAMP - TYPE B (if equipped)
Removal 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Using a suitable tool (A), release the pawls
and remove the personal lamp lens (1). 3. Remove personal lamp screws (2). 4. Disconnect the
connector, then remove personal lamp.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Bulb Replacement 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Page 5584
Page 5349
Disassembly And Assembly
CENTER CONSOLE ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly
DISASSEMBLY
Page 839
^ Center the front wheels on the turn plates.
^ Chock the left rear wheel.
Preliminary Checks:
3. Perform pre-alignment checks.
^ Tire condition (wear, partial wear, flaws, etc.)
^ Road wheel condition (damage and deformation)
^ Tire pressure
^ Inspect for visible damage to any suspension components
^ Wheel bearing axial play
^ Ball joints of suspension arms
^ Shock absorber operation and visual check for oil leakage
^ Condition of axle and suspension (check for bushing cracks and slack)
^ Vehicle weight
> Empty - no cargo, luggage, or passengers
> Fuel level is full
Page 2153
13. Select Confirm
14. Select Diagnosis
15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete.
Page 921
Page 4268
Consult-III Checking System
Standardized Relay
STANDARDIZED RELAY
Description
NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided
into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays.
Page 3800
pedal occurs at very low mileage.
REMOVAL 1. Remove front wheel and tires using power tool. 2. Fasten disc rotor using wheel nut.
3. Drain brake fluid. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Coolant/Service
and Repair. 4. Remove union bolt, and then disconnect brake hose from caliper assembly.
NOTE: Discard the copper washers, do not reuse.
5. Remove torque member bolts, and remove brake caliper assembly.
CAUTION: Do not drop brake pad.
6. Apply matching marks to disc rotor and wheel hub assembly as shown if the disc rotor is to be
reused, then remove disc rotor.
CAUTION: Put matching marks on wheel hub assembly and disc rotor if the disc rotor is to be
reused.
INSTALLATION 1. If reusing the disc rotor, use the matching marks to align disc rotor on the wheel
hub assembly as shown, then install disc rotor using a wheel nut to
hold it in place.
CAUTION: Use matching marks on wheel hub assembly and disc rotor if the disc rotor is to be
reused. 2. Install brake caliper assembly, and tighten torque member bolts to the specified torque.
Page 5241
> Window glass run rubber is replaced.
> Window is partly opened and/or closed many times without being fully closed.
Page 5717
REMOVAL
WARNING: Follow the "General Precautions" before working on the fuel system. Refer to See:
Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Service Precautions . 1. Remove the fuel
filler cap to release the pressure from inside the fuel tank.
Service and Repair
Carpet: Service and Repair
FLOOR TRIM
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the front seats. Refer to See: Seats/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Front Seat/Removal and Installation. 2. Remove the rear seats. Refer to See:
Seats/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Rear Seat/Removal and Installation. 3.
Remove the lower seat belt anchors. Refer to See: Restraint Systems/Seat Belt Systems/Child
Restraint/Child Seat Tether Attachment/Service and
Repair/LATCH (Lower Anchors And Tether For Children) System.
4. Remove the lower body side trim. Refer to See: Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 5. Remove the
center console, if equipped. Refer to See: Console/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Center Console. 6. Remove the floor mat hooks from front carpet. 7. Remove the
carpet.
INSTALLATION
Locations
Interior - Door Trim Panel(s) Discolored/Faded
Rear Door Panel: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Door Trim Panel(s) Discolored/Faded
Classification: BT10-024
Reference: NTB10-095
Date: August 13, 2010
2004-2010 TITAN; DOOR TRIM PANEL DISCOLORED/FADED
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2010 Titan (A60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
The pull handle trim panel on a front or rear door is discolored/faded. See Figures 1 and 2.
ACTION
Clean the discolored/faded trim panel as instructed in the Service Procedure.
NOTE:
This condition is not "dirt" on the trim panel surface. This condition exists within the panel itself.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You
MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 4337
2. Position vehicle on the front turn plates as follows:
^ Stop vehicle just behind the turn plates.
^ Center the turn plates to the tires.
^ Move the vehicle onto the turn plates by turning/pushing the rear wheel.
DO NOT push/pull on the vehicle body.
Page 2061
Page 2134
2. Select Direct Diagnostic Mode icon
3. Select System Diagnosis
A/C - Compressor Clutch Replacement Information
Compressor Clutch: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Compressor Clutch Replacement Information
Classification: HA10-006
Reference: NTB10-043
Date: March 17, 2010
A/C COMPRESSOR CLUTCH REPLACEMENT
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2002-2008 Altima (L31, L32) 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) 2005-2010 Frontier
(D40) 2004-2010 Maxima (A34, A35) 2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2004-2009 Quest (V42)
2004-2010 Titan (A60) 2005-2010 Xterra (N50)
SERVICE INFORMATION
The A/C compressor clutch is available separately as a service part for the Applied Vehicles.
If the compressor clutch needs to be replaced for any reason AND the compressor is operating
normally:
^ Replace the compressor clutch only. Do not replace the compressor assembly.
^ Refer to the applicable Electronic Service Manual for compressor clutch removal and installation
instructions.
Service and Repair
Transfer Case Actuator: Service and Repair
TRANSFER CONTROL DEVICE
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Switch the 4WD shift switch to 2WD and set the transfer assembly to 2WD. 2.
Disconnect the transfer control device connector. 3. Remove the breather hose from the transfer
control device.
4. Remove the bolts and detach the transfer control device.
INSTALLATION 1. Install the new O-ring to the transfer control device.
CAUTION: Do not reuse O-ring.
- Apply petroleum jelly to O-ring.
2. Install the transfer control device.
a. Turn the control shift rod fully counterclockwise using a flat-bladed screwdriver, and then put a
mark on the control shift rod.
Page 3801
CAUTION: Do not allow oil or any moisture on all contact surfaces between steering knuckle and
caliper assembly, bolts, and washer. 3. Install brake hose to brake caliper assembly using new
copper washers. Align the brake hose to the projection as shown and tighten union bolts to
the specified torque.
4. Refill with new brake fluid and bleed air. Refer to See: Brake Fluid/Service and Repair/Removal
and Replacement. 5. Check front disc brake for drag and correct as necessary. 6. Install front
wheel and tires.
Disassembly and Assembly
FRONT DISC BRAKE
Disassembly and Assembly
Automatic Air Conditioner
Blower Motor: Description and Operation Automatic Air Conditioner
BLOWER MOTOR CONTROL SYSTEM
System Description
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Component Parts
Blower speed control system components are: Front air control
- Variable blower control
- Front blower motor relay
- Front blower motor
- In-vehicle sensor
- Ambient sensor
- Optical sensor
- Intake sensor
System Operation
Automatic Mode In the automatic mode, the blower motor speed is calculated by the front air
control and variable blower control based on input from the in-vehicle sensor, optical sensor, intake
sensor and ambient sensor, and potentio temperature control (PTC). When the air flow is
increased, the blower motor speed is adjusted gradually to prevent a sudden increase in air flow. In
addition to manual air flow control and the usual automatic air flow control, starting air flow control,
low water temperature starting control and high passenger compartment temperature starting
control are available.
Starting Blower Speed Control Start up from cold soak condition (Automatic mode). In a cold start
up condition where the engine coolant temperature is below 50°C (122°F), the blower will not
operate at blower speed 1 for a short period of time (up to 210 seconds). The exact start delay time
varies depending on the ambient and engine coolant temperatures. In the most extreme case (very
low ambient temperature) the blower starting delay will be 210 seconds as described above. After
the coolant temperature reaches 50°C (122°F), or the 210 seconds has elapsed, the blower speed
will increase to the objective blower speed. Start up from usual operating or hot soak condition
(Automatic mode). The blower will begin operation momentarily after the AUTO switch is pushed.
The blower speed will gradually rise to the objective speed over a time period of 3 seconds or less
(actual time depends on the objective blower speed).
Blower Speed Compensation - Sunload When the in-vehicle temperature and the set temperature
are very close, the blower will be operating at low speed. The speed will vary depending on the
sunload. During conditions of low or no sunload, the blower operates at low speed. During high
sunload conditions, the front air control causes the blower speed to increase.
Page 4918
Side Air Bag: Service and Repair SRS Air Bag System
Front Side Air Bag
SRS AIR BAG SYSTEM
Front Side Air Bag
Front side air bag modules are built into the front seatback assemblies. Vehicles with side air bags
are equipped with labels as shown.
Side Curtain Air Bag
SRS AIR BAG SYSTEM
Side Curtain Air Bag
Side curtain air bag modules are located above the vehicle headlining.
Vehicles with side curtain air bags are equipped with labels as shown.
Page 6004
If the moisture trickles, drips, or pools, it may not be considered normal and the lamp assembly
may have a water leak path. See Figure 2 for an example.
If large drops of water collect inside the lens, refer to the flow chart below to find the next step.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Front
Brake Pad: Specifications Front
Brake Pad
Brake Model : AD41VA
Standard thickness (new).....................................................................................................................
...................................................... 12.0 mm (0.472 in) Repair limit thickness.....................................
............................................................................................................................................. 1.0 mm
(0.039 in)
Page 2296
NOTE: For some models, CAN communication diagnosis result is received from the vehicle monitor.
(CONSULT-III is not available.)
- Refer to See: CAN Fundamental/Trouble Diagnosis for the details.
Condition Of Error Detection
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Condition of Error Detection
"U1000" or "U1001" is indicated on SELF-DIAG RESULTS on CONSULT-III if CAN communication
signal is not transmitted or received between units for 2 seconds or more.
CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM ERROR CAN communication line open (CAN-H, CAN-L, or both)
- CAN communication line short (ground, between CAN communication lines, other harnesses)
- Error of CAN communication control circuit of the unit connected to CAN communication line
WHEN "U1000" OR "U1001" IS INDICATED EVEN THOUGH CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
IS NORMAL Removal/installation of parts: Error may be detected when removing and installing CAN
communication unit and related parts while turning the ignition switch ON. (A DTC except for CAN
communication may be detected.)
- Fuse blown out (removed): CAN communication of the unit may cease.
- Voltage drop: Error may be detected if voltage drops due to discharged battery when turning the
ignition switch ON (Depending on the control unit which carries out CAN communication).
- Error may be detected if the power supply circuit of the control unit, which carries out CAN
communication, malfunctions (Depending on the control unit which carries out CAN
communication).
- Error may be detected if reprogramming is not completed normally.
NOTE: CAN communication system is normal if "U1000" or "U1001" is indicated on SELF-DIAG
RESULTS of CONSULT-III under the above conditions. Erase the memory of the self-diagnosis of
each unit.
Self-Diagnosis
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Self-Diagnosis
Page 4284
CAN COMMUNICATION CONTROL When CAN communication with ECM and BCM is impossible,
IPDM E/R performs fail-safe control. After CAN communication recovers normally, it also returns to
normal control.
If No CAN Communication Is Available With BCM
IGNITION RELAY MALFUNCTION DETECTION FUNCTION -
IPDM E/R monitors the voltage at the contact circuit and excitation coil circuit of the ignition relay
inside it.
- IPDM E/R judges the ignition relay error if the voltage differs between the contact circuit and the
excitation coil circuit.
- If the ignition relay cannot turn OFF due to contact seizure, it activates the tail lamp relay for 10
minutes to alert the user to the ignition relay malfunction when the ignition switch is turned OFF.
NOTE: The tail lamp turns OFF when the ignition switch is turned ON.
FRONT WIPER CONTROL IPDM E/R detects front wiper stop position by a front wiper auto stop
signal. When a front wiper auto stop signal is in the conditions listed below, IPDM E/R stops power
supply to wiper after repeating a front wiper 10 second activation and 20 second stop five times.
NOTE: This operation status can be confirmed on the IPDM E/R "DATA MONITOR" that displays
"Block" for the item "WIP PROT" while the wiper is stopped.
STARTER MOTOR PROTECTION FUNCTION IPDM E/R turns OFF the starter control relay to
protect the starter motor when the starter control relay remains active for 90 seconds.
Page 4289
CONSULT-III Function (IPDM E/R)
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R)
CONSULT - III Function (IPDM E/R)
APPLICATION ITEM CONSULT-III performs the following functions via CAN communication with
IPDM E/R.
SELF DIAGNOSTIC Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures.
DATA MONITOR
Page 1895
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL
Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE)
REMOVAL 1. Remove engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Engine Cover.
2. Remove air duct and resonator assembly. Refer to See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Air
Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair/Removal and
Installation.
3. Disconnect camshaft position sensor connector.
4. Remove camshaft position sensor (2) from Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (LH)
(1).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Replace the O-ring (3) of the camshaft position sensor with a new one, then lubricate
O-ring with engine oil before installing.
Camshaft position sensor bolt : 9.6 N.m (0.98 kg-m, 85 in-lb)
Page 219
16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5).
^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB,
diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing.
17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.)
Page 4136
Power Distribution Module: Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters
Reference Value
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Reference Value
VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL
Page 1253
Piston: Service and Repair
HOW TO SELECT PISTON AND BEARING
How to Select Piston and Bearing
DESCRIPTION
*For the service parts, the grade for fitting cannot be selected between a piston pin and a
connecting rod. (Only 0 grade is available.) The information at the shipment from the plant is
described as a reference. The identification grade stamped on each part is the grade for the dimension measured in new
condition. This grade cannot apply to reused parts.
- For reused or repaired parts, measure the dimension accurately. Determine the grade by
comparing the measurement with the values of each selection table.
- For details of the measurement method of each part, the reuse standards, and the selection
method of the selective fitting parts, follow the applicable procedure.
HOW TO SELECT PISTON
Piston Selective Fitting When New Cylinder Block is Used: Check the cylinder bore grade on the bottom face of the cylinder block, and select the piston of the
same grade.
When Cylinder Block is Reused 1. Measure cylinder block bore diameter. 2. Determine the bore
grade by comparing the measurement with the values under the "Cylinder bore diameter" of the
piston selection table.
Page 2529
18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM.
The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to
use.
19. Select Next
NOTE:
If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with
Reprogramming.
Locations
Page 1719
Page 1450
EM-2
Page 2662
Page 1885
CAUTION: Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly.
- Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket.
- Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling.
- Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water.
Removal 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2.
Disconnect the accelerator position sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the two upper and one
lower accelerator pedal nuts. 4. Remove the adjustable accelerator pedal assembly.
CAUTION: Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly.
- Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket.
- Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling.
- Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Inspection After Installation Check that the accelerator pedal moves smoothly within the specified range.
Non-adjustable accelerator pedal - total pedal applied stroke : 48 mm (1.89 in)
- Depress and release the accelerator pedal to check that it returns smoothly to the original
released position.
- Perform an electrical inspection of the accelerator pedal position sensor. Refer to See: Computers
and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/VIN Registration See:
Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator
Pedal Released Position Learning See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning See: Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning .
CAUTION: When the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor is disconnected,
perform "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to See: Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released
Position Learning .
Page 4026
Fuse: Locations Fuse, Fusible Link And Relay Box
FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX
Terminal Arrangement
FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK BOX
FUSE AND RELAY BOX
Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Ignition Timing: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check
IDLE SPEED
With CONSULT-III Check idle speed in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-III.
With GST Check idle speed with GST.
IGNITION TIMING 1. Attach timing light to loop wire as shown.
2. Check ignition timing.
Page 3101
Diagram Information and Instructions
Audible Warning Device: Diagram Information and Instructions
Connector Symbols
HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS
Connector symbols
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the
direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector.
For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements,
"Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals
Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring
diagrams.
Sample/Wiring Diagram -Example-
Page 3690
Yaw Rate Sensor: Service and Repair
G SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. If equipped, remove center console. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding
/ Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Center Console.
2. If equipped, remove the front center seat. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Seat/Removal
and Installation.
3. Remove yaw rate/side/decel G sensor nuts.
CAUTION: Do not use power tools to remove the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor.
- Do not drop or strike the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor.
4. Disconnect harness connector and remove the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Do not drop or strike the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor.
- After installation, calibrate the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor. Refer to See: Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Inspection And Adjustment/Description See: Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Inspection And Adjustment/Special Repair Requirement.
Page 1204
- D: Intake side
- Arrow Indicates Front
a. Tighten the RH (A) and LH (B) front cover bolts (4 for each bank) as shown to the specified
torque.
Front cover bolts : 11.0 N.m (1.1 kg-m, 8 ft-lb)
5. Install the camshaft sprockets using the following procedure: A: LH bank shown
a. Install the camshaft sprockets aligning them with the matching marks painted on the timing chain
(B) and the camshaft sprockets (C) before
removal. Align the camshaft sprocket key groove with the dowel pin on the camshaft front edge at
the same time.
Then temporarily tighten camshaft sprocket bolts.
- Install the intake (VTC) (A) and exhaust (B) side camshaft sprockets by selectively using the
groove of the dowel pin according to the bank for the exhaust (B) side camshaft sprockets.
(Common part used for both exhaust banks.)
NOTE: Use the groove marked "R" for RH bank and "L" for LH bank.
b. Lock the hexagonal part of the camshaft in the same way as for removal, and tighten the
camshaft sprocket bolts. c. Check again that the timing alignment mark on the timing chain and on
each sprocket are aligned.
Page 648
Oxygen Sensor: Locations
Page 221
20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer.
CAUTION: During data transfer:
^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections.
^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF.
^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal.
NOTE:
^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or
^ The Error in Figure 9A displays.
a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged.
b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned
OFF (see step 3 and 4).
c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III
screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1).
Part 2
Page 2116
Page 5027
DVD Player: Locations Premium Without Navigation
DVD PLAYER
Component Parts Location
Page 2119
Service and Repair
Parking Brake Shoe: Service and Repair
PARKING BRAKE SHOE
Removal and Installation
COMPONENTS
REMOVAL
WARNING: Clean the brakes with a vacuum dust collector to minimize the hazard of airborne
particles or other materials.
NOTE: Remove the disc rotor only with the parking brake pedal completely in the released position.
1. Remove the rear disc rotor. Refer to See: Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and
Repair/Rear. 2. Remove the return springs. 3. Remove the adjuster. 4. Disconnect the rear cable
from the toggle lever, if necessary. Remove pin retainer and withdraw cable end from toggle lever.
5. Remove the retainers, anti-rattle pins and shoes.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Lining Thickness Inspection Check thickness of lining.
Engine Compartment
Page 273
System Diagram
Temperature Sensor (Gauge): Description and Operation System Diagram
METER SYSTEM
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE : System Diagram
Page 4128
CAN COMMUNICATION CONTROL When CAN communication with ECM and BCM is impossible,
IPDM E/R performs fail-safe control. After CAN communication recovers normally, it also returns to
normal control.
If No CAN Communication Is Available With BCM
IGNITION RELAY MALFUNCTION DETECTION FUNCTION -
IPDM E/R monitors the voltage at the contact circuit and excitation coil circuit of the ignition relay
inside it.
- IPDM E/R judges the ignition relay error if the voltage differs between the contact circuit and the
excitation coil circuit.
- If the ignition relay cannot turn OFF due to contact seizure, it activates the tail lamp relay for 10
minutes to alert the user to the ignition relay malfunction when the ignition switch is turned OFF.
NOTE: The tail lamp turns OFF when the ignition switch is turned ON.
FRONT WIPER CONTROL IPDM E/R detects front wiper stop position by a front wiper auto stop
signal. When a front wiper auto stop signal is in the conditions listed below, IPDM E/R stops power
supply to wiper after repeating a front wiper 10 second activation and 20 second stop five times.
NOTE: This operation status can be confirmed on the IPDM E/R "DATA MONITOR" that displays
"Block" for the item "WIP PROT" while the wiper is stopped.
STARTER MOTOR PROTECTION FUNCTION IPDM E/R turns OFF the starter control relay to
protect the starter motor when the starter control relay remains active for 90 seconds.
Recall 10V074000: Fuel Sender Replacement
Fuel Gauge Sender: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 10V074000: Fuel Sender Replacement
VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2005-2009 Nissan/Armada 2005-2009
Nissan/Titan 2005-2009 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc.
MFR'S REPORT DATE: February 26, 2010
NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V074000 N/A
NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Fuel System, Other: Storage: Fuel Gauge System
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 340000
SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2005-2009 Titan, Armada, and Infiniti QX56
vehicles. The instrument panel fuel gauge may inaccurately display that the vehicle still has some
fuel, typically about one quarter tank, when the fuel tank is empty.
CONSEQUENCE: This could cause the vehicle to run out of gas and stall on the highway, which
could cause a crash.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the fuel sender unit inside the fuel tank with a new improved sender
card. This service will be performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin on or
before March 22, 2010. Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261.
NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle
Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov.
Page 4474
Ball Joint: Testing and Inspection
UPPER BALL JOINT AND LOWER BALL JOINT
Inspection
- Check the ball joint for excessive play. Replace the upper or lower link assembly if any of the
following exists:
- Ball joint stud is worn.
- Ball joint is hard to swing.
- Ball joint play in axial directions or end play is excessive.
Swinging Force
NOTE: Before checking the axial forces and end play, turn the lower ball joint at least 10
revolutions so that the ball joint is properly broken in.
1. Measure the ball joint swinging force using a suitable tool. Measure at the cotter pin hole for upper ball joint as shown.
- Measure at the groove for lower ball joint as shown.
2. Verify the ball joint swinging force is within specification.
Turning Force
NOTE: Before checking the axial forces and end play, turn the lower ball joint at least 10
revolutions so that the ball joint is properly broken in.
Page 3352
Axle Shaft Assembly: Tools and Equipment Commercial Service Tools
PREPARATION
Commercial Service Tool
M/T - Warranty Repair Fluid Requirements
Fluid - M/T: Technical Service Bulletins M/T - Warranty Repair Fluid Requirements
Classification: MT02-001B
Reference: NTB03-015B
Date: December 21, 21009
2001-2010 NISSAN; MANUAL TRANSMISSION OIL REQUIRED FOR WARRANTY REPAIRS
This bulletin has been amended. Please discard all copies of the earlier version.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2001-2010 Nissan Manual Transmission-Equipped Vehicles
SERVICE INFORMATION
If an Applied Vehicle equipped with Manual Transmission (MT) needs servicing for warranty
repairs, Nissan Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85, Nissan TransElf NFJ 75W-80,
or Nissan GTR R35 Special is required. See the chart above.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
Nissan Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85, Nissan TransElf NFJ 75W-80, or
Nissan GTR R35 Special oil must be used when performing manual transmission repairs paid by
Nissan. These include warranty, service contract, or goodwill repairs.
Nissan will not reimburse dealers for manual transmission repairs when Nissan Manual
Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85, Nissan TransElf NFJ 75W-80, or Nissan GTR R35
Special oil is not used.
Nissan recommends use of the above listed manual transmission fluids, which optimize shift
quality, for customer pay use as well.
Nissan Manual Transmission Fluid and all Nissan chemicals are ordered through the Direct Ship
Chemical Care Product Program.
Disclaimer
Page 5342
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 5456
10. Remove the outboard J-Clip.
WARNING:
Only the outboard J-Clip can be removed. Removal of any other J-Clips may affect OCS
performance.
11. Remove the two clips securing the switch harness to the seat pan. See Figure 7.
WARNING:
Before removal, make careful note of the exact routing and clip placement for reassembly.
Automatic Air Conditioner
Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Automatic Air Conditioner
IN-Vehicle Sensor
IN-VEHICLE SENSOR
Component Description
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
In-vehicle Sensor
The in-vehicle sensor (1) is located on the lower instrument panel LH. It converts variations in
temperature of passenger compartment air (drawn in through the integrated fan) into a resistance
value. It is then input into the front air control.
Intake Sensor
INTAKE SENSOR
System Description
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Intake Sensor
The intake sensor is located on the heater and cooling unit assembly. It converts temperature of air
after if passes through the evaporator into a resistance value which is then input to the front air
control.
Page 2554
Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters
Engine Control Module: Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout
ECM
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout
ECM Terminal And Reference Value
ECM
ECM Terminal and Reference Value
PREPARATION ECM is located in the engine room passenger side behind battery.
ECM INSPECTION TABLE Specification data are reference values and are measured between
each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-III.
CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may
result in damage to the ECMs transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the
ground.
Interior - Driver's Seat Arm Rest Loose
Arm Rest: Customer Interest Interior - Driver's Seat Arm Rest Loose
Classification: BT08-037
Reference: NTB09-005
Date: January 15, 2009
FRONT DRIVER SEAT ARMREST LOOSE
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2009 Armada (TA60) 2004-2009 Titan (A60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
The front driver seat armrest is loose.
ACTION
Remove bolt and apply Permatex(R) Threadlocker Blue or equivalent to bolt threads.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing the repair.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. a. Move the driver seat to the full rearward position.
b. Fully recline the driver seatback.
Service and Repair
Headliner: Service and Repair
HEADLINING
Removal and Installation
Crew Cab
Page 5794
c. Remove the Fuel Temperature Sensor from the Plastic Retaining Clip.
d. Remove the wires from the Securing Tab.
e. Unplug the White Wire Connector at the top of the fuel pump.
^ DO NOT disturb the Black Wire Connector located next to the white Wire connector.
f. Carefully cut the tie-wrap securing the harnesses to the corrugated tubing.
CAUTION:
DO NOT damage the wires or the wire insulation when cutting the Tie-Wrap.
ABLS/ABS
Page 1283
Page 2945
Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation System Description
METER SYSTEM
A/T OIL TEMPERATURE GAUGE : System Description
The A/T oil temperature gauge indicates the A/T fluid temperature. The TCM (transmission control
module) provides an A/T fluid temperature signal to combination meter via CAN communication
lines.
Page 4793
Heater Control Valve: Description and Operation Manual A/C (Type 2)
WATER VALVE CIRCUIT
Description
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Water Valve
The water valve (1) cuts the flow of engine coolant to the heater core to allow for maximum cooling
during A/C operation. It is controlled by the front air control.
Page 4754
Service and Repair
Cowl Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair
COWL TOP
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the right and left wiper arms. Refer to See: Wiper and Washer
Systems/Wiper Arm/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the cowl top seal. Release the plastics clips on the cowl top seal which go through the cowl tops LH and RH and cowl
top extension.
3. Remove the cowl top covers LH and RH. Release the plastic clips under cowl top covers attaching to grommets on hoodledge.
- Disconnect the washer tubes from washer nozzles.
4. Remove the cowl top extension brackets LH and RH. Disconnect the wiper motor harness from cowl top extension bracket LH.
- Cowl top extension bracket LH must be removed prior to removal of the wiper motor and
connecting rod assembly.
5. Remove the wiper motor and connecting rod linkage. Refer to See: Wiper and Washer
Systems/Wiper Motor Linkage/Service and Repair. 6. Disconnect the windshield washer tube.
Refer to See: Diagrams/Mechanical Diagrams/Windshield Washer Hose. 7. Remove the A/C
low-pressure pipe bracket from cowl top extension. Refer to See: Heating and Air
Conditioning/Hose/Line HVAC/Service and
Repair/Low-Pressure Pipe.
8. Remove the drain tube from each side of cowl top extension. 9. Remove the cowl top extension.
INSTALLATION
Page 3823
Brake Hose/Line: Service and Repair Inspection After Installation
BRAKE TUBE AND HOSE
Inspection After Installation
CAUTION: Brake tubes and hoses are important safety parts. Always disassemble the parts and
retighten their fittings, if a brake fluid leak is detected. Replace applicable part with a new one, if a
damaged part is detected. 1. Check brake lines (tubes and hoses), and connections for fluid leaks,
damage, twist, deformation, contact with other parts, and loose connections.
Replace any parts as necessary. Refer to See: Diagrams.
2. While depressing brake pedal under a force of 785 N (80 kg-f, 177 lb-f) with engine running for
approximately 5 seconds, check each part for
fluid leaks.
Locations
Locations
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Locations
Service and Repair
Parking Assist Control Module: Service and Repair
SONAR CONTROL UNIT
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear panel. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim
Panel/Service and Repair. 2. For king cab models only, pull up the carpet to gain access to the
sonar control unit. Sonar control unit (king cab) (1)
- Sonar control unit (crew cab) (2)
3. Disconnect the sonar control unit connector. 4. Remove the two bolts and remove the sonar
control unit.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve (LH)
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Service and Repair Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve
(LH)
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL
Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve (LH)
REMOVAL 1. Remove engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Engine Cover.
2. Remove air duct and resonator assembly. Refer to See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Air
Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair/Removal and
Installation.
3. Remove drive belt. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Drive Belts, Mounts,
Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and
Repair.
4. Disconnect Intake valve timing control intake valve timing control solenoid valve connector (LH).
5. Remove Intake valve timing control solenoid valve (LH) (2) from Intake valve timing control
solenoid valve cover (LH) (1).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Replace the O-ring (3) of the Intake valve timing control solenoid valve with a new one,
then lubricate O-ring with engine oil before installing.
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve bolt : 9.6 N.m (0.98 kg-m, 85 in-lb)
Page 2290
TCM
NOTE: Replace the unit when "NG" is indicated on the "INITIAL DIAG".
Differential Lock Control Unit
NOTE: Replace the unit when "NG" is indicated on the "INITIAL DIAG".
Exploded View
Water Pump: Service and Repair Exploded View
WATER PUMP
Exploded View
Page 5507
A. Position the organizer assembly on end as shown.
B. Spray lubricant (WD-40(R) or equivalent) between the inset and the tube.
C. Spray lubricant all the way around the insert.
D. Wait about 30 seconds for the lubricant to penetrate down the inside of the tube and around the
rubber o-ring.
E. Pull / remove the insert as shown in Figure 5.
F. Wipe off any residual or over spray lubricant.
6. Insert the new slider assemblies into the organizer.
^ Push the slider in until the plastic insert stops against the end of the metal tube.
7. Completely loosen the hand knob on all 4 slider assemblies.
^ This will allow maximum gap between the washer and slider base.
8. Slide the organizer back into the tracks.
Steering/Suspension - Front End Alignment Cam Bolts
Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Front End Alignment Cam Bolts
Classification: FA05-002D
Reference: NTB05-097D
Date: January 19, 2011
2005-2011 TITAN AND ARMADA; CAM BOLTS FOR FRONT WHEEL ALIGNMENT
The Applied Vehicles have been updated/amended. Please discard previous versions of this
bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2011 Titan (A60) 2005 - 2011 Armada (TA60)
APPLIED VINS 2005 Titan built after 1N6AA0(***)5N 566358 2005 Armada built after
5N1AA08(**)5N 733885 2006 - 2011 vehicles: All VINS
APPLIED DATE Vehicles built after June 2, 2005
IF YOU CONFIRM
An Applied Vehicle needs to have the front wheel alignment adjusted,
NOTE:
Applied Vehicles listed above come from the factory with non-adjustable bolts (Not Cam Bolts) for
the lower link (lower control arm) mounting.
ACTIONS
1. Remove the original lower link mounting bolts, washers, and nuts - 2 per side.
^ Refer to section FSU in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for lower link mounting bolt
locations.
2. Install new bolts (cam bolts), cam washers and new nuts.
^ New parts are listed in the Parts Information section of this bulletin.
NOTE:
Cam bolts are used to adjust caster and camber.
3. Perform front wheel alignment per the ESM.
PARTS INFORMATION
Power Window Main Switch
Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Power Window Main Switch
POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the power window main switch assembly from the front door finisher LH.
Refer to See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and
Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair.
2. Remove the screws from the power window main switch (1) using suitable tool (A). Then release
the power window main switch (1) from the
finisher (2).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 4486
Compare the Lot Numbers of each lower link to these Lot Number examples.
Page 2369
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations Without Intelligent Key System
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Terminal Layout
TERMINAL LAYOUT
Page 1979
Page 5253
Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair
FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR
Removal and Installation
FRONT DOOR GLASS
Removal 1. Remove the front door speaker. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional
Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Speaker/Service and
Repair/MID Audio/Front Door Speaker.
2. Remove the hole cover over rear glass bolt. 3. Operate the power window main switch to
raise/lower the door window until the glass bolts can be seen. 4. Remove the inside seal. 5.
Remove the glass bolts.
6. While holding the front door glass, raise it at the rear end and pull the glass out of the sash
toward the outside of the door.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Glass bolts : 6.1 N.m (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb)
Fitting Inspection
Capacity Specifications
Fluid - Transfer Case: Capacity Specifications
Transfer Case Fluid
Capacity ...............................................................................................................................................
................................................ 2-1/8 U.S. qts (2.0 L)
Electrical Units Location
Body Control Module: Locations Electrical Units Location
Page 2307
CREATE DIAGNOSIS SHEET
NOTE: Be sure to use the diagnosis sheet for the correct CAN system type.
Print Diagnosis Sheet Print the diagnosis sheet for the applicable CAN system type.
Check Collected Data Make sure that all ECUs are received, referring to "ECU list". For abbreviations, refer to See: CAN Fundamental/How To Use This Section/Abbreviation List.
Page 1938
Variable Valve Timing Actuator Position Sensor: Service and Repair Intake Valve Timing Control
Position Sensor (RH)
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL
Intake Valve Timing Control Position Sensor (RH)
REMOVAL 1. Remove engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Engine Cover.
2. Disconnect intake valve timing control position sensor connector (RH).
3. Remove intake valve timing control position sensor (RH) (1) from Intake valve timing control
solenoid valve cover (RH) (3).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Replace the O-ring (2) of the intake valve timing control position sensor with a new one,
then lubricate O-ring with engine oil before installing.
Intake valve timing control position sensor bolt : 9.6 N.m (0.98 kg-m, 85 in-lb)
Page 3536
CAUTION: Do not reuse self-lock nut. 4. Install the front propeller shaft. Refer to See:
Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Propeller Shaft 2F1310.
5. Refill the transfer with fluid and check for fluid leakage and fluid level. Refer to See: Fluid Transfer Case/Service and Repair.
Page 2322
Information Needed For Trouble Diagnosis
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
Information Needed for Trouble Diagnosis
CAN communication system performs trouble diagnosis with the following tools.
Locations
Shift Indicator: Locations
METER SYSTEM
SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR : Component Parts Location
Page 398
Control Module: Service and Repair
TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Switch 4WD shift switch to 2WD and set transfer assembly to 2WD.
CAUTION: When removing transfer control unit, transfer state must be at 2WD. 2. Turn the ignition
switch OFF and disconnect negative battery terminal. 3. Remove the lower instrument panel RH.
Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Lower Panel RH And Glove Box/Removal And
Installation.
4. Disconnect the two transfer control unit connectors. 5. Remove the transfer control unit bolts. 6.
Remove the transfer control unit.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. When installing the transfer control unit, tighten bolts to the specified torque.
Transfer control unit bolts : 5.1 N.m (0.52 kg-m, 45 in-lb)
- After the installation, check 4WD shift indicator pattern. If NG, adjust position between transfer
assembly and transfer control unit. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Transfer
Case/Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Precaution For Transfer Assembly And
Transfer Control Unit Replacement.
With Intelligent Key System
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations With Intelligent Key System
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Terminal Layout
TERMINAL LAYOUT
Page 2123
Page 5568
Warning Chime - Part 4
Page 1234
Main Bearings Grade Table (All Journals)
Page 3091
Page 129
- Erase DTC.
- Study the relationship between the cause detected by DTC and the symptom described by the
customer.
3. Check related service bulletins for information. Is any symptom described and any DTC
detected? Symptom is described, DTC is displayed - GO TO 3 Symptom is described, DTC is not
displayed - GO TO 4 Symptom is not described, DTC is displayed - GO TO 5 3. CONFIRM THE
SYMPTOM Confirm the symptom described by the customer. Connect CONSULT-III to the vehicle
in "DATA MONITOR" mode and check real time diagnosis results. Verify relationship between the
symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected. - GO TO 5 4. CONFIRM THE
SYMPTOM Confirm the symptom described by the customer. Connect CONSULT-III to the vehicle
in "DATA MONITOR" mode and check real time diagnosis results. Verify relationship between the
symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected. - GO TO 6 5. PERFORM DTC
CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure for the displayed DTC, and
then check that DTC is detected again. At this time, always connect CONSULT-III to the vehicle,
and check diagnostic results in real time.
NOTE: Freeze frame data is useful if the DTC is not detected.
- Perform Component Function Check if DTC Confirmation Procedure is not included. This
simplified check procedure is an effective alternative though DTC cannot be detected during this
check.
If the result of Component Function Check is NG, it is the same as the detection of DTC by DTC
Confirmation Procedure. Is DTC detected? YES - GO TO 8 NO - Refer to See: Testing and
Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Service Information For Electrical
Incident/Intermittent Incident. 6. PERFORM BASIC INSPECTION Perform basic inspection of
system. Inspection End - GO TO 7 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM BY SYMPTOM
TABLE Detect malfunctioning system based on the confirmed symptom in step 4, and determine
the trouble diagnosis order based on possible causes and symptom. - GO TO 8 8. DETECT
MALFUNCTIONING PART BY DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE Inspect according to Diagnostic
Procedure of the system.
NOTE: The Diagnostic Procedure described based on open circuit inspection. A short circuit
inspection is also required for the circuit check in the Diagnostic Procedure. Is malfunctioning part
detected? YES - GO TO 9 NO - Check voltage of related BCM terminals using CONSULT-III. 9.
REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PART 1. Repair or replace the malfunctioning
part. 2. Reconnect parts or connectors disconnected during Diagnostic Procedure again after repair
and replacement. 3. Check DTC. If DTC is displayed, erase it. - GO TO 10
10. FINAL CHECK
When DTC was detected in step 2, perform DTC Confirmation Procedure or Component Function
Check again, and then check that the malfunction have been fully repaired. When symptom was
described from the customer, refer to confirmed symptom in step 3 or 4 and check that the
symptom is not detected. OK or NG NG (DTC is detected) - GO TO 8 NG (Symptom remains) - GO
TO 6 OK - Inspection End.
IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room)
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Fail Safe
Page 2236
Page 698
Consult-III Checking System
Standardized Relay
STANDARDIZED RELAY
Description
NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided
into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays.
Page 507
Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Manual A/C (Type 2)
INTAKE SENSOR
System Description
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Intake Sensor
The intake sensor (1) is located on the heater and cooling unit assembly. It converts temperature of
air after if passes through the evaporator into a resistance value which is then input to the front air
control.
Page 964
Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair High-Pressure Flexible Hose
HIGH-PRESSURE FLEXIBLE HOSE
Removal and Installation for High-pressure Flexible Hose
REMOVAL 1. Remove the engine under cover. 2. Remove the engine air cleaner and air ducts.
Refer to See: Filters/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation . 3.
Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and
Repair/Refrigeration System . 4. Remove the high-pressure flexible hose.
CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the
entry of air.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Heating and Air
Conditioning/Description and Operation/Refrigeration System/Component .
CAUTION: Replace the O-ring of the high-pressure flexible hose with a new one, then apply compressor oil to
it when installing it.
- After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
Locations
Page 3341
8. Strike the bearing ring retainer using a suitable chisel and hammer, with the chisel positioned
across the drilled hole. Break the bearing ring
retainer to remove it.
CAUTION: Do not heat or cut the axle shaft bearing or bearing ring retainer with a torch during
removal, doing so will damage the axle shaft. 9. Remove the axle shaft bearing cage studs using a
suitable hammer or press.
10. Pull the axle shaft bearing off of the axle shaft using Tool and a suitable press.
Tool number : ST30031000 ( - )
CAUTION: Do not tighten the Tool against the axle shaft.
- Do not heat or cut the axle shaft bearing or bearing ring retainer with a torch during removal,
doing so will damage the axle shaft.
11. Remove the axle oil seal and discard.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle
shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing.
12. Remove the wheel bearing cage.
NOTE: If reinstalling the old axle shaft, it may not be necessary to remove the seal plate and ABS sensor
rotor.
Inspect the seal plate and ABS sensor rotor and replace as necessary. Refer to See: Brakes and
Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Wheel Speed Sensor/Service and
Repair/VDC/TCS/ABS/Sensor Rotor. The ABS sensor rotor cannot be reused after it is removed. If replacing the axle shaft, install a new
ABS sensor rotor on the new axle shaft. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes
/ Traction Control Systems/Wheel Speed Sensor/Service and Repair/VDC/TCS/ABS/Sensor Rotor.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Axle Shaft Clean and remove all nicks and burrs.
- Check for straightness and distortion. Replace if necessary.
- Inspect machined surfaces for evidence of overheating, damage and wear. Replace if necessary.
- Measure the bearing ring retainer axle journal diameter. Replace if necessary.
Bearing ring retainer axle journal diameter (minimum) : 39.726 mm (1.5640 in)
Axle Shaft Bearing and Cup Check that the axle shaft bearing and cup roll freely and are free from noise, cracks, pitting and
wear.
Replace if necessary.
Axle Shaft Bearing Cage Check for deformation and cracks. Replace if necessary.
Axle Shaft Housing Check the exterior and inner machined surfaces for deformation and cracks. Replace if necessary.
INSTALLATION 1. If installing a new axle shaft, install a new ABS sensor rotor onto the new axle
shaft. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes /
Traction Control Systems/Wheel Speed Sensor/Service and Repair/VDC/TCS/ABS/Sensor Rotor.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the old ABS sensor rotor. 2. Install the seal plate.
Page 1693
^ Check and compare your current ECM Part Number to Table A or B (as it applies) shown above.
If the part number does not match one in Table A or B, this bulletin does not apply. Go back to
ASIST for further diagnostic and repair information.
If this bulletin applies, reprogram the ECM.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You
MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential
to successfully completing this repair.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 554
2. Remove the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit from the Fuel Pump Assembly as follows:
a. First, press in on the two locking tabs on the sides of the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit
b. Then, pull the unit UP and OUT of the attachment slots
^ For Type A see Figure 1
^ For Type B see Figure 2
Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve (LH)
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Service and Repair Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve
(LH)
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL
Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve (LH)
REMOVAL 1. Remove engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Cover. 2. Remove air duct and resonator assembly.
Refer to See: Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and
Repair/Removal and Installation.
3. Remove drive belt. Refer to See: Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive
Belt/Service and Repair. 4. Disconnect Intake valve timing control intake valve timing control
solenoid valve connector (LH).
5. Remove Intake valve timing control solenoid valve (LH) (2) from Intake valve timing control
solenoid valve cover (LH) (1).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Replace the O-ring (3) of the Intake valve timing control solenoid valve with a new one,
then lubricate O-ring with engine oil before installing.
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve bolt : 9.6 N.m (0.98 kg-m, 85 in-lb)
Page 3151
Disclaimer
Relay Control System
Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation Relay Control System
System Diagram
RELAY CONTROL SYSTEM
System Diagram
System Description
Page 4236
Monitor item
ACTIVE TEST Test item
Page 5280
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the following parts from the trim panel:
^ pull handle cover
^ power window switch assembly (if equipped)
Refer to the INT section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for removal
instructions.
2. Following the instructions on the label, apply Nissan Vinyl and Leather Cleaner to the trim panel
surface.
3. Use a soft bristle brush to gently clean the surface.
4. Mist the area lightly with water to rinse.
5. Use a clean cloth to wipe the area clean.
Page 2157
21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete.
NOTE:
If you can't print the above screen:
a. Select the Print icon.
b. Select Save.
c. Select OK.
A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC.
NOTE:
If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in
the following file location:
At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start.
Page 4368
> Engine coolant and lubricating oils at specified levels
> Spare tire, jack, hand tools, and floor mats in designated positions
NOTE:
Refer to the appropriate Service Manual for information about any of the above checks and
inspections.
4. Check the target mounts.
^ If there is any visual damage (bent, worn, cracked, etc), have the equipment repaired before
performing any alignments.
^ Make sure the target mounts are properly adjusted and configured (see Figure 11).
NOTE:
The target mount example shown in Figure 11 is for Hunter "camera type" alignment machines.
Follow the operation manual for your specific equipment.
Page 4655
3. Remove the defroster nozzle. 4. Remove the RH and LH side demister ducts. 5. Remove the RH
and LH ventilator ducts. 6. Remove the center ventilator duct.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 5610
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect combination meter connector and seat belt buckle
switch LH connector. 3. Check continuity between combination meter harness connector M24 (B)
terminal 27 and seat belt buckle switch LH harness connector B12 (A)
terminal 1.
27 - 1 : Continuity should exist.
4. Check continuity between combination meter harness connector M24 (B) terminal 27 and
ground.
27 - Ground : Continuity should not exist.
Is the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO 3 NO - Repair harness or connector. 3.CHECK
SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between seat belt buckle switch LH harness connector B12 terminal 2 and
ground.
2 - Ground : Continuity should exist.
Is the inspection result normal? YES - Inspection End. NO - Repair harness or connector.
Component Inspection
SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Component Inspection
1.CHECK SEAT BELT BUCKLE SWITCH
Page 1829
d. Press [START] on the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" screen. See Figure 4.
e. Press [START] on the "WORK SUPPORT" screen to begin the Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL)
procedure. See Figure 5.
^ The IAVL procedure will take several minutes to complete.
^ CONSULT will display "Please Wait" in the center of the screen while the IAVL procedure is in
process. See Figure 6.
Page 3498
b. Align the transfer control device shaft cutout with the mark on the control shift rod, and install.
NOTE: Turn the transfer control device when the transfer control device connection does not
match.
c. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque. Refer to See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/Disassembly And Assembly.
3. Install the breather hose to the transfer control device. 4. Connect the transfer control device
connector. 5. After the installation, check the 4WD shift indicator pattern. If NG, adjust the position
between the transfer assembly and transfer control unit.
Refer to See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Precaution For Transfer
Assembly And Transfer Control Unit Replacement.
Page 2240
Page 6067
If the moisture trickles, drips, or pools, it may not be considered normal and the lamp assembly
may have a water leak path. See Figure 2 for an example.
If large drops of water collect inside the lens, refer to the flow chart below to find the next step.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Page 3159
NOTE: The A/T fluid level will be significantly affected by the A/T fluid temperature as shown.
Therefore monitor the A/T fluid temperature data using the CONSULT-III.
a. Connect CONSULT-III to data link connector. b. Select "MAIN SIGNALS" in "DATA MONITOR"
mode for "A/T" with CONSULT-III. c. Read out the value of "ATF TEMP 1".
6. Re-check the A/T fluid level at A/T fluid temperatures of approximately 65°C (149°F) using the
"HOT" range on the A/T fluid level gauge as
shown. The HOT range is between 50° - 80° C (122° - 176° F).
CAUTION: When wiping the A/T fluid from the A/T fluid level gauge, always use lint-free paper, not a cloth.
- To check the A/T fluid level, insert the A/T fluid level gauge until the cap contacts the top of the
A/T fluid charging pipe, with the gauge reversed from the normal inserted position as shown.
7. Check the A/T fluid condition. If the A/T fluid is very dark or has some burned smell, there may be an internal problem with the
transmission. Refer to See: Transmission Cooler/Service and Repair/A/T Fluid Cooler Cleaning.
Flush the transmission cooling system after repairing the transmission.
- If the A/T fluid contains frictional material (clutches, bands, etc.), replace the radiator and flush the
transmission cooler lines using cleaning solvent and compressed air after repairing the
transmission.
8. Install the A/T fluid level gauge in the A/T fluid charging pipe. 9. Tighten the A/T fluid level gauge
bolt to specification.
A/T fluid level gauge bolt : Refer to See: Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Transmission Assembly or See: Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Transmission Assembly.
Exploded View
Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Exploded View
AIR CLEANER FILTER
Exploded View
Page 5744
Oil Pressure Gauge: Description and Operation System Description
METER SYSTEM
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE : System Description
The engine oil pressure gauge indicates whether the engine oil pressure is low or normal. The oil
pressure gauge is controlled by the IPDM E/R. The IPDM E/R reads the ON/OFF signals from the
oil pressure switch and transmits the oil pressure switch signal to the combination meter via BCM
with the CAN communication line. The oil pressure gauge displays a low or normal indication
according to the oil pressure switch signal received via CAN communication.
Page 5574
Locations
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Locations
Page 1194
Camshaft: Service and Repair Removal And Installation
CAMSHAFT
Removal and Installation
NOTE: Do not remove the engine assembly to perform this procedure.
REMOVAL 1. Remove the RH bank and LH bank rocker covers. Refer to See: Cylinder Head
Assembly/Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Removal And
Installation.
2. Obtain compression TDC of No. 1 cylinder as follows:
a. Turn the crankshaft pulley clockwise to align the TDC identification notch (without paint mark)
with the timing indicator on the front cover.
b. At this time, make sure both intake and exhaust cam lobes of No. 1 cylinder (top front on LH
bank) point outside.
- If they do not point outside, turn crankshaft pulley once more.
3. Remove the intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (RH) (A) and intake valve timing
control solenoid valve cover (LH) (B) as follows:
a. Loosen and remove the bolts as shown. b. Cut the liquid gasket and remove the covers using
Tool.
Tool number : KV10111100 (J-37228)
CAUTION: Do not damage mating surfaces.
Page 172
Page 4014
Power Socket - Part 3
A/F Sensor 1 Heater
Oxygen Sensor: Specifications A/F Sensor 1 Heater
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
A/F Sensor 1 Heater
Page 5605
Perform inspection of the seat belt buckle switch circuit. Refer to See: Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/Seat Belt Buckle Switch Signal Circuit/Diagnosis Procedure. Is the inspection
result normal? YES - GO TO 4 NO - Repair harness or connector. 4.CHECK SEAT BELT BUCKLE
SWITCH UNIT Perform a unit inspection for the seat belt buckle switch. Refer to See: Component
Tests and General Diagnostics/Seat Belt Buckle Switch Signal Circuit/Component Inspection. Is
the inspection result normal? YES - Replace the combination meter. Refer to See: Instrument
Cluster / Carrier/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. NO - Replace the seat belt buckle
switch LH.
The Key Warning Does Not Sound
THE KEY WARNING DOES NOT SOUND
Description
Key warning does not sound even though key is in ignition and front door LH is opened.
THE KEY WARNING DOES NOT SOUND
Diagnosis Procedure
1.CHECK WARNING CHIME OPERATION With key removed from the ignition and the front door
LH open, turn the lighting switch to 1st or 2nd position. Does warning chime sound? YES - GO TO
2 NO - Replace combination meter. Refer to See: Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement. 2.CHECK KEY SWITCH CIRCUIT Perform inspection of the
key switch circuit. Refer to See: Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Key Switch Signal
Circuit/Diagnosis Procedure. Is the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO 3 NO - Repair harness
or connector. 3.CHECK KEY SWITCH Perform a unit inspection for the key switch. Refer to See:
Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Key Switch Signal Circuit/Component Inspection. Is the
inspection result normal? YES - Replace the BCM. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Body Control
Systems/Body Control Module/Service and Repair. NO - Replace the key switch (column shift) or
key switch and key lock solenoid (floor shift).
Page 4065
Power Distribution Module: Service Precautions
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
The Supplemental Restraint System such as "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER",
used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front
passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage
front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag
deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and
whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system
safely is included in the Restraint Systems Information.
WARNING: To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed
by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
- Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to
personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and
Air Bag Module, see the SRS Air Bag.
- Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed. SRS
wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.
Page 3059
40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19.
NOTE:
For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF.
^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data.
41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42.
41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed.
^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service
Manual (ESM) for this procedure.
NOTE:
If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle.
IAVL can now be performed.
42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF.
^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs.
Page 1849
Lighting - Exterior Lamp Fogging Inspection
Marker Lamp: Customer Interest Lighting - Exterior Lamp Fogging Inspection
Classification: EL03-030E
Reference: NTB03-074E
Date: January 4, 2010
EXTERIOR LAMP FOGGING
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles and Service Procedure sections have been
revised. Please discard all previous versions.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2001-2010 Nissan, All Models
SERVICE INFORMATION
Occasionally customers may notice water vapor or fog in the exterior lamps. This is generally NOT
due to a defect.
The following information, illustrations, and flow chart are provided to help you in determining if an
incident for water/condensation in the lamps is normal or not.
All current exterior lamp assemblies are vented to the atmosphere (not sealed).
^ This is necessary to allow for expansion and contraction of air from temperature "variations"
(warmer or colder) without damage to the lamp.
^ Moisture in the air sometimes "travels" into and out of the lamp assembly through these vents.
^ Certain environmental conditions may cause moisture to condense.
^ The fogging/cloudiness should disappear over time when the lamp is in a dry environment.
Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the exterior lights based on environmental conditions
or sudden temperature changes (such as in a car wash). This is normal. See Figure 1.
NOTE:
This condensation can appear anywhere on the outer lens, typically at its coldest location.
Page 5282
Rear Door Panel: Service and Repair
DOOR FINISHER
Removal and Installation
FRONT DOOR
Removal 1. Remove the power window switch assembly (if equipped). -
Disconnect the harness connectors.
2. Remove the pull handle cover. Remove the screws behind pull handle cover.
3. Remove the cap from pull handle escutcheon and remove the screw. 4. Remove the pull handle
escutcheon. Remove the screws behind pull handle escutcheon.
5. Remove the armrest. Remove the screw behind armrest.
6. Remove the window crank handle, using a suitable tool (if equipped). 7. Remove the memory
seat switch (if equipped). Disconnect the harness connector.
8. Remove the step lamp.
Page 4320
Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-037A Date: 100519
Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement
Reference: NTB10-037A
Date: May 19, 2010
VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2005 - 2009 ARMADA AND TITAN FUEL GAUGE
INACCURACY
This bulletin has been amended. Additions were made to the Parts Information. Please discard
previous versions of this bulletin.
CAMPAIGN ID #: R1010
NHTSA #: 10V-074
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2009 Armada (TA60) 2005 - 2009 Titan (A60)
Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility.
INTRODUCTION
Nissan is conducting a voluntary recall campaign on certain MY2005-2009 Armada and Titan
vehicles to address a potential fuel gauge inaccuracy. Specifically, the issue can cause the fuel
gauge to show that the vehicle still has some fuel, typically about one quarter tank, when the fuel
tank is actually empty. To remedy this potential condition, Nissan is conducting this Voluntary
Safety Recall Campaign to replace the fuel level sending unit with a new one at no charge for parts
or labor.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number R1010 to this campaign. This number must appear on
all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle
falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service
department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient
(tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in
dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to
do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While
federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used
vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed.
Page 2298
Example: Data link connector branch line open circuit
NOTE: When data link connector branch line is open, transmission and reception of CAN communication
signals are not affected. Therefore, no symptoms occur. However, be sure to repair malfunctioning
circuit.
- When data link connector branch line is open, "ECU list" displayed on the CONSULT-III "CAN
DIAG SUPPORT MNTR" may be the same as when the CAN communication line has short-circuit.
However, symptoms differ depending on the case. See below chart for the differences.
Example: Main Line Between Data Link Connector and ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control
Unit) Open Circuit
Page 3654
- Never reuse drained brake fluid.
- Refill brake system with new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system. Refer to See: Brake
Bleeding/Service and Repair.
Automatic Air Conditioner
Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Automatic Air Conditioner
IN-Vehicle Sensor
IN-VEHICLE SENSOR
Component Description
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
In-vehicle Sensor
The in-vehicle sensor (1) is located on the lower instrument panel LH. It converts variations in
temperature of passenger compartment air (drawn in through the integrated fan) into a resistance
value. It is then input into the front air control.
Intake Sensor
INTAKE SENSOR
System Description
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Intake Sensor
The intake sensor is located on the heater and cooling unit assembly. It converts temperature of air
after if passes through the evaporator into a resistance value which is then input to the front air
control.
Page 5838
Temperature Sensor (Gauge): Description and Operation System Description
METER SYSTEM
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE : System Description
The engine coolant temperature gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature. The ECM
provides an engine coolant temperature signal to the combination meter via CAN communication
lines.
A/T Shift Lock System
Cooling System - Long Life Coolant Information
Coolant: Technical Service Bulletins Cooling System - Long Life Coolant Information
Classification: EM09-001A
Reference: NTB09-040A
Date: May 14, 2010
NEW BLUE NISSAN LONG LIFE ANTIFREEZE/COOLANT
This bulletin has been amended. The Service Information has been updated. Please discard
previous versions of this bulletin.
SERVICE INFORMATION
In calendar year 2009, Nissan began filling some vehicles at the factory with a NEW Nissan Long
Life Antifreeze/Coolant (LLC) that is blue in color.
NOTE: LLC = Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant
The transition to this new Blue LLC continued though MY 2010. Beginning with MY 2011, all
Nissan vehicles are filled at the factory with the Blue LLC.
^ MY 2009 and 2010: Some vehicles are filled at the factory with Blue LLC.
^ MY 2011: All vehicles are filled at the factory with Blue LLC.
Blue LLC is designed to have a service life of 7 years/105,000 miles for the factory fill, and 5
years/75,000 miles for subsequent replacement fills.
Nissan Blue Super LLC is available through the Nissan Direct Ship Chemical Care Product
Program, Website order link via dealer portal www.NNAnet.com or order direct
www.NissanChemicals.com.
^ Blue LLC one gallon pre-diluted:
P/N 999MP - LP25500P
> The one gallon containers are pre-diluted with 50% antifreeze and 50% distilled water.
> Do not add additional water when using pre-diluted Blue LLC.
Page 3342
3. Install the axle shaft bearing cage. 4. Install a new axle oil seal.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle
shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing.
5. Install the axle shaft bearing and cup on the axle shaft. Prepare an installer tool from a steel tube measuring 762 mm (30 in) long with an outside diameter
of 53.98 mm (2.125 in) and an inside diameter of 41.28 mm (1.625 in).
- Press the axle shaft bearing and cup onto the axle shaft using a suitable press and the installer
tool, until a 0.038 mm (.0015 in) feeler gauge does not fit in between the axle shaft bearing cup and
seat.
CAUTION: Make sure the axle shaft bearing and cup, axle oil seal, and axle shaft bearing cage are
installed facing in the correct direction. 6. Install the bearing ring retainer onto the axle shaft. Press the bearing ring retainer onto the axle shaft with a minimum force of 31,100 N (3172 kg,
6992 lb) until a 0.038 mm (.0015 in) feeler gauge does not fit between the bearing inner race and
the bearing ring retainer in at least one point.
7. Install the snap ring so it is fully seated into the groove on the axle shaft, using suitable snap ring
pliers. 8. Install the axle shaft assembly into the axle shaft housing. 9. Install the axle shaft bearing
cage lock washers and nuts. Tighten the axle shaft bearing cage nuts to specification.
10. Install the parking brake assembly onto the back plate. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction
Control/Parking Brake System/Parking Brake
Control/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation.
11. Install the rear brake rotor. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake
Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Rear. 12. Install the rear ABS sensor. Refer to See: Brakes and
Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Wheel Speed Sensor/Service
and Repair/VDC/TCS/ABS/Wheel Sensors.
Page 1341
Tighten the oil pan (lower) bolts in numerical order as shown.
Page 5537
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and stop lamp switch terminal 2. Refer to
Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK - GO TO 10. NG Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
10. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH
Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/ASCD Brake Switch/Component Inspection.
OK or NG OK - GO TO 11. NG - Replace stop lamp switch.
11. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Service Information
For Electrical Incident/Intermittent Incident and See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and
Diagnostic Overview/Service Information For Electrical Incident/Intermittent Incident. INSPECTION END
ABLS/ABS
Lighting - Exterior Lamp Fogging Inspection
Marker Lamp: All Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Exterior Lamp Fogging Inspection
Classification: EL03-030E
Reference: NTB03-074E
Date: January 4, 2010
EXTERIOR LAMP FOGGING
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles and Service Procedure sections have been
revised. Please discard all previous versions.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2001-2010 Nissan, All Models
SERVICE INFORMATION
Occasionally customers may notice water vapor or fog in the exterior lamps. This is generally NOT
due to a defect.
The following information, illustrations, and flow chart are provided to help you in determining if an
incident for water/condensation in the lamps is normal or not.
All current exterior lamp assemblies are vented to the atmosphere (not sealed).
^ This is necessary to allow for expansion and contraction of air from temperature "variations"
(warmer or colder) without damage to the lamp.
^ Moisture in the air sometimes "travels" into and out of the lamp assembly through these vents.
^ Certain environmental conditions may cause moisture to condense.
^ The fogging/cloudiness should disappear over time when the lamp is in a dry environment.
Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the exterior lights based on environmental conditions
or sudden temperature changes (such as in a car wash). This is normal. See Figure 1.
NOTE:
This condensation can appear anywhere on the outer lens, typically at its coldest location.
Locations
Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations
Page 5047
HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS
Sample/wiring diagram -example- For detail, refer to following See: How To Read Wiring Diagrams/Description.
Description
HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS
Description
Page 1786
Premium Without Navigation
DVD Player: Description and Operation Premium Without Navigation
System Diagram
DVD PLAYER
System Diagram
System Description
DVD PLAYER
System Description
The DVD entertainment system consists of the following components Audio unit
- DVD player
- Video monitor
- AV switch
- Steering wheel audio control switches
- Rear audio remote control unit
- Audio amp.
- Front tweeters
- Front door speakers
- Center speaker
- Rear door tweeters (crew cab)
- Rear door speakers
- Subwoofer
When the DVD entertainment system is on, video signals are sent from the DVD player to the video
monitor. Audio signals are sent to the Audio unit. Audio signals can be directed through the
wireless infrared headphones or through the audio amp. to the vehicle speakers. Refer to complete
DVD entertainment system operating instructions.
Component Description
DVD PLAYER
Component Description
Page 3684
REAR WHEEL SENSOR ROTOR
Removal Remove the rear axle shaft assembly. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive
Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and Repair/Rear Axle Shaft.
NOTE: It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle shaft assembly to replace the rear wheel
sensor rotor.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the old rear wheel sensor rotor.
- Do not reuse the rear axle oil seal. The rear axle oil seal must be replaced every time the rear
axle shaft assembly is removed from the rear axle shaft housing.
Page 3292
Fluid - Differential: Fluid Type Specifications
Differential Fluid Types
Front(4WD) ............................................................................................................... Genuine
NISSAN Differential Oil Hypoid Super GL-5 or API GL-5
Rear .....................................................................................................................................................
............... API GL-5 Synthetic Gear Oil or equivalent
Recommended Viscosity
Front ....................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................... 80W-90
Rear .....................................................................................................................................................
.................................................................... 75W-140
Page 1008
Disclaimer
Page 2656
Assembly.
c. Remove the exhaust manifold cover. d. Loosen the nuts in reverse order of illustration (B) using
power tool. e. Remove the exhaust studs from positions 2, 4, 6, 8 and remove exhaust manifold
(RH).
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Surface Distortion Check the flatness of each exhaust manifold flange surface using suitable tools.
Flatness limit : 0.3 mm (0.012 in)
- If measurement exceeds the limit, replace the exhaust manifold.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
- Install new exhaust manifold gasket with the top of the triangular up mark on it facing up and its
coated face (gray side) toward the exhaust manifold side.
- Tighten the exhaust manifold nuts in the numerical order shown.
Then recheck the torque of the nuts both (A) and (B). A: Exhaust manifold LH
- B: Exhaust manifold RH
- Arrow indicates Front
- Before installing new air fuel ration A/F sensors, clean the exhaust system threads using Tool and
apply antiseize lubricant.
Page 804
Once you have set the target position, DO NOT reset it at anytime during the alignment process.
6. Begin the alignment procedure.
^ Follow all of the instructions for your particular equipment.
^ Refer to the Service Manual for alignment specifications.
If your equipment requires "rolling compensation". follow these additional tips:
^ DO NOT push or pull on the vehicle body.
IMPORTANT:
After performing "rolling compensation", DO NOT reset the target position.
When performing "caster sweep". follow these tips:
Page 120
IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) - Part 4
Page 3513
Fluid - Transfer Case: Service and Repair Replacement
TRANSFER FLUID
Replacement
CAUTION: If using the vehicle for towing, the transfer fluid must be replaced as specified. Refer to
See: Maintenance.
DRAINING 1. Stop engine.
2. Remove the drain plug and gasket and drain the fluid. 3. Install the drain plug with a new gasket
to the transfer. Tighten to the specified torque. Refer to See: Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Service
and Repair/Overhaul/Component.
CAUTION: Do not reuse gasket.
FILLING 1. Remove the filler plug and gasket.
2. Fill the transfer with new fluid until the fluid level reaches the specified limit near the filler plug
hole.
Fluid grade and capacity : Refer to See: Maintenance.
CAUTION: Carefully fill fluid. (Fill up for approx. 3 minutes.) 3. Leave the vehicle for 3 minutes, and
check fluid level again. 4. Install the filler plug with a new gasket to the transfer. Tighten to the
specified torque. Refer to See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service
and Repair/Overhaul/Component.
CAUTION: Do not reuse gasket.
Page 2235
Page 1564
NOTE: Apply engine coolant to the cap seal. -
Replace the reservoir cap if there is any damage in the negative-pressure valve, or if the
open-valve pressure is outside of the limit.
CHECKING RADIATOR CAP Inspect the radiator cap.
NOTE: Thoroughly wipe out the radiator filler neck to remove any waxy residue or foreign material.
Replace the cap if the metal plunger cannot be seen around the edge of the black rubber gasket.
- Replace the cap if deposits of waxy residue or other foreign material are on the black rubber
gasket or the metal retainer.
- Pull negative-pressure valve to open it and make sure that it closes completely when released.
- Make sure that there is no dirt or damage on the valve seat of radiator cap negative-pressure
valve.
- Make sure that there are no unusualness in the opening and closing conditions of
negative-pressure valve.
A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics
Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics
Classification: AT09-016A
Reference: NTB10-003A
Date: February 11, 2010
5 SPEED A/T DTC DIAGNOSES FOR P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759,
P1764, P1769, P1774
This bulletin has been amended. Additional DTCs were applied. Discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2003 - 2010 Nissan vehicles with 5-Speed A/T
APPLIED TRANSMISSION: RE5R05A ONLY
SERVICE INFORMATION
If one or more DTCs listed below are found stored in Self Diagnosis, use the REPAIR FLOW
CHART shown below to assist in diagnosis.
^ DTCs: P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
If DTC(s) not listed above is/are found stored in Self Diagnosis, this bulletin does not apply. Refer
to ASIST and the appropriate Service Manual for diagnostic procedure(s) as needed.
Drivetrain - Driveshaft U-Joint Noise/Vibration
Drive/Propeller Shaft: Customer Interest Drivetrain - Driveshaft U-Joint Noise/Vibration
Classification: PD10-001
Reference: NTB10-052
Date: April 8, 2010
NOISE AND/OR VIBRATION FROM PROPELLER SHAFT U-JOINT (JOURNAL/JOURNAL
BEARINGS)
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) 2004-2010 Titan (A60) 2005-2010 Frontier (D40)
2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2010 Xterra (N50)
IF YOU CONFIRM
The propeller shaft u-joint (journal/journal bearings) is the source of noise and/or vibration on an
Applied Vehicle.
Diagnose by evaluating the u-joint with the propeller shaft removed. If the u-joint axial play or flex
effort exceed the specifications in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM), or if a "ratchety" feel is
exhibited during rotation, the u-joint (journal/journal bearings) should be replaced.
ACTION
Replace the u-joint (journal/journal bearings).
^ Refer to the applicable ESM for removal and installation instructions.
NOTE:
Do not replace the entire propeller shaft assembly if u-joint (journal/journal bearings) replacement
can resolve the incident, should it occur.
PARTS INFORMATION
U-joint (journal/journal bearings) kits are now available for all Applied Vehicles. Refer to the
electronic parts catalog (FAST or equivalent) to locate the appropriate parts needed for this repair.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the indicated FRT and
appropriate coding for repairs preformed.
Page 653
Page 194
Attachment General Procedure
Page 2649
Variable Valve Timing Actuator Position Sensor: Service and Repair Intake Valve Timing Control
Position Sensor (RH)
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL
Intake Valve Timing Control Position Sensor (RH)
REMOVAL 1. Remove engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Engine Cover.
2. Disconnect intake valve timing control position sensor connector (RH).
3. Remove intake valve timing control position sensor (RH) (1) from Intake valve timing control
solenoid valve cover (RH) (3).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Replace the O-ring (2) of the intake valve timing control position sensor with a new one,
then lubricate O-ring with engine oil before installing.
Intake valve timing control position sensor bolt : 9.6 N.m (0.98 kg-m, 85 in-lb)
Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures
Technical Service Bulletin # 00-052C Date: 040416
Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures
Classification: EC00-007C
Reference: NTB00-052C
Date: April 16, 2004
ECM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES
ATTENTION:
THIS BULLETIN HAS BEEN REVISED.
^ The Service Procedures for replacing an ECM on an Applied vehicle were revised.
^ Please use this bulletin NTB00-052c for complete information.
^ Discard all previously distributed copies of NTB00-052.
APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All 2000 and later 1999 Frontier (D22) 1999 Quest (V41) 1999 Pathfinder
(R50) from VIN JN8AR07**XW350101
IF YOU CONFIRM:
The Electronic Control Module (ECM) needs to be replaced on a 2000 MY and later vehicle, or an
Applied 1999 MY vehicle (see above).
ACTIONS:
^ Re-register all customer keys if the vehicle has ECM based NATS (see step 1).
^ Check ASIST for any new updates for the new ECM you're installing (see steps 2 - 4).
^ Perform the "ACCELERATOR PEDAL & THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING"
procedure (see step 5).
^ After installing the new ECM, perform the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARNING" procedure (when
applicable) using CONSULT-II. See step 6.
^ For 2005 and later vehicles, enter the vehicle VIN into the new ECM (see step 7).
CAUTION:
Failure to perform all the work steps in the specified order can cause poor engine running, MIL
'ON', or vehicle emission test rejection.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
Page 3868
Vacuum Brake Booster: Testing and Inspection
BRAKE BOOSTER
Inspection
OPERATION With engine stopped, change vacuum to atmospheric pressure by depressing brake
pedal several times. Then with brake pedal fully depressed, start engine and when vacuum
pressure reaches the standard, make sure that clearance between brake pedal and floor panel
decreases.
AIR TIGHT
- Run engine at idle for approximately 1 minute, and stop it after applying vacuum to booster.
Depress brake pedal normally to change vacuum to atmospheric pressure. Make sure that distance
at intervals of 5 seconds between brake pedal and floor panel gradually increases.
- Depress brake pedal while engine is running, and stop engine with pedal depressed. The pedal
stroke should not change after holding pedal down for 30 seconds.
Specifications
Valve Clearance: Specifications
Valve Clearance
Locations
Page 5544
Without CONSULT-III Check voltage between ECM terminal 101 and ground under the following
conditions.
OK or NG OK - INSPECTION END NG - GO TO 7. 3. CHECK ASCD BRAKE SWITCH POWER
SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector. 3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check voltage between ASCD brake switch terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT-III or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG OK - GO TO 5. NG - GO TO 4. 4. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Page 2530
20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer.
CAUTION: During data transfer:
^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections.
^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF.
^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal.
NOTE:
^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or
^ The Error in Figure 9A displays.
a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged.
b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned
OFF (see step 3 and 4).
c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III
screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1).
Part 2
Page 2836
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair
ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM
Removal and Installation
ADJUSTABLE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY Adjustable Accelerator Pedal
CAUTION: Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal adjusting mechanism.
- Before removal and installation, the accelerator and brake pedals must be in the front most
position.
This is to align the base position of the accelerator and brake pedals. Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly.
- Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket.
- Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling.
- Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water.
Removal 1. Move the accelerator and brake pedals to the frontmost position. 2. Turn the ignition
switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal. 3. Disconnect the adjustable brake pedal
cable from the adjustable brake pedal. Unlock, then pull the adjustable brake pedal cable to disconnect it from the adjustable brake pedal.
Page 552
Page 4168
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Electrical Diagrams
POWER SOCKET
Wiring Diagram
Power Socket - Part 1
A/C - TXV (Thermal Expansion Valve) Replacement
Expansion Valve: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - TXV (Thermal Expansion Valve) Replacement
Classification: HA10-004
Reference: NTB10-044
Date: March 17, 2010
A/C TXV (THERMAL EXPANSION VALVE) REPLACEMENT
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2002-2010 Altima (L31, L32) 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) 2005-2010 Frontier
(D40) 2004-2010 Maxima (A34, A35) 2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2004-2009 Quest (V42)
2004-2010 Titan (A60) 2005-2010 Xterra (N50)
SERVICE INFORMATION
The A/C TXV (thermal expansion valve) is available separately as a service part for the Applied
Vehicles.
If the A/C TXV needs to be replaced for any reason AND the evaporator is operating normally:
^ Replace the TXV only. Do not replace the heater and cooling unit assembly or the evaporator
assembly.
^ Refer to the applicable Electronic Service Manual for TXV removal and installation instructions.
Page 3284
Switch: Service and Repair
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK POSITION SWITCH
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
Differential Lock Position Switch
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage spline, companion flange and front oil seal when removing propeller
shaft.
- Before removing rear final drive assembly or rear axle assembly, disconnect ABS sensor harness
connector from the assembly and move it away from rear final drive assembly/rear axle assembly
area. Failure to do so may result in sensor wires being damaged and sensor becoming inoperative.
1. Drain rear final drive gear oil. Refer to See: Fluid - Differential/Service and Repair/Rear Final
Drive M226 (ELD). 2. Remove rear propeller shaft. Refer to See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings
and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Propeller Shaft 3S1410.
3. Remove both RH and LH axle shafts. Refer to See: Drive Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft
Assembly/Service and Repair/Rear Axle Shaft. 4. Remove the carrier cover. Refer to See:
Differential Cover/Service and Repair/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD).
5. Remove differential lock solenoid connector (B) bolt and disconnect differential lock position
connector (A). Arrow Indicates Front
6. For installation, apply a paint matching mark on one side of side bearing cap.
CAUTION: Side bearing caps are line-board for initial assembly. The matching marks are used to install them
in their original positions.
- For matching mark, use paint. Do not damage side bearing cap.
7. Remove adjuster lock plates.
Body - Front Door Window Motor Limit Switch Resetting
Front Door Window Motor: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front Door Window Motor Limit
Switch Resetting
EL08-031A
Reference: NTB09-027A
Date: July 15, 2010
FRONT WINDOW REGULATOR MOTOR LIMIT SWITCH RESET
This bulletin has been amended. The APPLIED VEHICLES section has been revised. No other
changes have been made. Please discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2006-2010 Armada (TA60) 2006-2009 Quest (V42) 2006-2010 Titan (A60)
SERVICE INFORMATION
If any of the following work has been done:
^ removal and installation of the regulator assembly
^ removal and installation of the motor from the regulator
^ installation of a new glass window
^ installation of a new glass run
....check the label on the window motor to see if the part number is one of the following:
^ 80730-ZT01A ^ 80731-ZT01A ^ 80730-ZM70B ^ 80731-ZM70B
NOTE:
The label can be checked with the motor in the vehicle by using a mirror.
If the window motor is listed above, the Limit Switch will need to be reset using the procedure in
this bulletin.
NOTE:
Some of the window motors with these part numbers may appear to have a reset switch, but it will
not reset the Limit Switch.
SETTING OF LIMIT SWITCH
1. Connect the door harness to the power window motor, and rotate the motor more than 5 turns in
the glass raising (up) direction.
Page 268
Transfer Case TX15B
Page 225
31. Select Diagnosis
32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%.
When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of
the screen will light (become enabled).
33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon.
Page 2161
34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the
"Duplication Test" icon.
35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase.
36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18).
37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased.
^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs.
^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed.
Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below.
38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF.
39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch
(M/T) pedal;
Electrical Units Location
Body Control Module: Locations Electrical Units Location
Page 318
Page 2120
Page 1739
11. Enter the VIN into C-III two times (see Figure 7).
^ Touch the C-III screen in the "VIN box" before typing.
^ Make sure to use all CAPITAL LETTERS.
^ Use the VIN from the vehicle you are working on.
12. Select Start
13. Turn the ignition OFF, and wait 10 seconds.
14. After waiting 10 seconds, turn the ignition ON.
A/T Shift Lock System
Page 1075
Fuse: Locations Fuse, Fusible Link And Relay Box
FUSE, FUSIBLE LINK AND RELAY BOX
Terminal Arrangement
FUSE AND FUSIBLE LINK BOX
FUSE AND RELAY BOX
Specifications
Fuel Pressure: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Fuel Pressure
Locations
Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-037A Date: 100519
Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement
Reference: NTB10-037A
Date: May 19, 2010
VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2005 - 2009 ARMADA AND TITAN FUEL GAUGE
INACCURACY
This bulletin has been amended. Additions were made to the Parts Information. Please discard
previous versions of this bulletin.
CAMPAIGN ID #: R1010
NHTSA #: 10V-074
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2009 Armada (TA60) 2005 - 2009 Titan (A60)
Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility.
INTRODUCTION
Nissan is conducting a voluntary recall campaign on certain MY2005-2009 Armada and Titan
vehicles to address a potential fuel gauge inaccuracy. Specifically, the issue can cause the fuel
gauge to show that the vehicle still has some fuel, typically about one quarter tank, when the fuel
tank is actually empty. To remedy this potential condition, Nissan is conducting this Voluntary
Safety Recall Campaign to replace the fuel level sending unit with a new one at no charge for parts
or labor.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number R1010 to this campaign. This number must appear on
all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle
falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service
department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient
(tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in
dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to
do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While
federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used
vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed.
Body - Front Door Window Motor Limit Switch Resetting
Front Door Window Motor: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front Door Window Motor Limit
Switch Resetting
EL08-031A
Reference: NTB09-027A
Date: July 15, 2010
FRONT WINDOW REGULATOR MOTOR LIMIT SWITCH RESET
This bulletin has been amended. The APPLIED VEHICLES section has been revised. No other
changes have been made. Please discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2006-2010 Armada (TA60) 2006-2009 Quest (V42) 2006-2010 Titan (A60)
SERVICE INFORMATION
If any of the following work has been done:
^ removal and installation of the regulator assembly
^ removal and installation of the motor from the regulator
^ installation of a new glass window
^ installation of a new glass run
....check the label on the window motor to see if the part number is one of the following:
^ 80730-ZT01A ^ 80731-ZT01A ^ 80730-ZM70B ^ 80731-ZM70B
NOTE:
The label can be checked with the motor in the vehicle by using a mirror.
If the window motor is listed above, the Limit Switch will need to be reset using the procedure in
this bulletin.
NOTE:
Some of the window motors with these part numbers may appear to have a reset switch, but it will
not reset the Limit Switch.
SETTING OF LIMIT SWITCH
1. Connect the door harness to the power window motor, and rotate the motor more than 5 turns in
the glass raising (up) direction.
Page 1894
Suspension - Rear Leaf Spring Clicking Noises
Shackle: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Rear Leaf Spring Clicking Noises
Classification: RA09-006
Reference: NTB10-011
Date: January 20, 2010
TITAN; LEAF SPRING NOISE
APPLIED VEHICLE: 2004-2009 Titan (A60)
APPLIED VINS: 2004-2008 All 2009 vehicles built before 1N6(*)A0(***)9N 319522
APPLIED DATES: 2004-2008 All 2009 vehicles built before August 26, 2009
IF YOU CONFIRM:
A clicking noise is coming from one or both leaf springs.
ACTION: Inspect the anti-windup clip bolts and bushings.
^ If replacement is determined as necessary, use the parts listed in PARTS INFORMATION in this
bulletin.
^ For repair procedure, refer to SERVICE PROCEDURE in this bulletin.
^ Do not replace the leaf spring assembly when anti-windup bolt and bushing replacement will
resolve the incident, if it should occur.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line claim using the claims coding shown.
PARTS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Page 3582
Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation System Description
METER SYSTEM
A/T OIL TEMPERATURE GAUGE : System Description
The A/T oil temperature gauge indicates the A/T fluid temperature. The TCM (transmission control
module) provides an A/T fluid temperature signal to combination meter via CAN communication
lines.
Power Window Main Switch
Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Power Window Main Switch
POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the power window main switch assembly from the front door finisher LH.
Refer to See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and
Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair.
2. Remove the screws from the power window main switch (1) using suitable tool (A). Then release
the power window main switch (1) from the
finisher (2).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 3916
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair VDC/TCS/ABS
Wheel Sensors
WHEEL SENSORS
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel sensor bolt. When removing the front wheel sensor, first remove the disc rotor to gain access to the front wheel
sensor bolt. Refer to See: Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Front.
2. Pull out the sensor, being careful to turn it as little as possible.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth.
- Do not pull on the sensor harness.
3. Disconnect wheel sensor harness electrical connector, then remove harness from attaching
points.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Inspect wheel sensor O-ring, replace sensor assembly if damaged.
- Clean wheel sensor hole and mounting surface with brake cleaner and a lint-free shop rag. Be
careful that dirt and debris do not enter the axle.
- Apply a coat of suitable grease to the wheel sensor O-ring and mounting hole.
Sensor Rotor
SENSOR ROTOR
Removal and Installation
FRONT WHEEL SENSOR ROTOR
Removal and Installation The front wheel sensor rotor is built into the front wheel hub and bearing
assembly and is not removable. If damaged, replace the front wheel hub and bearing assembly.
Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Wheel Hub/Service and Repair.
REAR WHEEL SENSOR ROTOR
Page 6043
Page 1836
Page 3085
^ If there is not a match, this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to ASIST for further
diagnostic information.
3. If this bulletin applies and you have performed ECM reprogramming, the screen in Figure 2
appears when reprogramming is complete.
4. Make sure to erase DTCs from all Systems.
NOTE:
During the reprogramming, DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all
systems.
5. Test drive the vehicle and make sure it operates correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF.
^ If the Check Engine light comes ON, go back to ASIST for further diagnostic information. Refer to
the applicable Electronic Service Manual as
needed.
^ Diagnosis and repairs beyond the ECM reprogramming are not covered by this bulletin.
Page 1375
OIL PUMP
REGULATOR VALVE
ENGINE OIL CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE)
Page 2740
Fuel Injector: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE
Removal and Installation
CAUTION: Do not remove or disassemble parts unless instructed as shown.
REMOVAL 1. Remove engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Engine Cover.
2. Release fuel pressure. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/Fuel Pressure Check. 3. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 4. Disconnect fuel
injector harness connectors. 5. Disconnect fuel hose assembly from fuel tube (RH bank and LH
bank).
CAUTION: While hoses are disconnected, plug them to prevent fuel from draining.
- Do not separate fuel connector and fuel hose.
6. Remove fuel injectors with fuel tube assembly. 7. Remove fuel injector from fuel tube.
a. Spread open to remove clip. b. Remove fuel injector from the fuel tube by pulling straight out.
CAUTION: Be careful with remaining fuel that may leak out from fuel tube.
- Do not damage injector nozzles during removal.
- Do not bump or drop fuel injectors.
- Do not disassemble fuel injectors.
8. Remove fuel damper from each fuel tube.
INSTALLATION 1. Install fuel damper to each fuel tube.
Page 2352
Is the measurement value within the specification? YES - GO TO 3. NO - Repair the steering angle
sensor branch line. 3. CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check the power
supply and the ground circuit of the steering angle sensor. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction
Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/VDC/TCS/ABS.
Is the inspection result normal? YES (Present error) - Replace the steering angle sensor. Refer to
See: Sensors and Switches/Sensors and Switches - Steering and Suspension/Sensors and
Switches - Steering/Steering Angle Sensor/Service and Repair. YES (Past error) - Error was
detected in the steering angle sensor branch line. NO - Repair the power supply and the ground
circuit.
4WD Branch Line Circuit
4WD BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure
1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the battery cable from the
negative terminal. 3. Check the terminals and connectors of the transfer control unit for damage,
bend and loose connection (unit side and connector side). Is the inspection result normal? YES GO TO 2. NO - Repair the terminal and connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1.
Disconnect the connector of transfer control unit. 2. Check the resistance between the transfer
control unit harness connector terminals.
Is the measurement value within the specification? YES - GO TO 3. NO - Repair the transfer
control unit branch line. 3. CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check the power
supply and the ground circuit of the transfer control unit. Refer to See: Testing and
Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/P Code Charts/P1801. Is
the inspection result normal? YES (Present error) - Replace the transfer control unit. Refer to See:
Transmission Control Systems/Relays and Modules - Transmission and Drivetrain/Relays and
Modules - Transfer Case/Control Module/Service and Repair. YES (Past error) - Error was
detected in the transfer control unit branch line. NO - Repair the power supply and the ground
circuit.
ABS Branch Line Circuit
ABS BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure
1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the battery cable from the
negative terminal. 3. Check the terminals and connectors of the ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit) for damage, bend and loose connection (unit side and
connector side).
Is the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO 2. NO - Repair the terminal and connector.
Page 4133
CONSULT-III Function (IPDM E/R)
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R)
CONSULT - III Function (IPDM E/R)
APPLICATION ITEM CONSULT-III performs the following functions via CAN communication with
IPDM E/R.
SELF DIAGNOSTIC Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures.
DATA MONITOR
Locations
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Locations
Page 2442
Page 3077
B. Compare the Part Number you wrote down to the numbers in the Current ECM Part Number
column in Table A , or Table B above.
^ If there is a match, this bulletin applies. Continue with the reprogramming procedure.
NOTE:
If there are two lines (two reprogramming options) on your C-III screen, use the one that does not
have the message "Caution! Use ONLY with NTBXX-XXX".
^ If there is not a match, this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to ASIST for further
diagnostic information.
3. If this bulletin applies and you have performed ECM reprogramming, the screen in Figure 2
appears when reprogramming is complete.
4. Make sure to erase DTCs from all systems.
NOTE:
During reprogramming, DTCs will set in several systems and must be erased.
5. Test drive the vehicle and make sure it operates correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF.
^ If the Check Engine light comes ON, go back to ASIST for further diagnostic information. Refer to
the applicable Electronic Service Manual as
needed.
^ Diagnosis and repairs beyond ECM reprogramming are not covered by this bulletin.
Page 1709
Page 1200
2. Install the camshaft sprocket to the camshaft. 3. Measure the camshaft sprocket runout.
Runout : Less than 0.15 mm (0.0059 in)
- If measurement exceeds the specification, replace the camshaft sprocket.
Valve Lifter Check if the surface of the valve lifter has any wear or cracks.
- If any damage is found, replace the valve lifter.
- Select the thickness of the head so that the valve clearance is within the standard when replacing.
Refer to .
Valve Lifter Clearance
Valve Lifter Diameter Measure the diameter of the valve lifter.
Standard : 33.977 - 33.987 mm (1.3377 - 1.3381 in)
Valve Lifter Hole Diameter Measure the diameter of the valve lifter hole of the cylinder head, using suitable tool.
Page 5547
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Testing and Inspection Component Inspection
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Component Inspection
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness
connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ASCD brake switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following
conditions.
If NG, adjust ASCD brake switch installation, refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Brake
Pedal Assy/Testing and Inspection/Standard Pedal, and perform step 3 again.
STOP LAMP SWITCH 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness
connector.
3. Check harness continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following
conditions.
If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Brake Pedal
Assy/Testing and Inspection/Standard Pedal, and perform step 3 again.
Page 827
2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test.
3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern.
^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60
mph.
^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel
position during the road test.
NOTE:
^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have
been resolved.
^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then
diagnosis cannot be performed.
4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center"
below.
5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel
Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete.
6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step.
Other Service Information
Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel
spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road
(see example in Figure 1).
If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the
normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain
water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place.
Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the
crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction.
Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully
counteract the effect of a highly crowned road.
Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that
slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the
left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane.
This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although
the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be.
Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition
Locations
Page 5099
Remote Control Module: Locations Hands-Free Phone System
Page 4827
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
Removal and Installation for Refrigerant Pressure Sensor
REMOVAL 1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Refrigeration System .
2. Disconnect the refrigerant pressure sensor electrical connector and remove the refrigerant
pressure sensor from the condenser.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the condenser fins.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Description and
Operation/Refrigeration System/Component .
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the condenser fins.
- Replace the O-ring of the refrigerant pressure sensor with a new one, then apply compressor oil
to it when installing it.
- After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
ABLS/ABS
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair ABLS/ABS
Wheel Sensors
WHEEL SENSORS
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel sensor bolt. When removing the front wheel sensor, first remove the disc rotor to gain access to the front wheel
sensor bolt. Refer to See: Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Front.
2. Pull out the sensor, being careful to turn it as little as possible.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth.
- Do not pull on the sensor harness.
3. Disconnect wheel sensor harness electrical connector, then remove harness from attaching
points.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Inspect wheel sensor O-ring, replace sensor assembly if damaged.
- Clean wheel sensor hole and mounting surface with brake cleaner and a lint-free shop rag. Be
careful that dirt and debris do not enter the axle.
- Apply a coat of suitable grease to the wheel sensor O-ring and mounting hole.
Sensor Rotor
SENSOR ROTOR
Removal and Installation
FRONT WHEEL SENSOR ROTOR
Removal and Installation The front wheel sensor rotor is built into the front wheel hub and bearing
assembly and is not removable. If damaged, replace the front wheel hub and bearing assembly.
Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Wheel Hub/Service and Repair.
REAR WHEEL SENSOR ROTOR
Page 950
REMOVAL
WARNING: Follow the "General Precautions" before working on the fuel system. Refer to See:
Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Service Precautions . 1. Remove the fuel
filler cap to release the pressure from inside the fuel tank.
Page 6177
- Inform the customer that the vehicle should remain stationary until the urethane adhesive has
completely cured (preferably 24 hours). Curing time varies with temperature and humidity.
WARNING: Keep heat and open flames away as primers and adhesive are flammable.
- The materials contained in the kit are harmful if swallowed, and may irritate skin and eyes. Avoid
contact with the skin and eyes.
- Use in an open, well ventilated location. Avoid breathing the vapors. They can be harmful if
inhaled.
If affected by vapor inhalation, immediately move to an area with fresh air. Driving the vehicle before the urethane adhesive has completely cured may affect the performance
of the glass in case of an accident.
CAUTION: Do not use an adhesive which is past its usable term. Shelf life of this product is limited to six
months after the date of manufacture. Carefully adhere to the expiration or manufacture date
printed on the box.
- Keep primers and adhesive in a cool, dry place. Ideally, they should be stored in a refrigerator.
- Do not leave primers or adhesive cartridge unattended with their caps open or off.
- The vehicle should not be driven for at least 24 hours or until the urethane adhesive has
completely cured. Curing time varies depending on temperature and humidity. The curing time will
increase under lower temperatures and lower humidities.
Page 2158
In the Administrator window select My Computer.
In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C).
In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder.
In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder.
In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder.
When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time.
Select and print the file/screen image that you want.
NOTE:
During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems.
Erase DTCs from all systems
22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen).
23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear.
24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.)
25. Select Connect.
26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
Page 3652
- After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), perform the following.
- Refill brake system with new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system. Refer to See: Brake
Bleeding/Service and Repair.
- Adjust the steering angle sensor. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing Control Unit/Description See: Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing Control Unit/Special
Repair Requirement See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Adjustment Of
Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position/Description See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Adjustment Of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position/Special Repair Requirement.
- Calibrate the decel G sensor. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Inspection And Adjustment/Special Repair Requirement.
Page 3902
ERROR: undefined
OFFENDING COMMAND: f‘~
STACK:
Page 5133
Page 3022
Service and Repair
Parking Assist Control Module: Service and Repair
SONAR CONTROL UNIT
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear panel. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim
Panel/Service and Repair. 2. For king cab models only, pull up the carpet to gain access to the
sonar control unit. Sonar control unit (king cab) (1)
- Sonar control unit (crew cab) (2)
3. Disconnect the sonar control unit connector. 4. Remove the two bolts and remove the sonar
control unit.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 2436
Page 2325
Diagnosis Sheet (CAN Type 2)
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
Diagnosis Sheet (CAN Type 2)
Engine - Drive Belt Noise Diagnosis
Drive Belt: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Drive Belt Noise Diagnosis
Classification: EM09-013
Reference: NTB10-002
Date: January 12, 2010
DRIVE BELT SYSTEM NOISE DIAGNOSIS
APPLIED VEHICLES All Nissan
IF YOU CONFIRM
There is noise coming from the drive belt(s), or drive belt pulley(s),
ACTION
Use the flow chart in this bulletin to help diagnose and identify the source / cause of the noise.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the indicated claims coding for any
repairs performed.
Page 2394
Page 700
Page 2612
9. Use compressed air to remove any metal debris from inside the boss threads.
CAUTION:
DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may
cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders.
10. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it.
11. Spray the boss threads with rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds.
12. Run a thread chaser through the boss to clean the threads.
^ Use Kent Moore part number J-43897-18 or J43897-12.
Page 2509
Page 1712
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Connect C-III to the vehicle to begin the reprogramming procedure.
^ If you are not familiar with the reprogramming procedure. Refer to "CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM
Reprogramming" general procedure.
Caution
2. When you get to the ECM Reprogramming screen shown in Figure 1, confirm this bulletin
applies as follows:
A. On your C-III screen, look at the Part Number column (see Figure 1).
Page 1385
3. Align center to insert quick connector straight into fuel tube. -
Insert until the paint mark for engagement identification (white) goes completely inside quick
connector so that you cannot see it from the straight side of the connected part. Use a mirror to
check this where it is not possible to view directly from the straight side, such as quick connector
on vehicle side.
- Insert fuel tube into quick connector until top spool is completely inside quick connector, and 2nd
level spool exposes right below quick connector on engine side.
CAUTION: Hold "A" position in illustration when inserting fuel tube into quick connector.
Carefully align center to avoid inclined insertion to prevent damage to O-ring inside quick
connector.
- Insert until you hear a "click" sound and actually feel the engagement.
- To avoid mis-identification of engagement with a similar sound, be sure to perform the next step.
4. Pull quick connector by hand holding "A" position. Make sure it is completely engaged
(connected) so that it does not come out from fuel tube.
NOTE: Recommended pulling force is 50 N (5.1 kg, 11.2 lb).
5. Install the quick connector cap on the quick connector joint (on engine side only). 6. Install the
fuel hose and tube to hose clamps. 7. Refill the engine coolant. Refer to See: Cooling
System/Coolant/Service and Repair.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION After installing fuel tubes, make sure there is no fuel leakage at connections in the following steps.
- Apply fuel pressure to fuel lines by turning ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). Then check
for fuel leaks at connections.
- Start the engine and rev it up and check for fuel leaks at the connections.
- Perform procedures for "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" after finishing repairs. Refer to
See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning.
- If electric throttle control actuator is replaced, perform procedures for "Idle Air Volume Learning"
after finishing repairs. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Idle Air Volume Learning.
Page 4084
Physical Values
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Physical Values
PHYSICAL VALUES
Front
Brake Rotor/Disc: Service and Repair Front
FRONT DISC BRAKE
Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Rotor
WARNING: Clean dust on caliper and brake pad with a vacuum dust collector to minimize the
hazard of air borne particles or other materials.
CAUTION: While removing cylinder body, do not depress brake pedal because piston will pop out.
- It is not necessary to remove bolts on torque member and brake hose except for disassembly or
replacement of caliper assembly. In this case, hang cylinder body with a wire so as not to stretch
brake hose.
- Do not damage piston boot.
- If any shim is subject to serious corrosion, replace it with a new one.
Always replace shim and shim cover as a set when replacing brake pads.
- Keep rotor free from brake fluid.
- Burnish the brake pads and disc rotor mutually contacting surfaces, after refinishing or replacing
rotors, after replacing pads, or if a soft pedal occurs at very low mileage.
REMOVAL 1. Remove front wheel and tires using power tool. 2. Fasten disc rotor using wheel nut.
3. Drain brake fluid. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Coolant/Service
and Repair. 4. Remove union bolt, and then disconnect brake hose from caliper assembly.
NOTE: Discard the copper washers, do not reuse.
5. Remove torque member bolts, and remove brake caliper assembly.
CAUTION: Do not drop brake pad.
6. Apply matching marks to disc rotor and wheel hub assembly as shown if the disc rotor is to be
reused, then remove disc rotor.
CAUTION: Put matching marks on wheel hub assembly and disc rotor if the disc rotor is to be
reused.
INSTALLATION 1. If reusing the disc rotor, use the matching marks to align disc rotor on the wheel
hub assembly as shown, then install disc rotor using a wheel nut to
Page 1115
Recommended tire inflating tools.
Aftermarket Tire Sealers
Aftermarket tire sealants and/or aerosol repair kits should not be used (refer to the vehicle's
Owner's Manual).
^ Some aftermarket tire sealers and/or aerosol repair kits contain chemicals and propellants that
can cause damage to TPMS sensors.
NOTE:
Damage caused by use of aftermarket tire sealants contrary to recommendations in the vehicle
Owner's Manual is not covered under the Nissan New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Page 119
IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) - Part 3
Page 3008
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Connect C-III to the vehicle to begin the reprogramming procedure.
^ If you are not familiar with the reprogramming procedure. Refer to "CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM
Reprogramming" general procedure.
Caution
2. When you get to the ECM Reprogramming screen shown in Figure 1, confirm this bulletin
applies as follows:
A. On your C-III screen, look at the Part Number column (see Figure 1).
Page 4685
Consult-III Checking System
Standardized Relay
STANDARDIZED RELAY
Description
NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided
into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays.
Service and Repair
Steering Angle Sensor: Service and Repair
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove spiral cable. Refer to See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Clockspring
Assembly / Spiral Cable/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the screws and remove the steering angle
sensor.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: After installation of spiral cable, adjust steering angle sensor. Refer to See: Brakes and
Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming
and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing Control Unit/Description See: Brakes and
Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming
and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing Control Unit/Special Repair Requirement See:
Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Adjustment Of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral
Position/Description See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Adjustment Of Steering Angle
Sensor Neutral Position/Special Repair Requirement.
Page 800
2. Position vehicle on the front turn plates as follows:
^ Stop vehicle just behind the turn plates.
^ Center the turn plates to the tires.
^ Move the vehicle onto the turn plates by turning/pushing the rear wheel.
DO NOT push/pull on the vehicle body.
Page 4386
- Steering gear
- Steering column
- Front suspension components
If found that they are worn or damaged, replace them with new ones.
Recall PC039 - Brake Pedal Inspection/Replacement
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-030B Date: 100816
Recall PC039 - Brake Pedal Inspection/Replacement
Reference: NTB10-030B
Date: August 16, 2010
VOLUNTARY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2008-2010 ARMADA & TITAN AND 2008-2009 QUEST
BRAKE PEDAL PIVOT PIN INSPECTION
The Claims Information in this bulletin has been amended. Please discard previous versions.
CAMPAIGN ID#: PC039
NHTSA# 10V-072
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2008-2010 Armada (TA60) 2008-2010 Titan (A60) 2008-2009 Quest (V42)
Check Service Comm to confirm campaign eligibility
INTRODUCTION
Nissan is conducting a Voluntary Recall Campaign on certain specific 2008 - 2010 Armada & Titan
and 2008 - 2009 Quest vehicles to inspect, and if necessary, replace the brake pedal. On a small
number of the potentially affected vehicles the brake pedal assembly may have been manufactured
out of specification.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number PC039 to this quality assurance inspection. This
number must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this
activity.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle
falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service
department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient
(tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in
dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to
do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
INSPECTION INSTRUCTIONS
1. Look under the dash to view the brake pedal pivot pin.
Page 2489
C. Scroll down and select [VIN REGISTRATION] on the "Select Work Item" screen. See Figure 10.
d. Press [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 11.
e. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 12.
Page 208
CAUTION
2. When you get to the ECM Reprogramming screen shown in Figure 1, confirm this bulletin
applies as follows.
A. On your C-III screen, look at the Part Number column (see Figure 1):
^ If this column is blank (no part number listed), this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to
ASIST for further diagnostic information.
^ If a Part Number is listed, write it on the Repair Order.
Locations
Page 4171
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service Precautions
POWER SOCKET
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
The Supplemental Restraint System such as "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER",
used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front
passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage
front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag
deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and
whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system
safely is included in the Restraint Systems Information.
WARNING: To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed
by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
- Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to
personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and
Air Bag Module, see the SRS Air Bag.
- Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed. SRS
wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.
Page 5957
Hazard Warning Switch: Service and Repair
HAZARD SWITCH
Removal and Installation
Removal 1. Remove cluster lid C. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Cluster LID D/Removal And Installation.
2. While pressing the tab, push out the hazard switch.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 2548
i. Once the entire VIN is entered (a second time), select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See
Figure 16.
j. Select [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen to complete the VIN registration process. See
Figure 17.
k. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Page 2629
Page 2471
16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5).
^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB,
diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing.
17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.)
Locations
Relay Box: Locations
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 1467
4. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
- Check fluid levels and add as needed if necessary.
- Start the engine and check for fluid leaks of any type.
- Stop engine and wait for 10 minutes.
- Check all fluid levels again.
- Check if steering wheel turns smoothly when it is turned several times fully to the left and right
lock positions.
TIMING CHAIN COVER
Page 4950
4. Remove one screw and seat cushion outer finisher.
5. Remove bolt and seat belt buckle.
6. Unclip harness attachment clips from seat pan to remove buckle assy. from seat.
Page 3378
Drive/Propeller Shaft: Specifications Propeller Shaft 2S1410
General Specification
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
General Specification
Propeller Shaft Runout
Propeller Shaft Joint Flex Effort
Journal Axial Play
Snap Ring
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Snap Ring
Page 3023
Page 1791
Page 1336
EM-8
Page 3431
Shift Indicator: Description and Operation Component Description
METER SYSTEM
SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR : Component Description
Service and Repair
Rear Door Window Glass: Service and Repair
REAR DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR
Rear Door Glass
REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to See: Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service
and Repair .
2. Operate the power window switch to raise/lower the door window until the glass bolts can be
seen. 3. Remove the inside seal. 4. Remove the glass bolts and the glass.
INSTALLATION
1. Install the glass from outside to ensure that it is in both the front and rear glass channels.
Tighten glass the bolts to the specified torque.
Glass bolts : 6.1 N.m (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb)
2. Install the inside seal. 3. Install the rear door finisher. Refer to See: Front Door/Front Door
Panel/Service and Repair.
FITTING INSPECTION Check that the glass is securely fit into the glass run groove.
- Lower the glass slightly [approximately 10 to 20 mm (0.39 to 0.79 in)], and check that the
clearance to the sash is parallel. If the clearance between the glass and sash is not parallel, loosen
the regulator bolt, guide rail bolts, and glass and carrier plate bolts to correct the glass position.
Locations
Page 4205
Power Distribution Module: Locations Relay Control System
RELAY CONTROL SYSTEM
Component Parts Location
Locations
Temperature Sensor (Gauge): Locations
METER SYSTEM
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE : Component Parts Location
Page 1866
Fuel Pump Relay: Locations Without Intelligent Key System
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Terminal Layout
TERMINAL LAYOUT
Page 5893
WARNING:
This repair MUST be done with the vehicle's full weight on the suspension.
EITHER:
Place the vehicle on a drive-on hoist or alignment rack to lift the vehicle.
OR
Leave all of the vehicle's weight on all four (4) tires, while parked (do not lift the vehicle).
DO NOT lift the vehicle in any amount. The suspension must support all of the vehicle's weight
during the whole repair procedure or the bushing will be under load and difficult to remove.
1. With the vehicle positioned as stated above, put the shift selector in "P" (PARK) position.
2. Set the parking brake.
3. Remove the bolt and bushing from the windup clip (clip).
4. Check the condition of the bolt's and clip's threads, and the bushing.
^ If both the bushing and bolt's threads are okay, reuse them.
^ If the bushing and / or bolt's threads are damaged, replace with all parts in the "Spring Assembly
Kit".
^ If the clip's threads are damaged, replace the leaf spring assembly.
5. Install the bolt (and bushing) with Permatex(R) Medium Strength Threadlocker BLUE or
equivalent thread locking material applied to the threads.
Torque bolt to 32 N.m (3.2 kg-m, 23 ft-lb).
Page 4484
Repair Overview
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Lower Link Inspection
1. Raise the vehicle.
2. Locate and write down the "Lot Number" stamped on the bottom side of the suspension lower
links.
^ Refer to the Lot Number Locations below.
^ Armada and Pathfinder: Inspect front and rear (all 4) lower links.
^ Frontier, Titan, and Xterra: Inspect both front lower links.
3. Compare the Lot Number of each lower link to the Lot Number examples below.
Page 1970
MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. -
The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Abbreviation List
ABBREVIATIONS
Abbreviation List
The following ABBREVIATIONS are used:
Page 3510
Fluid - Transfer Case: Fluid Type Specifications
Transfer Fluid Type
Genuine NISSAN Matic D ATF (Continental US and Alaska) or Canada NISSAN Automatic
Transmission Fluid Dexron III, Mercon or equivalent
Page 141
Locations
Variable Valve Timing Actuator Position Sensor: Locations
Service and Repair
Transfer Case Actuator: Service and Repair
TRANSFER CONTROL DEVICE
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Switch the 4WD shift switch to 2WD and set the transfer assembly to 2WD. 2.
Disconnect the transfer control device connector. 3. Remove the breather hose from the transfer
control device.
4. Remove the bolts and detach the transfer control device.
INSTALLATION 1. Install the new O-ring to the transfer control device.
CAUTION: Do not reuse O-ring.
- Apply petroleum jelly to O-ring.
2. Install the transfer control device.
a. Turn the control shift rod fully counterclockwise using a flat-bladed screwdriver, and then put a
mark on the control shift rod.
Page 1241
Piston Selection Table
NOTE: The piston is available together with piston pin as an assembly.
- The piston pin (piston pin bore) grade is provided only for the parts installed at the plant. For
service parts, no grades can be selected (only 0 grade is available).
HOW TO SELECT CONNECTING ROD BEARING
When New Connecting Rod and Crankshaft are Used 1. Apply the big end inside diameter grade
stamped on the connecting rod side face to the row in the "Connecting Rod Bearing Selection
Table".
2. Apply the pin diameter grade stamped on the crankshaft front side to the column in the
"Connecting Rod Bearing Selection Table".
3. Read the symbol at the cross point of the selected row and column in the "Connecting Rod
Bearing Selection Table". 4. Apply the symbol obtained to the "Connecting Rod Bearing Grade
Table" to select.
When Crankshaft and Connecting Rod are Reused 1. Measure dimensions of the big end inside
diameter of the connecting rod and diameter of the crankshaft pin individually. 2. Apply the
measured dimension to the "Connecting Rod Bearing Selection Table". 3. The following steps are
the same as in "When New Connecting Rod and Crankshaft are Used".
Connecting Rod Bearing Selection Table
Specifications
Exhaust Manifold: Specifications
Exhaust Manifold
Tighten the exhaust manifold nuts in the numerical order shown. Then recheck the torque of the
nuts both (A) and (B). - A: Exhaust manifold LH - B: Exhaust manifold RH - Arrow Indicates Front
Page 4750
When A/C switch or DEF switch is pressed, front air control inputs compressor ON signal to BCM.
BCM sends compressor ON signal to ECM and front air control, via CAN communication line. ECM
judges whether compressor can be turned ON, based on each sensor status (refrigerant pressure
sensor signal, throttle angle sensor, etc.). If it judges compressor can be turned ON, it sends
compressor ON signal to IPDM E/R, via CAN communication line. Upon receipt of compressor ON
signal from ECM, IPDM E/R turns air conditioner relay ON to operate compressor.
Locations
Page 2553
Page 5708
f. Use the new tie-wrap to secure all the wires to the black corrugated tubing (see Figure 6).
^ New tie-wrap is included with the new sender unit.
^ Make sure all wires are tied together (3 fuel level sending unit wires and 2 fuel pump wires).
^ Place the Tie-Wrap 90 mm (about 3.5 inches) from the top of the tubing.
^ Make sure the wires do not interfere with the movement of the float arm.
4. Carefully reinstall the Fuel Pump Assembly back into the vehicle in reverse of removal.
^ IMPORTANT: Use a new seal (O-Ring) when reinstalling the Fuel Pump Assembly.
^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed.
CAUTION:
DO NOT bend the Float Arm when reinstalling the Fuel Pump.
5. Confirm the Fuel Gauge operates properly.
Interior - Door Trim Panel(s) Discolored/Faded
Front Door Panel: By Symptom Interior - Door Trim Panel(s) Discolored/Faded
Classification: BT10-024
Reference: NTB10-095
Date: August 13, 2010
2004-2010 TITAN; DOOR TRIM PANEL DISCOLORED/FADED
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2010 Titan (A60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
The pull handle trim panel on a front or rear door is discolored/faded. See Figures 1 and 2.
ACTION
Clean the discolored/faded trim panel as instructed in the Service Procedure.
NOTE:
This condition is not "dirt" on the trim panel surface. This condition exists within the panel itself.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You
MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 1978
Knock Sensor: Locations
Locations
Page 3660
Page 2306
Create On-board Diagnosis Copy Sheet Display the trouble diagnosis result of CAN
communication with the on-board diagnosis function on the vehicle monitor, etc. Copy them on the
on-board diagnosis copy sheet.
NOTE: For some models, CAN communication diagnosis result is received from the vehicle monitor.
(CONSULT-III is not available.)
- For the details, refer to See: Diagnosis And Repair Work flow/Data Sheet.
Page 1359
c. Tighten the bolts in numerical order as shown.
2. Install the oil strainer to the oil pan (upper).
3. Install the oil pan (lower).
a. Apply liquid gasket thoroughly as shown.
Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type
Specifications.
b. Tighten the oil pan (lower) bolts in numerical order as shown.
4. Install the oil pan drain plug. 5. Install engine assembly. Refer to See: Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Assembly/Removal and Installation. Do not fill the engine oil for at least 30 minutes after oil pan is installed.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1. Check engine oil level and add engine oil if necessary.
Refer to See: Engine Oil/Testing and Inspection. 2. Start the engine, and check for leaks of engine
oil. 3. Stop engine and wait for 10 minutes. 4. Check engine oil level again.
Fuse Block - Junction Box (J/B)
Fuse Block: Diagrams Fuse Block - Junction Box (J/B)
FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)
Terminal Arrangement
Page 1769
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Disclaimer
Page 5113
1. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and
Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair -
Crew Cab or See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door
Panel/Service and Repair - King Cab.
2. Remove the three rear door speaker screws and remove the rear door speaker.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
REAR DOOR TWEETER
Removal 1. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and
Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair Crew Cab.
2. Remove the rear door tweeter screws and remove the rear door tweeter. 3. Disconnect the rear
door tweeter connector.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Intake Valve Timing Control Position Sensor (LH)
Variable Valve Timing Actuator Position Sensor: Service and Repair Intake Valve Timing Control
Position Sensor (LH)
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL
Intake Valve Timing Control Position Sensor (LH)
REMOVAL 1. Remove engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Engine Cover.
2. Remove air duct and resonator assembly. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Air
Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation.
3. Disconnect intake valve timing control position sensor connector (LH).
4. Remove intake valve timing control position sensor (LH) (1) from Intake valve timing control
solenoid valve cover (LH) (3).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Replace the O-ring (2) of the intake valve timing control position sensor with a new one,
then lubricate O-ring with engine oil before installing.
Intake valve timing control position sensor bolt : 9.6 N.m (0.98 kg-m, 85 in-lb)
Page 2499
Transfer Case TX15B
Locations
Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Locations
METER SYSTEM
A/T OIL TEMPERATURE GAUGE : Component Parts Location
Page 1565
Coolant: Service and Repair
ENGINE COOLANT
Changing Engine Coolant
WARNING: To avoid being scalded, never change the coolant when the engine is hot.
- Wrap a thick cloth around the cap to carefully remove the cap. First, turn the cap a quarter of a
turn to release any built-up pressure, then push down and turn the cap all the way to remove it.
DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT 1. Turn ignition switch ON and set temperature control lever all the
way to HOT position or the highest temperature position. Wait 10 seconds and
turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Remove the engine front undercover using power tool.
3. Open the radiator drain plug at the bottom of the radiator, and remove the radiator filler cap. This
is the only step required when partially draining
the cooling system (radiator only).
CAUTION: Do not to allow the coolant to contact the drive belts.
4. When draining all of the coolant in the system for engine removal or repair, it is necessary to
drain the cylinder block. Remove the RH cylinder block drain plug to drain the right bank and the oil
cooler hose to drain the left bank as shown.
5. Remove the reservoir tank to drain the engine coolant, then clean the reservoir tank before
installing it. 6. Check the drained coolant for contaminants such as rust, corrosion or discoloration.
If the coolant is contaminated, flush the engine cooling system. Refer to "Changing Engine
Coolant".
REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT 1. Close the radiator drain plug. Install the reservoir tank, cylinder
block drain plug, and the oil cooler hose, if removed for a total system drain or for
Page 2417
B. Compare the Part Number you wrote down to the numbers in the Current ECM Part Number
column in Table A , or Table B above.
^ If there is a match, this bulletin applies. Continue with the reprogramming procedure.
NOTE:
If there are two lines (two reprogramming options) on your C-III screen, use the one that does not
have the message "Caution! Use ONLY with NTBXX-XXX".
^ If there is not a match, this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to ASIST for further
diagnostic information.
3. If this bulletin applies and you have performed ECM reprogramming, the screen in Figure 2
appears when reprogramming is complete.
4. Make sure to erase DTCs from all systems.
NOTE:
During reprogramming, DTCs will set in several systems and must be erased.
5. Test drive the vehicle and make sure it operates correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF.
^ If the Check Engine light comes ON, go back to ASIST for further diagnostic information. Refer to
the applicable Electronic Service Manual as
needed.
^ Diagnosis and repairs beyond ECM reprogramming are not covered by this bulletin.
Page 984
Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications
Engine Coolant Type
Type .................................................................................................................................... Genuine
NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant or equivalent.
50% Antifreeze/Coolant 50% Distilled or Demineralized Water.
Page 1245
Main Bearings Grade Table (All Journals)
Page 4613
Recommended tire inflating tools.
Aftermarket Tire Sealers
Aftermarket tire sealants and/or aerosol repair kits should not be used (refer to the vehicle's
Owner's Manual).
^ Some aftermarket tire sealers and/or aerosol repair kits contain chemicals and propellants that
can cause damage to TPMS sensors.
NOTE:
Damage caused by use of aftermarket tire sealants contrary to recommendations in the vehicle
Owner's Manual is not covered under the Nissan New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Locations
Locations
Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations
Page 5040
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 4568
WARNING:
This repair MUST be done with the vehicle's full weight on the suspension.
EITHER:
Place the vehicle on a drive-on hoist or alignment rack to lift the vehicle.
OR
Leave all of the vehicle's weight on all four (4) tires, while parked (do not lift the vehicle).
DO NOT lift the vehicle in any amount. The suspension must support all of the vehicle's weight
during the whole repair procedure or the bushing will be under load and difficult to remove.
1. With the vehicle positioned as stated above, put the shift selector in "P" (PARK) position.
2. Set the parking brake.
3. Remove the bolt and bushing from the windup clip (clip).
4. Check the condition of the bolt's and clip's threads, and the bushing.
^ If both the bushing and bolt's threads are okay, reuse them.
^ If the bushing and / or bolt's threads are damaged, replace with all parts in the "Spring Assembly
Kit".
^ If the clip's threads are damaged, replace the leaf spring assembly.
5. Install the bolt (and bushing) with Permatex(R) Medium Strength Threadlocker BLUE or
equivalent thread locking material applied to the threads.
Torque bolt to 32 N.m (3.2 kg-m, 23 ft-lb).
Page 2735
Fuel Injector: Testing and Inspection Diagnosis Procedure
FUEL INJECTOR
Diagnosis Procedure
1. INSPECTION START Turn ignition switch to START. Is any cylinder ignited? Yes or No Yes GO TO 2. No - GO TO 3. 2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION With CONSULT-III 1. Start engine. 2.
Perform "POWER BALANCE" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode with CONSULT-III. 3. Make sure that each
circuit produces a momentary engine speed drop. Without CONSULT-III 1. Start engine.
2. Listen to each fuel injector operating sound. Clicking noise should be heard. OK or NG OK INSPECTION END NG - GO TO 3. 3. CHECK FUEL INJECTOR POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1.
Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect fuel injector harness connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
Page 1877
Ignition Relay: Locations Without Intelligent Key System
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Terminal Layout
TERMINAL LAYOUT
Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-009 Date: 100119
Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure
Classification: EM09-015
Reference: NTB10-009
Date: January 19, 2010
REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR SEIZED EXHAUST SENSOR
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan vehicles
SERVICE INFORMATION
If an exhaust sensor is seized in the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube, perform the procedure
described in this bulletin to remove the sensor and prevent unnecessary replacement of the
exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube.
In most cases this procedure is successful. This is because the threads of the exhaust sensors are
made of a softer material than the part they thread into on the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube.
NOTE:
The replacement of exhaust manifolds/catalysts/front tubes for stripped exhaust sensor threads
may not be considered a warrantable expense.
This procedure can be performed by two methods:
Method #1 - If the Sensor Can Be Easily Accessed
^ The procedure can be performed on the vehicle.
^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube will not have to be removed.
Method #2 - If the Sensor Cannot Be Easily Accessed
^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube must be removed from the vehicle.
^ The procedure will be performed with the part clamped in a vice.
Method #2 is described in this bulletin. Method #1 is the same as Method #2 except that it is
performed on the vehicle.
Service Procedure
Rust Penetrant
Recommended rust penetrants to be used in this procedure:
Page 6099
Should a customer note water in a lamp assembly, please use the above flow chart to determine if
the condition is normal or requires lamp replacement.
Page 1306
Engine Oil Pressure: Pressure, Vacuum and Temperature Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Standard and Limit
OIL PRESSURE
OIL PUMP
REGULATOR VALVE
ENGINE OIL CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE)
Page 323
Page 2036
- G: No. 6 cylinder
- H: No. 8 cylinder
- J: No. 1 cylinder
- K: No. 3 cylinder
- L: No. 5 cylinder
- M: No. 7 cylinder
11. If out of specifications, adjust as necessary.
ADJUSTMENT
NOTE: Perform adjustment depending on the selected head thickness of the valve lifter.
- The specified valve lifter thickness is the dimension at normal temperatures. Ignore dimensional
differences caused by temperature. Use the specifications for hot engine condition to adjust.
1. Remove the camshaft. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Camshaft, Lifters and
Push Rods/Camshaft/Service and Repair/Removal
And Installation.
2. Remove the valve lifters at the locations that are out of specification.
3. Measure the center thickness of the removed valve lifters using suitable tool. 4. Use the equation
below to calculate the valve lifter thickness for replacement. Valve lifter thickness calculation:
Thickness of replacement valve lifter = t1+ (C1 - C2) t1 = Thickness of removed valve lifter C1 =
Measured valve clearance C2= Standard valve clearance:
Diagram Information and Instructions
Ignition Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
Connector Symbols
HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS
Connector symbols
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the
direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector.
For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements,
"Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals
Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring
diagrams.
Sample/Wiring Diagram -Example-
Locations
Navigation Module: Locations
Page 5658
c. Remove the Fuel Temperature Sensor from the Plastic Retaining Clip.
d. Remove the wires from the Securing Tab.
e. Unplug the White Wire Connector at the top of the fuel pump.
^ DO NOT disturb the Black Wire Connector located next to the white Wire connector.
f. Carefully cut the tie-wrap securing the harnesses to the corrugated tubing.
CAUTION:
DO NOT damage the wires or the wire insulation when cutting the Tie-Wrap.
Locations
Page 5561
CONSULT-III Checking System
CONSULT-III CHECKING SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram
Page 3751
2. Apply Molykote M-77 grease to piston boots. Cover the piston ends with piston boots, and then
install cylinder side lip on piston boots securely
into the grooves on cylinder body.
CAUTION: Do not reuse piston boots.
3. Apply clean brake fluid to pistons, then install pistons into cylinder body and insert piston boot
side lip into groove of pistons as shown.
CAUTION: Press the pistons evenly to prevent damage to cylinder wall. 4. Insert into cylinder body
by hand and insert piston boot piston-side lip into piston groove.
CAUTION: Press pistons evenly and vary the pressing point to prevent cylinder inner wall from
being rubbed. 5. Install new sliding pins, bushing and sliding pin boots to torque member. 6. Install
cylinder body. Tighten sliding pin bolts to the specified torque.
Page 2246
Page 1753
CAUTION
4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF.
^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure.
^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF.
^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear
defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel
heater, etc.
CAUTION
5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running.
If the cooling fans are running:
a. Turn the ignition OFF.
b. Wait for the engine to cool.
c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF).
d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running.
6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer.
7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress"
message to clear.
Page 4709
Blower Motor Resistor: Service and Repair
BLOWER FAN RESISTOR
Removal and Installation
Front Blower Motor Resistor - Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
REMOVAL 1. Remove the glove box assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Lower Panel RH And Glove Box/Removal And
Installation.
2. Disconnect the front blower motor resistor electrical connector. 3. Remove the two screws and
remove the front blower motor resistor.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 1435
13. Loosen the camshaft sprocket bolts as shown and remove the camshaft sprocket.
- A: Camshaft holding location
CAUTION: To avoid interference between valves and pistons, do not turn crankshaft or camshaft
when timing chain is disconnected.
14. Repeat the same procedure to remove the RH timing chain and associated parts.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Check for cracks and any excessive wear at link plates. Replace
chain if necessary.
- In the same way as for the LH bank, inspect the timing chain and associated parts on the RH
bank.
INSTALLATION
Exploded View
Thermostat Housing: Service and Repair Exploded View
THERMOSTAT AND WATER PIPING
Exploded View
Page 4619
3. Apply an approved tire lubricant to the tire and wheel in the areas shown in Figures 1 and 2.
^ Tire lubricant is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process
Tire:
^ Apply lube to the inner bead only of both beads
^ Do not apply lube to the flange area (outer bead area)
NOTE:
Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs the tire may
become un-balanced.
Wheel:
^ Apply lube to the Safety Humps and Bead Seating area.
^ Do not apply lube to the flange area
4. Before inflating the tire:
^ If there are "match-mount" marks on the tire and rim, align the marks.
Page 3249
16. Disconnect TCM connectors.
CAUTION: Do not damage connectors.
17. Remove A/T assembly harness connector from control valve with TCM using suitable tool.
18. Disconnect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector
CAUTION: Do not damage connectors.
Installation
CAUTION: After completing installation, check A/T fluid leakage and fluid level. Refer to See: Fluid
- A/T/Service and Repair/Checking A/T Fluid. 1. Connect TCM connector and park/neutral position
switch connector.
Locations
Page 3808
3. Place a wooden block as shown, and blow air into union bolt hole to remove piston and piston
boot.
CAUTION: Do not get your fingers caught in piston.
4. Using a suitable tool, remove piston seal from cylinder body as shown.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage cylinder body inner wall.
CALIPER INSPECTION
Cylinder Body Check inside surface of cylinder body for score, rust wear, damage or foreign
materials. If any of the above conditions are observed, replace cylinder body. Minor damage from
rust or foreign materials may be eliminated by polishing surface with a fine emery paper. Replace
cylinder body if necessary.
CAUTION: Use new brake fluid to clean. Do not use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene.
Torque Member Check for wear, cracks, and damage. If damage or deformation is present, replace
the affected part.
Piston Check piston for score, rust, wear, damage or presence of foreign materials. Replace if any
of the above conditions are observed.
CAUTION: Piston sliding surface is plated, do not polish with emery paper even if rust of foreign materials are
stuck to sliding surface.
Sliding Pin Bolts and Sliding Pin Boots Make sure there is no wear, damage, or cracks in sliding
sleeve and sliding sleeve boots, and if there are, replace them.
ASSEMBLY
CAUTION: Do not use NISSAN Rubber Grease (KRE00 00010, KRE00 00010 01) when
assembling.
ABS
Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair ABS
ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY)
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to
See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 3. Drain the brake fluid.
Refer to See: Brake Fluid/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 4. Disconnect the
actuator harness connector from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
CAUTION: -
To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench to prevent the flare nuts
and brake tubes from being damaged.
- Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is
splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately.
5. Disconnect the brake tubes. 6. Remove the three bolts and remove the ABS actuator and
electric unit (control unit).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: To install, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench (commercial service tools).
- Always tighten brake tubes to specification when installing.
Page 3333
Axle Shaft Assembly: Specifications Wheel Bearing
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Wheel Bearing
Service and Repair
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair
Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery terminals and wait at least 3
minutes.
Do not use air tools or electric tools for servicing.
Always work from the side of air bag module. Do not work from the front of it.
Always place air bag module with pad side facing upward.
Do not cause impact to the air bag module by dropping etc. Replace the air bag module if it has
been dropped or sustained an impact.
After the work is completed, make sure no system malfunction is detected by air bag warning lamp.
In case a malfunction is detected by the air bag warning lamp, reset by the self-diagnosis function
and delete the memory by CONSULT-III.
If a malfunction is still detected after the above operation, perform self-diagnosis to repair
malfunctions. Refer to
Page 4207
Page 5056
Garage Door Opener Transmitter: Description and Operation
HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER
Component Description
Premium Without Navigation
Cellular Phone Microphone: Service and Repair Premium Without Navigation
MICROPHONE
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the front roof console finisher. Refer to XXXX.
2. Disconnect the Bluetooth microphone connector (A). 3. Detach the Bluetooth microphone (1)
from the front roof console finisher and remove the Bluetooth microphone (1).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Locations
Page 4217
Power Distribution Module: Electrical Diagrams
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Wiring Diagram
IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) - Part 1
Page 1413
Page 2319
5. Fill out the diagnosis sheet based on information from step 4.
a. The ABS warning lamp turned ON and speedometer did not move: Assume that a possible cause
is no communication between M&A; and
ABS. Draw a line between M&A; and ABS. (Line 5-a in the figure below).
b. The tachometer moved normally: Put check marks between ECM and M&A.; The circuit between
ECM and M&A; is functioning properly
(check marks 5-b in the figure below).
Suspension - Rear Leaf Spring Clicking Noises
Leaf Spring Bushing: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Rear Leaf Spring Clicking
Noises
Classification: RA09-006
Reference: NTB10-011
Date: January 20, 2010
TITAN; LEAF SPRING NOISE
APPLIED VEHICLE: 2004-2009 Titan (A60)
APPLIED VINS: 2004-2008 All 2009 vehicles built before 1N6(*)A0(***)9N 319522
APPLIED DATES: 2004-2008 All 2009 vehicles built before August 26, 2009
IF YOU CONFIRM:
A clicking noise is coming from one or both leaf springs.
ACTION: Inspect the anti-windup clip bolts and bushings.
^ If replacement is determined as necessary, use the parts listed in PARTS INFORMATION in this
bulletin.
^ For repair procedure, refer to SERVICE PROCEDURE in this bulletin.
^ Do not replace the leaf spring assembly when anti-windup bolt and bushing replacement will
resolve the incident, if it should occur.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line claim using the claims coding shown.
PARTS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Application and ID
Paint, Striping and Decals: Application and ID
BODY EXTERIOR PAINT COLOR
Body Exterior Paint Color
Page 4808
Use care not to damage the seats and interior trim panels when removing the heater and cooling
unit assembly with it attached to the steering member.
12. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly from the steering member.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Replace the O-rings of the low-pressure pipe and high-pressure pipe with new ones, then apply
compressor oil to them when installing them.
- After charging the refrigerant, check for leaks.
NOTE: Fill the engine cooling system with the specified coolant mixture. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Cooling System/Coolant/Service and Repair.
- Recharge the A/C system. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Refrigeration System.
Page 1133
3. Apply an approved tire lubricant to the tire and wheel in the areas shown in Figures 1 and 2.
^ Tire lubricant is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process
Tire:
^ Apply lube to the inner bead only of both beads
^ Do not apply lube to the flange area (outer bead area)
NOTE:
Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs the tire may
become un-balanced.
Wheel:
^ Apply lube to the Safety Humps and Bead Seating area.
^ Do not apply lube to the flange area
4. Before inflating the tire:
^ If there are "match-mount" marks on the tire and rim, align the marks.
Page 452
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair ABS
Wheel Sensors
WHEEL SENSORS
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel sensor bolt. When removing the front wheel sensor, first remove the disc rotor to gain access to the front wheel
sensor bolt. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake
Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Front.
2. Pull out the sensor, being careful to turn it as little as possible.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth.
- Do not pull on the sensor harness.
3. Disconnect wheel sensor harness electrical connector, then remove harness from attaching
points.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Inspect wheel sensor O-ring, replace sensor assembly if damaged.
- Clean wheel sensor hole and mounting surface with brake cleaner and a lint-free shop rag. Be
careful that dirt and debris do not enter the axle.
- Apply a coat of suitable grease to the wheel sensor O-ring and mounting hole.
Sensor Rotor
SENSOR ROTOR
Removal and Installation
FRONT WHEEL SENSOR ROTOR
Removal and Installation The front wheel sensor rotor is built into the front wheel hub and bearing
assembly and is not removable. If damaged, replace the front wheel hub and bearing assembly.
Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Wheel Hub/Service and Repair.
Page 3250
2. Install A/T assembly harness connector to control valve with TCM.
3. Connect TCM connector. 4. Install new O-ring in A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION: Do not reuse O-ring.
- Apply ATF to O-ring.
5. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket. 6. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (with
bracket) to control valve with TCM. Tighten A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 bolt to the specified
torque. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/Component.
Testing and Inspection
Circuit Breaker: Testing and Inspection
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
Circuit Breaker (PTC)
The PTC thermistor generates heat in response to current flow. The temperature (and resistance)
of the thermistor element varies with current flow. Excessive current flow will cause the element's
temperature to rise. When the temperature reaches a specified level, the electrical resistance will
rise sharply to reduce the circuit current. This reduced current flow will cause the element to cool
lowering the resistance accordingly. Once resistance falls to a specified level normal circuit current
flow is allowed to resume.
Page 4622
Print this page and keep it by your tire mounting equipment
Page 2723
Fuel Filter: Removal and Replacement
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
Removal and Installation
Short Wheel Base
Long Wheel Base
Locations
Exploded View
Fuel Injector: Service and Repair Exploded View
FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE
Exploded View
Page 1611
Temperature Sensor (Gauge): Description and Operation System Description
METER SYSTEM
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE : System Description
The engine coolant temperature gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature. The ECM
provides an engine coolant temperature signal to the combination meter via CAN communication
lines.
Page 5952
Fog/Driving Lamp: Service and Repair Removal And Installation
FRONT FOG LAMP
Removal and Installation
The fog lamp is a semi-sealed beam type which uses a replaceable halogen bulb.
CAUTION: Do not leave fog lamp assembly without bulb for a long period of time. Dust, moisture, smoke, etc.
entering the fog lamp body may affect the performance. Remove the bulb from the headlamp
assembly just before replacement bulb is installed.
- Grasp only the plastic base when handling the bulb. Never touch the glass envelope. Touching
the glass could significantly affect the bulb life and/or fog lamp performance.
Removal 1. Position the fender protector aside.
2. Disconnect electrical connector. 3. Remove nut and pull fog lamp out of front fascia.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 6075
Should a customer note water in a lamp assembly, please use the above flow chart to determine if
the condition is normal or requires lamp replacement.
Page 2324
Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/Premium With Navigation/Diagnosis System (Audio Unit)/Audio Unit.
Diagnosis Sheet (CAN Type 1)
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
Diagnosis Sheet (CAN Type 1)
Page 4298
Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal.
2. Remove IPDM E/R upper cover. 3. Release two clips and pull IPDM E/R up from case.
4. Disconnect IPDM E/R connectors and remove the IPDM E/R.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Locations
Capacity Specifications
Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications
Engine Oil Capacity
With filter ..............................................................................................................................................
.............................................. 6-7/8 U.S. qts (6.5 L)
Without filter .........................................................................................................................................
............................................... 6-1/2 U.S. qts (6.2 L)
Page 1815
20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer.
CAUTION: During data transfer:
^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections.
^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF.
^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal.
NOTE:
^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or
^ The Error in Figure 9A displays.
a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged.
b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned
OFF (see step 3 and 4).
c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III
screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1).
Part 2
Page 5576
Page 2541
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Disclaimer
Locations
Page 5720
10. Lower the fuel tank using a suitable lift jack and remove it from the vehicle to access the fuel
level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly. 11. Remove the lock ring using Tool as shown.
Tool number : - (J-46536)
12. Remove the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly. Remove and discard the fuel
level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly
O-ring.
CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm during removal.
- Avoid impacts such as dropping when handling the components.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. For installation, use a new fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly O-ring.
- Connect the quick connector as follows:
- Check the connection for any damage or foreign materials.
- Align the connector with the pipe, then insert the connector straight into the pipe until a click is
heard.
- After connecting the quick connector, make sure that the connection is secure by checking as
follows:
- Pull the tube and the connector to make sure they are securely connected.
- Visually inspect the connector to make sure the two retainer tabs are securely connected.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1. Turn the ignition switch ON but do not start engine, then
check the fuel pipes and hose connections for leaks while applying fuel pressure to the
system.
2. Start the engine and rev it above idle speed, then check that there are no fuel leaks at any of the
fuel pipe and hose connections.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Power Distribution Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
Connector Symbols
HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS
Connector symbols
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the
direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector.
For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements,
"Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals
Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring
diagrams.
Sample/Wiring Diagram -Example-
Page 2234
Service and Repair
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair
Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery terminals and wait at least 3
minutes.
Do not use air tools or electric tools for servicing.
Always work from the side of air bag module. Do not work from the front of it.
Always place air bag module with pad side facing upward.
Do not cause impact to the air bag module by dropping etc. Replace the air bag module if it has
been dropped or sustained an impact.
After the work is completed, make sure no system malfunction is detected by air bag warning lamp.
In case a malfunction is detected by the air bag warning lamp, reset by the self-diagnosis function
and delete the memory by CONSULT-III.
If a malfunction is still detected after the above operation, perform self-diagnosis to repair
malfunctions. Refer to
Testing and Inspection
Circuit Breaker: Testing and Inspection
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
Circuit Breaker (PTC)
The PTC thermistor generates heat in response to current flow. The temperature (and resistance)
of the thermistor element varies with current flow. Excessive current flow will cause the element's
temperature to rise. When the temperature reaches a specified level, the electrical resistance will
rise sharply to reduce the circuit current. This reduced current flow will cause the element to cool
lowering the resistance accordingly. Once resistance falls to a specified level normal circuit current
flow is allowed to resume.
Page 3782
Brake Rotor/Disc: Testing and Inspection Rear
REAR DISC BRAKE
DISC ROTOR : Inspection
VISUAL Check surface of disc rotor for uneven wear, cracks, and serious damage. Replace as
necessary.
RUNOUT 1. Attach disc rotor to wheel hub using wheel nuts (at two or more positions).
2. Inspect runout using dial gauge placed at 10 mm (0.39 in) inside disc edge.
Runout limit : Refer to See: Specifications/Rear Disc Brake (with it attached to the vehicle)
NOTE: Before measuring, make sure that wheel bearing axial end play is within the specification.
Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Wheel Hub/Testing and Inspection. 3. When runout
exceeds limit value, displace mounting positions of disc rotor by one hole. And then find a position
of the minimum value for runout. 4. If runout is outside the specified value after performing the
above operation, turn disc rotor using Tool.
Tool number : 38-PFM90.5 ( - )
THICKNESS Check the thickness of the disc rotor using a micrometer. Replace disc rotor if the
thickness is under the wear limit.
Specifications
Knock Sensor: Specifications
Knock Sensor Torque ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................... 21.1 Nm, 16 ft lb
Page 1603
NOTE: Lift A/C condenser up and forward to remove from radiator. 9. Remove A/T oil cooler bolts
and oil cooler from radiator and position aside.
10. Lift up and remove the radiator.
CAUTION: Do not damage or scratch air conditioner condenser and radiator core when removing.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Check for leaks of engine coolant. Refer to See: Coolant/Testing and Inspection.
- Start and warm up the engine. Visually check for leaks of the engine coolant and A/T fluid.
Specifications
Crankshaft Gear/Sprocket: Specifications
Crankshaft Gear/Sprocket
Page 116
Page 331
Specifications
Brake Fluid: Specifications
Brake Fluid Type
Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3
Power Window Main Switch
Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Power Window Main Switch
POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the power window main switch assembly from the front door finisher LH.
Refer to See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and
Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair.
2. Remove the screws from the power window main switch (1) using suitable tool (A). Then release
the power window main switch (1) from the
finisher (2).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 5477
7. Using a plastic pry tool, remove the switch knobs and switch plate.
8. Remove the four bolts securing the seat pan to the frame. See Figure 3.
Page 4382
Ride Height
Page 5092
Radio/Stereo: Service and Repair MID Audio
AUDIO UNIT
Removal and Installation
AUDIO UNIT
Removal 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the cluster lid C. Refer to See:
Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Cluster LID D/Removal And Installation.
3. Remove the audio unit screws (A), using power tool. 4. Pull out the audio unit (1) and disconnect
the audio unit connectors.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
AV SWITCH
Removal 1. Disconnect battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the cluster lid C. Refer to See: Body
and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Cluster LID D/Removal And Installation.
3. Remove the AV switch screws. 4. Carefully remove the AV switch.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 1205
6. Install the chain tensioner using the following procedure:
NOTE: LH is shown.
a. Install the chain tensioner.
- Compress the plunger and hold it using a stopper pin when installing.
- Loosen the slack guide side timing chain by rotating the camshaft hexagonal part if mounting
space is small.
Chain tensioner bolts : 6.9 N.m (0.70 kg-m, 61 in-lb)
b. Remove the stopper pin and release the plunger, and then apply tension to the timing chain.
c. Install the chain tensioner cover onto the front cover.
- Apply liquid gasket as shown.
Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type
Specifications.
Chain tensioner cover bolts : 9.0 N.m (0.92 kg-m, 80 in-lb)
7. Check and adjust valve clearances. Refer to . 8. Installation of the remaining components is in
the reverse order of removal.
Page 2817
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations Without Intelligent Key System
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Terminal Layout
TERMINAL LAYOUT
Page 5687
Page 5252
^ LH motor: Rotate counterclockwise.
^ RH motor: Rotate clockwise.
2. Install the power window motor onto the regulator.
3. Install the regulator assembly into the door.
4. Secure regulator assembly to door inner with fasteners then install glass into door and attach to
regulator.
5. Raise the glass to the top position.
CAUTION:
Do not operate the glass automatically to raise the glass to the top.
A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics
Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics
Classification: AT09-016A
Reference: NTB10-003A
Date: February 11, 2010
5 SPEED A/T DTC DIAGNOSES FOR P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759,
P1764, P1769, P1774
This bulletin has been amended. Additional DTCs were applied. Discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2003 - 2010 Nissan vehicles with 5-Speed A/T
APPLIED TRANSMISSION: RE5R05A ONLY
SERVICE INFORMATION
If one or more DTCs listed below are found stored in Self Diagnosis, use the REPAIR FLOW
CHART shown below to assist in diagnosis.
^ DTCs: P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
If DTC(s) not listed above is/are found stored in Self Diagnosis, this bulletin does not apply. Refer
to ASIST and the appropriate Service Manual for diagnostic procedure(s) as needed.
Page 1353
c. Check again that the timing alignment marks on the timing chain and on each sprocket are
aligned. Then install the front cover.
d. Install the bolts in the numerical order as shown.
M6 x 50 mm (1.97 in): No.1,20,25,26,27 M6 x 80 mm (3.15 in): No.4, 5, 7 M6 x 20 mm (0.79 in): All
except the above
e. After tightening re-tighten to the specified torque.
CAUTION: Be sure to wipe off any excessive liquid gasket leaking onto surface mating with oil pan.
4. Install the intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (RH) (A) and intake valve timing
control solenoid valve cover (LH) (B) as follows:
- Cross mark (C) that cannot be seen after assembly
a. Apply liquid gasket (D) as shown.
D: 2.6 - 3.6 mm (0.102 - 0.142 in) dia.
Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent.
CAUTION: The start and end of the liquid gasket application should be crossed at a position (C)
that cannot be seen after attaching the cover.
b. Install the bolts in the numerical order as shown.
- A: Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (RH)
Service and Repair
Seat Occupant Classification Module - Air Bag: Service and Repair
OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM CONTROL UNIT
Removal and Installation
The occupant classification system control unit, occupant classification (pressure) sensor, and
bladder are an integral part of the front passenger seat cushion and are replaced as an assembly.
Refer to See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front
Seat/Removal and Installation to remove the seat, and See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and
Repair/Overhaul/Disassembly and Assembly to replace the seat cushion.
Page 5591
Removal and Replacement
Glove Compartment: Removal and Replacement
Exploded View
INSTRUMENT LOWER PANEL RH AND GLOVE BOX
Exploded View
Removal And Installation
INSTRUMENT LOWER PANEL RH AND GLOVE BOX
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal.
Page 3958
CHARGING THE BATTERY
CAUTION: Never "quick charge" a fully discharged battery.
- Keep the battery away from open flame while it is being charged.
- When connecting the charger, connect the leads first, then turn on the charger. Never turn on the
charger first, as this may cause a spark.
- If battery electrolyte temperature rises above 55 °C (131 °F), stop charging. Always charge
battery at a temperature below 55 °C (131 °F) .
Do not charge at more than 50 ampere rate.
NOTE: The ammeter reading on your battery charger will automatically decrease as the battery
charges. This indicates that the voltage of the battery is increasing normally as the state of charge
improves. The charging amps indicated above refer to initial charge rate. If, after charging, the specific gravity of any two cells varies more than 0.050, the battery should be
replaced.
Special Repair Requirement
BATTERY
Special Repair Requirement
Page 3069
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Connect C-III to the vehicle to begin the reprogramming procedure.
^ If you are not familiar with the reprogramming procedure. Refer to "CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM
Reprogramming" general procedure.
Caution
2. When you get to the ECM Reprogramming screen shown in Figure 1, confirm this bulletin
applies as follows:
A. On your C-III screen, look at the Part Number column (see Figure 1).
Page 4135
Page 1267
Valve Clearance: Service and Repair
CAMSHAFT VALVE CLEARANCE
Valve Clearance
INSPECTION
NOTE: Perform the following inspection after removal, installation or replacement of camshaft or
valve-related parts, or if there are unusual engine conditions due to changes in valve clearance
over time (starting, idling, and/or noise). 1. Warm up the engine. Then stop the engine. 2. Remove
the engine room cover. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine
Cover. 3. Remove the air cleaner and air duct assembly. Refer to See: Tune-up and Engine
Performance Checks/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and
Repair/Removal and Installation.
4. Remove the RH bank and LH bank rocker covers using power tool. Refer to See: Valve
Cover/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation.
5. Turn the crankshaft pulley in the normal direction (clockwise when viewed from engine front) to
align TDC identification notch (without paint
mark) with timing indicator.
6. At this time, make sure both the intake and exhaust cam noses of No. 1 cylinder (top front on LH
bank) face outside. If they do not face outside, turn crankshaft pulley once more.
7. Measure valve clearances at the locations marked "X" as shown in the table below (locations
indicated with black arrow).
NOTE: Firing order 1-8-7-3-6-5-4-2
Page 3399
NOTE: Select snap rings with a difference in thickness at both sides within 0.02 mm (0.0008 in). 3.
Adjust the thrust clearance between the bearing and snap ring to zero by tapping the yoke.
4. Make sure that the journal moves smoothly and is below the propeller joint flex effort
specification. Refer to See: Specifications/Propeller Shaft
2S1410/General Specification.
Propeller Shaft 3S1410
REAR PROPELLER SHAFT
Disassembly and Assembly
DISASSEMBLY
Journal 1. Remove the propeller shaft assembly from the vehicle. Refer to See: Removal and
Replacement/Propeller Shaft 3S1410.
2. Put matching marks on the rear propeller shaft tube and flange yoke as shown.
CAUTION: For matching marks use paint. Never damage the rear propeller shaft or flange yoke.
Page 1284
DRIVE BELT / PULLEY NOISE DIAGNOSIS FLOW CHART
Page 3345
3. Remove the stopper ring with suitable tool as shown, and pull the housing off. 4. Remove the
snap ring, then remove the ball cage, steel ball, inner race assembly from the drive shaft.
5. Remove the boot from the drive shaft. 6. Remove any old grease on the housing using paper
towels.
Wheel Side 1. Mount the drive shaft in a vise.
CAUTION: When mounting the drive shaft in a vise, use copper or aluminum plates between the
vise and the drive shaft. 2. Remove the boot bands, then remove the boot from the joint
sub-assembly.
3. Screw a suitable drive shaft puller 30 mm (1.18 in) or more into the threaded part of the joint
sub-assembly. Pull the joint subassembly off of the
drive shaft as shown.
NOTE: Align the sliding hammer and drive shaft and remove the joint sub-assembly by pulling
directly.
CAUTION: If the joint sub-assembly cannot be removed after five or more attempts, replace the drive shaft and
joint subassembly as a set.
4. Remove the boot from the drive shaft. 5. Remove the circlip from the drive shaft. 6. While
rotating the ball cage, remove any old grease from the joint sub-assembly using paper towels.
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY
Drive Shaft Replace the drive shaft if there is any runout, cracking, or other damage.
Joint Sub-assembly
Locations
Page 923
Auto tensioner Inspection (if equipped)
1. With the engine running at idle and the AC turned ON, observe the pulley angular (side to side)
movement (see Example 1):
^ See above table for maximum movement specification.
^ Visual comparison of movement with a known good vehicle is recommended.
Page 5626
Page 1255
Connecting Rod Bearing Grade Table.
Undersize Bearings Usage Guide When the specified oil clearance is not obtained with standard size connecting rod bearings, use
undersize (US) bearings.
- When using undersize bearing, measure the bearing inside diameter with the bearing installed,
and grind the crankshaft pin so that the oil clearance satisfies the standard.
Bearing undersize table
CAUTION: In grinding the crankshaft pin to use undersize bearings, keep the fillet R (All crankshaft
pins).
Fillet R : 1.5 - 1.7 mm (0.059 - 0.067 in)
HOW TO SELECT MAIN BEARING
When New Cylinder Block and Crankshaft are Used 1. Apply the main bearing housing grade on
the bottom face of the cylinder block to the row in "Main Bearings Selection Table".
Page 969
- Confirm mating marks are aligned with hose and clamp, then correct if needed.
- To install eye joint, align projection of eye joint with notch of power steering pump, and attach eye
joint to power steering pump properly. Tighten eye bolt by hand fully, then torque to specification.
Body - Sunroof Inoperative/Erratic Operation
Sunroof / Moonroof Module: Customer Interest Body - Sunroof Inoperative/Erratic Operation
Classification: BT07-032A
Reference: NTB07-070A
Date: September 25, 2009
SUNROOF DOES NOT OPERATE PROPERLY
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles section has been revised. No other changes
have been made. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007 - 2009 Armada (TA60) 2007 - 2009 Frontier (D40) 2007 - 2009
Maxima (A34, A35) 2007 - 2009 Pathfinder (R51) 2007 - 2009 Quest (V42) 2007 - 2009 Titan (A60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
Sunroof auto operation will not work or sunroof does not operate properly:
^ When the battery has been disconnected or discharged
^ When the sunroof motor has been disconnected from power
^ When the sunroof motor was changed
ACTION
Perform the following initialization procedure:
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Push and hold the sunroof tilt switch in the forward (DOWN) position until the sunroof is fully
closed.
3. After the sunroof has closed all the way, push and hold the tilt switch forward (DOWN) again for
more than 2 seconds to re-learn motor position.
4. Initialization is complete if the sunroof operates normally.
NOTE:
If the sunroof is still not operating properly after initialization, refer to ASIST and section RF of the
Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for further diagnosis and repair information.
Page 1474
- Bleed air from passages in lines and hoses such as in cooling system.
- After cooling down the engine again check oil/fluid levels including engine oil and engine coolant.
Refill to specified level if necessary.
Page 1315
Engine Oil: Service and Repair
ENGINE OIL
Changing Engine Oil
WARNING: Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine oil is hot.
- Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer. Try to avoid direct
skin contact with used engine oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand
cleaner as soon as possible.
1. Remove engine front undercover using power tool. 2. Warm up engine, and check for oil leakage
from engine components. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection. 3. Stop engine and wait for 10
minutes. 4. Loosen oil filler cap, then remove drain plug. 5. Drain engine oil. 6. Install drain plug
with new washer.
CAUTION: Be sure to clean drain plug and install with new washer.
Oil pan drain plug : 34.3 N.m (3.5 kg-m, 25 ft-lb)
7. Refill with new engine oil. Refer to See: Maintenance.
Engine oil capacity (Approximate):
CAUTION: The refill capacity depends on the engine oil temperature and drain time. Use these specifications
for reference only.
Always use the oil level gauge to determine when the proper amount of engine oil is in the engine.
8. Warm up engine and check area around drain plug and oil filter for oil leakage. 9. Stop engine
and wait for 10 minutes.
10. Check engine oil level. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection.
Page 2336
Diagnosis Sheet (CAN Type 13)
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
Diagnosis Sheet (CAN Type 13)
Page 407
Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision Damage
Wheel Bearing: Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision
Damage
Classification: FA10-006
Reference: NTB10-126
Date: October 21, 2010
WHEEL BEARING COLLISION DAMAGE
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan
SERVICE INFORMATION
Impacts to wheel bearings (such as a collision or other suspension damage) may create slight
indents in the bearing surfaces. These indents may not be visible but can cause bearing noise.
NOTE:
Hub/bearing replacement due to impact (collision or other suspension damage) is not a
warrantable repair
If a vehicle has visible wheel or suspension damage due to impact (collision or other suspension
damage), it is recommended that the wheel bearing assembly be inspected as follows:
1. Remove the hub/bearing assembly from the vehicle.
2. Hold the hub/bearing assembly with both hands.
3. Rotate the hub/bearing assembly in both directions (clockwise and counterclockwise).
4. If any gritty or rough feeling is detected in the bearing replace it with a new one.
Locations
Page 4059
TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS
Exploded View
Radiator: Service and Repair Exploded View
RADIATOR
Exploded View
Page 4088
Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal.
2. Remove IPDM E/R upper cover. 3. Release two clips and pull IPDM E/R up from case.
4. Disconnect IPDM E/R connectors and remove the IPDM E/R.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Service and Repair
Windshield Washer Switch: Service and Repair
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH
Wiper and Washer Switch
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal 1. Remove steering column covers.
2. Remove wiper washer switch connector. 3. Pinch tabs at wiper and washer switch base and
slide switch away from steering column to remove.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 1994
Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Engine Cover.
2. Disconnect the harness connector from air cleaner case (upper). 3. Remove the air duct and
resonator assembly and air cleaner case. 4. Remove air cleaner filter and air cleaner case (lower) Add marks as necessary for easier installation.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 2826
Fuel Pump Relay: Locations Without Intelligent Key System
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Terminal Layout
TERMINAL LAYOUT
Page 1830
^ CONSULT will display "CMPLT" in the top right corner of the screen when the IAVL procedure is
finished. See Figure 7.
f. Once the IAVL procedure is finished, proceed with step 7.
For 2005 and Later MY Vehicles ONLY: Enter VIN Into New Service Replacement ECM
7. Enter the VIN into the new service replacement ECM as follows:
a. Select [ENGINE] on the "Select System" screen. See Figure 8.
b. Select [WORK SUPPORT] on the "Select Diag Mode" screen. See Figure 9.
Page 631
Page 4621
7. After the tire/wheel is balanced, apply an index mark to the tire at the location of the valve stem
(see Figure 6).
^ This index mark will allow you to tell if the tire has slipped on the rim (see Figure 7).
Tire to Rim Slippage:
^ Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs, the tire
may become un-balanced.
^ Overtime the tire lubricate will dry, eliminating the lubricant as a cause of tire slippage.
^ Some tire lubricants may require up to 24 hours to completely dry.
^ If slippage occurs, the tire/wheel will need to be re-balanced.
WORK - AID AVOID CUSTOMER RETURNS FOR VIBRATION
Locations
Mechanical Specifications
Engine Oil Pressure: Mechanical Specifications
Oil Pump
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Standard and Limit
OIL PRESSURE
OIL PUMP
REGULATOR VALVE
ENGINE OIL CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE)
Regulator Valve
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Standard and Limit
OIL PRESSURE
Page 1916
NOTES:
^ Rust penetrant is considered a shop supply.
^ Nissan Rust Penetrant can be ordered through the Nissan Direct Ship Chemical Care Product
Program, Website order via link on dealer portal.
^ WD-40 is available from various local sources.
Removal Tool
^ When removing a seized exhaust sensor with a specialty socket (which contains a slit to
accommodate the wiring harness), it may spread open and
strip the sensor.
^ Before this occurs, it is recommended to cut the wiring harness from the sensor and use a box
end wrench or 6-point deep well socket.
1. Clamp the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube in a vice.
2. Spray the sensor with the rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds.
^ It is important that the spray is directed at the base of the sensor to ensure it penetrates into the
threads.
Page 1233
Main Bearings Selection Table (No. 2, 3 and 4 journal)
Page 1472
c. Check again that the timing alignment marks on the timing chain and on each sprocket are
aligned. Then install the front cover.
d. Install the bolts in the numerical order as shown.
M6 x 50 mm (1.97 in): No.1,20,25,26,27 M6 x 80 mm (3.15 in): No.4, 5, 7 M6 x 20 mm (0.79 in): All
except the above
e. After tightening re-tighten to the specified torque.
CAUTION: Be sure to wipe off any excessive liquid gasket leaking onto surface mating with oil pan.
4. Install the intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (RH) (A) and intake valve timing
control solenoid valve cover (LH) (B) as follows:
- Cross mark (C) that cannot be seen after assembly
a. Apply liquid gasket (D) as shown.
D: 2.6 - 3.6 mm (0.102 - 0.142 in) dia.
Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent.
CAUTION: The start and end of the liquid gasket application should be crossed at a position (C)
that cannot be seen after attaching the cover.
b. Install the bolts in the numerical order as shown.
- A: Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (RH)
Page 3643
Repair Flow Chart
Engine Controls - DTC's P0133/P0153 Stored In ECM
PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls DTC's P0133/P0153 Stored In ECM
Classification: EC08-013B
Reference: NTB08-060B
Date: May 20, 2009
2008 - 2009 TITAN AND ARMADA; DTC P0133 / P0153
This bulletin has been amended. The Claims Information and Service Procedure have been
updated. No other changes have been made. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2008-2009 Titan (A60) 2008-2009 Armada (TA60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
DTC P0133 and/or P0153 (A/F Sensor 1) is stored in the ECM
and
There are no drivability issues,
ACTIONS
1. Refer to Step 2 in the Service Procedure to confirm this bulletin applies to the vehicle you are
working on.
2. If this bulletin applies, reprogram the ECM.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Submit a Primary Failed (PP) type line claim using the claims coding table above.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Connect C-III to the vehicle to begin the reprogramming procedure.
Page 1285
Auto tensioner Inspection (if equipped)
1. With the engine running at idle and the AC turned ON, observe the pulley angular (side to side)
movement (see Example 1):
^ See above table for maximum movement specification.
^ Visual comparison of movement with a known good vehicle is recommended.
Intake Valve Timing Control Position Sensor (LH)
Variable Valve Timing Actuator Position Sensor: Service and Repair Intake Valve Timing Control
Position Sensor (LH)
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL
Intake Valve Timing Control Position Sensor (LH)
REMOVAL 1. Remove engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Cover. 2. Remove air duct and resonator assembly.
Refer to See: Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and
Repair/Removal and Installation.
3. Disconnect intake valve timing control position sensor connector (LH).
4. Remove intake valve timing control position sensor (LH) (1) from Intake valve timing control
solenoid valve cover (LH) (3).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Replace the O-ring (2) of the intake valve timing control position sensor with a new one,
then lubricate O-ring with engine oil before installing.
Intake valve timing control position sensor bolt : 9.6 N.m (0.98 kg-m, 85 in-lb)
Page 2202
15. Select OK
VIN registration is complete
Page 1269
- No. 3 cylinder compression TDC
- Measure valve clearance using suitable tool. Refer to See: Engine Lubrication/Specifications.
CAUTION: If the inspection was carried out with a cold engine, make sure the values with a fully
warmed up engine are still within specifications.
10. Turn the crankshaft pulley clockwise 90° from the position of No.
3 cylinder compression TDC (clockwise by 360° from the position of No. 1 cylinder compression
TDC) to measure the intake and exhaust valve clearances of No. 6 cylinder (G) and the exhaust
valve clearance of No. 2 cylinder (E). Arrow indicates Engine front
- A: RH
- B: LH
- C: Exhaust
- D: Intake
- E: No. 2 cylinder
- F: No. 4 cylinder
Page 5360
Glove Compartment: Overhaul
INSTRUMENT LOWER PANEL RH AND GLOVE BOX
Disassembly and Assembly
DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove damper clip (if equipped) from glove box. 2. Remove glove box pins
and glove box. 3. Remove glove box striker screws, using power tool and remove glove box striker.
4. Remove fuse block cover. 5. Remove glove box damper screws and remove glove box damper
(if equipped).
ASSEMBLY Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.
Page 1539
Compression Check: Testing and Inspection
COMPRESSION PRESSURE
Checking Compression Pressure
1. Warm up the engine thoroughly. Then stop the engine. 2. Release the fuel pressure. Refer to
See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and
General Diagnostics/Fuel Pressure Check.
CAUTION: If CONSULT-III is not used to release fuel pressure leave the fuel pump fuse
disconnected until step 7. 3. Remove the spark plug from each cylinder. Refer to See: Spark
Plug/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. 4. Connect the engine tachometer (not required
in use of CONSULT-III).
5. Install the compression tester with Tool into the spark plug hole.
Tool number : EG15050500 (J-45402)
6. With the accelerator pedal fully depressed, turn the ignition switch to "START" for cranking.
When the gauge pointer stabilizes, read the
compression pressure and engine rpm. Perform these steps to check each cylinder.
CAUTION: Always use a fully charged battery to obtain specified engine speed. If the engine speed is out of the specified range, check the battery liquid for proper gravity. Check
the engine speed again with normal battery gravity.
- If the compression pressure is below the minimum value, check the valve clearances and parts
associated with the combustion chamber (valve, valve seat, piston, piston ring, cylinder bore,
cylinder head, cylinder head gasket). After checking, measure the compression pressure again.
- If some cylinders have low compression pressure, pour a small amount of engine oil into the
spark plug hole of the cylinder to re-check it for compression.
- If the added engine oil improves the compression, the piston rings may be worn out or damaged.
Check the piston rings and replace if necessary.
- If the compression pressure remains at a low level despite the addition of engine oil, the valves
may be malfunctioning. Check the valves for damage. Replace the valve or valve seat accordingly.
- If two adjacent cylinders have respectively low compression pressure and their compression
remains low even after the addition of engine oil, the gaskets may be leaking, or a valve in adjacent
cylinders may be damaged. Inspect and repair as required.
7. Install the components in the reverse order of removal. 8. Start the engine and confirm that it
runs smoothly. 9. Perform trouble diagnosis. If DTC appears, erase it. Refer to See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Description and
Operation/CAN Communication.
Page 798
IMPORTANT:
If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or
charged back).
ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the
Service Dept.
4. Make sure the "turn plates" and "slide" plates are in good working order:
^ The surface of the front turn plates must be level with (the same height as) the rack surface.
If height is not the same; have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments.
^ Make sure the front turn plates:
> Do not wobble (no up/down movement).
> Operate (slide and turn) smoothly in all directions.
If there is any issue with the turn plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing
any alignments.
Service and Repair
Grille: Service and Repair
FRONT GRILLE
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Release the plastic clips and remove the front grille. 2. Remove the LH and RH front
bumper filler panels.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Locations
Page 246
Page 5991
If the moisture trickles, drips, or pools, it may not be considered normal and the lamp assembly
may have a water leak path. See Figure 2 for an example.
If large drops of water collect inside the lens, refer to the flow chart below to find the next step.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Specifications
Piston: Specifications
Available Piston
Locations
Locations
Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions
Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions
Classification: WT10-005
Reference: NTB10-114
Date: September 27, 2010
INFLATING TIRES EQUIPPED WITH TPMS
APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan with Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
SERVICE INFORMATION
Improper use of tire inflator tools can break the stem of a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensor.
NOTE:
The type of stem breakage shown in Figure 1 is not considered a warrantable repair.
Please refer to the following examples of recommended and not recommended tire pressure filling
tools.
Not Recommended tire inflator tools.
Page 3659
System Diagram
Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation System Diagram
METER SYSTEM
A/T OIL TEMPERATURE GAUGE
A/T OIL TEMPERATURE GAUGE : System Diagram
Page 2160
31. Select Diagnosis
32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%.
When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of
the screen will light (become enabled).
33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon.
Page 3170
- Apply ATF to oil seal.
Tool number : ST33400001 (J-26082)
4. Install oil pump housing in oil pump cover. Tighten oil pump housing bolts to the specified torque.
Refer to See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/Component.
Page 2972
Control Module: Service and Repair
TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Switch 4WD shift switch to 2WD and set transfer assembly to 2WD.
CAUTION: When removing transfer control unit, transfer state must be at 2WD. 2. Turn the ignition
switch OFF and disconnect negative battery terminal. 3. Remove the lower instrument panel RH.
Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Lower Panel RH And Glove Box/Removal And
Installation.
4. Disconnect the two transfer control unit connectors. 5. Remove the transfer control unit bolts. 6.
Remove the transfer control unit.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. When installing the transfer control unit, tighten bolts to the specified torque.
Transfer control unit bolts : 5.1 N.m (0.52 kg-m, 45 in-lb)
- After the installation, check 4WD shift indicator pattern. If NG, adjust position between transfer
assembly and transfer control unit. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Transfer
Case/Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Precaution For Transfer Assembly And
Transfer Control Unit Replacement.
Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-037A Date: 100519
Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement
Reference: NTB10-037A
Date: May 19, 2010
VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2005 - 2009 ARMADA AND TITAN FUEL GAUGE
INACCURACY
This bulletin has been amended. Additions were made to the Parts Information. Please discard
previous versions of this bulletin.
CAMPAIGN ID #: R1010
NHTSA #: 10V-074
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2009 Armada (TA60) 2005 - 2009 Titan (A60)
Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility.
INTRODUCTION
Nissan is conducting a voluntary recall campaign on certain MY2005-2009 Armada and Titan
vehicles to address a potential fuel gauge inaccuracy. Specifically, the issue can cause the fuel
gauge to show that the vehicle still has some fuel, typically about one quarter tank, when the fuel
tank is actually empty. To remedy this potential condition, Nissan is conducting this Voluntary
Safety Recall Campaign to replace the fuel level sending unit with a new one at no charge for parts
or labor.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number R1010 to this campaign. This number must appear on
all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle
falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service
department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient
(tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in
dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to
do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While
federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used
vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed.
Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1421 Stored
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1421
Stored
Classification: EC09-014B
Reference: NTB09-048B
Date: April 21, 2011
2007-2009 TITAN AND ARMADA; MIL "ON" WITH DTC P1421 STORED
This bulletin has been amended. APPLIED VEHICLES, APPLIED VINS, and Table A and B have
been revised. Please discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007-2009 Titan (A60) 2007-2009 Armada (TA60)
APPLIED VINS and DATES: 2007-2008 Titan and Armada: All
2009 Titan: Vehicles built before 1N6AA0(***)9N312517 // April 7, 2009
2009 Armada: Vehicles built before 5N1AA08(**)9N614339 // April 7, 2009
IF YOU CONFIRM:
An Applied Vehicle has the MIL "ON" and DTC P1421 (Cold Start Control) stored in the ECM.
ACTION:
Confirm this bulletin applies.
Page 4612
Tires: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions
Classification: WT10-005
Reference: NTB10-114
Date: September 27, 2010
INFLATING TIRES EQUIPPED WITH TPMS
APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan with Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
SERVICE INFORMATION
Improper use of tire inflator tools can break the stem of a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensor.
NOTE:
The type of stem breakage shown in Figure 1 is not considered a warrantable repair.
Please refer to the following examples of recommended and not recommended tire pressure filling
tools.
Not Recommended tire inflator tools.
Page 2406
Locations
Page 3343
Axle Shaft Assembly: Service and Repair Front Axle Shaft
Removal and Installation
DRIVE SHAFT
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel and tire using power tool. 2. Remove engine under cover using
power tool. 3. Remove wheel sensor harness from mount on knuckle.
CAUTION: Do not pull on wheel sensor harness. 4. Without disassembling the hydraulic lines,
remove brake caliper using power tool. Reposition it aside with wire. Refer to See: Brakes and
Traction
Control/Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Front .
NOTE: Avoid depressing brake pedal while brake caliper is removed. 5. Remove coil spring and
shock absorber assembly using power tool. Refer to See: Steering and
Suspension/Suspension/Suspension Strut / Shock
Absorber/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Coil Spring And Strut .
6. Separate upper link ball joint stud from steering knuckle using Tool. Support lower link with jack.
Tool number : ST29020001 (J-24319-01)
7. Remove cotter pin, then remove drive shaft nut. 8. Remove drive shaft bolts from front final
drive. 9. Remove drive shaft from wheel hub and bearing assembly.
CAUTION: When removing drive shaft, do not apply an excessive angle to drive shaft joint. Also be careful not
to excessively extend slide joint.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Page 3082
CAUTION
2. When you get to the ECM Reprogramming screen shown in Figure 1, confirm this bulletin
applies as follows:
A. On your C-III screen, look at the Part Number column (see Figure 1 example):
^ If this column is blank (no part number listed), this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to
ASIST for further diagnostic information.
^ If a Part Number is listed, write it on the Repair Order.
Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration Procedure
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration
Procedure
Classification: EC09-028
Reference: NTB09-136
Date: December 1, 2009
2005 AND LATER; ECM VIN REGISTRATION
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2005 and later
SERVICE INFORMATION
The Applied Vehicles must have the correct Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) registered in the
Engine Control Module (ECM). The VIN registration process must be performed under the following
conditions.
^ When installing a new ECM
^ If, during vehicle service, the VIN registration inside the ECM is found to be missing or incorrect.
When needed, use the Service Procedure in this bulletin to perform ECM VIN registration.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for
any repairs being performed.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Connect C-III to the vehicle and perform the initial selections:
NOTE:
If C-III is already connected, go to Step 2.
a. Start C-III and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear.
b. Select the detected VI from the list.
c. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
d. Select Model and Year.
e. Confirm the correct model and year were selected.
f. Select Repair.
With Intelligent Key System
Ignition Relay: Locations With Intelligent Key System
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Terminal Layout
TERMINAL LAYOUT
Page 539
c. Remove the Fuel Temperature Sensor from the Plastic Retaining Clip.
d. Remove the wires from the Securing Tab.
e. Unplug the White Wire Connector at the top of the fuel pump.
^ DO NOT disturb the Black Wire Connector located next to the white Wire connector.
f. Carefully cut the tie-wrap securing the harnesses to the corrugated tubing.
CAUTION:
DO NOT damage the wires or the wire insulation when cutting the Tie-Wrap.
Page 4244
Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal.
2. Remove IPDM E/R upper cover. 3. Release two clips and pull IPDM E/R up from case.
4. Disconnect IPDM E/R connectors and remove the IPDM E/R.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 3840
- After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), perform the following.
- Refill brake system with new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system. Refer to See: Brake
Bleeding/Service and Repair.
- Adjust the steering angle sensor. Refer to See: Antilock Brakes / Traction Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing
Control Unit/Description See: Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing Control Unit/Special
Repair Requirement See: Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Adjustment Of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral
Position/Description See: Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Adjustment Of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral
Position/Special Repair Requirement.
- Calibrate the decel G sensor. Refer to See: Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing
and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Inspection And Adjustment/Special Repair
Requirement.
Page 2167
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Disclaimer
Service and Repair
Courtesy Lamp: Service and Repair
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
Removal and Installation
ROOM/MAP LAMP
Removal 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
2. Remove overhead console (3). Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair. 3. Disconnect connectors (4) and remove the room/map lamp
screws (1), then remove room/map lamp (2) from overhead console (3).
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Bulb Replacement 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Using a suitable tool (A), remove
room/map lamp lens (1).
CAUTION: Wrap a cloth around suitable tool (A) to protect the housing and lens (1). 3. Release
one side of the bulb (2) from the tab, then pull straight downward to remove.
Room/map lamp bulb : 12V - 6W
VANITY MIRROR LAMP
Locations
Variable Valve Timing Actuator Position Sensor: Locations
Page 4009
Consult-III Checking System
Standardized Relay
STANDARDIZED RELAY
Description
NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided
into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays.
Page 3892
Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair VDC/TCS/ABS
ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY)
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to
See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 3. Drain the brake fluid.
Refer to See: Hydraulic System/Brake Fluid/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 4.
Disconnect the actuator harness connector from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
CAUTION: To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut wrench to prevent the flare nuts and brake tubes from
being damaged.
- Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is
splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately.
5. Disconnect the brake tubes. 6. Remove the three bolts and remove the ABS actuator and
electric unit (control unit).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: To install, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench (commercial service tools).
- Always tighten brake tubes to specification when installing.
Never reuse drained brake fluid.
Service and Repair
Wiper Motor Linkage: Service and Repair
FRONT WIPER DRIVE ASSEMBLY
Wiper Motor and Linkage
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal 1. Remove the cowl top. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding /
Trim/Service and Repair. 2. Remove wiper frame bolts, and remove wiper frame assembly. 3.
Remove wiper motor from wiper frame assembly.
Installation
CAUTION: Do not drop the wiper motor or cause it to contact other parts.
- Check the grease condition of the motor arm and wiper link joint(s). Apply grease if necessary.
1. Connect wiper motor to connector. Turn the wiper switch ON to operate wiper motor, then turn
the wiper switch OFF (auto stop). 2. Disconnect wiper motor connector. 3. Install wiper motor to
wiper frame assembly, and install wiper frame assembly. 4. Install cowl top. Refer to See: Body
and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 5. Ensure that wiper blades stop within
proper clearance. Refer to front wiper arm adjustment See: Wiper Arm/Service and Repair.
Page 1518
10. Lower the fuel tank using a suitable lift jack and remove it from the vehicle to access the fuel
level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly. 11. Remove the lock ring using Tool as shown.
Tool number : - (J-46536)
12. Remove the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly. Remove and discard the fuel
level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly
O-ring.
CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm during removal.
- Avoid impacts such as dropping when handling the components.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. For installation, use a new fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly O-ring.
- Connect the quick connector as follows:
- Check the connection for any damage or foreign materials.
- Align the connector with the pipe, then insert the connector straight into the pipe until a click is
heard.
- After connecting the quick connector, make sure that the connection is secure by checking as
follows:
- Pull the tube and the connector to make sure they are securely connected.
- Visually inspect the connector to make sure the two retainer tabs are securely connected.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1. Turn the ignition switch ON but do not start engine, then
check the fuel pipes and hose connections for leaks while applying fuel pressure to the
system.
2. Start the engine and rev it above idle speed, then check that there are no fuel leaks at any of the
fuel pipe and hose connections.
Page 5969
NOTE:
^ The HID control unit includes a starter (xenon bulb socket). For some models, the starter is not
replaceable. In this case, replace only the HID control
unit using the old starter.
^ Torque specification for the screw that holds the starter to the HID control unit is:
^ 1.3 - 1.7 Nm (0.13 - 0.17 k-gm, 12 - 15 in-lb)
Engine Controls - DTC P0451 Stored In The ECM
Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine Controls - DTC P0451 Stored In The ECM
Classification: EC09-027
Reference: NTB09-121
Date: November 3, 2009
2009 TITAN AND ARMADA; DTC P0451 STORED
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2009 Titan (A60) 2009 Armada (TA60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
DTC P0451 (EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor Performance) is stored,
ACTIONS
1. Confirm this bulletin applies.
a. Check and compare your current ECM Part Number to Table A or B shown in this bulletin.
b. If that part number does not match one in Table A, this bulletin does not apply. Go back to
ASIST for further diagnostic and repair information.
2. If this bulletin applies, reprogram the ECM.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTIONS (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is
essential to successfully completing this repair.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Connect C-III to the vehicle to begin the reprogramming procedure.
Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions
Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions
Classification: WT10-005
Reference: NTB10-114
Date: September 27, 2010
INFLATING TIRES EQUIPPED WITH TPMS
APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan with Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
SERVICE INFORMATION
Improper use of tire inflator tools can break the stem of a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensor.
NOTE:
The type of stem breakage shown in Figure 1 is not considered a warrantable repair.
Please refer to the following examples of recommended and not recommended tire pressure filling
tools.
Not Recommended tire inflator tools.
Page 5818
Shift Indicator: Description and Operation Component Description
METER SYSTEM
SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR : Component Description
Page 3347
4. Insert the specified quantity of Genuine NISSAN Grease or equivalent, onto the housing
(indicated by * marks), and install it onto shaft. Refer to
See: Maintenance .
Grease capacity : 130 - 150 g (4.58 - 5.29 oz)
5. Install the stopper ring onto the housing. 6. After installation, pull on the shaft to check
engagement between the sliding joint and the stopper ring.
7. Install the boot securely into the grooves (indicated by * marks) as shown.
CAUTION: If there is grease on boot mounting surfaces (indicated by * marks) of shaft and
housing, boot may come off. Remove all grease from surfaces. 8. Check that the boot installation
length "L" is the length indicated below. Insert a suitable tool into the large end of the boot, as
shown. Bleed air
from the boot to prevent boot deformation.
Boot installation length "L" : 145 mm (5.71 in)
CAUTION: The boot may break if the boot installation length is less than the specified value.
- Do not contact inside surface of boot with tip of the suitable tool.
9. Secure the large and small ends of the boot with the new boot bands as shown.
NOTE: Discard the old boot bands and use new ones for assembly.
10. After installing the sliding joint housing to the drive shaft, rotate the boot to check that the boot
is positioned correctly. If the boot is not positioned
correctly, reposition the boot and secure the boot using a new boot band.
Wheel Side 1. Insert the Genuine NISSAN Grease or equivalent, into the joint sub-assembly
serration hole until the grease begins to ooze from the ball groove
Page 1792
Page 5546
2. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal 101 and stop lamp switch terminal 2. Refer to
Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
3. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK - GO TO 10. NG Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
10. CHECK STOP LAMP SWITCH
Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/ASCD Brake Switch/Component Inspection.
OK or NG OK - GO TO 11. NG - Replace stop lamp switch.
11. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Service Information
For Electrical Incident/Intermittent Incident and See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and
Diagnostic Overview/Service Information For Electrical Incident/Intermittent Incident. INSPECTION END
Brakes - Front Brake Pad Service Supplement
Brake Pad: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Front Brake Pad Service Supplement
Classification: BR10-005
Reference: NTB10-081
Date: June 25, 2010
2004 - 2010 TITAN AND ARMADA; FRONT BRAKE PAD SERVICE
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2010 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2010 Armada (TA60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
Front brake service is needed that will require the removal of the front brake caliper cylinder body
or brake pads,
ACTION:
Follow the Service Procedure in this bulletin as a supplement to the brake service.
NOTE:
The supplemental items in the Service Procedure of this bulletin supersede any previous detailed
brake pad removal procedures.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You
MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Partially drain the brake fluid.
^ Refer to section BR (DRAIN and REFILL) in the Service Manual.
2. Remove the front wheels.
^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed for front wheel removal.
Page 791
Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that
slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the
left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane.
This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although
the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be.
Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition
The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure
2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road.
Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center
^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less.
^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less.
When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to
counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle
should be driven on a straight flat road.
Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle
pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This
condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side.
Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition
The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road.
^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering
correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on
a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane
during this time (7 seconds).
Exploded View
Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Exploded View
AIR CLEANER FILTER
Exploded View
Page 291
CAUTION
4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF.
^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure.
^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF.
^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear
defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel
heater, etc.
CAUTION
5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running.
If the cooling fans are running:
a. Turn the ignition OFF.
b. Wait for the engine to cool.
c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF).
d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running.
6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer.
7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress"
message to clear.
Electrical - IPDM Serviceability
Power Distribution Module: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - IPDM Serviceability
Classification: EL09-014
Reference: NTB09-036
Date: April 27, 2009
IPDM SERVICE
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007 - 2009 Nissan Models with IPDM
SERVICE INFORMATION
The Intelligent Power Distribution Module (IPDM) is ONLY serviceable as an assembly.
The ONLY serviceable parts of an IPDM are the fuses.
^ Some IPDM designs have sections that Relays Relays appear to be serviceable relays.
^ These "relays" are NEVER to be removed.
^ These "relays" may have markings indicating they are similar. They are not "swappable".
CAUTION:
NEVER REMOVE relays from an IPDM.
Tampering with the relays of an IPDM may cause additional incidents with the vehicle.
Such incidents may include:
^ Headlights inoperative.
^ Radiator fan inoperative
^ Fog lamps inoperative
^ Wiper inoperative
Page 5048
SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal"
condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Page 1031
Fluid - Transfer Case: Service and Repair Replacement
TRANSFER FLUID
Replacement
CAUTION: If using the vehicle for towing, the transfer fluid must be replaced as specified. Refer to
See: .
DRAINING 1. Stop engine.
2. Remove the drain plug and gasket and drain the fluid. 3. Install the drain plug with a new gasket
to the transfer. Tighten to the specified torque. Refer to See: Transmission and
Drivetrain/Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Component.
CAUTION: Do not reuse gasket.
FILLING 1. Remove the filler plug and gasket.
2. Fill the transfer with new fluid until the fluid level reaches the specified limit near the filler plug
hole.
Fluid grade and capacity : Refer to See: .
CAUTION: Carefully fill fluid. (Fill up for approx. 3 minutes.) 3. Leave the vehicle for 3 minutes, and
check fluid level again. 4. Install the filler plug with a new gasket to the transfer. Tighten to the
specified torque. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Component.
CAUTION: Do not reuse gasket.
Page 1959
Locations
Locations
Page 325
Page 5563
TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS
Page 2171
^ CONSULT will display "CMPLT" in the top right corner of the screen when the IAVL procedure is
finished. See Figure 7.
f. Once the IAVL procedure is finished, proceed with step 7.
For 2005 and Later MY Vehicles ONLY: Enter VIN Into New Service Replacement ECM
7. Enter the VIN into the new service replacement ECM as follows:
a. Select [ENGINE] on the "Select System" screen. See Figure 8.
b. Select [WORK SUPPORT] on the "Select Diag Mode" screen. See Figure 9.
Page 1774
C. Scroll down and select [VIN REGISTRATION] on the "Select Work Item" screen. See Figure 10.
d. Press [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 11.
e. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 12.
Page 3915
Removal Remove the rear axle shaft assembly. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive
Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and Repair/Rear Axle Shaft.
NOTE: It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle shaft assembly to replace the rear wheel
sensor rotor.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the old rear wheel sensor rotor.
- Do not reuse the rear axle oil seal. The rear axle oil seal must be replaced every time the rear
axle shaft assembly is removed from the rear axle shaft housing.
Page 5554
Audible Warning Device: Locations Seat Belt Warning Chime
WARNING CHIME SYSTEM
SEAT BELT WARNING CHIME : Component Parts Location
Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-037A Date: 100519
Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement
Reference: NTB10-037A
Date: May 19, 2010
VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2005 - 2009 ARMADA AND TITAN FUEL GAUGE
INACCURACY
This bulletin has been amended. Additions were made to the Parts Information. Please discard
previous versions of this bulletin.
CAMPAIGN ID #: R1010
NHTSA #: 10V-074
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2009 Armada (TA60) 2005 - 2009 Titan (A60)
Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility.
INTRODUCTION
Nissan is conducting a voluntary recall campaign on certain MY2005-2009 Armada and Titan
vehicles to address a potential fuel gauge inaccuracy. Specifically, the issue can cause the fuel
gauge to show that the vehicle still has some fuel, typically about one quarter tank, when the fuel
tank is actually empty. To remedy this potential condition, Nissan is conducting this Voluntary
Safety Recall Campaign to replace the fuel level sending unit with a new one at no charge for parts
or labor.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number R1010 to this campaign. This number must appear on
all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle
falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service
department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient
(tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in
dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to
do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While
federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used
vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed.
Power Consumption Control System
Power Distribution Module: Locations Power Consumption Control System
POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM
Component Parts Location
Locations
Page 1439
d. Install the bolts in the numerical order shown.
e. After tightening, re-tighten to the specified torque.
CAUTION: Be sure to wipe off any excessive liquid gasket leaking onto surface mating with oil pan.
11. Install the Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (RH)
(A) and Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (LH) (B) as follows:
a. Apply liquid gasket (D) as shown.
Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type
Specifications.
CAUTION: The start and end of the application of the liquid gasket should be crossed at position
(C) that cannot be seen after attaching the Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover.
D : 2.6 - 3.6 mm (0.102 - 0.142 in) dia.
b. Install the bolts and tighten them to specification in the numerical order shown.
- A: Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (RH)
- B: Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (LH)
12. Install the crankshaft pulley.
- Install the key of the crankshaft.
- Insert the pulley by lightly tapping it.
Page 4234
Concept of auto active test
- IPDM E/R starts the auto active test with the door switch signals transmitted by BCM via CAN
communication. Therefore, the CAN communication line between IPDM E/R and BCM is
considered normal if the auto active test starts successfully.
- The auto active test facilitates troubleshooting if any systems controlled by IPDM E/R cannot be
operated.
Diagnosis chart in auto active test mode
Locations
Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Locations
METER SYSTEM
A/T OIL TEMPERATURE GAUGE : Component Parts Location
Locations
Procedures
Quarter Window Glass: Procedures
SIDE WINDOW GLASS
Repairing Water Leaks for Side Window Glass
Leaks can be repaired without removing or reinstalling glass. If water is leaking between urethane
adhesive material and body or glass, determine the extent of leakage. This can be done by
applying water to the side window area while pushing glass outward. To stop leak, apply primer (if
necessary) and then urethane adhesive to the leak point.
Exploded View
Timing Chain: Service and Repair Exploded View
TIMING CHAIN
Exploded View
Removal and Replacement
Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Removal and Replacement
Front Coil Spring And Strut
COIL SPRING AND SHOCK ABSORBER
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the wheel and tire using power tool.
2. Remove the shock absorber lower bolt using power tool. 3. Remove the three shock absorber
upper nuts using power tool. 4. Remove the coil spring and shock absorber assembly. Turn steering knuckle out to gain enough clearance for removal.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
- The lower seat step (2) in the shock absorber assembly (1) faces outside of vehicle.
- Upper spring insulator (3)
- Arrow Indicates: Front
- Tighten all nuts and bolts to specification. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Front Suspension .
- When installing wheel and tire, refer to See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Rotation.
Rear Suspension
SHOCK ABSORBER
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Support the rear final drive and suspension assembly using a suitable jack.
Page 5213
6. Repeat the cleaning procedure as needed.
^ After treating, the trim panel should be clean as shown in Figure 4 above.
7. Reinstall the trim panel parts removed in step 1.
Page 3583
Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation Component Description
METER SYSTEM
A/T OIL TEMPERATURE GAUGE : Component Description
Service and Repair
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair
Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery terminals and wait at least 3
minutes.
Do not use air tools or electric tools for servicing.
Always work from the side of air bag module. Do not work from the front of it.
Always place air bag module with pad side facing upward.
Do not cause impact to the air bag module by dropping etc. Replace the air bag module if it has
been dropped or sustained an impact.
After the work is completed, make sure no system malfunction is detected by air bag warning lamp.
In case a malfunction is detected by the air bag warning lamp, reset by the self-diagnosis function
and delete the memory by CONSULT-III.
If a malfunction is still detected after the above operation, perform self-diagnosis to repair
malfunctions. Refer to
Page 3197
Page 4736
Compressor Clutch: Description and Operation Manual A/C (Type 1)
MAGNET CLUTCH
System Description
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The front air control controls compressor operation based on ambient
and intake temperature and a signal from ECM.
Low Temperature Protection Control The front air control will turn the compressor ON or OFF as
determined by a signal detected by the intake sensor and the ambient sensor. When intake air
temperature is higher than the preset value, the compressor turns ON. The compressor turns OFF
when intake air temperature is lower than the preset value. That preset value is dependent on the
ambient temperature, refer to the following table.
Page 5670
c. Remove the Fuel Temperature Sensor from the Plastic Retaining Clip.
d. Remove the wires from the Securing Tab.
e. Unplug the White Wire Connector at the top of the fuel pump.
^ DO NOT disturb the Black Wire Connector located next to the white Wire connector.
f. Carefully cut the tie-wrap securing the harnesses to the corrugated tubing.
CAUTION:
DO NOT damage the wires or the wire insulation when cutting the Tie-Wrap.
Standard Pedal
Brake Pedal Assy: Adjustments Standard Pedal
BRAKE PEDAL
Inspection and Adjustment - Standard Pedal
INSPECTION 1. Inspect the brake pedal free height (H) from the floor using Tool at a 90° angle to
the floor as shown.
Tool number : - (J-46532)
2. Adjust the brake pedal height to specifications.
ADJUSTMENT 1. Loosen the stop lamp switch and ASCD cancel switch by turning 45°
counterclockwise. 2. Loosen lock nut (A) on the input rod, then turn input rod to adjust the brake
pedal to specified height. When finished adjusting, tighten lock nut
(A) to specification.
Page 3703
3. Inspection results (see Figures above):
^ OK - No further action required.
^ NG - Replace the brake pedal assembly.
^ If the brake pedal assembly replacement is needed immediately send an email with the following
information:
Email subject line: PC039 Brake Pedal Inspection
Service Manager Name: Contact phone number: Dealer Code: Dealer Name: VIN:
IMPORTANT:
Include in the email a digital photograph of the pin in the vehicle for our evaluation.
PARTS INFORMATION
^ If the brake pedal assembly replacement is needed immediately send an email as directed
above.
Page 2168
Service Procedure
Check NATS On The Vehicle
1. Check to see if the vehicle you're working on has "ECM based" NATS V2.0 or V5.0.
a. If the vehicle has ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0, it will NOT start after you install a service
replacement ECM. So you'll have to re-register all ignition keys, including spare keys with
CONSULT-II and the purple NATS card. After you do this, proceed with step 2.
^ If you do not know how to re-register the keys, refer to the ESM for the NATS key re-registration
procedure.
b. If the vehicle has "BCM based" NATS (instead of ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0), you do NOT
have to re-register the ignition or spare keys. Proceed with step 2.
Check For ECM Data Updates in ASIST
2. In ASIST, select [CONSULT Utilities] >>> [ECM/TCM Data]. Then choose Model and Model
Year (see Figure 1).
3. Look for ECM Data Updates (listed by ECM P/Ns and vehicle configuration) in the top, center
display panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
a. If there is not updates listed for your vehicle configuration, you do NOT have to reprogram the
service replacement ECM. Proceed with step 5.
b. If there is updates listed for your vehicle configuration, see if they apply to the service
replacement ECM you're going to install. Do this by performing step 4.
4. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then confirm that your
ECM is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, -XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details"
panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
a. If your ECM is listed in the "Details" panel, you must reprogram the ECM with the latest data
update. After you do this, proceed with step 5.
CAUTION:
The 1999-2000 Frontier and 1999-2000 Pathfinder have a gray CONSULT connector AND a white
GST connector. Do NOT attempt to perform the ECM Reprogramming procedure with CONSULT-II
connected to the gray CONSULT connector. See the appropriate ESM for further details if
necessary.
b. If your ECM is NOT listed in the "Details" panel, you do NOT have to reprogram the ECM.
Proceed with step 5.
Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
5. Perform the Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning as follows:
a. Make sure the accelerator pedal is fully released.
b. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds.
c. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" for 10 seconds.
Page 537
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the Fuel Pump Assembly from the vehicle.
^ Refer to section FL in the applicable Service Manual for removal information.
^ Make sure to follow all Service Manual warnings and cautions.
With Intelligent Key System
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations With Intelligent Key System
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Terminal Layout
TERMINAL LAYOUT
Exhaust System - Heat Shield Rattling Noises
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-094 Date: 100812
Exhaust System - Heat Shield Rattling Noises
Classification: EM-10-009
Reference: NTB10-094
Date: August 12, 2010
EXHAUST HEAT SHIELD NOISE
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2010 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2010 Armada (TA60) 2005 - 2010 Pathfinder
(R51) 2005- 2010 Xterra (N 50) 2005 - 2010 Frontier (D40)
IF YOU CONFIRM:
A noise is coming from the front exhaust tube heat shield(s) due to rattle.
ACTION: Secure the heat shield(s) with new band clamps (see PARTS INFORMATION).
^ Refer to the SERVICE PROCEDURE.
NOTE:
Do not replace the front exhaust tube for this incident, if it should occur.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You
MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential
to successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
WARNING:
Page 5825
Speedometer Module: Description and Operation Component Description
METER SYSTEM
SPEEDOMETER : Component Description
Premium Without Navigation
Amplifier: Service and Repair Premium Without Navigation
AUDIO AMP.
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the BCM. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Body Control Systems/Body
Control Module/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the accelerator pedal. Refer to See: Powertrain
Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Accelerator Pedal/Service and Repair.
3. Disconnect the audio amp. speaker amp. connectors. 4. Remove the audio amp. speaker amp.
and bracket assembly screws and slide the audio amp. speaker amp. bracket assembly down.
5. Remove the audio amp. speaker amp.screws (A). then remove the audio amp. speaker amp. (1).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 1789
Changing Differential Gear Oil
Fluid - Differential: Service and Repair Changing Differential Gear Oil
DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL
Changing Differential Gear Oil
DRAINING 1. Stop the engine. 2. Remove the drain plug from the front final drive assembly to drain
the differential gear oil. 3. Install the drain plug with sealant applied on the threads to the front final
drive assembly. Tighten to the specified torque. Refer to See:
Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential Assembly/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Front Final Drive
M205.
- Use High Performance Thread Sealant or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type
Specifications.
FILLING 1. Remove the filler plug from the front final drive assembly.
2. Fill the front final drive assembly with new differential gear oil until the level reaches the specified
level near the filler plug hole.
Differential gear oil grade and capacity : Refer to See: .
3. Install the filler plug with sealant applied on the threads to the front final drive assembly. Tighten
to the specified torque. Refer to See:
Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential Assembly/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Front Final Drive
M205.
- Use High Performance Thread Sealant or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type
Specifications.
Page 3235
CAUTION: -
Wear safety glasses and rubber gloves when spraying the
Transmission Cooler Cleaner. Spray cooler cleaner only with adequate ventilation.
Avoid contact with eyes and skin.
- Do not breath vapors or spray mist.
6. Hold the hose and can as high as possible and spray Transmission Cooler Cleaner in a
continuous stream into the cooler outlet hose until fluid
flows out of the cooler inlet hose for 5 seconds.
7. Tie a common white, basket-type coffee filter to the end of the cooler inlet hose. 8. Insert the tip
of an air gun into the end of the cooler outlet hose.
9. Wrap a shop rag around the air gun tip and end of cooler outlet hose.
10. Blow compressed air regulated to 5 - 9 kg/cm2 (70 - 130 psi) through the cooler outlet hose to
force any remaining A/T fluid into the coffee filter. 11. Remove the coffee filter from the end of the
cooler inlet hose. 12. Perform A/T fluid cooler inspection.
A/T FLUID COOLER INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. Inspect the coffee filter for debris.
a. If small metal debris less than 1mm (0.040 in) in size or metal powder is found in the coffee filter,
this is normal. If normal debris is found, the
A/T fluid cooler/radiator can be re-used and the procedure is ended.
b. If one or more pieces of debris are found that are over 1mm (0.040 in) in size and/or peeled
clutch facing material is found in the coffee filter,
the fluid cooler is not serviceable. The A/T fluid cooler/radiator must be replaced and the inspection
procedure is ended. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Radiator/Service
and Repair/Removal and Installation.
Specifications
Knock Sensor: Specifications
Knock Sensor Torque ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................... 21.1 Nm, 16 ft lb
Page 2498
Page 1134
^ Make sure the tire is evenly positioned on the lower safety humps.
5. WARNING: Do not exceed the tire manufactures recommended bead seating inflation pressure.
Generally this is 40psi.
If the bead does not seat with the appropriate pressure:
a. Break down the tire/rim assembly.
b. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2.
c. Remount the tire.
6. After inflating the tires, inspect the bead area.
^ Make sure bead is seated uniformly (the same) around the entire circumference of the wheel.
NOTE:
Many tires have Aligning Rings that will help confirm the bead is uniformly seated.
If uniform; bead is seated correctly. If not uniform
1. Break down the tire/rim assembly.
2. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2.
3. Remount the tire.
Page 2907
Page 4823
1. Before connecting recovery/recycling equipment to vehicle, check recovery/recycling equipment
gauges. No refrigerant pressure should be displayed. If NG, recover refrigerant from equipment
lines. 2. Connect recovery/recycling equipment to vehicle. Confirm refrigerant purity in supply tank
using recovery/recycling equipment and refrigerant
identifier. If NG, refer to See: Service Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Contaminated
Refrigerant.
3. Confirm refrigerant purity in vehicle A/C system using recovery/recycling equipment and
refrigerant identifier. If NG, refer to See: Service
Precautions/Technician Safety Information/Contaminated Refrigerant.
4. Discharge refrigerant into the refrigerant recovery/recycling equipment. Measure oil discharged
into the recovery/recycling equipment. 5. Drain the oil from the "old" (removed) compressor into a
graduated container and recover the amount of oil drained. 6. Drain the oil from the "new"
compressor into a separate, clean container. 7. Measure an amount of new oil installed equal to
amount drained from "old" compressor. Add this oil to "new" compressor through the suction port
opening.
8. Measure an amount of new oil equal to the amount recovered during discharging. Add this oil to
"new" compressor through the suction port
opening.
9. If the liquid tank also needs to be replaced, add an additional 5 ml (0.2 US fl oz, 0.2 Imp fl oz) of
oil at this time.
CAUTION: Do not add this 5 ml (0.2 US fl oz, 0.2 Imp fl oz) of oil if only replacing the compressor.
OIL
Maintenance of Oil Quantity in Compressor
The oil in the compressor circulates through the system with the refrigerant. Add oil to compressor
when replacing any component or after a large refrigerant leakage has occurred. It is important to
maintain the specified amount. If oil quantity is not maintained properly, the following malfunctions
may result: Lack of oil: May lead to a seized compressor
- Excessive oil: Inadequate cooling (thermal exchange interference)
Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Power Distribution Module: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Diagnosis And Repair Work Flow
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
Work Flow
OVERALL SEQUENCE
DETAILED FLOW 1. GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM Get the detailed information from the
customer about the symptom (the condition and the environment when the incident/malfunction
occurred). - GO TO 2 2. CHECK DTC 1. Check DTC. 2. Perform the following procedure if DTC is
displayed. Record DTC and freeze frame data.
Engine - Drive Belt Noise Diagnosis
Drive Belt: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Drive Belt Noise Diagnosis
Classification: EM09-013
Reference: NTB10-002
Date: January 12, 2010
DRIVE BELT SYSTEM NOISE DIAGNOSIS
APPLIED VEHICLES All Nissan
IF YOU CONFIRM
There is noise coming from the drive belt(s), or drive belt pulley(s),
ACTION
Use the flow chart in this bulletin to help diagnose and identify the source / cause of the noise.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the indicated claims coding for any
repairs performed.
Page 5059
Garage Door Opener Transmitter: Component Tests and General Diagnostics
Component Function Check
HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER
Component Function Check
1.CHECK FUNCTION Check that system receiver (garage door opener, etc.) operates with original
hand-held transmitter. Is the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO 2 NO - Receiver or hand-held
transmitter is malfunctioning. 2.CHECK ILLUMINATION 1. Turn ignition switch "OFF".
2. Press each of the transmitter buttons and watch for the red light to illuminate with each button. Is
the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO 3 NO - Refer to See: Diagnosis Procedure. 3.CHECK
TRANSMITTER Check transmitter with Tool*. *:For details, refer to Technical Service Bulletin. Is
the inspection result normal? YES - Receiver or hand-held transmitter malfunction, not vehicle
related. NO - Replace auto anti-dazzling inside mirror (homelink universal transceiver).
Diagnosis Procedure
HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER
Description
Homelink universal transceiver can store and transmit a maximum of 3 radio signals. Allows
operation of garage doors, gates, home and office lighting, entry door locks and security system,
etc. Homelink universal transceiver power supply uses vehicle battery, which enables it to maintain
every program in case battery is discharged or removed.
HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER
Diagnosis Procedure
1.CHECK POWER SUPPLY 1. Disconnect auto anti-dazzling inside mirror (homelink universal
transceiver) connector.
Page 3725
Lock nut (A) : 18.7 N.m (1.9 kg-m, 14 ft-lb)
CAUTION: Make sure that the screw portion of the end of input rod is located inside the clevis. 3.
With the brake pedal pulled up and held by hand, press the stop lamp switch and the ASCD cancel
switch in until threaded ends contact the brake
pedal bracket.
4. With the threaded ends of the stop lamp switch and ASCD switch contacting the pedal bracket,
turn the switches 45° clockwise to lock in place.
Check that the stop lamp switch and ASCD cancel switch threaded end to brake pedal bracket gap
(C) is within specifications.
CAUTION: Make sure that the gap (C) between the brake pedal bracket and stop lamp switch and
ASCD cancel switch threaded ends are within specification. 5. Check the brake pedal for smooth
operation.
CAUTION:
Make sure that the stop lamp goes off when the brake pedal is released. 6. Start the engine and
check the height of the brake pedal when depressing it.
Page 110
HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS
Sample/wiring diagram -example- For detail, refer to following See: How To Read Wiring Diagrams/Description.
Description
HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS
Description
With Intelligent Key System
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations With Intelligent Key System
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Terminal Layout
TERMINAL LAYOUT
Page 5880
Should a customer note water in a lamp assembly, please use the above flow chart to determine if
the condition is normal or requires lamp replacement.
Procedures
Fuel Gauge Sender: Procedures
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly
Fuel Level Sender Unit
Disassembly 1. Disconnect the harness connectors. 2. Remove the fuel sensor from the pump
assembly. 3. Remove the sending unit module and floater arm assembly.
Assembly Assembly is the reverse order of disassembly.
Front
Brake Rotor/Disc: Testing and Inspection Front
FRONT DISC BRAKE
DISC ROTOR : Inspection
VISUAL Check surface of disc rotor for uneven wear, cracks, and serious damage. Replace as
necessary.
RUNOUT 1. Attach disc rotor to wheel hub using wheel nuts (at two or more positions).
2. Inspect runout using a dial gauge placed at 10 mm (0.39 in) inside the disc edge.
Runout limit : Refer to See: Specifications/Front Disc Brake (with it attached to the vehicle)
NOTE: Before measuring, make sure that wheel bearing axial end play is within the specification.
Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Wheel Hub/Testing and Inspection. 3. When runout
exceeds limit value, displace mounting positions of disc rotor by one hole. And then find a position
of the minimum value for runout. 4. If runout is outside the specified value after performing the
above operation, turn disc rotor using Tool.
Tool number : 38-PFM90.5 ( - )
THICKNESS Check thickness of the disc rotor using a micrometer. Replace disc rotor if thickness
is less than the wear limit.
Page 5262
7. Remove the TORX bolts (T30), remove the door lock assembly.
8. While pulling outside handle bracket, slide toward rear of vehicle to remove outside handle
bracket and door lock assembly.
9. Disconnect the outside handle cable.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 2004
Fuel Filter: Removal and Replacement
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
Removal and Installation
Short Wheel Base
Long Wheel Base
CAN Communication Signal Chart
Information Bus: Application and ID CAN Communication Signal Chart
CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
CAN Communication Signal Chart
Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Diagnosis And
Repair Work flow/How To Use CAN Communication Signal Chart for how to use CAN
communication signal chart.
NOTE: Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/CAN
Fundamental/How To Use This Section/Abbreviation List for the abbreviations of the connecting
units.
Locations
Front Oil Seal
Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Front Oil Seal
FRONT OIL SEAL
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Partially drain the transfer fluid. Refer to See: Fluid - Transfer Case/Service and
Repair. 2. Remove the front propeller shaft. Refer to See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and
Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Propeller Shaft 2F1310.
3. Remove the companion flange self-lock nut using Tool.
Tool number : KV40104000 ( - )
4. Put a matching mark on top of the front drive shaft in line with the mark on the companion flange.
CAUTION: Use paint to make the matching mark on the front drive shaft. Do not damage the front
drive shaft.
5. Remove the companion flange using suitable tool. 6. Remove the front oil seal from the front
case using Tool.
Diagrams
Windshield Washer Hose: Diagrams
FRONT WASHER NOZZLE AND TUBE
Washer Tube Layout
Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Garage Door Opener Transmitter: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER
Symptom Table
HOMELINK UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER MALFUNCTION
Symptom Table
Page 2067
Page 301
34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the
"Duplication Test" icon.
35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase.
36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18).
37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased.
^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs.
^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed.
Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below.
38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF.
39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch
(M/T) pedal;
Page 4274
IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) - Part 4
Page 939
Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Removal And Installation
AIR CLEANER FILTER
Removal and Installation (Viscous paper type)
REMOVAL
NOTE: The viscous paper type filter does not need cleaning between replacement intervals.
- Replace the air filter as necessary for periodic maintenance. Refer to See: .
1. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. 2. Remove the air cleaner case (upper). 3.
Remove the air cleaner filter from the air cleaner case (lower).
INSTALLATION 1. Install the new air cleaner filter in the air cleaner case (lower). 2. Install the air
cleaner case (upper). 3. Install the air duct and resonator assembly (inlet).
Page 3261
Disclaimer
Propeller Shaft 2F1310
Drive/Propeller Shaft: Specifications Propeller Shaft 2F1310
General Specification
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
General Specification
Propeller Shaft Runout
Propeller Shaft Joint Flex Effort
Journal Axial Play
Snap Ring
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Snap Ring
Page 2531
21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete.
NOTE:
If you can't print the above screen:
a. Select the Print icon.
b. Select Save.
c. Select OK.
A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC.
NOTE:
If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in
the following file location:
At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start.
Page 4092
Page 5338
5. Inspect nylon insert for wear or damage.
^ Replace the insert if any wear or damage is found.
6. Apply Permatex(R) Threadlocker Blue or equivalent to the threads on the bolt.
7. Reinstall insert, bolt and armrest assembly in reverse order of removal.
^ Bolt torque: 20 Nm (2 kg-m, 15 lb-ft)
Page 1312
Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications
Engine Oil Type
...........................................................................................................................................................
API Certification Mark, SAE 5W-30
Page 2375
3. Loosen the sensor approximately 10 degrees.
4. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds.
5. Tighten the sensor 10 degrees, then loosen the sensor 10 degrees.
^ Repeat this motion several times until the sensor begins to turn more easily.
6. Continue the tightening/loosening motion while gradually unscrewing the sensor. Stop when the
sensor will not unscrew any further.
7. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds.
8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 until the sensor is removed.
Page 3381
Page 1740
15. Select OK
VIN registration is complete
Exploded View
Spark Plug: Service and Repair Exploded View
SPARK PLUG
Exploded View
Page 186
Page 4461
8. Thread the outer sockets onto the inner sockets to the specified length "L", then tighten the lock
nuts to the specification. Reconfirm that the
tie-rod length "L" is within specification.
Maximum inner socket length "L" : 115.2 mm (4.54 in)
Specifications
Fuel Injector: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Fuel Injector
Page 1770
Service Procedure
Check NATS On The Vehicle
1. Check to see if the vehicle you're working on has "ECM based" NATS V2.0 or V5.0.
a. If the vehicle has ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0, it will NOT start after you install a service
replacement ECM. So you'll have to re-register all ignition keys, including spare keys with
CONSULT-II and the purple NATS card. After you do this, proceed with step 2.
^ If you do not know how to re-register the keys, refer to the ESM for the NATS key re-registration
procedure.
b. If the vehicle has "BCM based" NATS (instead of ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0), you do NOT
have to re-register the ignition or spare keys. Proceed with step 2.
Check For ECM Data Updates in ASIST
2. In ASIST, select [CONSULT Utilities] >>> [ECM/TCM Data]. Then choose Model and Model
Year (see Figure 1).
3. Look for ECM Data Updates (listed by ECM P/Ns and vehicle configuration) in the top, center
display panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
a. If there is not updates listed for your vehicle configuration, you do NOT have to reprogram the
service replacement ECM. Proceed with step 5.
b. If there is updates listed for your vehicle configuration, see if they apply to the service
replacement ECM you're going to install. Do this by performing step 4.
4. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then confirm that your
ECM is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, -XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details"
panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
a. If your ECM is listed in the "Details" panel, you must reprogram the ECM with the latest data
update. After you do this, proceed with step 5.
CAUTION:
The 1999-2000 Frontier and 1999-2000 Pathfinder have a gray CONSULT connector AND a white
GST connector. Do NOT attempt to perform the ECM Reprogramming procedure with CONSULT-II
connected to the gray CONSULT connector. See the appropriate ESM for further details if
necessary.
b. If your ECM is NOT listed in the "Details" panel, you do NOT have to reprogram the ECM.
Proceed with step 5.
Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
5. Perform the Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning as follows:
a. Make sure the accelerator pedal is fully released.
b. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds.
c. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" for 10 seconds.
Specifications
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Intake Air Temperature Sensor
Page 2741
a. Apply engine oil to O-ring and set it into the fuel tube.
CAUTION: Handle O-ring with bare hands. Never wear gloves.
- Lubricate O-ring with new engine oil.
- Do not clean O-ring with solvent.
- Make sure that O-ring and its mating part are free of foreign material.
- When installing O-ring, be careful not to scratch it with tool or fingernails. Also be careful not to
twist or stretch O-ring. b. Make sure that backup spacer is in the O-ring connecting surface of fuel
damper.
NOTE: Backup spacer is fuel damper assembly part.
c. Insert fuel damper until it seats on fuel tube.
CAUTION: Insert straight, making sure that the axis is lined up.
- Do not pressure-fit with excessive force.
Reference value :130 N (13.3 kg, 29.2 lb)
d. Install cap, and then tighten bolts evenly by turns.
- After tightening bolts, make sure that there is no gap between cap and fuel tube.
2. Install O-rings to fuel injector paying attention to the items below.
CAUTION: Upper and lower O-rings are different.
- Handle O-ring with bare hands. Never wear gloves.
- Lubricate O-ring with new engine oil.
- Do not clean O-ring with solvent.
- Make sure that O-ring and its mating part are free of foreign material.
- When installing O-ring, be careful not to scratch it with tool or fingernails. Also be careful not to
twist or stretch O-ring. If O-ring was stretched while it was being attached, do not insert it quickly
into fuel tube.
- Insert O-ring straight into fuel tube. Do not angle or twist it.
3. Install fuel injector to fuel tube.
a. Insert clip into clip mounting groove on fuel injector.
- Insert clip so that lug "A" of fuel injector matches notch "A" of the clip.
CAUTION: Do not reuse clip. Replace it with a new one.
- Be careful to keep clip from interfering with O-ring. If interference occurs, replace O-ring. b. Insert
fuel injector into fuel tube with clip attached.
- Insert it while matching it to the axial center.
- Insert fuel injector so that lug "B" of fuel tube matches notch "B" of the clip.
Page 2622
Page 2639
Page 2971
Locations
Page 4319
Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that
slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the
left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane.
This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although
the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be.
Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition
The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure
2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road.
Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center
^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less.
^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less.
When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to
counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle
should be driven on a straight flat road.
Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle
pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This
condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side.
Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition
The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road.
^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering
correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on
a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane
during this time (7 seconds).
Page 4292
Power Distribution Module: Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters
Reference Value
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Reference Value
VALUES ON THE DIAGNOSIS TOOL
Page 3727
Lock nut (A) : 18.7 N.m (1.9 kg-m, 14 ft-lb)
CAUTION: Make sure that the screw portion of the end of input rod is located inside the clevis. 3.
With the brake pedal pulled up and held by hand, press the stop lamp switch and the ASCD cancel
switch in until the threaded ends contact the
brake pedal bracket.
4. With the threaded ends of the stop lamp switch and ASCD switch contacting the pedal bracket,
turn the switches 45° clockwise to lock in place.
Check that the stop lamp switch and ASCD cancel switch threaded end to brake pedal bracket gap
(C) is within specifications.
CAUTION: Make sure that the gap (C) between the brake pedal bracket and stop lamp switch and
ASCD cancel switch threaded ends are within specification. 5. Check the brake pedal for smooth
operation.
CAUTION: Make sure that the stop lamp goes off when the brake pedal is released. 6. Start the
engine and check the height of the brake pedal when depressing it.
Page 2858
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL
Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE)
REMOVAL 1. Remove engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Engine Cover.
2. Remove air duct and resonator assembly. Refer to See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Air
Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair/Removal and
Installation.
3. Disconnect camshaft position sensor connector.
4. Remove camshaft position sensor (2) from Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (LH)
(1).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Replace the O-ring (3) of the camshaft position sensor with a new one, then lubricate
O-ring with engine oil before installing.
Camshaft position sensor bolt : 9.6 N.m (0.98 kg-m, 85 in-lb)
Page 1242
Connecting Rod Bearing Grade Table.
Undersize Bearings Usage Guide When the specified oil clearance is not obtained with standard size connecting rod bearings, use
undersize (US) bearings.
- When using undersize bearing, measure the bearing inside diameter with the bearing installed,
and grind the crankshaft pin so that the oil clearance satisfies the standard.
Bearing undersize table
CAUTION: In grinding the crankshaft pin to use undersize bearings, keep the fillet R (All crankshaft
pins).
Fillet R : 1.5 - 1.7 mm (0.059 - 0.067 in)
HOW TO SELECT MAIN BEARING
When New Cylinder Block and Crankshaft are Used 1. Apply the main bearing housing grade on
the bottom face of the cylinder block to the row in "Main Bearings Selection Table".
Page 338
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations Without Intelligent Key System
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Terminal Layout
TERMINAL LAYOUT
Front Suspension
Alignment: Specifications Front Suspension
Wheel Alignment
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1)
Wheelarch Height
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Wheelarch Height (Unladen*1)
Locations
Shift Indicator: Locations
METER SYSTEM
SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR : Component Parts Location
Page 2542
Service Procedure
Check NATS On The Vehicle
1. Check to see if the vehicle you're working on has "ECM based" NATS V2.0 or V5.0.
a. If the vehicle has ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0, it will NOT start after you install a service
replacement ECM. So you'll have to re-register all ignition keys, including spare keys with
CONSULT-II and the purple NATS card. After you do this, proceed with step 2.
^ If you do not know how to re-register the keys, refer to the ESM for the NATS key re-registration
procedure.
b. If the vehicle has "BCM based" NATS (instead of ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0), you do NOT
have to re-register the ignition or spare keys. Proceed with step 2.
Check For ECM Data Updates in ASIST
2. In ASIST, select [CONSULT Utilities] >>> [ECM/TCM Data]. Then choose Model and Model
Year (see Figure 1).
3. Look for ECM Data Updates (listed by ECM P/Ns and vehicle configuration) in the top, center
display panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
a. If there is not updates listed for your vehicle configuration, you do NOT have to reprogram the
service replacement ECM. Proceed with step 5.
b. If there is updates listed for your vehicle configuration, see if they apply to the service
replacement ECM you're going to install. Do this by performing step 4.
4. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then confirm that your
ECM is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, -XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details"
panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
a. If your ECM is listed in the "Details" panel, you must reprogram the ECM with the latest data
update. After you do this, proceed with step 5.
CAUTION:
The 1999-2000 Frontier and 1999-2000 Pathfinder have a gray CONSULT connector AND a white
GST connector. Do NOT attempt to perform the ECM Reprogramming procedure with CONSULT-II
connected to the gray CONSULT connector. See the appropriate ESM for further details if
necessary.
b. If your ECM is NOT listed in the "Details" panel, you do NOT have to reprogram the ECM.
Proceed with step 5.
Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
5. Perform the Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning as follows:
a. Make sure the accelerator pedal is fully released.
b. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds.
c. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" for 10 seconds.
Page 4215
TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS
Page 2438
Intake Valve Timing Control Position Sensor (LH)
Variable Valve Timing Actuator Position Sensor: Service and Repair Intake Valve Timing Control
Position Sensor (LH)
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL
Intake Valve Timing Control Position Sensor (LH)
REMOVAL 1. Remove engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Engine Cover.
2. Remove air duct and resonator assembly. Refer to See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Air
Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair/Removal and
Installation.
3. Disconnect intake valve timing control position sensor connector (LH).
4. Remove intake valve timing control position sensor (LH) (1) from Intake valve timing control
solenoid valve cover (LH) (3).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Replace the O-ring (2) of the intake valve timing control position sensor with a new one,
then lubricate O-ring with engine oil before installing.
Intake valve timing control position sensor bolt : 9.6 N.m (0.98 kg-m, 85 in-lb)
Page 994
Disclaimer
Page 3308
Tool number : SP8P
INSTALLATION 1. Apply multi-purpose grease to the lips of the new front oil seal. Then drive the
new front oil seal in evenly to the gear carrier using Tool.
CAUTION: Do not reuse front oil seal.
- Do not incline the new front oil seal when installing.
- Apply multi-purpose grease to the lips of the new front oil seal.
2. Install the companion flange to the drive pinion while aligning the matching marks. 3. Apply
anti-corrosive oil to the threads of the drive pinion and the seating surface of the new drive pinion
lock nut. Then adjust the drive pinion
lock nut tightening torque using Tool A, and check the total preload torque using Tool B.
- The total preload torque should be within the total preload torque specification. When not
replacing the collapsible spacer, it should also be equal to the measurement taken during removal
plus an additional 0.56 N.m (0.06 Kg-m, 5 in-lb).
Engine - Engine Cover Removal Procedure
Access Cover: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Engine Cover Removal Procedure
Classification: EM09-004
Reference: NTB09-071
Date: August 4, 2009
TITAN, ARMADA, & PATHFINDER ENGINE COVER REMOVAL
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2010 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2010 Armada (TA60) 2008 - 2010 Pathfinder
(R51) with V8 engine.
IF YOU CONFIRM
The engine cover needs to be removed for any reason;
ACTION:
Make sure to follow the steps in the Service Procedure of this bulletin.
CAUTION
^ Do Not pull up on the front of the cover.
^ There are two locating studs underneath the rear of the cover.
^ If you pull up on the front of the cover, it will break/damage the cover near the locating studs.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Damage to the engine cover caused by incorrect removal or installation will not be considered a
manufacturer defect and will not be covered under warranty.
Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters
Engine Control Module: Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout
ECM
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout
ECM Terminal And Reference Value
ECM
ECM Terminal and Reference Value
PREPARATION ECM is located in the engine room passenger side behind battery.
ECM INSPECTION TABLE Specification data are reference values and are measured between
each terminal and ground. Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-III.
CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may
result in damage to the ECMs transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the
ground.
Page 3959
ABLS/ABS
Page 2579
CAUTION: Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly.
- Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket.
- Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling.
- Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water.
Removal 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2.
Disconnect the accelerator position sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the two upper and one
lower accelerator pedal nuts. 4. Remove the adjustable accelerator pedal assembly.
CAUTION: Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly.
- Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket.
- Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling.
- Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Inspection After Installation Check that the accelerator pedal moves smoothly within the specified range.
Non-adjustable accelerator pedal - total pedal applied stroke : 48 mm (1.89 in)
- Depress and release the accelerator pedal to check that it returns smoothly to the original
released position.
- Perform an electrical inspection of the accelerator pedal position sensor. Refer to See: Testing
and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/VIN Registration See: Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning See:
Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning See:
Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning .
CAUTION: When the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor is disconnected,
perform "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to See: Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning .
Locations
Speedometer Module: Locations
METER SYSTEM
SPEEDOMETER : Component Parts Location
Removal And Installation
Rear Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Removal And Installation
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear door window and rear door module assembly. Refer to See: Rear Door
Window Glass/Service and Repair.
2. Remove the door side grommet and the bolt (TORX T30) from the grommet hole.
3. While pulling the outside handle, remove the door handle escutcheon.
4. While pulling the outside handle, slide it toward the rear of vehicle to remove.
5. Remove the front and rear gaskets. 6. Remove the inside handle screws.
Page 2784
f. Use the new tie-wrap to secure all the wires to the black corrugated tubing (see Figure 6).
^ New tie-wrap is included with the new sender unit.
^ Make sure all wires are tied together (3 fuel level sending unit wires and 2 fuel pump wires).
^ Place the Tie-Wrap 90 mm (about 3.5 inches) from the top of the tubing.
^ Make sure the wires do not interfere with the movement of the float arm.
4. Carefully reinstall the Fuel Pump Assembly back into the vehicle in reverse of removal.
^ IMPORTANT: Use a new seal (O-Ring) when reinstalling the Fuel Pump Assembly.
^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed.
CAUTION:
DO NOT bend the Float Arm when reinstalling the Fuel Pump.
5. Confirm the Fuel Gauge operates properly.
Recall 10V072000: Inspect Replace Brake Pedal
Assembly
Brake Pedal Assy: Recalls Recall 10V072000: Inspect Replace Brake Pedal Assembly
VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2008-2010 Nissan/Armada 2008-2010
Nissan/Quest 2008-2009 Nissan/Titan 2008-2010 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc.
MFR'S REPORT DATE: February 26, 2010
NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V072000
NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Service Brakes, Hydraulic: Pedals and Linkages
Potential Number of Units Affected: 179383
SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2008-2010 Titan, Armada, and Infiniti QX56,
and model year 2008-2009 Nissan Quest vehicles. The brake pedal pivot pin end was not
spin-formed to specification during the manufacturing process of the brake pedal assembly. The
pivot pin could slide and cause the brake pedal to partially disengage from the brake pedal bracket.
CONSEQUENCE: The driver will experience unusual and noticeable looseness in the pedal and a
reduction in braking force increasing the risk of a crash.
REMEDY: Dealers will inspect to see if the pivot pin had been formed properly and will replace the
brake pedal assembly if necessary free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin on or
before March 22, 2010. Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261.
NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle
Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov.
Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-037A Date: 100519
Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement
Reference: NTB10-037A
Date: May 19, 2010
VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2005 - 2009 ARMADA AND TITAN FUEL GAUGE
INACCURACY
This bulletin has been amended. Additions were made to the Parts Information. Please discard
previous versions of this bulletin.
CAMPAIGN ID #: R1010
NHTSA #: 10V-074
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2009 Armada (TA60) 2005 - 2009 Titan (A60)
Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility.
INTRODUCTION
Nissan is conducting a voluntary recall campaign on certain MY2005-2009 Armada and Titan
vehicles to address a potential fuel gauge inaccuracy. Specifically, the issue can cause the fuel
gauge to show that the vehicle still has some fuel, typically about one quarter tank, when the fuel
tank is actually empty. To remedy this potential condition, Nissan is conducting this Voluntary
Safety Recall Campaign to replace the fuel level sending unit with a new one at no charge for parts
or labor.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number R1010 to this campaign. This number must appear on
all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle
falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service
department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient
(tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in
dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to
do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While
federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used
vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed.
Page 5948
Fog/Driving Lamp: Adjustments
FRONT FOG LAMP
Aiming Adjustment
The fog lamp is a semi-sealed beam type which uses a replaceable halogen bulb. Before
performing aiming adjustment, make sure of the following. Keep all tires inflated to correct pressure.
- Place vehicle on level ground.
- See that vehicle is unloaded (except for full levels of coolant, engine oil and fuel, and spare tire,
jack, and tools). Have the driver or equivalent weight placed in driver seat.
Adjust aiming in the vertical direction by turning the adjustment screw.
NOTE: Access adjustment screw from underneath front bumper. Use a T-3 (3 mm) Torx(R) bit or a
3 mm allen wrench to adjust. Turn screw clockwise to raise pattern and counterclockwise to lower
pattern.
1. Set the distance between the screen and the center of the fog lamp lens as shown. 2. Turn front
fog lamps ON.
Page 2487
d. Press [START] on the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" screen. See Figure 4.
e. Press [START] on the "WORK SUPPORT" screen to begin the Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL)
procedure. See Figure 5.
^ The IAVL procedure will take several minutes to complete.
^ CONSULT will display "Please Wait" in the center of the screen while the IAVL procedure is in
process. See Figure 6.
Page 1843
Specifications
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Intake Air Temperature Sensor
Component Locations
Engine Control Module: Component Locations
Locations
Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-009 Date: 100119
Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure
Classification: EM09-015
Reference: NTB10-009
Date: January 19, 2010
REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR SEIZED EXHAUST SENSOR
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan vehicles
SERVICE INFORMATION
If an exhaust sensor is seized in the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube, perform the procedure
described in this bulletin to remove the sensor and prevent unnecessary replacement of the
exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube.
In most cases this procedure is successful. This is because the threads of the exhaust sensors are
made of a softer material than the part they thread into on the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube.
NOTE:
The replacement of exhaust manifolds/catalysts/front tubes for stripped exhaust sensor threads
may not be considered a warrantable expense.
This procedure can be performed by two methods:
Method #1 - If the Sensor Can Be Easily Accessed
^ The procedure can be performed on the vehicle.
^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube will not have to be removed.
Method #2 - If the Sensor Cannot Be Easily Accessed
^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube must be removed from the vehicle.
^ The procedure will be performed with the part clamped in a vice.
Method #2 is described in this bulletin. Method #1 is the same as Method #2 except that it is
performed on the vehicle.
Service Procedure
Rust Penetrant
Recommended rust penetrants to be used in this procedure:
Page 824
^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering
correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on
a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane
during this time (7 seconds).
ABLS/ABS
Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair ABLS/ABS
ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY)
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to
See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 3. Drain the brake fluid.
Refer to See: Hydraulic System/Brake Fluid/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 4.
Disconnect the actuator harness connector from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
CAUTION: To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench to prevent the flare nuts
and brake tubes from being damaged.
- Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is
splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately.
5. Disconnect the brake tubes. 6. Remove the three bolts and remove the ABS actuator and
electric unit (control unit).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: To install, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench (commercial service tools).
- Always tighten brake tubes to specification when installing.
- Never reuse drained brake fluid.
Page 1168
NOTE:
See Figure 6 above for an example of damaged caused by incorrect removal.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTIONS (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the bolts at the front of the cover:
CAUTION:
^ Do not pull up on the front of the cover.
^ If you pull up on the front of the cover, it will break the cover.
Component Locations
Engine Control Module: Component Locations
Page 333
Engine Control Module: Programming and Relearning
Procedure After Replacing ECM
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
Procedure After Replacing ECM
When replacing ECM, the following procedure must be performed. 1. Perform initialization of NVIS
(NATS) system and registration of all NVIS (NATS) ignition key IDs. Refer to See: Accessories and
Optional
Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/ECM
Re-Communicating Function.
2. Perform See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/VIN Registration. 3. Perform See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Accelerator Pedal
Released Position Learning.
4. Perform See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve
Closed Position Learning.
5. Perform See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning. 6. Perform See: Powertrain Management/Computers and
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Idle Air Volume
Learning.
VIN Registration
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
VIN Registration
DESCRIPTION VIN Registration is an operation to registering VIN in ECM. It must be performed
each time ECM is replaced.
NOTE: Accurate VIN which is registered in ECM may be required for Inspection and Maintenance
(I/M).
OPERATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-III 1. Check the VIN of the vehicle and note it. Refer to See: Application and
ID/Identification Number. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and engine stopped. 3. Select "VIN
REGISTRATION" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode. 4. Follow the instruction of CONSULT-III display.
Page 4690
Blower Speed Control Specification
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Variable Blower Control The variable blower control is located on the cooling unit. The variable
blower control receives a gate voltage from the front air control to steplessly maintain the blower
motor voltage in the 0 to 5 volt range (approx.).
Page 4573
2. Remove the shock absorber upper and lower nuts and bolts using power tool. 3. Remove the
shock absorber.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Inspect the shock absorber for any oil leaks, cracks, or
deformations. Replace the shock absorber as necessary.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Shock absorber upper and lower nuts : Refer to See: Service and Repair/Rear Suspension
Propeller Shaft 2F1310
Drive/Propeller Shaft: Testing and Inspection Propeller Shaft 2F1310
NOISE, VIBRATION, AND HARSHNESS (NVH) TROUBLESHOOTING
NVH Troubleshooting Chart
Use the chart below to help you find the cause of the symptom. If necessary, repair or replace
these parts.
Capacity Specifications
Refrigerant: Capacity Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Refrigerant
Capacity................................................................................................................................................
.................................. 0.70 ± 0.05 kg (1.54 ± 0.11 lb)
Page 236
^ CONSULT will display "CMPLT" in the top right corner of the screen when the IAVL procedure is
finished. See Figure 7.
f. Once the IAVL procedure is finished, proceed with step 7.
For 2005 and Later MY Vehicles ONLY: Enter VIN Into New Service Replacement ECM
7. Enter the VIN into the new service replacement ECM as follows:
a. Select [ENGINE] on the "Select System" screen. See Figure 8.
b. Select [WORK SUPPORT] on the "Select Diag Mode" screen. See Figure 9.
Page 2611
3. Loosen the sensor approximately 10 degrees.
4. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds.
5. Tighten the sensor 10 degrees, then loosen the sensor 10 degrees.
^ Repeat this motion several times until the sensor begins to turn more easily.
6. Continue the tightening/loosening motion while gradually unscrewing the sensor. Stop when the
sensor will not unscrew any further.
7. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds.
8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 until the sensor is removed.
Page 3977
Page 3380
Drive/Propeller Shaft: Specifications Propeller Shaft 3S1410
General Specification
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
General Specification
4WD Model
Propeller Shaft Runout
Journal Axial Play
Propeller shaft Joint Flex Effort
Snap Ring
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Snap Ring
Service and Repair
Heater Core: Service and Repair
HEATER CORE
Removal and Installation
Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
REMOVAL 1. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to See: Housing Assembly
HVAC/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the four screws and remove the upper bracket. 3. Remove
the four screws and remove the heater core cover.
Page 4500
Repair Overview
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Lower Link Inspection
1. Raise the vehicle.
2. Locate and write down the "Lot Number" stamped on the bottom side of the suspension lower
links.
^ Refer to the Lot Number Locations below.
^ Armada and Pathfinder: Inspect front and rear (all 4) lower links.
^ Frontier, Titan, and Xterra: Inspect both front lower links.
3. Compare the Lot Number of each lower link to the Lot Number examples below.
Page 5570
Recall 10V074000: Fuel Sender Replacement
Fuel Gauge Sender: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 10V074000: Fuel Sender Replacement
VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2005-2009 Nissan/Armada 2005-2009
Nissan/Titan 2005-2009 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc.
MFR'S REPORT DATE: February 26, 2010
NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V074000 N/A
NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Fuel System, Other: Storage: Fuel Gauge System
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 340000
SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2005-2009 Titan, Armada, and Infiniti QX56
vehicles. The instrument panel fuel gauge may inaccurately display that the vehicle still has some
fuel, typically about one quarter tank, when the fuel tank is empty.
CONSEQUENCE: This could cause the vehicle to run out of gas and stall on the highway, which
could cause a crash.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the fuel sender unit inside the fuel tank with a new improved sender
card. This service will be performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin on or
before March 22, 2010. Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261.
NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle
Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov.
Page 1736
2. Select Direct Diagnostic Mode icon
3. Select System Diagnosis
Page 5545
Check the following. Harness connectors M31, E152
- Fuse block (J/B) connector M4
- 10A fuse
- Harness for open or short between ASCD brake switch and fuse
- Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 5. CHECK
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Turn ignition switch
OFF. 2. Disconnect ECM harness connector. 3. Check harness continuity between ECM terminal
108 and ASCD brake switch terminal 2. Refer to Wiring Diagram.
Continuity should exist.
4. Also check harness for short to ground and short to power. OK or NG OK - GO TO 6. NG Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 6. CHECK ASCD
BRAKE SWITCH Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing
and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/ASCD Brake Switch/Component
Inspection. OK or NG OK - GO TO 11. NG - Replace ASCD brake switch. 7. CHECK STOP LAMP
SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector. 3. Check voltage between stop lamp switch
terminal 1 and ground with CONSULT -III or tester.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG OK - GO TO 9. NG - GO TO 8. 8. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART Check the
following. Harness connectors M31, E152
- Fuse block (J/B) connector M60
- 10A fuse
- Harness for open or short between stop lamp switch and battery
- Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors. 9. CHECK
STOP LAMP SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN AND SHORT 1. Disconnect ECM
harness connector.
Page 324
With Intelligent Key System
Starter Relay: Locations With Intelligent Key System
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Terminal Layout
TERMINAL LAYOUT
Page 64
Page 506
Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Manual A/C (Type 1)
INTAKE SENSOR
System Description
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Intake Sensor
The intake sensor is located on the heater and cooling unit assembly. It converts temperature of air
after if passes through the evaporator into a resistance value which is then input to the front air
control.
Page 5049
MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. -
The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Abbreviation List
ABBREVIATIONS
Abbreviation List
The following ABBREVIATIONS are used:
Page 1036
Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications
Engine Oil Type
...........................................................................................................................................................
API Certification Mark, SAE 5W-30
ABLS/ABS
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair ABLS/ABS
Wheel Sensors
WHEEL SENSORS
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel sensor bolt. When removing the front wheel sensor, first remove the disc rotor to gain access to the front wheel
sensor bolt. Refer to See: Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Front.
2. Pull out the sensor, being careful to turn it as little as possible.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth.
- Do not pull on the sensor harness.
3. Disconnect wheel sensor harness electrical connector, then remove harness from attaching
points.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Inspect wheel sensor O-ring, replace sensor assembly if damaged.
- Clean wheel sensor hole and mounting surface with brake cleaner and a lint-free shop rag. Be
careful that dirt and debris do not enter the axle.
- Apply a coat of suitable grease to the wheel sensor O-ring and mounting hole.
Sensor Rotor
SENSOR ROTOR
Removal and Installation
FRONT WHEEL SENSOR ROTOR
Removal and Installation The front wheel sensor rotor is built into the front wheel hub and bearing
assembly and is not removable. If damaged, replace the front wheel hub and bearing assembly.
Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Wheel Hub/Service and Repair.
REAR WHEEL SENSOR ROTOR
Page 1694
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Connect C-III to the vehicle to begin the reprogramming procedure.
^ If you are not familiar with the reprogramming procedure. Refer to "CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM
Reprogramming" general procedure.
Caution
2. When you get to the ECM Reprogramming screen shown in Figure 1, confirm this bulletin
applies as follows:
A. On your C-III screen, look at the Part Number column (see Figure 1).
Diagram Information and Instructions
Power Distribution Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
Connector Symbols
HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS
Connector symbols
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the
direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector.
For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements,
"Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals
Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring
diagrams.
Sample/Wiring Diagram -Example-
Page 290
^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed.
^ C-III Security Card is installed.
^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still
cable-connected to the vehicle.
1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect
the VI to the vehicle.
CAUTION
2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer.
CAUTION
3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery:
For Conventional Vehicles
^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate.
NOTE:
The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended.
CAUTION
For Hybrid Vehicles
^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station.
^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery.
Page 3109
^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed.
^ C-III Security Card is installed.
^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still
cable-connected to the vehicle.
1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect
the VI to the vehicle.
CAUTION
2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer.
CAUTION
3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery:
For Conventional Vehicles
^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate.
NOTE:
The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended.
CAUTION
For Hybrid Vehicles
^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station.
^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery.
Page 6200
^ These scratches are typically long and have several scratches concentrated together.
^ These scratches can be found anywhere on the glass surface.
^ Thoroughly examine the entire length of the crack to identify any scratch as a start point.
3) How to determine if glass has distortion or cracks due to manufacturing Issue.
Disclaimer
Page 4952
FRONT RH BUCKLE REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Remove RH front seat and place on a clean surface. Refer to the appropriate section in the ESM
for removal procedure.
2. Remove screw and seat cushion outer finisher.
3. Remove bolt and seat belt buckle.
Page 1201
Standard : 34.000 - 34.016 mm (1.3386 - 1.3392 in)
Calculation of Valve Lifter Clearance (Valve lifter clearance) = (valve lifter hole diameter) - (valve
lifter diameter)
Standard : 0.013 - 0.039 mm (0.0005 - 0.0015 in)
- If the measurement is not within specification, referring to each specification of the valve lifter
diameter and hole diameter, replace either or both the valve lifter and cylinder head.
INSTALLATION 1. Install the valve lifters if removed. Install removed parts in their original locations.
2. Install the camshafts. Use the table below for identification of the RH and LH, and intake and
exhaust.
- Install so that the RH bank (B) dowel pins (A) and LH bank (C) dowel pins (A) at the front of the
camshaft face are in the direction shown.
3. Install the RH bank (B) and LH bank (D) camshaft brackets (A). Install by referring to the installation location mark (E) on the upper surface.
- Install so that the installation location mark (E) can be correctly read when viewed from the intake
manifold side (C).
Page 192
Page 2782
c. Remove the Fuel Temperature Sensor from the Plastic Retaining Clip.
d. Remove the wires from the Securing Tab.
e. Unplug the White Wire Connector at the top of the fuel pump.
^ DO NOT disturb the Black Wire Connector located next to the white Wire connector.
f. Carefully cut the tie-wrap securing the harnesses to the corrugated tubing.
CAUTION:
DO NOT damage the wires or the wire insulation when cutting the Tie-Wrap.
Procedures
Fuel Gauge Sender: Procedures
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly
Fuel Level Sender Unit
Disassembly 1. Disconnect the harness connectors. 2. Remove the fuel sensor from the pump
assembly. 3. Remove the sending unit module and floater arm assembly.
Assembly Assembly is the reverse order of disassembly.
Page 3754
3. Install brake hose connection (A) and new copper washer to cylinder body and tighten to
specification.
CAUTION: Do not reuse copper washers.
- Securely attach brake hose to protrusion on cylinder body.
4. Refill with new brake fluid and bleed air. Refer to See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair. 5.
Check rear disc brake for drag and correct as necessary. 6. Install rear wheel and tires.
Disassembly and Assembly
REAR DISC BRAKE
Disassembly and Assembly
DISASSEMBLY 1. Remove pads from cylinder body. 2. Remove sliding sleeve and boot from
cylinder body.
Page 2558
Page 3051
16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5).
^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB,
diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing.
17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.)
Page 4129
Power Distribution Module: Component Tests and General Diagnostics
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure
1. CHECK FUSES AND FUSIBLE LINK Check that the following IPDM E/R fuses or fusible link are
not blown.
Is the fuse blown? YES - Replace the blown fuse or fusible link after repairing the affected circuit.
NO - GO TO 2 2. CHECK BATTERY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R. 3. Check voltage between IPDM E/R harness
connectors and ground.
Is the measurement value normal? YES - GO TO 3 NO - Repair or replace harness. 3. CHECK
GROUND CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
Page 5505
Disclaimer
Service Procedure
1. Make sure the collapsible storage organizer is in the "deployed" position and the lids are
snapped closed.
Deployed Position: Side supports and floor are snapped in place.
2. Position the organizer at the rear of the bed next to the tailgate.
^ If needed, loosen the knobs and slide the assembly rearward.
NOTE:
When sliding the organizer, apply light force to the center, or evenly to both sides.
CAUTION:
The organizer should only be moved in the bed of the truck when it is in the deployed position with
the lids snapped closed.
3. Lower the tailgate and remove both rail stops.
^ Use a 13/32" (10 mm) wrench.
Description and Operation
Cabin Air Filter: Description and Operation
IN-CABIN MICROFILTER
Description
FUNCTION The air inside the passenger compartment is filtered by the in-cabin micro-filters when
the heater or A/C controls are set on either the recirculation or fresh mode. The two in-cabin
microfilters are located in the heater and cooling unit assembly.
REPLACEMENT TIMING Replacement of the two in-cabin microfilters is recommended on a
regular interval depending on the driving conditions. Refer to See: Maintenance. It may also be
necessary to replace the two in-cabin microfilters as part of a component replacement if the
in-cabin microfilters are damaged.
Page 2199
4. Select Engine
5. Select OK
6. Select Work Support
Page 5831
Tachometer: Description and Operation System Description
METER SYSTEM
TACHOMETER : System Description
The tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per minute (rpm). The ECM provides an
engine speed signal to the combination meter via CAN communication lines.
Page 2897
SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal"
condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Page 3761
3. Remove the upper and lower sliding pin bolts (see Figure 1).
4. Support / hang the caliper cylinder body with a wire or other suitable support (see Figure 2).
^ Make sure the brake hose is not stretched or stressed.
^ Make sure the sensor harness bracket will not be bent by weight of the caliper cylinder body.
5. Refer to the BR Section of the Service Manual as needed to complete the brake service.
Page 2310
d. Reception item of "BCM": On "TCM", "UNKWN" is indicated. This means BCM cannot receive
the signal from TCM. Draw a line to
indicate an error between BCM and TCM (line 2-d in the figure below).
e. Reception item of "EPS" and "I-KEY": "UNKWN" is not indicated. This indicates normal
communication between EPS and I-KEY and their
receiving units. Do not draw any line.
NOTE: On CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR (without PAST), "UNKWN" is indicated even though the
item is not used in the trouble diagnosis. For the details of each item on CAN diagnostic support
monitor, refer to See: CAN Fundamental/Trouble Diagnosis.
Locations
Oil Pressure Gauge: Locations
METER SYSTEM
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE : Component Parts Location
Page 3158
Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Checking A/T Fluid
A/T FLUID
Checking the A/T Fluid (ATF)
CAUTION: If using the vehicle for towing, the A/T fluid must be replaced as specified. Refer to See:
Maintenance.
1. Before driving, the A/T fluid level can be checked at A/T fluid temperatures of 30° to 50° C (86°
to 122° F) using the "COLD" range on the A/T
fluid level gauge as follows: a. Park the vehicle on a level surface and set the parking brake. b.
Start the engine and move the selector lever through each gear position. Shift the selector lever
into the "P" position. c. Check the A/T fluid level with the engine idling. d. Remove the A/T fluid
level gauge and wipe it clean with a lint-free paper.
CAUTION: When wiping the A/T fluid from the A/T fluid level gauge, always use a lint-free paper,
not a cloth.
e. Re-insert the A/T fluid level gauge into the A/T fluid charging pipe until the cap contacts the top
of the A/T fluid charging pipe as shown.
CAUTION: To check A/T fluid level, insert the A/T fluid level gauge until the cap contacts the top of
the A/T fluid charging pipe, with the gauge reversed from the normal inserted position.
f. Remove the A/T fluid level gauge and note the A/T fluid level. If the A/T fluid level is at low side of
range, add A/T fluid to the transmission through the A/T fluid charging pipe.
CAUTION: Do not overfill the transmission with A/T fluid.
g. Install the A/T fluid level gauge and the A/T fluid level gauge bolt.
A/T fluid level gauge bolt : Refer to See: Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Transmission Assembly or See: Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Transmission Assembly.
2. Warm up the engine and transmission. 3. Check for any A/T fluid leaks. 4. Drive the vehicle to
increase the A/T fluid temperature to 80° C (176° F). 5. Allow the A/T fluid temperature to fall to
approximately 65°C (149°F). Use the CONSULT-III to monitor the A/T fluid temperature as follows:
Page 1657
^ For band clamp(s) locations on your vehicle, refer to the pictures shown above.
Page 2162
40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19.
NOTE:
For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF.
^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data.
41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42.
41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed.
^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service
Manual (ESM) for this procedure.
NOTE:
If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle.
IAVL can now be performed.
42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF.
^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs.
Page 1482
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Service and Repair Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve
(RH)
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL
Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve (RH)
REMOVAL 1. Remove drive belt. Refer to See: Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and
Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
connector (RH).
3. Remove Intake valve timing control solenoid valve (RH) (3) from Intake valve timing control
solenoid valve cover (RH) (1).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Replace the O-ring (2) of the Intake valve timing control solenoid valve with a new one,
then lubricate O-ring with engine oil before installing.
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve bolt : 9.6 N.m (0.98 kg-m, 85 in-lb)
Locations
Page 3983
3. Insert the screwdriver into either of the slots shown in Figure 1.
4. Turn the screwdriver until the two cover pieces separate (see Figure 2).
5. Replace the battery.
^ Make sure the + side of the battery faces the bottom cover piece.
6. Reattach the two cover pieces by pushing them together.
7. Turn on the vehicle and confirm the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator is not illuminated
in the dot matrix display.
8. If the indicator is still illuminated:
a) Turn off and exit the vehicle, making sure to close the door.
b) Re-enter the vehicle and turn it on. The indicator should be off.
Locations
Page 2099
Page 1455
EM-7
Page 2260
SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal"
condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Page 1305
OIL PUMP
REGULATOR VALVE
ENGINE OIL CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE)
Page 817
Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics
in this bulletin.
^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification.
1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle:
^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge
^ Road Crown Gauge
NOTE:
Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use.
2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test.
3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern.
^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60
mph.
^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel
position during the road test.
NOTE:
^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have
been resolved.
^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then
diagnosis cannot be performed.
4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center"
below.
5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel
Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete.
6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step.
Other Service Information
Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel
spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road
(see example in Figure 1).
If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the
normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain
water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place.
Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the
crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction.
Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully
counteract the effect of a highly crowned road.
Testing and Inspection
Radiator: Testing and Inspection
RADIATOR
Checking Radiator
Check radiator for mud or clogging. If necessary, clean radiator as follows.
CAUTION: Be careful not to bend or damage the radiator fins.
- When radiator is cleaned without removal, remove all surrounding parts such as cooling fan,
radiator shroud and horns. Then tape the harness and electrical connectors to prevent water from
entering.
1. Apply water by hose to the back side of the radiator core vertically downward. 2. Apply water
again to all radiator core surfaces. 3. Stop washing when dirt and debris no longer flow out from the
radiator. 4. Blow air into the back side of radiator core vertically downward. Use compressed air lower than 490 kPa (5 kg/cm2, 71 psi) and keep distance more than 30 cm
(11.8 in).
5. Blow air again into all the radiator core surfaces until no water sprays out.
Page 1665
The exhaust system may be hot. Allow to cool down before inspection/repairs.
NOTE: Exhaust system parts do not need to be removed for this inspection/repair.
1. Raise the vehicle on a hoist.
2. Inspect the heat shields on the front exhaust tube for the following:
^ Heat shield contact with the exhaust tube.
^ Separated/missing band clamp(s).
^ Missing "stand-off" (see Figure 4).
3. If a heat shield is found contacting the exhaust tube, pry it away to allow a minimum 1 mm (.040
inch) space.
^ Road test the vehicle to verify the repair.
4. If a band clamp is separated or missing, install new band clamps as needed.
Page 934
Air Cleaner Fresh Air Duct/Hose: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Engine Cover.
2. Disconnect the harness connector from air cleaner case (upper). 3. Remove the air duct and
resonator assembly and air cleaner case. 4. Remove air cleaner filter and air cleaner case (lower) Add marks as necessary for easier installation.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 4502
Compare the Lot Numbers of each lower link to these Lot Number examples.
Page 3957
WARNING: Never allow battery fluid to come in contact with skin, eyes, fabrics, or painted
surfaces. After touching a battery, never touch or rub your eyes until you have thoroughly washed
your hands. If acid contacts eyes, skin or clothing, immediately flush with water for 15 minutes and
seek medical attention.
- Remove the cell plug using a suitable tool.
- Add distilled water up to the MAX level.
Sulphation A battery will be completely discharged if it is left unattended for a long time and the
specific gravity will become less than 1.100. This may result in sulphation on the cell plates.
To determine if a battery has been "sulphated", note its voltage and current when charging it. As
shown in the figure, less current and higher voltage are observed in the initial stage of charging
sulphated batteries. A sulphated battery may sometimes be brought back into service by means of
a long, slow charge, 12 hours or more, followed by a battery capacity test.
SPECIFIC GRAVITY CHECK 1. Read hydrometer and thermometer indications at eye level.
2. Use the chart below to correct your hydrometer reading according to electrolyte temperature.
Page 5607
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect combination meter connector M25. 3. Check continuity
between combination meter harness connector M25 terminal 52 and ground, and connector M24
terminal 9 and ground.
Is the inspection result normal? YES - Inspection End. NO - Check ground harness.
BCM (Body Control Module)
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE) : Diagnosis Procedure
1. CHECK FUSES AND FUSIBLE LINK Check that the following fuses and fusible link are not
blown.
Is the fuse blown? YES - Replace the blown fuse or fusible link after repairing the affected circuit.
NO - GO TO 2 2. CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect BCM. 3. Check voltage between BCM harness
connector and ground.
Page 3154
Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications
Automatic Transmission Fluid Type
Type .....................................................................................................................................................
.............................. Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF*
* If Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF is not available, NISSAN Matic J ATF may also be used. Using
automatic transmission fluid other than NISSAN
Matic S ATF or Matic J ATF will cause deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission
durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not covered by the NISSAN new
vehicle limited warranty.
Service and Repair
Transfer Case Actuator: Service and Repair
TRANSFER CONTROL DEVICE
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Switch the 4WD shift switch to 2WD and set the transfer assembly to 2WD. 2.
Disconnect the transfer control device connector. 3. Remove the breather hose from the transfer
control device.
4. Remove the bolts and detach the transfer control device.
INSTALLATION 1. Install the new O-ring to the transfer control device.
CAUTION: Do not reuse O-ring.
- Apply petroleum jelly to O-ring.
2. Install the transfer control device.
a. Turn the control shift rod fully counterclockwise using a flat-bladed screwdriver, and then put a
mark on the control shift rod.
Page 4507
2. For rear lower link(s) identified as needing replacement:
Use the appropriate illustration in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual, section RSU, for
link replacement information.
^ Make sure to replace the ball joint securing nut with a new one. New nut is listed in the Parts
Information.
^ Make sure to replace both lower link nuts with new ones. New nuts are listed in the Parts
Information.
^ Follow torque specifications in the illustrations.
3. Perform a wheel alignment.
^ For Frontier, Xterra, and Titan: Perform a 2 wheel alignment (refer to Section FSU in the
appropriate Service Manual for alignment specifications and
adjustment points).
^ For Pathfinder and Armada: Perform a 4 wheel alignment. (Refer to sections FSU and RSU in the
appropriate Service Manual for alignment
specifications and adjustment points.)
NOTE:
The original (factory installed) bolts for the front lower links are self centering and should not need
replacement. The vehicle should need toe adjustment only.
4. Grind a large X (about 1/16 inch deep) on the bottom side of the old link so it can be identified as
a non-usable part.
NOTE:
Make sure to use suitable hand and eye protection.
Fuse Block - Junction Box (J/B)
Fuse: Locations Fuse Block - Junction Box (J/B)
FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)
Terminal Arrangement
Page 1020
Fluid - Differential: Service and Repair Differential Gear Oil
Changing Differential Gear Oil
DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL
Changing Differential Gear Oil
DRAINING 1. Stop engine.
2. Remove the drain plug from the rear final drive assembly to drain the differential gear oil. 3.
Install the drain plug with sealant applied on the threads to the rear final drive assembly. Tighten to
the specified torque. Refer to See:
Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential Assembly/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive
M226.
- Use High Performance Thread Sealant or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type
Specifications.
FILLING 1. Remove the filler plug from the rear final drive assembly.
2. Fill the rear final drive assembly with new differential gear oil until the level reaches the specified
level near the filler plug hole.
Differential gear oil grade and capacity : Refer to See: .
3. Install the filler plug with sealant applied on the threads to the rear final drive assembly. Tighten
to the specified torque. Refer to See:
Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential Assembly/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive
M226.
- Use High Performance Thread Sealant or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type
Specifications.
Front Final Drive M205
DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL
Checking Differential Gear Oil
DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL LEAKAGE AND LEVEL 1. Make sure that differential gear oil is not
leaking from the front final drive assembly or around it.
Page 5805
REMOVAL
WARNING: Follow the "General Precautions" before working on the fuel system. Refer to See:
Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Service Precautions . 1. Remove the fuel
filler cap to release the pressure from inside the fuel tank.
Page 5463
a. Starting at the top of the seat back board pull the top down and away from the seat back. See
Figure 2.
b. Pull the middle part of the seat back board away from the seat back to disengage the middle 2
tabs.
c. Pull bottom of the seat back board away from the seat back.
NOTE:
A trim tool can be used to assist in the removal of the 2 bottom clips.
8. Install the seat back board:
a. Install 2 new clips at the bottom and push the seat back board in until it clicks into place.
b. Locate the 2 tabs at the top and push in the seat back board until it is securely in place.
c. Press in the seat back board at the 2 tabs located on the side until it clicks into place.
Module B (for hard seat backs)
1 Move / adjust the right front passenger seat bottom and seat back to the full forward position.
2. Remove the right front hard seat back board as follows:
NOTE:
The seat back board is held on with:
Page 2808
Fuel Gauge Sender: Removal and Replacement
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
Removal and Installation
Short Wheel Base
Long Wheel Base
Page 2345
- Models with floor shift
- Models with column shift
Is the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO 3. NO - Repair the main line between the A/T
assembly and the harness connector F14. 3. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (OPEN CIRCUIT)
1. Disconnect the harness connectors E50 and B75. 2. Check the continuity between the harness
connectors.
Is the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO 4. NO - Repair the main line between the harness
connectors E5 and E50. 4. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (OPEN CIRCUIT) 1. Disconnect the
harness connectors B37 and B200. 2. Check the continuity between the harness connectors.
Is the inspection result normal? YES (Present error) - Check the following items again. Decision of CAN system type.
- Not received CONSULT-III data [SELF-DIAG RESULTS, CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR ("ECU
list" included)].
- Not copied from on-board diagnosis.
- Procedure for detecting root cause.
YES (Past error) - Error was detected in the main line between the TCM and the driver seat control
unit. NO - Repair the main line between the harness connectors B75 and B37.
Main Line Between DIFF And DLC Circuit
MAIN LINE BETWEEN DIFF AND DLC CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 3. Check the following terminals and
connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side). Harness connector B69
Page 430
9. Detach 2 harness clips as shown from seat cushion pan.
WARNING:
Before removal, make careful note of the exact routing and clip placement of the harnesses for
reassembly.
Page 1152
Disclaimer
Specifications
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Mass Air Flow Sensor
Page 203
15. Select OK
VIN registration is complete
Page 4383
Alignment: Service and Repair
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Front Wheel Alignment
PRELIMINARY INSPECTION
WARNING: Always adjust the alignment with the vehicle on a flat surface.
NOTE: If alignment is out of specification, inspect and replace any damaged or worn suspension
parts before making any adjustments. 1. Check and adjust the wheel alignment with the vehicle
under unladen conditions. "Unladen conditions" means that the fuel, coolant, and lubricant
are full; and that the spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats are in their designated positions.
2. Check the tires for incorrect air pressure and excessive wear. 3. Check the wheels for run out
and damage. Refer to See: Wheels and Tires/Testing and Inspection. 4. Check the wheel bearing
axial end play. Refer to See: Suspension/Wheel Hub/Testing and Inspection . 5. Check the shock
absorbers for leaks or damage. 6. Check each mounting point of the suspension components for
any excessive looseness or damage. 7. Check each link, arm, and the rear suspension member for
any damage. 8. Check the vehicle height. Refer to See: Specifications/Front
Suspension/Wheelarch Height.
GENERAL INFORMATION AND RECOMMENDATIONS 1. A Four-Wheel Thrust Alignment should
be performed. This type of alignment is recommended for any NISSAN vehicle.
- The four-wheel "thrust" process helps ensure that the vehicle is properly aligned and the steering
wheel is centered.
- The alignment machine itself should be capable of accepting any NISSAN vehicle.
- The alignment machine should be checked to ensure that it is level.
2. Make sure the alignment machine is properly calibrated. -
Your alignment machine should be regularly calibrated in order to give correct information.
- Check with the manufacturer of your specific alignment machine for their recommended
Service/Calibration Schedule.
THE ALIGNMENT PROCESS IMPORTANT: Use only the alignment specifications listed. Refer to
See: Specifications/Front Suspension/Wheel Alignment. 1. When displaying the alignment settings,
many alignment machines use "indicators": (Green/red, plus or minus, Go/No Go). Do NOT use
these
indicators.
- The alignment specifications programmed into your alignment machine that operate these
indicators may not be correct.
- This may result in an ERROR.
2. Some newer alignment machines are equipped with an optional "Rolling Compensation" method
to "compensate" the sensors (alignment targets or
head units). Do NOT use this "Rolling Compensation" method.
- Use the "Jacking Compensation" method. After installing the alignment targets or head units,
raise the vehicle and rotate the wheels 1/2 turn both ways.
- See Instructions in the alignment machine you are using for more information.
CAMBER AND CASTER 1. Measure camber and caster of both the right and left wheels with a
suitable alignment gauge and adjust as necessary to specification.
Camber and caster : Refer to See: Specifications/Front Suspension/Wheel Alignment.
NOTE: Some vehicles may be equipped with straight (non-adjustable) lower link bolts and
washers. In order to adjust camber and caster on these vehicles, first replace the lower link bolts
and washers with adjustable (cam) bolts and washers.
Page 5560
MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. -
The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Abbreviation List
ABBREVIATIONS
Abbreviation List
The following ABBREVIATIONS are used:
Page 5297
4. Install the cable securely to the lock. 5. After installing, check the hood lock adjustment and hood
opener operation.
Page 4802
Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Low-Pressure Pipe
LOW-PRESSURE PIPE
Removal and Installation for Low-Pressure Pipe
REMOVAL 1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Refrigeration System . 2.
Remove the low-pressure pipe.
CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipes with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the
entry of air.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Description and
Operation/Refrigeration System/Component .
CAUTION: Replace the O-ring of the high/low-pressure pipe with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it
when installing it.
- After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
Page 4923
Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair
DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
CAUTION: Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at
least 3 minutes.
1. Disconnect the harness connectors for each air bag module and seat belt pre-tensioner. 2.
Remove center console. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service
and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Center
Console.
3. Disconnect diagnosis sensor unit harness connectors. 4. Remove bolts from the diagnosis
sensor unit.
CAUTION: Do not use old bolts; replace with new bolts.
- Check diagnosis sensor unit bracket to ensure it is free of deformities, dents, cracks or rust. If it
shows any visible signs of damage, replace with new one.
- Replace diagnosis sensor unit if it has been dropped or sustained an impact.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Always follow the tightening sequence shown.
- After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer
to See: Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/SRS
Operation Check.
CAUTION: The diagnosis sensor unit must always be installed with the arrow mark "[=" pointing toward the
front of the vehicle for proper operation.
ECU DISCRIMINATED NO. After replacing the diagnosis sensor unit, confirm that the diagnosis
sensor unit identification is correct for the vehicle as equipped. Refer to See: Air Bag
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Scan Tool Testing and Procedures/On Board Diagnostic (OBD)
System/CONSULT-III Function (Air Bag).
Page 792
Specifications
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Mass Air Flow Sensor
Page 1890
Page 3484
2. Install differential lock position switch on gear carrier and tighten differential lock position switch
bolts with the specified torque. Refer to See:
Differential Assembly/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD).
3. Install side bearing adjusters into gear carrier.
4. Apply gear oil to side bearings. Install differential case assembly with side bearing outer races
into gear carrier. 5. Apply multi-purpose grease to differential lock position connector.
CAUTION: Do not reuse sensor connector. 6. Connect differential lock solenoid harness (B) and
differential lock position switch connector (A). Then install it to gear carrier, tighten to the
specified torque. Refer to See: Differential Assembly/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive
M226 (ELD).
Arrow Indicate Front 7. Align paint matching mark on side bearing caps with that on gear carrier
and install side bearing caps on gear carrier without tightening to
specification.
Page 2468
CAUTION
4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF.
^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure.
^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF.
^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear
defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel
heater, etc.
CAUTION
5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running.
If the cooling fans are running:
a. Turn the ignition OFF.
b. Wait for the engine to cool.
c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF).
d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running.
6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer.
7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress"
message to clear.
Service and Repair
Front Door Window Glass: Service and Repair
FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR
Removal and Installation
FRONT DOOR GLASS
Removal 1. Remove the front door speaker. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional
Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Speaker/Service and
Repair/MID Audio/Front Door Speaker.
2. Remove the hole cover over rear glass bolt. 3. Operate the power window main switch to
raise/lower the door window until the glass bolts can be seen. 4. Remove the inside seal. 5.
Remove the glass bolts.
6. While holding the front door glass, raise it at the rear end and pull the glass out of the sash
toward the outside of the door.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Glass bolts : 6.1 N.m (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb)
Fitting Inspection
Page 2337
Diagnosis Sheet (CAN Type 14)
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
Diagnosis Sheet (CAN Type 14)
Page 2320
6. The circuit which has the most amount of lines are the possible cause. Error is detected from
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) branch
line (shaded in the figure below).
NOTE: For abbreviations, refer to See: CAN Fundamental/How To Use This Section/Abbreviation
List. 7. Perform the inspection procedure for the possible cause. Refer to "MALFUNCTION AREA
CHART".
Page 5181
8. Disconnect the harness clips from the black steel bumper. 9. Remove the rear bumper
reinforcement.
10. Remove the sonar sensor retainers from the rear bumper, if equipped. 11. Remove the sonar
sensors and harness from the rear bumper, if equipped.
- Disconnect the sonar sensors from harness.
12. Remove the license lamp harness from the rear bumper.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Apply sealant to clips securing upper step pad during installation.
Page 2152
8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.)
9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.)
10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2).
12. Select Select.
Page 1821
40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19.
NOTE:
For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF.
^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data.
41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42.
41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed.
^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service
Manual (ESM) for this procedure.
NOTE:
If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle.
IAVL can now be performed.
42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF.
^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs.
Tools and Equipment
Fuel Supply Line: Tools and Equipment
Niss./Toy. Line Disconnect Tool
AST tool# 8026
5/16"Fuel Line Disconnect Tool. Used for disconnecting the fuel line from the fuel rail. Applicable to
2004 and newer Nissan and Toyota Models
- 5/16" Fuel Line Disconnect Tool
- Quick Line Removal*Green-Anodized Aluminum Construction
- See Application Chart
- Included in the #8110 Line Disconnect Set.
Contact AST for pricing.
Assenmacher Specialty Tools 1-800-525-2943
This Tool is also available in the following kits:
Page 4426
- Confirm mating marks are aligned with hose and clamp, then correct if needed.
- To install eye joint, align projection of eye joint with notch of power steering pump, and attach eye
joint to power steering pump properly. Tighten eye bolt by hand fully, then torque to specification.
Warning Chime System
Audible Warning Device: Locations Warning Chime System
WARNING CHIME SYSTEM
WARNING CHIME SYSTEM : Component Parts Location
Exploded View
Spark Plug: Service and Repair Exploded View
SPARK PLUG
Exploded View
Locations
Page 2333
Diagnosis Sheet (CAN Type 10)
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
Diagnosis Sheet (CAN Type 10)
Page 2900
Consult-III Checking System
Standardized Relay
STANDARDIZED RELAY
Description
NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided
into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays.
Page 916
- Thickness of a new valve lifter can be identified by stamp marks on the reverse side (inside the
cylinder).
Stamp mark N788 indicates 7.88 mm (0.3102 in) in thickness. Available thickness of valve lifter: 25 sizes with range 7.88 to 8.36 mm (0.3102 to 0.3291 in) in
steps of 0.02 mm (0.0008 in)
(when manufactured at factory). Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Engine
Lubrication/Specifications. 5. Install the selected valve lifter. 6. Install the camshaft. 7. Manually
turn the crankshaft pulley a few turns. 8. Make sure the valve clearances for a cold engine are
within specifications. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Engine
Lubrication/Specifications.
9. After completing the repair, check the valve clearances again with the specifications for a
warmed engine. Make sure the values are within specifications. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Engine Lubrication/Specifications.
Page 1333
EM-5
Page 4142
Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal.
2. Remove IPDM E/R upper cover. 3. Release two clips and pull IPDM E/R up from case.
4. Disconnect IPDM E/R connectors and remove the IPDM E/R.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Engine Controls - DTC P0451 Stored In The ECM
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - DTC P0451 Stored In The
ECM
Classification: EC09-027
Reference: NTB09-121
Date: November 3, 2009
2009 TITAN AND ARMADA; DTC P0451 STORED
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2009 Titan (A60) 2009 Armada (TA60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
DTC P0451 (EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor Performance) is stored,
ACTIONS
1. Confirm this bulletin applies.
a. Check and compare your current ECM Part Number to Table A or B shown in this bulletin.
b. If that part number does not match one in Table A, this bulletin does not apply. Go back to
ASIST for further diagnostic and repair information.
2. If this bulletin applies, reprogram the ECM.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTIONS (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is
essential to successfully completing this repair.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Connect C-III to the vehicle to begin the reprogramming procedure.
Page 6011
If the moisture trickles, drips, or pools, it may not be considered normal and the lamp assembly
may have a water leak path. See Figure 2 for an example.
If large drops of water collect inside the lens, refer to the flow chart below to find the next step.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Page 3936
Consult-III Checking System
Standardized Relay
STANDARDIZED RELAY
Description
NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided
into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays.
Page 2297
Symptom When Error Occurs In CAN Communication System
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Symptom When Error Occurs in CAN Communication System
In CAN communication system, multiple units mutually transmit and receive signals. Each unit
cannot transmit and receive signals if any error occurs on CAN communication line. Under this
condition, multiple control units related to the root cause malfunction or go into fail-safe mode.
ERROR EXAMPLE
NOTE: Each vehicle differs in symptom of each unit under fail-safe mode and CAN communication line
wiring.
- Refer to See: CAN Fundamental/How To Use This Section/Abbreviation List for the unit
abbreviation.
Example: TCM branch line open circuit
Page 6123
Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Rear Power Window Switch
Rear Door Switch
REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH
Removal and Installation - Rear Door Switch
REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear power window switch assembly from the rear door finisher. Refer to
See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front
Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair.
2. Remove the rear power window switch (2) from the power window switch finisher (1) by
releasing the tabs using suitable tool (A).
CAUTION: Wrap a cloth around suitable tools to protect components from damage.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Power Drop Glass Switch
REAR POWER WINDOW SWITCH
Removal and Installation - Power Drop Glass Switch
REMOVAL 1. Release the pawls and remove the overhead console switch panel (1) from the
overhead console (2).
2. Disconnect the power drop glass switch (3). 3. Remove the power drop glass switch (3) from the
overhead console switch panel (1) by releasing the tabs using suitable tool.
CAUTION: Wrap a cloth around suitable tools to protect components from damage.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 4686
TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS
Page 125
Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation Signal Buffer System
System Diagram
SIGNAL BUFFER SYSTEM
System Diagram
System Description
SIGNAL BUFFER SYSTEM
System Description
IPDM E/R reads the status of the oil pressure switch and transmits the oil pressure switch signal to
BCM via CAN communication. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Information Bus/Description and Operation/CAN Communication System/System
Description.
Base Audio
Radio/Stereo: Service and Repair Base Audio
AUDIO UNIT
Removal and Installation
AUDIO UNIT
Removal 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the cluster lid C. Refer to See:
Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Cluster LID D/Removal And Installation.
3. Remove the audio unit screws (A), using power tool. 4. Pull out the audio unit (1) and disconnect
the audio unit connectors.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 565
Fuel Gauge Sender: Removal and Replacement
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
Removal and Installation
Short Wheel Base
Long Wheel Base
Page 2503
Page 3020
Page 182
Page 4078
Concept of auto active test
- IPDM E/R starts the auto active test with the door switch signals transmitted by BCM via CAN
communication. Therefore, the CAN communication line between IPDM E/R and BCM is
considered normal if the auto active test starts successfully.
- The auto active test facilitates troubleshooting if any systems controlled by IPDM E/R cannot be
operated.
Diagnosis chart in auto active test mode
Page 679
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations
Page 5041
DVD Player: Service and Repair Premium With Navigation
DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM
Removal and Installation
DVD PLAYER
Removal 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the center console bin. Refer to
See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Center Console.
3. Remove the DVD player screws. 4. Remove the DVD player.
Installation Installation is in reverse order of removal.
VIDEO MONITOR
Removal 1. Remove the rear roof console assembly. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior
Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the video monitor connector.
3. Remove the video housing screws. 4. Remove the video monitor and housing.
5. Remove the video monitor hinge screws and remove the video monitor.
Page 1001
Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Checking A/T Fluid
A/T FLUID
Checking the A/T Fluid (ATF)
CAUTION: If using the vehicle for towing, the A/T fluid must be replaced as specified. Refer to See:
.
1. Before driving, the A/T fluid level can be checked at A/T fluid temperatures of 30° to 50° C (86°
to 122° F) using the "COLD" range on the A/T
fluid level gauge as follows: a. Park the vehicle on a level surface and set the parking brake. b.
Start the engine and move the selector lever through each gear position. Shift the selector lever
into the "P" position. c. Check the A/T fluid level with the engine idling. d. Remove the A/T fluid
level gauge and wipe it clean with a lint-free paper.
CAUTION: When wiping the A/T fluid from the A/T fluid level gauge, always use a lint-free paper,
not a cloth.
e. Re-insert the A/T fluid level gauge into the A/T fluid charging pipe until the cap contacts the top
of the A/T fluid charging pipe as shown.
CAUTION: To check A/T fluid level, insert the A/T fluid level gauge until the cap contacts the top of
the A/T fluid charging pipe, with the gauge reversed from the normal inserted position.
f. Remove the A/T fluid level gauge and note the A/T fluid level. If the A/T fluid level is at low side of
range, add A/T fluid to the transmission through the A/T fluid charging pipe.
CAUTION: Do not overfill the transmission with A/T fluid.
g. Install the A/T fluid level gauge and the A/T fluid level gauge bolt.
A/T fluid level gauge bolt : Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Transmission Assembly or
See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Removal
and Replacement/Transmission Assembly.
2. Warm up the engine and transmission. 3. Check for any A/T fluid leaks. 4. Drive the vehicle to
increase the A/T fluid temperature to 80° C (176° F). 5. Allow the A/T fluid temperature to fall to
approximately 65°C (149°F). Use the CONSULT-III to monitor the A/T fluid temperature as follows:
Page 2109
^ Check and compare your current ECM Part Number to Table A or B (as it applies) shown above.
If the part number does not match one in Table A or B, this bulletin does not apply. Go back to
ASIST for further diagnostic and repair information.
If this bulletin applies, reprogram the ECM.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You
MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential
to successfully completing this repair.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 5147
Disclaimer
Page 3430
Shift Indicator: Description and Operation System Description
METER SYSTEM
SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR : System Description
The TCM receives A/T indicator signals from the park/neutral position (PNP) switch. The TCM then
sends A/T position indicator signals to the combination meter via CAN communication lines. The
combination meter indicates the received shift position.
Page 3623
8. Remove side bearing caps. 9. Loosen the side bearing adjusters using Tool.
Tool number : - (C - 4164)
10. Keep side bearing outer races together with inner races. Do not mix them up. Also, keep side
bearing adjusters together with bearing.
11. Remove side bearing adjusters from gear carrier. 12. Remove bracket for the differential lock
position switch connector and bolts.
13. Remove differential lock position switch.
INSTALLATION 1. Apply sealant to threads of differential lock position switch. Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications.
CAUTION: Remove old sealant adhering to gear carrier and differential lock position switch. Also
remove any moisture, oil, or foreign material adhering to application and gear carrier and
differential lock position switch.
Page 4954
7. Attach harness attachment clips to new hole locations on seat pan.
8. Install connector attachment clip to seat bracket to attach buckle assy. to seat.
9. Reinstall seat cushion outer finisher.
10. Install seat in reverse order of removal.
11. Reconnect the battery cables (positive cable first).
12. Operate all switches to make sure everything works as it should.
Locations
Page 4723
Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Manual A/C (Type 1)
INTAKE SENSOR
System Description
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Intake Sensor
The intake sensor is located on the heater and cooling unit assembly. It converts temperature of air
after if passes through the evaporator into a resistance value which is then input to the front air
control.
Page 3340
2. Remove the rear brake rotor. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake
System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Rear. 3. Remove the parking brake assembly from
the back plate. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Parking Brake System/Parking Brake
Control/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation.
4. Remove the four axle shaft bearing cage nuts and lock washers. 5. Remove the axle shaft
assembly using Tools as shown.
CAUTION: The axle shaft bearing cup may stay in place in the axle shaft housing. Remove the cup carefully
so as not to damage the inner surface of the axle shaft housing.
- Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft
assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing.
6. Remove the snap ring from the axle shaft using suitable snap ring pliers.
7. Secure the axle shaft in a suitable vise, then use a 1/4 in size drill bit to drill a hole approximately
3/4 into the thickness of the bearing ring retainer
[3/4 thickness is approximately 6.3 mm (0.25 in) deep].
CAUTION: Mount the axle shaft using a soft jaw vise to avoid damaging the axle shaft.
- Do not drill all the way through the bearing ring retainer, the drill may damage the axle shaft
surface.
Page 5719
Disconnect the quick connector as follows: -
Hold the sides of the connector, push in tabs and pull out the tube.
- If the connector and the tube are stuck together, push and pull several times until they start to
move. Then disconnect them by pulling.
CAUTION: The quick connector can be disconnected when the tabs are completely depressed. Do not twist
the quick connector more than necessary.
- Do not use any tools to disconnect the quick connector.
- Keep the resin tube away from heat. Be especially careful when welding near the tube.
- Prevent any acid liquids such as battery electrolyte, from getting on the resin tube.
- Do not bend or twist the resin tube during connection.
- Do not remove the remaining retainer on the hard tube (or the equivalent) except when the resin
tube or the retainer is replaced.
- When the resin tube or hard tube, or the equivalent, is replaced, also replace the retainer with a
new one (white colored retainer).
- To keep the quick connector clean and to avoid damage and contamination from foreign
materials, cover the quick connector with plastic bags or suitable material as shown.
8. Remove the four bolts and remove the fuel tank shield using power tool. 9. Remove the fuel tank
strap bolts while supporting the fuel tank with a suitable lift jack.
Page 5264
Page 2898
MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. -
The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Abbreviation List
ABBREVIATIONS
Abbreviation List
The following ABBREVIATIONS are used:
Page 4493
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 6024
NOTE:
^ The HID control unit includes a starter (xenon bulb socket). For some models, the starter is not
replaceable. In this case, replace only the HID control
unit using the old starter.
^ Torque specification for the screw that holds the starter to the HID control unit is:
^ 1.3 - 1.7 Nm (0.13 - 0.17 k-gm, 12 - 15 in-lb)
Page 3344
- Move joint up, down, left, right, and in axial direction. Check for any rough movement or
significant looseness.
- Check boot for cracks or other damage, and for grease leakage.
- If damaged, disassemble drive shaft to verify damage, and repair or replace as necessary.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Tighten wheel nuts to specification. Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and
Repair/Rotation.
Disassembly and Assembly
Front Drive Shaft
DRIVE SHAFT
Disassembly and Assembly
DISASSEMBLY
Final Drive Side 1. Mount the drive shaft in a vise.
CAUTION: When mounting the drive shaft in a vise, use copper or aluminum plates between the
vise and the drive shaft. 2. Remove the boot bands.
Locations
Page 2044
CAUTION: Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly.
- Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket.
- Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling.
- Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water.
Removal 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2.
Disconnect the accelerator position sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the two upper and one
lower accelerator pedal nuts. 4. Remove the adjustable accelerator pedal assembly.
CAUTION: Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly.
- Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket.
- Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling.
- Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Inspection After Installation Check that the accelerator pedal moves smoothly within the specified range.
Non-adjustable accelerator pedal - total pedal applied stroke : 48 mm (1.89 in)
- Depress and release the accelerator pedal to check that it returns smoothly to the original
released position.
- Perform an electrical inspection of the accelerator pedal position sensor. Refer to See: Testing
and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/VIN Registration See: Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning See:
Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning See:
Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning .
CAUTION: When the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor is disconnected,
perform "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to See: Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning .
Locations
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Locations
Service and Repair
Windshield Washer Reservoir: Service and Repair
WASHER TANK
Washer Fluid Reservoir
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal 1. Remove side washer fluid reservoir screw (2).
- Front and rear washer motor (1).
2. Remove front and rear washer motor connector.
3. Remove washer fluid level sensor connector. 4. Disconnect front and rear washer hoses.
5. Remove front washer fluid reservoir screw (2). 6. Remove washer fluid reservoir (1) from the
vehicle.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: After installation, add washer fluid up to the upper level of the washer fluid reservoir
inlet and check for leaks.
Page 4074
CAN COMMUNICATION CONTROL When CAN communication with ECM and BCM is impossible,
IPDM E/R performs fail-safe control. After CAN communication recovers normally, it also returns to
normal control.
If No CAN Communication Is Available With BCM
IGNITION RELAY MALFUNCTION DETECTION FUNCTION -
IPDM E/R monitors the voltage at the contact circuit and excitation coil circuit of the ignition relay
inside it.
- IPDM E/R judges the ignition relay error if the voltage differs between the contact circuit and the
excitation coil circuit.
- If the ignition relay cannot turn OFF due to contact seizure, it activates the tail lamp relay for 10
minutes to alert the user to the ignition relay malfunction when the ignition switch is turned OFF.
NOTE: The tail lamp turns OFF when the ignition switch is turned ON.
FRONT WIPER CONTROL IPDM E/R detects front wiper stop position by a front wiper auto stop
signal. When a front wiper auto stop signal is in the conditions listed below, IPDM E/R stops power
supply to wiper after repeating a front wiper 10 second activation and 20 second stop five times.
NOTE: This operation status can be confirmed on the IPDM E/R "DATA MONITOR" that displays
"Block" for the item "WIP PROT" while the wiper is stopped.
STARTER MOTOR PROTECTION FUNCTION IPDM E/R turns OFF the starter control relay to
protect the starter motor when the starter control relay remains active for 90 seconds.
Page 2376
9. Use compressed air to remove any metal debris from inside the boss threads.
CAUTION:
DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may
cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders.
10. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it.
11. Spray the boss threads with rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds.
12. Run a thread chaser through the boss to clean the threads.
^ Use Kent Moore part number J-43897-18 or J43897-12.
Page 2557
Intake Valve Timing Control Position Sensor (LH)
Variable Valve Timing Actuator Position Sensor: Service and Repair Intake Valve Timing Control
Position Sensor (LH)
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL
Intake Valve Timing Control Position Sensor (LH)
REMOVAL 1. Remove engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Engine Cover.
2. Remove air duct and resonator assembly. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Air
Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation.
3. Disconnect intake valve timing control position sensor connector (LH).
4. Remove intake valve timing control position sensor (LH) (1) from Intake valve timing control
solenoid valve cover (LH) (3).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Replace the O-ring (2) of the intake valve timing control position sensor with a new one,
then lubricate O-ring with engine oil before installing.
Intake valve timing control position sensor bolt : 9.6 N.m (0.98 kg-m, 85 in-lb)
Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration Procedure
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration
Procedure
Classification: EC09-028
Reference: NTB09-136
Date: December 1, 2009
2005 AND LATER; ECM VIN REGISTRATION
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2005 and later
SERVICE INFORMATION
The Applied Vehicles must have the correct Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) registered in the
Engine Control Module (ECM). The VIN registration process must be performed under the following
conditions.
^ When installing a new ECM
^ If, during vehicle service, the VIN registration inside the ECM is found to be missing or incorrect.
When needed, use the Service Procedure in this bulletin to perform ECM VIN registration.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for
any repairs being performed.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Connect C-III to the vehicle and perform the initial selections:
NOTE:
If C-III is already connected, go to Step 2.
a. Start C-III and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear.
b. Select the detected VI from the list.
c. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
d. Select Model and Year.
e. Confirm the correct model and year were selected.
f. Select Repair.
Page 2445
Page 5945
If the moisture trickles, drips, or pools, it may not be considered normal and the lamp assembly
may have a water leak path. See Figure 2 for an example.
If large drops of water collect inside the lens, refer to the flow chart below to find the next step.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-029 Date: 090421
Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming
Classification: EC09-007
Reference: NTB09-029
Date: April 21, 2009
CONSULT-III ECM REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE
APPLIED VEHICLES: All CONSULT-III (C-III) compatible Nissan vehicles
SERVICE INFORMATION
A complete step-by-step General Procedure for C-III ECM Reprogramming is now available in the
on-line version of this bulletin.
This General Procedure is also available via hyperlink from specific C-III symptom-based Technical
Service Bulletins in ASIST.
CAUTION
Part 1
Updated March 25, 2009
CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM REPROGRAMMING
A symptom based TSB is required before using this procedure.
IMPORTANT: Before starting, make sure:
^ ASIST on the C-III computer has been freshly synchronized (updated).
^ All C-III software updates (if any) have been installed.
NOTE:
The C-III computer automatically gets applicable ECM reprogramming data during ASIST
synchronization.
Locations
Page 840
> Engine coolant and lubricating oils at specified levels
> Spare tire, jack, hand tools, and floor mats in designated positions
NOTE:
Refer to the appropriate Service Manual for information about any of the above checks and
inspections.
4. Check the target mounts.
^ If there is any visual damage (bent, worn, cracked, etc), have the equipment repaired before
performing any alignments.
^ Make sure the target mounts are properly adjusted and configured (see Figure 11).
NOTE:
The target mount example shown in Figure 11 is for Hunter "camera type" alignment machines.
Follow the operation manual for your specific equipment.
Exploded View
Intake Manifold: Service and Repair Exploded View
INTAKE MANIFOLD
Exploded View
Page 4042
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE) -
SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air bag
modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS components.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS components. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 5657
2. Remove the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit from the Fuel Pump Assembly as follows:
a. First, press in on the two locking tabs on the sides of the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit
b. Then, pull the unit UP and OUT of the attachment slots
^ For Type A see Figure 1
^ For Type B see Figure 2
Locations
Page 1752
^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed.
^ C-III Security Card is installed.
^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still
cable-connected to the vehicle.
1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect
the VI to the vehicle.
CAUTION
2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer.
CAUTION
3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery:
For Conventional Vehicles
^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate.
NOTE:
The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended.
CAUTION
For Hybrid Vehicles
^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station.
^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery.
Page 1351
8. Remove access cover
9. Loosen the crankshaft pulley bolts using Tool to secure the crankshaft.
Tool number: ( - ) J47245
a. Remove the crankshaft pulley from the crankshaft using suitable tool.
- Set the bolts in the two bolt holes [M6 x 1.0 mm (0.04 in)] on the front surface.
NOTE: The dimension between the centers of the two bolt holes is 61 mm (2.40 in).
10. Remove the front cover.
a. Loosen and remove the bolts in the reverse of order as shown.
b. Cut the liquid gasket and remove the covers using Tool.
Tool number: KVIOIIIIOO (J-37228)
CAUTION: Do not damage mating surfaces.
11. Remove the front oil seal using suitable tool.
CAUTION: Do not damage front cover.
Page 1224
Page 5331
5. Inspect nylon insert for wear or damage.
^ Replace the insert if any wear or damage is found.
6. Apply Permatex(R) Threadlocker Blue or equivalent to the threads on the bolt.
7. Reinstall insert, bolt and armrest assembly in reverse order of removal.
^ Bolt torque: 20 Nm (2 kg-m, 15 lb-ft)
Page 965
Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair High-Pressure Pipe
HIGH-PRESSURE PIPE
Removal and Installation for High-pressure Pipe
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal and battery positive terminal. 2. Reposition
the IPDM E/R aside. 3. Remove the front right wheel and tire assembly. Refer to See: Wheels and
Tires/Service and Repair/Rotation. 4. Position aside the front floor insulator. 5. Discharge the
refrigerant. Refer to See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Service and Repair/Refrigeration System .
6. Remove the low pressure pipe. 7. Remove the high-pressure pipe.
CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the
entry of air.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Heating and Air
Conditioning/Description and Operation/Refrigeration System/Component .
CAUTION: Replace the O-ring of the high-pressure pipe with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when
installing it.
- After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
Body - Power Window 'Auto Up' Feature Inoperative
Front Door Window Motor: Customer Interest Body - Power Window 'Auto Up' Feature Inoperative
Classification: EL09-033A
Reference: NTB09-095A
Date: May 5, 2010
POWER WINDOW "AUTO UP" INITIALIZATION
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles have been revised. No other changes have
been made. Please discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007-2009 350Z Coupe & Roadster (Z33) 2007-2009 Armada (TA60)
2007-2008 Maxima (A34) 2007 Murano (Z50) 2007-2009 Pathfinder (R51) 2007-2009 Quest (V42)
2007-2009 Titan (A60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
A power window "Auto Up" will not work.
ACTION
Reset the limit switch.
1. Raise the door glass to the top position.
2. While pressing and holding the reset switch, lower the door glass to the bottom position.
3. Release the reset switch.
4. Verify that the reset switch returns to the original position, and then raises the door glass to the
top position.
NOTES:
> If the window is still not operating correctly, refer to ASIST and the Service Manual for further
diagnosis and repair information.
> The above initialization procedure must be performed if any of the following occur:
> Battery cable is disconnected.
> Power window switch connector is disconnected.
> Power window regulator is replaced.
> Power window motor is replaced.
> Window glass is removed.
Page 328
Page 2655
Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Removal And Installation
EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
WARNING: Perform the work when the exhaust and cooling system have cooled sufficiently. 1.
Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. Refer to See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Air
Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair/Removal and
Installation.
2. Drain the engine coolant from the radiator. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling
System/Coolant/Service and Repair. 3. Remove the engine undercover using power tool. 4.
Remove the radiator and radiator hoses. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling
System/Radiator/Service and Repair/Removal and
Installation.
5. Remove the drive belts. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Drive Belts, Mounts,
Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and
Repair.
6. Remove the air fuel ratio A/F sensors (bank 1, bank 2). Follow steps below to remove each air fuel ratio A/F sensor. a. Remove the harness connector of
each air fuel ratio A/F sensor, and harness from bracket and middle clamp.
b. Remove the air fuel ratio A/F sensors from both left and right exhaust manifolds using Tool.
Tool number : - (J-44626)
CAUTION: Do not damage the air fuel ratio A/F sensors
- Discard any air fuel ratio A/F sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5m
(19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor. Replace it with a new one.
7. Remove the front cross bar.
8. Remove the exhaust manifold (LH) (A) following the steps below. Arrow indicates Front a. Remove the exhaust front tube. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Exhaust System/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. b. Remove the exhaust
manifold cover. c. Loosen the nuts in reverse order of illustration (A) using power tool. d. Remove
the exhaust studs from positions 2, 4, 6, 8 and remove exhaust manifold (LH).
9. Remove the exhaust manifold (RH) (B) following the steps below.
a. Remove the exhaust front tube. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Exhaust
System/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. b. Remove the oil level gauge guide. Refer to
See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Disassembly And
Page 4672
1. Disconnect heater switch resistor connector. See Figure 2.
2. Loosen two screws located on the heater switch resistor. See Figure 2.
3. Replace the heater switch resistor with part number 27151-ZW00A. See Figure 1.
4. Reassemble the vehicle components in reverse order of removal.
5. Check to make sure the issue has been resolved.
Locations
Page 4327
Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics
in this bulletin.
^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification.
1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle:
^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge
^ Road Crown Gauge
NOTE:
Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use.
2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test.
3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern.
^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60
mph.
^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel
position during the road test.
NOTE:
^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have
been resolved.
^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then
diagnosis cannot be performed.
4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center"
below.
5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel
Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete.
6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step.
Other Service Information
Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel
spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road
(see example in Figure 1).
If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the
normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain
water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place.
Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the
crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction.
Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully
counteract the effect of a highly crowned road.
Page 372
Starter Relay: Locations Without Intelligent Key System
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Terminal Layout
TERMINAL LAYOUT
Page 4757
When A/C switch or DEF switch is pressed, front air control inputs compressor ON signal to BCM.
BCM sends compressor ON signal to ECM and front air control, via CAN communication line. ECM
judges whether compressor can be turned ON, based on each sensor status (refrigerant pressure
sensor signal, throttle angle sensor, etc.). If it judges compressor can be turned ON, it sends
compressor ON signal to IPDM E/R, via CAN communication line. Upon receipt of compressor ON
signal from ECM, IPDM E/R turns air conditioner relay ON to operate compressor.
Discharge Air Flow
MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
Discharge Air Flow
Switches And Their Control Function
MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
Switches And Their Control Function
Power Consumption Control System
Power Distribution Module: Locations Power Consumption Control System
POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM
Component Parts Location
Page 1527
Ignition Timing: Component Tests and General Diagnostics
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check
IDLE SPEED
With CONSULT-III Check idle speed in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-III.
With GST Check idle speed with GST.
IGNITION TIMING 1. Attach timing light to loop wire as shown.
2. Check ignition timing.
Capacity Specifications
Refrigerant: Capacity Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Refrigerant
Capacity................................................................................................................................................
.................................. 0.70 ± 0.05 kg (1.54 ± 0.11 lb)
Page 4336
^ Make sure the rear slide plates:
> Do not wobble (no up/down movement).
> Operate (slide) smoothly in all directions.
If there is any issue with the slide plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing
any alignments.
5. Make sure the lock pins for the front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates" are in place.
NOTE:
Lock pins should remain in place until caster sweep.
The Alignment Process
The Alignment Process
IMPORTANT:
Use only the alignment specifications listed in the appropriate Service Manual when adjusting the
alignment.
1. Make sure the vehicle is straight on the alignment rack.
^ Vehicle must be straight (in line) with the alignment rack before entering the rack as shown in
Figure 4.
^ Do not straighten the vehicle while on the rack (see Figure 5).
^ If the vehicle needs to be straightened, exit the alignment rack, straighten the vehicle and then
re-enter the rack.
^ Once the vehicle is straight on the rack, do not turn/center the steering wheel-keep the front
wheels straight.
Page 1844
Page 2269
CAN System - Part 4
Page 680
Crash Zone Sensor
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Crash Zone Sensor
CRASH ZONE SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
CAUTION: Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at
least 3 minutes.
1. Remove front grille. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Grille/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect the
crash zone sensor harness connector. 3. Remove crash zone sensor nuts.
CAUTION: Replace crash zone sensor if it has been dropped or sustained an impact.
- Do not disassemble crash zone sensor.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. After the work is complete, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer to
See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic
Overview/SRS Operation Check.
Page 4272
IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) - Part 2
Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration Procedure
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration
Procedure
Classification: EC09-028
Reference: NTB09-136
Date: December 1, 2009
2005 AND LATER; ECM VIN REGISTRATION
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2005 and later
SERVICE INFORMATION
The Applied Vehicles must have the correct Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) registered in the
Engine Control Module (ECM). The VIN registration process must be performed under the following
conditions.
^ When installing a new ECM
^ If, during vehicle service, the VIN registration inside the ECM is found to be missing or incorrect.
When needed, use the Service Procedure in this bulletin to perform ECM VIN registration.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for
any repairs being performed.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Connect C-III to the vehicle and perform the initial selections:
NOTE:
If C-III is already connected, go to Step 2.
a. Start C-III and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear.
b. Select the detected VI from the list.
c. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
d. Select Model and Year.
e. Confirm the correct model and year were selected.
f. Select Repair.
Page 5899
WARNING:
This repair MUST be done with the vehicle's full weight on the suspension.
EITHER:
Place the vehicle on a drive-on hoist or alignment rack to lift the vehicle.
OR
Leave all of the vehicle's weight on all four (4) tires, while parked (do not lift the vehicle).
DO NOT lift the vehicle in any amount. The suspension must support all of the vehicle's weight
during the whole repair procedure or the bushing will be under load and difficult to remove.
1. With the vehicle positioned as stated above, put the shift selector in "P" (PARK) position.
2. Set the parking brake.
3. Remove the bolt and bushing from the windup clip (clip).
4. Check the condition of the bolt's and clip's threads, and the bushing.
^ If both the bushing and bolt's threads are okay, reuse them.
^ If the bushing and / or bolt's threads are damaged, replace with all parts in the "Spring Assembly
Kit".
^ If the clip's threads are damaged, replace the leaf spring assembly.
5. Install the bolt (and bushing) with Permatex(R) Medium Strength Threadlocker BLUE or
equivalent thread locking material applied to the threads.
Torque bolt to 32 N.m (3.2 kg-m, 23 ft-lb).
Procedures
Fuel Gauge Sender: Procedures
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
Disassembly and Assembly
Fuel Level Sender Unit
Disassembly 1. Disconnect the harness connectors. 2. Remove the fuel sensor from the pump
assembly. 3. Remove the sending unit module and floater arm assembly.
Assembly Assembly is the reverse order of disassembly.
Specifications
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Intake Air Temperature Sensor
Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions
Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions
Classification: WT10-005
Reference: NTB10-114
Date: September 27, 2010
INFLATING TIRES EQUIPPED WITH TPMS
APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan with Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
SERVICE INFORMATION
Improper use of tire inflator tools can break the stem of a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensor.
NOTE:
The type of stem breakage shown in Figure 1 is not considered a warrantable repair.
Please refer to the following examples of recommended and not recommended tire pressure filling
tools.
Not Recommended tire inflator tools.
Locations
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Locations
Page 5216
8. Remove the door lock knob. 9. Remove the rear door tweeter speaker.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
REAR DOOR - KING CAB
Removal 1. Remove the upper and lower seat belt anchor bolts. Refer to See: Restraint
Systems/Seat Belt Systems/Child Restraint/Child Seat Tether
Attachment/Service and Repair/LATCH (Lower Anchors And Tether For Children) System.
2. Release the clips and remove seat belt retractor cover. 3. Remove the armrest. 4. Remove the
screws behind armrest. 5. Release the clips and remove rear door finisher.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Intake Valve Timing Control Position Sensor (LH)
Variable Valve Timing Actuator Position Sensor: Service and Repair Intake Valve Timing Control
Position Sensor (LH)
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL
Intake Valve Timing Control Position Sensor (LH)
REMOVAL 1. Remove engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Cover. 2. Remove air duct and resonator assembly.
Refer to See: Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and
Repair/Removal and Installation.
3. Disconnect intake valve timing control position sensor connector (LH).
4. Remove intake valve timing control position sensor (LH) (1) from Intake valve timing control
solenoid valve cover (LH) (3).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Replace the O-ring (2) of the intake valve timing control position sensor with a new one,
then lubricate O-ring with engine oil before installing.
Intake valve timing control position sensor bolt : 9.6 N.m (0.98 kg-m, 85 in-lb)
Specifications
Connecting Rod: Specifications
Connecting Rod Bolt
Connecting Rod
Page 431
10. Remove the outboard J-Clip.
WARNING:
Only the outboard J-Clip can be removed. Removal of any other J-Clips may affect OCS
performance.
11. Remove the two clips securing the switch harness to the seat pan. See Figure 7.
WARNING:
Before removal, make careful note of the exact routing and clip placement for reassembly.
Page 3165
- White Arrow Indicates Vehicle front
- Black Arrow Indicates Oil pan bolts
- Clips (1)
- Drain plug (3)
CAUTION: Be sure the oil drain plug is located to the rear of the transmission assembly.
- Before installing oil pan bolts, remove any traces of old sealant from the sealing surfaces and
threaded holes.
- Do not reuse old gasket, replace with a new one.
- Always replace the oil pan bolts as they are self-sealing.
- Partially install the oil pan bolts in a criss-cross pattern to prevent dislocation of the gasket.
3. Install oil pan bolts and clips tighten in numerical order as shown.
Oil pan bolts : 7.9 N.m (0.81 kg-m, 70 in-lb)
4. Install drain plug with new gasket to oil pan and tighten to specification.
Drain plug : 34 N.m (3.5 kg-m, 25 ft-lb)
CAUTION: Do not reuse drain plug gasket. 5. Refill the A/T with fluid and check for fluid leakage.
Refer to See: Fluid - A/T/Service and Repair/Checking A/T Fluid.
A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics
Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics
Classification: AT09-016A
Reference: NTB10-003A
Date: February 11, 2010
5 SPEED A/T DTC DIAGNOSES FOR P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759,
P1764, P1769, P1774
This bulletin has been amended. Additional DTCs were applied. Discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2003 - 2010 Nissan vehicles with 5-Speed A/T
APPLIED TRANSMISSION: RE5R05A ONLY
SERVICE INFORMATION
If one or more DTCs listed below are found stored in Self Diagnosis, use the REPAIR FLOW
CHART shown below to assist in diagnosis.
^ DTCs: P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
If DTC(s) not listed above is/are found stored in Self Diagnosis, this bulletin does not apply. Refer
to ASIST and the appropriate Service Manual for diagnostic procedure(s) as needed.
Page 4364
IMPORTANT:
If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or
charged back).
ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the
Service Dept.
4. Make sure the "turn plates" and "slide" plates are in good working order:
^ The surface of the front turn plates must be level with (the same height as) the rack surface.
If height is not the same; have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments.
^ Make sure the front turn plates:
> Do not wobble (no up/down movement).
> Operate (slide and turn) smoothly in all directions.
If there is any issue with the turn plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing
any alignments.
Page 2271
CAN System - Part 6
Page 820
SPECIAL TOOLS
Page 4437
System Diagram
Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation System Diagram
METER SYSTEM
A/T OIL TEMPERATURE GAUGE
A/T OIL TEMPERATURE GAUGE : System Diagram
Page 2727
10. Lower the fuel tank using a suitable lift jack and remove it from the vehicle to access the fuel
level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly. 11. Remove the lock ring using Tool as shown.
Tool number : - (J-46536)
12. Remove the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly. Remove and discard the fuel
level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly
O-ring.
CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm during removal.
Avoid impacts such as dropping when handling the components.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. For installation, use a new fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly O-ring.
- Connect the quick connector as follows:
- Check the connection for any damage or foreign materials.
- Align the connector with the pipe, then insert the connector straight into the pipe until a click is
heard.
- After connecting the quick connector, make sure that the connection is secure by checking as
follows:
- Pull the tube and the connector to make sure they are securely connected.
- Visually inspect the connector to make sure the two retainer tabs are securely connected.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1. Turn the ignition switch ON but do not start engine, then
check the fuel pipes and hose connections for leaks while applying fuel pressure to the
system.
2. Start the engine and rev it above idle speed, then check that there are no fuel leaks at any of the
fuel pipe and hose connections.
Page 3743
3. Remove the upper and lower sliding pin bolts (see Figure 1).
4. Support / hang the caliper cylinder body with a wire or other suitable support (see Figure 2).
^ Make sure the brake hose is not stretched or stressed.
^ Make sure the sensor harness bracket will not be bent by weight of the caliper cylinder body.
5. Refer to the BR Section of the Service Manual as needed to complete the brake service.
M/T - Warranty Repair Fluid Requirements
Fluid - M/T: Technical Service Bulletins M/T - Warranty Repair Fluid Requirements
Classification: MT02-001B
Reference: NTB03-015B
Date: December 21, 21009
2001-2010 NISSAN; MANUAL TRANSMISSION OIL REQUIRED FOR WARRANTY REPAIRS
This bulletin has been amended. Please discard all copies of the earlier version.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2001-2010 Nissan Manual Transmission-Equipped Vehicles
SERVICE INFORMATION
If an Applied Vehicle equipped with Manual Transmission (MT) needs servicing for warranty
repairs, Nissan Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85, Nissan TransElf NFJ 75W-80,
or Nissan GTR R35 Special is required. See the chart above.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
Nissan Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85, Nissan TransElf NFJ 75W-80, or
Nissan GTR R35 Special oil must be used when performing manual transmission repairs paid by
Nissan. These include warranty, service contract, or goodwill repairs.
Nissan will not reimburse dealers for manual transmission repairs when Nissan Manual
Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85, Nissan TransElf NFJ 75W-80, or Nissan GTR R35
Special oil is not used.
Nissan recommends use of the above listed manual transmission fluids, which optimize shift
quality, for customer pay use as well.
Nissan Manual Transmission Fluid and all Nissan chemicals are ordered through the Direct Ship
Chemical Care Product Program.
Disclaimer
Page 1817
In the Administrator window select My Computer.
In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C).
In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder.
In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder.
In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder.
When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time.
Select and print the file/screen image that you want.
NOTE:
During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems.
Erase DTCs from all systems
22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen).
23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear.
24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.)
25. Select Connect.
26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
Page 2545
^ CONSULT will display "CMPLT" in the top right corner of the screen when the IAVL procedure is
finished. See Figure 7.
f. Once the IAVL procedure is finished, proceed with step 7.
For 2005 and Later MY Vehicles ONLY: Enter VIN Into New Service Replacement ECM
7. Enter the VIN into the new service replacement ECM as follows:
a. Select [ENGINE] on the "Select System" screen. See Figure 8.
b. Select [WORK SUPPORT] on the "Select Diag Mode" screen. See Figure 9.
Page 2338
Diagnosis Sheet (CAN Type 15)
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
Diagnosis Sheet (CAN Type 15)
Page 5777
2. Remove the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit from the Fuel Pump Assembly as follows:
a. First, press in on the two locking tabs on the sides of the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit
b. Then, pull the unit UP and OUT of the attachment slots
^ For Type A see Figure 1
^ For Type B see Figure 2
Service and Repair
Steering Angle Sensor: Service and Repair
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove spiral cable. Refer to See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Clockspring
Assembly / Spiral Cable/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the screws and remove the steering angle
sensor.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: After installation of spiral cable, adjust steering angle sensor. Refer to See: Brakes and
Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming
and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing Control Unit/Description See: Brakes and
Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming
and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing Control Unit/Special Repair Requirement See:
Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Adjustment Of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral
Position/Description See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Adjustment Of Steering Angle
Sensor Neutral Position/Special Repair Requirement.
Page 3461
Control Unit: Service and Repair
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 2. Remove jack and tools. 3.
Remove upper bracket of center seat belt retractor and belt assembly. Refer to See: Restraint
Systems/Seat Belt Systems/Seat Belt/Service and
Repair/Rear Seat Belt.
4. Remove the necessary push pins and reposition rear panel out of the way. Refer to See: Body
and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim
Panel/Service and Repair.
5. Reposition the carpet to access differential lock control unit to disconnect connector. 6. Remove
the two nuts and remove differential lock control unit.
INSTALLATION Note the following, and installation is in the reverse order of removal. When installing differential lock control unit, tighten nuts to the specified torque.
Differential lock control unit nuts : 5.1 N.m (0.52 kg-m, 45 in-lb)
Page 5509
13. Turn the nut on each slider until it just touches the plastic insert.
^ Use a 3/4" (19 mm) wrench.
^ Be Careful - don't over tighten - turn each nut just enough to touch the plastic end piece.
CAUTION:
Make sure the organizer is all the way forward, in the deployed position and the lids snapped
closed before turning the nuts. Tightening the nuts with the organizer in any other position may
cause the sliders to jamb in the rails when moving / sliding the organizer.
14. Make sure the organizer sides freely.
^ Loosen the hand knobs and slide the organizer backward and forward.
NOTE:
When sliding the organizer, apply light force to the center, or evenly to both sides.
If the organizer does not slide freely when the hand knobs are loose:
a. Slide the organizer all the way forward until it stops against the front of the bed.
b. Turn each nut (loosen) until there are at least two (2) threads showing between the nut and the
end of the plastic insert.
System Diagram
Oil Pressure Gauge: Description and Operation System Diagram
METER SYSTEM
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE : System Diagram
Page 4077
Power Distribution Module: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures
Diagnosis Description
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R)
Diagnosis Description
AUTO ACTIVE TEST
Description In auto active test mode, the IPDM E/R sends a drive signal to the following systems to
check their operation. Oil pressure low/coolant pressure high warning indicator
- Oil pressure gauge
- Rear window defogger
- Front wipers
- Tail, license and parking lamps
- Front fog lamps
- Headlamps (Hi, Lo)
- A/C compressor (magnetic clutch)
- Cooling fan
Operation Procedure 1. Close the hood and front door RH, and lift the wiper arms from the
windshield (to prevent windshield damage due to wiper operation).
NOTE: When auto active test is performed with hood opened, sprinkle water on windshield before
hand. 2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Turn the ignition switch ON and, within 20 seconds, press the
front door switch LH 10 times. Then turn the ignition switch OFF. 4. Turn the ignition switch ON
within 10 seconds. After that the horn sounds once and the auto active test starts. 5. After a series
of the following operations is repeated 3 times, auto active test is completed.
NOTE: When auto active test mode has to be cancelled halfway through test, turn ignition switch
OFF.
CAUTION: If auto active test mode cannot be actuated, check door switch system. Refer to See: Body and
Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/Door Switch/King Cab/Diagnosis Procedure See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power
Locks/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Door Switch/King
Cab/Component Function Check See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Door Switch/King Cab/Diagnosis Procedure,
"KING CAB
See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/Door Switch/Crew Cab/Diagnosis Procedure (Crew Cab). Do not start the engine.
Inspection in Auto Active Test Mode When auto active test mode is actuated, the following 6 steps
are repeated 3 times.
Page 2433
Page 4114
Locations
Page 5688
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the Fuel Pump Assembly from the vehicle.
^ Refer to section FL in the applicable Service Manual for removal information.
^ Make sure to follow all Service Manual warnings and cautions.
Service and Repair
Front Crankshaft Seal: Service and Repair
OIL SEAL
Removal and Installation of Front Oil Seal
REMOVAL 1. Remove the engine. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Engine Assembly/Removal and Installation. 2. Remove the crankshaft pulley. Refer
to See: Timing Components/Timing Chain/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation.
3. Remove the front oil seal using suitable tool.
CAUTION: Do not damage front cover and oil pump drive spacer.
INSTALLATION 1. Apply new engine oil to both the oil seal lip and dust seal lip of the new front oil
seal. 2. Install the front oil seal.
- Install the front oil seal so that each seal lip is oriented as shown.
- Press-fit until the height of the front oil seal is level with the mounting surface using suitable tool.
CAUTION: Do not damage front timing chain case and crankshaft.
- Press-fit straight and avoid causing burrs or tilting oil seal.
3. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 5709
Page 232
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Disclaimer
Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R) Battery
Replacement
Keyless Entry Transmitter Battery: Technical Service Bulletins Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R)
Battery Replacement
Classification: EL09-042
Reference: NTB09-118
Date: October 28, 2009
INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT AND BATTERY DISCHARGE INDICATOR
RESET
APPLIED VEHICLES: Vehicles equipped with the Intelligent Key type shown below.
IF YOU CONFIRM
^ The Intelligent Key is the type that has a notch on each side.
And
^ The battery in the Intelligent Key needs to be replaced for any reason.
ACTION
1. Open the Intelligent Key as described in the Service Procedure, and replace the battery.
2. Confirm the battery discharge indicator has reset/is not illuminated in the dot matrix display.
NOTES:
^ DO NOT insert a tool into the notches of the Intelligent Key to pry it open, as this may damage
the printed circuit board (PCB).
^ The battery is a maintenance item and is not warrantable.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelligent Key.
2. Place a piece of tape on the end of a small flathead screwdriver.
Page 855
Alignment: Service and Repair
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Front Wheel Alignment
PRELIMINARY INSPECTION
WARNING: Always adjust the alignment with the vehicle on a flat surface.
NOTE: If alignment is out of specification, inspect and replace any damaged or worn suspension
parts before making any adjustments. 1. Check and adjust the wheel alignment with the vehicle
under unladen conditions. "Unladen conditions" means that the fuel, coolant, and lubricant
are full; and that the spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats are in their designated positions.
2. Check the tires for incorrect air pressure and excessive wear. 3. Check the wheels for run out
and damage. Refer to See: Wheels and Tires/Testing and Inspection. 4. Check the wheel bearing
axial end play. Refer to See: Wheels and Tires/Wheel Hub/Testing and Inspection . 5. Check the
shock absorbers for leaks or damage. 6. Check each mounting point of the suspension
components for any excessive looseness or damage. 7. Check each link, arm, and the rear
suspension member for any damage. 8. Check the vehicle height. Refer to See:
Specifications/Front Suspension/Wheelarch Height.
GENERAL INFORMATION AND RECOMMENDATIONS 1. A Four-Wheel Thrust Alignment should
be performed. This type of alignment is recommended for any NISSAN vehicle.
- The four-wheel "thrust" process helps ensure that the vehicle is properly aligned and the steering
wheel is centered.
- The alignment machine itself should be capable of accepting any NISSAN vehicle.
- The alignment machine should be checked to ensure that it is level.
2. Make sure the alignment machine is properly calibrated. -
Your alignment machine should be regularly calibrated in order to give correct information.
- Check with the manufacturer of your specific alignment machine for their recommended
Service/Calibration Schedule.
THE ALIGNMENT PROCESS IMPORTANT: Use only the alignment specifications listed. Refer to
See: Specifications/Front Suspension/Wheel Alignment. 1. When displaying the alignment settings,
many alignment machines use "indicators": (Green/red, plus or minus, Go/No Go). Do NOT use
these
indicators.
- The alignment specifications programmed into your alignment machine that operate these
indicators may not be correct.
- This may result in an ERROR.
2. Some newer alignment machines are equipped with an optional "Rolling Compensation" method
to "compensate" the sensors (alignment targets or
head units). Do NOT use this "Rolling Compensation" method.
- Use the "Jacking Compensation" method. After installing the alignment targets or head units,
raise the vehicle and rotate the wheels 1/2 turn both ways.
- See Instructions in the alignment machine you are using for more information.
CAMBER AND CASTER 1. Measure camber and caster of both the right and left wheels with a
suitable alignment gauge and adjust as necessary to specification.
Camber and caster : Refer to See: Specifications/Front Suspension/Wheel Alignment.
NOTE: Some vehicles may be equipped with straight (non-adjustable) lower link bolts and
washers. In order to adjust camber and caster on these vehicles, first replace the lower link bolts
and washers with adjustable (cam) bolts and washers.
Bulb Replacement
Brake Lamp: Service and Repair Bulb Replacement
STOP LAMP
Bulb Replacement
HIGH-MOUNTED STOP LAMP
Removal 1. Remove the high-mounted stop lamp. Refer to See: Removal And Installation. 2. Turn
bulb socket counter clockwise to remove it from lamp housing. 3. Pull bulb from socket.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 5716
Fuel Gauge Sender: Removal and Replacement
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
Removal and Installation
Short Wheel Base
Long Wheel Base
Testing and Inspection
Cruise Control Indicator Lamp: Testing and Inspection
ASCD INDICATOR
Component Description
ASCD indicator lamp illuminates to indicate ASCD operation status. Lamp has two indicators,
CRUISE and SET, and is integrated in combination meter. CRUISE indicator illuminates when
MAIN switch on ASCD steering switch is turned ON to indicate that ASCD system is ready for
operation. SET indicator illuminates when following conditions are met. CRUISE indicator is illuminated.
- SET/COAST switch on ASCD steering switch is turned ON while vehicle speed is within the range
of ASCD setting.
SET indicator remains lit during ASCD control. Refer to See: Cruise Control/Description and
Operation/System Description for the ASCD function.
ASCD INDICATOR
Diagnosis Procedure
1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION Check ASCD indicator under the following conditions.
OK or NG OK - INSPECTION END NG - GO TO 2. 2. CHECK DTC Check that DTC U1000 or
U1001 is not displayed. OK or NG OK - GO TO 3. NG - Perform trouble diagnosis for DTC U1000,
U1001. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/U Code
Charts/U1000/Electronic Engine Control. 3. CHECK COMBINATION METER FUNCTION Refer to
See: Testing and Inspection/Scan Tool Testing and Procedures/CONSULT-III Function. OK or NG
OK - GO TO 4. NG - Go to See: Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement. 4. CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Initial
Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Service Information For Electrical Incident/How To Check
Terminal and See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Service
Information For Electrical Incident/Intermittent Incident. - INSPECTION END
Page 2424
Page 4936
Child Seat Tether Attachment: Service and Repair Top Tether Strap Child Restraint
TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD RESTRAINT
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1.
Fold rear seat backs down.
2. Remove bolts and remove tether anchors.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 3121
40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19.
NOTE:
For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF.
^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data.
41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42.
41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed.
^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service
Manual (ESM) for this procedure.
NOTE:
If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle.
IAVL can now be performed.
42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF.
^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs.
Page 1816
21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete.
NOTE:
If you can't print the above screen:
a. Select the Print icon.
b. Select Save.
c. Select OK.
A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC.
NOTE:
If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in
the following file location:
At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start.
Page 57
Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair ABS
ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY)
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to
See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 3. Drain the brake fluid.
Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Hydraulic System/Brake Fluid/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement. 4. Disconnect the actuator harness connector from the ABS
actuator and electric unit (control unit).
CAUTION: -
To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench to prevent the flare nuts
and brake tubes from being damaged.
- Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is
splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately.
5. Disconnect the brake tubes. 6. Remove the three bolts and remove the ABS actuator and
electric unit (control unit).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: To install, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench (commercial service tools).
- Always tighten brake tubes to specification when installing.
Service and Repair
Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator: Service and Repair
Maintenance Item Programing
Locations
Page 4230
CAN COMMUNICATION CONTROL When CAN communication with ECM and BCM is impossible,
IPDM E/R performs fail-safe control. After CAN communication recovers normally, it also returns to
normal control.
If No CAN Communication Is Available With BCM
IGNITION RELAY MALFUNCTION DETECTION FUNCTION -
IPDM E/R monitors the voltage at the contact circuit and excitation coil circuit of the ignition relay
inside it.
- IPDM E/R judges the ignition relay error if the voltage differs between the contact circuit and the
excitation coil circuit.
- If the ignition relay cannot turn OFF due to contact seizure, it activates the tail lamp relay for 10
minutes to alert the user to the ignition relay malfunction when the ignition switch is turned OFF.
NOTE: The tail lamp turns OFF when the ignition switch is turned ON.
FRONT WIPER CONTROL IPDM E/R detects front wiper stop position by a front wiper auto stop
signal. When a front wiper auto stop signal is in the conditions listed below, IPDM E/R stops power
supply to wiper after repeating a front wiper 10 second activation and 20 second stop five times.
NOTE: This operation status can be confirmed on the IPDM E/R "DATA MONITOR" that displays
"Block" for the item "WIP PROT" while the wiper is stopped.
STARTER MOTOR PROTECTION FUNCTION IPDM E/R turns OFF the starter control relay to
protect the starter motor when the starter control relay remains active for 90 seconds.
Page 799
^ Make sure the rear slide plates:
> Do not wobble (no up/down movement).
> Operate (slide) smoothly in all directions.
If there is any issue with the slide plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing
any alignments.
5. Make sure the lock pins for the front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates" are in place.
NOTE:
Lock pins should remain in place until caster sweep.
The Alignment Process
The Alignment Process
IMPORTANT:
Use only the alignment specifications listed in the appropriate Service Manual when adjusting the
alignment.
1. Make sure the vehicle is straight on the alignment rack.
^ Vehicle must be straight (in line) with the alignment rack before entering the rack as shown in
Figure 4.
^ Do not straighten the vehicle while on the rack (see Figure 5).
^ If the vehicle needs to be straightened, exit the alignment rack, straighten the vehicle and then
re-enter the rack.
^ Once the vehicle is straight on the rack, do not turn/center the steering wheel-keep the front
wheels straight.
Page 2939
Shift Indicator: Description and Operation Component Description
METER SYSTEM
SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR : Component Description
Page 5196
Front Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Component Structure
FRONT DOOR LOCK
Component Structure
Page 1596
4. Remove the heater core pipe bracket.
5. Remove the heater core.
NOTE: If the in-cabin microfilters are contaminated from coolant leaking from the heater core,
replace the in-cabin microfilters with new ones before installing the new heater core.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 3849
Do not reuse the grommets. 2. Install the reservoir tank onto the master cylinder assembly. 3.
Install the fluid level sensor on the reservoir tank. 4. Install the new front and rear pressure
sensors.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the front and rear pressure sensors.
Interior - Passenger Power Seat Switch Replacement
Technical Service Bulletin # 08-039B Date: 100119
Interior - Passenger Power Seat Switch Replacement
Classification: EL07-038B
Reference: NTB08-039B
Date: January 19, 2010
2004-2010 TITAN AND ARMADA; PASSENGER SEAT SWITCH SERVICEABILITY
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles and Service Procedure sections have been
revised. Please discard all previous copies of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Titan (A60) - Bucket Seats Only 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) Bucket Seats Only
IF YOU CONFIRM
The passenger side power seat switch needs to be replaced for any reason.
ACTION
Refer to the Service Procedure to replace the switch.
WARNING:
^ This vehicle seat is equipped with the Occupant Classification System (OCS) part of the
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS).
^ In this Service Procedure you will be removing and re-installing the outboard (switch side) J-clip
of the seat bottom cover.
^ Only the outboard J-clip should be removed. Removal of any other J-Clips may affect OCS
performance.
^ When re-installing the outboard J-Clip, make sure the J-Clip is securely attached. A loose J-Clip
may affect OCS performance.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
Page 2211
16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5).
^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB,
diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing.
17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.)
Page 1350
Exploded View
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove the upper oil pan. Refer to the updated Oil Pan and Oil Strainer procedure above.
2. Remove variable timing control solenoids.
3. Remove intake valve timing control sensors.
4. Remove the crankshaft driven fan pulley and pulley bracket.
5. Remove the drive belt auto tensioner and idler pulley.
6. Remove the intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (RH) (A) and intake valve timing
control solenoid valve cover (LH) (B) as follows:
a. Loosen and remove the bolts in the reverse of order as shown.
b. Cut the liquid gasket and remove the covers using Tool.
Tool number: KVIOIIIIOO (J-37228)
CAUTION: Do not damage mating surfaces.
7. Obtain compression TDC of No.1 cylinder as follows:
a. Turn the crankshaft pulley clockwise to align the TDC identification notch (without paint mark)
with the timing indicator on the front cover.
Page 6139
> Window glass run rubber is replaced.
> Window is partly opened and/or closed many times without being fully closed.
Recall 10V074000: Fuel Sender Replacement
Fuel Gauge Sender: Recalls Recall 10V074000: Fuel Sender Replacement
VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2005-2009 Nissan/Armada 2005-2009
Nissan/Titan 2005-2009 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc.
MFR'S REPORT DATE: February 26, 2010
NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V074000 N/A
NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Fuel System, Other: Storage: Fuel Gauge System
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 340000
SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2005-2009 Titan, Armada, and Infiniti QX56
vehicles. The instrument panel fuel gauge may inaccurately display that the vehicle still has some
fuel, typically about one quarter tank, when the fuel tank is empty.
CONSEQUENCE: This could cause the vehicle to run out of gas and stall on the highway, which
could cause a crash.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the fuel sender unit inside the fuel tank with a new improved sender
card. This service will be performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin on or
before March 22, 2010. Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261.
NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle
Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov.
Page 2170
d. Press [START] on the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" screen. See Figure 4.
e. Press [START] on the "WORK SUPPORT" screen to begin the Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL)
procedure. See Figure 5.
^ The IAVL procedure will take several minutes to complete.
^ CONSULT will display "Please Wait" in the center of the screen while the IAVL procedure is in
process. See Figure 6.
Page 2346
- Harness connector M40
Is the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO 2. NO - Repair the terminal and connector. 2.
CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (OPEN CIRCUIT) 1. Disconnect the following harness
connectors. Differential lock control unit
- Harness connectors B69 and M40
2. Check the continuity between the differential lock control unit harness connector and the harness
connector.
Is the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO 3. NO - Repair the main line between the differential
lock control unit and the harness connector B69. 3. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (OPEN
CIRCUIT) Check the continuity between the harness connector and the data link connector.
Is the inspection result normal? YES (Present error) - Check the following items again. Decision of CAN system type.
- Not received CONSULT-III data [SELF-DIAG RESULTS, CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR ("ECU
list" included)].
- Not copied from on-board diagnosis.
- Procedure for detecting root cause.
YES (Past error) - Error was detected in the main line between the differential lock control unit and
the data link connector. NO - Repair the main line between the harness connector M40 and the
data link connector.
Main Line Between DIFF And ADP Circuit
MAIN LINE BETWEEN DIFF AND ADP CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (OPEN CIRCUIT) 1. Turn the
ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 3. Disconnect the
following harness connectors. ECM
- Differential lock control unit
- Harness connectors B37 and B200
4. Check the continuity between the differential lock control unit harness connector and the harness
connector.
Is the inspection result normal? YES (Present error) - Check the following items again. Decision of CAN system type.
- Not received CONSULT-III data [SELF-DIAG RESULTS, CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR ("ECU
list" included)].
- Not copied from on-board diagnosis.
Page 1720
Page 5007
Cellular Phone Microphone: Service and Repair Premium With Navigation
MICROPHONE
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the front roof console finisher. Refer to XXXX.
2. Disconnect the Bluetooth microphone connector (A). 3. Detach the Bluetooth microphone (1)
from the front roof console finisher and remove the Bluetooth microphone (1).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 3726
Brake Pedal Assy: Testing and Inspection Adjustable Pedal
BRAKE PEDAL
Inspection and Adjustment - Adjustable Pedal
INSPECTION 1. Inspect the brake pedal free height (H) from the floor using Tool at a 90° angle to
the floor as shown.
Tool number : - (J-46532)
2. Adjust the height referring to the following specifications.
CAUTION: When equipped with adjustable pedal, the pedal must be in the forward most (closest to
the floor) position for pedal height measurement.
ADJUSTMENT 1. Loosen the stop lamp switch and ASCD cancel switch by turning them 45°
counterclockwise. 2. Loosen lock nut (A) on the input rod, then turn input rod to adjust the brake
pedal to the specified height. When finished adjusting, tighten the lock
nut (A) to specification.
Page 1573
Coolant Outlet: Service and Repair Thermostat and Thermostat Housing
THERMOSTAT AND WATER PIPING
Exploded View
Front Final Drive M205
Differential Cover: Service and Repair Front Final Drive M205
CARRIER COVER
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the front final drive assembly. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Removal
and Replacement/Front Final Drive M205.
2. Remove the carrier cover bolts and separate the carrier cover from the gear carrier using Tool.
Tool number : KV10111100 (J-37228)
CAUTION: Do not damage the mating surface.
- Do not insert flat-bladed screwdriver, this will damage the mating surface.
INSTALLATION 1. Apply 3 mm (0.12 in) bead of sealant to the mating surface of the carrier cover
as shown.
- Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications.
CAUTION: Remove any old sealant adhering to the mating surfaces. Also remove any moisture,
oil, or foreign material adhering to the application and mating surfaces. 2. Install the carrier cover to
the gear carrier. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque. Refer to See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/Front Final Drive
M205.
3. Install the front final drive assembly. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Front Final Drive M205.
CAUTION: Fill the front final drive assembly with recommended differential gear oil. Refer to See:
Fluid - Differential/Service and Repair/Changing Differential Gear Oil.
Page 5565
Audible Warning Device: Electrical Diagrams
Warning Chime System
WARNING CHIME SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram
Warning Chime - Part 1
Page 4086
Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R) Battery
Replacement
Keyless Start Transmitter: Technical Service Bulletins Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R) Battery
Replacement
Classification: EL09-042
Reference: NTB09-118
Date: October 28, 2009
INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT AND BATTERY DISCHARGE INDICATOR
RESET
APPLIED VEHICLES: Vehicles equipped with the Intelligent Key type shown below.
IF YOU CONFIRM
^ The Intelligent Key is the type that has a notch on each side.
And
^ The battery in the Intelligent Key needs to be replaced for any reason.
ACTION
1. Open the Intelligent Key as described in the Service Procedure, and replace the battery.
2. Confirm the battery discharge indicator has reset/is not illuminated in the dot matrix display.
NOTES:
^ DO NOT insert a tool into the notches of the Intelligent Key to pry it open, as this may damage
the printed circuit board (PCB).
^ The battery is a maintenance item and is not warrantable.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelligent Key.
2. Place a piece of tape on the end of a small flathead screwdriver.
Page 89
NOTE:
^ The HID control unit includes a starter (xenon bulb socket). For some models, the starter is not
replaceable. In this case, replace only the HID control
unit using the old starter.
^ Torque specification for the screw that holds the starter to the HID control unit is:
^ 1.3 - 1.7 Nm (0.13 - 0.17 k-gm, 12 - 15 in-lb)
Page 5553
Audible Warning Device: Locations Light Reminder Warning Chime
WARNING CHIME SYSTEM
LIGHT REMINDER WARNING CHIME : Component Parts Location
Page 3990
Starter Motor: Description and Operation Starter
STARTER MOTOR
Starter
Page 5606
Audible Warning Device: Component Tests and General Diagnostics
Combination Meter
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
COMBINATION METER : Diagnosis Procedure
1.CHECK FUSES Check for blown combination meter fuses.
Is the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO 2 NO - If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of
malfunction before installing new fuse. 2.POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT CHECK
1. Disconnect combination meter connector M24. 2. Check voltage between combination meter
harness connector M24 terminals 1, 8, 24 and ground.
Is the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO 3 NO - Check harness for open between
combination meter and fuse. 3.GROUND CIRCUIT CHECK
Page 2518
11. Enter the VIN into C-III two times (see Figure 7).
^ Touch the C-III screen in the "VIN box" before typing.
^ Make sure to use all CAPITAL LETTERS.
^ Use the VIN from the vehicle you are working on.
12. Select Start
13. Turn the ignition OFF, and wait 10 seconds.
14. After waiting 10 seconds, turn the ignition ON.
Page 1100
Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair Pantograph Jack
LIFTING POINT
Pantograph Jack
WARNING:
Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. Always use safety stands to
support the frame when you have to get under the vehicle.
Place wheel chocks at both front and back of the wheels on the ground.
Automatic Air Conditioner
Heater Control Valve: Description and Operation Automatic Air Conditioner
WATER VALVE CIRCUIT
Description
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Water Valve
The water valve (1) cuts the flow of engine coolant to the heater core to allow for maximum cooling
during A/C operation. It is controlled by the front air control.
Page 2151
CAUTION
4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF.
^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure.
^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF.
^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear
defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel
heater, etc.
CAUTION
5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running.
If the cooling fans are running:
a. Turn the ignition OFF.
b. Wait for the engine to cool.
c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF).
d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running.
6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer.
7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress"
message to clear.
With Intelligent Key System
Ignition Relay: Locations With Intelligent Key System
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Terminal Layout
TERMINAL LAYOUT
Page 3009
^ If this column is blank (no part number listed), this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to
ASIST for further diagnostic information.
^ If a Part Number is listed, write it on the Repair Order.
B. Compare the Part Number you wrote down to the numbers in the Current ECM P/N column in
Table A or B (as it applies) shown at the beginning of this bulletin.
^ If there is a match, this bulletin applies. Continue with the reprogramming procedure.
^ If there is not a match, this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to ASIST for further
diagnostic information.
3. If this bulletin applies and you have performed ECM reprogramming, the screen in Figure 2
appears when reprogramming is complete.
NOTE:
If the screen in Figure 2 does not display (reprogramming does not complete).
4. Make sure to erase DTCs from all Systems.
NOTE:
During the reprogramming, DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all
systems.
5. Test drive the vehicle and make sure it operates correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF.
^ If the Check Engine light comes ON, go back to ASIST for further diagnostic information. Refer to
the applicable Electronic Service Manual as
needed.
^ Diagnosis and repairs beyond the ECM reprogramming are not covered by this bulletin.
Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions
Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions
Classification: WT10-005
Reference: NTB10-114
Date: September 27, 2010
INFLATING TIRES EQUIPPED WITH TPMS
APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan with Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
SERVICE INFORMATION
Improper use of tire inflator tools can break the stem of a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensor.
NOTE:
The type of stem breakage shown in Figure 1 is not considered a warrantable repair.
Please refer to the following examples of recommended and not recommended tire pressure filling
tools.
Not Recommended tire inflator tools.
Page 915
- G: No. 6 cylinder
- H: No. 8 cylinder
- J: No. 1 cylinder
- K: No. 3 cylinder
- L: No. 5 cylinder
- M: No. 7 cylinder
11. If out of specifications, adjust as necessary.
ADJUSTMENT
NOTE: Perform adjustment depending on the selected head thickness of the valve lifter.
- The specified valve lifter thickness is the dimension at normal temperatures. Ignore dimensional
differences caused by temperature. Use the specifications for hot engine condition to adjust.
1. Remove the camshaft. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Camshaft, Lifters and
Push Rods/Camshaft/Service and Repair/Removal
And Installation.
2. Remove the valve lifters at the locations that are out of specification.
3. Measure the center thickness of the removed valve lifters using suitable tool. 4. Use the equation
below to calculate the valve lifter thickness for replacement. Valve lifter thickness calculation:
Thickness of replacement valve lifter = t1+ (C1 - C2) t1 = Thickness of removed valve lifter C1 =
Measured valve clearance C2= Standard valve clearance:
Page 309
d. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds, then
e. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" again for 10 seconds (see Figure 2).
f. Proceed with step 6.
Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL)
NOTE:
Make sure all electrical loads are turned OFF, including A/C, defroster, radio, lights, etc. while
performing the following procedures. Also, make sure the engine cooling fans are NOT operating
during the following procedures.
6. Perform the Idle Air Volume Learning procedure as follows:
a. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle.
b. Warm up engine and transmission to operating temperature.
c. In the [CONSULT WORK SUPPORT] mode, select [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. See Figure 3.
NOTE:
^ If IDLE AIR VOL LEARN is not shown as a SELECT WORK ITEM on CONSULT, the vehicle
does not need the procedure.
^ In this case only, this bulletin is complete, no further action is needed.
Page 4108
HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS
Sample/wiring diagram -example- For detail, refer to following See: How To Read Wiring Diagrams/Description.
Description
HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS
Description
Page 5457
12. Remove and replace the switch.
13. Secure the switch harness with the 2 clips to the seat pan.
14. Roll the side facing trim down over the new seat switch. Re-attach the loose J-Clip back onto
the seat frame.
^ Make sure the upholstered edge is flat and smooth with no bumps. See Figure 9.
^ Make sure the upholstered edge is flat and level with the side of the switch. See Figure 9.
WARNING:
Make sure the J-Clip is securely attached. A loose J-Clip may affect OCS performance.
15. Install the switch plate and switch knobs.
16. Set the seat pan back onto the seat frame and secure with the 4 bolts. Torque 27.5 Nm (2.8
Kg-m, 20 ft-lb).
17. Re-attach the seat harnesses to the seat pan.
18. Re-attach the lower flap cover.
Service and Repair
Windshield Washer Switch: Service and Repair
FRONT WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH
Wiper and Washer Switch
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal 1. Remove steering column covers.
2. Remove wiper washer switch connector. 3. Pinch tabs at wiper and washer switch base and
slide switch away from steering column to remove.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 5018
Parking Assist Distance Sensor: Service and Repair
SONAR SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear sonar sensor (1) from the rear bumper (2).
2. Disconnect the rear sonar sensor connector. 3. Remove the rear sonar sensor housing from the
rear bumper (2).
INSTALLATION 1. Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 4015
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service Precautions
POWER SOCKET
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
The Supplemental Restraint System such as "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER",
used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front
passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage
front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag
deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and
whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system
safely is included in the Restraint Systems Information.
WARNING: To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed
by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
- Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to
personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and
Air Bag Module, see the SRS Air Bag.
- Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed. SRS
wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.
Page 3024
Page 6134
^ LH motor: Rotate counterclockwise.
^ RH motor: Rotate clockwise.
2. Install the power window motor onto the regulator.
3. Install the regulator assembly into the door.
4. Secure regulator assembly to door inner with fasteners then install glass into door and attach to
regulator.
5. Raise the glass to the top position.
CAUTION:
Do not operate the glass automatically to raise the glass to the top.
Page 2089
Page 5214
Front Door Panel: Service and Repair
DOOR FINISHER
Removal and Installation
FRONT DOOR
Removal 1. Remove the power window switch assembly (if equipped). -
Disconnect the harness connectors.
2. Remove the pull handle cover. Remove the screws behind pull handle cover.
3. Remove the cap from pull handle escutcheon and remove the screw. 4. Remove the pull handle
escutcheon. Remove the screws behind pull handle escutcheon.
5. Remove the armrest. Remove the screw behind armrest.
6. Remove the window crank handle, using a suitable tool (if equipped). 7. Remove the memory
seat switch (if equipped). Disconnect the harness connector.
8. Remove the step lamp.
Service and Repair
Steering Angle Sensor: Service and Repair
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove spiral cable. Refer to See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Clockspring
Assembly / Spiral Cable/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the screws and remove the steering angle
sensor.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: After installation of spiral cable, adjust steering angle sensor. Refer to See: Brakes and
Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming
and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing Control Unit/Description See: Brakes and
Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming
and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing Control Unit/Special Repair Requirement See:
Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Adjustment Of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral
Position/Description See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Adjustment Of Steering Angle
Sensor Neutral Position/Special Repair Requirement.
Page 4942
Removal - Crew Cab 1. Remove the center pillar upper/lower finishers. Refer to See: Body and
Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim Panel/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the seat belt retractor
anchor bolts and assembly. On RH side, disconnect the seat belt tension sensor.
3. Disconnect the seat belt pre-tensioner electrical connector.
Installation - Crew Cab Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Install the seat belt retractor upper bolt first.
- Make sure seat belt height adjuster is locked in the lowest position during installation.
Removal - King Cab 1. Remove D-ring anchor bolt cover and bolt. 2. Remove anchor cover and
bolt. 3. Remove lower finisher. 4. Disconnect seat belt pre-tensioner connector. 5. Remove seat
belt retractor and belt assembly.
Installation - King Cab Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF SEAT BELT BUCKLE
Removal - Bucket Seat 1. Remove the front seat. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service
and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Seat/Removal and Installation.
2. Remove screw and seat cushion inner finisher.
Page 4130
2. Check continuity between IPDM E/R harness connectors and ground.
Does continuity exist? YES - Inspection End. NO - Repair or replace harness.
Page 1355
- Bleed air from passages in lines and hoses such as in cooling system.
- After cooling down the engine again check oil/fluid levels including engine oil and engine coolant.
Refill to specified level if necessary.
Page 4662
Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Description and Operation Manual A/C (Type 2)
INTAKE SENSOR
System Description
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Intake Sensor
The intake sensor (1) is located on the heater and cooling unit assembly. It converts temperature of
air after if passes through the evaporator into a resistance value which is then input to the front air
control.
Page 2187
Page 4822
Refrigerant Oil: Service and Repair
OIL
Maintenance of Oil Quantity in Compressor
CHECKING AND ADJUSTING
CAUTION: If excessive oil leakage is noted, do not perform the oil return operation. Start the
engine and set the following conditions:
Test Condition Engine speed: Idling to 1,200 rpm
- A/C switch: On
- Blower fan speed: MAX position
- Temp. control: Optional [Set so that intake air temperature is 25° to 30° C (77° to 86°F)]
- Perform oil return operation for about ten minutes
Adjust the oil quantity according to the following table.
Oil Adjusting Procedure for Components Replacement Except Compressor After replacing any of
the following major components, add the correct amount of oil to the system.
Oil Adjustment Procedure for Compressor Replacement
Page 1177
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Service and Repair Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve
(RH)
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL
Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve (RH)
REMOVAL 1. Remove drive belt. Refer to See: Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and
Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair. 2. Disconnect Intake valve timing control solenoid valve
connector (RH).
3. Remove Intake valve timing control solenoid valve (RH) (3) from Intake valve timing control
solenoid valve cover (RH) (1).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Replace the O-ring (2) of the Intake valve timing control solenoid valve with a new one,
then lubricate O-ring with engine oil before installing.
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve bolt : 9.6 N.m (0.98 kg-m, 85 in-lb)
Locations
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Locations
Page 2407
Page 3392
- Arrow Indicates Front
- While holding the flange yoke on one side, check axial play of the joint as shown. If the journal
axial play exceeds the specification, repair or replace the journal parts. Refer to See:
Specifications/Propeller Shaft 2S1410/General Specification.
- Check the propeller shaft tube for dents or cracks. If damage is detected, replace the propeller
shaft assembly.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. After installation, check for vibration by driving the vehicle. Refer to See: Testing and
Inspection/Propeller Shaft 2S1410.
- If propeller shaft assembly or final drive assembly has been replaced,connect them as follows:
- Face companion flange mark (A) of the final drive (1) upward. With the mark (A) faced upward,
couple the propeller shaft and the final drive so that the matching mark (B) of the propeller shaft (2)
can be positioned as closest as possible with the matching mark (C) of the final drive companion
flange.
- Tighten propeller shaft and final drive bolts and nuts to specifications. Refer to "Removal and
Installation".
CAUTION: Do not reuse the bolts and nuts. Always install new ones.
Propeller Shaft 3S1410
REAR PROPELLER SHAFT
Removal and Installation
4WD Models (long wheel base)
Page 4073
- Erase DTC.
- Study the relationship between the cause detected by DTC and the symptom described by the
customer.
3. Check related service bulletins for information. Is any symptom described and any DTC
detected? Symptom is described, DTC is displayed - GO TO 3 Symptom is described, DTC is not
displayed - GO TO 4 Symptom is not described, DTC is displayed - GO TO 5 3. CONFIRM THE
SYMPTOM Confirm the symptom described by the customer. Connect CONSULT-III to the vehicle
in "DATA MONITOR" mode and check real time diagnosis results. Verify relationship between the
symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected. - GO TO 5 4. CONFIRM THE
SYMPTOM Confirm the symptom described by the customer. Connect CONSULT-III to the vehicle
in "DATA MONITOR" mode and check real time diagnosis results. Verify relationship between the
symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected. - GO TO 6 5. PERFORM DTC
CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE Perform DTC Confirmation Procedure for the displayed DTC, and
then check that DTC is detected again. At this time, always connect CONSULT-III to the vehicle,
and check diagnostic results in real time.
NOTE: Freeze frame data is useful if the DTC is not detected.
- Perform Component Function Check if DTC Confirmation Procedure is not included. This
simplified check procedure is an effective alternative though DTC cannot be detected during this
check.
If the result of Component Function Check is NG, it is the same as the detection of DTC by DTC
Confirmation Procedure. Is DTC detected? YES - GO TO 8 NO - Refer to See: Testing and
Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Service Information For Electrical
Incident/Intermittent Incident. 6. PERFORM BASIC INSPECTION Perform basic inspection of
system. Inspection End - GO TO 7 7. DETECT MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM BY SYMPTOM
TABLE Detect malfunctioning system based on the confirmed symptom in step 4, and determine
the trouble diagnosis order based on possible causes and symptom. - GO TO 8 8. DETECT
MALFUNCTIONING PART BY DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE Inspect according to Diagnostic
Procedure of the system.
NOTE: The Diagnostic Procedure described based on open circuit inspection. A short circuit
inspection is also required for the circuit check in the Diagnostic Procedure. Is malfunctioning part
detected? YES - GO TO 9 NO - Check voltage of related BCM terminals using CONSULT-III. 9.
REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PART 1. Repair or replace the malfunctioning
part. 2. Reconnect parts or connectors disconnected during Diagnostic Procedure again after repair
and replacement. 3. Check DTC. If DTC is displayed, erase it. - GO TO 10
10. FINAL CHECK
When DTC was detected in step 2, perform DTC Confirmation Procedure or Component Function
Check again, and then check that the malfunction have been fully repaired. When symptom was
described from the customer, refer to confirmed symptom in step 3 or 4 and check that the
symptom is not detected. OK or NG NG (DTC is detected) - GO TO 8 NG (Symptom remains) - GO
TO 6 OK - Inspection End.
IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room)
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Fail Safe
Page 307
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Disclaimer
Page 2474
21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete.
NOTE:
If you can't print the above screen:
a. Select the Print icon.
b. Select Save.
c. Select OK.
A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC.
NOTE:
If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in
the following file location:
At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start.
Page 806
^ DO NOT push/pull on the tire to perform the caster sweep.
7. Make sure the steering wheel is centered when performing toe-in measurements and
adjustments.
NOTE:
If you are using a Hunter alignment machine equipped with the WinToe(R)-Adjustment System:
^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The WinToe(R) system is not affected by steering
system movement during the adjustment process.
^ Bumping the tire or re-centering the steering wheel when adjusting "near frozen" tie rods is not
necessary. This makes the adjustment process faster
and easier.
^ WinToe(R) eliminates the effect of lash in the steering system.
If you are using a John Bean alignment machine equipped with EZ Toe:
^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The EZ Toe system is not affected by steering
system movement during the adjustment process.
^ This software routine is an improved method of setting front toe, making it easier to obtain a
centered steering wheel.
^ With EZ Toe, it is possible to adjust toe with the steering wheel turned at any angle left or right.
This is helpful when setting toe on engine wall
mounted rack and pinion units.
IMPORTANT:
If during the alignment process the vehicle was lifted off of the rack; after lowering, make sure to
jounce (bounce) the vehicle before confirming adjustments are correct.
After you have checked and adjusted vehicle alignment
8. Print the BEFORE and AFTER measurements and attach them to the Repair Order.
9. Road test the vehicle to make sure the steering wheel is "centered" when driving on a straight
flat road.
A/T Shift Lock System
Locations
Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Locations
METER SYSTEM
A/T OIL TEMPERATURE GAUGE : Component Parts Location
Page 5296
Hood Latch: Removal and Replacement
HOOD
Removal and Installation of Hood Lock Control
REMOVAL 1. Remove the front grill. Refer to See: Grille/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the front
fender protector (LH). Refer to See: Fender/Front Fender/Service and Repair. 3. Disconnect the
hood lock cable from the hood lock, and unclip it from the radiator core support upper and
hoodledge. 4. Remove the bolt and the hood opener. 5. Remove the grommet from the dash lower,
and pull the hood lock cable toward the passenger room.
CAUTION: While pulling, be careful not to damage the outside of the hood lock cable.
INSTALLATION 1. Pull the hood lock cable through the hole in dash lower panel into the engine
room.
Be careful not to bend the cable too much, keeping the radius 100mm (3.94 in) or more. 2. Make
sure the cable is not offset from the positioning grommet, and from inside the vehicle, push the
grommet into the dash lower hole securely. 3. Apply the sealant around the grommet at (*) mark.
Locations
Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Power Distribution Module: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Diagnosis And Repair Work Flow
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
Work Flow
OVERALL SEQUENCE
DETAILED FLOW 1. GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM Get the detailed information from the
customer about the symptom (the condition and the environment when the incident/malfunction
occurred). - GO TO 2 2. CHECK DTC 1. Check DTC. 2. Perform the following procedure if DTC is
displayed. Record DTC and freeze frame data.
Page 1449
EM-1
Page 4951
7. Install seat belt buckle and bolt.
8. Attach harness attachment clips to new hole locations on the seat pan.
9. Install seat cushion outer fininsher.
10. Install seat in reverse order of removal.
Page 2217
31. Select Diagnosis
32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%.
When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of
the screen will light (become enabled).
33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon.
Page 1802
7. Select VIN Registration
8. Select Next
9. Make sure the ignition is ON with engine OFF.
10. Select Start
Page 5167
2. Pull up / lift one side of the cover near the rear.
^ A small amount of force will be needed to pop loose the locating stud.
3. Pull up / lift the other side of the cover near the rear.
^ A small amount of force will be needed to pop loose the locating stud.
4. Remove the cover from the engine.
Disclaimer
Page 1331
EM-3
Page 1764
40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19.
NOTE:
For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF.
^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data.
41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42.
41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed.
^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service
Manual (ESM) for this procedure.
NOTE:
If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle.
IAVL can now be performed.
42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF.
^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs.
Rear Window Defogger System
Page 2295
CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor
CONSULT-III and CAN diagnostic support monitor (on-board diagnosis function) are used for
detecting root cause.
MONITOR ITEM (CONSULT-III) Example: CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR indication
Without PAST
With PAST
MONITOR ITEM (ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS)
Page 4140
Page 4318
Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics
in this bulletin.
^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification.
1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle:
^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge
^ Road Crown Gauge
NOTE:
Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use.
2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test.
3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern.
^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60
mph.
^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel
position during the road test.
NOTE:
^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have
been resolved.
^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then
diagnosis cannot be performed.
4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center"
below.
5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel
Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete.
6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step.
Other Service Information
Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel
spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road
(see example in Figure 1).
If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the
normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain
water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place.
Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the
crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction.
Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully
counteract the effect of a highly crowned road.
Page 1473
- B: Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (LH)
5. Install the crankshaft pulley.
- Install the key of the crankshaft.
- Insert the pulley by lightly tapping it.
CAUTION: Do not tap pulley on the side surface where the belt is installed (outer circumference).
6. Tighten the crankshaft pulley bolt.
- Lock the crankshaft using suitable tool then tighten the bolt.
- Perform the following steps for angular tightening:
a. Apply engine oil onto the threaded parts of the bolt and seating area.
b. Select the one most visible notch of the four on the bolt flange. Corresponding to the selected
notch put a alignment mark (such as paint) on the
crankshaft pulley.
Crankshaft pulley bolt torque
Step 1: 93.1 N-m (9.5 kg-m, 69 ft-lb)
Step 2: additional 90° (angle tightening)
7. Rotate the crankshaft pulley in normal direction (clockwise when viewed from engine front) to
check for parts interference.
8. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse of order of removal.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
- Before starting the engine check oil/fluid levels including engine coolant and engine oil. If the
levels are lower than required quantity fill to the specified level.
- Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration.
- Warm up engine thoroughly to make sure there is no leakage of any oils/fluids including engine oil
and engine coolant.
A/F Sensor 1 Heater
Oxygen Sensor: Specifications A/F Sensor 1 Heater
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
A/F Sensor 1 Heater
Page 3438
Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation Component Description
METER SYSTEM
A/T OIL TEMPERATURE GAUGE : Component Description
Service and Repair
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair
BRAKE FLUID
Bleeding Brake System
CAUTION: While bleeding, pay attention to master cylinder reservoir tank fluid level. 1. Turn
ignition switch OFF and disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector or
battery negative cable. 2. Connect a vinyl tube to the rear right bleed valve. 3. Fully depress brake
pedal 4 to 5 times. 4. With brake pedal depressed, loosen bleed valve to let the air out, and then
tighten it immediately. 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until no more air comes out. 6. Tighten bleed valve
to the specified torque. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake System/Brake
Caliper/Service and Repair/Front
Disc Brake/Exploded View (front disc brake), See: Brakes and Traction Control/Disc Brake
System/Brake Caliper/Service and Repair/Rear Disc Brake/Exploded View (rear disc brake).
7. Repeat steps 2 through 6 at each wheel, with master cylinder reservoir tank filled at least half
way, bleeding air in order from the front left, rear
left, and front right bleed valves.
Page 3787
Use matching marks on wheel hub assembly and disc rotor if the disc rotor is to be reused.
2. Install cylinder body (2) and tighten sliding pin bolts (1) to specification.
CAUTION: Before installing cylinder body to the vehicle, wipe off mounting surface of cylinder
body.
3. Install brake hose connection (A) and new copper washer to cylinder body and tighten to
specification.
CAUTION: Do not reuse copper washers.
- Securely attach brake hose to protrusion on cylinder body.
4. Refill with new brake fluid and bleed air. Refer to See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair. 5.
Check rear disc brake for drag and correct as necessary. 6. Install rear wheel and tires.
Page 3191
REPAIR FLOW CHART
Page 1723
Page 332
Page 3838
- Refill brake system with new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system. Refer to See: Brake
Bleeding/Service and Repair.
Page 3222
REMOVAL
Floor shift 1. Remove negative battery terminal. Refer to See: Starting and
Charging/Battery/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 2. Remove A/T finisher. Refer to
See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/A/T
Finisher.
3. Disconnect A/T device harness connector. 4. Disconnect selector control cable. 5. Remove
control device assembly.
Column shift 1. Remove the column shift control.
2. Remove the A/T cable clip lock plate and remove the cable from column shifter pin.
INSTALLATION Installation is in reverse order of removal. After installation is completed, be sure to check A/T position. Refer to See: Adjustments See:
Procedures. Adjust if necessary. Refer to See: Adjustments See: Procedures.
Page 5060
2. Check voltage between auto anti-dazzling inside mirror (homelink universal transceiver) harness
connector and ground.
Is the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO 2 NO - Check the following. 10A fuse [No. 19 located in the fuse block (J/B)]
- Harness for open or short between fuse and auto anti-dazzling inside mirror (homelink universal
transceiver).
2.CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between auto anti-dazzling inside mirror (homelink universal transceiver) harness
connector and ground.
Is the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO 3 NO - Repair harness. 3.CHECK INTERMITTENT
INCIDENT Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/Service
Information For Electrical Incident/Intermittent Incident. - INSPECTION END.
Page 1330
EM-2
Page 5914
2. Rotate footwell lamp socket (3) counterclockwise from bracket.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Bulb Replacement 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Release the pawls and remove
bulb shield (1) from bracket. 3. Pull bulb (2) straight out from footwell lamp socket (3) to remove.
Footwell lamp bulb : 12V - 3.4W
Specifications
Ignition Timing: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing
Page 1690
Locations
Relay Box: Locations
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 2589
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL
Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE)
REMOVAL 1. Remove engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Engine Cover.
2. Remove air duct and resonator assembly. Refer to See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Air
Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair/Removal and
Installation.
3. Disconnect camshaft position sensor connector.
4. Remove camshaft position sensor (2) from Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (LH)
(1).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Replace the O-ring (3) of the camshaft position sensor with a new one, then lubricate
O-ring with engine oil before installing.
Camshaft position sensor bolt : 9.6 N.m (0.98 kg-m, 85 in-lb)
Page 883
Fuel Filter: Removal and Replacement
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
Removal and Installation
Short Wheel Base
Long Wheel Base
Page 3716
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 1585
Temperature Sensor (Gauge): Description and Operation System Description
METER SYSTEM
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE : System Description
The engine coolant temperature gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature. The ECM
provides an engine coolant temperature signal to the combination meter via CAN communication
lines.
Page 2380
Oxygen Sensor: Specifications Heated Oxygen Sensor 2 Heater
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Heated Oxygen sensor 2 Heater
Locations
Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration Procedure
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration
Procedure
Classification: EC09-028
Reference: NTB09-136
Date: December 1, 2009
2005 AND LATER; ECM VIN REGISTRATION
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2005 and later
SERVICE INFORMATION
The Applied Vehicles must have the correct Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) registered in the
Engine Control Module (ECM). The VIN registration process must be performed under the following
conditions.
^ When installing a new ECM
^ If, during vehicle service, the VIN registration inside the ECM is found to be missing or incorrect.
When needed, use the Service Procedure in this bulletin to perform ECM VIN registration.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for
any repairs being performed.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Connect C-III to the vehicle and perform the initial selections:
NOTE:
If C-III is already connected, go to Step 2.
a. Start C-III and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear.
b. Select the detected VI from the list.
c. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
d. Select Model and Year.
e. Confirm the correct model and year were selected.
f. Select Repair.
Page 5569
Warning Chime - Part 5
Combination Meter
COMBINATION METER
Wiring Diagram
Page 4850
Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Manual A/C (Type 2)
INTAKE SENSOR
System Description
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Intake Sensor
The intake sensor (1) is located on the heater and cooling unit assembly. It converts temperature of
air after if passes through the evaporator into a resistance value which is then input to the front air
control.
Page 4491
2. For rear lower link(s) identified as needing replacement:
Use the appropriate illustration in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual, section RSU, for
link replacement information.
^ Make sure to replace the ball joint securing nut with a new one. New nut is listed in the Parts
Information.
^ Make sure to replace both lower link nuts with new ones. New nuts are listed in the Parts
Information.
^ Follow torque specifications in the illustrations.
3. Perform a wheel alignment.
^ For Frontier, Xterra, and Titan: Perform a 2 wheel alignment (refer to Section FSU in the
appropriate Service Manual for alignment specifications and
adjustment points).
^ For Pathfinder and Armada: Perform a 4 wheel alignment. (Refer to sections FSU and RSU in the
appropriate Service Manual for alignment
specifications and adjustment points.)
NOTE:
The original (factory installed) bolts for the front lower links are self centering and should not need
replacement. The vehicle should need toe adjustment only.
4. Grind a large X (about 1/16 inch deep) on the bottom side of the old link so it can be identified as
a non-usable part.
NOTE:
Make sure to use suitable hand and eye protection.
Page 4321
SPECIAL TOOLS
Page 793
SPECIAL TOOLS
Page 2363
Knock Sensor: Locations
Page 1494
Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection
FUEL PRESSURE
Fuel Pressure Check
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE
With CONSULT-III 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Perform "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" in
"WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-III. 3. Start engine. 4. After engine stalls, crank it two or
three times to release all fuel pressure. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF.
Without CONSULT-III 1. Remove fuel pump fuse located in IPDM E/R.
2. Start engine. 3. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 4. Turn
ignition switch OFF. 5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system.
FUEL PRESSURE CHECK
CAUTION: Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger.
Be careful not to scratch or get the fuel hose connection area dirty when servicing, so that the quick
connector o-ring maintains sealability.
- Use Fuel Pressure Gauge Kit J-44321 and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 to check fuel
pressure.
- Do not perform fuel pressure check with electrical system operating (i.e. lights, rear defog, A/C,
etc.).
Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false readings due to varying engine loads and changes in
manifold vacuum.
NOTE: Prepare pans or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out.
The fuel pressure cannot be completely released because A60 models do not have fuel return
system. 1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". 2. Remove
engine cover. 3. Remove fuel hose using Quick Connector Release J-45488. Refer to See: Intake
Manifold/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. Do not twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose.
- Do not remove fuel hose from quick connector.
- Keep fuel hose connections clean.
Page 3596
Page 3025
Page 2054
Page 2242
Page 1398
6. Remove the rear oil seal using suitable tool.
CAUTION: Do not damage crankshaft or oil seal retainer surface.
INSTALLATION 1. Apply new engine oil to both the oil seal lip and dust seal lip of the new rear oil
seal. 2. Install the rear oil seal.
- Install the rear oil seal so that each seal lip is oriented as shown.
- Press-fit the rear oil seal using suitable tool.
CAUTION: Do not damage the crankshaft or cylinder block.
- Press-fit the oil seal straight to avoid causing burrs or tilting.
- Do not touch grease applied onto the oil seal lip.
- Do not damage or scratch the outer circumference of the rear oil seal.
- Tap until flattened with the front edge of the oil seal retainer.
3. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See:
Service and Repair/Overhaul/Disassembly And
Assembly, See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Transmission Assembly,
CAUTION: When replacing an engine or transmission you must make sure the dowels are installed correctly
during re-assembly.
- Improper alignment caused by missing dowels may cause vibration, oil leaks or breakage of
drivetrain components.
Page 4080
Monitor item
ACTIVE TEST Test item
Service and Repair
Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair
REAR OIL SEAL
Rear Oil Seal
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal 1. Remove rear propeller shaft. Refer to See: Drive/Propeller Shafts, Bearings and
Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Propeller Shaft 2S1410.
2. Remove transfer from transmission (4WD models). Refer to See: Service and Repair/Removal
and Replacement/Transmission Assembly. 3. Remove rear oil seal using suitable tool.
CAUTION: Do not scratch rear extension assembly (2WD models) or adapter case assembly (4WD
models).
Installation 1. Install new rear oil seal until it is flush into the rear extension case (2WD models)
using Tool or adapter case (4WD models) using suitable tool.
Tool number : ST33400001 (J-26082)
CAUTION: Apply ATF to rear oil seal.
- Do not reuse rear oil seal.
2. Install transfer to transmission (4WD models). Refer to See: Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Transmission Assembly. 3. Install rear propeller shaft. Refer to See: Drive/Propeller
Shafts, Bearings and Joints/Drive/Propeller Shaft/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Propeller Shaft 2S1410.
Page 886
Disconnect the quick connector as follows: -
Hold the sides of the connector, push in tabs and pull out the tube.
- If the connector and the tube are stuck together, push and pull several times until they start to
move. Then disconnect them by pulling.
CAUTION: The quick connector can be disconnected when the tabs are completely depressed. Do not twist
the quick connector more than necessary.
- Do not use any tools to disconnect the quick connector.
- Keep the resin tube away from heat. Be especially careful when welding near the tube.
- Prevent any acid liquids such as battery electrolyte, from getting on the resin tube.
- Do not bend or twist the resin tube during connection.
- Do not remove the remaining retainer on the hard tube (or the equivalent) except when the resin
tube or the retainer is replaced.
- When the resin tube or hard tube, or the equivalent, is replaced, also replace the retainer with a
new one (white colored retainer).
- To keep the quick connector clean and to avoid damage and contamination from foreign
materials, cover the quick connector with plastic bags or suitable material as shown.
8. Remove the four bolts and remove the fuel tank shield using power tool. 9. Remove the fuel tank
strap bolts while supporting the fuel tank with a suitable lift jack.
Page 3702
2. Inspect the right side (inboard side) of the brake pedal pivot pin (see Figure 2). ^ See Figure 3
below for photos of OK and NG, conditions.
Page 3114
18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM.
The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to
use.
19. Select Next
NOTE:
If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with
Reprogramming.
Locations
Page 5600
Audible Warning Device: Description and Operation Key Warning Chime
System Diagram
WARNING CHIME SYSTEM
KEY WARNING CHIME : System Diagram
System Description
WARNING CHIME SYSTEM
KEY WARNING CHIME : System Description
With the key inserted into the key switch, and the ignition switch in the OFF or ACC position, when
driver's door is opened, the warning chime will sound. BCM detects key inserted into the ignition switch, and sends key warning signal to combination
meter with CAN communication line.
- When combination meter receives key warning signal, it sounds warning chime.
Component Description
WARNING CHIME SYSTEM
KEY WARNING CHIME : Component Description
Page 4049
Power Distribution Module: Locations Relay Control System
RELAY CONTROL SYSTEM
Component Parts Location
Diagram Information and Instructions
Information Bus: Diagram Information and Instructions
Connector Symbols
HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS
Connector symbols
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the
direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector.
For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements,
"Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals
Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring
diagrams.
Sample/Wiring Diagram -Example-
Page 3396
ASSEMBLY
Journal 1. Assemble the journal bearings. Apply multipurpose grease on the bearing inner surface.
NOTE: During assembly, use caution so that the needle bearings do not fall down.
2. Select new snap rings that will provide the specified play in an axial direction of the journal, and
install them. Refer to See:
Specifications/Propeller Shaft 2F1310/Snap Ring.
CAUTION: Do not reuse snap rings
NOTE: Select snap rings with a difference in thickness at both sides within 0.02 mm (0.0008 in). 3.
Adjust the thrust clearance between the bearing and snap ring to zero by tapping the yoke.
4. Make sure that the journal moves smoothly and is below the joint flex effort specification. Refer
to See: Specifications/Propeller Shaft
2F1310/General Specification.
Page 553
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the Fuel Pump Assembly from the vehicle.
^ Refer to section FL in the applicable Service Manual for removal information.
^ Make sure to follow all Service Manual warnings and cautions.
Page 2901
TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS
Page 4503
Service and Repair
Front Bumper: Service and Repair
FRONT BUMPER
Removal and Installation
STEEL BUMPER
Removal 1. Remove the front grille. Refer to See: Grille/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the engine
under cover or skid plate. 3. Remove the fog lamp (if equipped). Refer to See: Lighting and
Horns/Fog/Driving Lamp/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation. 4. Remove the front
bumper side bracket nuts. 5. Remove the front bumper assembly. 6. Remove the front bumper
opening finisher clips C103 and remove the front bumper opening finisher. 7. Remove the front
bumper RH and LH side finishers. 8. Remove the front bumper brackets LH and RH. 9. Remove
the front bumper stays LH and RH.
Page 4385
5. Push the vehicle slowly ahead to rotate the wheels 180° degrees (1/2 a turn).
CAUTION: If the wheels have rotated more than 180° (1/2 turn), start this procedure again from the
beginning. Never push the vehicle backward. 6. Measure the distance "B" on the front side of the
front tires at the same marks as shown. Total toe-in is calculated as "A" - "B".
Total toe-in : Refer to See: Specifications/Front Suspension/Wheel Alignment
7. Adjust the toe-in by varying the length of the steering outer socket.
a. Loosen the outer tie-rod lock nuts. b. Adjust the toe-in by screwing the outer tie-rods in or out.
Standard length "L" : Refer to See: Steering/Specifications/Steering Outer Socket And Inner Socket
c. Tighten the outer tie-rod lock nuts to specification.
Lock nut : Refer See: Steering/Steering Gear/Service and Repair/Overhaul
FRONT WHEEL TURNING ANGLE
NOTE: Check front wheel turning angle after the toe-in inspection.
1. Place front wheels on turning radius gauges in straight ahead position and rear wheels on
stands so that vehicle can be level.
Check the maximum inner and outer wheel turning angles for LH and RH road wheels.
2. Start engine and run at idle, turn steering wheel all the way right and left, measure the turning
angle.
Wheel turning angle (full turn) : Refer to See: Specifications/Front Suspension/Wheel Alignment
- Any turning angles are not adjustable. If any of steering angles are out of the specification, check
if the following parts are worn or damaged.
Page 1135
7. After the tire/wheel is balanced, apply an index mark to the tire at the location of the valve stem
(see Figure 6).
^ This index mark will allow you to tell if the tire has slipped on the rim (see Figure 7).
Tire to Rim Slippage:
^ Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs, the tire
may become un-balanced.
^ Overtime the tire lubricate will dry, eliminating the lubricant as a cause of tire slippage.
^ Some tire lubricants may require up to 24 hours to completely dry.
^ If slippage occurs, the tire/wheel will need to be re-balanced.
WORK - AID AVOID CUSTOMER RETURNS FOR VIBRATION
Automatic Drive Positioner Control Unit
Memory Positioning Module: Service and Repair Automatic Drive Positioner Control Unit
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER CONTROL UNIT
Removal and Installation
CAUTION: When removing and installing, use shop cloths to protect parts from damage.
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the instrument driver lower
panel. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument
Panel/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Lower Panel LH.
3. Remove the screw from the automatic drive positioner control unit (1). 4. Remove automatic
drive positioner control unit (1) from bracket and disconnect electrical connectors.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Clamp the harness in position.
NOTE: After installing the automatic drive positioner control unit, perform additional service when
disconnecting battery negative terminal. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning.
Premium Without Navigation
Antenna, Radio: Service and Repair Premium Without Navigation
SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA
Removal and Installation
SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA
Removal 1. Lower the headliner. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair.
2. Disconnect the satellite radio antenna connector. 3. Remove the satellite radio antenna nut. 4.
Remove the satellite radio antenna.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 3576
Shift Indicator: Description and Operation Component Description
METER SYSTEM
SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR : Component Description
Page 2583
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations
Page 1457
EM-10
Electrical Units Location
Body Control Module: Locations Electrical Units Location
Page 4028
Fuse: Testing and Inspection
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
Fuse
- If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse.
- Use fuse of specified rating. Never use fuse of more than specified rating.
- Do not partially install fuse; always insert it into fuse holder properly.
- Remove fuse for "ELECTRICAL PARTS (BAT)" if vehicle is not used for a long period of time.
Locations
Drivetrain - Driveshaft U-Joint Noise/Vibration
Drive/Propeller Shaft: All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Driveshaft U-Joint Noise/Vibration
Classification: PD10-001
Reference: NTB10-052
Date: April 8, 2010
NOISE AND/OR VIBRATION FROM PROPELLER SHAFT U-JOINT (JOURNAL/JOURNAL
BEARINGS)
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) 2004-2010 Titan (A60) 2005-2010 Frontier (D40)
2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2010 Xterra (N50)
IF YOU CONFIRM
The propeller shaft u-joint (journal/journal bearings) is the source of noise and/or vibration on an
Applied Vehicle.
Diagnose by evaluating the u-joint with the propeller shaft removed. If the u-joint axial play or flex
effort exceed the specifications in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM), or if a "ratchety" feel is
exhibited during rotation, the u-joint (journal/journal bearings) should be replaced.
ACTION
Replace the u-joint (journal/journal bearings).
^ Refer to the applicable ESM for removal and installation instructions.
NOTE:
Do not replace the entire propeller shaft assembly if u-joint (journal/journal bearings) replacement
can resolve the incident, should it occur.
PARTS INFORMATION
U-joint (journal/journal bearings) kits are now available for all Applied Vehicles. Refer to the
electronic parts catalog (FAST or equivalent) to locate the appropriate parts needed for this repair.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the indicated FRT and
appropriate coding for repairs preformed.
Page 4475
Turning torque "B" : 0.5 - 6.4 N.m (0.05 - 0.65 kg-m, 4 - 57 in-lb)
Vertical End Play Check dust cover for damage. Replace it and the cover clamp if necessary.
NOTE: Before checking the axial forces and end play, turn the lower ball joint at least 10
revolutions so that the ball joint is properly broken in.
Vertical end play "C" : 0 mm (0 in)
Page 117
Power Distribution Module: Electrical Diagrams
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Wiring Diagram
IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) - Part 1
Page 1969
SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal"
condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Service and Repair
Parking Assist Warning Indicator: Service and Repair
BUZZER
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the combination meter cover. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior
Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Cluster LID A/Removal And Installation.
2. Remove the two bolts (1), disconnect the connector (2) and remove the front buzzer.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 660
Page 3732
Lock nut (A) : 18.7 N.m (1.9 kg-m, 14 ft-lb)
CAUTION: Make sure that the screw portion of the end of input rod is located inside the clevis. 3.
With the brake pedal pulled up and held by hand, press the stop lamp switch and the ASCD cancel
switch in until the threaded ends contact the
brake pedal bracket.
4. With the threaded ends of the stop lamp switch and ASCD switch contacting the pedal bracket,
turn the switches 45° clockwise to lock in place.
Check that the stop lamp switch and ASCD cancel switch threaded end to brake pedal bracket gap
(C) is within specifications.
CAUTION: Make sure that the gap (C) between the brake pedal bracket and stop lamp switch and
ASCD cancel switch threaded ends are within specification. 5. Check the brake pedal for smooth
operation.
CAUTION: Make sure that the stop lamp goes off when the brake pedal is released. 6. Start the
engine and check the height of the brake pedal when depressing it.
Page 1810
CAUTION
4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF.
^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure.
^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF.
^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear
defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel
heater, etc.
CAUTION
5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running.
If the cooling fans are running:
a. Turn the ignition OFF.
b. Wait for the engine to cool.
c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF).
d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running.
6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer.
7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress"
message to clear.
Page 2098
CAUTION
2. When you get to the ECM Reprogramming screen shown in Figure 1, confirm this bulletin
applies as follows.
A. On your C-III screen, look at the Part Number column (see Figure 1):
^ If this column is blank (no part number listed), this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to
ASIST for further diagnostic information.
^ If a Part Number is listed, write it on the Repair Order.
Fuse Block - Junction Box (J/B)
Fuse: Locations Fuse Block - Junction Box (J/B)
FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)
Terminal Arrangement
Page 944
6. Install the lower glove box in the instrument panel and secure it with the two hinge pins.
Page 951
2. Check the fuel level on level gauge. If the fuel gauge indicates more than the level as shown (full
or almost full), drain the fuel from the fuel tank
until the fuel gauge indicates the level as shown, or less.
- If the fuel pump does not operate, use the following procedure to drain the fuel to the specified
level. a. Insert a suitable hose of less than 15 mm (0.59 in) diameter into the fuel filler pipe through
the fuel filler opening to drain the fuel from fuel
filler pipe.
b. Remove the LH rear wheel and tire. Refer to See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Rotation
.
c. Remove the fuel filler pipe shield. d. Disconnect the fuel filler hose from the fuel filler pipe and
disconnect the vent hose quick connector.
e. Insert a suitable hose into the fuel tank through the fuel filler hose to drain the fuel from the fuel
tank.
3. Release the fuel pressure from the fuel lines. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Fuel Pressure Check .
4. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 5. Remove the three nuts and remove fuel line pump
protector.
6. Disconnect the EVAP hose at the EVAP canister. 7. Disconnect the fuel level sensor, fuel filter,
and fuel pump assembly electrical connector and the fuel feed hose.
Page 1257
Main Bearings Selection Table (No. 2, 3 and 4 journal)
Interior - Driver's Seat Arm Rest Loose
Arm Rest: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Driver's Seat Arm Rest Loose
Classification: BT08-037
Reference: NTB09-005
Date: January 15, 2009
FRONT DRIVER SEAT ARMREST LOOSE
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2009 Armada (TA60) 2004-2009 Titan (A60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
The front driver seat armrest is loose.
ACTION
Remove bolt and apply Permatex(R) Threadlocker Blue or equivalent to bolt threads.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing the repair.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. a. Move the driver seat to the full rearward position.
b. Fully recline the driver seatback.
Page 2359
NOTE: ECM and IPDM E/R have a termination circuit. Check other units first. 4. Connect the
battery cable to the negative terminal. Check if the symptoms described in the "Symptom (Results
from interview with customer)" are
reproduced.
NOTE: Although unit-related error symptoms occur, do not confuse them with other symptoms.
Inspection result Reproduced - Connect the connector. Check other units as per the above
procedure. Non-reproduced - Replace the unit whose connector was disconnected.
Page 3796
3. Remove the upper and lower sliding pin bolts (see Figure 1).
4. Support / hang the caliper cylinder body with a wire or other suitable support (see Figure 2).
^ Make sure the brake hose is not stretched or stressed.
^ Make sure the sensor harness bracket will not be bent by weight of the caliper cylinder body.
5. Refer to the BR Section of the Service Manual as needed to complete the brake service.
Specifications
Idle Speed: Specifications
Idle Speed
Locations
Variable Valve Timing Actuator Position Sensor: Locations
Page 5776
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the Fuel Pump Assembly from the vehicle.
^ Refer to section FL in the applicable Service Manual for removal information.
^ Make sure to follow all Service Manual warnings and cautions.
Page 3755
3. Place a wooden block as shown, and blow air into union bolt hole to remove piston and piston
boot.
CAUTION: Do not get your fingers caught in piston.
4. Using a suitable tool, remove piston seal from cylinder body as shown.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage cylinder body inner wall.
CALIPER INSPECTION
Cylinder Body Check inside surface of cylinder body for score, rust wear, damage or foreign
materials. If any of the above conditions are observed, replace cylinder body. Minor damage from
rust or foreign materials may be eliminated by polishing surface with a fine emery paper. Replace
cylinder body if necessary.
CAUTION: Use new brake fluid to clean. Do not use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene.
Torque Member Check for wear, cracks, and damage. If damage or deformation is present, replace
the affected part.
Piston Check piston for score, rust, wear, damage or presence of foreign materials. Replace if any
of the above conditions are observed.
CAUTION: Piston sliding surface is plated, do not polish with emery paper even if rust of foreign materials are
stuck to sliding surface.
Sliding Pin Bolts and Sliding Pin Boots Make sure there is no wear, damage, or cracks in sliding
sleeve and sliding sleeve boots, and if there are, replace them.
ASSEMBLY
CAUTION: Do not use NISSAN Rubber Grease (KRE00 00010, KRE00 00010 01) when
assembling.
Service and Repair
Rear Door Window Glass: Service and Repair
REAR DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR
Rear Door Glass
REMOVAL 1. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and
Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair .
2. Operate the power window switch to raise/lower the door window until the glass bolts can be
seen. 3. Remove the inside seal. 4. Remove the glass bolts and the glass.
INSTALLATION
1. Install the glass from outside to ensure that it is in both the front and rear glass channels.
Tighten glass the bolts to the specified torque.
Glass bolts : 6.1 N.m (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb)
2. Install the inside seal. 3. Install the rear door finisher. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Doors,
Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair.
FITTING INSPECTION Check that the glass is securely fit into the glass run groove.
- Lower the glass slightly [approximately 10 to 20 mm (0.39 to 0.79 in)], and check that the
clearance to the sash is parallel. If the clearance between the glass and sash is not parallel, loosen
the regulator bolt, guide rail bolts, and glass and carrier plate bolts to correct the glass position.
Page 428
1. Write down the radio station presets.
2. Move / adjust the passenger seat bottom and seatback to the middle and upright positions.
3. Turn the ignition OFF. Disconnect both 12V battery cables, negative cable first, and wait at least
3 minutes before proceeding to step 4.
CAUTION:
Do not drop, tilt, or bump the side air bag module while removing/installing the seat. Always handle
it with care.
4. Remove the four bolts holding the seat to the body.
5. Place the seat, back side down, on a clean covered workbench.
6. Remove the lower flap cover.
Page 1691
Page 2261
MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. -
The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Abbreviation List
ABBREVIATIONS
Abbreviation List
The following ABBREVIATIONS are used:
Page 1123
^ Make sure the tire is evenly positioned on the lower safety humps.
5. WARNING: Do not exceed the tire manufactures recommended bead seating inflation pressure.
Generally this is 40psi.
If the bead does not seat with the appropriate pressure:
a. Break down the tire/rim assembly.
b. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2.
c. Remount the tire.
6. After inflating the tires, inspect the bead area.
^ Make sure bead is seated uniformly (the same) around the entire circumference of the wheel.
NOTE:
Many tires have Aligning Rings that will help confirm the bead is uniformly seated.
If uniform; bead is seated correctly. If not uniform
1. Break down the tire/rim assembly.
2. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2.
3. Remount the tire.
Page 4339
> Engine coolant and lubricating oils at specified levels
> Spare tire, jack, hand tools, and floor mats in designated positions
NOTE:
Refer to the appropriate Service Manual for information about any of the above checks and
inspections.
4. Check the target mounts.
^ If there is any visual damage (bent, worn, cracked, etc), have the equipment repaired before
performing any alignments.
^ Make sure the target mounts are properly adjusted and configured (see Figure 11).
NOTE:
The target mount example shown in Figure 11 is for Hunter "camera type" alignment machines.
Follow the operation manual for your specific equipment.
Page 5611
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the seat belt buckle switch LH connector. 3. Check
continuity between terminals 1 and 2.
Is the inspection result normal? YES - Inspection End. NO - Replace the seat belt buckle switch
LH.
Component Function Check
KEY SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Component Function Check
1.CHECK BCM INPUT SIGNAL Select "DATA MONITOR" for "BCM" and check the "KEY ON SW"
monitor value.
- Inspection End.
Diagnosis Procedure
KEY SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Description
Transmits a key switch signal to the BCM.
KEY SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure
COLUMN SHIFT 1.CHECK FUSE Check if the key switch 10A fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse
block (J/B)] is blown. Is the fuse blown? YES - Be sure to repair the cause of malfunction before
installing new fuse. NO - GO TO 2 2.CHECK BCM INPUT SIGNAL
Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground.
Page 4231
Power Distribution Module: Component Tests and General Diagnostics
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure
1. CHECK FUSES AND FUSIBLE LINK Check that the following IPDM E/R fuses or fusible link are
not blown.
Is the fuse blown? YES - Replace the blown fuse or fusible link after repairing the affected circuit.
NO - GO TO 2 2. CHECK BATTERY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R. 3. Check voltage between IPDM E/R harness
connectors and ground.
Is the measurement value normal? YES - GO TO 3 NO - Repair or replace harness. 3. CHECK
GROUND CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
Page 4338
^ Center the front wheels on the turn plates.
^ Chock the left rear wheel.
Preliminary Checks:
3. Perform pre-alignment checks.
^ Tire condition (wear, partial wear, flaws, etc.)
^ Road wheel condition (damage and deformation)
^ Tire pressure
^ Inspect for visible damage to any suspension components
^ Wheel bearing axial play
^ Ball joints of suspension arms
^ Shock absorber operation and visual check for oil leakage
^ Condition of axle and suspension (check for bushing cracks and slack)
^ Vehicle weight
> Empty - no cargo, luggage, or passengers
> Fuel level is full
Page 1783
Page 4405
Recommended tire inflating tools.
Aftermarket Tire Sealers
Aftermarket tire sealants and/or aerosol repair kits should not be used (refer to the vehicle's
Owner's Manual).
^ Some aftermarket tire sealers and/or aerosol repair kits contain chemicals and propellants that
can cause damage to TPMS sensors.
NOTE:
Damage caused by use of aftermarket tire sealants contrary to recommendations in the vehicle
Owner's Manual is not covered under the Nissan New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Page 3112
13. Select Confirm
14. Select Diagnosis
15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete.
Page 3715
3. Inspection results (see Figures above):
^ OK - No further action required.
^ NG - Replace the brake pedal assembly.
^ If the brake pedal assembly replacement is needed immediately send an email with the following
information:
Email subject line: PC039 Brake Pedal Inspection
Service Manager Name: Contact phone number: Dealer Code: Dealer Name: VIN:
IMPORTANT:
Include in the email a digital photograph of the pin in the vehicle for our evaluation.
PARTS INFORMATION
^ If the brake pedal assembly replacement is needed immediately send an email as directed
above.
Vehicle - Flat Towing Guideline
Towing Information: Technical Service Bulletins Vehicle - Flat Towing Guideline
Classification: GI99-001F
Reference: NTB99-020F
Date: August 8, 2008
LIMITATIONS ON FLAT TOWING OF NISSAN VEHICLES
This bulletin has been amended to apply to all current production models. Please discard all earlier
versions.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Models
APPLIED DATES: 1992-2009
SERVICE INFORMATION
This Bulletin contains important guidelines and limitations concerning towing of Nissan vehicles
with all four wheels on the ground ("flat towing").
CAUTION:
Failure to follow these guidelines can result in severe transmission or drivetrain damage. For all
towing including "emergency towing" procedures refer to the Owners Manual.
1. 4WD/AWD vehicles equipped with Automatic Transmission (including CVT):
^ DO NOT Flat Tow - doing so will damage internal transmission components.
^ DO NOT use a tow dolly - doing so will damage drivetrain components.
2. FWD vehicles equipped with Automatic Transmission (including CVT) and Altima Hybrid:
^ DO NOT Flat Tow - doing so will damage internal transmission components.
^ An appropriate vehicle tow dolly MUST be placed under the vehicle's front wheels.
^ Always follow the dolly manufacturer's recommendations when using their product.
3. RWD vehicles equipped with Automatic Transmission:
^ DO NOT Flat Tow - doing so will damage internal transmission components.
^ An appropriate vehicle tow dolly MUST be placed under the vehicle's rear wheels.
^ Always follow the dolly manufacturer's recommendations when using their product.
4. 2WD/4WD vehicles equipped with a manual transmission:
^ Always flat tow with the manual transmission in Neutral.
^ Always flat tow a manual transmission vehicle facing forward.
^ Maximum speed while flat towing: 60 MPH.
^ After towing for 500 miles, stop. Start and idle the engine with the transmission in Neutral for two
minutes - failure to do so may cause damage to the transmission.
^ For 4WD vehicles, always flat tow with the transfer case in the 2 HI position.
Page 2500
Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve (LH)
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Service and Repair Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve
(LH)
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL
Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve (LH)
REMOVAL 1. Remove engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Cover. 2. Remove air duct and resonator assembly.
Refer to See: Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and
Repair/Removal and Installation.
3. Remove drive belt. Refer to See: Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive
Belt/Service and Repair. 4. Disconnect Intake valve timing control intake valve timing control
solenoid valve connector (LH).
5. Remove Intake valve timing control solenoid valve (LH) (2) from Intake valve timing control
solenoid valve cover (LH) (1).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Replace the O-ring (3) of the Intake valve timing control solenoid valve with a new one,
then lubricate O-ring with engine oil before installing.
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve bolt : 9.6 N.m (0.98 kg-m, 85 in-lb)
Page 722
SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal"
condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Page 1147
Wheel Fastener: Specifications
Wheel Nut
Torque: 133 N.m (14 kg-m, 98 ft-lb)
When installing wheels, tighten them diagonally by dividing the work two to three times in order to
prevent the wheels from developing any distortion.
Locations
Locations
Temperature Sensor (Gauge): Locations
METER SYSTEM
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE : Component Parts Location
Locations
Page 54
- Refill brake system with new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system. Refer to See:
Brakes and Traction Control/Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair.
Page 2122
Page 864
4. Install Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 and Fuel Pressure Gauge (from kit J-44321) as shown
in figure. Do not distort or bend fuel rail tube when installing fuel pressure gauge adapter.
- When reconnecting fuel hose, check the original fuel hose for damage and abnormality.
5. Turn ignition switch ON (reactivate fuel pump), and check for fuel leakage. 6. Start engine and
check for fuel leakage. 7. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge. During fuel pressure check, check for fuel leakage from fuel connection every 3 minutes.
At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/cm2, 51 psi)
8. If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step. 9. Check the following. Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging
- Fuel filter for clogging
- Fuel pump
- Fuel pressure regulator for clogging
If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator. If NG, repair or replace.
10. Before disconnecting Fuel Pressure Gauge and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6, release fuel
pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE
RELEASE".
Page 2577
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair
ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM
Removal and Installation
ADJUSTABLE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY Adjustable Accelerator Pedal
CAUTION: Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal adjusting mechanism.
- Before removal and installation, the accelerator and brake pedals must be in the front most
position.
This is to align the base position of the accelerator and brake pedals. Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly.
- Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket.
- Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling.
- Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water.
Removal 1. Move the accelerator and brake pedals to the frontmost position. 2. Turn the ignition
switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal. 3. Disconnect the adjustable brake pedal
cable from the adjustable brake pedal. Unlock, then pull the adjustable brake pedal cable to disconnect it from the adjustable brake pedal.
Technician Safety Information
Information Bus: Technician Safety Information
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
The Supplemental Restraint System such as "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER",
used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front
passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage
front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag
deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and
whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system
safely is included in the Restraint Systems Information.
WARNING: To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed
by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
- Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to
personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and
Air Bag Module, see the "SRS AIRBAG".
- Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed. SRS
wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.
Page 5370
LOWER DASH SIDE FINISHER
Removal 1. Remove the push pin from lower dash side finisher. 2. Remove the front kicking plate.
3. Remove the lower dash side finisher and front kicking plate together. 4. Remove the lower dash
side finisher from front kicking plate.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CENTER PILLAR LOWER FINISHER
Removal 1. Remove the seat belt lower anchor. Refer to See: Restraint Systems/Seat Belt
Systems/Child Restraint/Child Seat Tether Attachment/Service and
Repair/LATCH (Lower Anchors And Tether For Children) System.
- On RH side, disconnect seat belt tension sensor.
2. Remove the front and rear kicking plates. 3. Remove the center pillar lower finisher.
Installation
Page 3944
Starter Relay: Locations Without Intelligent Key System
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Terminal Layout
TERMINAL LAYOUT
Locations
Page 1666
Page 4749
AUTO SWITCH The compressor, intake door, air mix doors, outlet doors and blower speed are automatically
controlled so that the in-vehicle temperature will reach, and be maintained at the set temperature
selected by the operator.
- When pressing AUTO switch, air inlet, air outlet, blower speed, and discharge air temperature are
automatically controlled.
TEMPERATURE CONTROL DIAL (DRIVER) Increases or decreases the set temperature.
TEMPERATURE CONTROL DIAL (PASSENGER) Increases or decreases the set temperature.
- When REC switch is ON, REC switch indicator turns ON, and air inlet is set to REC.
- When REC switch is turned OFF, or when compressor is turned from ON to OFF, REC switch is
automatically turned OFF. REC mode can be re-entered by pressing REC switch again.
- REC switch is not operated when DEF switch is turned ON, at the D/F position, or in floor
position.
Positions the air outlet doors to the defrost position. Also positions the intake doors to the outside
air position, and turns A/C compressor ON.
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH (CREW CAB) When switch is ON, rear window and door
mirrors are defogged.
OFF SWITCH The compressor and blower are OFF, the intake doors are set to the outside air
position, and the air outlet doors are set to the foot (75% foot and 25% defrost) position.
BLOWER CONTROL DIAL The blower speed is manually controlled with this dial.
A/C SWITCH The compressor is ON or OFF. (Pressing the A/C switch when the AUTO switch is
ON will turn off the A/C switch and compressor.)
MODE SWITCHES Controls the air discharge outlets.
DUAL SWITCH When the DUAL switch indicator is illuminated, the driver and passenger temperature can each be
set independently.
- When the DUAL switch indicator is not illuminated, the driver temperature setting is applied to
both sides.
MAGNET CLUTCH CONTROL
Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption
Recovery
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Programming
Interruption Recovery
Classification: EC10-015
Reference: NTB10-078
Date: June 21, 2010
REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE
SERVICE INFORMATION
A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption
Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin.
While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop
(become interrupted) before it is 100% complete.
One of two messages may appear:
^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe.
^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0".
In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if
the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped.
NOTE:
ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III.
The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service
Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later.
IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING
^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery.
^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads.
^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable.
^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter.
Service and Repair
Control Module HVAC: Service and Repair
CONTROL UNIT
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the control knobs from the front air control unit. 2. Remove the cluster lid D.
Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Cluster LID D/Removal And Installation.
3. Remove the four screws (A) securing the front air control unit (1) to cluster lid D (2). 4. Remove
the front air control unit (1).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Procedures
Brake Fluid: Procedures
BRAKE FLUID
On Board Inspection
LEVEL CHECK Make sure the fluid level in reservoir tank is between MAX and MIN lines as shown.
- Visually check around reservoir tank for fluid leaks.
- If fluid level is excessively low, check brake system for leaks.
- If brake warning lamp remains illuminated after parking brake pedal is released, check brake
system for fluid leaks.
Locations
Page 1270
- G: No. 6 cylinder
- H: No. 8 cylinder
- J: No. 1 cylinder
- K: No. 3 cylinder
- L: No. 5 cylinder
- M: No. 7 cylinder
11. If out of specifications, adjust as necessary.
ADJUSTMENT
NOTE: Perform adjustment depending on the selected head thickness of the valve lifter.
- The specified valve lifter thickness is the dimension at normal temperatures. Ignore dimensional
differences caused by temperature. Use the specifications for hot engine condition to adjust.
1. Remove the camshaft. Refer to See: Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Camshaft/Service and
Repair/Removal And Installation. 2. Remove the valve lifters at the locations that are out of
specification.
3. Measure the center thickness of the removed valve lifters using suitable tool. 4. Use the equation
below to calculate the valve lifter thickness for replacement. Valve lifter thickness calculation:
Thickness of replacement valve lifter = t1+ (C1 - C2) t1 = Thickness of removed valve lifter C1 =
Measured valve clearance C2= Standard valve clearance:
Page 3400
3. Remove the snap rings. 4. Push out and remove the journal bearing by lightly tapping the yoke
with a hammer, taking care not to damage the journal or yoke hole.
5. Remove the bearing at the opposite side of above operation.
NOTE: Put marks on the disassembled parts so that they can be reinstalled in their original
positions from which they were removed.
Center Support Bearing 1. Remove the propeller shaft assembly from the vehicle. Refer to See:
Removal and Replacement/Propeller Shaft 3S1410. 2. Put matching marks on the propeller shaft
tube and the slip yoke.
CAUTION: For matching marks, use paint. Never damage the propeller shaft tube or slip yoke. 3.
Remove and discard the clamp near the center support bearing, then slide the slip yoke off of
propeller shaft tube.
4. Press the center support bearing off the propeller shaft tube using Tool and suitable hydraulic
press.
Tool number : 205-D002
Page 2300
Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart
Page 4162
SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal"
condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Page 4280
Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation Power Consumption Control System
System Diagram
POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM
System Diagram
System Description
POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM
System Description
OUTLINE IPDM E/R incorporates a power consumption control function that reduces the power consumption
according to the vehicle status.
- IPDM E/R changes its status (control mode) with the sleep wake up signal received from BCM via
CAN communication.
Normal mode (wake-up) CAN communication is normally performed with other control units.
- Individual unit control by IPDM E/R is normally performed.
Low power consumption mode (sleep) Low power consumption control is active.
- CAN transmission is stopped.
SLEEP MODE ACTIVATION -
IPDM E/R judges that the sleep-ready conditions are fulfilled when the ignition switch is OFF and
none of the conditions below are present. Then it transmits a sleep-ready signal (ready) to BCM via
CAN communication.
- Front wiper fail-safe operation
- Outputting signals to actuators
- Switches or relays operating
- Auto active test is starting
- Emergency OFF
- Output requests are being received from control units via CAN communication.
- IPDM E/R stops CAN communication and enters the low power consumption mode when it
receives a sleep wake up signal (sleep) from BCM and the sleep-ready conditions are fulfilled.
WAKE-UP OPERATION IPDM E/R changes from the low power consumption mode to the normal mode when it receives a
sleep wake-up signal (wake up) from BCM or any of the following conditions is fulfilled. In addition,
it transmits a sleep-ready signal (not-ready) to BCM via CAN communication to report the CAN
communication start.
- Ignition switch ON
- An output request is received from a control unit via CAN communication.
Page 1819
31. Select Diagnosis
32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%.
When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of
the screen will light (become enabled).
33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon.
Page 1953
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations
Page 3053
20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer.
CAUTION: During data transfer:
^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections.
^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF.
^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal.
NOTE:
^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or
^ The Error in Figure 9A displays.
a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged.
b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned
OFF (see step 3 and 4).
c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III
screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1).
Part 2
Page 2263
Consult-III Checking System
Standardized Relay
STANDARDIZED RELAY
Description
NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided
into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays.
Page 1625
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Installation of Thermostat Install the thermostat with the whole circumference of each flange part fit securely inside the rubber
ring as shown.
- Install the thermostat with the jiggle valve facing upwards.
Installation of Water Outlet Pipe and Heater Pipe First apply a neutral detergent to the O-rings,
then quickly insert the insertion parts of the water outlet pipe and heater pipe into the installation
holes.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Check for leaks of the engine coolant. Refer to See: Coolant/Testing and Inspection.
- Start and warm up the engine. Visually check for leaks of the engine coolant.
With Intelligent Key System
Fuel Pump Relay: Locations With Intelligent Key System
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Terminal Layout
TERMINAL LAYOUT
Page 6202
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Use a genuine NISSAN Urethane Adhesive Kit (if available) or equivalent and follow the
instructions furnished with it.
- While the urethane adhesive is curing, open a door window. This will prevent the glass from being
forced out by passenger compartment air pressure when a door is closed.
- The molding must be installed securely so that it is in position and leaves no gap.
- Inform the customer that the vehicle should remain stationary until the urethane adhesive has
completely cured (preferably 24 hours). Curing time varies with temperature and humidity.
WARNING: Keep heat and open flames away as primers and adhesive are flammable.
- The materials contained in the kit are harmful if swallowed, and may irritate skin and eyes. Avoid
contact with the skin and eyes.
- Use in an open, well ventilated location. Avoid breathing the vapors. They can be harmful if
inhaled.
If affected by vapor inhalation, immediately move to an area with fresh air. Driving the vehicle before the urethane adhesive has completely cured may affect the performance
of the windshield in case of an accident.
CAUTION: Do not use an adhesive which is past its usable term. Shelf life of this product is limited to six
months after the date of manufacture. Carefully adhere to the expiration or manufacture date
printed on the box.
- Keep primers and adhesive in a cool, dry place. Ideally, they should be stored in a refrigerator.
- Do not leave primers or adhesive cartridge unattended with their caps open or off.
- The vehicle should not be driven for at least 24 hours or until the urethane adhesive has
completely cured. Curing time varies depending on temperature and humidities. The curing time
will increase under lower temperatures and lower humidities.
Repairing Water Leaks for Windshield Leaks can be repaired without removing and reinstalling
glass. If water is leaking between the urethane adhesive material and body or glass, determine the
extent of leakage. This can be done by applying water to the windshield area while pushing glass
outward. To stop the leak, apply primer (if necessary) and then urethane adhesive to the leak point.
Service and Repair
Housing Assembly HVAC: Service and Repair
HEATER and COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Move the two front seats to the rearmost position on the seat track. 2. Disconnect the
battery negative terminal and battery positive terminal. 3. Discharge the refrigerant from the A/C
system. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Refrigeration System. 4. Drain the coolant from the
engine cooling system. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling
System/Coolant/Service and Repair. 5. Disconnect the heater hoses from the heater core. 6.
Disconnect the high/low pressure pipes from the expansion valve. 7. Remove the instrument panel
and console panel. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument
Panel/Service
and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Panel Assembly/Removal And Installation.
8. Remove the steering column. Refer to See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering
Column/Service and Repair. 9. Disconnect the instrument panel wire harness at the RH and LH
in-line connector brackets, and the fuse block (J/B) electrical connectors.
10. Disconnect the steering member from each side of the vehicle body. 11. Remove the heater
and cooling unit assembly with it attached to the steering member, from the vehicle.
CAUTION:
Page 2546
C. Scroll down and select [VIN REGISTRATION] on the "Select Work Item" screen. See Figure 10.
d. Press [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 11.
e. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 12.
Page 5523
8. Remove bulb seal and door seal from storage box. 9. Remove storage box from surround
assembly.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 2484
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Disclaimer
Page 727
Page 1479
Page 927
Drive Belt: Service and Repair
DRIVE BELTS
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. Refer to See: Filters/Air Cleaner
Housing/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation.
2. Install Tool on drive belt auto tensioner pulley bolt, move in the direction of arrow (loosening
direction of tensioner) as shown.
Tool number : - (J-46535)
CAUTION: Avoid placing hand in a location where pinching may occur if the holding tool
accidentally comes off. 3. Remove the drive belt.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Make sure belt is securely installed around all pulleys. Rotate the crankshaft pulley several turns clockwise to equalize belt tension between pulleys.
- Make sure belt tension is within the allowable working range, using the indicator notch on the
drive belt auto tensioner. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection.
Locations
Bulb Replacement
Marker Lamp: Service and Repair Bulb Replacement
REAR COMBINATION LAMP
Bulb Replacement
REMOVAL 1. Remove rear combination lamp bolts.
2. Pull rear combination lamp to remove from the vehicle. 3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise
and remove bulb.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 2469
8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.)
9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.)
10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2).
12. Select Select.
Locations
Locations
Page 1731
Attachment General Procedure
Page 384
Shift Interlock Control Module: Locations Electrical Units Location
Component Locations
Engine Control Module: Component Locations
Page 495
Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Description and Operation Manual A/C (Type 1)
INTAKE SENSOR
System Description
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Intake Sensor
The intake sensor is located on the heater and cooling unit assembly. It converts temperature of air
after if passes through the evaporator into a resistance value which is then input to the front air
control.
Specifications
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Mass Air Flow Sensor
Lighting - Exterior Lamp Fogging Inspection
Fog/Driving Lamp: Customer Interest Lighting - Exterior Lamp Fogging Inspection
Classification: EL03-030E
Reference: NTB03-074E
Date: January 4, 2010
EXTERIOR LAMP FOGGING
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles and Service Procedure sections have been
revised. Please discard all previous versions.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2001-2010 Nissan, All Models
SERVICE INFORMATION
Occasionally customers may notice water vapor or fog in the exterior lamps. This is generally NOT
due to a defect.
The following information, illustrations, and flow chart are provided to help you in determining if an
incident for water/condensation in the lamps is normal or not.
All current exterior lamp assemblies are vented to the atmosphere (not sealed).
^ This is necessary to allow for expansion and contraction of air from temperature "variations"
(warmer or colder) without damage to the lamp.
^ Moisture in the air sometimes "travels" into and out of the lamp assembly through these vents.
^ Certain environmental conditions may cause moisture to condense.
^ The fogging/cloudiness should disappear over time when the lamp is in a dry environment.
Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the exterior lights based on environmental conditions
or sudden temperature changes (such as in a car wash). This is normal. See Figure 1.
NOTE:
This condensation can appear anywhere on the outer lens, typically at its coldest location.
Page 1244
Main Bearings Selection Table (No. 2, 3 and 4 journal)
Page 3157
A/T fluid level gauge bolt : Refer to See: Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Transmission Assembly or See: Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Transmission Assembly.
Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures
Technical Service Bulletin # 00-052C Date: 040416
Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures
Classification: EC00-007C
Reference: NTB00-052C
Date: April 16, 2004
ECM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES
ATTENTION:
THIS BULLETIN HAS BEEN REVISED.
^ The Service Procedures for replacing an ECM on an Applied vehicle were revised.
^ Please use this bulletin NTB00-052c for complete information.
^ Discard all previously distributed copies of NTB00-052.
APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All 2000 and later 1999 Frontier (D22) 1999 Quest (V41) 1999 Pathfinder
(R50) from VIN JN8AR07**XW350101
IF YOU CONFIRM:
The Electronic Control Module (ECM) needs to be replaced on a 2000 MY and later vehicle, or an
Applied 1999 MY vehicle (see above).
ACTIONS:
^ Re-register all customer keys if the vehicle has ECM based NATS (see step 1).
^ Check ASIST for any new updates for the new ECM you're installing (see steps 2 - 4).
^ Perform the "ACCELERATOR PEDAL & THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING"
procedure (see step 5).
^ After installing the new ECM, perform the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARNING" procedure (when
applicable) using CONSULT-II. See step 6.
^ For 2005 and later vehicles, enter the vehicle VIN into the new ECM (see step 7).
CAUTION:
Failure to perform all the work steps in the specified order can cause poor engine running, MIL
'ON', or vehicle emission test rejection.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
Page 21
Remote Control Module: Locations Hands-Free Phone System
Page 4079
CONSULT-III Function (IPDM E/R)
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (IPDM E/R)
CONSULT - III Function (IPDM E/R)
APPLICATION ITEM CONSULT-III performs the following functions via CAN communication with
IPDM E/R.
SELF DIAGNOSTIC Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures.
DATA MONITOR
Page 3762
IMPORTANT:
If you remove the brake pad retainers from the torque member, lift them in the direction indicated
by the arrow (see Figure 3) so retainers will not deform.
Page 1832
f. Enter the entire VIN using the keyboard. See Figure 13.
^ Use [CHNG] to switch between the letters and numbers keyboard screens.
g. Once the entire VIN is entered, select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 14.
h. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen and enter the entire VIN again. See Figure 15.
^ You MUST enter the VIN a second time for confirmation purposes.
Page 2764
- Make sure that fuel tube flange is securely fixed in flange fixing groove on clip. c. Make sure that
installation is complete by checking that fuel injector does not rotate or come off.
- Make sure that protrusions of fuel injectors are aligned with cutouts of clips after installation.
4. Install fuel tube and fuel injector assembly to intake manifold.
CAUTION: Be careful not to let tip of injector nozzle come in contact with other parts.
- Tighten fuel tube assembly bolts "a" to "b" in illustration and in two steps.
5. Install fuel hose assembly. Follow precautions for fuel injector when handling O-ring.
- Insert connectors straight, making sure that the axis is lined up with fuel tube side to prevent
O-ring from being damaged.
- Tighten bolts evenly in several steps.
- Make sure that there is no gap between flange and fuel tube after tightening bolts.
6. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION After installing fuel tubes, make sure there are no fuel leaks
at connections using the following steps. 1. Apply fuel pressure to fuel lines by turning ignition
switch ON (with engine stopped). Then check for fuel leaks at connections. 2. Start the engine and
rev it up and check for fuel leaks at connections.
WARNING: Do not touch the engine immediately after stopping, as engine becomes extremely hot.
NOTE:
Electrical - IPDM Serviceability
Power Distribution Module: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - IPDM Serviceability
Classification: EL09-014
Reference: NTB09-036
Date: April 27, 2009
IPDM SERVICE
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007 - 2009 Nissan Models with IPDM
SERVICE INFORMATION
The Intelligent Power Distribution Module (IPDM) is ONLY serviceable as an assembly.
The ONLY serviceable parts of an IPDM are the fuses.
^ Some IPDM designs have sections that Relays Relays appear to be serviceable relays.
^ These "relays" are NEVER to be removed.
^ These "relays" may have markings indicating they are similar. They are not "swappable".
CAUTION:
NEVER REMOVE relays from an IPDM.
Tampering with the relays of an IPDM may cause additional incidents with the vehicle.
Such incidents may include:
^ Headlights inoperative.
^ Radiator fan inoperative
^ Fog lamps inoperative
^ Wiper inoperative
Page 1847
Page 2100
B. Compare the Part Number you wrote down to the numbers in the Current ECM Part Number
column in Table A , or Table B above.
^ If there is a match, this bulletin applies. Continue with the reprogramming procedure.
NOTE:
If there are two lines (two reprogramming options) on your C-III screen, use the one that does not
have the message "Caution! Use ONLY with NTBXX-XXX".
^ If there is not a match, this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to ASIST for further
diagnostic information.
3. If this bulletin applies and you have performed ECM reprogramming, the screen in Figure 2
appears when reprogramming is complete.
4. Make sure to erase DTCs from all systems.
NOTE:
During reprogramming, DTCs will set in several systems and must be erased.
5. Test drive the vehicle and make sure it operates correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF.
^ If the Check Engine light comes ON, go back to ASIST for further diagnostic information. Refer to
the applicable Electronic Service Manual as
needed.
^ Diagnosis and repairs beyond ECM reprogramming are not covered by this bulletin.
Page 2210
13. Select Confirm
14. Select Diagnosis
15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete.
Page 248
^ Check and compare your current ECM Part Number to Table A or B (as it applies) shown above.
If the part number does not match one in Table A or B, this bulletin does not apply. Go back to
ASIST for further diagnostic and repair information.
If this bulletin applies, reprogram the ECM.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You
MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential
to successfully completing this repair.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 4248
Page 2093
^ If this column is blank (no part number listed), this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to
ASIST for further diagnostic information.
^ If a Part Number is listed, write it on the Repair Order.
B. Compare the Part Number you wrote down to the numbers in the Current ECM P/N column in
Table A or B (as it applies) shown at the beginning of this bulletin.
^ If there is a match, this bulletin applies. Continue with the reprogramming procedure.
^ If there is not a match, this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to ASIST for further
diagnostic information.
3. If this bulletin applies and you have performed ECM reprogramming, the screen in Figure 2
appears when reprogramming is complete.
NOTE:
If the screen in Figure 2 does not display (reprogramming does not complete).
4. Make sure to erase DTCs from all Systems.
NOTE:
During the reprogramming, DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all
systems.
5. Test drive the vehicle and make sure it operates correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF.
^ If the Check Engine light comes ON, go back to ASIST for further diagnostic information. Refer to
the applicable Electronic Service Manual as
needed.
^ Diagnosis and repairs beyond the ECM reprogramming are not covered by this bulletin.
Page 1637
Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Removal And Installation
EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
WARNING: Perform the work when the exhaust and cooling system have cooled sufficiently. 1.
Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. Refer to See: Engine/Tune-up and Engine
Performance Checks/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and
Repair/Removal and Installation.
2. Drain the engine coolant from the radiator. Refer to See: Cooling System/Coolant/Service and
Repair. 3. Remove the engine undercover using power tool. 4. Remove the radiator and radiator
hoses. Refer to See: Cooling System/Radiator/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. 5.
Remove the drive belts. Refer to See: Engine/Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive
Belt/Service and Repair. 6. Remove the air fuel ratio A/F sensors (bank 1, bank 2). Follow steps below to remove each air fuel ratio A/F sensor. a. Remove the harness connector of
each air fuel ratio A/F sensor, and harness from bracket and middle clamp.
b. Remove the air fuel ratio A/F sensors from both left and right exhaust manifolds using Tool.
Tool number : - (J-44626)
CAUTION: Do not damage the air fuel ratio A/F sensors
Discard any air fuel ratio A/F sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5m
(19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor. Replace it with a new one.
7. Remove the front cross bar.
8. Remove the exhaust manifold (LH) (A) following the steps below. Arrow indicates Front a. Remove the exhaust front tube. Refer to See: Service and
Repair/Removal and Installation. b. Remove the exhaust manifold cover. c. Loosen the nuts in
reverse order of illustration (A) using power tool. d. Remove the exhaust studs from positions 2, 4,
6, 8 and remove exhaust manifold (LH).
9. Remove the exhaust manifold (RH) (B) following the steps below.
a. Remove the exhaust front tube. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. b.
Remove the oil level gauge guide. Refer to See: Engine/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Disassembly
And Assembly. c. Remove the exhaust manifold cover. d. Loosen the nuts in reverse order of
illustration (B) using power tool.
Page 6029
Page 4708
1. Disconnect heater switch resistor connector. See Figure 2.
2. Loosen two screws located on the heater switch resistor. See Figure 2.
3. Replace the heater switch resistor with part number 27151-ZW00A. See Figure 1.
4. Reassemble the vehicle components in reverse order of removal.
5. Check to make sure the issue has been resolved.
IN-Vehicle Sensor
Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair IN-Vehicle Sensor
IN-VEHICLE SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the lower instrument panel LH. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior
Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Lower Panel LH.
2. Remove the two screws (A) and remove the in-vehicle sensor (1).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 5206
6. Repeat the cleaning procedure as needed.
^ After treating, the trim panel should be clean as shown in Figure 4 above.
7. Reinstall the trim panel parts removed in step 1.
Page 3863
NOTE: After replacing brake shoes or disc rotors, or if brakes do not function well, perform break-in
operation as follows. 1. Adjust parking brake pedal stroke. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection. 2.
Perform parking brake break-in operation by driving the vehicle forward under the following
conditions: Vehicle speed at 40 km/h (25 MPH)
- Apply parking brake with an operating force of 196 N (20.0 kg-f, 44.1 lb-f) set
- Apply parking brake for a period of 30 seconds
CAUTION: To prevent lining from getting too hot, allow a cool off period of approximately 5 minutes after every
break-in operation.
- Do not perform excessive break-in operations, because it may cause uneven or early wear of
lining.
3. After break-in operation, check pedal stroke of parking brake. Readjust if it is no longer at the
specified stroke. Refer to See: Testing and
Inspection.
Page 1376
Engine Oil Pressure: Pressure, Vacuum and Temperature Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Standard and Limit
OIL PRESSURE
OIL PUMP
REGULATOR VALVE
ENGINE OIL CAPACITY (APPROXIMATE)
Page 5150
Towing Information: Service and Repair Vehicle Recovery
TOW TRUCK TOWING
Vehicle Recovery (Freeing a stuck vehicle)
Tow chains or cables must be attached only to the main structural members of the vehicle.
Pulling devices should be routed so they do not touch any part of the suspension, steering, brake
or cooling systems
Always pull the cable straight out from the front or rear of the vehicle. Never pull the vehicle at a
sideways angle.
Pulling devices such as ropes or canvas straps are not recommended for use for vehicle towing or
recovery.
Page 811
CLAIMS INFORMATION
NOTE:
This repair can only be used in conjunction with a claim for Front Wheel Alignment (Op-Code
WD44AA) and must be submitted on a separate work order line.
Page 215
^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed.
^ C-III Security Card is installed.
^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still
cable-connected to the vehicle.
1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect
the VI to the vehicle.
CAUTION
2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer.
CAUTION
3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery:
For Conventional Vehicles
^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate.
NOTE:
The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended.
CAUTION
For Hybrid Vehicles
^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station.
^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery.
Locations
Page 2213
20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer.
CAUTION: During data transfer:
^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections.
^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF.
^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal.
NOTE:
^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or
^ The Error in Figure 9A displays.
a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged.
b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned
OFF (see step 3 and 4).
c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III
screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1).
Part 2
Lighting - Xenon Headlamp Service Info.
Headlamp Bulb: Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Xenon Headlamp Service Info.
Classification: EL10-021A
Reference: NTB10-061A
Date: June 29, 2010
XENON HEAD LAMP SERVICE
This bulletin has been amended. The Parts Information has been updated. Please discard previous
versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Nissan with xenon headlamps
IF YOU CONFIRM
A xenon headlamp is not functioning because of an issue inside the headlamp assembly (an
internal issue),
ACTION
Refer to the appropriate Service Manual, follow the diagnostic and repair information for xenon
headlamps.
NOTE: ^ In most cases, replacement of a bulb or HID control unit will solve the incident.
^ Do not replace the entire xenon headlamp assembly when a bulb or HID control unit is available
to solve the incident, if one should occur.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
^ Reference the current Nissan Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for the
repair performed.
^ For HID control unit replacement, use Operation Code RJ36AA.
PARTS INFORMATION
System Diagram
Speedometer Module: Description and Operation System Diagram
METER SYSTEM
SPEEDOMETER : System Diagram
Page 2812
10. Lower the fuel tank using a suitable lift jack and remove it from the vehicle to access the fuel
level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly. 11. Remove the lock ring using Tool as shown.
Tool number : - (J-46536)
12. Remove the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly. Remove and discard the fuel
level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly
O-ring.
CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm during removal.
Avoid impacts such as dropping when handling the components.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. For installation, use a new fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly O-ring.
- Connect the quick connector as follows:
- Check the connection for any damage or foreign materials.
- Align the connector with the pipe, then insert the connector straight into the pipe until a click is
heard.
- After connecting the quick connector, make sure that the connection is secure by checking as
follows:
- Pull the tube and the connector to make sure they are securely connected.
- Visually inspect the connector to make sure the two retainer tabs are securely connected.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1. Turn the ignition switch ON but do not start engine, then
check the fuel pipes and hose connections for leaks while applying fuel pressure to the
system.
2. Start the engine and rev it above idle speed, then check that there are no fuel leaks at any of the
fuel pipe and hose connections.
Page 2673
DRAIN FILTER 1. Check visually for insect nests in the drain filter air inlet. 2. Check visually for
cracks or flaws in the appearance. 3. Check visually for cracks or flaws in the hose.
4. Blow air into port A and check that it flows freely out of port B. 5. Block port B. 6. Blow air into
port A and check that there is no leakage. 7. If NG, replace drain filter.
Page 4853
Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Intake Sensor
INTAKE SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the instrument panel. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal
and Replacement/Instrument Panel Assembly/Removal And Installation.
2. Disconnect the intake sensor electrical connector.
NOTE: The intake sensor is located on the top of the heater and cooling unit assembly next to the
A/C evaporator cover. 3. Twist the intake sensor to remove the intake sensor from the heater and
cooling unit assembly.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 173
Page 4692
Blower Motor: Description and Operation Manual A/C (Type 2)
BLOWER MOTOR CONTROL SYSTEM
System Description
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Component Parts
Blower speed control system components are: Front air control
- Variable blower control
- Front blower motor relay
- Front blower motor
- Intake sensor
System Operation
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Variable Blower Control
The variable blower control is located on the cooling unit. The variable blower control (1) receives a
gate voltage from the front air control to steplessly maintain the blower motor voltage in the 0 to 5
volt range (approx.).
Locations
Capacity Specifications
Coolant: Capacity Specifications
Engine Coolant Capacity
Capacity with reservoir ........................................................................................................................
............................................. 3-1/4 U.S. Gal. (12.2 L)
Page 4594
Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Transmitter (Pressure Sensor)
REMOVAL
CAUTION: DO NOT use center hole cone-type clamping machines to hold the wheel assembly
during tire removal/installation or balancing or damage to the wheel paint, cladding or chrome may
result. Use only rim-type or universal lug-type clamping machines to hold the wheel assembly
during servicing. 1. Deflate tire. Unscrew transmitter nut and allow transmitter to fall into tire.
2. Gently bounce tire so that transmitter falls to bottom of tire. Place wheel and tire assembly on tire
changing machine and break both tire beads. Ensure that the transmitter remains at the bottom of
the tire while breaking the bead.
3. Turn tire so that valve hole is at bottom, and gently bounce the tire to ensure transmitter is near
valve hole. Carefully lift tire onto turntable and
position valve hole (and transmitter) 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head.
4. Lubricate tire well, and remove top side of tire. Reach inside the tire and remove the transmitter.
5. Remove the second side of the tire as normal.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: DO NOT use center hole cone-type clamping machines to hold the wheel assembly
during tire removal/installation or balancing or damage to the wheel paint, cladding or chrome may
result. Use only rim-type or universal lug-type clamping machines to hold the wheel assembly
during servicing.
1. Place first side of tire onto rim.
Page 5562
Consult-III Checking System
Standardized Relay
STANDARDIZED RELAY
Description
NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided
into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays.
Service and Repair
Transfer Case Actuator: Service and Repair
TRANSFER CONTROL DEVICE
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Switch the 4WD shift switch to 2WD and set the transfer assembly to 2WD. 2.
Disconnect the transfer control device connector. 3. Remove the breather hose from the transfer
control device.
4. Remove the bolts and detach the transfer control device.
INSTALLATION 1. Install the new O-ring to the transfer control device.
CAUTION: Do not reuse O-ring.
- Apply petroleum jelly to O-ring.
2. Install the transfer control device.
a. Turn the control shift rod fully counterclockwise using a flat-bladed screwdriver, and then put a
mark on the control shift rod.
Page 1124
7. After the tire/wheel is balanced, apply an index mark to the tire at the location of the valve stem
(see Figure 6).
^ This index mark will allow you to tell if the tire has slipped on the rim (see Figure 7).
Tire to Rim Slippage:
^ Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs, the tire
may become un-balanced.
^ Overtime the tire lubricate will dry, eliminating the lubricant as a cause of tire slippage.
^ Some tire lubricants may require up to 24 hours to completely dry.
^ If slippage occurs, the tire/wheel will need to be re-balanced.
WORK - AID AVOID CUSTOMER RETURNS FOR VIBRATION
Page 825
SPECIAL TOOLS
Technical Service Bulletin # 08-097D Date: 110426
Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics
Classification: ST08-001D
Reference: NTB08-097D
Date: April 26, 2011
DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER
This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The
off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this
bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R
Changing A/T Fluid
Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Changing A/T Fluid
A/T FLUID
Changing the A/T Fluid (ATF)
CAUTION: If using the vehicle for towing, the A/T fluid must be replaced as specified. Refer to See:
Maintenance. 1. Drive the vehicle to warm up the A/T fluid to approximately 80° C (176° F). 2. Stop
the engine. 3. Remove the A/T fluid level gauge.
4. Drain the A/T fluid from the drain plug hole, then install the drain plug with a new gasket. Refill
the transmission with new A/T fluid. Always refill
with the same volume as the drained A/T fluid.
Use the A/T fluid level gauge to check the A/T fluid level as shown. Add A/T fluid as necessary.
Drain plug : Refer to See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/Component.
- To flush out the old A/T fluid from the transmission oil coolers, pour new A/T fluid into the A/T fluid
charging pipe with the engine idling and at the same time drain the old A/T fluid from the auxiliary
transmission oil cooler hose return line.
- When the color of the A/T fluid coming out of the auxiliary transmission oil cooler hose return line
is about the same as the color of the new A/T fluid, flushing out the old A/T fluid is complete. The
amount of new A/T fluid used for flushing should be 30% to 50% increase of the specified capacity.
A/T fluid grade and capacity : Refer to See: Maintenance.
CAUTION: If Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF is not available, Genuine NISSAN Matic J ATF may also be used.
- Using ATF fluid other than Genuine NISSAN Matic S ATF or Matic J ATF will cause deterioration
in driveability and A/T durability, and may damage the A/T, which is not covered by the warranty.
- When filling the transmission with A/T fluid, do not spill the A/T fluid on any heat generating parts
such as the exhaust parts.
- Do not reuse the drain plug gasket.
5. Install the A/T fluid level gauge and tighten the A/T fluid level gauge bolt to specification.
A/T fluid level gauge bolt : Refer to See: Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Transmission Assembly or See: Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Transmission Assembly.
6. Drive the vehicle to warm up the A/T fluid to approximately 80° C (176° F).
7. Check the fluid level and condition. If the A/T fluid is still dirty, repeat steps 2 through 6. 8. Install
the A/T fluid level gauge in the A/T fluid charging pipe and install the A/T fluid level gauge bolt. 9.
Tighten the A/T fluid level gauge bolt to specification.
Page 4422
Power Steering Fluid: Service and Repair Checking Fluid Leakage
POWER STEERING FLUID
Checking Fluid Leakage
Check the hydraulic piping lines for improper attachment and for leaks, cracks, damage, loose
connections, chafing or deterioration. 1. Run engine until fluid temperature reaches 50° - 80°C
(122° - 176°F) in reservoir tank. Keep engine speed idle. 2. Turn steering wheel right-to-left several
times. 3. Hold steering wheel at each "lock" position for five seconds to check fluid leakage.
CAUTION: Do not hold steering wheel in a locked position for more than 10 seconds. (There is the
possibility that oil pump may be damaged.) 4. If fluid leakage at connections is noticed, then loosen
flare nut and then retighten. Do not over tighten connector as this can damage O-ring, washer
and connector.
5. If fluid leakage from oil pump is noticed, check oil pump. Refer to See: Power Steering
Pump/Service and Repair/Procedures. 6. Check steering gear boots for accumulation of fluid
indicating a leak from the steering gear.
Page 2732
Fuel Injector: Description and Operation
FUEL INJECTOR
Component Description
The fuel injector is a small, precise solenoid valve. When the ECM supplies a ground to the fuel
injector circuit, the coil in the fuel injector is energized. The energized coil pulls the ball valve back
and allows fuel to flow through the fuel injector into the intake manifold. The amount of fuel injected
depends upon the injection pulse duration. Pulse duration is the length of time the fuel injector
remains open. The ECM controls the injection pulse duration based on engine fuel needs.
Page 2207
^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed.
^ C-III Security Card is installed.
^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still
cable-connected to the vehicle.
1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect
the VI to the vehicle.
CAUTION
2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer.
CAUTION
3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery:
For Conventional Vehicles
^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate.
NOTE:
The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended.
CAUTION
For Hybrid Vehicles
^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station.
^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery.
Page 1737
4. Select Engine
5. Select OK
6. Select Work Support
Page 237
C. Scroll down and select [VIN REGISTRATION] on the "Select Work Item" screen. See Figure 10.
d. Press [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 11.
e. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 12.
Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1421 Stored
PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Customer Interest Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC
P1421 Stored
Classification: EC09-014B
Reference: NTB09-048B
Date: April 21, 2011
2007-2009 TITAN AND ARMADA; MIL "ON" WITH DTC P1421 STORED
This bulletin has been amended. APPLIED VEHICLES, APPLIED VINS, and Table A and B have
been revised. Please discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007-2009 Titan (A60) 2007-2009 Armada (TA60)
APPLIED VINS and DATES: 2007-2008 Titan and Armada: All
2009 Titan: Vehicles built before 1N6AA0(***)9N312517 // April 7, 2009
2009 Armada: Vehicles built before 5N1AA08(**)9N614339 // April 7, 2009
IF YOU CONFIRM:
An Applied Vehicle has the MIL "ON" and DTC P1421 (Cold Start Control) stored in the ECM.
ACTION:
Confirm this bulletin applies.
Page 1905
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations
Locations
Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations
Locations
Page 5985
Should a customer note water in a lamp assembly, please use the above flow chart to determine if
the condition is normal or requires lamp replacement.
Locations
Cooling System - Long Life Coolant Information
Coolant: Technical Service Bulletins Cooling System - Long Life Coolant Information
Classification: EM09-001A
Reference: NTB09-040A
Date: May 14, 2010
NEW BLUE NISSAN LONG LIFE ANTIFREEZE/COOLANT
This bulletin has been amended. The Service Information has been updated. Please discard
previous versions of this bulletin.
SERVICE INFORMATION
In calendar year 2009, Nissan began filling some vehicles at the factory with a NEW Nissan Long
Life Antifreeze/Coolant (LLC) that is blue in color.
NOTE: LLC = Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant
The transition to this new Blue LLC continued though MY 2010. Beginning with MY 2011, all
Nissan vehicles are filled at the factory with the Blue LLC.
^ MY 2009 and 2010: Some vehicles are filled at the factory with Blue LLC.
^ MY 2011: All vehicles are filled at the factory with Blue LLC.
Blue LLC is designed to have a service life of 7 years/105,000 miles for the factory fill, and 5
years/75,000 miles for subsequent replacement fills.
Nissan Blue Super LLC is available through the Nissan Direct Ship Chemical Care Product
Program, Website order link via dealer portal www.NNAnet.com or order direct
www.NissanChemicals.com.
^ Blue LLC one gallon pre-diluted:
P/N 999MP - LP25500P
> The one gallon containers are pre-diluted with 50% antifreeze and 50% distilled water.
> Do not add additional water when using pre-diluted Blue LLC.
Page 4170
Power Socket - Part 3
Page 1695
^ If this column is blank (no part number listed), this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to
ASIST for further diagnostic information.
^ If a Part Number is listed, write it on the Repair Order.
B. Compare the Part Number you wrote down to the numbers in the Current ECM P/N column in
Table A or B (as it applies) shown at the beginning of this bulletin.
^ If there is a match, this bulletin applies. Continue with the reprogramming procedure.
^ If there is not a match, this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to ASIST for further
diagnostic information.
3. If this bulletin applies and you have performed ECM reprogramming, the screen in Figure 2
appears when reprogramming is complete.
NOTE:
If the screen in Figure 2 does not display (reprogramming does not complete).
4. Make sure to erase DTCs from all Systems.
NOTE:
During the reprogramming, DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all
systems.
5. Test drive the vehicle and make sure it operates correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF.
^ If the Check Engine light comes ON, go back to ASIST for further diagnostic information. Refer to
the applicable Electronic Service Manual as
needed.
^ Diagnosis and repairs beyond the ECM reprogramming are not covered by this bulletin.
Procedures
Steering Wheel: Procedures
STEERING WHEEL
On-Vehicle Inspection and Service
CHECKING CONDITION OF INSTALLATION Check installation condition of steering gear assembly, front suspension, axle and steering column.
- Check if movement exists when steering wheel is moved up and down, to the left and right and to
the axial direction.
End play of the axial direction for steering wheel : 0 mm (0 in)
- Check if the mounting nuts for steering gear assembly are loose. Refer to See: Steering
Gear/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement.
CHECKING STEERING WHEEL PLAY 1. Turn tires straight ahead, start engine, then turn steering
wheel to the left and right lightly, and measure steering wheel movement on the outer
circumference when steering wheel is turned up to the point where tires start moving.
Steering wheel play on the outer circumference : 0 - 35 mm (0 - 1.38 in)
CHECKING NEUTRAL POSITION ON STEERING WHEEL Check neutral position on steering wheel after confirming that front wheel alignment is correct.
Refer to See: Alignment/Service and Repair.
1. Turn tires straight ahead, check if steering wheel is in the neutral position. 2. If it is not in the
neutral position, remove steering wheel and reinstall it correctly. 3. If the neutral position cannot be
attained by repositioning the steering wheel two teeth or less on steering stem, loosen tie-rod lock
nuts of steering
outer sockets, then adjust tie-rods by the same amount in the opposite direction.
CHECKING STEERING WHEEL TURNING FORCE 1. Park vehicle on a level, dry surface and set
parking brake. 2. Start engine. 3. Bring power steering fluid up to operating temperature of 60° 80°C (140° - 176°F). 4. Tires need to be inflated to specified pressure. Refer to See: Wheels and
Tires/Tires/Specifications.
5. Check steering wheel turning force using Tool when steering wheel has been turned 360° from
the neutral position.
Service and Repair
Front Door Window Glass: Service and Repair
FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR
Removal and Installation
FRONT DOOR GLASS
Removal 1. Remove the front door speaker. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional
Equipment/Radio, Stereo, and Compact Disc/Speaker/Service and
Repair/MID Audio/Front Door Speaker.
2. Remove the hole cover over rear glass bolt. 3. Operate the power window main switch to
raise/lower the door window until the glass bolts can be seen. 4. Remove the inside seal. 5.
Remove the glass bolts.
6. While holding the front door glass, raise it at the rear end and pull the glass out of the sash
toward the outside of the door.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Glass bolts : 6.1 N.m (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb)
Fitting Inspection
Page 2453
7. Select VIN Registration
8. Select Next
9. Make sure the ignition is ON with engine OFF.
10. Select Start
Adjustments
Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle: Adjustments
FRONT WASHER NOZZLE AND TUBE
Washer Nozzle Adjustment
- This vehicle is equipped with non-adjustable washer nozzles.
- If not satisfied with washer fluid spray coverage, confirm that the washer nozzle is installed
correctly.
- If the washer nozzle is installed correctly, and the washer fluid spray coverage is not satisfactory,
replace washer nozzle.
Page 2128
Page 4553
WARNING:
This repair MUST be done with the vehicle's full weight on the suspension.
EITHER:
Place the vehicle on a drive-on hoist or alignment rack to lift the vehicle.
OR
Leave all of the vehicle's weight on all four (4) tires, while parked (do not lift the vehicle).
DO NOT lift the vehicle in any amount. The suspension must support all of the vehicle's weight
during the whole repair procedure or the bushing will be under load and difficult to remove.
1. With the vehicle positioned as stated above, put the shift selector in "P" (PARK) position.
2. Set the parking brake.
3. Remove the bolt and bushing from the windup clip (clip).
4. Check the condition of the bolt's and clip's threads, and the bushing.
^ If both the bushing and bolt's threads are okay, reuse them.
^ If the bushing and / or bolt's threads are damaged, replace with all parts in the "Spring Assembly
Kit".
^ If the clip's threads are damaged, replace the leaf spring assembly.
5. Install the bolt (and bushing) with Permatex(R) Medium Strength Threadlocker BLUE or
equivalent thread locking material applied to the threads.
Torque bolt to 32 N.m (3.2 kg-m, 23 ft-lb).
Page 3245
REPAIR FLOW CHART
Page 4510
Page 4055
SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal"
condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Locations
Page 2316
2. CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR (with PAST): Check the CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR (with PAST)
of units indicating "U1000" or "U1001" on
SELF-DIAG RESULTS. Draw a line on the diagnosis sheet to indicate the possible error circuit.
NOTE: For the details of each indication on CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR, refer to See: CAN
Fundamental/Trouble Diagnosis.
a. Reception item of "ECM": "VDC/TCS/ABS", "3" is indicated in the "PAST". This means ECM
could not receive the signal from ABS in the
past. Draw a line between ECM and ABS (line 2-a in the figure below).
b. Reception item of "M&A;": "VDC/TCS/ABS", "3" is indicated in the "PAST". This means M&A;
could not receive the signal from ABS in the
past. Draw a line between M&A; and ABS (line 2-b in the figure below).
c. Reception item of "TCM": "VDC/TCS/ABS", "3" is indicated in the "PAST". This means TCM
could not receive the signal from ABS in the
past. Draw a line between TCM and ABS (line 2-c in the figure below).
Page 1405
- Install the valve oil seal using Tool.
Tool number : KV10115600 (J-38958)
- Apply new engine oil on the new valve oil seal joint and seal lip.
- Install the valve oil seal to the specified height "H".
Page 2888
Camshaft Position Sensor: Service and Repair
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL
Camshaft Position Sensor (PHASE)
REMOVAL 1. Remove engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Engine Cover.
2. Remove air duct and resonator assembly. Refer to See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Air
Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair/Removal and
Installation.
3. Disconnect camshaft position sensor connector.
4. Remove camshaft position sensor (2) from Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (LH)
(1).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Replace the O-ring (3) of the camshaft position sensor with a new one, then lubricate
O-ring with engine oil before installing.
Camshaft position sensor bolt : 9.6 N.m (0.98 kg-m, 85 in-lb)
Page 6082
Combination Switch: Service and Repair
LIGHTING and TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove steering column cover. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Panel Assembly/Exploded View.
2. While pressing tabs, pull lighting and turn signal switch toward driver door and disconnect from
the base.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Locations
Page 4354
SERVICE INFORMATION
If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic
Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue.
Diagnostic Flow Chart
Road Test
Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair.
IMPORTANT:
^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as:
> Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory)
> Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires
> Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire
Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics
in this bulletin.
^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification.
1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle:
^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge
^ Road Crown Gauge
NOTE:
Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use.
System Diagram
Volt Meter Gauge: Description and Operation System Diagram
METER SYSTEM
VOLTAGE GAUGE : System Diagram
Page 5274
6. Repeat the cleaning procedure as needed.
^ After treating, the trim panel should be clean as shown in Figure 4 above.
7. Reinstall the trim panel parts removed in step 1.
Page 5615
Is the inspection result normal? YES - Inspection End. NO - Replace key switch.
FLOOR SHIFT 1.CHECK KEY SWITCH
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect key switch and key lock solenoid connector. 3. Check
continuity between key switch and key lock solenoid terminals 3 and 4.
Is the inspection result normal? YES - Inspection End. NO - Replace key switch and key lock
solenoid.
Page 4190
Page 3858
Parking Brake Control: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
PARKING BRAKE CONTROL
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove lower instrument panel LH. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding
/ Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Lower Panel LH.
2. On models with floor shift, remove center console. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior
Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Removal
and Replacement/Center Console.
3. Remove floor trim. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Carpet/Service and
Repair.
4. Remove adjusting nut and discard.
CAUTION: Do not reuse adjusting nut after removing it. 5. Remove the lock plate from the front
cable. 6. Remove front cable retaining bolts and nut. 7. Disconnect return spring from equalizer. 8.
Disconnect right and left rear cables from equalizer. 9. Remove rear disc rotors. Refer to See: Disc
Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Rear.
10. Remove parking brake shoe, and remove rear cable from toggle lever. Refer to See: Parking
Brake Shoe/Service and Repair. 11. Remove right and left rear cables retaining bolts and nuts,
then remove right and left rear cables.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Adjust parking brake. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection.
CAUTION: Do not reuse adjusting nut after removing it.
Page 6145
> Window glass run rubber is replaced.
> Window is partly opened and/or closed many times without being fully closed.
Page 3246
Valve Body: Service and Repair
CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM
Control Valve with TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2
COMPONENTS
CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal. 2. Drain A/T fluid. Refer to See: Fluid A/T/Service and Repair/Changing A/T Fluid. 3. Disconnect A/T assembly harness connector.
Page 1803
11. Enter the VIN into C-III two times (see Figure 7).
^ Touch the C-III screen in the "VIN box" before typing.
^ Make sure to use all CAPITAL LETTERS.
^ Use the VIN from the vehicle you are working on.
12. Select Start
13. Turn the ignition OFF, and wait 10 seconds.
14. After waiting 10 seconds, turn the ignition ON.
Page 2008
10. Lower the fuel tank using a suitable lift jack and remove it from the vehicle to access the fuel
level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly. 11. Remove the lock ring using Tool as shown.
Tool number : - (J-46536)
12. Remove the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly. Remove and discard the fuel
level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly
O-ring.
CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm during removal.
Avoid impacts such as dropping when handling the components.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. For installation, use a new fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly O-ring.
- Connect the quick connector as follows:
- Check the connection for any damage or foreign materials.
- Align the connector with the pipe, then insert the connector straight into the pipe until a click is
heard.
- After connecting the quick connector, make sure that the connection is secure by checking as
follows:
- Pull the tube and the connector to make sure they are securely connected.
- Visually inspect the connector to make sure the two retainer tabs are securely connected.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1. Turn the ignition switch ON but do not start engine, then
check the fuel pipes and hose connections for leaks while applying fuel pressure to the
system.
2. Start the engine and rev it above idle speed, then check that there are no fuel leaks at any of the
fuel pipe and hose connections.
Page 2563
Page 3280
Control Unit: Service and Repair
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 2. Remove jack and tools. 3.
Remove upper bracket of center seat belt retractor and belt assembly. Refer to See: Restraint
Systems/Seat Belt Systems/Seat Belt/Service and
Repair/Rear Seat Belt.
4. Remove the necessary push pins and reposition rear panel out of the way. Refer to See: Body
and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim
Panel/Service and Repair.
5. Reposition the carpet to access differential lock control unit to disconnect connector. 6. Remove
the two nuts and remove differential lock control unit.
INSTALLATION Note the following, and installation is in the reverse order of removal. When installing differential lock control unit, tighten nuts to the specified torque.
Differential lock control unit nuts : 5.1 N.m (0.52 kg-m, 45 in-lb)
Page 4642
Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Mode Door Motor
MODE DOOR MOTOR
Removal and Installation
Mode Door Motor - Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
REMOVAL 1. Remove the center console lower cover LH. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior
Moulding / Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Center Console.
2. Disconnect the mode door motor electrical connector. 3. Remove the two screws and remove
the mode door motor.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 3076
Page 5093
Radio/Stereo: Service and Repair Premium Without Navigation
AUDIO UNIT
Removal and Installation
AUDIO UNIT
Removal 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the cluster lid C. Refer to See:
Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Cluster LID D/Removal And Installation.
3. Remove the audio unit screws (A), using power tool. 4. Pull out the audio unit (1) and disconnect
the audio unit connectors.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
AV SWITCH
Removal 1. Disconnect battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the cluster lid C. Refer to See: Body
and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Cluster LID D/Removal And Installation.
3. Remove the AV switch screws. 4. Carefully remove the AV switch.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Upper Link
Control Arm: Service and Repair Upper Link
UPPER LINK
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the wheel and tire using power tool. 2. Remove cotter pin and nut from
upper link ball joint.
3. Separate upper link ball joint stud from steering knuckle using Tool. Support lower link with jack.
Tool number : ST29020001 (J-24319-01)
4. Remove fender protector.
5. Remove upper link bolts and nuts.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Upper Link Check for deformation and cracks. Replace if necessary.
Upper Link Ball Joint Check for distortion and damage. Replace if necessary.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Tighten all nuts and bolts to specification. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Front Suspension .
CAUTION: Use a new cotter pin for installation of upper link ball joint nut. When installing wheel and tire, refer to See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Rotation.
- After installation, check that the front wheel alignment is within specification. Refer to See:
Alignment/Service and Repair .
Page 4212
MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. -
The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Abbreviation List
ABBREVIATIONS
Abbreviation List
The following ABBREVIATIONS are used:
Page 2613
13. Use compressed air to remove any remaining debris.
CAUTION:
DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may
cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders.
14. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it.
15. Tilt the manifold/catalyst/front tube so that the metal debris falls out of the part.
16. Apply compressed air through the boss to blow out any remaining debris.
CAUTION:
DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may
cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders.
17. Install the new sensor as described in the applicable Electronic Service Manual (ESM).
Page 2033
Valve Clearance: Service and Repair
CAMSHAFT VALVE CLEARANCE
Valve Clearance
INSPECTION
NOTE: Perform the following inspection after removal, installation or replacement of camshaft or
valve-related parts, or if there are unusual engine conditions due to changes in valve clearance
over time (starting, idling, and/or noise). 1. Warm up the engine. Then stop the engine. 2. Remove
the engine room cover. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Cover. 3. Remove the air cleaner and air duct assembly.
Refer to See: Air Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. 4. Remove the RH
bank and LH bank rocker covers using power tool. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Cylinder Head
Assembly/Valve Cover/Service and Repair/Removal And Installation.
5. Turn the crankshaft pulley in the normal direction (clockwise when viewed from engine front) to
align TDC identification notch (without paint
mark) with timing indicator.
6. At this time, make sure both the intake and exhaust cam noses of No. 1 cylinder (top front on LH
bank) face outside. If they do not face outside, turn crankshaft pulley once more.
7. Measure valve clearances at the locations marked "X" as shown in the table below (locations
indicated with black arrow).
NOTE: Firing order 1-8-7-3-6-5-4-2
Page 2544
d. Press [START] on the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" screen. See Figure 4.
e. Press [START] on the "WORK SUPPORT" screen to begin the Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL)
procedure. See Figure 5.
^ The IAVL procedure will take several minutes to complete.
^ CONSULT will display "Please Wait" in the center of the screen while the IAVL procedure is in
process. See Figure 6.
Page 957
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1. Check the engine oil level. Refer to See: Fluids/Engine
Oil/Testing and Inspection. 2. Start the engine and check for engine oil leakage. 3. Stop the engine
and wait for 10 minutes. 4. Check the engine oil level and add engine oil as required.
Page 1725
Page 2914
Spark Plug: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
SPARK PLUG
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Engine Cover.
2. Remove ignition coil. Refer to See: Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation.
3. Remove spark plug using suitable tool.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Do not use a wire brush for cleaning.
- If plug tip is covered with carbon, spark plug cleaner may be used.
- Checking and adjusting plug gap is not required between change intervals.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Description and Operation
Compass: Description and Operation
COMPASS
Description
DESCRIPTION With the ignition switch in the ON position, and the mode or (N) switch ON, the
compass display will indicate the direction the vehicle is heading. Vehicle direction is displayed as
follows: N: north
- E: east
- S: south
- W: west
ZONE VARIATION SETTING PROCEDURE The difference between magnetic north and
geographical north can sometimes be great enough to cause false compass readings. This
difference is known as variance. In order for the compass to operate properly (accurately) in a
particular zone, the zone variation must be calibrated using the following procedure. Zone Variation
Chart
Page 1793
Page 4641
Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Intake Door Motor
INTAKE DOOR MOTOR
Removal and Installation
Intake Door Motor - Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
REMOVAL 1. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to See: Housing Assembly
HVAC/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the steering member from the heater and cooling unit
assembly. 3. Disconnect the intake door motor electrical connector. 4. Remove the three screws
and remove the intake door motor.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 358
Ignition Relay: Locations Without Intelligent Key System
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Terminal Layout
TERMINAL LAYOUT
Page 3722
CAUTION: When equipped with adjustable pedal, the pedal must be in the forward most position
(closest to the floor) for pedal height adjustment.
Engine Controls - DTC's P0133/P0153 Stored In ECM
PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Customer Interest Engine Controls - DTC's
P0133/P0153 Stored In ECM
Classification: EC08-013B
Reference: NTB08-060B
Date: May 20, 2009
2008 - 2009 TITAN AND ARMADA; DTC P0133 / P0153
This bulletin has been amended. The Claims Information and Service Procedure have been
updated. No other changes have been made. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2008-2009 Titan (A60) 2008-2009 Armada (TA60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
DTC P0133 and/or P0153 (A/F Sensor 1) is stored in the ECM
and
There are no drivability issues,
ACTIONS
1. Refer to Step 2 in the Service Procedure to confirm this bulletin applies to the vehicle you are
working on.
2. If this bulletin applies, reprogram the ECM.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Submit a Primary Failed (PP) type line claim using the claims coding table above.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Connect C-III to the vehicle to begin the reprogramming procedure.
Page 3394
3S1410/General Specification.
- While holding the flange yoke on one side, check axial play of the journal as shown. If the journal
axial play exceeds the specification, replace the propeller shaft assembly.
Journal axial play : 0.02 mm (0.0008 in) or less
- Check the propeller shaft tube for bend and damage. If damage is detected, replace the propeller
shaft assembly.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. After installation, check for vibration by driving the vehicle. Refer to See: Testing and
Inspection/Propeller Shaft 3S1410.
- If propeller shaft assembly of final drive assembly has been replaced, connect them as follows:
- Face companion flange mark (A) of the final drive (1) upward. With the mark (A) faced upward,
couple the propeller shaft and the final drive so that the matching mark (B) of the propeller shaft (2)
can be positioned as close as possible with the matching mark (C) of the final drive companion
flange.
- Tighten propeller shaft and final drive bolts and nuts of the to specification. Refer to "Removal and
Installation".
CAUTION: Do not reuse the bolts and nuts. Always install new ones.
Page 1999
Air Filter Element: Service and Repair Removal And Installation
AIR CLEANER FILTER
Removal and Installation (Viscous paper type)
REMOVAL
NOTE: The viscous paper type filter does not need cleaning between replacement intervals.
- Replace the air filter as necessary for periodic maintenance. Refer to See: Maintenance.
1. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. 2. Remove the air cleaner case (upper). 3.
Remove the air cleaner filter from the air cleaner case (lower).
INSTALLATION 1. Install the new air cleaner filter in the air cleaner case (lower). 2. Install the air
cleaner case (upper). 3. Install the air duct and resonator assembly (inlet).
Page 2584
Page 4213
CONSULT-III Checking System
CONSULT-III CHECKING SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram
Page 3624
2. Install differential lock position switch on gear carrier and tighten differential lock position switch
bolts with the specified torque. Refer to See:
Differential Assembly/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD).
3. Install side bearing adjusters into gear carrier.
4. Apply gear oil to side bearings. Install differential case assembly with side bearing outer races
into gear carrier. 5. Apply multi-purpose grease to differential lock position connector.
CAUTION: Do not reuse sensor connector. 6. Connect differential lock solenoid harness (B) and
differential lock position switch connector (A). Then install it to gear carrier, tighten to the
specified torque. Refer to See: Differential Assembly/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive
M226 (ELD).
Arrow Indicate Front 7. Align paint matching mark on side bearing caps with that on gear carrier
and install side bearing caps on gear carrier without tightening to
specification.
Page 77
Speedometer Module: Description and Operation Component Description
METER SYSTEM
SPEEDOMETER : Component Description
Page 250
^ If this column is blank (no part number listed), this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to
ASIST for further diagnostic information.
^ If a Part Number is listed, write it on the Repair Order.
B. Compare the Part Number you wrote down to the numbers in the Current ECM P/N column in
Table A or B (as it applies) shown at the beginning of this bulletin.
^ If there is a match, this bulletin applies. Continue with the reprogramming procedure.
^ If there is not a match, this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to ASIST for further
diagnostic information.
3. If this bulletin applies and you have performed ECM reprogramming, the screen in Figure 2
appears when reprogramming is complete.
NOTE:
If the screen in Figure 2 does not display (reprogramming does not complete).
4. Make sure to erase DTCs from all Systems.
NOTE:
During the reprogramming, DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all
systems.
5. Test drive the vehicle and make sure it operates correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF.
^ If the Check Engine light comes ON, go back to ASIST for further diagnostic information. Refer to
the applicable Electronic Service Manual as
needed.
^ Diagnosis and repairs beyond the ECM reprogramming are not covered by this bulletin.
Page 2190
Page 863
Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection
FUEL PRESSURE
Fuel Pressure Check
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE
With CONSULT-III 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Perform "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" in
"WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-III. 3. Start engine. 4. After engine stalls, crank it two or
three times to release all fuel pressure. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF.
Without CONSULT-III 1. Remove fuel pump fuse located in IPDM E/R.
2. Start engine. 3. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 4. Turn
ignition switch OFF. 5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse after servicing fuel system.
FUEL PRESSURE CHECK
CAUTION: Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger.
Be careful not to scratch or get the fuel hose connection area dirty when servicing, so that the quick
connector o-ring maintains sealability.
- Use Fuel Pressure Gauge Kit J-44321 and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 to check fuel
pressure.
- Do not perform fuel pressure check with electrical system operating (i.e. lights, rear defog, A/C,
etc.).
Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false readings due to varying engine loads and changes in
manifold vacuum.
NOTE: Prepare pans or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out.
The fuel pressure cannot be completely released because A60 models do not have fuel return
system. 1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". 2. Remove
engine cover. 3. Remove fuel hose using Quick Connector Release J-45488. Refer to See: Engine,
Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Intake Manifold/Service and
Repair/Removal and Installation.
- Do not twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose.
- Do not remove fuel hose from quick connector.
- Keep fuel hose connections clean.
Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R) Battery
Replacement
Keyless Start Transmitter: Technical Service Bulletins Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R) Battery
Replacement
Classification: EL09-042
Reference: NTB09-118
Date: October 28, 2009
INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT AND BATTERY DISCHARGE INDICATOR
RESET
APPLIED VEHICLES: Vehicles equipped with the Intelligent Key type shown below.
IF YOU CONFIRM
^ The Intelligent Key is the type that has a notch on each side.
And
^ The battery in the Intelligent Key needs to be replaced for any reason.
ACTION
1. Open the Intelligent Key as described in the Service Procedure, and replace the battery.
2. Confirm the battery discharge indicator has reset/is not illuminated in the dot matrix display.
NOTES:
^ DO NOT insert a tool into the notches of the Intelligent Key to pry it open, as this may damage
the printed circuit board (PCB).
^ The battery is a maintenance item and is not warrantable.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelligent Key.
2. Place a piece of tape on the end of a small flathead screwdriver.
Exploded View
Exhaust Manifold: Service and Repair Exploded View
EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST
Exploded View
Page 3469
Control Module: Service and Repair
TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Switch 4WD shift switch to 2WD and set transfer assembly to 2WD.
CAUTION: When removing transfer control unit, transfer state must be at 2WD. 2. Turn the ignition
switch OFF and disconnect negative battery terminal. 3. Remove the lower instrument panel RH.
Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Lower Panel RH And Glove Box/Removal And
Installation.
4. Disconnect the two transfer control unit connectors. 5. Remove the transfer control unit bolts. 6.
Remove the transfer control unit.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. When installing the transfer control unit, tighten bolts to the specified torque.
Transfer control unit bolts : 5.1 N.m (0.52 kg-m, 45 in-lb)
- After the installation, check 4WD shift indicator pattern. If NG, adjust position between transfer
assembly and transfer control unit. Refer to See: Transfer Case/Service Precautions/Technician
Safety Information/Precaution For Transfer Assembly And Transfer Control Unit Replacement.
Page 4489
Page 985
Coolant: Testing and Inspection
ENGINE COOLANT
Inspection
LEVEL CHECK Check if the engine coolant reservoir tank level is within MIN to MAX level when engine is cool.
- Adjust engine coolant level as necessary.
CHECKING COOLING SYSTEM FOR LEAKS
WARNING: Never remove the radiator or reservoir cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could
occur from high-pressure engine coolant escaping from the radiator or reservoir.
- To check for leakage, apply pressure to the cooling system at the reservoir filler neck using
suitable tool and Tool.
CAUTION: Higher pressure than specified may cause radiator damage.
NOTE: In case that engine coolant decreases, replenish cooling system with engine coolant. If any concerns are found, repair or replace damaged parts.
CHECKING RESERVOIR CAP Check reservoir cap relief pressure using suitable tool and Tool.
Page 4488
Page 2717
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations
Automatic Drive Positioner Control Unit
Memory Positioning Module: Service and Repair Automatic Drive Positioner Control Unit
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER CONTROL UNIT
Removal and Installation
CAUTION: When removing and installing, use shop cloths to protect parts from damage.
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the instrument driver lower
panel. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument
Panel/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Lower Panel LH.
3. Remove the screw from the automatic drive positioner control unit (1). 4. Remove automatic
drive positioner control unit (1) from bracket and disconnect electrical connectors.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Clamp the harness in position.
NOTE: After installing the automatic drive positioner control unit, perform additional service when
disconnecting battery negative terminal. Refer to See: Accessories and Optional
Equipment/Memory Positioning Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning.
Page 1101
Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair 2-Pole Lift
LIFTING POINT
2-Pole Lift
WARNING:
When lifting the vehicle, open the lift arms as wide as possible and ensure that the front and rear of
the vehicle are well balanced.
When setting the lift arm, do not allow the arm to contact the brake tubes, brake cable, or fuel lines.
Page 5281
6. Repeat the cleaning procedure as needed.
^ After treating, the trim panel should be clean as shown in Figure 4 above.
7. Reinstall the trim panel parts removed in step 1.
Page 5105
Removal and Installation
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
Removal 1. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and
Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair Crew Cab or See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door
Panel/Service and Repair - King Cab.
2. Remove the three rear door speaker screws and remove the rear door speaker.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
REAR DOOR TWEETER
Removal 1. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and
Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair Crew Cab.
2. Remove the rear door tweeter screws and remove the rear door tweeter. 3. Disconnect the rear
door tweeter connector.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 3891
- Refill brake system with new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system. Refer to See: Brake
Bleeding/Service and Repair.
Locations
Locations
Page 247
Page 4335
IMPORTANT:
If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or
charged back).
ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the
Service Dept.
4. Make sure the "turn plates" and "slide" plates are in good working order:
^ The surface of the front turn plates must be level with (the same height as) the rack surface.
If height is not the same; have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments.
^ Make sure the front turn plates:
> Do not wobble (no up/down movement).
> Operate (slide and turn) smoothly in all directions.
If there is any issue with the turn plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing
any alignments.
Page 222
21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete.
NOTE:
If you can't print the above screen:
a. Select the Print icon.
b. Select Save.
c. Select OK.
A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC.
NOTE:
If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in
the following file location:
At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start.
Page 953
10. Lower the fuel tank using a suitable lift jack and remove it from the vehicle to access the fuel
level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly. 11. Remove the lock ring using Tool as shown.
Tool number : - (J-46536)
12. Remove the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly. Remove and discard the fuel
level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly
O-ring.
CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm during removal.
- Avoid impacts such as dropping when handling the components.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. For installation, use a new fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly O-ring.
- Connect the quick connector as follows:
- Check the connection for any damage or foreign materials.
- Align the connector with the pipe, then insert the connector straight into the pipe until a click is
heard.
- After connecting the quick connector, make sure that the connection is secure by checking as
follows:
- Pull the tube and the connector to make sure they are securely connected.
- Visually inspect the connector to make sure the two retainer tabs are securely connected.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1. Turn the ignition switch ON but do not start engine, then
check the fuel pipes and hose connections for leaks while applying fuel pressure to the
system.
2. Start the engine and rev it above idle speed, then check that there are no fuel leaks at any of the
fuel pipe and hose connections.
Page 3271
Differential Cover: Service and Repair Rear Final Drive M226
CARRIER COVER
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Drain the differential gear oil. Refer to See: Fluid - Differential/Service and
Repair/Differential Gear Oil/Changing Differential Gear Oil.
2. Disconnect the parking brake cable (A) and brake tube (B) from the carrier cover. 3. Remove the
carrier cover bolts and separate the carrier cover from the gear carrier using Tool.
Tool number : KV10111100 (J-37228)
CAUTION: Do not damage the mating surface.
- Do not insert flat-bladed screwdriver, this will damage the mating surface.
INSTALLATION 1. Apply a bead of sealant to the mating surface of the carrier cover as shown.
- Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications.
CAUTION: Remove any old sealant adhering to the mating surfaces. Also remove any moisture,
oil, or foreign material adhering to the application and mating surfaces. 2. Install the carrier cover to
the gear carrier. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque. Refer to See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive
M226.
3. Connect the parking brake cable and brake tube to the carrier cover. 4. Fill the rear final drive
assembly with recommended differential gear oil. Refer to See: Fluid - Differential/Service and
Repair/Differential Gear
Oil/Changing Differential Gear Oil.
Page 2354
MALFUNCTION AREA CHART
Main Line
Short Circuit
MALFUNCTION AREA CHART
Short Circuit
DLC Branch Line Circuit
DLC BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 3. Check the terminals and connectors of
the data link connector for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side).
Is the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO 2. NO - Repair the terminal and connector. 2.
CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT Check the resistance between the data link connector
terminals.
Is the measurement value within the specification? YES (Present error) - Check the following items
again. Decision of CAN system type.
- Not received CONSULT-III data [SELF-DIAG RESULTS, CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR ("ECU
list" included)].
- Not copied from on-board diagnosis.
- Procedure for detecting root cause.
Page 227
40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19.
NOTE:
For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF.
^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data.
41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42.
41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed.
^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service
Manual (ESM) for this procedure.
NOTE:
If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle.
IAVL can now be performed.
42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF.
^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs.
Page 136
Monitor item
ACTIVE TEST Test item
Page 3360
Wheel Bearing: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Axle Bearing
Page 2341
Page 4733
Compressor Clutch: Specifications
Clutch Gap
Clutch disc-to-pulley clearance : 0.3 - 0.6 mm (0.012 - 0.024 in)
Page 2551
Page 5520
13. Turn the nut on each slider until it just touches the plastic insert.
^ Use a 3/4" (19 mm) wrench.
^ Be Careful - don't over tighten - turn each nut just enough to touch the plastic end piece.
CAUTION:
Make sure the organizer is all the way forward, in the deployed position and the lids snapped
closed before turning the nuts. Tightening the nuts with the organizer in any other position may
cause the sliders to jamb in the rails when moving / sliding the organizer.
14. Make sure the organizer sides freely.
^ Loosen the hand knobs and slide the organizer backward and forward.
NOTE:
When sliding the organizer, apply light force to the center, or evenly to both sides.
If the organizer does not slide freely when the hand knobs are loose:
a. Slide the organizer all the way forward until it stops against the front of the bed.
b. Turn each nut (loosen) until there are at least two (2) threads showing between the nut and the
end of the plastic insert.
Locations
Page 1919
13. Use compressed air to remove any remaining debris.
CAUTION:
DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may
cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders.
14. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it.
15. Tilt the manifold/catalyst/front tube so that the metal debris falls out of the part.
16. Apply compressed air through the boss to blow out any remaining debris.
CAUTION:
DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may
cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders.
17. Install the new sensor as described in the applicable Electronic Service Manual (ESM).
Page 1544
- No. 1 cylinder compression TDC
- Measure valve clearance using suitable tool. Refer to See: Engine Lubrication/Specifications.
CAUTION: If the inspection was carried out with a cold engine, make sure the values with a fully
warmed up engine are still within specifications. 8. Turn the crankshaft pulley clockwise 270° from
the position of No. 1 cylinder compression TDC to obtain No. 3 cylinder compression TDC. 9.
Measure valve clearances at the locations marked "X" as shown in the table below (locations
indicated with white arrow).
NOTE: Firing order 1-8-7-3-6-5-4-2
Page 2136
7. Select VIN Registration
8. Select Next
9. Make sure the ignition is ON with engine OFF.
10. Select Start
Page 1775
f. Enter the entire VIN using the keyboard. See Figure 13.
^ Use [CHNG] to switch between the letters and numbers keyboard screens.
g. Once the entire VIN is entered, select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 14.
h. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen and enter the entire VIN again. See Figure 15.
^ You MUST enter the VIN a second time for confirmation purposes.
Page 4169
Power Socket - Part 2
Page 2117
Page 3681
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair VDC/TCS/ABS
Wheel Sensors
WHEEL SENSORS
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove wheel sensor bolt. When removing the front wheel sensor, first remove the disc rotor to gain access to the front wheel
sensor bolt. Refer to See: Disc Brake System/Brake Rotor/Disc/Service and Repair/Front.
2. Pull out the sensor, being careful to turn it as little as possible.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth.
- Do not pull on the sensor harness.
3. Disconnect wheel sensor harness electrical connector, then remove harness from attaching
points.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Inspect wheel sensor O-ring, replace sensor assembly if damaged.
- Clean wheel sensor hole and mounting surface with brake cleaner and a lint-free shop rag. Be
careful that dirt and debris do not enter the axle.
- Apply a coat of suitable grease to the wheel sensor O-ring and mounting hole.
Sensor Rotor
SENSOR ROTOR
Removal and Installation
FRONT WHEEL SENSOR ROTOR
Removal and Installation The front wheel sensor rotor is built into the front wheel hub and bearing
assembly and is not removable. If damaged, replace the front wheel hub and bearing assembly.
Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Wheel Hub/Service and Repair.
REAR WHEEL SENSOR ROTOR
Component Locations
Engine Control Module: Component Locations
Page 4112
Consult-III Checking System
Standardized Relay
STANDARDIZED RELAY
Description
NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided
into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays.
Page 2843
Page 4628
Wheel Bearing: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Axle Bearing
Page 4103
Power Distribution Module: Locations Relay Control System
RELAY CONTROL SYSTEM
Component Parts Location
Page 802
> Engine coolant and lubricating oils at specified levels
> Spare tire, jack, hand tools, and floor mats in designated positions
NOTE:
Refer to the appropriate Service Manual for information about any of the above checks and
inspections.
4. Check the target mounts.
^ If there is any visual damage (bent, worn, cracked, etc), have the equipment repaired before
performing any alignments.
^ Make sure the target mounts are properly adjusted and configured (see Figure 11).
NOTE:
The target mount example shown in Figure 11 is for Hunter "camera type" alignment machines.
Follow the operation manual for your specific equipment.
Locations
Page 2358
Check the continuity between the data link connector terminals.
Is the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO 3. NO - Check the harness and repair the root
cause. 3. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (SHORT CIRCUIT) Check the continuity between the
data link connector and the ground.
Is the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO 4. NO - Check the harness and repair the root
cause. 4. CHECK ECM AND IPDM E/R TERMINATION CIRCUIT 1. Remove the ECM and the
IPDM E/R.
2. Check the resistance between the ECM terminals.
3. Check the resistance between the IPDM E/R terminals.
Is the measurement value within the specification? YES - GO TO 5. NO - Replace the ECM and/or
the IPDM E/R. 5. CHECK SYMPTOM Connect all the connectors. Check if the symptoms
described in the "Symptom (Results from interview with customer)" are reproduced. Inspection
result Reproduced - GO TO 6. Non-reproduced - Start the diagnosis again. Follow the trouble
diagnosis procedure when past error is detected. 6. CHECK UNIT REPRODUCTION Perform the
reproduction test as per the following procedure for each unit. 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 3. Disconnect one of the unit connectors
of CAN communication system.
Wheels/Tires - Accessory Wheel Lock
Installation/Removal
Wheel Fastener: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Accessory Wheel Lock
Installation/Removal
Classification: WT09-002
Reference: NTB09-056
Date: July 14, 2009
ACCESSORY WHEEL LOCKS INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan
SERVICE INFORMATION
Always use hand tools when installing or removing accessory wheel lock nuts.
WARNING:
Do not use power tools to install or remove accessory wheel lock nuts.
Use of an impact wrench or other power tool may cause permanent damage to the wheel lock nut
and/or key.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Accessory wheel locks, wheel lock keys, or vehicle wheels that are damaged due to improper
installation or removal will not be considered a manufacturer defect and will not be covered under
warranty.
Accessory Wheel Lock Installation / Removal Guidelines
^ For ease of removal, the wheel lock nut should always be the first lug nut removed.
^ If needed, clean threads on lug studs with a wire brush.
^ The wheel lock nut should always be the last lug nut tightened.
^ Always use the special key supplied in the wheel lock set to install and remove the wheel locks.
^ Always tighten the wheel lock nuts using a hand torque wrench to the torque specification in the
Service Manual.
Disclaimer
System Diagram
Speedometer Module: Description and Operation System Diagram
METER SYSTEM
SPEEDOMETER : System Diagram
Page 4062
IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) - Part 2
Diagram Information and Instructions
Ignition Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
Connector Symbols
HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS
Connector symbols
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the
direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector.
For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements,
"Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals
Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring
diagrams.
Sample/Wiring Diagram -Example-
Page 5111
Speaker: Service and Repair Premium With Navigation
Woofer
WOOFER
Removal and Installation
SUBWOOFER
Removal 1. Remove the front seat LH. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Seats/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Front Seat/Removal and
Installation.
2. Disconnect the subwoofer connector (B). : Vehicle front
3. Remove the subwoofer bolts (A). 4. Remove the subwoofer (1).
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Front Tweeter
FRONT TWEETER
Removal and Installation
FRONT TWEETER
Removal 1. Remove the front tweeter grille. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Panel Assembly/Removal And Installation.
2. Remove the front tweeter clips (C103) (A). 3. Disconnect the front tweeter connector and remove
the front tweeter (1).
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Center Speaker
Page 733
Page 201
7. Select VIN Registration
8. Select Next
9. Make sure the ignition is ON with engine OFF.
10. Select Start
Page 5604
Audible Warning Device: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
The Light Reminder Warning Does Not Sound
THE LIGHT REMINDER WARNING DOES NOT SOUND
Description
Light reminder warning does not sound even though headlamp is illuminated.
THE LIGHT REMINDER WARNING DOES NOT SOUND
Diagnosis Procedure
1.CHECK COMBINATION SWITCH (LIGHTING SWITCH) OPERATION Check that the headlamps
operate normally by operating the combination switch (lighting switch). Do they operate normally?
YES - GO TO 2 NO - Refer to See: Lighting and Horns/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and
Diagnostic Overview/Work Flow. 2.CHECK FRONT DOOR SWITCH LH SIGNAL CIRCUIT Perform
inspection of the front door switch LH signal circuit. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power
Locks/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Door Switch/King
Cab/Diagnosis Procedure (King Cab) or See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Door Switch/Crew Cab/Diagnosis Procedure
(Crew Cab). Is the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO 3 NO - Repair harness or connector.
3.CHECK FRONT DOOR SWITCH LH Perform a unit inspection for the front door switch LH. Refer
to See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics/Door Switch/King Cab/Diagnosis Procedure(King Cab) or See: Body and
Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/Door Switch/Crew Cab/Diagnosis Procedure (Crew Cab). Is the inspection result
normal? YES - Replace the BCM. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Body Control Systems/Body
Control Module/Service and Repair. NO - Replace the front door switch LH.
The Seat Belt Warning Continues Sounding, Or Does Not Sound
THE SEAT BELT WARNING CONTINUES SOUNDING, OR DOES NOT SOUND
Description
- Seat belt warning does not sound even though driver seat belt is not fastened.
- Seat belt warning sounds even though driver seat belt is fastened.
THE SEAT BELT WARNING CONTINUES SOUNDING, OR DOES NOT SOUND
Diagnosis Procedure
1.CHECK WARNING CHIME OPERATION 1. With key removed from key switch and the front door
LH open, turn lighting switch to 1st or 2nd position. 2. Return lighting switch to off position, and
insert key into key switch. Does warning chime sound for both steps? YES - GO TO 2 NO Replace combination meter. Refer to See: Instrument Cluster / Carrier/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement. 2.CHECK SEAT BELT WARNING LAMP 1. Turn ignition switch
ON. 2. Check the operation of the seat belt warning lamp in the combination meter.
Is the inspection result normal? YES - Replace BCM. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Body Control
Systems/Body Control Module/Service and Repair. NO - GO TO 3 3.CHECK SEAT BELT BUCKLE
SWITCH CIRCUIT
Page 1747
B. Compare the Part Number you wrote down to the numbers in the Current ECM Part Number
column in Table A , or Table B above.
^ If there is a match, this bulletin applies. Continue with the reprogramming procedure.
NOTE:
If there are two lines (two reprogramming options) on your C-III screen, use the one that does not
have the message "Caution! Use ONLY with NTBXX-XXX".
^ If there is not a match, this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to ASIST for further
diagnostic information.
3. If this bulletin applies and you have performed ECM reprogramming, the screen in Figure 2
appears when reprogramming is complete.
4. Make sure to erase DTCs from all systems.
NOTE:
During reprogramming, DTCs will set in several systems and must be erased.
5. Test drive the vehicle and make sure it operates correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF.
^ If the Check Engine light comes ON, go back to ASIST for further diagnostic information. Refer to
the applicable Electronic Service Manual as
needed.
^ Diagnosis and repairs beyond ECM reprogramming are not covered by this bulletin.
Description and Operation
Power Distribution Relay: Description and Operation
STANDARDIZED RELAY
Description
NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided
into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays.
TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS
Page 1022
Fluid - Differential: Service and Repair Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD)
Changing Differential Gear Oil
DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL
Changing Differential Gear Oil
DRAINING 1. Stop engine.
2. Remove the drain plug from the rear final drive assembly to drain the differential gear oil. 3.
Install the drain plug with sealant applied on the threads to the rear final drive assembly. Tighten to
the specified torque. Refer to See:
Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential Assembly/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive
M226 (ELD).
- Use High Performance Thread Sealant or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type
Specifications
FILLING 1. Remove the filler plug from the rear final drive assembly.
2. Fill the rear final drive assembly with new differential gear oil until the level reaches the specified
level near the filler plug hole.
Differential gear oil grade and capacity : Refer to See: .
3. Install the filler plug with sealant applied on the threads to the rear final drive assembly. Tighten
to the specified torque. Refer to See:
Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential Assembly/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive
M226 (ELD).
- Use High Performance Thread Sealant or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type
Specifications.
Checking Differential Gear Oil
DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL
Checking Differential Gear Oil
DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL LEAKAGE AND LEVEL 1. Make sure that differential gear oil is not
leaking from the rear final drive assembly or around it.
Locations
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Locations
Diagnosis Procedure
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Testing and Inspection Diagnosis Procedure
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Component Description
When the brake pedal is depressed, ASCD brake switch is turned OFF and stop lamp switch is
turned ON. ECM detects the state of the brake pedal by this input of two kinds (ON/OFF signal).
Refer to See: Cruise Control/Description and Operation/System Description for the ASCD function.
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Diagnosis Procedure
1. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-I With CONSULT-III 1. Turn ignition switch ON. 2. Select
"BRAKE SW 1" in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-III. 3. Check "BRAKE SW 1" indication
under the following conditions.
Without CONSULT-III 1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check voltage between ECM terminal 108 and ground under the following conditions.
OK or NG OK - GO TO 2. NG - GO TO 3. 2. CHECK OVERALL FUNCTION-II With CONSULT-III
Check "BRAKE SW 2" indication in "DATA MONITOR" mode.
Page 1553
Water Pump: Service and Repair Removal And Installation
WATER PUMP
Removal and Installation
CAUTION: When removing water pump, be careful not to get engine coolant on drive belt.
- Water pump cannot be disassembled and should be replaced as a unit.
REMOVAL 1. Drain engine coolant so that no engine coolant comes out from water pump fitting
hole. Refer to See: Cooling System/Coolant/Service and Repair.
CAUTION: Perform when the engine is cold. 2. Remove the engine front undercover using power
tool. 3. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. Refer to See: Tune-up and Engine
Performance Checks/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and
Repair/Removal and Installation.
4. Remove the drive belt. Refer to See: Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive
Belt/Service and Repair. 5. Remove the water pump pulley. 6. Remove the water pump. Engine coolant will leak from the cylinder block, so have a receptacle ready below.
CAUTION: Handle water pump vane so that it does not contact any other parts.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Visually check that there is no significant dirt or rust on the water pump body and vane.
- Make sure there is no looseness in the vane shaft, and that it turns smoothly when rotated by
hand.
- Replace the water pump assembly, if necessary.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. -
After installation bleed the air from the cooling system. Refer to See: Cooling
System/Coolant/Service and Repair.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Check for leaks of engine coolant. Refer to See: Cooling System/Coolant/Testing and Inspection.
- Start and warm up engine. Visually check for leaks of the engine coolant.
Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption
Recovery
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Programming
Interruption Recovery
Classification: EC10-015
Reference: NTB10-078
Date: June 21, 2010
REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE
SERVICE INFORMATION
A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption
Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin.
While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop
(become interrupted) before it is 100% complete.
One of two messages may appear:
^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe.
^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0".
In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if
the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped.
NOTE:
ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III.
The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service
Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later.
IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING
^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery.
^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads.
^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable.
^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter.
Page 2964
Control Unit: Service and Repair
DIFFERENTIAL LOCK CONTROL UNIT
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 2. Remove jack and tools. 3.
Remove upper bracket of center seat belt retractor and belt assembly. Refer to See: Restraint
Systems/Seat Belt Systems/Seat Belt/Service and
Repair/Rear Seat Belt.
4. Remove the necessary push pins and reposition rear panel out of the way. Refer to See: Body
and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Trim
Panel/Service and Repair.
5. Reposition the carpet to access differential lock control unit to disconnect connector. 6. Remove
the two nuts and remove differential lock control unit.
INSTALLATION Note the following, and installation is in the reverse order of removal. When installing differential lock control unit, tighten nuts to the specified torque.
Differential lock control unit nuts : 5.1 N.m (0.52 kg-m, 45 in-lb)
Page 3825
3. Install brake tube to brake hose, then tighten the flare nut using a suitable tool. Refer to See:
Diagrams. 4. Refill brake fluid and bleed air. Refer to See: Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair.
Service and Repair
Wiper Arm: Service and Repair
FRONT WIPER ARM
Front Wiper Arms
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal 1. Remove wiper arm covers and wiper arm nuts. 2. Remove front RH wiper arm and
front LH wiper arm. 3. Remove front RH blade assembly and front LH blade assembly.
Installation 1. Operate wiper motor one full cycle, then turn "OFF" (Auto Stop).
2. Clean up the pivot area as shown. This will reduce possibility of wiper arm looseness. 3. Install
front RH blade assembly and front LH blade assembly on wiper arms. 4. Install front RH wiper arm
and front LH wiper arm. 5. Tighten wiper arm nuts to specified torque, and install wiper arm covers.
Refer to See: Wiper Motor Linkage/Service and Repair. 6. Ensure that wiper blades stop within
proper clearance. See Front Wiper Arm Adjustment.
FRONT WIPER ARM ADJUSTMENT 1. Operate windshield washer and wiper motor one full cycle,
then turn "OFF" (Auto Stop).
2. Lift the wiper blade up and then rest it onto glass surface, check the blade clearance "L1" and
"L2".
3. Remove wiper arm covers and wiper arm nuts. 4. Adjust front wiper arms on wiper motor pivot
shafts to obtain above specified blade clearances. 5. Tighten wiper arm nuts to specified torque,
and install wiper arm covers. Refer to See: Wiper Motor Linkage/Service and Repair.
Page 5691
3. Install the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit as follows (see Figure 5):
CAUTION:
Do not bend the float arm when handling the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit / Fuel Pump Assembly.
a. Slide the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit into the attachment slots until the two Locking Tabs snap
in place.
^ Confirm the Locking Tabs are snapped in place by trying to move the Sender Unit up and down
(it should not move).
b. Insert the Fuel Temperature Sensor into the Plastic Retaining Clip.
^ Make sure the "circular flange" of the Sensor is positioned between the Clip and the Rib.
c. Insert the two Fuel Temperature Sensor Wires into the Securing Tab.
d. Connect the White Wire Connector into the top of the Fuel Pump (see Figure 6).
e. Pull and push all connectors to make sure they are fully locked in place.
Page 4011
Recall 10V074000: Fuel Sender Replacement
Fuel Gauge Sender: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 10V074000: Fuel Sender Replacement
VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2005-2009 Nissan/Armada 2005-2009
Nissan/Titan 2005-2009 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc.
MFR'S REPORT DATE: February 26, 2010
NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V074000 N/A
NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Fuel System, Other: Storage: Fuel Gauge System
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 340000
SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2005-2009 Titan, Armada, and Infiniti QX56
vehicles. The instrument panel fuel gauge may inaccurately display that the vehicle still has some
fuel, typically about one quarter tank, when the fuel tank is empty.
CONSEQUENCE: This could cause the vehicle to run out of gas and stall on the highway, which
could cause a crash.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the fuel sender unit inside the fuel tank with a new improved sender
card. This service will be performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin on or
before March 22, 2010. Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261.
NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle
Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov.
Body - Sunroof Inoperative/Erratic Operation
Sunroof / Moonroof Module: Customer Interest Body - Sunroof Inoperative/Erratic Operation
Classification: BT07-032A
Reference: NTB07-070A
Date: September 25, 2009
SUNROOF DOES NOT OPERATE PROPERLY
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles section has been revised. No other changes
have been made. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007 - 2009 Armada (TA60) 2007 - 2009 Frontier (D40) 2007 - 2009
Maxima (A34, A35) 2007 - 2009 Pathfinder (R51) 2007 - 2009 Quest (V42) 2007 - 2009 Titan (A60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
Sunroof auto operation will not work or sunroof does not operate properly:
^ When the battery has been disconnected or discharged
^ When the sunroof motor has been disconnected from power
^ When the sunroof motor was changed
ACTION
Perform the following initialization procedure:
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Push and hold the sunroof tilt switch in the forward (DOWN) position until the sunroof is fully
closed.
3. After the sunroof has closed all the way, push and hold the tilt switch forward (DOWN) again for
more than 2 seconds to re-learn motor position.
4. Initialization is complete if the sunroof operates normally.
NOTE:
If the sunroof is still not operating properly after initialization, refer to ASIST and section RF of the
Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for further diagnosis and repair information.
Page 4580
Wheel Bearing: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Axle Bearing
Locations
Page 4384
2. If outside of the specified value, adjust camber and caster using the cam bolts (1) in the front
lower link (2).
CAUTION: After adjusting the camber and caster check the toe-in.
NOTE: Camber changes about 3' (0.05°) with each graduation of one cam bolt (1). Refer to table
below for examples of lower link cam bolt (1) effect on camber and caster.
3. Tighten the cam bolt nuts to specification. Refer to See: Suspension/Service and Repair/Front
Suspension.
TOE-IN
WARNING: Always perform the following procedure on a flat surface.
- Make sure that no person is in front of the vehicle before pushing it.
1. Bounce the front of vehicle up and down to stabilize the vehicle height (posture). 2. Push the
vehicle straight ahead about 5 m (16 ft).
3. Put a mark on base line of the tread (rear side) of both front tires at the same height as hub
center as shown. These marks are measuring points. 4. Measure the distance "A" on the rear side
of the front tires as shown.
Page 4623
Wheels: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Road Wheel
Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration Procedure
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration
Procedure
Classification: EC09-028
Reference: NTB09-136
Date: December 1, 2009
2005 AND LATER; ECM VIN REGISTRATION
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2005 and later
SERVICE INFORMATION
The Applied Vehicles must have the correct Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) registered in the
Engine Control Module (ECM). The VIN registration process must be performed under the following
conditions.
^ When installing a new ECM
^ If, during vehicle service, the VIN registration inside the ECM is found to be missing or incorrect.
When needed, use the Service Procedure in this bulletin to perform ECM VIN registration.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for
any repairs being performed.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Connect C-III to the vehicle and perform the initial selections:
NOTE:
If C-III is already connected, go to Step 2.
a. Start C-III and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear.
b. Select the detected VI from the list.
c. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
d. Select Model and Year.
e. Confirm the correct model and year were selected.
f. Select Repair.
Page 1203
- Position No. 1 camshaft bracket close to the mounting position, and then install it to prevent from
touching liquid gasket applied to each surface.
- Temporarily tighten the RH (A) and LH (B) front cover bolts (4 for each bank) as shown.
4. Tighten the camshaft bracket bolts as follows:
CAUTION: After tightening the camshaft bracket bolts, be sure to wipe off excessive liquid gasket
from the parts listed below.
- Mating surface of rocker cover
- Mating surface of front cover
- A: RH bank
- B: Exhaust side
- C: LH bank
Automatic Drive Positioner Control Unit
Memory Positioning Module: Service and Repair Automatic Drive Positioner Control Unit
AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER CONTROL UNIT
Removal and Installation
CAUTION: When removing and installing, use shop cloths to protect parts from damage.
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the instrument driver lower
panel. Refer to See: Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Instrument Lower Panel LH.
3. Remove the screw from the automatic drive positioner control unit (1). 4. Remove automatic
drive positioner control unit (1) from bracket and disconnect electrical connectors.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Clamp the harness in position.
NOTE: After installing the automatic drive positioner control unit, perform additional service when
disconnecting battery negative terminal. Refer to See: Mirrors/Memory Positioning Systems/Testing
and Inspection/Programming and Relearning.
Page 485
Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1421 Stored
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/DTC P1421
Stored
Classification: EC09-014B
Reference: NTB09-048B
Date: April 21, 2011
2007-2009 TITAN AND ARMADA; MIL "ON" WITH DTC P1421 STORED
This bulletin has been amended. APPLIED VEHICLES, APPLIED VINS, and Table A and B have
been revised. Please discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2007-2009 Titan (A60) 2007-2009 Armada (TA60)
APPLIED VINS and DATES: 2007-2008 Titan and Armada: All
2009 Titan: Vehicles built before 1N6AA0(***)9N312517 // April 7, 2009
2009 Armada: Vehicles built before 5N1AA08(**)9N614339 // April 7, 2009
IF YOU CONFIRM:
An Applied Vehicle has the MIL "ON" and DTC P1421 (Cold Start Control) stored in the ECM.
ACTION:
Confirm this bulletin applies.
Page 297
21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete.
NOTE:
If you can't print the above screen:
a. Select the Print icon.
b. Select Save.
c. Select OK.
A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC.
NOTE:
If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in
the following file location:
At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start.
Specifications
Spark Plug: Specifications
Spark Plug
Torque : 24.5 N.m (2.5 Kg-m, 18 ft-lb)
Page 1340
Oil Pan: Specifications
Oil Pan
Oil pan (upper)
Tighten the bolts in numerical order as shown.
Oil pan (lower)
Page 3901
Locations
Locations
Procedures
Hood Latch: Procedures
HOOD
Hood Lock Control Inspection
CAUTION: If the hood lock cable is bent or deformed, replace it.
1. Make sure the secondary latch is properly engaged with the secondary striker with hood's own
weight by dropping it from approx. 200 mm (7.87
in) height.
2. While operating the hood opener, carefully make sure the front end of the hood is raised by
approx. 20 mm (0.79 in). Also make sure the hood
opener returns to the original position.
3. Check the hood lock lubrication condition. If necessary, apply "body grease" to the points shown
in the figure.
Page 4163
MULTIPLE SWITCH The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown below. -
The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Abbreviation List
ABBREVIATIONS
Abbreviation List
The following ABBREVIATIONS are used:
Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Audible Warning Device: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Work Flow
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
Work Flow
DETAILED FLOW 1.OBTAIN INFORMATION ABOUT SYMPTOM Interview the customer to obtain
as much information as possible about the conditions and environment under which the
malfunction occurred. - GO TO 2 2.CHECK SYMPTOM Check the symptom based on the information obtained from the customer.
- Check to see if any other malfunctions are present.
- GO TO 3 3.CHECK CONSULT-III SELF-DIAGNOSIS RESULTS Connect CONSULT-III and
perform "SELF-DIAGNOSIS". Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Scan Tool Testing and
Procedures/CONSULT-III Function. Are self-diagnosis results normal? YES - GO TO 4 NO - Repair
or replace the malfunctioning parts, GO TO 5 4.NARROW DOWN MALFUNCTIONING PARTS
THROUGH SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS Perform symptom diagnosis and repair or replace the
identified malfunctioning parts. - GO TO 5 5.FINAL CHECK Check that the warning buzzer in the
combination meter operates normally. Does it operate normally? YES - Inspection End. NO - GO
TO 1
Fail Safe
COMBINATION METER
Fail Safe
The combination meter performs a fail-safe operation for the functions listed below when
communication is lost.
Page 4005
HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS
Sample/wiring diagram -example- For detail, refer to following See: How To Read Wiring Diagrams/Description.
Description
HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS
Description
Service and Repair
Steering Angle Sensor: Service and Repair
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove spiral cable. Refer to See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Clockspring
Assembly / Spiral Cable/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the screws and remove the steering angle
sensor.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: After installation of spiral cable, adjust steering angle sensor. Refer to See: Brakes and
Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming
and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing Control Unit/Description See: Brakes and
Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming
and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing Control Unit/Special Repair Requirement See:
Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Adjustment Of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral
Position/Description See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Adjustment Of Steering Angle
Sensor Neutral Position/Special Repair Requirement.
Page 433
19. Install the seat into the body. Torque the bolts to 45 Nm (4.6 Kg-m, 33 ft-lb).
20. Re-connect the battery cables.
21. Confirm OCS operation. See the applicable Electronic Service Manual for details.
22. Re-program the radio presets.
23. Re-initialize the Automatic Sunroof as applicable. See the applicable Owner's Manual for
details.
Checking Fluid Level
Power Steering Fluid: Service and Repair Checking Fluid Level
POWER STEERING FLUID
Checking Fluid Level
Check fluid level, referring to the scale on reservoir tank. Use HOT range for fluid temperatures of
50° - 80°C (122° - 176°F). Use COLD range for fluid temperatures of 0° - 30°C (32° - 86°F).
CAUTION: Do not overfill.
- Do not reuse any used power steering fluid.
- Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent. Refer to See: .
Page 3871
CAUTION: Be careful not to deform or bend brake piping while removing and installing brake booster.
- Replace clevis pin if it is damaged.
- Be careful not to damage brake booster stud bolt threads. If brake booster is tilted or inclined
during installation, dash panel may damage the threads.
- Attach the check valve in the correct direction.
REMOVAL 1. Remove engine room cover with power tool. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Engine Cover.
2. Remove engine air duct assembly. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Tune-up
and Engine Performance Checks/Air Cleaner
Housing/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation.
3. Remove brake piping from master cylinder assembly. 4. Remove brake master cylinder. Refer to
See: Hydraulic System/Brake Master Cylinder/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Replacement.
5. Remove vacuum hose from brake booster. Refer to See: Vacuum Lines/Removal And
Installation. 6. If equipped, disconnect active boost and delta stroke sensor harness connectors
from brake booster. 7. Remove brake pedal to clevis attachment snap pin and clevis pin from
inside the vehicle. 8. Remove brake booster to brake pedal assembly nuts. 9. Remove brake
booster from dash panel.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Output Rod Length Inspection 1. Using a hand vacuum pump, apply a vacuum of - 66.7 kPa (- 500
mmHg, - 19.69 inHg) to brake booster.
2. Check output rod length.
Output rod length : Refer to See: Specifications.
INSTALLATION 1. Loosen lock nut to adjust input rod length so that the length (B) is set at the
specified value.
Input rod length (B) : Refer to See: Specifications.
2. After adjusting (B), temporarily tighten lock nut and install brake booster. Install a gaskets and spacer block between booster assembly and the dash panel.
3. Connect brake pedal to clevis of input rod. 4. Install brake booster to brake pedal assembly nuts
and tighten to the specified torque. 5. Install brake piping to brake master cylinder. Refer to See:
Hydraulic System/Diagrams. 6. If equipped, connect active boost and delta stroke sensor harness
connectors to brake booster. 7. Connect vacuum hose to brake booster.
Page 4717
6. Install the lower glove box in the instrument panel and secure it with the two hinge pins.
Page 694
HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS
Sample/wiring diagram -example- For detail, refer to following See: How To Read Wiring Diagrams/Description.
Description
HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS
Description
Capacity Specifications
Fluid - Transfer Case: Capacity Specifications
Transfer Case Fluid
Capacity ...............................................................................................................................................
................................................ 2-1/8 U.S. qts (2.0 L)
Page 1619
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Installation of Thermostat Install the thermostat with the whole circumference of each flange part fit securely inside the rubber
ring as shown.
- Install the thermostat with the jiggle valve facing upwards.
Installation of Water Outlet Pipe and Heater Pipe First apply a neutral detergent to the O-rings,
then quickly insert the insertion parts of the water outlet pipe and heater pipe into the installation
holes.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION Check for leaks of the engine coolant. Refer to See: Coolant/Testing and Inspection.
- Start and warm up the engine. Visually check for leaks of the engine coolant.
Locations
Page 2535
34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the
"Duplication Test" icon.
35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase.
36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18).
37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased.
^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs.
^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed.
Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below.
38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF.
39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch
(M/T) pedal;
Body - Front Door Window Motor Limit Switch Resetting
Front Door Window Regulator: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front Door Window Motor Limit
Switch Resetting
EL08-031A
Reference: NTB09-027A
Date: July 15, 2010
FRONT WINDOW REGULATOR MOTOR LIMIT SWITCH RESET
This bulletin has been amended. The APPLIED VEHICLES section has been revised. No other
changes have been made. Please discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2006-2010 Armada (TA60) 2006-2009 Quest (V42) 2006-2010 Titan (A60)
SERVICE INFORMATION
If any of the following work has been done:
^ removal and installation of the regulator assembly
^ removal and installation of the motor from the regulator
^ installation of a new glass window
^ installation of a new glass run
....check the label on the window motor to see if the part number is one of the following:
^ 80730-ZT01A ^ 80731-ZT01A ^ 80730-ZM70B ^ 80731-ZM70B
NOTE:
The label can be checked with the motor in the vehicle by using a mirror.
If the window motor is listed above, the Limit Switch will need to be reset using the procedure in
this bulletin.
NOTE:
Some of the window motors with these part numbers may appear to have a reset switch, but it will
not reset the Limit Switch.
SETTING OF LIMIT SWITCH
1. Connect the door harness to the power window motor, and rotate the motor more than 5 turns in
the glass raising (up) direction.
Page 3103
Page 1259
Use Undersize Bearing Usage Guide Use undersize (US) bearing when the oil clearance with standard size main bearing is not within
specification.
- When using undersize (US) bearing, measure the inside diameter of the bearing installed and
grind the journal until the oil clearance falls within specification.
Bearing undersize table
CAUTION: Do not damage fillet R when grinding crankshaft journal in order to use undersized
bearing (All journals).
Fillet R : 1.5 - 1.7 mm (0.059 - 0.067 in)
Page 4330
SPECIAL TOOLS
Locations
Specifications
Electronic Throttle Actuator: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Throttle Control Motor
Technician Safety Information
Axle Shaft Assembly: Technician Safety Information
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution
Observe the following precautions when disassembling and servicing the wheel hub and drive
shafts. Perform work in a location which is as dust-free as possible.
- Before disassembling and servicing, clean the outside of parts.
- Prevention of the entry of foreign objects must be taken into account during disassembly of the
component parts.
- Disassembled parts must be carefully reassembled in the correct order. If work is interrupted, a
clean cover must be placed over parts.
- Paper shop cloths must be used. Fabric shop cloths must not be used because of the danger of
lint adhering to parts.
- Disassembled parts (except for rubber parts) should be cleaned with a suitable solvent which
shall be removed by blowing with air or wiping with paper shop cloths.
Page 726
TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS
Locations
Page 1884
4. Disconnect the adjustable pedal electric motor electrical connector. 5. Disconnect the adjustable
pedal electric motor memory electrical connector, if equipped. 6. Disconnect the accelerator
position sensor electrical connector. 7. Remove the two upper and one lower accelerator pedal
nuts. 8. Remove the adjustable accelerator pedal assembly.
CAUTION: Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly.
- Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket.
- Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal adjusting mechanism.
- Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling.
- Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Inspection After Installation Check that the accelerator pedal moves smoothly within the specified ranges.
- Depress and release the accelerator pedal to check that it returns smoothly to the original
released position.
- Perform an electrical inspection of the accelerator pedal position sensor. Refer to See: Computers
and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/VIN Registration See:
Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator
Pedal Released Position Learning See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning See: Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning .
CAUTION: When the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor is disconnected,
perform "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to See: Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released
Position Learning.
NON-ADJUSTABLE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY Non-Adjustable Accelerator Pedal
Service and Repair
Valve Guide Seal: Service and Repair
OIL SEAL
Removal and Installation of Valve Oil Seal
REMOVAL 1. Remove the camshaft relating to the valve oil seal to be removed. Refer to See:
Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Camshaft/Service and
Repair/Removal And Installation.
2. Remove the valve lifters. Refer to See: Cylinder Head Assembly/Service and
Repair/Overhaul/Exploded View. Correctly identify the location where each part is removed from. Keep parts organized to avoid
mixing them up.
3. Turn the crankshaft until the cylinder requiring new oil seals is at TDC. This will prevent the valve
from dropping into the cylinder.
4. Remove the valve collet using Tool.
CAUTION: Do not damage the valve lifter holes. 5. Remove the valve spring retainer and valve
spring.
CAUTION: Do not remove the valve spring seat from the valve spring.
6. Remove the valve oil seal using Tool.
Tool number : KV10107902 (J-38959)
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 4328
Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that
slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the
left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane.
This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although
the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be.
Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition
The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure
2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road.
Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center
^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less.
^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less.
When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to
counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle
should be driven on a straight flat road.
Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle
pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This
condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side.
Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition
The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road.
^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering
correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on
a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane
during this time (7 seconds).
Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption
Recovery
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Programming
Interruption Recovery
Classification: EC10-015
Reference: NTB10-078
Date: June 21, 2010
REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE
SERVICE INFORMATION
A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption
Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin.
While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop
(become interrupted) before it is 100% complete.
One of two messages may appear:
^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe.
^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0".
In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if
the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped.
NOTE:
ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III.
The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service
Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later.
IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING
^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery.
^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads.
^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable.
^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter.
Page 4119
Power Distribution Module: Service Precautions
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
The Supplemental Restraint System such as "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER",
used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front
passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage
front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag
deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and
whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system
safely is included in the Restraint Systems Information.
WARNING: To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed
by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
- Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to
personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and
Air Bag Module, see the SRS Air Bag.
- Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed. SRS
wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.
Page 5797
Page 2293
ABS Actuator and Electric Unit (Control Unit) -
Models with ABS
CAUTION: Never replace the unit even when "NG" is indicated on the "INITIAL DIAG" at this stage.
Follow the trouble diagnosis procedures.
- Models with ABLS
CAUTION: Never replace the unit even when "NG" is indicated on the "INITIAL DIAG" at this stage.
Follow the trouble diagnosis procedures.
- Models with VDC
CAUTION:
Service and Repair
Heater Core: Service and Repair
HEATER CORE
Removal and Installation
Heater and Cooling Unit Assembly
REMOVAL 1. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. Refer to See: Heating and Air
Conditioning/Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the four screws and
remove the upper bracket. 3. Remove the four screws and remove the heater core cover.
Page 1517
Disconnect the quick connector as follows: -
Hold the sides of the connector, push in tabs and pull out the tube.
- If the connector and the tube are stuck together, push and pull several times until they start to
move. Then disconnect them by pulling.
CAUTION: The quick connector can be disconnected when the tabs are completely depressed. Do not twist
the quick connector more than necessary.
- Do not use any tools to disconnect the quick connector.
- Keep the resin tube away from heat. Be especially careful when welding near the tube.
- Prevent any acid liquids such as battery electrolyte, from getting on the resin tube.
- Do not bend or twist the resin tube during connection.
- Do not remove the remaining retainer on the hard tube (or the equivalent) except when the resin
tube or the retainer is replaced.
- When the resin tube or hard tube, or the equivalent, is replaced, also replace the retainer with a
new one (white colored retainer).
- To keep the quick connector clean and to avoid damage and contamination from foreign
materials, cover the quick connector with plastic bags or suitable material as shown.
8. Remove the four bolts and remove the fuel tank shield using power tool. 9. Remove the fuel tank
strap bolts while supporting the fuel tank with a suitable lift jack.
Locations
Page 4889
- Do not allow oil, grease or water to come in contact with the air bag module.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. If driver air bag module is being replaced due to deployment, spiral cable must also be replaced.
Refer to See: Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable/Service and Repair .
- For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors, refer to See: Service and Repair.
- After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer
to See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/SRS Operation Check.
Page 6122
Power Window Switch: Service and Repair Front Power Window Switch
FRONT POWER WINDOW SWITCH
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the front power window switch assembly from the front door finisher RH.
Refer to See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and
Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair.
2. Remove the front power window switch (1) from the power window switch finisher (2) by
releasing the tabs using suitable tool (A).
CAUTION: Wrap a cloth around suitable tools to protect components from damage.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 4687
Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics
Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics
Classification: ST08-001D
Reference: NTB08-097D
Date: April 26, 2011
DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER
This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The
off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this
bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R
SERVICE INFORMATION
If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic
Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue.
Diagnostic Flow Chart
Road Test
Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair.
IMPORTANT:
^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as:
> Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory)
> Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires
> Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire
Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures
Technical Service Bulletin # 00-052C Date: 040416
Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures
Classification: EC00-007C
Reference: NTB00-052C
Date: April 16, 2004
ECM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES
ATTENTION:
THIS BULLETIN HAS BEEN REVISED.
^ The Service Procedures for replacing an ECM on an Applied vehicle were revised.
^ Please use this bulletin NTB00-052c for complete information.
^ Discard all previously distributed copies of NTB00-052.
APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All 2000 and later 1999 Frontier (D22) 1999 Quest (V41) 1999 Pathfinder
(R50) from VIN JN8AR07**XW350101
IF YOU CONFIRM:
The Electronic Control Module (ECM) needs to be replaced on a 2000 MY and later vehicle, or an
Applied 1999 MY vehicle (see above).
ACTIONS:
^ Re-register all customer keys if the vehicle has ECM based NATS (see step 1).
^ Check ASIST for any new updates for the new ECM you're installing (see steps 2 - 4).
^ Perform the "ACCELERATOR PEDAL & THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING"
procedure (see step 5).
^ After installing the new ECM, perform the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARNING" procedure (when
applicable) using CONSULT-II. See step 6.
^ For 2005 and later vehicles, enter the vehicle VIN into the new ECM (see step 7).
CAUTION:
Failure to perform all the work steps in the specified order can cause poor engine running, MIL
'ON', or vehicle emission test rejection.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
Recall 10V074000: Fuel Sender Replacement
Fuel Gauge Sender: Recalls Recall 10V074000: Fuel Sender Replacement
VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2005-2009 Nissan/Armada 2005-2009
Nissan/Titan 2005-2009 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc.
MFR'S REPORT DATE: February 26, 2010
NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V074000 N/A
NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Fuel System, Other: Storage: Fuel Gauge System
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 340000
SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2005-2009 Titan, Armada, and Infiniti QX56
vehicles. The instrument panel fuel gauge may inaccurately display that the vehicle still has some
fuel, typically about one quarter tank, when the fuel tank is empty.
CONSEQUENCE: This could cause the vehicle to run out of gas and stall on the highway, which
could cause a crash.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the fuel sender unit inside the fuel tank with a new improved sender
card. This service will be performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin on or
before March 22, 2010. Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261.
NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle
Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov.
Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information
Tires: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information
Classification: WT11-003
Reference: NTB11-029
Date: March 21, 2011
TIRE MOUNTING INFORMATION
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan
SERVICE INFORMATION
^ When mounting tires to wheels, it is important that the tire bead is seated correctly.
^ A tire bead that is not seated correctly may cause a vehicle vibration.
^ High performance tires and tires with shorter sidewalls (low aspect tires) may require more care
to make sure the tire bead is seated correctly.
^ Follow the Tire Mounting Tips in this bulletin.
Tire Mounting Tips:
NOTE:
These tips are not intended to be a complete instruction for mounting tires to wheels. Make sure to
read and follow the instruction for your specific tire service equipment
1. Clean the tire bead with an approved rubber cleaning fluid.
^ Rubber cleaning fluid is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process.
2. Clean the wheel (flange and bead seat area) see Figure 2 Make sure to clean off all rust and
corrosion.
Page 5824
Speedometer Module: Description and Operation System Description
METER SYSTEM
SPEEDOMETER : System Description
The ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) provides a vehicle speed signal to the combination
meter via CAN communication lines.
Page 2355
YES (Past error) - Error was detected in the data link connector branch line circuit. NO - Repair the
data link connector branch line.
ECM Branch Line Circuit
ECM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure
1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the battery cable from the
negative terminal. 3. Check the following terminals and connectors for damage, bend and loose
connection (unit side and connector side). ECM
- Harness connector E5
- Harness connector F14
Is the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO 2. NO - Repair the terminal and connector. 2.
CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. Disconnect the connector of ECM. 2. Check the
resistance between the ECM harness connector terminals.
Is the measurement value within the specification? YES - GO TO 3. NO - Repair the ECM branch
line. 3. CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check the power supply and the
ground circuit of the ECM. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/Power Supply And Ground Circuit/Diagnosis Procedure. Is the inspection result
normal? YES (Present error) - Replace the ECM. Refer to See: Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Procedure After Replacing ECM. YES (Past error) - Error
was detected in the ECM branch line. NO - Repair the power supply and the ground circuit.
BCM Branch Line Circuit
BCM BRANCH LINE CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure
1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect the battery cable from the
negative terminal. 3. Check the terminals and connectors of the BCM for damage, bend and loose
connection (unit side and connector side). Is the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO 2. NO Repair the terminal and connector. 2. CHECK HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT 1. Disconnect the
connector of BCM. 2. Check the resistance between the BCM harness connector terminals.
Is the measurement value within the specification? YES - GO TO 3. NO - Repair the BCM branch
line. 3. CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT Check the power supply and the
ground circuit of the BCM. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Body Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Component
Page 6092
Should a customer note water in a lamp assembly, please use the above flow chart to determine if
the condition is normal or requires lamp replacement.
Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Ignition Timing: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing Check
IDLE SPEED
With CONSULT-III Check idle speed in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-III.
With GST Check idle speed with GST.
IGNITION TIMING 1. Attach timing light to loop wire as shown.
2. Check ignition timing.
Page 1268
- No. 1 cylinder compression TDC
- Measure valve clearance using suitable tool. Refer to See: Engine Lubrication/Specifications.
CAUTION: If the inspection was carried out with a cold engine, make sure the values with a fully
warmed up engine are still within specifications. 8. Turn the crankshaft pulley clockwise 270° from
the position of No. 1 cylinder compression TDC to obtain No. 3 cylinder compression TDC. 9.
Measure valve clearances at the locations marked "X" as shown in the table below (locations
indicated with white arrow).
NOTE: Firing order 1-8-7-3-6-5-4-2
Page 5628
Page 2528
16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5).
^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB,
diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing.
17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.)
Engine Controls - DTC P0451 Stored In The ECM
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - DTC P0451 Stored In The
ECM
Classification: EC09-027
Reference: NTB09-121
Date: November 3, 2009
2009 TITAN AND ARMADA; DTC P0451 STORED
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2009 Titan (A60) 2009 Armada (TA60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
DTC P0451 (EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor Performance) is stored,
ACTIONS
1. Confirm this bulletin applies.
a. Check and compare your current ECM Part Number to Table A or B shown in this bulletin.
b. If that part number does not match one in Table A, this bulletin does not apply. Go back to
ASIST for further diagnostic and repair information.
2. If this bulletin applies, reprogram the ECM.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTIONS (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is
essential to successfully completing this repair.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Connect C-III to the vehicle to begin the reprogramming procedure.
ABS
Hydraulic Control Assembly - Antilock Brakes: Service and Repair ABS
ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY)
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the cowl top extension. Refer to
See: Body and Frame/Cowl/Cowl Moulding / Trim/Service and Repair. 3. Drain the brake fluid.
Refer to See: Hydraulic System/Brake Fluid/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement. 4.
Disconnect the actuator harness connector from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit).
CAUTION: -
To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench to prevent the flare nuts
and brake tubes from being damaged.
- Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is
splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately.
5. Disconnect the brake tubes. 6. Remove the three bolts and remove the ABS actuator and
electric unit (control unit).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: To install, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench (commercial service tools).
- Always tighten brake tubes to specification when installing.
Page 914
- No. 3 cylinder compression TDC
- Measure valve clearance using suitable tool. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Engine Lubrication/Specifications.
CAUTION: If the inspection was carried out with a cold engine, make sure the values with a fully
warmed up engine are still within specifications.
10. Turn the crankshaft pulley clockwise 90° from the position of No.
3 cylinder compression TDC (clockwise by 360° from the position of No. 1 cylinder compression
TDC) to measure the intake and exhaust valve clearances of No. 6 cylinder (G) and the exhaust
valve clearance of No. 2 cylinder (E). Arrow indicates Engine front
- A: RH
- B: LH
- C: Exhaust
- D: Intake
- E: No. 2 cylinder
- F: No. 4 cylinder
Page 4431
Power Steering Pump: Removal and Replacement
Removal and Installation
POWER STEERING OIL PUMP
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Drain power steering fluid from reservoir tank. 2. Remove air duct assembly. Refer to
See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Air Duct/Service and Repair. 3. Remove power steering
reservoir tank. 4. Remove serpentine drive belt from auto tensioner and power steering pump.
Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Drive Belts,
Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive Belt/Service and Repair.
5. Disconnect pressure sensor electrical connector. 6. Remove high pressure and low pressure
piping from power steering oil pump. Refer to See: Power Steering Line/Hose/Service and Repair.
7. Remove bolts, then remove power steering pump.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Power Steering
Line/Hose/Service and Repair for tightening torque. After installation, bleed air. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Brake Bleeding/Service and
Repair.
NOTE: Belt tension is automatic and requires no adjustment.
Disassembly and Assembly
POWER STEERING OIL PUMP
Disassembly and Assembly
INSPECTION BEFORE DISASSEMBLY Disassemble the power steering oil pump only if the
following items are found. Deformed or damaged pulley, bracket, connector or suction pipe.
- Oil leakage from the suction pipe or connector.
DISASSEMBLY
NOTE: Mount the power steering oil pump in a vise as needed. 1. Remove the connector bolt,
connector and copper washers.
Locations
Page 2309
indicate an error between DLC and TCM (line 1-a in the figure below).
NOTE: Diag on CAN units are not indicated on the "ECU list" when the CAN line between Diag on CAN
unit and the data link connector is open.
- For a description of Diag on CAN, refer to See: Description and Operation/Diag On
CAN/Description.
2. CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR: Check each item on "CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR". Draw a line
on the diagnosis sheet to indicate the error
circuit. a. Reception item of "ECM": On "TCM", "UNKWN" is indicated. This means ECM cannot
receive the signal from TCM. Draw a line to indicate
an error between ECM and TCM (line 2-a in the figure below).
NOTE: If "UNKWN" is indicated on "TRANSMIT DIAG", then the control unit cannot transmit CAN
communication signal to each unit. Draw a line between the control unit and the splice.
b. Reception item of "AFS": On "TCM", "UNKWN" is indicated. This means AFS cannot receive the
signal from TCM. Draw a line to indicate
an error between AFS and TCM (line 2-b in the figure below).
c. Reception item of "AV": "UNKWN" is not indicated. This indicates normal communication
between AV and its receiving units. Do not draw
any line.
Page 4224
RELAY CONTROL SYSTEM
System Description
IPDM E/R controls relays based on input signals from various sensors and from request signals
received via CAN communication.
CAUTION: IPDM E/R integrated relays cannot be removed.
Page 5371
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CENTER PILLAR UPPER FINISHER
Removal 1. Remove the front and rear door welts. 2. Remove the front and rear kicking plates. 3.
Remove the center pillar lower finisher. 4. Remove the seat belt shoulder anchor and D ring. Refer
to See: Restraint Systems/Seat Belt Systems/Seat Belt/Service and Repair/Front Seat Belt. 5.
Remove the center pillar assist grip. 6. Remove the center pillar upper finisher.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
FRONT PILLAR FINISHER
Removal 1. Remove the front pillar assist grip. 2. Remove the front pillar finisher.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
KICKING PLATES
Removal Release the clips and remove the front and/or rear kicking plates.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
DOOR PARTING SEALS
Removal 1. Open the front and/or rear doors fully. 2. Release the clips and remove the parting
seals.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
REAR
Page 4117
IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) - Part 3
Page 5778
c. Remove the Fuel Temperature Sensor from the Plastic Retaining Clip.
d. Remove the wires from the Securing Tab.
e. Unplug the White Wire Connector at the top of the fuel pump.
^ DO NOT disturb the Black Wire Connector located next to the white Wire connector.
f. Carefully cut the tie-wrap securing the harnesses to the corrugated tubing.
CAUTION:
DO NOT damage the wires or the wire insulation when cutting the Tie-Wrap.
Page 3874
Page 3019
ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information
Electronic Brake Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic
Information
Classification: BR10-011
Reference: NTB10-145
Date: December 15, 2010
ABS / VDC CAN DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION
APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2005-2011 Nissan vehicles with ABS and/or VDC
SERVICE INFORMATION
When diagnosing a vehicle with an ABS or VDC / SLIP warning light on with DTCs stored in the
ABS / VDC actuator control unit, perform DTC diagnosis first.
^ Do not replace the ABS / VDC actuator control unit without being supported by the DTC
diagnosis.
^ Do not erase DTCs before performing DTC diagnosis.
^ Always fully diagnose before performing any repairs.
When DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) is the only DTC stored in the ABS / VDC actuator
control unit, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART below. This will assist in proper diagnosis results and
repairs in addition to using diagnostic information in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM).
^ If DTC U1000 is found stored in other systems, refer to NIB10-066 and the applicable ESM.
^ If other DTCs are found stored in ABS / VDC along with U1000, follow the diagnosis steps for
those DTCs in the applicable ESM.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for
repairs performed.
Service and Repair
Global Positioning System Antenna: Service and Repair
GPS ANTENNA
Removal and Installation
GPS ANTENNA
Removal 1. Remove the center console. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Center Console.
2. Remove the cluster lid D. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard /
Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Cluster LID C/Removal And Installation.
3. Remove the defroster grille. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard /
Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal
and Replacement/Instrument Panel Assembly/Removal And Installation.
4. Disconnect the GPS antenna connector. 5. Remove the GPS antenna.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 2762
Fuel Rail: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE
Removal and Installation
CAUTION: Do not remove or disassemble parts unless instructed as shown.
REMOVAL 1. Remove engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Engine Cover.
2. Release fuel pressure. Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/Fuel Pressure Check. 3. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 4. Disconnect fuel
injector harness connectors. 5. Disconnect fuel hose assembly from fuel tube (RH bank and LH
bank).
CAUTION: While hoses are disconnected, plug them to prevent fuel from draining.
- Do not separate fuel connector and fuel hose.
6. Remove fuel injectors with fuel tube assembly. 7. Remove fuel injector from fuel tube.
a. Spread open to remove clip. b. Remove fuel injector from the fuel tube by pulling straight out.
CAUTION: Be careful with remaining fuel that may leak out from fuel tube.
- Do not damage injector nozzles during removal.
- Do not bump or drop fuel injectors.
- Do not disassemble fuel injectors.
8. Remove fuel damper from each fuel tube.
INSTALLATION 1. Install fuel damper to each fuel tube.
Page 2472
18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM.
The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to
use.
19. Select Next
NOTE:
If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with
Reprogramming.
Page 887
10. Lower the fuel tank using a suitable lift jack and remove it from the vehicle to access the fuel
level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly. 11. Remove the lock ring using Tool as shown.
Tool number : - (J-46536)
12. Remove the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly. Remove and discard the fuel
level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly
O-ring.
CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm during removal.
- Avoid impacts such as dropping when handling the components.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. For installation, use a new fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly O-ring.
- Connect the quick connector as follows:
- Check the connection for any damage or foreign materials.
- Align the connector with the pipe, then insert the connector straight into the pipe until a click is
heard.
- After connecting the quick connector, make sure that the connection is secure by checking as
follows:
- Pull the tube and the connector to make sure they are securely connected.
- Visually inspect the connector to make sure the two retainer tabs are securely connected.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1. Turn the ignition switch ON but do not start engine, then
check the fuel pipes and hose connections for leaks while applying fuel pressure to the
system.
2. Start the engine and rev it above idle speed, then check that there are no fuel leaks at any of the
fuel pipe and hose connections.
Page 2779
Page 2702
CAUTION: Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly.
- Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket.
- Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling.
- Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water.
Removal 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2.
Disconnect the accelerator position sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the two upper and one
lower accelerator pedal nuts. 4. Remove the adjustable accelerator pedal assembly.
CAUTION: Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly.
- Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket.
- Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling.
- Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Inspection After Installation Check that the accelerator pedal moves smoothly within the specified range.
Non-adjustable accelerator pedal - total pedal applied stroke : 48 mm (1.89 in)
- Depress and release the accelerator pedal to check that it returns smoothly to the original
released position.
- Perform an electrical inspection of the accelerator pedal position sensor. Refer to See: Computers
and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/VIN Registration See:
Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator
Pedal Released Position Learning See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning See: Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning .
CAUTION: When the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor is disconnected,
perform "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to See: Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released
Position Learning .
Page 4945
6. Remove seat belt retractor anchor bolt and the seat belt assembly. 7. Remove center seat belt
lower anchor bolt. 8. Remove center seat belt retractor. 9. Remove center anchor bracket cover.
10. Remove push pins from center seat belt webbing sleeve. 11. Remove bolts from anchor
bracket and remove center seat belt retractor and belt assembly. 12. Remove center belt bracket
from floor. 13. Remove seat belt buckles.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Attach rear center seat belt retractor anchor bracket bolts before seat installation.
- Attach rear center seat belt retractor anchor bolt after seat installation with the seat cushion
raised.
A/F Sensor 1 Heater
Oxygen Sensor: Specifications A/F Sensor 1 Heater
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
A/F Sensor 1 Heater
Page 2342
Information Bus: Component Tests and General Diagnostics
Main Line Between TCM And DLC Circuit
MAIN LINE BETWEEN TCM AND DLC CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure
INSPECTION PROCEDURE 1. CHECK CONNECTOR 1. Turn the ignition switch OFF. 2.
Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 3. Check the following terminals and
connectors for damage, bend and loose connection (connector side and harness side). Harness connector F14
- Harness connector E5
- Harness connector E50
- Harness connector B75
- Harness connector B69
- Harness connector M40
Is the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO 2. NO - Repair the terminal and connector. 2.
CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (OPEN CIRCUIT) 1. Disconnect the following harness
connectors. A/T assembly
- Harness connectors F14 and E5
2. Check the continuity between the A/T assembly harness connector and the harness connector. Models with floor shift
- Models with column shift
Is the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO 3. NO - Repair the main line between the A/T
assembly and the harness connector F14. 3. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (OPEN CIRCUIT)
1. Disconnect the harness connectors E50 and B75. 2. Check the continuity between the harness
connectors.
Is the inspection result normal? YES - GO TO 4. NO - Repair the main line between the harness
connectors E5 and E50. 4. CHECK HARNESS CONTINUITY (OPEN CIRCUIT) 1. Disconnect the
harness connectors B69 and M40. 2. Check the continuity between the harness connectors.
Specifications
Brake Fluid: Specifications
Brake Fluid Type
Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3
Page 4900
6. Remove the screws, release the clip, and remove the spiral cable.
CAUTION: Do not disassemble spiral cable.
- Do not apply lubricant to the spiral cable.
7. Remove the spiral cable connectors.
CAUTION: With the steering linkage disconnected, the spiral cable may snap by turning the
steering wheel beyond the limited number of turns. The spiral cable can be turned
counterclockwise about 2.5 turns from the neutral position.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
- Align spiral cable correctly when installing steering wheel. Make sure that the spiral cable is in the
neutral position. The neutral position is detected by turning left 2.5 revolutions from the right end
position and ending with the knob at the top.
- If equipped with VDC, refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing
Control Unit/Description See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing
Control Unit/Special Repair Requirement See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes /
Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Adjustment Of
Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position/Description See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock
Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Adjustment Of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position/Special Repair Requirement, for
steering angle sensor adjustment.
- After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to make sure no malfunction is detected.
Refer to See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/SRS Operation
Check.
CAUTION: The spiral cable may snap due to steering operation if the cable is not installed in the correct
position.
Page 885
2. Check the fuel level on level gauge. If the fuel gauge indicates more than the level as shown (full
or almost full), drain the fuel from the fuel tank
until the fuel gauge indicates the level as shown, or less.
- If the fuel pump does not operate, use the following procedure to drain the fuel to the specified
level. a. Insert a suitable hose of less than 15 mm (0.59 in) diameter into the fuel filler pipe through
the fuel filler opening to drain the fuel from fuel
filler pipe.
b. Remove the LH rear wheel and tire. Refer to See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Rotation
.
c. Remove the fuel filler pipe shield. d. Disconnect the fuel filler hose from the fuel filler pipe and
disconnect the vent hose quick connector.
e. Insert a suitable hose into the fuel tank through the fuel filler hose to drain the fuel from the fuel
tank.
3. Release the fuel pressure from the fuel lines. Refer to See: Powertrain Management/Fuel
Delivery and Air Induction/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Fuel Pressure Check .
4. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 5. Remove the three nuts and remove fuel line pump
protector.
6. Disconnect the EVAP hose at the EVAP canister. 7. Disconnect the fuel level sensor, fuel filter,
and fuel pump assembly electrical connector and the fuel feed hose.
Page 5538
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Testing and Inspection Component Inspection
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Component Inspection
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness
connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ASCD brake switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following
conditions.
If NG, adjust ASCD brake switch installation, refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Brake
Pedal Assy/Testing and Inspection/Standard Pedal, and perform step 3 again.
STOP LAMP SWITCH 1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness
connector.
3. Check harness continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 under the following
conditions.
If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to See: Brakes and Traction Control/Brake Pedal
Assy/Testing and Inspection/Standard Pedal, and perform step 3 again.
Page 4955
13. Reprogram the radio station presets.
14. Refer to the appropriate Service Manual and perform the following as needed:
^ Power Window Initialization
^ Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
^ Throttle Valve closed Position Learning
^ Idle Air Volume Learning
^ Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position
NOTE:
You may need to inform the customer that their Automatic Drive Position will need to be reset.
Page 1968
HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS
Sample/wiring diagram -example- For detail, refer to following See: How To Read Wiring Diagrams/Description.
Description
HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS
Description
Locations
Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations
Page 2237
IN-Vehicle Sensor
Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair IN-Vehicle Sensor
IN-VEHICLE SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the lower instrument panel LH. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior
Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Lower Panel LH.
2. Remove the two screws (A) and remove the in-vehicle sensor (1).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 2527
13. Select Confirm
14. Select Diagnosis
15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete.
Page 1711
^ Check and compare your current ECM Part Number to Table A or B (as it applies) shown above.
If the part number does not match one in Table A or B, this bulletin does not apply. Go back to
ASIST for further diagnostic and repair information.
If this bulletin applies, reprogram the ECM.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You
MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential
to successfully completing this repair.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Power Distribution Module: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Diagnosis And Repair Work Flow
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
Work Flow
OVERALL SEQUENCE
DETAILED FLOW 1. GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM Get the detailed information from the
customer about the symptom (the condition and the environment when the incident/malfunction
occurred). - GO TO 2 2. CHECK DTC 1. Check DTC. 2. Perform the following procedure if DTC is
displayed. Record DTC and freeze frame data.
Page 829
Page 6081
Page 5632
1. Determine your location on the zone map. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 3. Press
and hold the (N) switch for about 8 seconds (with HomeLink universal transceiver) or the mode
switch for about 11 seconds (without
HomeLink universal transceiver). The current zone number will appear in the display.
4. Press the mode or (N) switch repeatedly until the desired zone number appears in the display.
Once the desired zone number is displayed, stop pressing the mode or (N) switch and the display
will show a compass direction after a few seconds.
NOTE: Use zone number 5 for Hawaii.
CALIBRATION PROCEDURE The compass display is equipped with an automatic correction
function. If the compass display reads "CAL" or the direction is not shown correctly, perform the
correction procedure below.
1. Press and hold the (N) switch for about 10 seconds (with HomeLink universal transceiver) or the
mode switch for about 13 seconds (without
HomeLink universal transceiver). The display will read "CAL".
2. Drive the vehicle slowly in a circle, in an open, safe place. The initial calibration is completed in
about 3 turns.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagram Information and Instructions
Connector Symbols
HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS
Connector symbols
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the
direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector.
For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements,
"Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals
Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring
diagrams.
Sample/Wiring Diagram -Example-
Page 265
Page 4896
Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair
DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
CAUTION: Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at
least 3 minutes.
1. Disconnect the harness connectors for each air bag module and seat belt pre-tensioner. 2.
Remove center console. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Console/Service
and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Center
Console.
3. Disconnect diagnosis sensor unit harness connectors. 4. Remove bolts from the diagnosis
sensor unit.
CAUTION: Do not use old bolts; replace with new bolts.
- Check diagnosis sensor unit bracket to ensure it is free of deformities, dents, cracks or rust. If it
shows any visible signs of damage, replace with new one.
- Replace diagnosis sensor unit if it has been dropped or sustained an impact.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Always follow the tightening sequence shown.
- After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer
to See: Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/SRS Operation Check.
CAUTION: The diagnosis sensor unit must always be installed with the arrow mark "[=" pointing toward the
front of the vehicle for proper operation.
ECU DISCRIMINATED NO. After replacing the diagnosis sensor unit, confirm that the diagnosis
sensor unit identification is correct for the vehicle as equipped. Refer to See: Testing and
Inspection/Scan Tool Testing and Procedures/On Board Diagnostic (OBD) System/CONSULT-III
Function (Air Bag).
Page 283
7. Select VIN Registration
8. Select Next
9. Make sure the ignition is ON with engine OFF.
10. Select Start
Page 1335
EM-7
Page 568
Disconnect the quick connector as follows: -
Hold the sides of the connector, push in tabs and pull out the tube.
- If the connector and the tube are stuck together, push and pull several times until they start to
move. Then disconnect them by pulling.
CAUTION: The quick connector can be disconnected when the tabs are completely depressed. Do not twist
the quick connector more than necessary.
- Do not use any tools to disconnect the quick connector.
- Keep the resin tube away from heat. Be especially careful when welding near the tube.
- Prevent any acid liquids such as battery electrolyte, from getting on the resin tube.
- Do not bend or twist the resin tube during connection.
- Do not remove the remaining retainer on the hard tube (or the equivalent) except when the resin
tube or the retainer is replaced.
- When the resin tube or hard tube, or the equivalent, is replaced, also replace the retainer with a
new one (white colored retainer).
- To keep the quick connector clean and to avoid damage and contamination from foreign
materials, cover the quick connector with plastic bags or suitable material as shown.
8. Remove the four bolts and remove the fuel tank shield using power tool. 9. Remove the fuel tank
strap bolts while supporting the fuel tank with a suitable lift jack.
Page 2831
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations Without Intelligent Key System
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Terminal Layout
TERMINAL LAYOUT
Service and Repair
Front Fender Liner: Service and Repair
FENDER PROTECTOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the front mudguard, if equipped. Refer to See: Spoilers, Flaps, and Air
Dams/Mud Flap/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the screws. 3. Remove the plastic clips. 4.
Remove the pushpins. 5. Remove the fender protector.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 3042
^ If there is not a match, this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to ASIST for further
diagnostic information.
3. If this bulletin applies and you have performed ECM reprogramming, the screen in Figure 2
appears when reprogramming is complete.
4. Make sure to erase DTCs from all Systems.
NOTE:
During the reprogramming, DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all
systems.
5. Test drive the vehicle and make sure it operates correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF.
^ If the Check Engine light comes ON, go back to ASIST for further diagnostic information. Refer to
the applicable Electronic Service Manual as
needed.
^ Diagnosis and repairs beyond the ECM reprogramming are not covered by this bulletin.
A/T - Special A/T Fluid Requirements
Fluid - CVT: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Special A/T Fluid Requirements
Classification: AT07-006B
Reference: NTB08-049B
Date: March 13, 2009
NISSAN; SPECIAL AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID REQUIREMENT
This bulletin has been amended to update Parts Information and Applied Vehicles. Please discard
all earlier versions.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2002 to Current Vehicles with Automatic Transmissions (Except GT-R)
SERVICE INFORMATION
If Warranty repairs are being done on a transmission listed in the chart shown in Parts Information,
the listed fluid must be used. A claim to Nissan for warranty, service contract, or goodwill repairs to
the transmissions listed below may be denied if Genuine Nissan ATF/CVT/eCVT Fluid is not used
as specified by the part number in this bulletin.
If Customer Pay service or repair of the transmissions listed below is done, the fluid type listed in
the chart shown in the Parts Information must be used. Nissan recommends the Genuine Nissan
ATF/CVT/eCVT fluid part number listed in Parts Information be used.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 2381
Oxygen Sensor: Locations
System Diagnosis
Refueling Vapor Recovery System: Testing and Inspection
ON BOARD REFUELING VAPOR RECOVERY (ORVR)
Component Inspection
REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE
With CONSULT-III 1. Remove fuel tank. Refer to See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel
Tank/Service and Repair. 2. Drain fuel from the tank as follows:
a. Remove fuel feed hose located on the fuel gauge retainer. b. Connect a spare fuel hose, one
side to fuel gauge retainer where the hose was removed and the other side to a fuel container. c.
Drain fuel using "FUEL PUMP RELAY" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode with CONSULT-III.
3. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to close as follows. Blow air into the
refueling EVAP vapor cut valve (from the end of EVAP/ORVR line hose), and check that the air
flows freely into the tank. 4. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to open as
follows.
a. Connect vacuum pump to hose end. b. Remove fuel gauge retainer with fuel gauge unit.
Always replace O-ring with new one.
c. Put fuel tank upside down. d. Apply vacuum pressure to hose end [-13.3 kPa (-100 mmHg, -3.94
inHg)] with fuel gauge retainer remaining open and check that the
pressure is applicable.
Without CONSULT-III 1. Remove fuel tank. Refer to See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Fuel
Tank/Service and Repair. 2. Drain fuel from the tank as follows:
a. Remove fuel gauge retainer. b. Drain fuel from the tank using a handy pump into a fuel
container.
3. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to close as follows. Blow air into the
refueling EVAP vapor cut valve (from the end of EVAP/ORVR line hose), and check that the air
flows freely into the tank. 4. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to open as
follows.
a. Connect vacuum pump to hose end. b. Remove fuel gauge retainer with fuel gauge unit.
Always replace O-ring with new one.
c. Put fuel tank upside down. d. Apply vacuum pressure to hose end [-13.3 kPa (-100 mmHg, -3.94
inHg)] with fuel gauge retainer remaining open and check that the
pressure is applicable.
Page 22
Page 3900
Page 6115
Page 4141
Locations
Page 2701
4. Disconnect the adjustable pedal electric motor electrical connector. 5. Disconnect the adjustable
pedal electric motor memory electrical connector, if equipped. 6. Disconnect the accelerator
position sensor electrical connector. 7. Remove the two upper and one lower accelerator pedal
nuts. 8. Remove the adjustable accelerator pedal assembly.
CAUTION: Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly.
- Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket.
- Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal adjusting mechanism.
- Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling.
- Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Inspection After Installation Check that the accelerator pedal moves smoothly within the specified ranges.
- Depress and release the accelerator pedal to check that it returns smoothly to the original
released position.
- Perform an electrical inspection of the accelerator pedal position sensor. Refer to See: Computers
and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/VIN Registration See:
Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator
Pedal Released Position Learning See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning See: Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning .
CAUTION: When the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor is disconnected,
perform "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to See: Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released
Position Learning.
NON-ADJUSTABLE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY Non-Adjustable Accelerator Pedal
Page 2718
Page 699
TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS
Page 1973
TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS
Page 2505
Service and Repair
Control Module HVAC: Service and Repair
CONTROL UNIT
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the control knobs from the front air control unit. 2. Remove the cluster lid D.
Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and
Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Cluster LID D/Removal And Installation.
3. Remove the four screws (A) securing the front air control unit (1) to cluster lid D (2). 4. Remove
the front air control unit (1).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Body - Truck Bed Storage Organizer Rusting
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-074 Date: 090807
Body - Truck Bed Storage Organizer Rusting
Classification: BT09-004
Reference: NTB09-074
Date: August 7, 2009
2004 - 2009 TITAN; RUST ON SLIDERS FOR COLLAPSIBLE STORAGE ORGANIZER
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2009 Titan (A60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
There is rust on the threads of the sliders for the truck bed collapsible storage organizer.
ACTION
Replace the sliders with the new ones listed in the parts information.
NOTE
Do Not replace the entire storage organizer for this incident, if it should occur.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
DVD Player
Page 4369
5. Make sure the targets are mounted correctly.
^ Mount the top claws first.
^ Claws must be flush against the wheel as shown in Figure 13.
^ Target must be flush against the center support as shown in Figure 14.
^ Make sure the targets are positioned with the arrow UP or level.
IMPORTANT:
Brake Booster
Vacuum Brake Booster: Service and Repair Brake Booster
Exploded View
BRAKE BOOSTER
Exploded View
With ABS/ABLS
With VDC/TCS
Removal And Installation
BRAKE BOOSTER
Removal and Installation
Page 556
3. Install the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit as follows (see Figure 5):
CAUTION:
Do not bend the float arm when handling the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit / Fuel Pump Assembly.
a. Slide the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit into the attachment slots until the two Locking Tabs snap
in place.
^ Confirm the Locking Tabs are snapped in place by trying to move the Sender Unit up and down
(it should not move).
b. Insert the Fuel Temperature Sensor into the Plastic Retaining Clip.
^ Make sure the "circular flange" of the Sensor is positioned between the Clip and the Rib.
c. Insert the two Fuel Temperature Sensor Wires into the Securing Tab.
d. Connect the White Wire Connector into the top of the Fuel Pump (see Figure 6).
e. Pull and push all connectors to make sure they are fully locked in place.
Locations
Description and Operation
Power Distribution Relay: Description and Operation
STANDARDIZED RELAY
Description
NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided
into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays.
TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS
Exploded View
Oil Cooler: Service and Repair Exploded View
OIL COOLER
Exploded View
Page 2276
- To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed
by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
- Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to
personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and
Air Bag Module, see the "SRS AIRBAG".
- Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed. SRS
wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.
Page 908
Compression Check: Testing and Inspection
COMPRESSION PRESSURE
Checking Compression Pressure
1. Warm up the engine thoroughly. Then stop the engine. 2. Release the fuel pressure. Refer to
See: Powertrain Management/Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and
General Diagnostics/Fuel Pressure Check.
CAUTION: If CONSULT-III is not used to release fuel pressure leave the fuel pump fuse
disconnected until step 7. 3. Remove the spark plug from each cylinder. Refer to See: Spark
Plug/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. 4. Connect the engine tachometer (not required
in use of CONSULT-III).
5. Install the compression tester with Tool into the spark plug hole.
Tool number : EG15050500 (J-45402)
6. With the accelerator pedal fully depressed, turn the ignition switch to "START" for cranking.
When the gauge pointer stabilizes, read the
compression pressure and engine rpm. Perform these steps to check each cylinder.
CAUTION: Always use a fully charged battery to obtain specified engine speed. If the engine speed is out of the specified range, check the battery liquid for proper gravity. Check
the engine speed again with normal battery gravity.
- If the compression pressure is below the minimum value, check the valve clearances and parts
associated with the combustion chamber (valve, valve seat, piston, piston ring, cylinder bore,
cylinder head, cylinder head gasket). After checking, measure the compression pressure again.
- If some cylinders have low compression pressure, pour a small amount of engine oil into the
spark plug hole of the cylinder to re-check it for compression.
- If the added engine oil improves the compression, the piston rings may be worn out or damaged.
Check the piston rings and replace if necessary.
- If the compression pressure remains at a low level despite the addition of engine oil, the valves
may be malfunctioning. Check the valves for damage. Replace the valve or valve seat accordingly.
- If two adjacent cylinders have respectively low compression pressure and their compression
remains low even after the addition of engine oil, the gaskets may be leaking, or a valve in adjacent
cylinders may be damaged. Inspect and repair as required.
7. Install the components in the reverse order of removal. 8. Start the engine and confirm that it
runs smoothly. 9. Perform trouble diagnosis. If DTC appears, erase it. Refer to See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Description and
Operation/CAN Communication.
Page 2245
Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-037A Date: 100519
Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement
Reference: NTB10-037A
Date: May 19, 2010
VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2005 - 2009 ARMADA AND TITAN FUEL GAUGE
INACCURACY
This bulletin has been amended. Additions were made to the Parts Information. Please discard
previous versions of this bulletin.
CAMPAIGN ID #: R1010
NHTSA #: 10V-074
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2009 Armada (TA60) 2005 - 2009 Titan (A60)
Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility.
INTRODUCTION
Nissan is conducting a voluntary recall campaign on certain MY2005-2009 Armada and Titan
vehicles to address a potential fuel gauge inaccuracy. Specifically, the issue can cause the fuel
gauge to show that the vehicle still has some fuel, typically about one quarter tank, when the fuel
tank is actually empty. To remedy this potential condition, Nissan is conducting this Voluntary
Safety Recall Campaign to replace the fuel level sending unit with a new one at no charge for parts
or labor.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number R1010 to this campaign. This number must appear on
all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle
falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service
department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient
(tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in
dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to
do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While
federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used
vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed.
Page 3040
Locations
Specifications
Ignition Timing: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Idle Speed and Ignition Timing
Specifications
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Intake Air Temperature Sensor
Page 3952
Battery: Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - Electronic Component Damage Prevention
Classification: EL09-011
Reference: NTB09-030
Date: April 6, 2009
ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNIT DAMAGE CAN RESULT FROM IMPROPER BATTERY
CONNECTION
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan
SERVICE INFORMATION
^ The vehicle 12 volt battery is an important part of the vehicle electrical system and is required to
stay connected when the engine is running.
^ To prevent damage to vehicle electronic components follow the instructions / cautions below.
IMPORTANT:
Damage to electronic components (ECM, TCM, BCM, etc.) due to improper battery connection will
not be covered under warranty.
CAUTION:
^ Make sure the ignition is OFF during battery service and replacement.
^ Do not disconnect or connect any battery cables while the ignition switch is turned ON.
^ When disconnecting a battery, always disconnect the negative cable first.
^ When connecting a battery, always connect the positive cable first.
^ Do not leave a battery cable loose. Tighten battery cables immediately after attachment.
^ If a battery cable is loose, do not operate any electrical loads. (This includes turning the ignition
ON, starting the engine, operating accessories such as
the A/C system, power seats, interior lights, exterior lights etc.).
^ When "jump starting" or "boosting" a battery - be careful. Don't accidentally reverse the polarity of
the cables.
Disclaimer
Page 5672
f. Use the new tie-wrap to secure all the wires to the black corrugated tubing (see Figure 6).
^ New tie-wrap is included with the new sender unit.
^ Make sure all wires are tied together (3 fuel level sending unit wires and 2 fuel pump wires).
^ Place the Tie-Wrap 90 mm (about 3.5 inches) from the top of the tubing.
^ Make sure the wires do not interfere with the movement of the float arm.
4. Carefully reinstall the Fuel Pump Assembly back into the vehicle in reverse of removal.
^ IMPORTANT: Use a new seal (O-Ring) when reinstalling the Fuel Pump Assembly.
^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed.
CAUTION:
DO NOT bend the Float Arm when reinstalling the Fuel Pump.
5. Confirm the Fuel Gauge operates properly.
Page 2443
Page 238
f. Enter the entire VIN using the keyboard. See Figure 13.
^ Use [CHNG] to switch between the letters and numbers keyboard screens.
g. Once the entire VIN is entered, select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 14.
h. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen and enter the entire VIN again. See Figure 15.
^ You MUST enter the VIN a second time for confirmation purposes.
Page 2485
Service Procedure
Check NATS On The Vehicle
1. Check to see if the vehicle you're working on has "ECM based" NATS V2.0 or V5.0.
a. If the vehicle has ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0, it will NOT start after you install a service
replacement ECM. So you'll have to re-register all ignition keys, including spare keys with
CONSULT-II and the purple NATS card. After you do this, proceed with step 2.
^ If you do not know how to re-register the keys, refer to the ESM for the NATS key re-registration
procedure.
b. If the vehicle has "BCM based" NATS (instead of ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0), you do NOT
have to re-register the ignition or spare keys. Proceed with step 2.
Check For ECM Data Updates in ASIST
2. In ASIST, select [CONSULT Utilities] >>> [ECM/TCM Data]. Then choose Model and Model
Year (see Figure 1).
3. Look for ECM Data Updates (listed by ECM P/Ns and vehicle configuration) in the top, center
display panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
a. If there is not updates listed for your vehicle configuration, you do NOT have to reprogram the
service replacement ECM. Proceed with step 5.
b. If there is updates listed for your vehicle configuration, see if they apply to the service
replacement ECM you're going to install. Do this by performing step 4.
4. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then confirm that your
ECM is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, -XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details"
panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
a. If your ECM is listed in the "Details" panel, you must reprogram the ECM with the latest data
update. After you do this, proceed with step 5.
CAUTION:
The 1999-2000 Frontier and 1999-2000 Pathfinder have a gray CONSULT connector AND a white
GST connector. Do NOT attempt to perform the ECM Reprogramming procedure with CONSULT-II
connected to the gray CONSULT connector. See the appropriate ESM for further details if
necessary.
b. If your ECM is NOT listed in the "Details" panel, you do NOT have to reprogram the ECM.
Proceed with step 5.
Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
5. Perform the Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning as follows:
a. Make sure the accelerator pedal is fully released.
b. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds.
c. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" for 10 seconds.
Page 2302
- Example: Circuit between ECM and the combination meter is judged normal if the customer
indicates tachometer functions normally.
- When a CAN communication system error is present, multiple control units may malfunction or go
into fail-safe mode.
- Indication of the combination meter is important to detect the root cause because it is the most
obvious to the customer, and it performs CAN communication with many units.
INSPECTION OF VEHICLE CONDITION Check whether or not "U1000" or "U1001" is indicated on "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" by
CONSULT-III.
NOTE: Root cause cannot be detected using the procedure in this section if "U1000" or "U1001" is
not indicated. Check whether the symptom is reproduced or not.
NOTE: Do not turn the ignition switch OFF or disconnect the battery cable while reproducing the error. The
error may temporarily correct itself, making it difficult to determine the root cause.
- The procedures for present errors differ from the procedures for past errors. Refer to "DETECT
THE ROOT CAUSE".
CHECK OF CAN SYSTEM TYPE (HOW TO USE CAN SYSTEM TYPE SPECIFICATION CHART)
Determine CAN system type based on vehicle equipment. Then choose the correct diagnosis
sheet.
NOTE: There are two styles for CAN system type specification charts. Depending on the number of
available system types, either style A or style B may be used.
CAN System Type Specification Chart (Style A)
NOTE: CAN system type is easily checked with the vehicle equipment identification information
shown in the chart.
For Frontal Collision
Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision: Service and Repair For Frontal Collision
COLLISION DIAGNOSIS
For Frontal Collision
Check the SRS components using the following table. After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer
to See: Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview/SRS
Operation Check.
SRS INSPECTION (FOR FRONTAL COLLISION)
Service and Repair
Condenser HVAC: Service and Repair
CONDENSER
Removal and Installation for Condenser
REMOVAL 1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Refrigeration System . 2.
Remove the radiator. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Radiator/Service
and Repair/Removal and Installation .
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the core surface of the condenser and the radiator. 3.
Disconnect the high-pressure flexible hose and the high-pressure pipe from the condenser.
CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the
entry of air.
4. Disconnect the refrigerant pressure sensor connector.
- Remove the refrigerant pressure sensor from the condenser as necessary.
5. Lift the condenser out of the mounting grommets to remove the condenser.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Description and
Operation/Refrigeration System/Component .
CAUTION: Replace the O-rings of the high-pressure pipe, refrigerant pressure sensor, and high-pressure
flexible hose with new ones, then apply compressor oil to them when installing them.
- After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
- Replace the grommets as necessary.
Page 2657
CAUTION: -
Do not over tighten the air fuel ratio A/F sensors. Doing so may cause damage to the sensor,
resulting in the MIL coming on.
Page 1787
Page 3468
Relay Control System
Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation Relay Control System
System Diagram
RELAY CONTROL SYSTEM
System Diagram
System Description
Page 1324
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1. Check the engine oil level. Refer to See: Engine
Oil/Testing and Inspection. 2. Start the engine and check for engine oil leakage. 3. Stop the engine
and wait for 10 minutes. 4. Check the engine oil level and add engine oil as required.
CAN Communication System
Information Bus: Description and Operation CAN Communication System
System Description
CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
System Description
- CAN communication is a multiplex communication system. This enables the system to transmit
and receive large quantities of data at high speed by connecting control units with two
communication lines (CAN-H and CAN-L).
- Control units on the CAN network transmit signals using the CAN communication control circuit.
They receive only necessary signals from other control units to operate various functions.
- CAN communication lines adopt twisted-pair line style (two lines twisted) for noise immunity.
System Diagram
CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
System Diagram
Each control unit passes an electric current to the termination circuits when transmitting CAN
communication signal. The termination circuits produce an electrical potential difference between
CAN-H and CAN-L. CAN communication system transmits and receives CAN communication
signals by the potential difference.
CAN Communication Control Circuit
CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
CAN Communication Control Circuit
Page 5529
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 2159
27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example).
28. Select Select
29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example).
30. Select Confirm
Page 1935
Page 6048
2. Using a suitable tool, release the pawls and remove the personal lamp lens. 3. Release the
personal lamp bulb retainers (1), then pull bulb (2) straight out to remove.
Personal lamp bulb (type B) : 12V - 6W
CONSOLE ILLUMINATION LAMP (if equipped)
Removal The console illumination lamp (1) is replaced as part of the room/map lamp assembly (2).
Refer to See: Courtesy Lamp/Service and Repair.
Arrow Indicates : Vehicle front
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Bulb Replacement 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Remove overhead console.
Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair.
3. Rotate console illumination lamp bulb (1) counterclockwise, then pull straight out away from
room/map lamp assembly (2) to remove.
Page 5808
10. Lower the fuel tank using a suitable lift jack and remove it from the vehicle to access the fuel
level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly. 11. Remove the lock ring using Tool as shown.
Tool number : - (J-46536)
12. Remove the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly. Remove and discard the fuel
level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly
O-ring.
CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm during removal.
- Avoid impacts such as dropping when handling the components.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. For installation, use a new fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly O-ring.
- Connect the quick connector as follows:
- Check the connection for any damage or foreign materials.
- Align the connector with the pipe, then insert the connector straight into the pipe until a click is
heard.
- After connecting the quick connector, make sure that the connection is secure by checking as
follows:
- Pull the tube and the connector to make sure they are securely connected.
- Visually inspect the connector to make sure the two retainer tabs are securely connected.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION 1. Turn the ignition switch ON but do not start engine, then
check the fuel pipes and hose connections for leaks while applying fuel pressure to the
system.
2. Start the engine and rev it above idle speed, then check that there are no fuel leaks at any of the
fuel pipe and hose connections.
Page 1444
Specifications
Intake Manifold: Specifications
Intake Manifold
Tighten the intake manifold bolts in numerical order as shown.
Page 3647
Locations
Page 4113
TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS
DVD Player
Engine Compartment
Page 4122
RELAY CONTROL SYSTEM
System Description
IPDM E/R controls relays based on input signals from various sensors and from request signals
received via CAN communication.
CAUTION: IPDM E/R integrated relays cannot be removed.
Recall PC049 - Inspect/Replace Front Lower Control Arm
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-071A Date: 100825
Recall PC049 - Inspect/Replace Front Lower Control Arm
Reference: NTB10-071A
Date: August 25, 2010
VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN EQUIPMENT/SERVICE PARTS SUSPENSION
LOWER LINK
This bulletin has been amended. The lower link inspection has been clarified. Please discard
previous versions of this bulletin.
CAMPAIGN ID#: PC049
NHTSA# 10E-019
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) 2004-2010 Titan (A60) 2005-2010 Frontier (D40)
2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2010 Xterra (N50)
INTRODUCTION
Nissan is conducting a voluntary safety recall campaign for suspension lower link service parts that
fit MY 2004 through 2010 Armada and Titan and MY 2005 through 2010 Xterra, Pathfinder, and
Frontier vehicles. A small number of suspension lower link service parts sold between November
25, 2009 and May 14, 2010 may have welds that are out of specification.
Applied vehicle owners will be asked to take their vehicle to the dealer if a lower link on their
vehicle was replaced between November 25, 2009 and May 14, 2010 or if they do not know
whether a lower link was replaced during that time.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
If a vehicle owner believes his or her vehicle may have received affected suspension lower link
service parts, it is the dealer's responsibility to inspect and, if necessary, replace the lower links
pursuant to the instructions on this bulletin.
Applied Vehicles with the original factory installed lower links are not subject to this service parts
recall campaign, however some 2010MY Applied Vehicles may be subject to the Suspension
Lower Link vehicles recall campaign (PC047). Please review Service Comm to confirm campaign
eligibility.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number PC049 to this campaign. This number must appear on
all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
Locations
Page 4877
ELR Function Stationary Check Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward quickly. The retractor
should lock and prevent the belt from extending further.
ALR Function Stationary Check 1. Pull out entire length of seat belt from retractor until a click is
heard. 2. Retract the belt partially. A clicking noise should be heard as the belt retracts indicating
that the retractor is in the Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) mode.
3. Grasp the seat belt and try to pull out the retractor. The belt must lock and not extend any
further. If necessary replace the retractor assembly. 4. Allow the entire length of the belt to retract
to cancel the automatic locking mode.
ELR Function Moving Check
WARNING: Perform the following test in a safe, open area clear of other vehicles and obstructions
(for example, a large, empty parking lot). Road surface must be paved and dry. DO NOT perform
the following test on wet or gravel roads or on public streets and highways. This could result in an
accident and serious personal injury. The driver and passenger must be prepared to brace
themselves in the event the retractor does not lock. 1. Fasten drivers seat belt. Buckle a passenger
into the seat for the belt that is to be tested. 2. Proceed to the designated safe area. 3. Drive the
vehicle at approximately 16 km/h (10 MPH). Notify any passengers of a pending sudden stop. The
driver and passenger must be prepared to brace themselves in the event the retractor does not
lock. Apply brakes firmly and make a very hard stop. During stop, seat belts should lock and not be
extended. If the seat belt retractor assembly does not lock, perform the retractor off-vehicle check.
SEAT BELT RETRACTOR OFF-VEHICLE CHECK 1. Remove the seat belt retractor assembly. 2.
Slowly pull out belt while tilting the retractor assembly forward from the mounted position without
twisting the retractor assembly as shown in the
illustration.
3. If the seat belt retractor does not operate within the specifications, replace the retractor
assembly.
Page 2543
d. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds, then
e. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" again for 10 seconds (see Figure 2).
f. Proceed with step 6.
Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL)
NOTE:
Make sure all electrical loads are turned OFF, including A/C, defroster, radio, lights, etc. while
performing the following procedures. Also, make sure the engine cooling fans are NOT operating
during the following procedures.
6. Perform the Idle Air Volume Learning procedure as follows:
a. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle.
b. Warm up engine and transmission to operating temperature.
c. In the [CONSULT WORK SUPPORT] mode, select [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. See Figure 3.
NOTE:
^ If IDLE AIR VOL LEARN is not shown as a SELECT WORK ITEM on CONSULT, the vehicle
does not need the procedure.
^ In this case only, this bulletin is complete, no further action is needed.
Testing and Inspection
Brake Master Cylinder: Testing and Inspection
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER
On Board Inspection
LEAK INSPECTION Check for leaks at master cylinder to brake booster attachment point, reservoir
tank, and brake tube connections.
Page 2410
^ If this column is blank (no part number listed), this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to
ASIST for further diagnostic information.
^ If a Part Number is listed, write it on the Repair Order.
B. Compare the Part Number you wrote down to the numbers in the Current ECM P/N column in
Table A or B (as it applies) shown at the beginning of this bulletin.
^ If there is a match, this bulletin applies. Continue with the reprogramming procedure.
^ If there is not a match, this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to ASIST for further
diagnostic information.
3. If this bulletin applies and you have performed ECM reprogramming, the screen in Figure 2
appears when reprogramming is complete.
NOTE:
If the screen in Figure 2 does not display (reprogramming does not complete).
4. Make sure to erase DTCs from all Systems.
NOTE:
During the reprogramming, DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all
systems.
5. Test drive the vehicle and make sure it operates correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF.
^ If the Check Engine light comes ON, go back to ASIST for further diagnostic information. Refer to
the applicable Electronic Service Manual as
needed.
^ Diagnosis and repairs beyond the ECM reprogramming are not covered by this bulletin.
Page 748
2. Mount transmitter on rim and slowly tighten transmitter nut to specification.
CAUTION: Do not over tighten transmitter nut.
Transmitter nut : 7.7 N.m (0.79 kg-m, 68 in-lb)
3. Place wheel on turntable of tire machine. Ensure that transmitter is 270 degrees from
mounting/dismounting head.
NOTE: Do not touch transmitter with mounting head. 4. Lubricate tire well, and install second side
of tire as normal. Ensure that tire does not rotate relative to rim. 5. Inflate tire and balance wheel
and tire assembly. Refer to See: Maintenance/Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Balancing
Wheels. 6. Install wheel and tire assembly in appropriate wheel position on vehicle.
NOTE: If replacing the transmitter, then transmitter wake up operation must be performed. Refer to
See: Instrument Panel, Gauges and Warning Indicators/Tire Monitoring System/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Transmitter Wake Up Operation.
7. Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor. Refer to See: Brakes and Traction
Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing
and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing Control
Unit/Description See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing
Control Unit/Special Repair Requirement See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes /
Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Adjustment Of
Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position/Description See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock
Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Adjustment Of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position/Special Repair Requirement.
Page 1883
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair
ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM
Removal and Installation
ADJUSTABLE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY Adjustable Accelerator Pedal
CAUTION: Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal adjusting mechanism.
- Before removal and installation, the accelerator and brake pedals must be in the front most
position.
This is to align the base position of the accelerator and brake pedals. Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly.
- Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket.
- Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling.
- Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water.
Removal 1. Move the accelerator and brake pedals to the frontmost position. 2. Turn the ignition
switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal. 3. Disconnect the adjustable brake pedal
cable from the adjustable brake pedal. Unlock, then pull the adjustable brake pedal cable to disconnect it from the adjustable brake pedal.
Page 1416
Variable Valve Timing Actuator Position Sensor: Service and Repair Intake Valve Timing Control
Position Sensor (RH)
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL
Intake Valve Timing Control Position Sensor (RH)
REMOVAL 1. Remove engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Cover. 2. Disconnect intake valve timing control position
sensor connector (RH).
3. Remove intake valve timing control position sensor (RH) (1) from Intake valve timing control
solenoid valve cover (RH) (3).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Replace the O-ring (2) of the intake valve timing control position sensor with a new one,
then lubricate O-ring with engine oil before installing.
Intake valve timing control position sensor bolt : 9.6 N.m (0.98 kg-m, 85 in-lb)
Page 4302
Page 3917
Removal Remove the rear axle shaft assembly. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive
Axles, Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and Repair/Rear Axle Shaft.
NOTE: It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle shaft assembly to replace the rear wheel
sensor rotor.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the old rear wheel sensor rotor.
- Do not reuse the rear axle oil seal. The rear axle oil seal must be replaced every time the rear
axle shaft assembly is removed from the rear axle shaft housing.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Ignition Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
Connector Symbols
HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS
Connector symbols
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side. Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by the
direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector.
For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply, Ground & Circuit Elements,
"Description", "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals
Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female terminals in white in wiring
diagrams.
Sample/Wiring Diagram -Example-
Page 3184
Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation System Description
METER SYSTEM
A/T OIL TEMPERATURE GAUGE : System Description
The A/T oil temperature gauge indicates the A/T fluid temperature. The TCM (transmission control
module) provides an A/T fluid temperature signal to combination meter via CAN communication
lines.
Page 2783
3. Install the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit as follows (see Figure 5):
CAUTION:
Do not bend the float arm when handling the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit / Fuel Pump Assembly.
a. Slide the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit into the attachment slots until the two Locking Tabs snap
in place.
^ Confirm the Locking Tabs are snapped in place by trying to move the Sender Unit up and down
(it should not move).
b. Insert the Fuel Temperature Sensor into the Plastic Retaining Clip.
^ Make sure the "circular flange" of the Sensor is positioned between the Clip and the Rib.
c. Insert the two Fuel Temperature Sensor Wires into the Securing Tab.
d. Connect the White Wire Connector into the top of the Fuel Pump (see Figure 6).
e. Pull and push all connectors to make sure they are fully locked in place.
Page 987
Coolant: Service and Repair
ENGINE COOLANT
Changing Engine Coolant
WARNING: To avoid being scalded, never change the coolant when the engine is hot.
- Wrap a thick cloth around the cap to carefully remove the cap. First, turn the cap a quarter of a
turn to release any built-up pressure, then push down and turn the cap all the way to remove it.
DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT 1. Turn ignition switch ON and set temperature control lever all the
way to HOT position or the highest temperature position. Wait 10 seconds and
turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Remove the engine front undercover using power tool.
3. Open the radiator drain plug at the bottom of the radiator, and remove the radiator filler cap. This
is the only step required when partially draining
the cooling system (radiator only).
CAUTION: Do not to allow the coolant to contact the drive belts.
4. When draining all of the coolant in the system for engine removal or repair, it is necessary to
drain the cylinder block. Remove the RH cylinder block drain plug to drain the right bank and the oil
cooler hose to drain the left bank as shown.
5. Remove the reservoir tank to drain the engine coolant, then clean the reservoir tank before
installing it. 6. Check the drained coolant for contaminants such as rust, corrosion or discoloration.
If the coolant is contaminated, flush the engine cooling system. Refer to "Changing Engine
Coolant".
REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT 1. Close the radiator drain plug. Install the reservoir tank, cylinder
block drain plug, and the oil cooler hose, if removed for a total system drain or for
Page 458
Page 4649
Air Duct: Service and Repair Floor Duct
DUCTS AND GRILLES
Removal and Installation
FLOOR DUCT
Removal 1. Remove the floor carpet. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Carpet/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the two clips and remove the floor duct.
System Diagram
Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation System Diagram
METER SYSTEM
A/T OIL TEMPERATURE GAUGE
A/T OIL TEMPERATURE GAUGE : System Diagram
Page 1638
e. Remove the exhaust studs from positions 2, 4, 6, 8 and remove exhaust manifold (RH).
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Surface Distortion Check the flatness of each exhaust manifold flange surface using suitable tools.
Flatness limit : 0.3 mm (0.012 in)
- If measurement exceeds the limit, replace the exhaust manifold.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
- Install new exhaust manifold gasket with the top of the triangular up mark on it facing up and its
coated face (gray side) toward the exhaust manifold side.
- Tighten the exhaust manifold nuts in the numerical order shown.
Then recheck the torque of the nuts both (A) and (B). A: Exhaust manifold LH
- B: Exhaust manifold RH
- Arrow indicates Front
- Before installing new air fuel ration A/F sensors, clean the exhaust system threads using Tool and
apply antiseize lubricant.
CAUTION: Do not over tighten the air fuel ratio A/F sensors. Doing so may cause damage to the sensor,
resulting in the MIL coming on.
Page 4365
^ Make sure the rear slide plates:
> Do not wobble (no up/down movement).
> Operate (slide) smoothly in all directions.
If there is any issue with the slide plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing
any alignments.
5. Make sure the lock pins for the front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates" are in place.
NOTE:
Lock pins should remain in place until caster sweep.
The Alignment Process
The Alignment Process
IMPORTANT:
Use only the alignment specifications listed in the appropriate Service Manual when adjusting the
alignment.
1. Make sure the vehicle is straight on the alignment rack.
^ Vehicle must be straight (in line) with the alignment rack before entering the rack as shown in
Figure 4.
^ Do not straighten the vehicle while on the rack (see Figure 5).
^ If the vehicle needs to be straightened, exit the alignment rack, straighten the vehicle and then
re-enter the rack.
^ Once the vehicle is straight on the rack, do not turn/center the steering wheel-keep the front
wheels straight.
Power Consumption Control System
Power Distribution Module: Locations Power Consumption Control System
POWER CONSUMPTION CONTROL SYSTEM
Component Parts Location
Page 293
13. Select Confirm
14. Select Diagnosis
15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete.
With Intelligent Key System
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations With Intelligent Key System
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Terminal Layout
TERMINAL LAYOUT
Page 1713
^ If this column is blank (no part number listed), this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to
ASIST for further diagnostic information.
^ If a Part Number is listed, write it on the Repair Order.
B. Compare the Part Number you wrote down to the numbers in the Current ECM P/N column in
Table A or B (as it applies) shown at the beginning of this bulletin.
^ If there is a match, this bulletin applies. Continue with the reprogramming procedure.
^ If there is not a match, this bulletin does not apply. Close C-III and refer to ASIST for further
diagnostic information.
3. If this bulletin applies and you have performed ECM reprogramming, the screen in Figure 2
appears when reprogramming is complete.
NOTE:
If the screen in Figure 2 does not display (reprogramming does not complete).
4. Make sure to erase DTCs from all Systems.
NOTE:
During the reprogramming, DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all
systems.
5. Test drive the vehicle and make sure it operates correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF.
^ If the Check Engine light comes ON, go back to ASIST for further diagnostic information. Refer to
the applicable Electronic Service Manual as
needed.
^ Diagnosis and repairs beyond the ECM reprogramming are not covered by this bulletin.
Page 2796
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the Fuel Pump Assembly from the vehicle.
^ Refer to section FL in the applicable Service Manual for removal information.
^ Make sure to follow all Service Manual warnings and cautions.
A/C - Refrigerant Leaks From Connections
A/C Coupler O-ring: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Refrigerant Leaks From Connections
Classification: HA09-003
Reference: NTB09-099
Date: September 25, 2009
A/C SYSTEM O-RING SEAL LEAKS
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan vehicles with A/C system
IF YOU CONFIRM
A refrigerant leak at a refrigerant pipe/hose joint location,
NOTE:
Follow the leak detection information in the Service Manual to determine the source of refrigerant
leaks.
ACTIONS
NOTE:
The O-ring seal is the most common cause of a refrigerant leak at an A/C joint.
1. Inspect the metal surfaces of the pipe/hose joint for damage or contamination.
NOTE:
Do not replace a refrigerant pipe, hose, or other A/C component if an o-ring seal will solve the leak
incident, if it should occur.
2. If no damage is found to the joint metal surfaces, replace the O-ring seal.
CAUTION:
^ When replacing O-ring seals, use lint-free gloves,
^ Make sure no foreign material is introduced into the system when the joint is open.
^ Apply A/C oil to the O-ring before installation.
^ After recharging the system, recheck for leaks.
PARTS INFORMATION
Reference an electronic parts catalog (FAST or equivalent) for any needed parts.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the correct coding for repairs
performed.
Page 761
CAUTION: Do not tighten at this point. This allows further tightening of side bearing adjusters. 8.
Tighten each side bearing adjusters using adjuster tool.
Tool number : - (C - 4164)
9. Adjusting backlash of drive gear and drive pinion. Refer to See: Transmission and
Drivetrain/Differential Assembly/Service and
Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD).
10. Check total preload torque. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential
Assembly/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226
(ELD).
11. Check tooth contact. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential Assembly/Service
and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226
(ELD).
12. Apply a bead of sealant to the mating surface of the carrier cover as shown.
- Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Refer to See: Specifications/Fluid Type Specifications.
CAUTION: Remove any old sealant adhering to the mating surfaces. Also remove any moisture,
oil, or foreign material adhering to the application and mating surfaces.
13. Install the carrier cover to the gear carrier. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque. Refer to
See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential
Assembly/Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226.
14. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Fill the front final drive assembly with recommended differential gear oil. Refer to See:
Maintenance/Fluids/Fluid - Differential/Service and Repair/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD).
Page 4839
Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Description and Operation Manual A/C (Type 2)
INTAKE SENSOR
System Description
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Intake Sensor
The intake sensor (1) is located on the heater and cooling unit assembly. It converts temperature of
air after if passes through the evaporator into a resistance value which is then input to the front air
control.
Automatic Air Conditioner
Heater Control Valve: Description and Operation Automatic Air Conditioner
WATER VALVE CIRCUIT
Description
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Water Valve
The water valve (1) cuts the flow of engine coolant to the heater core to allow for maximum cooling
during A/C operation. It is controlled by the front air control.
Page 5458
19. Install the seat into the body. Torque the bolts to 45 Nm (4.6 Kg-m, 33 ft-lb).
20. Re-connect the battery cables.
21. Confirm OCS operation. See the applicable Electronic Service Manual for details.
22. Re-program the radio presets.
23. Re-initialize the Automatic Sunroof as applicable. See the applicable Owner's Manual for
details.
Page 4259
Power Distribution Module: Locations Relay Control System
RELAY CONTROL SYSTEM
Component Parts Location
Page 591
2. Using a suitable tool, release the pawls and remove the personal lamp lens. 3. Release the
personal lamp bulb retainers (1), then pull bulb (2) straight out to remove.
Personal lamp bulb (type B) : 12V - 6W
CONSOLE ILLUMINATION LAMP (if equipped)
Removal The console illumination lamp (1) is replaced as part of the room/map lamp assembly (2).
Refer to See: Lighting and Horns/Courtesy Lamp/Service and Repair.
Arrow Indicates : Vehicle front
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Bulb Replacement 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Remove overhead console.
Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Headliner/Service and Repair.
3. Rotate console illumination lamp bulb (1) counterclockwise, then pull straight out away from
room/map lamp assembly (2) to remove.
Locations
Description and Operation
Power Distribution Relay: Description and Operation
STANDARDIZED RELAY
Description
NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided
into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays.
TYPE OF STANDARDIZED RELAYS
Page 385
Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info.
Technical Service Bulletin # 04-054C Date: 110406
Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info.
Classification: WT04-004C
Reference: NTB04-054C
Date: April 6, 2011
WHEEL ALIGNMENT INFORMATION
This bulletin has been amended to correct some typographical errors in SERVICE INFORMATION.
No other changes have been made. Discard all previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R
Warranty Claim Information: In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the
following item MUST be attached to the Repair Order:
^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings.
IMPORTANT:
If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or
charged back).
ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the
Service Dept.
General Information and Recommendations
SERVICE INFORMATION
^ When performing a wheel alignment it is important that you read and follow all of the instructions
supplied with your alignment equipment.
^ The information in this bulletin is not intended to be complete wheel alignment instructions.
^ Use the information in this bulletin as a supplement to the instructions for your equipment.
General Information and Recommendations
1. Four-Wheel Thrust Alignment should always be performed.
^ This type of alignment is recommended for all Nissan vehicles.
^ The four-wheel thrust process ensures that the vehicle is properly aligned, and helps ensure
proper "centering" of the steering wheel.
2. Use the right alignment machine.
^ You must use a quality alignment machine that will give accurate results when performing
alignment checks.
^ Refer to the Nissan TECH-MATE Service Equipment Catalog for recommended alignment
equipment.
^ The alignment rack itself should be capable of accepting any Nissan vehicle. The rack should be
checked to ensure that it is level.
3. Make sure the alignment machine is properly calibrated.
^ Your alignment equipment should be regularly calibrated in order to give accurate readings.
^ If any instrument that is part of the alignment machine is dropped or damaged, calibration should
be checked immediately.
^ Check with the manufacturer of your specific equipment for their recommended
service/calibration schedule.
NOTE:
In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the following item MUST be attached
to the Repair Order:
^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings.
Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption
Recovery
PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM
Programming Interruption Recovery
Classification: EC10-015
Reference: NTB10-078
Date: June 21, 2010
REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE
SERVICE INFORMATION
A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption
Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin.
While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop
(become interrupted) before it is 100% complete.
One of two messages may appear:
^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe.
^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0".
In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if
the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped.
NOTE:
ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III.
The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service
Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later.
IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING
^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery.
^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads.
^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable.
^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter.
Page 1848
Page 1534
Spark Plug: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
SPARK PLUG
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Cover. 2. Remove ignition coil. Refer to See: Powertrain
Management/Ignition System/Ignition Coil/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation.
3. Remove spark plug using suitable tool.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Do not use a wire brush for cleaning.
- If plug tip is covered with carbon, spark plug cleaner may be used.
- Checking and adjusting plug gap is not required between change intervals.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 1758
20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer.
CAUTION: During data transfer:
^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections.
^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF.
^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal.
NOTE:
^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or
^ The Error in Figure 9A displays.
a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged.
b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned
OFF (see step 3 and 4).
c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III
screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1).
Part 2
Page 5669
2. Remove the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit from the Fuel Pump Assembly as follows:
a. First, press in on the two locking tabs on the sides of the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit
b. Then, pull the unit UP and OUT of the attachment slots
^ For Type A see Figure 1
^ For Type B see Figure 2
Service and Repair
Global Positioning System Antenna: Service and Repair
GPS ANTENNA
Removal and Installation
GPS ANTENNA
Removal 1. Remove the center console. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Console/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Center Console.
2. Remove the cluster lid D. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard /
Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Cluster LID C/Removal And Installation.
3. Remove the defroster grille. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard /
Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal
and Replacement/Instrument Panel Assembly/Removal And Installation.
4. Disconnect the GPS antenna connector. 5. Remove the GPS antenna.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Recall 10V074000: Fuel Sender Replacement
Fuel Gauge Sender: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 10V074000: Fuel Sender Replacement
VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2005-2009 Nissan/Armada 2005-2009
Nissan/Titan 2005-2009 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc.
MFR'S REPORT DATE: February 26, 2010
NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V074000 N/A
NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Fuel System, Other: Storage: Fuel Gauge System
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 340000
SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2005-2009 Titan, Armada, and Infiniti QX56
vehicles. The instrument panel fuel gauge may inaccurately display that the vehicle still has some
fuel, typically about one quarter tank, when the fuel tank is empty.
CONSEQUENCE: This could cause the vehicle to run out of gas and stall on the highway, which
could cause a crash.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the fuel sender unit inside the fuel tank with a new improved sender
card. This service will be performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin on or
before March 22, 2010. Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261.
NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle
Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov.
Page 5913
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Bulb Replacement 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
2. Using a suitable tool (A), release the pawls and remove personal lamp lens (1).
CAUTION: Wrap a cloth around suitable tool (A) to protect the housing and lens (1). 3. Pull bulb (2)
straight out to remove.
Personal lamp bulb (type A) : 12V - 8W
FOOTWELL LAMP
Removal 1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Page 3735
Page 292
8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.)
9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.)
10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2).
12. Select Select.
Page 2191
Page 2875
Knock Sensor: Locations
Vehicle - Flat Towing Guideline
Towing Information: Technical Service Bulletins Vehicle - Flat Towing Guideline
Classification: GI99-001F
Reference: NTB99-020F
Date: August 8, 2008
LIMITATIONS ON FLAT TOWING OF NISSAN VEHICLES
This bulletin has been amended to apply to all current production models. Please discard all earlier
versions.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Models
APPLIED DATES: 1992-2009
SERVICE INFORMATION
This Bulletin contains important guidelines and limitations concerning towing of Nissan vehicles
with all four wheels on the ground ("flat towing").
CAUTION:
Failure to follow these guidelines can result in severe transmission or drivetrain damage. For all
towing including "emergency towing" procedures refer to the Owners Manual.
1. 4WD/AWD vehicles equipped with Automatic Transmission (including CVT):
^ DO NOT Flat Tow - doing so will damage internal transmission components.
^ DO NOT use a tow dolly - doing so will damage drivetrain components.
2. FWD vehicles equipped with Automatic Transmission (including CVT) and Altima Hybrid:
^ DO NOT Flat Tow - doing so will damage internal transmission components.
^ An appropriate vehicle tow dolly MUST be placed under the vehicle's front wheels.
^ Always follow the dolly manufacturer's recommendations when using their product.
3. RWD vehicles equipped with Automatic Transmission:
^ DO NOT Flat Tow - doing so will damage internal transmission components.
^ An appropriate vehicle tow dolly MUST be placed under the vehicle's rear wheels.
^ Always follow the dolly manufacturer's recommendations when using their product.
4. 2WD/4WD vehicles equipped with a manual transmission:
^ Always flat tow with the manual transmission in Neutral.
^ Always flat tow a manual transmission vehicle facing forward.
^ Maximum speed while flat towing: 60 MPH.
^ After towing for 500 miles, stop. Start and idle the engine with the transmission in Neutral for two
minutes - failure to do so may cause damage to the transmission.
^ For 4WD vehicles, always flat tow with the transfer case in the 2 HI position.
Page 2572
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations Without Intelligent Key System
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Terminal Layout
TERMINAL LAYOUT
Page 853
Alignment: Specifications Rear Suspension
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Wheelarch Height (Unladen*1)
Page 3185
Temperature Warning Indicator - A/T: Description and Operation Component Description
METER SYSTEM
A/T OIL TEMPERATURE GAUGE : Component Description
Locations
Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations
Page 5588
Locations
Page 58
- Never reuse drained brake fluid.
- Refill brake system with new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system. Refer to See:
Brakes and Traction Control/Brake Bleeding/Service and Repair.
Page 1287
^ Pulley should turn with some dragging
^ If it locks or has unusual resistance, replace the alternator.
Fuse Block - Junction Box (J/B)
Fuse: Locations Fuse Block - Junction Box (J/B)
FUSE BLOCK - JUNCTION BOX (J/B)
Terminal Arrangement
Page 4724
Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation Manual A/C (Type 2)
INTAKE SENSOR
System Description
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Intake Sensor
The intake sensor (1) is located on the heater and cooling unit assembly. It converts temperature of
air after if passes through the evaporator into a resistance value which is then input to the front air
control.
Page 2029
Compression Check: Testing and Inspection
COMPRESSION PRESSURE
Checking Compression Pressure
1. Warm up the engine thoroughly. Then stop the engine. 2. Release the fuel pressure. Refer to
See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics/Fuel
Pressure Check.
CAUTION: If CONSULT-III is not used to release fuel pressure leave the fuel pump fuse
disconnected until step 7. 3. Remove the spark plug from each cylinder. Refer to See: Spark
Plug/Service and Repair/Removal and Installation. 4. Connect the engine tachometer (not required
in use of CONSULT-III).
5. Install the compression tester with Tool into the spark plug hole.
Tool number : EG15050500 (J-45402)
6. With the accelerator pedal fully depressed, turn the ignition switch to "START" for cranking.
When the gauge pointer stabilizes, read the
compression pressure and engine rpm. Perform these steps to check each cylinder.
CAUTION: Always use a fully charged battery to obtain specified engine speed. If the engine speed is out of the specified range, check the battery liquid for proper gravity. Check
the engine speed again with normal battery gravity.
- If the compression pressure is below the minimum value, check the valve clearances and parts
associated with the combustion chamber (valve, valve seat, piston, piston ring, cylinder bore,
cylinder head, cylinder head gasket). After checking, measure the compression pressure again.
- If some cylinders have low compression pressure, pour a small amount of engine oil into the
spark plug hole of the cylinder to re-check it for compression.
- If the added engine oil improves the compression, the piston rings may be worn out or damaged.
Check the piston rings and replace if necessary.
- If the compression pressure remains at a low level despite the addition of engine oil, the valves
may be malfunctioning. Check the valves for damage. Replace the valve or valve seat accordingly.
- If two adjacent cylinders have respectively low compression pressure and their compression
remains low even after the addition of engine oil, the gaskets may be leaking, or a valve in adjacent
cylinders may be damaged. Inspect and repair as required.
7. Install the components in the reverse order of removal. 8. Start the engine and confirm that it
runs smoothly. 9. Perform trouble diagnosis. If DTC appears, erase it. Refer to See: Computers
and Control Systems/Description and Operation/CAN
Communication.
Page 4184
Fuse: Testing and Inspection
POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT
Fuse
- If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of malfunction before installing new fuse.
- Use fuse of specified rating. Never use fuse of more than specified rating.
- Do not partially install fuse; always insert it into fuse holder properly.
- Remove fuse for "ELECTRICAL PARTS (BAT)" if vehicle is not used for a long period of time.
Page 1186
Tighten the camshaft bracket bolts as follows:
CAUTION: After tightening the camshaft bracket bolts, be sure to wipe off excessive liquid gasket
from the parts listed below. - Mating surface of rocker cover - Mating surface of front cover - A: RH
bank - B: Exhaust side - C: LH bank - D: Intake side - Arrow Indicates Front
A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics
Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics
Classification: AT09-016A
Reference: NTB10-003A
Date: February 11, 2010
5 SPEED A/T DTC DIAGNOSES FOR P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759,
P1764, P1769, P1774
This bulletin has been amended. Additional DTCs were applied. Discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2003 - 2010 Nissan vehicles with 5-Speed A/T
APPLIED TRANSMISSION: RE5R05A ONLY
SERVICE INFORMATION
If one or more DTCs listed below are found stored in Self Diagnosis, use the REPAIR FLOW
CHART shown below to assist in diagnosis.
^ DTCs: P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
If DTC(s) not listed above is/are found stored in Self Diagnosis, this bulletin does not apply. Refer
to ASIST and the appropriate Service Manual for diagnostic procedure(s) as needed.
Page 2185
A/F Sensor 1 Heater
Oxygen Sensor: Specifications A/F Sensor 1 Heater
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
A/F Sensor 1 Heater
Page 2227
d. Press [START] on the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" screen. See Figure 4.
e. Press [START] on the "WORK SUPPORT" screen to begin the Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL)
procedure. See Figure 5.
^ The IAVL procedure will take several minutes to complete.
^ CONSULT will display "Please Wait" in the center of the screen while the IAVL procedure is in
process. See Figure 6.
Locations
Specifications
Knock Sensor: Specifications
Knock Sensor Torque ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................... 21.1 Nm, 16 ft lb
Page 4351
Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the
crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction.
Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully
counteract the effect of a highly crowned road.
Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that
slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the
left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane.
This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although
the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be.
Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition
The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure
2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road.
Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center
^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less.
^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less.
When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to
counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle
should be driven on a straight flat road.
Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle
pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This
condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side.
Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition
The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road.
Page 3883
Locations
Relay Box: Locations
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 2212
18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM.
The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to
use.
19. Select Next
NOTE:
If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with
Reprogramming.
Page 1727
Page 1258
Main Bearings Grade Table (All Journals)
Page 5567
Warning Chime - Part 3
Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Power Distribution Module: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Diagnosis And Repair Work Flow
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
Work Flow
OVERALL SEQUENCE
DETAILED FLOW 1. GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM Get the detailed information from the
customer about the symptom (the condition and the environment when the incident/malfunction
occurred). - GO TO 2 2. CHECK DTC 1. Check DTC. 2. Perform the following procedure if DTC is
displayed. Record DTC and freeze frame data.
Page 3932
HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS
Sample/wiring diagram -example- For detail, refer to following See: How To Read Wiring Diagrams/Description.
Description
HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS
Description
Page 3590
REPAIR FLOW CHART
Page 3390
2F1310/General Specification.
- While holding the flange yoke on one side, check axial play of the joint as shown. If the journal
axial play exceeds the specification, repair or replace the journal parts. Refer to See:
Specifications/Propeller Shaft 2F1310/General Specification.
- Check the propeller shaft tube surface for dents or cracks. If damage is detected, replace the
propeller shaft assembly.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. After installation, check for vibration by driving the vehicle. Refer to See: Testing and
Inspection/Propeller Shaft 2F1310.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the bolts and nuts. Always install new ones.
Propeller Shaft 2S1410
PROPELLER SHAFT
Removal and Installation
COMPONENTS
Page 1612
Temperature Sensor (Gauge): Description and Operation Component Description
METER SYSTEM
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE : Component Description
Page 6055
Hazard Warning Switch: Service and Repair
HAZARD SWITCH
Removal and Installation
Removal 1. Remove cluster lid C. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding /
Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Cluster LID D/Removal And Installation.
2. While pressing the tab, push out the hazard switch.
Installation Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 1761
27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example).
28. Select Select
29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example).
30. Select Confirm
Page 724
CONSULT-III Checking System
CONSULT-III CHECKING SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram
Page 2566
Page 6176
Quarter Window Glass: Removal and Replacement
Removal
SIDE WINDOW GLASS
Removal
1. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to See: Body and Frame/Doors, Hood and
Trunk/Doors/Front Door/Front Door Panel/Service and Repair. 2. If the window glass is to be
reused, mark the body and the glass with mating marks. 3. WARNING: When cutting the glass
from the vehicle, always wear safety glasses and heavy gloves to help prevent glass splinters from
entering your eyes or cutting your hands.
CAUTION: When the side window glass is to be reused, do not use a cutting knife or power cutting tool.
- Be careful not to scratch the glass when removing.
- Do not set or stand the glass on its edge. Small chips may develop into cracks.
Remove glass using piano wire or power cutting tool and an inflatable pump bag.
Installation
SIDE WINDOW GLASS
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
- Use a genuine NISSAN Urethane Adhesive Kit (if available) or equivalent and follow the
instructions furnished with it.
- While the urethane adhesive is curing, open a door window. This will prevent the glass from being
forced out by passenger compartment air pressure when a door is closed.
- Check gap along bottom to confirm that glass does not contact sheet metal.
Page 2137
11. Enter the VIN into C-III two times (see Figure 7).
^ Touch the C-III screen in the "VIN box" before typing.
^ Make sure to use all CAPITAL LETTERS.
^ Use the VIN from the vehicle you are working on.
12. Select Start
13. Turn the ignition OFF, and wait 10 seconds.
14. After waiting 10 seconds, turn the ignition ON.
Exploded View
Radiator Cooling Fan: Service and Repair Exploded View
ENGINE COOLING FAN
Exploded View
Service and Repair
Solar Sensor: Service and Repair
OPTICAL SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the defroster grille from the instrument panel. Refer to See: Body and
Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument
Panel/Service and Repair/Removal and Replacement/Instrument Panel Assembly/Exploded View.
2. Disconnect the optical sensor connector (2). 3. Twist the optical sensor (1) counter clockwise to
remove it from the defroster grille.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Engine Controls - DTC P0451 Stored In The ECM
Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Engine Controls - DTC P0451 Stored In The ECM
Classification: EC09-027
Reference: NTB09-121
Date: November 3, 2009
2009 TITAN AND ARMADA; DTC P0451 STORED
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2009 Titan (A60) 2009 Armada (TA60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
DTC P0451 (EVAP Control System Pressure Sensor Performance) is stored,
ACTIONS
1. Confirm this bulletin applies.
a. Check and compare your current ECM Part Number to Table A or B shown in this bulletin.
b. If that part number does not match one in Table A, this bulletin does not apply. Go back to
ASIST for further diagnostic and repair information.
2. If this bulletin applies, reprogram the ECM.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTIONS (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is
essential to successfully completing this repair.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Connect C-III to the vehicle to begin the reprogramming procedure.
Page 2303
CAN System Type Specification Chart (Style B)
NOTE: CAN system type is easily checked with the vehicle equipment identification information
shown in the chart.
Page 270
Antitheft System - NATS Security VBC Logic
Body Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Antitheft System - NATS Security VBC Logic
Classification: EL10-028
Reference: NTB10-106
Date: September 10, 2010
NATS SECURITY - VBC LOGIC
APPLIED VEHICLE: 2009 - 2011 All Nissan with NATS / Immobilizer System
SERVICE INFORMATION
All model year 2009 - 2011 Nissan vehicles equipped with NATS/Immobilizer system have the new
VBC (Validate Before Crank) starter relay logic.
VBC (Validate Before Crank) Logic:
^ The BCM will make sure that a valid (registered) key is being used before engaging the starter
relay. If the key is not authenticated the starter will not
operate.
^ If the engine cranks, the issue is not related to NATS. Do not replace NATS components (BCM,
I-Key, FOB Reader or RF Receiver). Refer to ASIST
for further diagnostic information as needed.
Page 5521
CAUTION:
Make sure the rail stops are installed before releasing the vehicle.
Page 2241
Page 1757
18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM.
The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to
use.
19. Select Next
NOTE:
If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with
Reprogramming.
Page 4075
Power Distribution Module: Component Tests and General Diagnostics
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
Diagnosis Procedure
1. CHECK FUSES AND FUSIBLE LINK Check that the following IPDM E/R fuses or fusible link are
not blown.
Is the fuse blown? YES - Replace the blown fuse or fusible link after repairing the affected circuit.
NO - GO TO 2 2. CHECK BATTERY POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect IPDM E/R. 3. Check voltage between IPDM E/R harness
connectors and ground.
Is the measurement value normal? YES - GO TO 3 NO - Repair or replace harness. 3. CHECK
GROUND CIRCUIT 1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
Page 1726
Locations
Page 143
Locations
Page 3099
Page 607
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair
ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM
Removal and Installation
ADJUSTABLE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY Adjustable Accelerator Pedal
CAUTION: Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal adjusting mechanism.
- Before removal and installation, the accelerator and brake pedals must be in the front most
position.
This is to align the base position of the accelerator and brake pedals. Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly.
- Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket.
- Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling.
- Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water.
Removal 1. Move the accelerator and brake pedals to the frontmost position. 2. Turn the ignition
switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal. 3. Disconnect the adjustable brake pedal
cable from the adjustable brake pedal. Unlock, then pull the adjustable brake pedal cable to disconnect it from the adjustable brake pedal.
Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve (LH)
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Service and Repair Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve
(LH)
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL
Intake Valve Timing Control Solenoid Valve (LH)
REMOVAL 1. Remove engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Service and
Repair/Removal and Replacement/Engine Cover. 2. Remove air duct and resonator assembly.
Refer to See: Tune-up and Engine Performance Checks/Air Cleaner Housing/Service and
Repair/Removal and Installation.
3. Remove drive belt. Refer to See: Drive Belts, Mounts, Brackets and Accessories/Drive
Belt/Service and Repair. 4. Disconnect Intake valve timing control intake valve timing control
solenoid valve connector (LH).
5. Remove Intake valve timing control solenoid valve (LH) (2) from Intake valve timing control
solenoid valve cover (LH) (1).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Replace the O-ring (3) of the Intake valve timing control solenoid valve with a new one,
then lubricate O-ring with engine oil before installing.
Intake valve timing control solenoid valve bolt : 9.6 N.m (0.98 kg-m, 85 in-lb)
Page 319
Page 6171
1. Raise the glass to the top position. 2. While pressing and holding the reset switch, lower the
glass to the bottom position. 3. Release the reset switch. Verify that the reset switch returns to the
original position, if not, pull the switch using suitable tool. 4. Raise the glass to the top position.
CAUTION: Do not operate the glass automatically to raise the glass to the top position.
Page 2599
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations
Page 50
Page 1126
Tires: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions
Classification: WT10-005
Reference: NTB10-114
Date: September 27, 2010
INFLATING TIRES EQUIPPED WITH TPMS
APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan with Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
SERVICE INFORMATION
Improper use of tire inflator tools can break the stem of a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensor.
NOTE:
The type of stem breakage shown in Figure 1 is not considered a warrantable repair.
Please refer to the following examples of recommended and not recommended tire pressure filling
tools.
Not Recommended tire inflator tools.
Page 4218
IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) - Part 2
Page 2446
Attachment General Procedure
Page 317
Page 114
Consult-III Checking System
Standardized Relay
STANDARDIZED RELAY
Description
NORMAL OPEN, NORMAL CLOSED AND MIXED TYPE RELAYS Relays can mainly be divided
into three types: normal open, normal closed and mixed type relays.
Page 1235
Use Undersize Bearing Usage Guide Use undersize (US) bearing when the oil clearance with standard size main bearing is not within
specification.
- When using undersize (US) bearing, measure the inside diameter of the bearing installed and
grind the journal until the oil clearance falls within specification.
Bearing undersize table
CAUTION: Do not damage fillet R when grinding crankshaft journal in order to use undersized
bearing (All journals).
Fillet R : 1.5 - 1.7 mm (0.059 - 0.067 in)
Page 1790
Page 3248
11. Remove bolts (A), (B) and (C) from control valve with TCM.
- Arrow Indicate Front
12. Remove control valve with TCM from transmission case.
CAUTION: When removing, be careful with the manual valve notch and manual plate height.
Remove it vertically.
13. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM. 14. Remove
bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2.
15. Remove O-ring from A/T assembly harness connector.
Page 5817
Shift Indicator: Description and Operation System Description
METER SYSTEM
SHIFT POSITION INDICATOR : System Description
The TCM receives A/T indicator signals from the park/neutral position (PNP) switch. The TCM then
sends A/T position indicator signals to the combination meter via CAN communication lines. The
combination meter indicates the received shift position.
Service and Repair
Steering Angle Sensor: Service and Repair
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove spiral cable. Refer to See: Restraint Systems/Air Bag Systems/Clockspring
Assembly / Spiral Cable/Service and Repair. 2. Remove the screws and remove the steering angle
sensor.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: After installation of spiral cable, adjust steering angle sensor. Refer to See: Brakes and
Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming
and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing Control Unit/Description See: Brakes and
Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming
and Relearning/Additional Service When Replacing Control Unit/Special Repair Requirement See:
Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Adjustment Of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral
Position/Description See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Adjustment Of Steering Angle
Sensor Neutral Position/Special Repair Requirement.
Page 4329
System Diagram
Oil Pressure Gauge: Description and Operation System Diagram
METER SYSTEM
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE GAUGE : System Diagram
Page 2267
CAN System - Part 2
Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures
Technical Service Bulletin # 00-052C Date: 040416
Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures
Classification: EC00-007C
Reference: NTB00-052C
Date: April 16, 2004
ECM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES
ATTENTION:
THIS BULLETIN HAS BEEN REVISED.
^ The Service Procedures for replacing an ECM on an Applied vehicle were revised.
^ Please use this bulletin NTB00-052c for complete information.
^ Discard all previously distributed copies of NTB00-052.
APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All 2000 and later 1999 Frontier (D22) 1999 Quest (V41) 1999 Pathfinder
(R50) from VIN JN8AR07**XW350101
IF YOU CONFIRM:
The Electronic Control Module (ECM) needs to be replaced on a 2000 MY and later vehicle, or an
Applied 1999 MY vehicle (see above).
ACTIONS:
^ Re-register all customer keys if the vehicle has ECM based NATS (see step 1).
^ Check ASIST for any new updates for the new ECM you're installing (see steps 2 - 4).
^ Perform the "ACCELERATOR PEDAL & THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING"
procedure (see step 5).
^ After installing the new ECM, perform the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARNING" procedure (when
applicable) using CONSULT-II. See step 6.
^ For 2005 and later vehicles, enter the vehicle VIN into the new ECM (see step 7).
CAUTION:
Failure to perform all the work steps in the specified order can cause poor engine running, MIL
'ON', or vehicle emission test rejection.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
Page 3650
- Refill brake system with new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system. Refer to See: Brake
Bleeding/Service and Repair.
Page 3163
Tighten the oil pan (lower) bolts in numerical order as shown.
Page 3322
2. Install differential lock position switch on gear carrier and tighten differential lock position switch
bolts with the specified torque. Refer to See:
Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD).
3. Install side bearing adjusters into gear carrier.
4. Apply gear oil to side bearings. Install differential case assembly with side bearing outer races
into gear carrier. 5. Apply multi-purpose grease to differential lock position connector.
CAUTION: Do not reuse sensor connector. 6. Connect differential lock solenoid harness (B) and
differential lock position switch connector (A). Then install it to gear carrier, tighten to the
specified torque. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Overhaul/Rear Final Drive M226 (ELD).
Arrow Indicate Front 7. Align paint matching mark on side bearing caps with that on gear carrier
and install side bearing caps on gear carrier without tightening to
specification.
Page 3164
Fluid Pan: Service and Repair
OIL PAN
Oil Pan
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal 1. Drain A/T fluid. Refer to See: Fluid - A/T/Service and Repair/Changing A/T Fluid.
2. Remove oil pan clips (1). White Arrow Indicates Vehicle front
- Black Arrow Indicates Oil pan bolts
- Drain plug (3)
3. Remove oil pan (2). 4. Remove oil pan gasket. 5. Check for foreign materials in oil pan to help
determine cause of malfunction. If the A/T fluid is very dark, has some burned smell, or contains
foreign particles then friction material (clutches, band) may need replacement. A tacky film that will
not wipe clean indicates varnish build up. Varnish can cause valves, servo, and clutches to stick
and can inhibit pump pressure.
CAUTION: If friction material is detected, flush the transmission cooler after repair. Refer to See:
Transmission Cooler/Service and Repair/A/T Fluid Cooler Cleaning.
6. Remove magnets from oil pan.
Installation 1. Install the oil pan magnets as shown.
2. Install the oil pan (2) new oil pan gasket.
Page 841
5. Make sure the targets are mounted correctly.
^ Mount the top claws first.
^ Claws must be flush against the wheel as shown in Figure 13.
^ Target must be flush against the center support as shown in Figure 14.
^ Make sure the targets are positioned with the arrow UP or level.
IMPORTANT:
A/C - Refrigerant Leaks From Connections
A/C Coupler O-ring: Customer Interest A/C - Refrigerant Leaks From Connections
Classification: HA09-003
Reference: NTB09-099
Date: September 25, 2009
A/C SYSTEM O-RING SEAL LEAKS
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan vehicles with A/C system
IF YOU CONFIRM
A refrigerant leak at a refrigerant pipe/hose joint location,
NOTE:
Follow the leak detection information in the Service Manual to determine the source of refrigerant
leaks.
ACTIONS
NOTE:
The O-ring seal is the most common cause of a refrigerant leak at an A/C joint.
1. Inspect the metal surfaces of the pipe/hose joint for damage or contamination.
NOTE:
Do not replace a refrigerant pipe, hose, or other A/C component if an o-ring seal will solve the leak
incident, if it should occur.
2. If no damage is found to the joint metal surfaces, replace the O-ring seal.
CAUTION:
^ When replacing O-ring seals, use lint-free gloves,
^ Make sure no foreign material is introduced into the system when the joint is open.
^ Apply A/C oil to the O-ring before installation.
^ After recharging the system, recheck for leaks.
PARTS INFORMATION
Reference an electronic parts catalog (FAST or equivalent) for any needed parts.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the correct coding for repairs
performed.
Page 1857
Main Relay (Computer/Fuel System): Locations Without Intelligent Key System
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
Terminal Layout
TERMINAL LAYOUT
Specifications
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Specifications
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Mass Air Flow Sensor
Page 4513
Control Arm: Service and Repair Lower Link
LOWER LINK
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove the wheel and tire using power tool. 2. Remove lower shock absorber bolt.
3. Remove stabilizer bar connecting rod lower nut using power tool, then separate connecting rod
from lower link. Refer to See: Stabilizer
Bar/Service and Repair .
4. Remove drive shaft, if equipped. Refer to See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Drive Axles,
Bearings and Joints/Axle Shaft Assembly/Service and
Repair/Front Axle Shaft .
5. Remove pinch bolt from steering knuckle using power tool, then separate lower link ball joint
from steering knuckle. 6. Remove lower link bolts (1) and nuts, then the lower link (2).
NOTE: Some vehicles may be equipped with straight (non-adjustable) lower link bolts and
washers. In order to adjust camber and caster on these vehicles, first replace the lower link bolts
and washers with adjustable (cam ) bolts and washers.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Lower Link Check for deformation and cracks. Replace if necessary.
Lower Link Bushing Check for distortion and damage. Replace if necessary.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Tighten all nuts and bolts to specification. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Front Suspension .
- When installing wheel and tire, refer to See: Wheels and Tires/Service and Repair/Rotation.
- After installation, check that the front wheel alignment is within specification. Refer to See:
Alignment/Service and Repair .
Page 4751
Control Assembly: Description and Operation Manual A/C (Type 1)
Control System Diagram
MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
Control System Diagram
CONTROL SYSTEM The control system consists of input sensors, switches, the front air control
(microcomputer) and outputs. The relationship of these components is shown in the figure below:
Control System Description
MANUAL AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
Control System Description
CONTROL OPERATION Front air control
Page 4109
SWITCH POSITIONS Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal"
condition. A vehicle is in the "normal" condition when: ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Locations
Page 4860
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
Removal and Installation for Refrigerant Pressure Sensor
REMOVAL 1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to See: Service and Repair/Refrigeration System .
2. Disconnect the refrigerant pressure sensor electrical connector and remove the refrigerant
pressure sensor from the condenser.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the condenser fins.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to See: Description and
Operation/Refrigeration System/Component .
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the condenser fins.
- Replace the O-ring of the refrigerant pressure sensor with a new one, then apply compressor oil
to it when installing it.
- After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
Intake Valve Timing Control Position Sensor (LH)
Variable Valve Timing Actuator Position Sensor: Service and Repair Intake Valve Timing Control
Position Sensor (LH)
INTAKE VALVE TIMING CONTROL
Intake Valve Timing Control Position Sensor (LH)
REMOVAL 1. Remove engine room cover using power tool. Refer to See: Engine, Cooling and
Exhaust/Engine/Service and Repair/Removal and
Replacement/Engine Cover.
2. Remove air duct and resonator assembly. Refer to See: Fuel Delivery and Air Induction/Air
Cleaner Housing/Service and Repair/Removal and
Installation.
3. Disconnect intake valve timing control position sensor connector (LH).
4. Remove intake valve timing control position sensor (LH) (1) from Intake valve timing control
solenoid valve cover (LH) (3).
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Replace the O-ring (2) of the intake valve timing control position sensor with a new one,
then lubricate O-ring with engine oil before installing.
Intake valve timing control position sensor bolt : 9.6 N.m (0.98 kg-m, 85 in-lb)
Page 1546
- G: No. 6 cylinder
- H: No. 8 cylinder
- J: No. 1 cylinder
- K: No. 3 cylinder
- L: No. 5 cylinder
- M: No. 7 cylinder
11. If out of specifications, adjust as necessary.
ADJUSTMENT
NOTE: Perform adjustment depending on the selected head thickness of the valve lifter.
- The specified valve lifter thickness is the dimension at normal temperatures. Ignore dimensional
differences caused by temperature. Use the specifications for hot engine condition to adjust.
1. Remove the camshaft. Refer to See: Camshaft, Lifters and Push Rods/Camshaft/Service and
Repair/Removal And Installation. 2. Remove the valve lifters at the locations that are out of
specification.
3. Measure the center thickness of the removed valve lifters using suitable tool. 4. Use the equation
below to calculate the valve lifter thickness for replacement. Valve lifter thickness calculation:
Thickness of replacement valve lifter = t1+ (C1 - C2) t1 = Thickness of removed valve lifter C1 =
Measured valve clearance C2= Standard valve clearance:
Locations
Lighting - Exterior Lamp Fogging Inspection
Tail Lamp: Customer Interest Lighting - Exterior Lamp Fogging Inspection
Classification: EL03-030E
Reference: NTB03-074E
Date: January 4, 2010
EXTERIOR LAMP FOGGING
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles and Service Procedure sections have been
revised. Please discard all previous versions.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2001-2010 Nissan, All Models
SERVICE INFORMATION
Occasionally customers may notice water vapor or fog in the exterior lamps. This is generally NOT
due to a defect.
The following information, illustrations, and flow chart are provided to help you in determining if an
incident for water/condensation in the lamps is normal or not.
All current exterior lamp assemblies are vented to the atmosphere (not sealed).
^ This is necessary to allow for expansion and contraction of air from temperature "variations"
(warmer or colder) without damage to the lamp.
^ Moisture in the air sometimes "travels" into and out of the lamp assembly through these vents.
^ Certain environmental conditions may cause moisture to condense.
^ The fogging/cloudiness should disappear over time when the lamp is in a dry environment.
Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the exterior lights based on environmental conditions
or sudden temperature changes (such as in a car wash). This is normal. See Figure 1.
NOTE:
This condensation can appear anywhere on the outer lens, typically at its coldest location.
Page 3054
21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete.
NOTE:
If you can't print the above screen:
a. Select the Print icon.
b. Select Save.
c. Select OK.
A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC.
NOTE:
If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in
the following file location:
At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start.
Page 3066
Page 2395
Locations
Variable Valve Timing Actuator Position Sensor: Locations
Page 3895
- Never reuse drained brake fluid.
- Refill brake system with new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system. Refer to See: Brake
Bleeding/Service and Repair.
Exploded View
Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Exploded View
EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST
Exploded View
Page 3862
Disc Rotor Inner Diameter Inspection -
Check inner diameter inside drum area of disc rotor.
Other Inspections Check shoe sliding surface on back plate for excessive wear and damage.
- Check anti-rattle pins for excessive wear and corrosion.
- Check return springs for sagging.
- Check adjuster for rough operation.
- When disassembling adjuster, apply PBC (Poly Butyl Cuprysil) grease or equivalent to the
threads.
- Check either visually or with a vernier caliper to see if there is any excessive wear, cracks, or
damage inside drum area of disc rotor.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Apply brake grease to the specified points during assembly.
- Assemble adjuster so that threaded part expands when rotating it in the direction shown by the
arrow.
- Shorten adjuster by rotating it.